BRAVO & BRAVA
•
1995 to 2000 (N to W registration) 4-cyl Petrol
>
Haynes Service and Repair Manual
i
Includes Roadside Repairs and MOT Test Checks
FIAT B r a v o & B r a v a
Service and Repair Manual
AK Legg
LAEMIMI,
Spencer Drayton & RM Jex
Models covered
(3572
FIAT Bravo and Brava models with 4-cylinder petrol engines, including special/limited editions
1.2 litre (1242 cc), 1.4 litre (1370 cc), 1.6 litre (1581 cc) and 1.8 litre (1747 cc)
Covers
major
mechanical
Does not cover
features
of 1.6 and
2.0 litre (HGT) models,
1.8 litre Marea/Weekend
or Diesel
engine
© Haynes Publishing 2000
A book in the Haynes Service and Repair Manual Series
ABODE
FGHU
KLMNO
PQ
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted
in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording or by any information storage or retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the copyright holder.
ISBN 1 85960 572 9
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.
models
versions
Printed in the USA
Haynes Publishing
Sparkford, Yeovil, Somerset BA22 7JJ, England
Haynes N o r t h A m e r i c a , Inc
861 Lawrence Drive, Newbury Park, California 91320, USA
Editions Haynes
4, Rue de I'Abreuvoir
92415 COURBEVOIE CEDEX, France
Haynes Publishing Nordiska A B
Box 1504, 751 45 UPPSALA, Sweden
336)
Contents
LIVING WITH YOUR FIAT BRAVO/BRAVA
Introduction
Page
0«4
S a f e t y first!
Page
0«5
Introduction
Page
0«6
If y o u r c a r w o n ' t s t a r t
Page
0*6
J u m p starting
Page
0«7
Wheel changing
Page
0«8
Identifying leaks
Page
0*9
Towing
Page
0*9
Introduction
Page
0«10
Underbonnet check points
Page
0*10
E n g i n e oil level
Page
0*12
C o o l a n t level
Page
0*12
B r a k e a n d c l u t c h f l u i d level
Page
0«13
P o w e r s t e e r i n g f l u i d level
Page
0»13
Tyre condition and pressure
Page
0*14
Battery
Page
0«15
Bulbs and fuses
Page
0»15
S c r e e n w a s h e r f l u i d level
Page
0*16
Wiper blades
Page
0*16
Lubricants and fluids
Page
0»17
Tyre pressures
Page
0»17
Servicing specifications
Page
1*2
Maintenance schedule
Page
1»3
Maintenance procedures
Page
1*7
Roadside repairs
Weekly checks
MAINTENANCE
Routine maintenance and servicing
Contents
REPAIRS & OVERHAUL
Engine and associated systems
1.2 litre e n g i n e i n - c a r r e p a i r p r o c e d u r e s
Page
2A»1
1.4 litre e n g i n e i n - c a r r e p a i r p r o c e d u r e s
Page
2B»1
1.6 litre e n g i n e i n - c a r r e p a i r p r o c e d u r e s
Page
2 0 1
1.8 litre e n g i n e i n - c a r r e p a i r p r o c e d u r e s
Page
2D»1
Engine removal and overhaul procedures
Page
2E»1
Cooling, heating a n d ventilation systems
Page
3«1
Fuel s y s t e m - s i n g l e - p o i n t i n j e c t i o n
Page
4A»1
Fuel s y s t e m - m u l t i - p o i n t i n j e c t i o n
Page
4B«1
Exhaust a n d emission control systems
Page
4 0 1
Starting and charging systems
Page
5A»1
Ignition s y s t e m
Page
5B»1
Clutch
Page
6»1
Manual transmission
Page
7A»1
Automatic transmission
Page
7B»1
Driveshafts
Page
8*1
Transmission
Brakes and suspension
Braking system
Page
9»1
Suspension and steering
Page
10*1
Body equipment
B o d y w o r k and fittings
Page
11»1
B o d y electrical s y s t e m s
Page
12»1
Wiring diagrams
Page 12*23
REFERENCE
Dimensions and weights
Page
REF»1
Conversion factors
Page
REF»2
Buying spare parts
Page
REF»3
Vehicle identification numbers
Page
REF»4
Jacking a n d vehicle support
Page
REF»5
Disconnecting the battery
Page
REF»6
General repair p r o c e d u r e s
Page
REF»7
Tools a n d w o r k i n g facilities
Page
REF»8
M O T test checks
Page REF»10
Fault f i n d i n g
Page REF»14
Glossary of technical terms
Page REF»24
Index
Page REF»29
o.4 Introduction
The 3-door FIAT Bravo and 5-door Brava models were introduced at
the end of 1995, as part of a new range of FIAT models which began
with the successful Punto a year earlier. The elegant all-new design
won the coveted Car of the Year award in 1996.
The engines are all fuel-injected, in-line, multi-valve four-cylinder
units of 1370 cc, 1581 cc or 1747 cc displacement, and all feature a
comprehensive engine management system with extensive emission
control equipment. In early 1999, the range received a minor facelift,
and the 1370 cc 12-valve engine was replaced by the 1242 cc 16-valve
engine from the FIAT Punto.
The 3- and 5 - d o o r bodyshells are extensively galvanised and
particularly rigid, and offer spacious a c c o m m o d a t i o n . The cars have
many crash safety measures, such as a driver's airbag, side impact
bars, anti-submarine seats, and front seat belt pre-tensioners.
Transmissions are either 5-speed manual, or 4 - s p e e d automatic
with c o m p u t e r c o n t r o l . The a u t o m a t i c transmission features m o d e
The Fiat Bravo/Brava Team
Haynes manuals are p r o d u c e d by d e d i c a t e d a n d
e n t h u s i a s t i c p e o p l e w o r k i n g in c l o s e c o - o p e r a t i o n . T h e
t e a m r e s p o n s i b l e f o r t h e c r e a t i o n of t h i s b o o k i n c l u d e d :
AK Legg
LAE M I M I
Spencer Drayton
RM Jex
Page Make-up
Steve Churchill
James Robertson
Workshop manager
Photo Scans
Cover illustration & Line Art
Wiring diagrams
A high level of standard equipment, and a wide range of optional
equipment, is available within the range to suit virtually all tastes. All
models have a driver's airbag, tinted glass, high-level brake light and
central l o c k i n g , with several featuring electric w i n d o w s , electric
sunroof and alloy wheels.
Provided that regular servicing is carried out in accordance with the
m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s , the FIAT Bravo and Brava will
provide reliable and e c o n o m i c a l family m o t o r i n g . The engine
compartment is relatively spacious, and most of the items requiring
frequent attention are easily accessible.
FIAT Brava 1.8 ELX
FIAT Bravo 1.4 SX
Authors
control selection, allowing the driver to alter the transmission
characteristics to suit normal, sport or winter driving requirements.
Braking is by discs at the front, and d r u m s at the rear, with the
handbrake acting on the rear d r u m s . A n t i - l o c k braking (ABS) is
available as an option. The suspension is conventional, with struts and
wishbones at the front, and a torsion beam rear axle. Power-assisted
rack and pinion steering is standard on all models.
Paul Buckland
John Martin
Roger Healing
Steve Tanswell
W e hope the b o o k will help you to get the m a x i m u m
e n j o y m e n t f r o m your car. By carrying out routine
maintenance as described you will ensure your car's
reliability a n d p r e s e r v e its resale value.
Your FIAT Bravo/Brava manual
The aim of this manual is to help you get the best value from your
vehicle. It can do so in several ways. It can help you decide what work
must be done (even should you choose to get it done by a garage). It
will also provide information on routine maintenance and servicing, and
give a logical course of action and diagnosis w h e n r a n d o m faults
occur. However, it is hoped that you will use the manual by tackling the
work yourself. On simpler jobs it may even be quicker than booking the
car into a garage and going there twice, to leave and collect it. Perhaps
most important, a lot of money can be saved by avoiding the costs a
garage must charge to cover its labour and overheads.
The manual has drawings and descriptions to show the function of
the various components so that their layout can be understood. Tasks
are described and p h o t o g r a p h e d in a clear s t e p - b y - s t e p sequence.
The illustrations are numbered by the Section number and paragraph
number to which they relate - if there is more than one illustration per
paragraph, the sequence is denoted alphabetically.
References to the 'left' or 'right' of the vehicle are in the sense of a
person in the driver's seat, facing forwards.
Acknowledgements
Thanks are due to Champion Spark Plug, who supplied the illustrations
showing spark plug conditions, and to Duckhams Oils, who provided
lubrication data. Thanks are also due to Draper Tools Limited, w h o
p r o v i d e d s o m e of the w o r k s h o p tools, and t o all t h o s e people at
Sparkford who helped in the production of this manual.
W e t a k e g r e a t p r i d e in t h e a c c u r a c y of i n f o r m a t i o n g i v e n in t h i s
manual, but vehicle manufacturers make alterations and design
c h a n g e s d u r i n g t h e p r o d u c t i o n run of a p a r t i c u l a r vehicle of w h i c h
t h e y d o n o t i n f o r m us. No liability c a n be a c c e p t e d by t h e a u t h o r s
o r p u b l i s h e r s f o r loss, d a m a g e o r injury c a u s e d by any e r r o r s in, or
omissions f r o m the information given.
Safety first! 0.5
Working on your car can be dangerous.
This page shows just some of the potential
risks and hazards, with the aim of creating a
safety-conscious attitude.
General hazards
Scalding
• Don't remove the radiator or expansion
tank cap while the engine is hot.
• Engine oil, automatic transmission fluid or
power steering fluid may also be dangerously
hot if the engine has recently been running.
Burning
• Beware of burns from the exhaust system
and from any part of the engine. Brake discs
and drums can also be extremely hot
immediately after use.
Crushing
• When working under or near
a raised vehicle
always
supplement the
jack with axle
stands, or use
drive-on
ramps.
Never
• Mains voltage is also dangerous. Make
sure that any mains-operated equipment is
correctly earthed. Mains power points should
be protected by a residual current device
(RCD) circuit breaker.
Fume or gas intoxication
• Exhaust fumes are
poisonous; they often
contain carbon
monoxide, which is
rapidly fatal if inhaled.
Never run the
engine in a
confined space
such as a garage
with the doors shut.
• Fuel vapour is also
poisonous, as are the vapours from some
cleaning solvents and paint thinners.
Poisonous or irritant substances
• Avoid skin contact with battery acid and
with any fuel, fluid or lubricant, especially
antifreeze, brake hydraulic fluid and Diesel
fuel. Don't syphon them by mouth. If such a
substance is swallowed or gets into the eyes,
seek medical advice.
venture
under a car which
is only supported
by a jack.
• Take care if loosening or tightening hightorque nuts when the vehicle is on stands.
Initial loosening and final tightening should be
done with the wheels on the ground.
• Prolonged contact with used engine oil can
cause skin cancer. Wear gloves or use a
barrier cream if necessary. Change out of oilsoaked clothes and do not keep oily rags in
your pocket.
• Air conditioning refrigerant forms a
poisonous gas if exposed to a naked flame
(including a cigarette). It can also cause skin
burns on contact.
Fire
Asbestos
• Fuel is highly flammable; fuel vapour is
explosive.
• Don't let fuel spill onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke or allow naked lights
(including pilot lights) anywhere near a
vehicle being worked on. Also beware of
creating sparks
(electrically or by use of tools).
• Fuel vapour is heavier than air, so don't
work on the fuel system with the vehicle over
an inspection pit.
• Another cause of fire is an electrical
overload or short-circuit. Take care when
repairing or modifying the vehicle wiring.
• Keep a fire extinguisher handy, of a type
suitable for use on fuel and electrical fires.
• Asbestos dust can cause cancer if inhaled
or swallowed. Asbestos may be found in
gaskets and in brake and clutch linings.
When dealing with such components it is
safest to assume that they contain asbestos.
=
Electric shock
• Ignition HT
voltage can be
dangerous,
especially to
people with heart
problems or a
pacemaker. Don't
work on or near the
ignition system with
the engine running or
the ignition switched on
Remember...
DO
• Do use eye protection when using power
tools, and when working under the vehicle.
• Do wear gloves or use barrier cream to
protect your hands when necessary.
• Do get someone to check periodically
that all is well when working alone on the
vehicle.
• Do keep loose clothing and long hair well
out of the way of moving mechanical parts.
• Do remove rings, wristwatch etc, before
working on the vehicle - especially the
electrical system.
• Do ensure that any lifting or jacking
equipment has a safe working load rating
adequate for the job.
Special hazards
Hydrofluoric acid
• This extremely corrosive acid is formed
when certain types of synthetic rubber, found
in some O-rings, oil seals, fuel hoses etc, are
exposed to temperatures above 400°C. The
rubber changes into a charred or sticky
substance containing the acid. Once formed,
the acid remains dangerous for years. If it
gets onto the skin, it may be necessary to
amputate the limb concerned.
• When dealing with a vehicle which has
suffered a fire, or with components salvaged
from such a vehicle, wear protective gloves
and discard them after use.
The battery
• Batteries contain sulphuric acid, which
attacks clothing, eyes and skin. Take care
when topping-up or carrying the battery.
• The hydrogen gas given off by the battery
is highly explosive. Never cause a spark or
allow a naked light nearby. Be careful when
connecting and disconnecting battery
chargers or j u m p leads.
Air bags
• Air bags can cause injury if they go off
accidentally. Take care when removing the
steering wheel and/or facia. Special storage
instructions may apply.
Diesel injection equipment
• Diesel injection pumps supply fuel at very
high pressure. Take care when working on
the fuel injectors and fuel pipes.
A
Warning: Never expose the hands,
face or any other part of the body
to injector spray; the fuel can
penetrate the skin with potentially
fatal
results.
DON'T
• Don't attempt to lift a heavy component
which may be beyond your capability - get
assistance.
• Don't rush to finish a job, or take
unverified short cuts.
• Don't use ill-fitting tools which may slip
and cause injury.
• Don't leave tools or parts lying around
where someone can trip over them. M o p
up oil and fuel spills at once.
• Don't allow children or pets to play in or
near a vehicle being worked on.
o.6 Roadside repairs
T h e f o l l o w i n g p a g e s a r e i n t e n d e d t o h e l p in d e a l i n g w i t h
c o m m o n r o a d s i d e e m e r g e n c i e s a n d b r e a k d o w n s . Y o u will f i n d
m o r e d e t a i l e d fault f i n d i n g i n f o r m a t i o n at t h e b a c k of t h e
m a n u a l , a n d r e p a i r i n f o r m a t i o n in t h e m a i n c h a p t e r s .
If your car won't start
and the starter motor
doesn't turn
If your car won't start
even though the starter
motor turns as normal
•
•
•
•
•
A
If i t ' s a m o d e l w i t h a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n , m a k e s u r e t h e
s e l e c t o r is in P or N.
Open the bonnet and m a k e sure that the battery terminals
are clean and tight.
S w i t c h o n t h e h e a d l i g h t s a n d t r y t o s t a r t t h e e n g i n e . If t h e
headlights g o very d i m w h e n y o u ' r e trying t o start, t h e
b a t t e r y is p r o b a b l y f l a t . G e t o u t o f t r o u b l e b y j u m p s t a r t i n g
(see n e x t p a g e ) u s i n g a f r i e n d ' s c a r .
Check that the HT leads are securely
connected to the spark plugs and ignition
coil pack, where applicable.
7.8 litre models do not have conventional
HT leads.
B
Is t h e r e f u e l in t h e t a n k ?
Is t h e r e m o i s t u r e o n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t s u n d e r t h e
b o n n e t ? S w i t c h off t h e i g n i t i o n , t h e n w i p e off a n y o b v i o u s
d a m p n e s s with a dry cloth. Spray a water-repellent aerosol
p r o d u c t (WD-40 or equivalent) o n ignition and fuel s y s t e m
e l e c t r i c a l c o n n e c t o r s like t h o s e s h o w n in t h e p h o t o s .
Pay special attention t o t h e ignition coil wiring c o n n e c t o r
and HT leads.
Check that the LT wiring plug is securely
attached to the ignition coil.
On some models, the HT leads and
ignition coil are concealed under a plastic
cover, secured by a number of screws.
Check the airflow meter and/or inlet air
temperature sensor wiring connector for
security.
\
Check that electrical connections are secure (with the ignition switched off) and spray them
with a water dispersant spray like WD-40 if you suspect a problem due to d a m p
Hi
Check the security and condition of the
battery terminals.
Roadside repairs 0.7
Jump starting will get you out
of trouble, but you must correct
whatever made the battery go
flat in the first place. There are
three possibilities:
The battery has been drained by
repeated attempts to start, or by
leaving the lights on.
Jump starting
HAYNES
eed
T
2
W h e n jump-starting a car using a
booster battery, observe the following
precautions:
•
Before connecting the booster
b a t t e r y , m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e i g n i t i o n is
s w i t c h e d off.
The charging system is not
working
properly (alternator drivebelt
slack
or broken, alternator
wiring fault or
alternator
itself
faulty).
•
3
E n s u r e t h a t all e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t
(lights, h e a t e r , w i p e r s , e t c ) is
s w i t c h e d off.
•
T a k e n o t e of a n y s p e c i a l p r e c a u t i o n s
printed on the battery case.
The battery itself is at fault
(electrolyte low, or battery worn
out).
•
M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e b o o s t e r b a t t e r y is
t h e s a m e voltage as t h e d i s c h a r g e d
o n e in t h e v e h i c l e .
If t h e b a t t e r y is b e i n g j u m p - s t a r t e d
f r o m t h e b a t t e r y in a n o t h e r v e h i c l e ,
the t w o vehicles M U S T NOT T O U C H
each other.
M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n is in
n e u t r a l (or P A R K , in t h e c a s e of
automatic transmission).
Make sure that the j u m p leads will not
c o m e into contact with the fan, drivebelts or other moving parts of the
engine.
Start the engine using the booster
battery and run it at idle speed. Switch
on the lights, rear window demister and
heater blower motor, then disconnect
the j u m p leads in the reverse order of
connection. Turn off the lights etc.
o.8 Roadside repairs
Wheel changing
A
Warning: Do not change a wheel in a situation where you risk being hit by another vehicle. On busy roads, try to stop in a lay-by
or a gateway. Be wary of passing traffic while changing the wheel - it is easy to become distracted
by the job in hand.
Preparation
•
When a puncture occurs, stop as soon as
it is safe to do so.
Park on firm level ground, if possible,
and well out of the way of other traffic.
Use hazard warning lights if necessary.
•
•
•
•
If you have one, use a warning triangle to
alert other drivers of your presence.
Apply the handbrake and engage first or
reverse gear (or Park on models with
automatic transmission).
•
•
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
one being removed - a couple of large
stones will do for this.
If the ground is soft, use a flat piece of
w o o d to spread the load under the jack.
Changing the wheel
H
I
The spare wheel and tools are stored in
the luggage c o m p a r t m e n t under the
carpet. Unscrew the handle and lift out
the tool tray, then take out the jack and spare
wheel.
4
Turn the handle clockwise until the wheel
is raised clear of the ground. Unscrew the
wheel bolts and remove the wheel.
N o t e : Some models are supplied with a
special lightweight 'space-saver' spare wheel,
the tyre being narrower than standard. The
space-saver spare wheel is intended only for
temporary use, and must be replaced with a
standard wheel as soon as possible. Drive with
particular care with this wheel fitted, especially
through corners and when braking - FIAT
recommend
a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 kmlh) when the special spare wheel is in
use. The temporary spare also has a maximum
recommended life of 1800 miles.
2
Remove the wheel trim (where fitted) by
prising up the edges and pulling it
straight off. Slacken each wheel bolt by a
half turn, using the wheelbrace. If the bolts are
too tight, DON'T stand on the wheelbrace to
undo them - call for assistance.
5
Fit the spare wheel, noting that there are
t w o locating pegs on the wheel hub,
w h i c h must fit t h r o u g h the holes in the
spare wheel. Fit and screw in the bolts.
Finally...
3
The jack head engages with the b o t t o m
lip on the side sills. If a front wheel is
being c h a n g e d , position the jack head
a p p r o x i m a t e l y 30 c m back f r o m the front
wheel arch. If a rear wheel is being changed,
the jack head should be 20 c m forward of the
rear wheel arch. Don't jack the vehicle at any
other point of the sill.
6
Lightly tighten the bolts with the wheelbrace, then lower the vehicle to the
ground. Securely tighten the wheel bolts.
Note that the wheel trim will not fit the spare
wheel. The wheel bolts should be slackened
and retightened to the specified torque at the
earliest possible opportunity.
•
Remove the wheel chocks.
•
Stow the punctured wheel and tools in the correct locations in the car.
•
Check the tyre pressure on the tyre just fitted. If it is low, or if you don't have a pressure
gauge with you, drive slowly to the next garage and inflate the tyre to the correct pressure.
Particularly in the case of the narrow space-saver spare wheel, this pressure is much
higher than for a normal tyre.
•
Have the punctured wheel repaired as soon as possible, or another puncture will leave you
stranded.
Roadside repairs 0.9
Puddles on the garage floor or drive, or
obvious w e t n e s s under the bonnet or
underneath the car, suggest a leak that needs
investigating. It can sometimes be difficult to
d e c i d e where the leak is c o m i n g f r o m ,
especially if the engine bay is very dirty
already. Leaking oil or fluid can also be blown
rearwards by the passage of air under the car,
giving a false impression of where the
problem lies.
A
Identifying leaks
Warning: Most automotive
oils
and fluids are poisonous.
Wash
them off skin, and change out
of contaminated
clothing,
without
delay.
The smell of a fluid
leaking
from the car may provide
a
clue to what's leaking.
Some
fluids are distinctively
coloured.
It may help to clean the car
carefully
and to park it over some clean
paper
overnight
as an aid to locating
the
source of the leak.
HAYNES
Remember
that some leaks may
occur while the engine is running.
only
Sump oil
Oil from filter
Gearbox oil
Engine oil may leak from the drain plug..
...or from the base of the oil filter.
Gearbox oil can leak from the seals at the
inboard ends of the driveshafts.
Antifreeze
Brake fluid
Power steering fluid
Leaking antifreeze often leaves a crystalline
deposit like this.
A leak occurring at a wheel is almost
certainly brake fluid.
Power steering fluid may leak from the pipe
connectors on the steering rack.
When all else fails, you may find yourself
having to get a tow home - or of course you
may be helping somebody else. Long-distance
recovery should only be done by a garage or
breakdown service. For shorter distances, DIY
towing using another car is easy enough, but
observe the following points:
• The screw-in towing eye is provided with
the wheel changing tools in the b o o t . The
towing eye is screwed into the threaded hole
in the front b u m p e r , below the r i g h t - h a n d
headlight, or into the right-hand side of the
rear bumper after prising out the trim cover.
• Before being t o w e d , release the handbrake
and select neutral on the transmission.
• Note
that
greater-than-usual
pedal
pressure will be required to operate the
brakes, since the v a c u u m servo unit is only
operational with the engine running.
• On models w i t h p o w e r steering, greaterthan-usual steering effort will also be required.
• The driver of the car being t o w e d must
keep the t o w - r o p e taut at all times to avoid
snatching.
• Make sure that both drivers know the route
before setting off.
• Only drive at moderate speeds and keep
the distance t o w e d to a m i n i m u m . Drive
smoothly and allow plenty of time for slowing
d o w n at junctions.
• On m o d e l s with a u t o m a t i c transmission,
the car must not be t o w e d (with the front
wheels on the ground) further than 12 miles
(20 km), or faster than 18 mph (30 km/h). If in
doubt, do not tow with the driven wheels on
the g r o u n d , or transmission d a m a g e may
result.
• Use a proper t o w - r o p e - they are not
expensive. The vehicle being t o w e d must
display an ON TOW sign in its rear window.
• A l w a y s turn the ignition key to the ' o n '
position when the vehicle is being t o w e d , so
that the steering lock is released, and that the
direction indicator and brake lights will work.
Towing
o«io
Weekly checks
Introduction
There are s o m e very simple c h e c k s w h i c h
need only take a few minutes to carry out, but
which could save you a lot of inconvenience
and expense.
• Keeping an eye on tyre c o n d i t i o n and
pressures, will not only help t o s t o p t h e m
wearing out prematurely, but could also save
your life.
These "Weekly checks" require no great skill
or special tools, and the small amount of time
they take t o perform could prove t o be very
well spent, for example;
• Many breakdowns are caused by electrical
problems. Battery-related faults are particularly
common, and a quick check on a regular basis
will often prevent the majority of these.
• If your car develops a brake fluid leak, the
first time you might k n o w about it is when
your brakes d o n ' t w o r k properly. Checking
the level regularly will give advance warning of
this kind of problem.
• If the oil or coolant levels run low, the cost
of repairing any engine d a m a g e will be far
greater than fixing the leak, for example.
Underbonnet check points
^ 1.2 litre engine
A
Engine oil level
B
Engine oil filler cap
C
Coolant expansion
D
dipstick
Brake and clutch
tank
fluid
reservoir
E
Power steering fluid
reservoir
F
Screen washer fluid
reservoir
G
Battery
4 1.4 litre engine
A
Engine oil level
B
Engine oil filler cap
C
Coolant expansion
D
Brake and clutch
dipstick
tank
fluid
reservoir
E
Power steering fluid
reservoir
F
Screen washer fluid
reservoir
Q
Battery
Weekly checks o . n
^ 1.6 litre engine
A
Engine oil level
dipstick
B
Engine oil filler cap
C
Coolant expansion
D
Brake and clutch
tank
fluid
reservoir
E
Power steering fluid
reservoir
F
Screen washer fluid
reservoir
G
Battery
^ 1.8 litre engine
A
Engine oil level
B
Engine oil filler cap
C
Coolant expansion
D
dipstick
tank
Brake and clutch fluid
reservoir
E
Power steering fluid
reservoir
F
Screen washer fluid
reservoir
G
Battery
o-i2 Weekly checks
Engine oil level
Before you start
• Make sure that your car is on level ground.
• Check the oil level before the car is driven,
or at least 5 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
If
the
oil
is
checked
immediately
after driving
the
vehicle, some of the oil will
remain in the upper
engine
components,
resulting in an
inaccurate
reading on the dipstick!
HAYNES
The correct oil
I
The dipstick t o p is brightly coloured for
easy identification, and is situated at the
front of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t (see
Underbonnet check points on pages 0 1 0 and
0 1 1 ) . Withdraw the dipstick
Modern engines place great demands on their
oil. It is very important that the correct oil for
your car is used (See Lubricants and fluids on
page 0'17).
MAX
Using a clean rag or paper towel remove
all oil from the dipstick. Insert the clean
dipstick into the tube as far as it will go,
then withdraw it again.
MIN
Car Care
• If you have to add oil frequently, you should
check whether you have any oil leaks. Place
s o m e clean paper under the car overnight,
and check for stains in the morning. If there
are no leaks, the engine may be burning oil.
• A l w a y s maintain the level b e t w e e n the
upper and lower dipstick marks (see photo 3).
If the le\/el is too low severe engine damage
may occur. Oil seal failure may result if the
engine is overfilled by adding too much oil.
Coolant level
A
•H
I
Warning:
DO NOT attempt
to
remove
the
expansion
tank
pressure cap when the engine is
hot, as there is a very great risk
of scalding.
Do not leave
open
containers
of coolant about, as it
is
poisonous.
The coolant expansion tank is located in
one of two places (see Underbonnet check
points on pages O 1 0 and 0*11). The
coolant level can vary with engine temperature.
When cold, it should be between the MAX and
MIN marks. When the engine is hot, the level
may rise slightly above the MAX mark.
'irmm^f
3
Note the oil level on the end of the
dipstick, which should be in the hatched
area between the upper (MAX) mark and
lower (MIN) mark. Approximately 1.0 litre of oil
will raise the level from the lower mark to the
upper mark.
Car Care
• With a sealed-type cooling system, adding
coolant should not be necessary on a regular
basis. If frequent topping-up is required, it is
likely there is a leak. Check the radiator, all
hoses and joint faces for signs of staining or
wetness, and rectify as necessary.
2
If topping up is necessary, w a i t until
e n g i n e is c o l d . Slowly unscrew
expansion tank c a p , to release
pressure present in the cooling system,
remove it.
the
the
any
and
4
Oil is a d d e d through the filler c a p .
Unscrew the cap and top-up the level; a
funnel may help to reduce spillage. A d d
the oil slowly, checking the level on the dipstick
often. Don't overfill (see 'Car Care' left).
• It is important that antifreeze is used in the
cooling system all year round, not just during
the winter months. Don't t o p - u p with water
alone, as the antifreeze will b e c o m e t o o
diluted.
A d d a mixture of water and antifreeze to
the expansion tank until the coolant level
is halfway between the level marks. Refit
the cap and tighten it securely.
Weekly checks 0.13
Brake (and clutch*) fluid level
*0n models with a hydraulically-operated
clutch, this information is also applicable to the clutch fluid level.
Warning:
• Make sure that your car is
•
Brake fluid can harm your
HAYNES
on level ground.
eyes
and
damage
painted
• If the reservoir requires repeated t o p p i n g The fluid
level
in
the
surfaces,
so
use
extreme
up this is an indication of a fluid leak
reservoir
will
drop
slightly
as
caution
when
handling
and
s o m e w h e r e in the s y s t e m , w h i c h should be
the
brake
pads
wear
down,
but
the
fluid
pouring it.
investigated immediately.
level must never be allowed
to drop
below
the
MIN
mark.
•
Do not use fluid that has
• If a leak is suspected, the car should not be
been standing
open for some
driven until the braking s y s t e m has been
time, as it absorbs
moisture
checked. Never take any risks where brakes
from the air, which can cause a
are concerned.
dangerous
loss
of
braking
effectiveness.
A
The MAX and MIN marks are indicated on
the reservoir. The fluid level must be kept
between the marks at all times
Safety First!
If topping-up is necessary, first wipe clean
the area around the filler cap to prevent dirt
entering the hydraulic system. Unscrew the
reservoir cap and carefully lift it out of position,
holding the wiring connector plug and taking
care not to damage the level sender float. Inspect
the reservoir; if the fluid is dirty, the hydraulic
system should be bled through (see Chapter 1).
Power steering fluid level
Before you start:
• Park the vehicle on level ground.
• Set the steering wheel straight-ahead.
• The engine should be turned off.
•H
I
On most models, the reservoir is mounted
at the rear of the engine, next to the brake
fluid reservoir; 1.2 litre models have the
reservoir by the engine (see
Underbonnet
check points on page O 1 0 ) . The fluid level can
be v i e w e d t h r o u g h t h e reservoir body, and
should be between the MIN and MAX marks; if
not, a dipstick is incorporated in the filler cap.
REHflSl
|Hli\IT|
check
to
be
accurate,
the steering
must
not be turned
once
the
engine has been stopped.
F
o
r
t
n
e
If t o p p i n g - u p is necessary, use the
specified type of fluid - do not overfill the
reservoir. When the level is c o r r e c t ,
securely refit the cap.
3
Carefully add fluid, taking care not to spill it
onto the surrounding c o m p o n e n t s . Use
only the specified fluid; mixing different
types can cause damage to the system. After
topping-up to the correct level, securely refit the
cap and wipe off any spilt fluid. Reconnect the
fluid level wiring connector.
Safety First!
• The need for frequent topping-up indicates
a leak, w h i c h should be investigated
immediately.
3
• -M
Start the engine and wait for the fluid level
in the reservoir to stabilise before
proceeding. With the engine running, turn
the steering wheel fully left and right several
times, returning to the straight-ahead position.
Wait for the level t o stabilise, then check the
fluid level once more, and top-up if necessary.
Switch off the engine on completion.
o.i4 Weekly checks
Tyre condition and pressure
It is very i m p o r t a n t that tyres are in g o o d
condition, and at the correct pressure - having
a tyre failure at any speed is highly dangerous.
Tyre wear is influenced by driving style - harsh
braking and acceleration, or fast cornering,
will all p r o d u c e more rapid tyre wear. As a
general rule, the front tyres wear out faster
than the rears. Interchanging the tyres from
front to rear ("rotating" the tyres) may result in
more even wear. However, if this is
c o m p l e t e l y effective, y o u may have t h e
expense of replacing all four tyres at once!
Remove any nails or stones embedded in the
tread before they penetrate the tyre to cause
deflation. If removal of a nail does reveal that
-J
Tread Depth
- visual
check
The original tyres have tread wear safety
bands (B), which will appear, when the tread
d e p t h reaches a p p r o x i m a t e l y 1.6 m m . The
band positions are indicated by a triangular
mark on the tyre sidewall (A).
the tyre has been punctured, refit the nail so
that its point of penetration is marked. Then
immediately change the wheel, and have the
tyre repaired by a tyre dealer.
Regularly c h e c k the tyres for d a m a g e in the
form of cuts or bulges, especially in t h e
sidewalls. Periodically remove t h e wheels,
and clean any dirt or mud from the inside and
outside surfaces. Examine the wheel rims for
signs of rusting, corrosion or other damage.
Light alloy wheels are easily d a m a g e d by
"kerbing" whilst parking; steel wheels may
also become dented or buckled. A new wheel
is very often the only way to overcome severe
damage.
2
Tread Depth
- manual
check
Alternatively,
tread
wear
c a n be
monitored with a simple, inexpensive device
known as a tread depth indicator gauge.
New tyres should be balanced when they are
f i t t e d , but it may b e c o m e necessary t o rebalance them as they wear, or if the balance
weights fitted to the wheel rim should fall off.
Unbalanced tyres will wear more quickly, as
will the steering and suspension components.
Wheel imbalance is normally signified by
vibration, particularly at a certain speed
(typically around 50 mph). If this vibration is
felt only through the steering, then it is likely
that just the front wheels need balancing. If,
however, t h e vibration is felt t h r o u g h the
w h o l e car, t h e rear wheels c o u l d be out of
balance. Wheel balancing should be carried
out by a tyre dealer or garage.
Tyre Pressure
Check
Check the tyre pressures regularly with
the tyres c o l d . Do not adjust t h e tyre
pressures immediately after the vehicle has
been used, or an inaccurate setting will result.
Tyre pressures are shown on page 0*17.
Tyre tread wear patterns
Shoulder
Wear
U n d e r i n f l a t i o n (wear o n b o t h sides)
Under-inflation will cause overheating of the
tyre, because the tyre will flex too much, and
the tread will not sit correctly on the road
surface. This will cause a loss of grip and
excessive wear, not t o mention the danger of
sudden tyre failure due to heat build-up.
Check and adjust pressures
I n c o r r e c t w h e e l c a m b e r (wear o n o n e side)
Repair or renew suspension parts
Hard cornering
Reduce speed!
Centre
Wear
Overinflation
Over-inflation will cause rapid wear of t h e
centre part of t h e tyre t r e a d , c o u p l e d with
reduced grip, harsher ride, and the danger of
shock damage occurring in the tyre casing.
Check and adjust pressures
If you sometimes
have to inflate your car's
tyres to the higher pressures specified
for
maximum load or sustained high speed, don't
forget to reduce the pressures
to normal
afterwards.
Uneven
Wear
Front tyres may wear unevenly as a result of
wheel misalignment. M o s t tyre dealers and
garages can c h e c k a n d adjust t h e wheel
alignment (or "tracking") for a modest charge.
I n c o r r e c t c a m b e r or c a s t o r
Repair or renew suspension parts
Malfunctioning suspension
Repair or renew suspension parts
Unbalanced wheel
Balance tyres
Incorrect toe setting
Adjust front wheel alignment
Note: The feathered edge of the tread which
typifies toe wear is best checked by feel.
Weekly checks 0-15
Battery
Caution: Before carrying out any work on the
vehicle battery, read the precautions given in
Safety first! at the start of this manual.
• Make sure that the battery tray is in g o o d
c o n d i t i o n , and that the c l a m p is tight.
Corrosion on the tray, retaining clamp and the
battery itself can be removed with a solution
of water and baking soda. Thoroughly rinse all
cleaned areas w i t h water. Any metal parts
d a m a g e d by corrosion should be covered
with a zinc-based primer, then painted.
• Periodically (approximately every three
months), c h e c k the charge c o n d i t i o n of the
battery as described in Chapter 5A.
• On batteries w h i c h are not of the
maintenance-free type, periodically check the
electrolyte level in the battery - see Chapter 1.
• If the battery is flat, and you need to j u m p
start your vehicle, see Roadside repairs.
Battery
corrosion
can be kept to a
minimum
by applying
a layer
of
petroleum
jelly
to the clamps
and
terminals after they are
reconnected.
The battery is located at the front of the
engine c o m p a r t m e n t on the left-hand
side. The exterior of the battery should be
inspected periodically for damage such as a
cracked case or cover
If corrosion (white, fluffy deposits) is
evident, remove the cables f r o m the
battery terminals, clean them with a small
wire brush, then refit them. Automotive stores
sell a tool for cleaning the battery p o s t . . .
Bulbs and fuses
• Check all external lights and the horn. Refer
to the appropriate Sections of Chapter 12 for
details if any of the circuits are f o u n d to be
inoperative.
H
I
If a single i n d i c a t o r light, s t o p - l i g h t or
h e a d l i g h t has f a i l e d , it is likely that a
b u l b has b l o w n and will n e e d t o be
replaced. Refer to Chapter 12 for details. If
b o t h s t o p - l i g h t s have f a i l e d , it is p o s s i b l e
that the s t o p - l i g h t s w i t c h is faulty (see
Chapter 9).
Lift off the terminal covers, and check the
tightness of battery c l a m p s to ensure
g o o d electrical connections. Also check
each cable for cracks and frayed conductors.
• Visually c h e c k all accessible
wiring
connectors, harnesses and retaining clips for
security, and for signs of chafing or damage.
2
If more than one indicator light or
headlight has failed, it is likely that either a
fuse has blown or that there is a fault in the
circuit (see Chapter 12). The main fuses are
located in the fusebox situated to the right of
the steering wheel. Additional fuses are located
behind the glovebox, with several enginerelated fuses on the engine c o m p a r t m e n t
bulkhead or next to the battery.
as well as the battery cable clamps
If you need to check
your
brake lights and
indicators
unaided, back up to a wall or
^
garage door and operate
the
lights. The reflected light should show if
they are working
properly.
3
To replace a blown fuse, simply pull it out
using the plastic tweezers provided. Fit a
new fuse of the same rating (see Chapter 12). If the fuse blows again, it is important
that you find out why - a complete checking
procedure is given in Chapter 12.
o.i6 Weekly checks
Washer fluid level
• The w i n d s c r e e n washer reservoir also
supplies the tailgate washer jet. On models so
equipped, the same reservoir also serves the
headlight washers.
• Screenwash additives not only keep the
w i n d s c r e e n clean during foul weather, they
also prevent the washer s y s t e m freezing in
cold weather - which is when you are likely to
need it most. Don't top up using plain water
as the screenwash will b e c o m e too diluted,
and will freeze during cold weather.
On no account
use coolant antifreeze
the washer system - this could discolour
damage
paintwork.
Wiper blades
Caution:
Take care during the fitting
new blades that the wiper arms do
accidentally
strike
the windscreen
tailgate
glass.
1
in
or
of
not
or
Check the condition of the wiper blades;
if they are cracked or show any signs of
deterioration, or if the glass swept area is
smeared, renew t h e m . Wiper blades should
be renewed annually.
•H
I
On m o s t m o d e l s , the washer fluid
reservoir filler is located at the rear righthand side of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ;
1.4 litre models have the reservoir on the lefthand side. Release the cap and observe the
level in the reservoir by looking down the filler
neck. Models with headlight washers have a
dipstick which can be used to verify the level.
2
To t o p - u p the level, pull the filter inside
the filler neck upwards until it clicks - this
can now be used as a funnel. When
t o p p i n g - u p the reservoir, a screenwash
additive should be a d d e d in the quantities
recommended on the bottle.
N o t e : Fitting details for wiper blades vary
according
to model, and according
to
whether genuine FIAT wiper blades have
been
fitted.
Use the procedures
and
illustrations shown as a guide for your car.
Q
To remove a wiper blade, pull the arm
fully away f r o m the glass until it locks.
Swivel the blade through 90°, press the
locking t a b with your fingers and slide the
blade out of the arm's hooked end.
O
Don't forget to check the rear wiper blade
as well. To remove the blade, press in the
catch at the base of the arm, and slide
the blade and upper section of the arm out.
O
Lubricants, fluids and tyre pressures 0.17
Lubricants and fluids
Engine
S y n t h e t i c - b a s e d multigrade engine oil, viscosity SAE 1 0 W / 4 0 ,
t o A C E A A 3 , A P I S J or b e t t e r
(Duckhams
Cooling system
QXR Premium
(Duckhams
Manual transmission
Antifreeze
(Duckhams
Hypoid
(Duckhams
Choosing your engine oil
• Cooling
hot-spots
Temperatures inside the engine can exceed
1000° C. The engine oil circulates and acts as
a coolant, transferring heat from the hot-spots
to the sump.
GL-5)
III)
Universal
Brake
& Clutch
Fluid)
Dexron type ATF
(Duckhams
friction
Coolant)
Gear Oil 75W-80W
ATF Autotrans
(Duckhams
• Beating
and Summer
Brake and clutch fluid t o D O T 4
Power steering
Without oil, the moving surfaces inside your
engine will rub together, heat up and melt,
quickly causing the engine to seize. Engine oil
creates a film which separates these moving
parts, preventing wear and heat build-up.
Oil)
D e x r o n II t y p e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d
Braking system
HOW ENGINE OIL WORKS
Engine
Gear oil, viscosity S A E 7 5 W / 8 0 , to API GL5
Automatic transmission
Engines need oil, not only to lubricate moving
parts and minimise wear, but also to maximise
power output and to improve fuel economy.
By introducing a simplified and i m p r o v e d
range of engine oils, D u c k h a m s has taken
away the confusion and made it easier for you
to choose the right oil for your engine.
Petrol
Ethylene g l y c o l - b a s e d antifreeze,
• Cleaning
the engine
ATF Autotrans
internally
G o o d quality engine oils clean the inside of
your engine, collecting and dispersing
c o m b u s t i o n d e p o s i t s and controlling t h e m
until they are trapped by the oil filter or flushed
out at oil change.
OIL CARE - FOLLOW THE CODE
To handle and d i s p o s e of used engine oil
safely, always:
•
Avoid
skin
contact
with
used
engine
oil.
Repeated
or
prolonged
contact can be harmful.
•
Dispose
of used oil
and empty packs
in a
responsible manner in an
authorised
disposal
site.
Call 0800 663366 to find
0800 66 33 66
t
III)
DUCKHAMS ENGINE OILS
For the driver w h o d e m a n d s a p r e m i u m
quality oil for c o m p l e t e reassurance, w e
r e c o m m e n d synthetic formula D u c k h a m s
QXR P r e m i u m Engine Oils.
For the driver w h o requires a straightforward quality engine oil, we r e c o m m e n d
D u c k h a m s H y p e r g r a d e Engine Oils.
For further information and advice, call the
Duckhams UK Helpline on 0800 212988.
y° Never tip oil down drains
or onto the ground.
n
e
o
n
e
n
e
a
r
e
s
t
t o
u
Tyre pressures (cold)
Note: Pressures apply only to original-equipment
for correct pressures if necessary.
tyres, and may vary if other makes or type is fitted; check with the tyre manufacturer
Front
Rear
Except 185/55 R15 and 195/50 R15 tyres
2.2 b a r (32 psi)
2.2 b a r (32 psi)
185/55 R15 and 195/50 R15 tyres
2.2 b a r (32 psi)
2.3 b a r (33 psi)
2 . 3 b a r (33 psi)
2.5 b a r (36 psi)
Normal (full-width) wheel
2 . 8 b a r (41 psi)
2 . 8 b a r (41 psi)
S p a c e saver (narrow) w h e e l
4.2 b a r (61 psi)
4 . 2 b a r (61 psi)
Normal load:
Full l o a d
Spare wheel:
or supplier
• M
Chapter 1
Routine maintenance & servicing
Contents
Air filter renewal
Automatic transmission fluid level check
Auxiliary drivebelt check and renewal
Auxiliary drivebelt tension check
Battery electrolyte level check
Brake fluid renewal
Braking system pipes and hoses check
Clutch cable adjustment
Coolant renewal
Engine management system fault code check
Engine oil and filter renewal
Evaporative emission control system check
Exhaust emissions check
Exhaust system check
Front brake pad check
Fuel filter renewal
19
5
21
7
6
26
11
22
31
25
3
29
24
12
4
20
Handbrake adjustment
Hinge and lock lubrication
Hose and fluid leak check
Introduction
Lights and horn operation check
Manual transmission oil level check
Pollen filter renewal
Rear brake shoe check
Regular maintenance
Road test
Spark plug renewal
Steering and suspension check
Timing belt renewal
Transmission and driveshaft gaiter check
Underbody protection check
23
16
9
1
15
27
8
28
2
17
18
13
30
10
14
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
| k
novice with little
expenence
^
§x
Fairly difficult,
§^
suitable for competent 0 ^
experienced DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
s o m e experience
^
^
Difficult, suitable for
Fairly easy, suitable
for beginner with
^
^
>J^
Very difficult,
^
suitable for expert DIY
^
or professional
^
1-2 Servicing specifications
Lubricants and fluids
Refer to end of Weekly checks on page 0*17
Capacities
Engine oil (including filter):
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
Cooling system (approximate):
1.2 and 1.4 litre engines
1.6 and 1.8 litre engines
Transmission (approximate):
Manual transmission:
1.2 and 1.4 litre engine models
1.6 and 1.8 litre engine models
Automatic transmission (fluid change)
Fuel tank (approximate):
Except 1.8 litre models
1.8 litre models
Washer reservoir:
Models with headlight washers
Models without headlight washers
2.8
4.1
3.8
4.3
litres
litres
litres
litres
6.0 litres
7.0 litres
1.65 litres
2.0 litres
4.3 litres
50 litres
60 litres
6.4 litres
5.0 litres
Engine
Oil filter:
1.2,1.4 and 1.6 litre engines
1.8 litre engine:
Up to March 1996
April 1996 onwards
* N o t e : This is the latest information
Champion F107*
Champion F107*
Champion F133*
available; if in any doubt, contact Champion on 01274 848283.
Cooling system
Antifreeze mixture:
4 0 % antifreeze
5 0 % antifreeze
Note: Refer to antifreeze manufacturer
Protection d o w n to -25°C
Protection d o w n to -35°C
for latest
recommendations.
Fuel system
Air filter element:
Except 1.2 litre engine
1.2 litre engine
Fuel filter
* N o t e : This is the latest information
Champion U564*
Champion type not available*
Champion L225*
available; if in any doubt, contact Champion on 01274 848283.
Ignition system
Ignition timing
Refer to Chapter 5B
Spark plugs:
Except 1.2 litre engine
Champion RC8BYC or RC7YC*
1.2 litre engine
Champion RA4HCX or RA4HC*
Electrode gap**:
Champion RC8BYC
Not adjustable
Champion RA4HCX
0.8 m m (0.032 in)
Champion RC7YC or RA4HC
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
*Note: This is the latest information available; if in any doubt, contact Champion on 01274 848283.
"The spark plug electrode gap is as quoted by Champion for their recommended plugs. If spark plugs of any other type are to be used, refer to
their manufacturer's
specifications.
Clutch
Clutch pedal stroke (see Section 22):
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (where applicable)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
155 ± 1 0 m m
170 ± 1 0 m m
Brakes
Brake pad/shoe friction material minimum thickness
1.5 m m
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibfft
Manual transmission drain plug
Manual transmission filler/level plug
Roadwheel bolts
46
46
86
34
34
63
Servicing specifications 1.3
Torque wrench settings (continued)
Nm
Ibf ft
Spark plugs:
All except 1.6 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
Sump drain plug:
25
27
18
20
10
25
50
20
7
"18
37
15
Maintenance schedule
The maintenance intervals in this manual are
provided with the assumption that you, not the
dealer, will be carrying out the work. These are
the m i n i m u m intervals r e c o m m e n d e d for
vehicles driven daily. If you wish to keep your
vehicle in peak condition at all times, you may
wish to perform s o m e of these procedures
more often. We encourage frequent maintenance, since it enhances the efficiency,
performance and resale value of your vehicle.
Every 250 miles (400 km) or weekly
•
Refer to Weekly checks
Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months
In addition
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
to the items listed in the previous
services, carry out the
Renew the engine oil and filter (Section 3)
Check the front brake pad thickness (Section 4)
Check the automatic transmission fluid level
(Section 5)
Check battery electrolyte level - where applicable
(Section 6)
Check the tension of the auxiliary drivebelt(s)
(Section 7)
Renew the pollen filter element (Section 8)
Check all underbonnet/underbody components
and hoses for fluid leaks (Section 9)
Check the transmission and driveshaft gaiters for
leaks and damage (Section 10)
Check the brake pipes and hoses for leaks and
damage (Section 11)
Check the condition of the exhaust system and its
mountings (Section 12)
Check the steering and suspension components
for condition and security (Section 13)
Check underbody protection for damage (Section 14)
Check operation of all lights and horn (Section 15)
Lubricate all hinges, locks and door check straps
(Section 16)
Carry out a road test (Section 17)
Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km) or
2 years
In addition
following:
•
•
•
to the items listed in the previous
services, carry out the
Renew the spark plugs (Section 18)
Renew the air filter element (Section 19)
Renew the fuel filter, where applicable (Section 20)
When the vehicle is new, it should be
serviced by a dealer service d e p a r t m e n t , in
order to preserve the factory warranty.
Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km) or
2 years (continued)
•
Check the condition of the auxiliary drivebelt(s),
and renew if necessary (Section 21)
i"l Check clutch cable adjustment, where applicable
(Section 22)
U Check handbrake adjustment (Section 23)
i i Check exhaust gas emissions (Section 24)
1 i Check engine management system for fault codes
(Section 25)
Every 36 000 miles (60 000 km) or
2 years
In addition
following:
to the items listed in the previous services, carry out the
i I Renew the brake fluid (Section 26)
• Check the manual transmission oil level (Section 27)
• Check the rear brake shoe lining thickness
(Section 28)
Every 48 000 miles (80 000 km) or
4 years
In addition
following:
to the items listed in the previous services, carry out the
i i Check the evaporative emissions control system
(Section 29)
Every 72 000 miles (120 000 km)
In addition to all the items listed above, carry out the following:
•
Renew the timing belt (Section 30)
N o t e : It is strongly recommended
that the interval is halved to
36 000 miles (60 000 km), particularly
on vehicles which are
subjected to intensive use, ie. mainly short journeys or a lot of stopstart driving. The actual belt renewal interval is therefore very much
up to the individual owner, but bear in mind that severe engine
damage will result if the belt breaks.
Every 2 years (regardless of mileage)
Li Renew the coolant (Section 31)
1.4 Maintenance - component locations
Underbonnet view of 1.2 litre model
Sra/ce a n d c / u f c h
ffu/d
reservoir
Fuse and relay
Engine
for access
spark
(remove
to coils
and
plugs)
Engine
management
system
ECU
Auxiliary
fusebox
Air inlet
Air
box
top cover
duct
cleaner
Battery
8
Cooling
system
expansion
tank
10
Engine
11
Oil filler
12
Power
13
Washer
oil
dipstick
cap
steering
reservoir
reservoir
Underbonnet view of 1.4 litre model
Air
cleaner
Brake
and clutch
fluid
reservoir
Fuse and relay
Throttle
Power
body
steering
Engine
system
8
9
10
box
airbox
reservoir
management
ECU
Auxiliary
fusebox
Washer
reservoir
Battery
Cooling
system
expansion
tank
11
Radiator
top
12
Oil filler
cap
13
Oil
14
Engine
15
Crankcase
16
Warm-air
17
Timing
hose
filter
oil
dipstick
breather
inlet
belt
duct
cover
hose
Maintenance - component locations 1.5
Underbonnet view of 1.6 litre model
1
Washer
2
Inlet manifold
reservoir
3
Brake
(upper
and clutch
section)
fluid
reservoir
4
Fuse and relay
5
Inlet air resonator
6
Power
7
Air inlet
Auxiliary
9
Air
11
box
steering
8
10
box
reservoir
duct
fusebox
cleaner
Battery
Engine
management
system
ECU
12
Accelerator
13
Cooling
cable
system
expansion
tank
14
Ignition
15
Inlet manifold
coil
(lower
section)
16
Oil filler
17
Engine
cap
18
No 1 spark plug
19
Timing
oil
dipstick
belt
HTIead
cover
Underbonnet view of 1.8 litre model
1
Washer
2
Cooling
reservoir
system
expansion
tank
3
Fuel hoses,
fuel rail
and
injectors
4
Brake
and clutch
fluid
reservoir
5
Inlet
manifold
6
Power
steering
7
Idle speed
8
Anti-lock
braking
(ABS)
modulator
9
Airflow
meter
10
Auxiliary
11
Air inlet
12
Air
13
14
reservoir
control
valve
system
fusebox
duct
cleaner
Battery
Engine
top cover
for access
spark
to coils
plugs)
15
Oil filler
16
Engine
oil
cap
dipstick
17
Timing
belt
cover
(remove
and
1.6 Maintenance - component locations
Front underside view of 1.6 litre model
Horn
Oil
4
unit
filter
Radiator
cooling
Starter
motor
Radiator
Front
fan
bottom
brake
hose
caliper
Driveshaft
CV joint
Track rod
end
Manual
gaiter
transmission
drain
plug
10
Engine
11
Right-hand
oil drain
12
Exhaust
13
Oxygen
plug
driveshaft
downpipe
sensor
14
Subframe
15
Suspension
arm
Rear underside view of 1.6 litre model
1
Brake
pipe/hose
connection
2
Fuel
3
Handbrake
4
Fuel tank retaining
5
Rear suspension
6
tank
cables
Rear shock
straps
arm
absorber
mounting
7
Rear coil
8
Exhaust
rear
spring
silencer
9
Exhaust
heat
shield
10
Brake
pressure
proportioning
valve
Maintenance procedures w
1
is to prepare yourself before the actual work
begins. Read through all the Sections relevant
to the work to be carried out, then make a list
and gather all the parts and tools required. If a
problem is encountered, seek advice from a
parts specialist, or a dealer service department.
Introduction
General
information
This Chapter is designed to help the home
mechanic maintain his/her vehicle for safety,
economy, long life and peak performance.
The Chapter contains a master m a i n t e n ance schedule, followed by Sections dealing
specifically with each task in the s c h e d u l e .
Visual c h e c k s , a d j u s t m e n t s , c o m p o n e n t
renewal and other helpful items are included.
Refer to the accompanying illustrations of the
engine compartment and the underside of the
vehicle for the locations of the various
components.
Servicing your vehicle in accordance with
the mileage/time maintenance schedule and
the following Sections will provide a planned
maintenance programme, which should result
in a long and reliable service life. This is a
c o m p r e h e n s i v e plan, so maintaining s o m e
items but not others at the specified service
intervals, will not produce the same results.
As you service your vehicle, you will
discover that many of the procedures can and should - be grouped together, because of
the particular procedure being performed, or
because of the proximity of t w o otherwise
unrelated c o m p o n e n t s to one another. For
example, if the vehicle is raised for any reason,
the exhaust can be inspected at the same time
as the suspension and steering components.
The first step in this maintenance programme
2
Regular maintenance
1 If, f r o m the t i m e the vehicle is new, the
routine maintenance schedule is f o l l o w e d
closely, and frequent checks are made of fluid
levels and high-wear items, as s u g g e s t e d
t h r o u g h o u t this manual, the engine will be
kept in relatively good running condition, and
the need for additional work will be minimised.
2 It is possible that there will be times when
the engine is running poorly due to the lack of
regular maintenance. This is even more likely
if a used vehicle, w h i c h has not received
regular and frequent maintenance checks, is
p u r c h a s e d . In s u c h cases, additional w o r k
may need to be carried out, o u t s i d e of the
regular maintenance intervals.
3 If engine wear is suspected, a compression
test (refer to the relevant part of Chapter 2) will
provide valuable information regarding the
overall performance of the main internal
c o m p o n e n t s . Such a test can be used as a
basis to decide on the extent of the work to
be carried out. If, for example, a compression
test indicates serious internal engine wear,
conventional maintenance as described in this
Chapter will not greatly improve the perform-
ance of the engine, and may prove a waste of
t i m e and money, unless extensive overhaul
work is carried out first.
4 The following series of operations are those
most often required to improve the performance of a generally poor-running engine:
Primary
operations
a) Clean, inspect and test the battery (See
Weekly checks and Section 6, where
applicable).
b) Check all the engine-related fluids (See
Weekly checks).
c) Check the condition and tension of the
auxiliary drivebelt (Sections 7 and 21).
d) Renew the spark plugs (Section 18).
e) Check the condition of the air filter, and
renew if necessary (Section 19).
f) Check the fuel filter, where applicable
(Section 20).
g) Check the condition of all hoses, and
check for fluid leaks (Section 9).
h) Check the exhaust gas emissions (Section 24).
5 If the above operations do not prove fully
effective, carry out the following secondary
operations:
Secondary
operations
All items listed under Primary operations, plus
the following:
a) Check the charging system (see Chapter 5A,
Section 4).
b) Check the ignition system (see Chapter 5B).
c) Check the fuel system (see relevant Part
of Chapter 4).
d) Renew the ignition HT leads, if applicable.
Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
3 Engine oil and filter renewal
%
I
1 Frequent oil and filter changes are the most
important maintenance procedures which can
be undertaken by the DIY owner. As engine oil
ages, it b e c o m e s diluted and contaminated,
which leads to premature engine wear.
2 The oil change interval given in this Manual
is the same as q u o t e d by the manufacturer,
but o w n e r s of older vehicles (or t h o s e
c o v e r i n g a small annual mileage) may feel
justified in c h a n g i n g the oil and filter more
frequently, perhaps every 6000 miles, or every
6 months. The quality of engine oil used is a
significant factor in this - the 12 000-mile
interval o n l y applies if a high-quality
synthetic-based oil is used.
3 Before starting this p r o c e d u r e , gather all
the necessary tools and materials. Also make
sure that you have plenty of clean rags and
n e w s p a p e r s handy, to m o p up any spills.
Ideally, the engine oil should be w a r m , as it
will drain better, and more built-up sludge will
be removed with it. Take care, however, not to
touch the exhaust or any other hot parts of the
engine w h e n w o r k i n g under the vehicle. To
avoid any possibility of s c a l d i n g , and to
protect yourself from possible skin irritants
and other harmful c o n t a m i n a n t s in u s e d
engine oils, it is advisable to wear gloves
when carrying out this work.
4 Remove the oil filler cap (see illustration),
and take out the dipstick.
5 Access to the underside of the vehicle will
be greatly improved if it can be raised on a lift,
driven onto r a m p s , or j a c k e d up and
s u p p o r t e d on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle
support).
Whichever m e t h o d is
c h o s e n , make sure that the vehicle remains
level, or if it is at an angle, that the drain plug
is at the lowest point.
6 Where a p p l i c a b l e , unscrew the fasteners
and remove the engine undertray, for access
to the drain plug. On 1.8 litre engines, the
drain plug can be reached from the back of
the engine, and a panel is p r o v i d e d in the
undertray, which can be hinged d o w n to get
to the filter (see illustration).
3.4 R e m o v i n g t h e oil filler c a p o n a
1.6 litre m o d e l
3.6 R e m o v i n g t h e oil filter a c c e s s panel o n
a 1.8 litre m o d e l
i.a Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
rt'!' •
3.7 O n s o m e m o d e l s , a special s o c k e t is
r e q u i r e d t o l o o s e n t h e s u m p drain p l u g
3.8 Draining t h e e n g i n e oil
3.11 R e m o v i n g t h e oil filter o n a 1.8 litre
model
7 Using a special s o c k e t where necessary,
slacken the drain plug (on the base of the
sump) about half a turn (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Position the draining container under the drain
p l u g , t h e n r e m o v e the plug c o m p l e t e l y .
Recover the sealing ring from the drain plug.
8 Allow s o m e t i m e for the old oil to drain,
noting that it may be necessary to reposition
the container as the oil flow slows to a trickle
(see illustration).
15 With the car on level g r o u n d , fill the
engine, using the correct grade and type of oil
(see Lubricants and fluids). An oil can spout or
funnel may help to reduce spillage (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Pour in half the specified
quantity of oil first, then wait a few minutes for
the oil to fall to the sump.
16 Continue adding oil a small quantity at a
time until the level is up to the MIN mark on
the dipstick. Adding around 1.0 litre of oil will
now bring the level up to the MAX on the
dipstick - do not worry if a little too much goes
in, as s o m e of the apparent excess will be
taken up in filling the oil filter. Refit the dipstick
and the filler cap.
17 Start the engine and run it for a few
minutes; check for leaks around the oil filter
seal and the s u m p drain plug. Note that there
may be a few s e c o n d s ' delay before the oil
pressure w a r n i n g light g o e s out w h e n the
engine is started, as the oil circulates through
the engine oil galleries and the new oil filter
before the pressure builds up.
18 S w i t c h off the engine, and wait a few
minutes for the oil to settle in the sump once
more. With the new oil circulated and the filter
c o m p l e t e l y full, recheck the level on the
dipstick, and add more oil as necessary.
19 Dispose of the used engine oil safely, with
reference to General repair procedures in the
Reference section of this manual.
adjacent to the brake caliper. With the ignition
on, touch the wiring plug to earth, and check
that the warning light comes on.
9 After all the oil has d r a i n e d , w i p e off the
drain plug w i t h a clean rag, and fit a new
sealing washer. Clean the area a r o u n d the
drain plug opening, and refit the plug. Tighten
the plug securely.
10 Move the container into position under the
011 filter, which is located on the front of the
cylinder block.
11 Using an oil filter removal tool if
necessary, slacken the filter initially, then
unscrew it by hand the rest of the way (see
illustration). Empty the oil in the filter into the
container.
12 Use a clean rag to remove all oil, dirt and
s l u d g e from the filter sealing area on the
engine. Check the old filter to make sure that
the rubber sealing ring has not stuck to the
engine. If it has, carefully remove it.
13 Apply a light coating of clean engine oil to
the sealing ring on the new filter, then screw it
into position on the engine (see illustration).
Tighten the filter firmly by hand only - d o n o t
use any tools.
14 Remove the old oil f r o m under the car,
then refit the undertray or access panel (as
applicable). Lower the car to the ground.
3.13 Fit a n d t i g h t e n t h e n e w oil filter by
h a n d only - d o n o t use any t o o l s
4 Front brake pad check
^
1
1 Firmly apply the h a n d b r a k e , loosen the
front road wheel bolts, then jack up the front of
the car and support it securely on axle stands.
Remove the front roadwheels.
2 For a comprehensive check, the brake pads
s h o u l d be r e m o v e d and c l e a n e d . The
operation of the caliper can then also be
checked, and the condition of the brake disc
itself can be fully e x a m i n e d on b o t h sides.
Refer to Chapter 9.
3 If any pads friction material is worn to the
specified thickness or less, all four pads must
be renewed as a set.
4 C h e c k the operation of the pad wear
warning light by disconnecting the wiring plug
5
Automatic transmission
fluid level check
^
i|
f|
1 Ideally, the fluid level must be checked with
the
engine/transmission
at
operating
t e m p e r a t u r e . This can be achieved by
checking the level after a journey of at least 10
miles. If the level is checked when cold, follow
this up with a level check when the fluid is hot.
2 Park the car on level ground, and apply the
handbrake very firmly. As an added precaution,
chock the front and rear wheels, so that the car
cannot move.
3 With the engine idling, move the selector
lever gently from position P to position 1, and
back to P.
4 The fluid level d i p s t i c k is located on the
front of the transmission. Before removing the
dipstick, thoroughly clean the area around it no dirt or debris must be allowed to enter the
transmission.
5 Extract the dipstick, and wipe it clean using
a clean piece of rag or tissue. Re-insert the
d i p s t i c k completely, then pull it out o n c e
more. The fluid level should be between the
reference marks on the side of the d i p s t i c k
m a r k e d HOT (if the level is c h e c k e d w h e n
c o l d , use the markings on the COLD side of
the dipstick).
6 If topping-up is required, this is done via the
dipstick tube. It is most important that no dirt
3.15 Filling t h e engine w i t h oil
Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km) 1.9
4 On batteries where the level can be
checked but not topped-up, if the level is low,
consult a dealer or a u t o m o t i v e electrical
specialist as to the best course of action
(likely to be fitting a replacement battery).
7
A -
-A
6.3 T o p p i n g - u p t h e b a t t e r y e l e c t r o l y t e
or debris enters the transmission as this is
done - use a clean funnel (preferably with a
filter) and fresh fluid from a clean container.
7 Pour the fresh fluid a little at a time d o w n
the d i p s t i c k t u b e , c h e c k i n g the level
frequently.
8 When the level is correct, refit the dipstick
and switch off the engine.
Battery electrolyte level
check
A
Warning: The electrolyte
inside a
battery
is diluted
acid - it is a
good idea to wear suitable
rubber
gloves. When topping-up,
don't overfill the
cells so that the electrolyte
overflows.
In
the event
of any spillage,
rinse
the
electrolyte
off without delay. Refit the cell
covers and rinse the battery with
copious
quantities
of clean water. Don't attempt to
siphon out any excess
electrolyte.
Auxiliary drivebelt tension
check
N o t e : On models
with 1.4 and 1.8 litre
engines, an automatic belt tensioner is used,
and regular tension checks are not required.
Check the belt condition
at the
specified
intervals, however, as described in Section 21.
1 The only belt tension specifications quoted
by FIAT are for use with their dedicated belt
tensioning e q u i p m e n t , and are not of great
practical help. The advice given below should
be treated as a rough guide, and should be
a d e q u a t e in most cases. If there is serious
c o n c e r n over belt t e n s i o n , refer to a FIAT
dealer for advice.
2 If a drivebelt is set too tight, it will subject
the driven unit to excess l o a d , resulting in
premature wear of the unit (and of the belt). If
the belt is too slack, it will not transmit drive
properly, and the belt will suffer wear due to
slippage.
1.2 litre
engine
3 Two or three separate belts are used on this
engine, d e p e n d i n g on w h e t h e r or not air
conditioning is fitted.
4 For improved access to the belts, remove
the three bolts securing the engine top cover,
and lift the cover away.
5 Each of the drivebelts is c h e c k e d and
adjusted in much the same way. To check the
p o w e r steering p u m p drivebelt, remove the
bolt securing the belt upper cover, and
remove the cover. To a c c e s s the air
c o n d i t i o n i n g c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt, refer to
paragraphs 16 to 18.
6 Press on the belt at the c e n t r e - p o i n t
b e t w e e n the t w o pulleys, and t h e drivebelt
should deflect by approximately 5 m m .
Alternator drivebelt
7 If adjustment is required, loosen the nuts
and bolts on the t w o adjuster slots, and the
lower m o u n t i n g t h r o u g h - b o l t . Pivot the
alternator as necessary using a suitable lever
to set the belt tension, then re-tighten all the
fasteners (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Take care when
levering the alternator that no d a m a g e is
c a u s e d to the alternator or s u r r o u n d i n g
components.
8 On models with air conditioning, note that if
the air c o n d i t i o n i n g c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt
needs adjusting, this will affect the alternator
belt tension.
Air conditioning c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt
9 If adjustment is required, loosen the nut and
bolt on the adjuster slot, and the lower
mounting through-bolt. Pivot the compressor
as necessary using a suitable lever to set the
belt tension, then re-tighten all the fasteners.
Take care when levering the compressor that
no d a m a g e is caused to the c o m p r e s s o r or
surrounding components.
10 Note that if the air c o n d i t i o n i n g c o m pressor drivebelt needs a d j u s t i n g , this will
affect the alternator belt tension.
1 Models covered by this Manual are fitted
with a ' l i m i t e d - m a i n t e n a n c e ' battery as
standard e q u i p m e n t (or may have had a
'maintenance-free'
one
fitted
as
a
replacement). If the battery in your vehicle is
m a r k e d ' F r e e d o m ' , ' M a i n t e n a n c e - F r e e ' or
similar, no electrolyte level c h e c k i n g is
required (the battery is often c o m p l e t e l y
sealed, preventing any topping-up).
2 Batteries which do require their electrolyte
level to be checked can be recognised by the
presence of level markings and removable
covers over the six battery cells - the battery
casing is also sometimes translucent, so that
the electrolyte level can be more easily
checked. Some of the batteries fitted by FIAT
have level markings, but no means of toppingup!
3 Remove the cell covers and either look
down inside the battery to see the level web,
or c h e c k the level using any markings
provided on the battery c a s i n g . The
electrolyte should at least cover the battery
plates. If necessary, t o p up a little at a time
with distilled (de-ionised) water until the level
in all six cells is correct - don't fill the cells up
t o the brim (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . W i p e up any
spillage, then refit the cell covers.
7.7 L o o s e n t h e alternator m o u n t i n g s (arrowed) a n d pivot t h e alternator t o t e n s i o n t h e belt
i.io Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
7.11 P o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p a d j u s t e r b o l t (arrowed)
Power steering p u m p drivebelt
11 If adjustment is required, loosen the nuts
and bolts on the t w o adjuster slots, and the
upper mounting through-bolt. The belt tension
is set by now turning the adjuster bolt at the
front of the p u m p m o u n t i n g bracket (see
illustration). When the belt tension is correct,
re-tighten all the fasteners and refit the belt
upper cover.
1.6 litre
engine
12 T w o or three separate belts are used on
this engine, depending on whether or not air
conditioning is fitted.
Power steering p u m p drivebelt
13 Check the power steering p u m p drivebelt
7.14a L o o s e n t h e p u m p m o u n t i n g b o l t s ,
7.14c . . . t h e n t u r n t h e a d j u s t e r b o l t a s
required before tightening the locknut
7.13 To i m p r o v e a c c e s s t o t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p drivebelt,
r e m o v e t h e belt g u a r d
first - to improve access, unbolt and remove
the drivebelt guard (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Press
on the belt at the centre-point b e t w e e n the
t w o pulleys, and the drivebelt should deflect
by approximately 5 m m .
14 If adjustment is required, loosen the pump
mountings, the nut and bolt on the adjuster
slot, and the adjuster locknut. Turn the adjuster
bolt as required to set the belt tension, then retighten the locknut and the nut and bolt on the
adjuster slot (see illustrations).
15 With all fixings
clockwise through
using a spanner on
R e - c h e c k the belt
necessary. Refit
completion.
re-tightened, turn the belt
one c o m p l e t e revolution,
the crankshaft pulley bolt.
t e n s i o n , and re-adjust if
the drivebelt guard on
7.14b . . . a n d t h e nut a n d bolt o n t h e
adjuster s l o t . . .
7.18 R e m o v i n g t h e w h e e l a r c h inner panel
Alternator/coolant p u m p drivebelt
16 With the car parked on a level surface,
apply the handbrake and c h o c k the rear
wheels. Loosen the right-hand front wheel
bolts.
17 Raise the front of the vehicle, rest it
securely on axle stands and remove the righthand front road wheel.
18 U n s c r e w and release the fasteners
securing the wheelarch inner panel, to gain
access to the belt run (see illustration).
19 Press firmly on the belt, midway between
the crankshaft and water p u m p pulleys (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . The belt should deflect by
approximately 5 m m .
20 Refer to the advice given in paragraph 2,
noting that the lower drivebelt drives the
alternator and coolant pump.
21 If a d j u s t m e n t is required, loosen the
tensioner upper and lower bolts. Using an
Allen key, turn the hex adjuster as required to
set the belt t e n s i o n , then re-tighten the
tensioner bolts (see illustration).
22 Turn the belt c l o c k w i s e t h r o u g h one
complete revolution, using a spanner on the
crankshaft pulley bolt. R e - c h e c k the belt
tension, and re-adjust if necessary.
23 On completion, refit the wheelarch access
panel and the roadwheel, and lower the car to
the g r o u n d . Tighten the wheel bolts to the
specified torque.
7.19 C h e c k i n g t h e drivebelt t e n s i o n
Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km) L H
7.21 Set t h e belt t e n s i o n , t h e n t i g h t e n t h e
tensioner bolts
8.3 Lift u p t h e w e a t h e r s t r i p w h i c h fits over
t h e filter a c c e s s panel
8.4a U n d o t h e t w o s c r e w s .
Air conditioning c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt
24 Press on the belt at the c e n t r e - p o i n t
between the two pulleys, on the opposite side
t o the tensioner wheel. The drivebelt should
deflect by approximately 5 m m .
25 If adjustment is required, loosen the bolt
on the adjuster slot, and the pivot bolt at the
top of the tensioner arm.
26 Loosen the locknut at the front of the arm,
and turn the adjuster bolt as required to move
the tensioner wheel and set the belt tension.
27 On
completion,
re-tighten
all
the
fasteners. With all fixings r e - t i g h t e n e d , turn
the belt c l o c k w i s e t h r o u g h one c o m p l e t e
revolution, using a spanner on the crankshaft
pulley bolt. Re-check the belt tension, and readjust if necessary.
8
Pollen filter renewal
Note: A pollen filter is not fitted to all models,
and one was not actually fitted to our main
project vehicle seen in the workshop.
1 The air entering the vehicle's ventilation
system is passed through a very fine pleatedpaper air filter element, w h i c h removes
particles of pollen, dust and other airborne
foreign matter. To ensure its c o n t i n u e d
effectiveness, this filter's element m u s t be
renewed at regular intervals. Failure to renew
the element will also result in greatly-reduced
airflow into the passenger c o m p a r t m e n t ,
reducing demisting and ventilation.
2 The pollen filter is located in the air intake at
the base of the windscreen. Open the bonnet
for access.
3 Lift up the separate section of weatherstrip
which fits over the top edge of the pollen filter
access panel (see illustration).
4 U n s c r e w and r e m o v e the t w o retaining
bolts, and pull out the pollen filter access
panel (see illustrations).
5 Reach in t h r o u g h the access panel, and
release the t w o spring clips which retain the
pollen filter. Lower the filter out of its location,
noting which way up it fits (see illustration).
6 As far as possible, clean the inside of the
filter h o u s i n g , and the inside of the access
panel.
8.4b . . . a n d lift o u t t h e a c c e s s panel
8.5 R e m o v e t h e pollen filter by releasing
t h e t w o clips (arrowed)
7 Fit the new filter into position, and secure
with the t w o clips.
8 Refit the access panel, secure with the two
bolts, and clip the weatherstrip into position.
looking for is any indication of a serious leak
(see H a y n e s Hint). Should a leak be f o u n d ,
renew the offending gasket or oil seal by
referring to the appropriate Chapters in this
manual.
2 Also check the security and condition of all
the engine-related pipes and hoses. Ensure
that all cable-ties or securing clips are in place
and in g o o d condition. Clips that are broken
or missing can lead to chafing of the hoses,
pipes or w i r i n g , w h i c h c o u l d cause more
serious problems in the future.
9 Hose and fluid leak check
1 Visually inspect the engine joint faces,
gaskets and seals for any signs of water or oil
leaks. Pay particular attention to the areas
around the cylinder head, oil filter and s u m p
joint faces. Bear in mind that, over a period of
t i m e , s o m e very slight seepage from these
areas is to be expected - what you are really
HAYNES
A leak in the cooling s y s t e m will usually
show up a s whiteor
rust-coloured
deposits on the areas adjoining the leak.
3 Carefully c h e c k the radiator hoses and
heater hoses along their entire length. Renew
any hose that is c r a c k e d , swollen or
deteriorated. Cracks will show up better if the
hose is squeezed. Pay close attention to the
hose clips that secure the hoses to the
cooling system c o m p o n e n t s . Hose clips can
pinch and puncture hoses, resulting in cooling
system leaks (see illustration).
9.3 C h e c k all h o s e s a n d their retaining
clips
1.12 Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
4 Inspect all the cooling system components
(hoses, joint faces etc.) for leaks. A leak in the
cooling system will usually show up as whiteor r u s t - c o l o u r e d d e p o s i t s on the area
adjoining the leak. Where any problems of this
nature are f o u n d on system c o m p o n e n t s ,
renew the c o m p o n e n t or gasket w i t h
reference to Chapter 3.
5 Where applicable, inspect the a u t o m a t i c
transmission fluid cooler hoses for leaks or
deterioration.
6 With the vehicle raised, inspect the fuel
tank and filler neck for punctures, cracks and
other damage. The connection between the
filler neck and t a n k is especially critical.
Sometimes a rubber filler neck or connecting
hose will leak due to loose retaining clamps or
deteriorated rubber.
7 Carefully check all rubber hoses and metal
fuel lines leading away f r o m the fuel tank.
Check for loose c o n n e c t i o n s , deteriorated
hoses, crimped lines, and other damage. Pay
particular attention to the vent pipes and
hoses, which often loop up around the filler
neck and can b e c o m e b l o c k e d or c r i m p e d .
Follow the lines to the front of the vehicle,
carefully inspecting them all the way. Renew
damaged sections as necessary.
8 From within the engine compartment, check
the security of all fuel hose attachments and
pipe unions, and inspect the fuel hoses and
v a c u u m hoses for kinks, chafing and
deterioration (see illustration).
9 Check the condition of the power steering
fluid hoses and pipes.
10 Transmission and
driveshaft gaiter check
I
1 Raise the front of the vehicle and support
on axle s t a n d s . Alternatively, drive the car
onto ramps.
2 Inspect around the transmission for any
sign of leaks or damage. In particular, check
the area around the driveshaft oil/fluid seals
for leakage. Slight seepage should not be of
great c o n c e r n , but a serious leak should be
investigated further, with reference to C h a p ter 7A or 7B.
3 Check the security and c o n d i t i o n of the
wiring and wiring plugs on the transmission
housing.
4 With the vehicle raised and securely
s u p p o r t e d on stands, turn the steering onto
full lock, then slowly rotate the r o a d w h e e l .
Inspect the c o n d i t i o n of the outer c o n s t a n t
velocity (CV) joint rubber gaiters, squeezing
the gaiters to open out the folds. Check for
signs of cracking, splits or deterioration of the
rubber, w h i c h may allow the grease to
escape, and lead to water and grit entry into
the joint. Also c h e c k the security and
condition of the retaining clips. Repeat these
checks on the inner CV joints. If any damage
or deterioration is found, the gaiters should be
renewed (see Chapter 8).
9.8 C h e c k all fuel a n d v a c u u m h o s e s
11.3 C h e c k all b r a k e p i p e s a n d f i t t i n g s for
corrosion
5 At the s a m e t i m e , c h e c k the general
condition of the CV joints themselves by first
holding the driveshaft and a t t e m p t i n g to
rotate the wheel. Repeat this check by holding
the inner joint and a t t e m p t i n g to rotate the
driveshaft. A n y appreciable
movement
indicates wear in the joints, wear in the
driveshaft splines, or a loose driveshaft
retaining nut.
pipes are securely located by the clips
provided on the vehicle underside.
4 At the rear of the vehicle, inspect each rear
brake and its flexible hose, where applicable.
Examine the handbrake cable, tracing it back
from each rear brake and checking for frayed
cables or other d a m a g e . Lubricate the
handbrake cable guides, pivots and other
moving parts with general-purpose grease.
11 Braking system pipes
and hoses check
1 Starting under the bonnet, e x a m i n e the
brake fluid reservoir and master cylinder for
leaks. When a brake fluid leak o c c u r s , it is
normal to find blistered or wrinkled paint in the
area of the leak. Check the metal pipes from
the master cylinder for d a m a g e , and c h e c k
the brake pressure regulator, servo/ABS unit
and fluid unions for leaks.
2 With the vehicle raised and securely
supported on stands, first inspect each front
brake caliper. In particular, check the flexible
hose leading to the caliper for signs of
d a m a g e or leaks, especially where the hose
enters the metal end fitting. Make sure that
the hose is not twisted or kinked, and that it
c a n n o t c o m e into c o n t a c t w i t h any other
components when the steering is on full lock.
3 From the caliper, trace the metal brake
pipes back along the car. Again, look for leaks
from the fluid unions or signs of damage, but
additionally c h e c k the pipes for signs of
corrosion (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . M a k e sure the
12.2 C h e c k all e x h a u s t j o i n t s for s i g n s of
corrosion damage
5 If any damage is f o u n d , refer to Chapter 9
for further information.
12 Exhaust system check
|
1 With the engine cold (at least an hour after
the vehicle has been driven), c h e c k the
complete exhaust system from the engine to
the end of the tailpipe. The exhaust system is
most easily checked with the vehicle raised on
a hoist, or suitably supported on axle stands,
so that the exhaust c o m p o n e n t s are readily
visible and accessible.
2 Check the exhaust pipes and connections
for evidence of leaks, severe corrosion and
damage (see illustration). Make sure that all
brackets and m o u n t i n g s are in g o o d
condition, and that all relevant nuts and bolts
are tight. Leakage at any of the joints or in
other parts of the system will usually show up
as a black sooty stain in the vicinity of the
leak.
3 Rattles and other noises can often be
traced to the exhaust system, especially the
b r a c k e t s and m o u n t i n g s (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
12.3 C h e c k t h e c o n d i t i o n of all e x h a u s t
mounting brackets and rubbers
Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km) 1.13
Try to move the pipes and silencers. If the c o m ponents are able to come into contact with the
body or suspension parts, secure the system
with new mountings. Otherwise separate the
joints (if possible) and twist the pipes as
necessary to provide additional clearance.
13 Steering and
suspension check
^
Front
suspension
and steering
check
1 Raise the front of the vehicle, and securely
s u p p o r t it on axle stands. Where necessary
for i m p r o v e d access, release the fasteners
and remove the engine undertray (where
applicable).
2 Visually inspect the balljoint dust covers
and the steering rack-and-pinion gaiters for
splits, chafing or deterioration. Any wear of
these components will cause loss of lubricant,
together with dirt and water entry, resulting in
rapid deterioration of the balljoints or steering
gear (see illustration).
,3 Check the power steering fluid hoses for
chafing or deterioration, and the pipe and hose
unions for fluid leaks. Also check for signs of
fluid leakage under pressure from the steering
gear rubber gaiters, which w o u l d indicate
failed fluid seals within the steering gear.
4 Grasp the roadwheel at the 12 o'clock and
6 o ' c l o c k positions, and try to rock it. Very
slight free play may be felt, but if the movement
is appreciable, further investigation is necessary
to determine the source. Continue rocking the
wheel while an assistant depresses the
footbrake. If the movement is now eliminated or
significantly reduced, it is likely that the hub
bearings are at fault. If the free play is still
evident with the footbrake depressed, then
there is wear in the suspension joints or
mountings. Before condemning any c o m p o nents, however, check that the roadwheel bolts
are tightened to the specified torque.
5 Now grasp the wheel at the 9 o'clock and
3 o ' c l o c k p o s i t i o n s , and try t o rock it as
before. Any movement felt now may again be
c a u s e d by wear in the hub bearings or the
steering t r a c k - r o d balljoints. If the inner or
outer balljoint is w o r n , the visual m o v e m e n t
will be obvious.
6 Using a large screwdriver or flat bar, check
for wear in the suspension mounting bushes
by levering between the relevant suspension
c o m p o n e n t and its attachment point. S o m e
movement is to be expected as the mountings
are m a d e of rubber, but excessive wear
should be obvious. Also check the condition
of any visible rubber bushes, looking for splits,
cracks or contamination of the rubber.
7 With the car standing on its wheels, have an
assistant turn the steering wheel back and
forth a b o u t an eighth of a turn each w a y .
There s h o u l d be very little, if any, lost
m o v e m e n t b e t w e e n the steering wheel and
roadwheels. If this is not the case, closely
observe the joints- and mountings previously
described, but in addition, check the steering
column universal joints for wear, and the rackand-pinion steering gear itself.
Suspension
strut/shock
absorber
check
8 Check for any signs of fluid leakage around
the suspension strut/shock absorber body, or
from the rubber gaiter around the piston rod.
Should any fluid be noticed, the suspension
s t r u t / s h o c k absorber is defective internally,
and should be r e n e w e d . N o t e : Suspension
struts/shock
absorbers
should always be
renewed in pairs on the same axle.
9 The efficiency of the suspension strut/shock
absorber may be c h e c k e d by bouncing the
vehicle at each corner. Generally speaking, the
body will return to its normal position and stop
after being depressed. If it rises and returns on
a r e b o u n d , the suspension strut/shock
absorber is probably suspect. Examine also
the suspension strut/shock absorber upper
and lower mountings for any signs of wear.
14 Underbody protection check f^>
Raise and support the vehicle on axle
stands. Using an electric torch or lead light,
inspect the entire underside of the vehicle,
paying particular attention to the wheelarches.
Look for any damage to the flexible underbody
coating, which may crack or flake off with age,
leading to corrosion. Also check that the
wheelarch liners are securely attached with any
clips provided - if they come loose, dirt may get
in behind the liners and defeat their purpose. If
there is any damage to the underseal, or any
corrosion, it should be repaired before the
damage gets too serious.
15 Lights and
horn operation check
f|
|k
1 With the ignition s w i t c h e d on where
necessary, check the operation of all exterior
lights.
2 Check the brake lights with the help of an
assistant, or by reversing up close to a reflective
door. Make sure that all the rear lights are
capable of operating independently, without
affecting any of the other lights - for example,
switch on as many rear lights as possible, then
try the brake lights. If any unusual results are
f o u n d , this is usually due to an earth fault or
other poor connection at that rear light unit.
3 Again with the help of an assistant or using
a reflective surface, check as far as possible
that the headlights w o r k on b o t h main and
dipped beam.
4 Replace any defective bulbs with reference
to Chapter 12.
13.2 C h e c k t h e c o n d i t i o n of t h e b a l l j o i n t
rubber covers
Particularly
on
older
vehicles,
bulbs
can
stop
working
as a result
of
^
corrosion
build-up
on the
bulb or its holder - fitting a new bulb
may not cure the problem
in
this
instance.
When replacing
any bulb, if
you find any green or
white-coloured
powdery
deposits,
these
should
be
cleaned off using emery cloth.
5 Check the operation of all interior lights,
including the glovebox and luggage area
illumination lights. Switch on the ignition, and
check that all relevant warning lights c o m e on
as e x p e c t e d - the vehicle h a n d b o o k should
give details of these. Now start the engine,
and check that the appropriate lights go out.
When you are next driving at night, check that
all the instrument panel and facia lighting
w o r k s correctly. If any p r o b l e m s are f o u n d ,
refer to Chapter 12, Section 5.
6 Finally, choose an appropriate time of day
to test the operation of the horn.
16 Hinge and lock lubrication
Lubricate the hinges of the bonnet, doors
and tailgate with light g e n e r a l - p u r p o s e oil.
Similarly, lubricate all latches, locks and lock
strikers, and the d o o r c h e c k straps w i t h
general-purpose
oil
or
grease
(see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . At the s a m e t i m e , c h e c k the
16.1 L u b r i c a t e t h e d o o r h i n g e s a n d c h e c k
straps
1.14 Every 12 000 miles (20 000 km)
security and operation of ail the locks,
adjusting them if necessary (see Chapter 11).
Lightly lubricate t h e bonnet
release
mechanism and cable with suitable grease.
Do not attempt to lubricate the steering lock.
17 Road test
Instruments
electrical
and
equipment
1 Check the operation of all instruments and
electrical equipment.
2 M a k e sure that all instruments read
correctly, and switch on all electrical e q u i p ment in turn, to check that it functions properly.
Steering
and
suspension
3 Check for any abnormalities in the steering,
suspension, handling or road 'feel'.
4 Drive the vehicle, and check that there are
no unusual vibrations or noises.
5 Check that the steering feels positive, with
no excessive 'sloppiness', or roughness, and
c h e c k for any suspension noises w h e n
cornering and driving over bumps.
Drivetrain
6 C h e c k t h e p e r f o r m a n c e of t h e engine,
clutch (where applicable), transmission and
driveshafts.
7 Listen for any unusual noises f r o m the
engine, clutch and transmission.
8 Make sure the engine runs smoothly at idle,
and there is no hesitation on accelerating.
9 Check that, where applicable, t h e c l u t c h
action is s m o o t h and progressive, that the
drive is taken up smoothly, and that the pedal
travel is not excessive. Also listen for any
noises when the clutch pedal is depressed.
10 On manual transmission m o d e l s , c h e c k
that all gears can be engaged s m o o t h l y
without noise, and that the gear lever action is
not abnormally vague or 'notchy'.
11 On automatic transmission models, make
sure that all g e a r c h a n g e s occur s m o o t h l y ,
without snatching, and without an increase in
engine speed between changes. Check that
all the gear positions can be selected with the
vehicle at rest. If any problems are found, they
should be referred to a FIAT dealer.
12 Listen for a metallic clicking sound from
the front of the vehicle, as the vehicle is driven
slowly in a circle with the steering on full-lock.
Carry out this c h e c k in both directions. If a
Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km)
18 Spark plug renewal
attention between scheduled replacement
intervals. Spark plug cleaning is rarely
necessary, and should not be attempted unless
specialised equipment is available, as damage
can easily be caused to the firing ends.
clicking noise is heard, this indicates wear in a
driveshaft joint, in which case renew the joint
if necessary.
Braking
system
13 Make sure that the vehicle does not pull to
one side when braking, and that the wheels
do not lock prematurely when braking hard.
14 Check that there is no vibration through
the steering when braking.
15 Check that t h e handbrake operates
correctly without excessive movement of the
lever, and that it holds the vehicle stationary
on a slope.
16 Test the operation of the brake servo unit
as follows. With the engine off, depress the
f o o t b r a k e four or five times t o exhaust the
v a c u u m . Hold the brake pedal d e p r e s s e d ,
then start the engine. As the engine starts,
there should be a noticeable 'give' in the brake
pedal as vacuum builds up. Allow the engine
to run for at least t w o minutes, and then switch
it off. If the brake pedal is depressed now, it
should be possible to detect a hiss from the
servo as the pedal is depressed. After about
four or five applications, no further hissing
should be heard, and t h e pedal should feel
considerably harder.
away the cover for access to the spark plugs
and leads (see illustrations).
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre
engines
1 The correct functioning of the spark plugs is
vital for the correct running and efficiency of
the engine. It is essential that the plugs fitted
are appropriate for the engine (a suitable type
is specified at the beginning of this Chapter). If
this type is used and the engine is in g o o d
condition, the spark plugs should not need
2 Before removing the spark plugs, allow the
engine time to cool.
3 Remove the three bolts securing the engine
top cover, loosen the fourth bolt at the rear of
the timing cover (where applicable), a n d lift
4 Release the HT leads from the retaining
clips o n t h e t o p of the cylinder head as
necessary.
5 If the marks on the original-equipment spark
plug (HT) leads cannot be seen, mark the leads
1 to 4, to correspond to the cylinder the lead
serves (No 1 cylinder is at the timing belt end
of the engine).
18.3a R e m o v e t h e t h r e e s c r e w s
(arrowed)...
18.3b . . . loosen t h e s c r e w b e h i n d t h e
timing cover . . .
18.3c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e e n g i n e t o p c o v e r
- 1.4 litre e n g i n e
1.2 and 1.4 litre
engines
Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km) 1.15
18.6 Pull t h e HT leads off t h e s p a r k p l u g s
18.7a R e m o v i n g o n e of t h e Allen s c r e w s
under t h e oil filler c a p
18.7b Lifting off t h e e n g i n e t o p c o v e r
6 Carefully pull the lead end fittings upwards
from the plugs, and (where applicable) out of
the recesses in the cylinder head. Grip the
end f i t t i n g , not t h e lead, otherwise the lead
connection
may
be
fractured
(see
illustration).
10 Starting with No 1 coil, unscrew the t w o
bolts securing the coil to the cylinder head
(see illustration).
11 Carefully pull the coil and plug connector
upwards off the plug, and withdraw it from the
cylinder head recess (see illustration).
1.8 litre
All
14 Examination of the spark plugs will give a
good indication of the condition of the engine.
If the insulator nose of the spark plug is clean
and white, with no deposits, this is indicative
of a weak mixture or too hot a plug (a hot plug
transfers heat away from the electrode slowly,
a cold plug transfers heat away quickly).
engine
engines
15 If the tip and insulator nose are covered
with hard black-looking deposits, then this is
indicative that the mixture is too rich. Should the
plug be black and oily, then it is likely that the
engine is fairly w o r n , as well as the mixture
being too rich.
7 Unscrew the oil filler cap, and remove the
t w o Allen s c r e w s c o n c e a l e d u n d e r n e a t h .
Remove the six main cover bolts, and lift off
the engine top cover, for access to the ignition
coil assemblies (see illustrations).
8 Disconnect the wiring plugs f r o m the
ignition coil which fits over each spark plug
(see illustration).
9 To avoid transposing the ignition coils, it is
advisable to work on one assembly at a time.
Alternatively, mark the coil assemblies for
position, noting that No 1 coil is nearest the
timing belt end of the engine.
12 It is advisable to remove the debris from
the spark plug recesses using a clean brush,
v a c u u m cleaner or c o m p r e s s e d air before
removing the plugs. If this is not done, this
debris will drop into the cylinders or lodge in
the spark plug threads.
13 U n s c r e w the plugs using a spark plug
spanner, suitable box spanner or a deep
socket and extension bar (see illustrations).
Keep the socket aligned with the spark plug if it is forcibly moved to one side, the ceramic
insulator may be broken off. As each plug is
removed, examine it as follows.
18.8 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g p l u g f r o m e a c h
coil
18.10 U n s c r e w t h e t w o coil retaining b o l t s
18.11 Pull t h e coil u p w a r d s off its s p a r k
plug
18.13a U n s c r e w t h e p l u g s u s i n g a s o c k e t
a n d e x t e n s i o n bar - 1 . 6 litre e n g i n e . . .
18.13b . . . a n d o n t h e 1.4 litre e n g i n e
18.13c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e m f r o m t h e
engine - note the t w i n - e a r t h electrode plug
16 If the insulator nose is covered with lightcoloured deposits, then the mixture is correct
and it is likely that the engine is in g o o d
condition.
17 The spark plug electrode gap is of
considerable importance as, if it is too large or
too small, the size of the spark and its
efficiency will be seriously impaired. Where the
Lie Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km)
It is very often difficult
to insert
spark
plugs into their holes without
crossthreading
them.
To
avoid
this
possibility, fit a short length of 5/16 inch
internal diameter rubber hose over the
end of the spark plug. The flexible hose
acts as a universal
joint to help
align
the plug with the plug hole. Should the
plug begin to cross-thread,
the hose
will slip on the spark plug,
preventing
thread
damage
to the
aluminium
cylinder
head
gap can be adjusted, it should be set to the
value specified at the start of this Chapter.
N o t e : Spark plugs with multiple earth electrodes are becoming an increasingly
common
fitment, especially to vehicles equipped
with
catalytic
converters.
Unless there is clear
information to the contrary, no attempt should
be made to adjust the plug gap on a spark plug
with more than one earth electrode.
18 To set the gap, measure it with a feeler
blade and then bend o p e n , or c l o s e d , the
outer plug electrode until the correct gap is
achieved. The centre electrode should never
be bent, as this may crack the insulator and
cause plug failure, if nothing worse. If using
feeler blades, the gap is correct w h e n the
appropriate-size blade is a firm sliding fit.
19 Special spark plug electrode
gap
adjusting tools are available from most motor
a c c e s s o r y s h o p s , or f r o m s o m e spark plug
manufacturers.
20 Before fitting the spark plugs, check that
the threaded connector sleeves are tight, and
that the plug exterior surfaces and threads are
clean. It's often difficult to screw in new spark
plugs without cross-threading them - this can
be avoided using a piece of rubber hose (see
H a y n e s Hint).
21 Remove the rubber hose (if used), and
tighten the plug to the specified torque using
the spark plug socket and a torque wrench. If
a torque wrench is not available, tighten the
plug by hand until it just seats, then tighten it
by no more than a quarter of a turn further
with the plug s o c k e t and handle. Refit the
remaining spark plugs in the same manner.
22 Refit the HT leads (or ignition coils)
securely in their correct order.
23 Where applicable, refit the engine t o p
cover, using a reversal of the removal
procedure.
19.1 L o o s e n t h e s e c u r i n g clip, a n d pull off
t h e air inlet d u c t . . .
19.2a L o o s e n t h e s e c u r i n g s c r e w s
(arrowed)...
<
19.2b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e air cleaner lid
19.3 Lift o u t t h e air filter e l e m e n t , n o t i n g
w h i c h w a y r o u n d it f i t s
19 Air filter renewal
20 Fuel filter renewal
I
1 Release the metal retaining band securing
the air inlet d u c t to the air cleaner lid, and
separate the d u c t f r o m the lid (see
illustration).
2 Remove the screws securing the air cleaner
lid, and lift the lid away (see illustrations).
3 Lift out the filter element, noting which way
round it fits (see illustration).
4 Remove any debris that may have collected
inside the air cleaner.
5 Fit a new air filter element in position, noting
any direction-of-fitting markings and ensuring
that the edges are securely seated.
6 Refit the air cleaner lid and secure with the
s c r e w s . Refit the air inlet d u c t , and secure
with the retaining band.
20.3 U n s c r e w t h e b o l t s s e c u r i n g t h e filter
c o v e r panel
A
Warning:
Refer to the notes in
Safety
first!, and follow
them
implicitly.
Petrol
is a
highlydangerous
and volatile
liquid, and
the
precautions
necessary
when handling
it
cannot be
overstressed.
N o t e : On later 1.6 litre models, and all 1.2 litre
models, an in-line fuel filter is not fitted (even
though the plastic cover panel still appears
under the car). On these models, the only
filters are fitted to the base of the fuel
pump/sender unit, inside the fuel tank - these
are not routinely replaced.
1 The fuel filter is situated underneath the rear
of the vehicle, next to the fuel tank. To gain
access to the filter, c h o c k the front wheels,
then jack up the rear of the vehicle and
support it securely on axle stands.
2 Depressurise the fuel system with reference
to the relevant Part of Chapter 4.
3 To gain access to the filter, unbolt and
remove the plastic cover panel fitted
underneath it (see illustration).
4 If y o u have t h e m , fit hose c l a m p s to the
filter inlet and outlet hoses. These are not
essential, but even with the
system
depressurised, there will still be an amount of
petrol in the pipes (and the old filter), and this
will s i p h o n out w h e n the pipes are
disconnected. Even with hose clamps fitted,
the old filter will contain s o m e fuel, so have
some rags ready to soak up any spillage.
Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km) 1.17
5 Before removing the filter, note any
direction-of-flow markings on the filter body,
and check against the new filter - the arrow
s h o u l d point in the direction of fuel f l o w
(following the hose leading to the front of the
car) (see illustration).
6 The inlet and outlet hoses are e q u i p p e d
with quick-release connectors. To release the
c o n n e c t o r s , squeeze t h e m t o g e t h e r at the
sides, then pull apart (see illustration).
7 Loosen the retaining c l a m p bolt and
remove the old filter (see illustration).
8 If the fuel hoses show any sign of damage,
or if the quick-release c o n n e c t o r s are not
making a secure fit, seek the advice of a FIAT
dealer on renewing the hoses.
9 Fit the new filter into position, with the flow
marking arrow correctly orientated, and
tighten the retaining c l a m p bolt (see
illustration).
10 Reconnect the fuel hoses, ensuring that
no dirt is allowed to enter the hoses or filter
c o n n e c t i o n s , and that the quick-release
connectors click together fully.
11 Start the engine (there may be a delay as
the system re-pressurises and the new filter
fills with fuel). Let the engine run for several
minutes while y o u c h e c k t h e filter hose
connections for leaks.
12 Refit the cover panel below the filter,
secure with the bolts, then lower the vehicle to
the ground.
Warning: Dispose safely of the old
filter; it will be highly
flammable,
and may explode if thrown on a
fire.
A
21 Auxiliary drivebelt
check and renewal
1.2 litre
engine
1 Remove the three bolts securing the engine
upper cover, and remove the cover for access
to the belts.
2 With the car parked on a level surface, apply
the handbrake and c h o c k the rear wheels.
Loosen the right-hand front wheel bolts.
3 Raise the front of the vehicle, rest it
securely on axle stands and remove the righthand front roadwheel.
4 Unscrew and release the fasteners securing
the wheelarch inner panel, to gain access to
the belt run.
20.5 N o t e t h e f l o w d i r e c t i o n a r r o w b e f o r e
r e m o v i n g t h e o l d filter
20.6 D i s c o n n e c t i n g o n e of t h e q u i c k release h o s e s
7 Note that it is not unusual for a ribbed belt
to exhibit small cracks in the edges of the belt
ribs, and unless these are extensive or very
deep, belt renewal is not essential.
8 Using a socket and wrench on the crankshaft pulley bolt, rotate the crankshaft so that
the full length of the drivebelt can be examined.
9 If the belt is to be r e m o v e d , loosen the
fasteners described in Section 7 and slip the
drivebelt from the pulleys.
10 Refitting the belt is a reversal of removal,
making sure that the belt ribs engage properly
with the pulley grooves. Tension the belt using
the information in Section 7.
17 If the belt is to be removed, first remove
the air c o n d i t i o n i n g c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt
(where applicable) as d e s c r i b e d previously.
Loosen the fasteners on the alternator as
described in Section 7, and slip the drivebelt
from the pulleys.
18 Refitting the belt is a reversal of removal,
making sure that the belt ribs engage properly
w i t h the pulley grooves. On models with air
conditioning, loosely fit the alternator drivebelt
first, then fit and tension the c o m p r e s s o r
drivebelt before tensioning the alternator belt.
Tension the drivebelts using the information in
Section 7.
Air conditioning c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt
1.6 litre
11 Where fitted, the drivebelt is the 'middle'
drivebelt of three. The compressor is mounted
at the rear of the engine, below the alternator.
12 C h e c k the belt using the information in
paragraphs 6 to 8.
13 If the belt is to be removed, first remove
the p o w e r steering p u m p drivebelt as
described previously. Loosen the fasteners on
the c o m p r e s s o r as d e s c r i b e d in Section 7,
and slip the drivebelt from the pulleys.
14 Refitting the belt is a reversal of removal,
making sure that the belt ribs engage properly
w i t h the pulley grooves. Tension the
c o m p r e s s o r and p u m p drivebelts using the
information in Section 7.
19 To improve access, remove the wheelarch
inner panel as described in paragraphs 2 to 4.
Alternator drivebelt
15 The alternator is fitted at the rear of the
engine.
16 C h e c k the belt using the information in
paragraphs 6 to 8.
engine
Air conditioning c o m p r e s s o r drivebelt
20 The air c o n d i t i o n i n g c o m p r e s s o r is
mounted at the front of the engine.
21 Check the belt using the information in
paragraphs 6 to 8.
22 Loosen the fasteners on the tensioner
pulley as described in Section 7, and slip the
drivebelt from the pulleys.
23 Refitting the belt is a reversal of removal,
noting the following points:
a) Fit the belt around the pulleys as noted on
removal, with the flat side of the belt over
the tensioner wheel. Make sure that the
belt ribs engage properly with the pulley
grooves. Make sure that any slack in the
belt is adjacent to the tensioner.
b) Tension the belt using the information
Section 7.
in
Power steering p u m p drivebelt
5 The power steering p u m p is located at the
front of the engine. Check the condition of the
pump drivebelt as follows.
6 Look for cracks, splitting and fraying on the
surface of the belt; c h e c k also for signs of
glazing (shiny patches) and separation of the
belt plies. If damage or wear is visible, the belt
should be renewed. If there is any evidence of
contamination by oil, grease or coolant, the
reason should be investigated without delay.
20.7 R e m o v i n g t h e fuel filter
20.9 T i g h t e n t h e filter c l a m p bolt securely
Lis Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km)
be removed first, as described previously.
Loosen the pump mountings, the nut and bolt
on the adjuster slot, and the adjuster locknut.
Turn the adjuster bolt to slacken the belt
tension, then slip the belt from the power
steering pump pulley (see illustrations).
29 Refitting the belt'is a reversal of removal,
making sure that the belt ribs engage properly
with the pulley grooves. Tension the belt using
the information in Section 7.
1.4 and 1.8 litre
21.25b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e auxiliary
drivebelt f r o m t h e pulleys
21.25a L o o s e n t h e t e n s i o n e r b o l t s . . .
c) Refit the wheelarch access panel and the
roadwheel, and lower the car to the
ground. Tighten the wheel bolts to the
specified torque.
Alternator/coolant p u m p drivebelt
24 C h e c k the belt using the information in
paragraphs 6 to 8.
25 If the belt is to be r e m o v e d , either for
servicing work or renewal, remove the air c o n ditioning compressor belt (where applicable)
as described previously. Loosen the tensioner
bolts, and release the belt t e n s i o n . Noting
how the belt is fitted around the pulleys, slip
the belt off and remove it (see illustrations).
26 Refitting the belt is a reversal of removal,
noting the following points:
a) Fit the belt around all the pulleys as noted
on removal, apart from the tensioner
pulley, making sure that the belt ribs
engage properly with the pulley grooves.
b)
c)
d)
ej
Make sure that any slack in the belt is
adjacent to the tensioner.
Turn the tensioner pulley fully anticlockwise, then slip the flat side of the
belt over the tensioner pulley.
Tension the belt using the information in
Section 7.
Where applicable, refit the air
conditioning compressor drivebelt as
described previously.
Refit the wheelarch access panel and the
roadwheel, and lower the car to the
ground. Tighten the wheel bolts to the
specified torque.
Power steering p u m p drivebelt
27 C h e c k the belt using the information in
paragraphs 6 to 8.
28 If the belt is to be removed, either for
servicing work or renewal, the lower belt (which
drives the alternator and coolant pump) must
^^^^^ 4 \ \ \ \ A \
21.28b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e drivebelt f r o m
t h e s t e e r i n g p u m p pulley
engines
30 To improve access, remove the wheelarch
inner panel as described in paragraphs 2 to 4.
Also r e m o v e the upper guard f r o m the
drivebelt, w h i c h is secured by t w o bolts release the hose which is also clipped to the
belt guard (see illustration).
31 C h e c k the belt using the information in
paragraphs 6 to 8.
32 If the belt is to be r e m o v e d , either for
servicing work or renewal, first note how the
belt is fitted around the pulleys. Using a
spanner on the drivebelt tensioner bolt, rotate
the tensioner a n t i - c l o c k w i s e to release the
belt tension, then slip the belt from the pulleys
(see illustration).
33 Refitting the belt is a reversal of removal,
noting the following points:
a) Fit the belt around all the pulleys as noted
on removal, apart from the tensioner
pulley, making sure that the belt ribs
engage properly with the pulley grooves.
Make sure that any slack in the belt is
adjacent to the tensioner.
b) Turn the tensioner pulley fully anticlockwise, then slip the flat side of the
belt over the tensioner pulley.
c) Release the tensioner, and allow it to
tension the belt.
d) Using a spanner on the crankshaft pulley
bolt, turn the belt clockwise through one
complete revolution, checking that the
belt runs true, and that the belt ribs stay
located in the pulley grooves.
e) Refit the wheelarch access panel and the
roadwheel, and lower the car to the
ground. Tighten the wheel bolts to the
specified torque.
22 Clutch cable adjustment
N o t e : This check does not apply to models
with a hydraulically-operated
clutch - the
clutch on these models is self-adjusting.
Refer to Chapter 6, Section 2.
23 Handbrake adjustment
21.30 R e m o v i n g t h e drivebelt u p p e r g u a r d
21.32 Release t h e belt t e n s i o n , t h e n slip
t h e belt f r o m t h e pulleys
%
1 The handbrake should be fully applied by
the fifth click from the handbrake lever ratchet
mechanism.
Every 24 000 miles (40 000 km) 1.19
2 To fully c h e c k t h e operation of the h a n d brake, chock the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the car and support it on axle stands.
3 Release the h a n d b r a k e c o m p l e t e l y , and
check that both rear wheels are free to turn. If
this is not the case, either the handbrake has
been over-adjusted, the cable is binding, or
there is a problem with the rear drums (investigate using the information in Chapter 9).
4 Apply the handbrake by three clicks of the
ratchet. By this point, both rear wheels should
become difficult to turn by hand. By the time the
lever has been set to the fifth notch (if not before) the wheels should be completely locked.
5 In practice, it may be f o u n d that the lever
will not travel five notches - provided the
handbrake releases completely, and can be
fully a p p l i e d , it is p e r h a p s unnecessary to
adjust the cable in this instance. If the lever
travels more than five notches, adjustment is
required, as follows.
6 Remove the gaiter from the handbrake
lever, for access to the adjuster nut. The gaiter
clips into a collar/groove at the base of the
handbrake grip, and has a lip around its base
which clips into the hole in the centre console.
Release the gaiter, and lift it over the
handbrake lever.
7 Adjust the nut at the base of the lever as
required, until the operation of the handbrake
is satisfactory. On completion, lower the rear
of the car to the ground.
24 Exhaust emissions check
^>
This c h e c k is part of the m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s
maintenance schedule, and involves testing
the exhaust emissions using an exhaust gas
analyser. Unless a fault is suspected, this test
is not essential, although it should be noted
that it is recommended by the manufacturers.
In the majority of cases, adjusting the idle
speed and mixture is either not possible, or
requires access to d e d i c a t e d FIAT test
e q u i p m e n t . Exhaust emissions testing is
included as part of the MoT test.
25 Engine management system j K
fault code check
1 This c h e c k is part of the m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s
maintenance
schedule,
and
involves
' i n t e r r o g a t i n g ' the engine
management
control unit (and t h o s e for the a u t o m a t i c
transmission and/or ABS, as applicable) using
special d e d i c a t e d test e q u i p m e n t . Such
testing will allow the test equipment to read
any fault codes stored in the electronic control
unit memory (see illustration).
Every 36 000 miles (60 000 km)
26 Brake fluid renewal
A
1
Warning:
Brake
hydraulic
fluid
can harm your eyes and
damage
painted surfaces, so use
extreme
caution when handling and pouring it. Do
not use fluid that has been standing
open
for some time, as it absorbs moisture
from
the air. Excess
moisture
can cause a
dangerous loss of braking
effectiveness.
1 The p r o c e d u r e is similar to that for the
bleeding of the hydraulic system as described
in Chapter 9. The brake fluid reservoir should
be e m p t i e d by s i p h o n i n g , using a clean
poultry baster or similar before starting, and
allowance should be made for the old fluid to
be expelled w h e n bleeding a section of the
circuit.
3 T o p - u p to the MAX level with new fluid, and
c o n t i n u e p u m p i n g until only the new fluid
remains in the reservoir, and new fluid can be
seen emerging from the bleed screw. Tighten
the screw, and top the reservoir level up to the
MAX level line.
4 Work through all the remaining bleed screws
in the sequence until new fluid can be seen at
all of t h e m . Be careful to keep the master
cylinder reservoir topped-up to above the MIN
level at all times, or air may enter the system
and greatly increase the length of the task.
5 When the operation is complete, check that
all bleed screws are securely tightened, and
that their dust caps are refitted. Wash off all
traces of spilt fluid, and recheck the fluid level.
2 W o r k i n g as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 9, open
the first bleed s c r e w in the s e q u e n c e , and
p u m p the brake pedal gently until nearly all
the old fluid has been e m p t i e d f r o m the
master cylinder reservoir.
^
Old hydraulic
fluid is often
much darker in colour
than
the new, making it easy to
distinguish
the two.
27.3 U n s c r e w i n g t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n oil
filler/level p l u g
25.1 Connector plug for use w i t h diagnostic
equipment - 1 . 6 litre m o d e l s h o w n
2 Unless a fault is suspected, this test is not
essential, although it should be noted that it is
recommended by the manufacturers.
3 It is possible for quite serious faults to
o c c u r in the engine m a n a g e m e n t s y s t e m
without the owner being aware of it. Certain
engine management system faults will cause
the system to enter an e m e r g e n c y b a c k - u p
m o d e , w h i c h is often so s o p h i s t i c a t e d that
engine performance is not apparently m u c h
affected. If a problem has caused the system
to enter its back-up mode, this will usually be
m o s t apparent w h e n starting and running
from cold.
6 Check the operation of the brakes before
taking the car on the road.
27 Manual transmission
oil level check
1 Park the car on a level surface. The oil level
must be checked before the car is driven, or
at least 5 minutes after the engine has been
switched off. If.the oil is checked immediately
after driving the car, s o m e of the oil will
remain d i s t r i b u t e d around the transmission
c o m p o n e n t s , resulting in an inaccurate level
reading.
2 T h e filler/level plug is on t h e front of the
transmission h o u s i n g , typically next to the
reversing light switch. Access is possible from
a b o v e , but is better f r o m below, o n c e the
engine undertray has been removed (where
applicable).
3 Wipe clean the area around the filler/level
plug. A large Allen key or s o c k e t will be
required to r e m o v e the p l u g , w h i c h will
probably be quite tight (see illustration).
4 Remove the plug, and check the oil level.
This can be d o n e w i t h your finger;
alternatively, a piece of bent wire c a n be
inserted through the plug hole to assess the
oil level inside the transmission - if this is
1.20 Every 36 000 miles (60 000 km)
27.4a R e m o v e t h e filler/level plug . .
done, make sure that whatever is used cannot
break off or fall inside (see illustrations).
5 The oil level should reach the lower edge of
the filler/level hole. A certain amount of oil will
have gathered behind the filler/level plug, and
will trickle out when it is removed; this does
n o t necessarily indicate that t h e level is
correct. To ensure that a true level is
e s t a b l i s h e d , wait until t h e initial trickle has
s t o p p e d , then a d d oil t h r o u g h the hole as
necessary until a trickle of new oil can be seen
emerging (see illustration). The level will be
correct when the flow ceases; use only g o o d quality oil of the specified type.
6 Filling t h e transmission with oil is an
extremely awkward operation; above all, allow
plenty of time for the oil level to settle properly
before checking it. If a large amount is added
to the transmission, and a large amount flows
out on checking the level, refit the filler/level
plug; take the vehicle on a short journey so
that the new oil is distributed fully around the
transmission c o m p o n e n t s , then recheck the
level when it has settled again.
7 If the transmission has been overfilled so
that oil flows out when the filler/level plug is
r e m o v e d , c h e c k that t h e car is c o m p l e t e l y
level (front-to-rear and s i d e - t o - s i d e ) , and
allow the surplus t o drain off into a suitable
container.
27.4b . . . a n d c h e c k t h e oil level u s i n g a
suitable p r o b e
27.5 If necessary, t o p - u p t h e oil level, until
oil j u s t s t a r t s t o t r i c k l e o u t
8 When t h e level is c o r r e c t , refit t h e p l u g ,
tightening it to the specified torque, and wipe
off any spilt oil. Refit the engine undertray
(where removed).
9 FIAT d o not state that the transmission oil
need ever be drained and refilled as part of
the routine maintenance schedule. However,
a car w h i c h has c o v e r e d a large mileage
would clearly benefit from this being done. For
t h o s e o w n e r s w h o wish t o c h a n g e t h e
transmission oil, a drain plug is provided on
the base of t h e transmission housing (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Once the oil has been drained,
tighten the plug t o the specified torque, and
refill until the level is correct.
27.9 T r a n s m i s s i o n oil d r a i n p l u g
(arrowed)
28 Rear brake shoe check
1 On some models, the thickness of friction
material remaining on one of the brake shoes
can be o b s e r v e d t h r o u g h an inspection
window in the brake backplate.
2 Loosen the rear wheel bolts and chock the
front wheels. Jack up the rear of the car and
s u p p o r t on axle s t a n d s . Remove t h e rear
wheels.
Every 48 000 miles (80 000 km)
29 Evaporative emission control
system C h e c k
§^
^
Check all t h e engine v a c u u m and fuel
vapour hoses associated w i t h t h e system
(typically blue in colour) for signs of cracking,
leaks, and general deterioration. For more
i n f o r m a t i o n , see Chapter 4 C . This c h e c k is
Every 72 000 miles (120 000 km)
Refer to the relevant Part of Chapter 2.
30 Timing belt renewal
1
3 The Inspection w i n d o w in t h e brake
b a c k p l a t e may be plugged with a sealing
grommet, which can be prised out. A torch or
inspection light will probably be required, as
well as a small mirror if access is difficult. If
the friction material on any shoe is worn down
to the specified minimum thickness or less, all
four shoes must be renewed as a set.
4 For a c o m p r e h e n s i v e c h e c k (or on cars
where no inspection window is provided), the
brake drum should be removed and cleaned.
This will also allow the wheel cylinders to be
checked, and the condition of the brake drum
itself to be fully examined (see Chapter 9).
particularly relevant if any fuel smells have
been noted, in which case all fuel pipes and
connections should be closely inspected.
Maintenance procedures 1.21
31.3a O p e n i n g t h e r a d i a t o r b l e e d s c r e w o n
a 1.4 litre e n g i n e . . .
31.3b . . . a n d o n a 1.6 litre e n g i n e
31.3c Typical heater h o s e bleed s c r e w •
1.4 litre e n g i n e s h o w n
Every 2 years (regardless of mileage)
31 Coolant renewal
Cooling
A
system
draining
Warning: Wait until the engine is
cold
before
starting
this
procedure.
Do
not
allow
antifreeze
to come in contact
with
your
skin, or with the painted
surfaces
of the
vehicle. Rinse off spills immediately
with
plenty
of water. Never leave
antifreeze
lying around in an open container, or in a
puddle in the driveway
or on the
garage
floor. Children and pets are attracted by its
sweet smell, but antifreeze
can be fatal if
ingested.
1 With the engine completely cold, cover the
expansion tank c a p w i t h a w a d of rag, and
slowly turn the c a p anti-clockwise to relieve
the pressure in the cooling system (a hissing
sound will normally be heard). Wait until any
pressure remaining in the system is released,
then continue to turn the c a p until it can be
removed.
Depending on model, there will be one or t w o
on or around the radiator, and one in each of
the hoses leading to the heater (towards the
engine
compartment
bulkhead)
{see
illustrations).
4 Position a suitable container beneath the
radiator bottom hose connection, then release
the retaining clip and ease the hose from the
radiator s t u b (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . S o m e
models have hose clips which cannot be reused, as they have to be cut off. Take care not
to d a m a g e the hose as this is d o n e , and
obtain new clips for refitting.
8 If the coolant has been drained for a reason
other than renewal, then provided it is clean and
less than t w o years old, it can be re-used,
though this is not recommended (see Antifreeze
type and mixture later in this Section).
5 If the hose joint has not been disturbed for
s o m e t i m e , it will be necessary t o gently
manipulate the hose to break the joint. Do not
use excessive force, or the radiator stub could
be d a m a g e d . Allow the coolant to drain into
the container. Some models also have a drain
tap at the base of the radiator.
10 If coolant renewal has been neglected, or
if the antifreeze mixture has become diluted,
then in time, the cooling system may gradually
lose efficiency, as the coolant passages
become restricted due to rust, scale deposits,
and other sediment. Flushing the system clean
can restore the cooling system efficiency.
6 On 1.6 litre models, a cylinder block drain
plug is p r o v i d e d on the front of the engine,
next to the starter m o t o r (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Removing this plug will allow more complete
draining to be carried out.
9 Once all the coolant has drained, reconnect
the hose to the radiator and secure it in
position w i t h the retaining clip. Where
applicable, apply a little sealant to the block
drain plug t h r e a d s , then fit and tighten it
securely.
Cooling
system
flushing
11 The
radiator
should
be
flushed
independently of t h e engine, t o avoid
unnecessary contamination.
Radiator flushing
3 Open all the cooling system bleed screws.
7 On 1.6 and 1.8 litre models, loosen the clip
securing t h e small-diameter hose t o t h e
thermostat housing - this hose leads back to
the expansion tank. FIAT state that this hose
must be blown through (with compressed air)
to ensure that all coolant has drained from it.
If compressed air is not available, disconnect
the hose and allow it to drain - antifreeze may
be harmful if ingested.
12 To flush the radiator, disconnect the top
a n d b o t t o m h o s e s a n d any other relevant
hoses f r o m the radiator, w i t h reference to
Chapter 3.
13 Insert a garden hose into the radiator top
inlet. Direct a flow of clean water through the
radiator, and c o n t i n u e flushing until clean
water e m e r g e s f r o m the radiator b o t t o m
outlet.
31.4a L o o s e n t h e r a d i a t o r b o t t o m h o s e
clip...
31.4b . . . t h e n release t h e b o t t o m h o s e
f r o m t h e radiator, a n d d r a i n t h e c o o l a n t
into a c o n t a i n e r
31.6 Cylinder b l o c k drain p l u g (arrowed)
o n 1.6 litre e n g i n e
2 Where necessary, release the fasteners and
remove the engine undertray. On all models
except those with the 1.4 litre engine, access to
the radiator and cooling system bleed screws
may be improved by removing the two screws
securing the air inlet shroud over the radiator.
1.22 Every 2 years
29 Start the engine and run it at idle.
30 Particularly
on
models
with
air
c o n d i t i o n i n g , have an assistant raise the
engine speed to a p p r o x i m a t e l y 3000 r p m
every 30 s e c o n d s while the engine is
w a r m i n g - u p . When this is d o n e , carefully
o p e n the bleed screw on the heater hose bear in mind the dangers of hot coolant - and
bleed out any trapped air.
31.24a R e m o v e t h e e x p a n s i o n t a n k
cap...
31.24b . . . a n d fill t h e s y s t e m s l o w l y
14 If after a reasonable period, the water still
does not run clear, the radiator can be flushed
with a g o o d proprietary cooling system
cleaning agent. It is i m p o r t a n t that their
m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s instructions are f o l l o w e d
carefully. If the contamination is particularly
b a d , insert the hose in the radiator b o t t o m
outlet, and reverse-flush the radiator.
20 Before adding antifreeze, the cooling
system should be c o m p l e t e l y d r a i n e d ,
preferably flushed, and all hoses checked for
condition and security.
21 After filling with antifreeze, a label should
be attached to the expansion tank, stating the
t y p e and c o n c e n t r a t i o n of antifreeze u s e d ,
and the date installed. Any s u b s e q u e n t
t o p p i n g - u p s h o u l d be m a d e with the same
type and concentration of antifreeze.
Engine flushing
15 To flush the engine, remove
the
t h e r m o s t a t as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 3, then
temporarily refit the thermostat cover.
16 With the t o p
and
bottom
hoses
d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m the radiator, insert a
garden hose into the radiator top hose. Direct
a clean flow of water through the engine, and
continue flushing until clean water emerges
from the radiator bottom hose.
17 On c o m p l e t i o n of flushing, refit the
t h e r m o s t a t and reconnect the hoses with
reference to Chapter 3.
Antifreeze
type and
mixture
18 The antifreeze should always be renewed
at the specified intervals. This is necessary
not only to maintain the antifreeze properties,
but also t o prevent corrosion w h i c h w o u l d
otherwise o c c u r as the corrosion inhibitors
become progressively less effective.
19 A l w a y s
use
ethylene-glycol-based
antifreeze suitable for use in m i x e d - m e t a l
cooling systems. The total system capacity is
q u o t e d in the Specifications, as well as the
percentage of neat antifreeze required to give
adequate p r o t e c t i o n against freezing (and
corrosion).
31.27 Bleed s c r e w (arrowed) o n heater
hose
22 Do not use engine antifreeze in the
washer system, as it will cause damage to the
vehicle paintwork.
Cooling
system
filling
31 Initially, add more coolant as necessary to
keep the level up to the MAX mark, but only
for the first few minutes after the engine is
started.
32 Once the coolant level has stabilised, refit
the expansion tank c a p securely. Let the
engine c o n t i n u e to w a r m up until normal
operating temperature is reached, indicated
by the temperature gauge, or by the radiator
fan cutting in. Keep the engine running for a
few more minutes, then switch it off and allow
it to cool for several hours (preferably,
overnight).
33 Check for leaks, particularly around
disturbed components.
34 Check the coolant level in the expansion
tank, and t o p - u p if necessary. Note that the
system must be cold before an accurate level
is indicated in the expansion tank.
Airlocks
23 Before a t t e m p t i n g to fill the cooling
system, make sure that all hoses and clips are
in good condition, and that the clips are tight.
Note that an antifreeze mixture must be used
all year r o u n d , to prevent c o r r o s i o n of the
engine c o m p o n e n t s (see following s u b Section).
35 If, after draining and refilling the system,
symptoms of overheating are found which did
not occur previously, then the fault is almost
certainly due to trapped air at some point in the
system, causing an airlock and restricting the
flow of coolant; usually, the air is trapped
because the system was refilled too quickly.
24 Remove the expansion tank filler cap, and
fill the system by slowly pouring the coolant
into the e x p a n s i o n tank to prevent airlocks
from forming (see illustrations).
25 If the coolant is being renewed, begin by
pouring in a litre of water, f o l l o w e d by the
correct quantity of antifreeze to make up the
required mixture, then t o p - u p w i t h more
water. The best o p t i o n , if suitable clean
containers are available, is to make up the
mixture before pouring it in. Bear in mind that
the system capacities q u o t e d are only
a p p r o x i m a t e - it is unlikely that all the old
coolant will have drained, so allowance must
be made when refilling.
36 If an-airlock is s u s p e c t e d , first try gently
squeezing all visible coolant hoses. A coolant
hose which is full of air feels quite different to
one full of coolant, w h e n s q u e e z e d . After
refilling the s y s t e m , m o s t airlocks will clear
o n c e the system has c o o l e d , and been
topped up.
26 During the initial stages of filling, squeeze
the radiator t o p and b o t t o m hoses to help
expel any t r a p p e d air in the s y s t e m . Fill the
system until coolant (free of air bubbles)
e m e r g e s f r o m the radiator bleed screw(s),
then tighten them securely.
27 Continue filling the system until coolant
emerges from the bleed screws on the heater
hoses, then tighten the s c r e w s
(see
illustration).
28 Now top-up the coolant level to the MAX
mark and refit the expansion tank cap loosely.
Particularly on models with air conditioning, it
is important not to overfill the expansion tank
at this stage.
37 While the engine is running at operating
temperature, switch on the heater and heater
fan, and check for heat output. Provided there
is sufficient coolant in the system, lack of heat
o u t p u t c o u l d be due to an airlock in the
system.
38 Airlocks can have more serious effects
than simply reducing heater output - a severe
airlock could reduce coolant flow around the
engine. Check that the radiator top hose is hot
when the engine is at operating temperature a t o p hose which stays cold c o u l d be the
result of an airlock (or a n o n - o p e n i n g
thermostat).
39 If the problem persists, s t o p the engine
and allow it to cool down c o m p l e t e l y , before
unscrewing the expansion tank filler c a p or
opening the bleed screws and squeezing the
hoses to bleed out the t r a p p e d air. In the
worst case, the system will have to be at least
partially drained (this time, the coolant can be
saved for re-use) and flushed to clear the
problem.
12»1
Chapter 12
Body electrical systems
Contents
Airbag system - precautions and general information
Airbag system components - removal and refitting
Anti-theft alarm/engine immobiliser system general information
Bulbs (exterior lights) - renewal
Bulbs (interior lights) - renewal
Cigarette lighter - removal and refitting
Electrical fault finding - general information
Exterior light units - removal and refitting
Fuses and relays - general information
General information and precautions
Headlight beam alignment - general information
21
22
20
4
5
15
2
6
3
1
8
Horn - removal and refitting
Instrument panel - removal and refitting
Loudspeakers - removal and refitting
Radio aerial - removal and refitting
Radio/cassette player - removal and refitting
Speedometer sender unit - removal and refitting
Switches - removal and refitting
Tailgate wiper motor - removal and refitting
Windscreen wiper motor - removal and refitting
Windscreen/tailgate/headlight washer system components removal and refitting
Wiper arm - removal and refitting
9
7
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
17
19
Degrees of difficulty
§k
|k
Fairly easy, suitable
§x
for beginner with
suitable for competent
expenence
jj^
s o m e experience
DIY mechanic
Specifications
Note: The following
fuse information
is for pre-1998
| k
Fairly difficult,
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
^
D i f f i c u l t suitable for
mechanic
models. Refer to your handbook
^
experienced DIY
for information
V e r y difficult,
suitable for expert DIY
^
^
or professional
on later models.
Main fusebox
Fuse
Amp
Circuit
1
15
2
10
3
10
4
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
13
14
10
10
10
10
10
10
30
30
20
20
15
30
Reversing lights, stop lights, direction indicators, instrument panel
power supply, check panel power supply, electric mirrors control,
radio power supply, remote control power supply
Radio power supply, internal lighting, glove compartment light, boot
light, door lock/unlock remote control power supply, alarm system
power supply, clock power supply
Right side light and left tail light, right number plate light, radio
illumination, instrument panel illumination and side/tail lights warning
lamp, cigar lighter illumination, switch panel illumination
Left side light and right tail light, left number plate light, manual
climate control/heater controls illumination
Left dipped beam headlight
Right dipped beam headlight, headlight alignment control
Right main beam headlight
Left main beam headlight, main beam headlight warning light
Rearfoglight
Hazard lights
Heated rear window, heated rear window warning light
Electric climate control motor (manual version)
Horn
Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer, rear window wiper, rear
window washer, headlamp washers
Electric heater motor, cigar lighter, manual climate control relay
12*2 Body electrical systems
Fuses above control unit
Fuse
Amp
Circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
20
20
20
5
30
7.5
Electric sunroof, heated seats
Front foglights
Door central locking
Airbag
Electric windows
Electric mirror defrosting
Fuses behind glovebox
Fuse
Amp
Circuit
1
2
30
15
Injection system (1.8 litre engine)
Fuel pump (1.8 litre engine)
Fuses on left-hand side of engine compartment rear panel
Fuse
Amp
Circuit
1
2
3
4
5
80
60
40
30
60
Control unit
Optional devices
Ignition switch
Injection/ignition system
ABS system
Fuses in front of battery
Fuse
Amp
Circuit
1
20
Headlamp washer
5
ABS
Automatic transmission cooling oil circuit
Automatic transmission power supply (key)
Automatic transmission power supply (battery)
•
2
3
4
5
10
10
5
Fuses in centre of engine compartment rear panel
Fuse
Amp
Circuit
1
2
3
4
10
10
5
25
1.4
1.4
1.6
1.6
litre
litre
litre
litre
Bulb ratings
Watts
Headlights (main beam and dipped beam)
Front foglight
Front sidelight
Front direction indicator (orange bulb)
Front direction indicator repeater light
Rear sidelight
Rear direction indicator
Rear foglight
Stoplight
High-level stop light
Reversing light
Rear number plate light
Interior light
Glovebox light
Rear luggage compartment light
55
55
5
21
5
5
21
21
21
5
21
5
10
5
5
engine
engine
engine
engine
injection system
fuel p u m p
injection system
fuel p u m p
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibf ft
Airbag control unit
Airbag module to steering wheel
Passenger airbag module to body
8
8
7
6
6
5
Body electrical systems 12*3
1 General information and
precautions
A
Warning:
Before
carrying
out
any
work
on the
electrical
system,
read
through
the
precautions
given in Safety first!
at the beginning
of this manual, and in
Chapter 5A. Before working on the airbag
system, observe the precautions
given in
Section 21.
The electrical system is of 12-volt negative
earth t y p e . Power for the lights and all
electrical accessories is supplied by a
lead/acid t y p e battery, w h i c h is charged by
the alternator.
This Chapter covers repair and service
procedures
for
the
various
electrical
c o m p o n e n t s not associated with the engine.
Information on the battery, alternator and
starter motor can be found in Chapter 5A.
It should be noted that, prior to working on
any c o m p o n e n t in the electrical system the
battery negative terminal s h o u l d first be
d i s c o n n e c t e d , to prevent the possibility of
electrical s h o r t - c i r c u i t s and/or fires. When
reconnecting the battery on m o d e l s with a
side airbag and presence sensor, ensure there
is no one inside the vehicle, as a precaution
against accidental activation of the airbag.
With the driver's door open, reach inside and
turn on the ignition, then check the operation
of the airbag warning light.
2 Electrical fault finding general information
Note: Refer to the precautions given in Safety
first! and in Section 1 of this Chapter before
starting work. The following
tests relate to
testing of the main electrical
circuits, and
should not be used to test delicate
electronic
circuits (such as anti-lock braking
systems),
particularly
where an electronic
control
module (ECU) is used.
General
1 A typical electrical circuit consists of an
electrical c o m p o n e n t , any switches, relays,
motors, fuses, fusible links or circuit breakers
related to that component, and the wiring and
connectors which link the component to both
the battery and the chassis. To help pinpoint a
problem in an electrical circuit, wiring diagrams
are included at the end of this manual.
2 Before attempting to diagnose an electrical
fault, first study the a p p r o p r i a t e wiring
d i a g r a m , to obtain a more
complete
understanding of the components included in
the particular circuit concerned. The possible
sources of a fault can be narrowed d o w n by
noting whether other c o m p o n e n t s related to
the circuit are operating properly. If several
c o m p o n e n t s or circuits fail at one time, the
problem is likely to be related to a shared fuse
or earth connection.
3-Electrical p r o b l e m s usually stem f r o m
simple causes, s u c h as loose or c o r r o d e d
c o n n e c t i o n s , a faulty earth c o n n e c t i o n , a
blown fuse, a melted fusible link, or a faulty
relay (refer to Section 3 for details of testing
relays). Visually inspect the c o n d i t i o n of all
fuses, wires and c o n n e c t i o n s in a p r o b l e m
circuit before testing the c o m p o n e n t s . Use
the wiring diagrams to determine w h i c h
terminal connections will need to be checked,
in order to pinpoint the trouble-spot.
4 The basic tools required for electrical faultfinding include a circuit tester or voltmeter (a
12-volt bulb with a set of test leads can also
be used for certain tests), a self-powered test
light (sometimes known as a continuity tester),
an o h m m e t e r (to measure resistance), a
battery and set of test leads, and a j u m p e r
wire, preferably with a circuit breaker or fuse
incorporated, which can be used to bypass
s u s p e c t wires or electrical c o m p o n e n t s .
Before a t t e m p t i n g to locate a p r o b l e m with
test instruments, use the wiring diagram to
determine where to make the connections.
5 To find the source of an intermittent wiring
fault (usually due to a poor or dirty
connection, or damaged wiring insulation), a
'wiggle' test can be performed on the wiring.
This involves wiggling the wiring by hand, to
see if the fault occurs as the wiring is moved.
It should be possible to narrow d o w n the
source of the fault to a particular section of
wiring. This method of testing can be used in
conjunction with any of the tests described in
the following sub-Sections.
6 Apart from p r o b l e m s due to
poor
c o n n e c t i o n s , t w o basic t y p e s of fault can
occur in an electrical circuit - open-circuit, or
short-circuit.
7 Open-circuit faults are caused by a break
s o m e w h e r e in the circuit, w h i c h prevents
current from flowing. An open-circuit fault will
prevent a c o m p o n e n t from w o r k i n g , but will
not cause the relevant circuit fuse to blow.
8 Short-circuit faults are caused by a 'short'
s o m e w h e r e in the circuit, w h i c h allows the
current flowing in the circuit to 'escape' along
an alternative route, usually to earth. Shortcircuit faults are normally c a u s e d by a
breakdown in wiring insulation, which allows a
feed wire to touch either another wire, or an
earthed component such as the bodyshell. A
s h o r t - c i r c u i t fault will normally cause the
relevant circuit fuse to blow.
Finding
an
open-circuit
9 To check for an open-circuit, connect one
lead of a circuit tester or voltmeter to either
the negative battery terminal or a known good
earth.
10 Connect the other lead to a connector in
the circuit being tested, preferably nearest to
the battery or fuse.
11 Switch on the circuit, bearing in mind that
some circuits are live only when the ignition
switch is moved to a particular position.
12 If voltage is present (indicated either by
the tester bulb lighting or a voltmeter reading,
as applicable), this means that the section of
the circuit b e t w e e n the relevant c o n n e c t o r
and the battery is problem-free.
13 Continue to c h e c k the remainder of the
circuit in the same fashion.
14 When a point is reached at w h i c h no
voltage is present, the p r o b l e m must lie
between that point and the previous test point
with voltage. Most problems can be traced to
a broken, corroded or loose connection.
Finding
a
short-circuit
15 To c h e c k for a short-circuit, first
disconnect the load(s) from the circuit (loads
are the components which draw current from
a circuit, such as bulbs, m o t o r s , heating
elements, etc).
16 Remove the relevant fuse from the circuit,
and connect a circuit tester or voltmeter to the
fuse connections.
17 Switch on the circuit, bearing in mind that
s o m e circuits are live only when the ignition
switch is moved to a particular position.
18 If voltage is present (indicated either by
the tester bulb lighting or a voltmeter reading,
as applicable), this means that there is a
short-circuit.
19 If no voltage is present, but the fuse still
blows w i t h the load(s) c o n n e c t e d , this
indicates an internal fault in the load(s).
Finding
an earth
fault
20 The
battery
negative
terminal
is
c o n n e c t e d to ' e a r t h ' - the metal of the
engine/transmission and the car b o d y - and
most s y s t e m s are wired so that they only
receive a positive feed, the current returning
via the metal of the car body. This means that
the component mounting and the body form
part of that circuit. Loose or c o r r o d e d
m o u n t i n g s can therefore cause a range of
electrical faults, ranging from total failure of a
circuit, to a puzzling partial fault. In particular,
lights may shine dimly (especially when
another circuit sharing the same earth point is
in operation), motors (eg wiper motors or the
radiator cooling fan motor) may run slowly,
and the operation of one circuit may have an
apparently-unrelated effect on another. Note
that on many vehicles, earth straps are used
b e t w e e n certain c o m p o n e n t s , such as the
engine/transmission and the body, usually
where there is no m e t a l - t o - m e t a l c o n t a c t
between components, due to flexible rubber
mountings, etc.
21 To c h e c k whether a c o m p o n e n t is
properly earthed, disconnect the battery, and
connect one lead of an ohmmeter to a known
g o o d earth point. Connect the other lead to
the wire or earth connection being tested. The
resistance reading should be zero; if not,
check the connection as follows.
22 If an earth c o n n e c t i o n is t h o u g h t to be
faulty, dismantle the c o n n e c t i o n , and clean
back to bare metal both the bodyshell and the
wire terminal or the c o m p o n e n t earth
12*4 Body electrical systems
3.2a M a i n f u s e b o x under t h e r i g h t - h a n d
side of t h e facia
3.2b Upper f u s e b l o c k a b o v e t h e m a i n
fusebox
3.6 A b l o w n f u s e c a n b e r e c o g n i s e d f r o m
' its m e l t e d or b r o k e n w i r e
c o n n e c t i o n mating surface. Be careful to
remove all traces of dirt and corrosion, then
use a knife to trim away any paint, so that a
clean m e t a l - t o - m e t a l joint is m a d e . On
reassembly, tighten the joint fasteners
securely; if a wire terminal is being refitted,
use serrated washers b e t w e e n the terminal
and the b o d y s h e l l , to ensure a clean and
secure c o n n e c t i o n . When the c o n n e c t i o n is
remade, prevent the onset of corrosion in the
future by applying a coat of petroleum jelly, or
by spraying on a proprietary ignition sealer, or
a water-dispersant lubricant.
5 Fusible links are located on the left-hand
side of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t rear panel,
and are a c c e s s e d by u n d o i n g the upper
screw and removing the cover. The links are
of 3 0 , 40, 50, 60, and 80 a m p rating,
a c c o r d i n g to the circuit p r o t e c t e d . It is
important to fit a fusible link of the correct
rating.
in the left-hand front corner of the engine
compartment.
13 If a circuit or system controlled by a relay
d e v e l o p s a fault, and the relay is suspect,
operate the system. If the relay is functioning,
it should be possible to hear it click as it is
energised. If this is the case, the fault lies with
the components or wiring of the system. If the
relay is not being energised, then either the
relay is not receiving a main s u p p l y or a
switching voltage, or the relay itself is faulty.
Testing is by the substitution of a known good
unit, but be careful - while s o m e relays are
identical in a p p e a r a n c e and in o p e r a t i o n ,
others look similar but perform different
functions.
3 Fuses and relays general information
Fuses
1 Fuses are designed to break a circuit when
a predetermined current is reached, in order
to protect the components and wiring which
could be damaged by excessive current flow.
Any excessive current f l o w will be due to a
fault in the circuit, usually a short-circuit (see
Section 2).
2 The main fuses are located in the fusebox
on the driver's side of the facia. To gain
access to the fuses, undo the three s c r e w s
and remove the f u s e b o x cover f r o m its
retaining tabs. On later models, the fuses are
arranged in t w o b l o c k s , and access t o the
fuses in the upper block is gained by releasing
the plastic cage (see illustrations).
3 A d d i t i o n a l fuses are located behind the
glovebox, above the control unit under the
facia, and in the engine compartment. Access
to the fuses behind the glovebox is gained by
removing the trim from inside the glovebox,
however on later m o d e l s the c o m p l e t e
g l o v e b o x must be r e m o v e d . A c c e s s t o the
fuses above the control unit is gained by
removing the footwell side trim panel. In the
engine c o m p a r t m e n t , additional fuses are
located in front of the battery and on the
engine compartment rear panel.
4 Refer to the Specifications for the location
of fuse circuits, as this varies a c c o r d i n g to
model.
6 A b l o w n fuse can be recognised f r o m its
melted or broken wire (see illustration).
7 To remove a fuse, first ensure that the
relevant circuit is switched off.
8 Pull the fuse from its location, and fit the
new fuse. Spare fuses are provided in the
main fusebox.
9 Before renewing a b l o w n fuse, trace and
rectify the cause, and always use a fuse of the
correct rating. Never substitute a fuse of a
higher rating, or make temporary repairs using
wire or metal foil, as more serious damage, or
even fire, could result.
10 Note that the fuses are c o l o u r - c o d e d as
f o l l o w s . Refer to the wiring d i a g r a m s for
details of the fuse ratings used and the
circuits protected.
Colour
Rating
Orange
7.5A
Red
10A
15A
Blue
Yellow
20A
Green
30A
Relays
11 A relay is an electrically-operated switch,
which is used for the following reasons:
a) A relay can switch a heavy current
remotely from the circuit in which the
current is flowing, therefore allowing the
use of lighter-gauge wiring and switch
contacts.
b) A relay can receive more than one control
input, unlike a mechanical switch.
c) A relay can have a timer function - for
example, the intermittent wiper relay.
12 The main relays are located together with
the fuses behind the facia on the driver's side.
The central door locking and sunroof relays
are located behind the glovebox. On 1998-on
m o d e l s , additional relays for the air
conditioning, headlight washers, and electric
cooling fans, are located in front of the battery
14 To renew a relay, first ensure that the
relevant circuit is switched off. The relay can
then simply be pulled out f r o m the socket,
and the new one pushed firmly into position.
4 Bulbs
(exterior lights) renewal
|g
General
1 Whenever a bulb is r e n e w e d , note the
following points:
a) Ensure that the relevant electrical circuit is
isolated before removing a bulb.
b) Remember that, if the light has just been
in use, the bulb may be extremely hot.
c) Always check the bulb contacts and
holder, ensuring that there is clean metalto-metal contact. Clean off any corrosion
or dirt before fitting a new bulb.
d) Where bayonet-type bulbs are fitted,
ensure that the live contacts bear firmly
against the bulb contacts.
e) Always ensure that the new bulb is of the
correct rating, and that it is completely
clean before fitting it.
f) Pay attention to the orientation when
fitting multi-filament bulbs (e.g. combined
tail/brake light bulbs).
Headlight
2 Open the bonnet. Press the tab downwards
Body electrical systems 12*5
to release the clip, then withdraw the plastic
cover f r o m t h e rear of t h e headlight (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note that the inner headlights
are f o r main b e a m only, whereas t h e outer
headlights are for dipped beam only.
3 Carefully disconnect the wire from the rear
of the bulb (see illustration).
4 Release the bulb retaining spring clip and
swivel it f r o m t h e rear of t h e b u l b ' ( s e e
illustration).
5 W i t h d r a w t h e bulb from t h e rear of t h e
headlight (see illustration).
6 When handling the new bulb, use a tissue
or clean c l o t h , t o avoid t o u c h i n g t h e glass
with the fingers. Moisture and grease from the
skin can cause blackening and rapid failure of
this t y p e of bulb. If the glass is accidentally
touched, wipe it clean using methylated spirit.
A v o i d k n o c k i n g or shaking t h e b u l b as this
may weaken the filament.
10 The bulb is a push fit in the bulbholder
and is removed by pulling it direct from t h e
bulbholder (see illustration).
11 Fit t h e new b u l b using a reversal of t h e
removal procedure.
Front
direction
indicator
12 O p e n t h e bonnet. The front direction
indicator bulbs are located in the rear of the
headlight/direction indicator light units.
13 Twist the bulbholder
anticlockwise
through 90° and withdraw it from the rear of
the light unit (see illustration).
14 Depress a n d twist the bulb t o remove it
from the bulbholder (see illustration).
15 Fit t h e new bulb using a reversal of t h e
removal p r o c e d u r e . Note that an orange
c o l o u r e d bulb must be f i t t e d , not the clear
t y p e bulb normally f i t t e d where the lens is
coloured orange.
Front
direction
indicator
side
16 The side repeater is held in position by a
plastic spring clip on the rear of the light. One
m e t h o d of removing the light w i t h o u t
d a m a g i n g t h e p a i n t w o r k is t o remove t h e
wheel arch liner first, then reach up behind the
wing and depress the clip in order to push out
the light f r o m inside. Alternatively, carefully
press t h e side repeater light lens in a
rearwards d i r e c t i o n , then use a small
7 Install the new bulb, using a reversal of the
removal procedure, ensuring that its locating
tabs are correctly located in the light unit cutouts.
Sidelight
8 Open the bonnet. The sidelight bulbs are
located in the outer headlight units. Press the
t a b d o w n w a r d s t o release t h e clip, then
withdraw the plastic cover from the rear of the
headlight.
9 Twist the bulbholder t o release it from the
rear of the light unit (see illustration).
4.5 . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e bulb f r o m t h e
rear of t h e h e a d l i g h t
4.10 . . . a n d pull o u t t h e w e d g e - t y p e b u l b
4.13 T w i s t t h e f r o n t d i r e c t i o n i n d i c a t o r
a n t i c l o c k w i s e a n d r e m o v e it f r o m t h e rear
of t h e light u n i t . . .
4.9 R e m o v e t h e b u l b h o l d e r .
4.14
. then depress and twist the bulb to
r e m o v e it
12*6 Body electrical systems
4.16 Carefully release t h e s i d e repeater
front tab with a screwdriver . . .
4.17 . . . t h e n t w i s t t h e b u l b h o l d e r t o
release it f r o m t h e light u n i t . . .
4.18 . . . a n d pull o u t t h e w e d g e - t y p e bulb
screwdriver to release the front tab from the
wing (see illustration).
17 Twist the bulbholder a n t i - c l o c k w i s e to
release it from the light unit (see illustration).
18 Pull the w e d g e - t y p e b u l b f r o m the
bulbholder (see illustration).
19 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of the
removal procedure.
foglight, then turn the cover anticlockwise and
remove it.
22 Disconnect the flying lead wire from the
rear of the bulb.
23 Release the spring clip, and withdraw the
bulb from the rear of the light unit.
24 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of the
removal procedure, ensuring that the raised
areas engage with the grooves in the light
unit.
27 U n s c r e w the t w o retaining k n o b s and
withdraw the bulbholder.
28 Depress and twist the relevant bulb to
remove it (see illustration).
Rear light
30 Disconnect the wiring from the rear light
cluster bulbholder (see illustration).
31 Depress the t a b s and w i t h d r a w the
bulbholder (see illustration).
32 Depress a n d t w i s t the relevant bulb to
remove it (see illustration). The top bulb is for
the s t o p light, the m i d d l e bulbs are for the
direction indicator and reversing light, and the
Front
foglight
20 U n s c r e w the three s c r e w s securing the
front foglight to the front bumper. The upper
one is located in the light c o w l , and the lower
two are located on the lower face of the front
b u m p e r . With the s c r e w s r e m o v e d , use the
screwdriver in the upper screw hole to hook
the light unit out from the bumper.
21 Disconnect the wiring from the rear of the
cluster
bulbs
3-door models
25 Open the tailgate. W o r k i n g inside the
loadspace, u n d o the screw and remove the
cover from the rear of the light cluster.
26 Disconnect the wiring from the rear light
cluster bulbholder.
5-door models
29 Open the tailgate. W o r k i n g inside the
loadspace, undo the screw and remove the
cover f r o m the rear of the light cluster (see
illustrations).
4.28 R e m o v i n g a rear light c l u s t e r b u l b
4.29a U n d o t h e s c r e w . . .
4.29b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e c o v e r for a c c e s s
t o t h e rear light c l u s t e r b u l b s
4.30 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
rear light c l u s t e r
4.31 W i t h d r a w t h e b u l b h o l d e r f r o m t h e
rear light c l u s t e r
4.32 R e m o v i n g a bulb f r o m t h e b u l b h o l d e r
Body electrical systems 12»7
4.35a B r a c k e t s are f i t t e d t o t h e m i d d l e
mounting nuts
b o t t o m bulb is of dual filament t y p e f o r t h e
rear fog light and tail light.
All m o d e l s
33 Fit t h e n e w bulb using a reversal of t h e
removal procedure.
High-level
stop light
bulb
34 Open t h e tailgate, then undo the screws
securing t h e trim panel. Note o n 5-door
models that four of the screws are visible, and
four are hidden beneath rubber p a d s . Prise
out t h e b u t t o n s securing t h e panel t o t h e
tailgate lower edge, and withdraw the panel.
On 3 - d o o r m o d e l s , use a w i d e - b l a d e d
screwdriver t o prise free the clips.
35 U n s c r e w t h e plastic nuts inside t h e
tailgate noting that brackets are fitted to t h e
middle nuts. W i t h d r a w t h e high-level s t o p
4.35b W i t h d r a w t h e high-level s t o p light
bulb f r o m t h e t a i l g a t e . . .
light f r o m t h e tailgate a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e
wiring (see illustrations).
36 U n d o t h e s c r e w s and separate t h e lens
from the light unit. Note that it is not possible
to remove t h e bulbs individually ( s e e
illustrations).
37 Fit t h e new bulbs using a reversal of the
removal p r o c e d u r e . D o n o t overtighten t h e
light mounting nuts.
Rear number
plate
light
38 Using a screwdriver, depress t h e plastic
retainer and withdraw t h e light unit from the
rear bumper (see illustration).
39 Twist the bulbholder and remove it from
the light body, then pull out t h e w e d g e - t y p e
bulb (see illustrations).
40 Fit t h e new bulb using a reversal of t h e
removal procedure.
4.35c . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g
5
Bulbs
(interior lights) renewal
^
|S
3Q
General
1 Whenever a bulb is r e n e w e d , note t h e
following points:
a) Ensure that the relevant electrical circuit is
isolated before removing a bulb.
b) Remember that, if the light has just been
in use, the bulb may be extremely hot.
c) Always check the bulb contacts and
holder, ensuring that there is clean metalto-metal contact. Clean off any corrosion
or dirt before fitting a new bulb.
d) Where bayonet-type bulbs are fitted,
ensure that the live contacts bear firmly
against the bulb contacts.
e) Always ensure that the new bulb is of the
correct rating, and that it is completely
clean before fitting it.
Front courtesy
(models without
light
a sunroof)
4.36a U n d o t h e s c r e w s . . .
4.36b . . . a n d s e p a r a t e t h e lens f r o m t h e
h i g h level light unit
2 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise out the
s c r e w head covers f r o m t h e c o u r t e s y light.
Undo the screws and slide the light unit d o w n
t o w a r d s t h e w i n d s c r e e n . Disconnect t h e
wiring and remove the light unit.
3 Remove t h e lens by carefully d e p r e s s i n g
the rear edge.
4 Extract the bulb from the spring contacts.
4.38 Use a screwdriver t o depress the
plastic retainer on the rear number plate light
4.39a T w i s t t h e b u l b h o l d e r f r o m t h e light
unit...
4.39b . . . t h e n pull o u t t h e w e d g e - t y p e
bulb
12*8 Body electrical systems
5.6a Prise o u t t h e c o v e r s . . .
5.6b . . . t h e n u n d o t h e s c r e w s . . .
5.6c . . . l o w e r t h e c o u r t e s y l i g h t . . .
5 Fit the new b u l b using a reversal of the
removal p r o c e d u r e , but m a k e sure that it is
held firmly b e t w e e n the spring c o n t a c t s . If
necessary, bend the contacts.
held firmly b e t w e e n the spring c o n t a c t s . If
necessary, bend the contacts.
Front courtesy
light
(models with a sunroof)
6 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise out the
s c r e w head c o v e r s f r o m the courtesy light.
Undo the screws and slide the light unit down
t o w a r d s the w i n d s c r e e n . Disconnect the
wiring and remove the light unit (see
illustrations).
5.6d . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g
5.7 R e m o v e t h e b u l b c o v e r
7 Extract the sunroof key, then push the tab
and remove the bulb cover (see illustration).
8 Extract the bulb f r o m the spring c o n t a c t s
(see illustrations).
9 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of the
removal p r o c e d u r e , but make sure that it is
5.8a . . . t h e n use a s c r e w d r i v e r t o release
t h e b u l b f r o m its c o n t a c t s . . .
Rear courtesy
light
10 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise the
light
unit
from
the
headlining
(see
illustration).
11 Extract the bulb from the spring contacts
(see illustration).
12 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of the
removal procedure, but m a k e sure that it is
held firmly b e t w e e n the spring c o n t a c t s . If
necessary, bend the contacts.
Luggage
compartment
light
13 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise the
light unit from the loadspace side trim and let
it hang by the wiring (see illustration).
5.8b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e f e s t o o n - t y p e
bulb
Body electrical systems 12*9
14 Extract t h e f e s t o o n - t y p e bulb from the
spring contacts (see illustration).
15 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of t h e
removal p r o c e d u r e , but make sure that it is
held firmly b e t w e e n t h e spring c o n t a c t s . If
necessary, bend the contacts.
Glovebox
light
(where
fitted)
16 With the glovebox open, prise out the light
using a screwdriver.
17 Disconnect t h e wiring a n d remove t h e
light unit. Make sure that the wiring remains in
the glovebox.
18 Extract the bulb from the spring contacts.
19 Fit t h e new b u l b using a reversal of t h e
removal p r o c e d u r e , but make sure that it is
held firmly b e t w e e n t h e spring c o n t a c t s . If
necessary, bend the contacts.
Instrument
panel
illumination
20 Remove
t h e instrument
panel as
described in Section 7.
21 The b u l b s / b u l b h o l d e r s are a bayonet
fitting in the rear of the instrument panel. Turn
the bulbholder a n t i c l o c k w i s e t o r e m o v e it,
then pull out t h e w e d g e - t y p e b u l b ( s e e
illustrations).
22 Fit t h e new bulb using a reversal of t h e
removal procedure.
Cigarette
lighter
illumination
23 Remove the cigarette lighter as described
in Section 15.
24 Remove t h e bulbholder a n d cover f r o m
the s u r r o u n d , then w i t h d r a w the b u l b (see
illustrations).
25 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of the
removal procedure.
Heater
control
illumination
26 Remove t h e heater control s u r r o u n d as
described in Chapter 3, Section 9.
27 Pull the wedge-type bulb from its location
in the heater control panel (see illustration).
28 Fit the new bulb using a reversal of t h e
removal procedure.
6
Exterior light units removal and refitting
|§j
Caution: Ensure that the relevant
electrical
circuit is isolated before removing
a light
unit. If in doubt, disconnect
the
battery
negative lead before starting
work.
Headlight/front
indicator
light
direction
Removal
6.1 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
h e a d l i g h t unit
6.2 R e m o v i n g t h e h e a d l i g h t u p p e r
mounting bolts
1 With t h e b o n n e t o p e n , d i s c o n n e c t t h e
wiring from the rear of the headlight unit (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . There are wiring plugs for t h e
headlights, sidelights, direction indicator light
and beam adjuster.
2 Mark t h e position of t h e headlight upper
mounting bolts located on the crossmember,
then unscrew and r e m o v e t h e m (see
illustration).
3 Carefully withdraw the headlight unit from
12*10 Body electrical systems
the front of t h e car and release t h e outer
location ball f r o m its s o c k e t w i t h a suitable
lever (see illustrations).
Refitting
4 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but align
the upper mounting bolts with the previouslymade marks before tightening t h e m . Finally,
have the headlight beam alignment checked
with reference to Section 8.
Front direction
repeater
light
indicator
side
5 The procedure is described as part of the
bulb renewal procedure in Section 4.
Front
foglight
6 U n s c r e w the three s c r e w s securing t h e
front foglight t o the front bumper. The upper
one is located in the light cowl, and the lower
two are located on the lower face of the front
b u m p e r . With t h e s c r e w s r e m o v e d , use a
screwdriver in the upper screw hole to hook
the light unit out from the bumper.
7 Disconnect the wiring from the rear of the
foglight.
8 To separate the foglight from the mounting
b r a c k e t / c o w l , undo t h e three crosshead
screws.
9 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
10 On c o m p l e t i o n , check the foglight beam
alignment. If necessary, the b e a m may be
altered using the adjustment screw accessible
t h r o u g h t h e hole on t h e b o t t o m f a c e of the
front bumper.
Rear light
cluster
3-door models
11 Open t h e tailgate. W o r k i n g inside t h e
loadspace, undo the screws and prise out the
buttons, then remove the trim panel from the
rear valance, using a wide-bladed screwdriver
to release the clips.
12 U n d o t h e s c r e w and remove t h e corner
trim panel for access t o the rear of the rear
light cluster (see illustrations).
13 Disconnect the wiring from the rear light
cluster bulbholder. If necessary, remove the
bulbholder c o m p l e t e by unscrewing t h e
retaining knobs (see illustration).
14 Support the light cluster from the outside,
then unscrew the mounting nuts and withdraw
the light unit from the body. If necessary,
remove the sealing gasket (see illustrations).
5-door models
6.12b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e c o r n e r t r i m
panel
6.13 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
rear light c l u s t e r b u l b h o l d e r
15 Open t h e tailgate. W o r k i n g inside the
loadspace, undo the screws and prise out the
buttons, then remove the trim panel from the
rear valance.
16 Undo the screw and remove the fastener,
then remove the complete corner trim panel
for access to the rear of the rear light cluster
(see illustration).
17 Disconnect the wiring from the rear light
cluster bulbholder. If necessary, remove the
bulbholder complete.
18 The light cluster is mounted on a bracket
bolted t o t h e inside of t h e l o a d s p a c e .
6.14a R e m o v i n g t h e rear light c l u s t e r
6.14b R e m o v i n g t h e sealing g a s k e t
6.16 R e m o v i n g t h e c o r n e r t r i m panel
Body electrical systems 12*11
6.18a U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s . . .
U n s c r e w the bolts and w i t h d r a w the
cluster f r o m inside the l o a d s p a c e (see
illustrations).
6.18b . . . t h e n w i t h d r a w t h e rear light
c l u s t e r f r o m inside t h e l o a d s p a c e
Rear number
plate
light
21 The procedure is described as part of the
bulb renewal procedure in Section 4.
All m o d e l s
19 Refitting is a reversal of removal, however,
on 5-door models check that the cluster lens
is a snug fit on the outer b o d y panel. If
necessary, turn the 4 adjustment bolts on the
mounting plate to position the lens correctly
(see illustration).
7 Instrument panel removal and refitting
Right-hand
drive
^
g$
models
Removal
6.19 A d j u s t i n g t h e rear light c l u s t e r o n its
m o u n t i n g plate
3 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the upper
shroud from the steering column.
4 U n d o the screws and remove the cover
from the fuses/relays located on the driver's
side of the instrument panel (see illustration).
5 Working through the fuse/relay cover hole,
undo the screw securing the outer end of the
instrument panel surround to the facia (see
illustration).
6 Undo the 3 upper and 2 lower screws and
withdraw the surround from the facia.
Disconnect the wiring from the headlight adjustment and panel lighting rheostats, and place
the surround to one side (see illustrations).
7 U n d o the four screws and w i t h d r a w the
instrument panel f r o m the facia, then
20 The procedure is described as part of the
bulb renewal procedure in Section 4.
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 U n d o the s c r e w s and r e m o v e the lower
shroud from the steering column.
7.4 R e m o v i n g t h e c o v e r f r o m t h e
fuses/relays
7.5 R e m o v i n g t h e i n s t r u m e n t panel
s u r r o u n d outer s c r e w
7.6a U n s c r e w t h e t h r e e upper . . .
7.6b . . . a n d t w o l o w e r s c r e w s . . .
7.6c . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g f r o m
t h e panel lighting r h e o s t a t . . .
7.6d . . . a n d h e a d l i g h t a d j u s t m e n t s w i t c h
High-level
stop light
bulbs
12• 12 Body electrical systems
7.7a U n d o t h e u p p e r s c r e w s . . .
7.7b . . . a n d l o w e r s c r e w s . . .
7.7c . . . w i t h d r a w t h e i n s t r u m e n t panel
f r o m the facia . . .
7.7d . . . t h e n lift t h e clip . . .
7.7e . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g
disconnect the wiring plugs from the rear of
the panel (see illustrations).
8 The individual gauges and warning lights
are illuminated by bulbs. These are a bayonet
fit in the rear of the instrument panel and can
be removed individually by rotating t h e m
through a quarter turn.
Refitting
9 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Left-hand
drive
models
Removal
10 Disconnect the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
11 Undo the s c r e w s and remove the cover
from the fuses/relays located on the driver's
side of the instrument panel.
12 W o r k i n g t h r o u g h the fuse/relay cover
hole, undo the screw securing the outer end
of the instrument panel to the facia.
13 Undo the remaining screws securing the
instrument panel s u r r o u n d t o the facia.
W i t h d r a w the s u r r o u n d and d i s c o n n e c t the
wiring f r o m the headlight a d j u s t m e n t and
panel lighting rheostats.
14 Undo the four screws and withdraw the
instrument panel from the facia, then disconnect
the wiring plugs from the rear of the panel.
15 The individual gauges and warning lights
are illuminated by bulbs. These are a bayonet
fit in the rear of the instrument panel and can
be removed individually by rotating t h e m
through a quarter turn.
Refitting
16 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
8.3 R e m o v i n g t h e headlight b e a m a d j u s t e r
f r o m t h e headlight unit
8 Headlight beam alignment general information
Accurate adjustment of the headlight beam is
only possible using optical beam-setting
equipment, and this work should therefore be
carried out by a FIAT dealer or suitably-equipped
workshop. Incorrectly adjusted headlamps can
dazzle other drivers and cause accidents.
All m o d e l s are e q u i p p e d w i t h a headlight
aim adjustment switch, located on the facia,
which allows the aim of the headlights to be
adjusted to compensate for the varying loads
carried in the vehicle. The switch should be
p o s i t i o n e d a c c o r d i n g to the load being
carried in t h e vehicle. Position 0 is for the
driver only or driver and one front passenger.
Position 1 is for all seats o c c u p i e d (5 persons). Position 2 is for all seats occupied plus
9.1a The h o r n s v i e w e d w i t h t h e f r o n t
bumper removed
s o m e luggage in the rear c o m p a r t m e n t .
Position 3 is for all seats o c c u p i e d plus the
maximum luggage in the rear compartment.
If the headlight beam adjuster is faulty, it
may be renewed by twisting it anticlockwise
f r o m the rear of the headlight unit (see
illustration).
9 Hornremoval and refitting
8^
Sfc
Removal
1 The horn is m o u n t e d beneath the righthand end of the front bumper. To gain access
to the horn, either r e m o v e the r i g h t - h a n d
headlight unit (see Section 6) or remove the
front b u m p e r
(see Chapter
11) (see
illustrations).
9.1b The h o r n s v i e w e d w i t h t h e r i g h t - h a n d
headlight unit r e m o v e d
Body electrical systems 12*13
10.2 Prise t h e s p e a k e r grille f r o m t h e t o p
of t h e f a c i a . . .
10.3a U n d o t h e s p e a k e r m o u n t i n g
screws...
10.3b . . . t h e n w i t h d r a w t h e s p e a k e r a n d
disconnect the wiring
10.4 The rear l o u d s p e a k e r v i e w e d f r o m
the luggage compartment
10.6a U n d o t h e s c r e w s a n d r e m o v e t h e
loudspeaker from the door . . .
10.6b . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g
2 Disconnect the wiring from the horns.
3 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts and r e m o v e
the horns and bracket. Unbolt the horns from
the bracket.
6 Undo the screws and withdraw the speaker
f r o m the d o o r panel, then d i s c o n n e c t the
wiring (see illustrations).
7 If necessary, separate the protective grille
by releasing the retaining tabs.
s c r e w s ' and lower the housing f r o m the
headlining.
2 U n d o the sunroof m o t o r s c r e w s and
d i s e n g a g e the gear f r o m the t w o cables.
Lower the motor from the roof.
3 With the motor removed, prise off the metal
cover using a screwdriver, then d i s c o n n e c t
the aerial lead (see illustration).
4 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g nut and w i t h d r a w
the aerial from the roof (see illustration),
5 Removal of the aerial lead requires removal
of the radio/cassette player as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 12, then removal of the interior trim as
necessary.
Refitting
Refitting
4 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
10 Loudspeakers removal and refitting
11 Radio aerial removal and refitting
Removal
1 Ensure that the
switched off.
radio/cassette
unit
is
Facia m o u n t e d front speaker
2 Carefully prise out the speaker grille from
the top of the facia (see illustration).
3 In the grille aperture, u n d o the speaker
mounting screws, withdraw the speaker, and
disconnect the wiring (see illustrations).
^
Sfc
Removal
Refitting
1 Access to the aerial is gained by removing
the interior light/roof switch housing. Carefully
prise out the end covers, then undo the t w o
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but ensure
that seal between the aerial housing and the
roof panel is in good condition.
11.3 Prise off t h e m e t a l c o v e r a n d
d i s c o n n e c t t h e aerial lead . . .
11.4 . . . t h e n u n s c r e w t h e aerial m o u n t i n g
nut
Rear parcel shelf s p e a k e r s
4 W o r k i n g underneath the relevant parcel
shelf s u p p o r t
bracket, pull back
the
c a r p e t / t r i m t h e n u n d o t h e securing s c r e w s
and lower the loudspeaker from the support
bracket (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Unplug the wiring
at the connector.
Door-mounted speakers
5 Remove the door inner trim
described in Chapter 1 1 .
panel
as
12*14 Body electrical systems
1860897000
1860897000
12.2a Fiat r a d i o / c a s s e t t e r e m o v a l t o o l s
12.2b Using t h e Fiat t o o l s t o r e m o v e t h e
radio/cassette
12 Radio/cassette player removal and refitting
13 Speedometer sender unitremoval and refitting
|§>
^
Caution: If the radio/cassette
player
fitted
has an anti-theft
facility, make sure you
have the security
code before
disconnecting the battery.
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 T h e r a d i o / c a s s e t t e player is retained by
4 clips (2 on each side). FIAT technicians use
two special tools which are inserted between
the sides of the unit and the facia surround,
and the tools effectively press the upper clips
d o w n , and the lower clips up. These t o o l s
may be supplied with the vehicle tool kit. An
alternative method to using the special tools is
t o insert t w o feeler blades on each sides
shown (see illustrations), and to press down
the upper blade and press up the lower blade.
This will release the unit from the surround,
one side at a time.
3 Lift the cassette flap, then pull the unit out
from the facia (see illustration).
4 Disconnect the wiring plugs and the aerial
lead f r o m the rear of the unit (see
illustrations).
Refitting
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
12.3 R e m o v i n g t h e r a d i o / c a s s e t t e f r o m
the facia
%<>
SK;
Removal
1 The speedometer sender unit is m o u n t e d
on the top of the transmission, above the final
drive position. First remove the battery and
battery tray as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 5A for
access to the sender. Move the relay holder
box to one side after removing the cover and
unscrewing
the
mounting
bolts.
Also
unbolt and r e m o v e the battery m o u n t i n g
bracket.
2 Disconnect the wiring from the sender unit.
3 O n early m o d e l s , the sender may be
removed from the pinion by unscrewing the
large nut. On later m o d e l s , however, the
sender unit is manufactured as a single unit.
4 On manual transmission m o d e l s , use an
Allen key to unscrew the lockbolt f r o m the
rear of the transmission casing.
5 On
automatic
transmission
models,
unscrew the bolt securing the unit to the top
of the transmission casing.
6 Carefully, lift the sender unit and pinion
f r o m the c a s i n g . Make sure that the pinion
remains in the sender unit while it is being
removed otherwise it may fall into the
transmission.
7 Remove the O-ring seal from the groove in
the body of the sender unit. Obtain a new Oring seal.
12.4a D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g p l u g s . . .
12.2c Using feeler b l a d e s t o r e m o v e t h e
radio/cassette
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but fit a
new O-ring seal, and make sure that the
pinion remains in the body of the sender unit
as it is being inserted. The top of the pinion
has a square drive w h i c h engages a d o g
inside t h e unit, and it may be necessary to
turn the unit slightly to ensure the dog enters
the drive. On manual transmission models it
will be necessary to align the hole in the
sender b o d y with the lockbolt hole; apply
suitable sealant to the threads of the lockbolt
before inserting it.
14 Switches removal and refitting
Steering
switch
column
^
combination
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting
the
battery).
Wait
approximately 10 minutes before proceeding
as a precaution against accidental activation
of the airbag (see Section 21). Turn the
steering wheel so that t h e roadwheels are
pointing in the straight-ahead position.
2 Remove the steering wheel as described in
Chapter 10.
3 Remove the airbag c l o c k s p r i n g unit from
the c o l u m n w i t h reference to Section 22 of
this
Chapter.
Note:
The
clockspring
12.4b . . . a n d aerial plug f r o m t h e rear of
the radio/cassette
Body electrical systems 12»15
14.4a Using a n Allen key, u n d o t h e collar
retaining s c r e w f r o m t h e b o t t o m of t h e
switch . . .
14.4b . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i p e r
switch wiring . . .
incorporates
spring tensioned
clips
which
prevent the upper and lower sections of the
unit from turning in relation to each other
when removed from the column.
4 Using an Allen key, undo the collar retaining
screw from the b o t t o m of the s w i t c h , then
disconnect the wiring plugs and slide the
combination switch assembly from the top of
the steering column (see illustrations). It is not
possible to separate each stalk unit and switch.
7 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the upper
shroud from the steering column.
8 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the cover
from the fuses/relays located on the driver's
side of the instrument panel.
9 Working through the fuse/relay cover hole,
undo the screw securing the outer end of the
instrument panel surround to the facia.
10 Undo the 3 upper and 2 lower screws and
w i t h d r a w the s u r r o u n d f r o m the facia.
Disconnect the wiring f r o m the headlight
adjustment and panel lighting rheostat.
11 With the surround on the bench, undo the
screws and remove the switch.
Refitting
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but note
that the groove at the top of the switch must
be aligned with the raised tab on the steering
c o l u m n . As a precaution against accidental
activation of the airbag, ensure no one is
inside the vehicle w h e n r e c o n n e c t i n g the
battery. With the driver's d o o r o p e n , reach
inside and turn on the ignition, then check the
operation of the airbag warning light.
Headlamp
switch
beam
adjustment
Removal
6 The headlamp beam adjustment switch is
located on the instrument panel s u r r o u n d .
First, undo the screws and remove the lower
shroud from the steering column.
Refitting
12 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Brake
stop-light
switch
14.4c . . . a n d t h e i n d i c a t o r s w i t c h
wiring . . .
Refitting
15 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Courtesy
switch
16 A separate courtesy light s w i t c h is only
f i t t e d to early m o d e l s - the f u n c t i o n is
incorporated in the central locking switch on
later models. Where fitted, open the door to
expose the switch in the door B-pillar.
17 Remove the securing screw, then remove
the rubber gaiter (where applicable) and
w i t h d r a w the s w i t c h f r o m the d o o r pillar.
Disconnect the wiring c o n n e c t o r as it
becomes accessible.
HAYNES
Removal and refitting
13 Refer to Chapter 9.
Electric exterior rear
mirror switch (where
light
Removal
view
fitted)
Tape the wiring to the door
pillar, or tie a length of string
to the wiring, to retrieve It If
it falls back into the
door
pillar.
Removal
Refitting
14 Prise the electric rear view mirror switch
panel f r o m the centre c o n s o l e ,
and
disconnect the wiring.
18 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
ensure that the rubber gaiter is securely
seated over the switch.
12*16 Body electrical systems
14.27 R e m o v i n g t h e i n s t r u m e n t panel
illumination rheostat f r o m the surround
Electric
window
switches
Removal
19 Use a screwdriver t o carefully prise t h e
electric w i n d o w s w i t c h panel f r o m t h e door
trim panel. Use a piece of card or cloth t o
protect the panel while levering on it.
20 Disconnect t h e wiring a n d r e m o v e t h e
switch.
Refitting
21 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Instrument
illumination
rheostat
14.33a Use a s c r e w d r i v e r t o prise t h e
hazard warning switch . . .
14.33b . . . f r o m t h e heater c o n t r o l
surround p a n e l . . .
from t h e fuses/relays located on the driver's
side of the instrument panel.
25 W o r k i n g t h r o u g h t h e fuse/relay cover
hole, undo t h e screw securing the outer e n d
of the instrument panel surround to the facia.
26 Undo the 3 upper and 2 lower screws and
w i t h d r a w t h e surround from t h e facia.
Disconnect t h e wiring f r o m t h e headlight
adjustment and panel lighting rheostat.
27 With the surround on the bench, undo the
s c r e w s a n d remove t h e s w i t c h ( s e e
illustration).
the s w i t c h position, a n d t h e cover at t h e
centre of the switches.
30 Undo the screws and withdraw the switch
panel from the front of the facia.
31 Disconnect t h e wiring a n d remove t h e
switches from the facia.
Refitting
Removal
28 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
22 T h e instrument illumination rheostat is
l o c a t e d o n t h e instrument panel s u r r o u n d .
First, undo the screws and remove the lower
shroud from the steering column.
23 Undo t h e screws and remove t h e upper
shroud from the steering column.
24 Undo t h e screws a n d remove t h e cover
Facia
switches
Removal
29 T h e facia s w i t c h e s are located in t h e
centre of the facia, above the heater control
k n o b s . Using a small screwdriver, carefully
prise out t h e small covers from each end of
Refitting
32 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Hazard
warning
switch
Removal
33 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise t h e
hazard warning switch from the heater control
surround panel (see illustrations).
34 Disconnect t h e wiring a n d remove t h e
switch (see illustration).
35 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
15 Cigarette lighter removal and refitting
|^
|k
Removal
1 With t h e ashtray c l o s e d , undo t h e lower
m o u n t i n g screws, then open t h e ashtray lid
and unscrew t h e upper m o u n t i n g s c r e w s .
W i t h d r a w t h e ashtray f r o m t h e facia a n d
disconnect the wiring from the cigar lighter.
2 With the ashtray on the bench, use a small
drift to drive out the pivot pin, then separate the
ashtray lid from the base (see illustrations).
3 Remove t h e element, then using a small
screwdriver,
carefully
prise t h e inner
metal cylinder f r o m t h e green plastic outer
s u r r o u n d ( s e e i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Press t h e
14.34 . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g
15.2b . . . a n d s e p a r a t e t h e a s h t r a y lid f r o m
t h e base
15.3a R e m o v e t h e e l e m e n t . . .
15.3b . . . t h e n u s e a s c r e w d r i v e r t o prise
Body electrical systems 12*17
15.3c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e inner m e t a l
cylinder
terminal end of the metal cylinder to assist its
removal.
4 Align the raised tooth with the cut-out in the
body and remove the surround together with
the bulbholder (see illustration).
Refitting
17 Windscreen/tailgate/headlight
washer system components removal and refitting
Washer
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
16 Tailgate wiper motor •
removal and refitting
15.4 R e m o v i n g t h e c i g a r e t t e lighter
surround and bulbholder
fluid
reservoir
Removal
I
Removal
1 Make sure that the ignition is switched off.
2 Remove the tailgate w i p e r arm as
described in Section 19.
3 With the tailgate o p e n , u n d o the s c r e w s
and prise out the retaining studs, then remove
the inner trim panel. On 3-door models, use a
w i d e - b l a d e d screwdriver t o prise free t h e
clips.
4 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the tailgate
wiper motor. Also disconnect the washer tube
f r o m the jet adapter located on the s p i n d l e
housing (see illustrations).
5 Using an Allen key, unscrew the mounting
bolts, then w i t h d r a w the w i p e r m o t o r while
guiding the jet adapter t h r o u g h the rubber
grommet (see illustrations).
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Refit the
wiper arm with reference to Section 19.
16.4b . . . a n d t h e w a s h e r t u b e f r o m t h e
tailgate washer jet adapter
1 The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
r i g h t - h a n d side (RHD models) or left-hand
side
(LHD
models)
of
the
engine
c o m p a r t m e n t , next to the coolant reservoir.
First syphon out all of the fluid using a pipette.
2 Unscrew the mounting bolts and move the
coolant reservoir to one side, away from the
coolant reservoir.
3 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the washer
pump.
4 Disconnect the washer t u b i n g f r o m the
p u m p , noting where each t u b e is fitted for
correct refitting. Also release the tubing from
the support clip.
5 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts and remove
the reservoir from the engine compartment. If
necessary, remove the inlet neck from the top
of the reservoir.
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Washer
pump
Removal
7 Unscrew the mounting bolts and move the
coolant reservoir to one side, away from
the coolant reservoir.
16.5a U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s .
16.4a D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
tailgate wiper m o t o r . . .
8 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the washer
pump.
9 D i s c o n n e c t the washer t u b i n g f r o m the
p u m p , noting where each t u b e is fitted for
correct refitting.
10 Pull the p u m p u p w a r d s from the rubber
grommet, and withdraw from the reservoir. If
necessary, extract the rubber grommet.
Refitting
11 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Windscreen
washer
nozzle
Removal
12 Open the bonnet, then prise out the
fasteners and release the padding in the area
beneath the washer nozzles.
13 Release the securing tabs using a suitable
screwdriver, then push the nozzle f r o m the
bonnet. D i s c o n n e c t the fluid hose, and
withdraw the nozzle.
Refitting
14 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but if
necessary adjust the nozzle so that the jets
are aimed at a point approximately 250 m m
from the upper edge of the windscreen. To do
this, insert a thin screwdriver in the
adjustment holes on the sides of the nozzles.
Tailgate
washer
nozzle
Removal
15 The tailgate washer nozzle is located on
the tailgate wiper spindle housing. To remove
it, first remove the wiper motor as described
in Section 16.
16.5b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e w i p e r m o t o r
f r o m the tailgate
12*18 Body electrical systems
17.16d R e m o v i n g t h e w a s h e r t u b e f r o m
the nozzle/adapter
18.3a Pull u p t h e w e a t h e r s t r i p s . . .
16 Extract the circlip and washer, then pull
the nozzle/adapter f r o m t h e wiper s p i n d l e
housing. If necessary, remove the tube, (see
illustrations).
20 Unscrew the nut and withdraw the nozzle
from the front bumper.
Refitting
17 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but o n
completion adjust the washer jet using a small
screwdriver t h r o u g h the hole in t h e
nozzle/adapter. The jet should be d i r e c t e d
t o w a r d s the upper area of the tailgate wiper
wiped area.
Headlight
washer
nozzle
Removal
18 The headlight washer nozzles are located
in t h e front bumper. First remove t h e front
bumper as described in Chapter 1 1 .
19 Disconnect the tube and adapter from the
bottom of the headlight nozzle.
18.3c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e c o w l panel
Refitting
21 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
18 Windscreen wiper motor removal and refitting
Removal
1 Make sure that the windscreen wiper motor
is in its 'parked' position by briefly switching it
on a n d off. M a k e sure that the ignition is
switched off.
18.3b
. then undo the screws .
w e a t h e r s t r i p s and u n d o the s c r e w s , then
unclip a n d r e m o v e the c o w l panel f r o m in
front of the windscreen. Note that the t w o rear
screws are accessed by prising out the t w o
covers (see illustrations).
4 Remove the p r o t e c t i v e cover f r o m t h e
windscreen wiper motor.
5 Disconnect the wiring plug from the motor
(see illustration).
6 U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e the three m o u n t i n g
bolts, and withdraw the wiper motor assembly
from the bulkhead (see illustrations).
7 Unscrew the crank retaining nut, and the
three mounting bolts, then separate the wiper
motor from the linkage.
Refitting
2 Refer to Section 19 and remove both wiper
arms.
3 With the bonnet o p e n , pull up t h e
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but ensure
that the motor drive is in the 'parked' position
before reconnecting the crank arm.
18.5 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e w i p e r
motor
18.6a W i p e r m o u n t i n g b o l t l o c a t e d by t h e
motor
Body electrical systems 12*19
ft
18.6b W i p e r m o u n t i n g bolt l o c a t e d o n t h e
linkage frame
19 Wiper arm removal and refitting
^
||
18.6c R e m o v i n g t h e w i p e r m o t o r a s s e m b l y
f r o m the bulkhead
18.6d W i p e r m o t o r a n d l i n k a g e r e m o v e d
from the bulkhead
4 Lift the blade off the glass, and ease the
wiper arm off its spindle, using a rocking action
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If both windscreen wiper
arms are being removed, note both locations,
as different arms are fitted to each side.
anti-theft
alarm system fitted by FIAT as
standard
equipment.
1 All m o d e l s are fitted w i t h a FIAT CODE
engine immobiliser system as s t a n d a r d
equipment. The immobiliser is automatically
activated w h e n the ignition key is turned to
PARK or STOP, and will also be activated
when the key is removed completely from the
switch. The ignition key has an integral device
w h i c h t r a n s m i t s a c o d e d signal to the FIAT
CODE unit on the ignition switch, and the unit
will only allow the engine to be s t a r t e d if it
recognises the signal.
Removal
Refitting
1 Operate the wiper motor, then switch it off
so that the wiper arm returns to its ' p a r k e d '
position.
2 Stick masking tape on the glass, to use as
an alignment aid for the rest position of the
wiper blade. Note, however, that there is a
mark on the tailgate window glass for locating
the blade in its 'rest' position
(see
illustrations).
3 Prise out the wiper arm spindle nut cover,
then unscrew and remove the spindle nut.
Recover the washer (see illustrations).
5 Refitting is a
that the wiper
clean and dry
t a p e before
securely.
reversal of removal, but ensure
arm and spindle splines are
and align the blade w i t h the
tightening the spindle nut
20 Anti-theft alarm/engine
immobiliser system general information
N o t e : This information
is applicable
only to the
2 Each new car is provided with one master
key (burgundy) and two duplicate keys (blue)
for
normal
use. The duplicate
keys
incorporate a battery on models with remote
central locking and an alarm s y s t e m . The
master key should be kept in a safe place, as
19.2a The 'rest' p o s i t i o n m a r k o n t h e
t a i l g a t e w i n d o w glass
19.2b S t i c k m a s k i n g t a p e o n t h e
w i n d s c r e e n t o i n d i c a t e t h e 'rest' p o s i t i o n
of t h e w i p e r blade
19.3a Prise o u t t h e w i p e r a r m s p i n d l e n u t
cover...
19.3b . . . r e m o v e t h e nut a n d w a s h e r . . .
19.4a . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e t a i l g a t e w i p e r
arm f r o m the spindle
19.4b R e m o v i n g t h e w i n d s c r e e n w i p e r
a r m f r o m its spindle
12*20 Body electrical systems
electrically to the system. The pretensioners
are activated by an internal deceleration
mechanism.
5 Every time the ignition is switched on, the
airbag control unit performs a self-test. The
self-test takes approximately 4 seconds and
during this time the airbag warning light in the
instrument panel is illuminated. After the selftest has been c o m p l e t e d the warning light
should go out. If the warning light fails to come
on, check the bulb first before assuming the
system is faulty. If it remains illuminated after 4
s e c o n d s or c o m e s on at any t i m e when the
vehicle is being driven, there is a fault in the
airbag system. The vehicle should be taken to
a FIAT dealer for examination at the earliest
possible opportunity.
it is required for making copies in the event of
the loss of the duplicate keys.
3 M o s t m o d e l s are fitted with an electronic
alarm system which enables remote control of
the central locking s y s t e m , t o g e t h e r with
monitoring of door/tailgate/bonnet opening,
m o v e m e n t inside the car, and any hard
k n o c k s to the car b o d y . The system is
activated w h e n the ignition key is r e m o v e d
f r o m the STOP or PARK positions on the
ignition s w i t c h . An LED w a r n i n g light in the
middle of the facia flashes for the c o m p l e t e
period when the system is activated.
4 The alarm s y s t e m p e r f o r m s a self-test
whenever it is switched on. Should a fault be
detected, a second short beep will be heard
after the main beep. If this occurs, check that
the
doors/tailgate/bonnet
are
closed
correctly.
5 When the system is s w i t c h e d on, a single
beep will be heard and the direction indicators
will light up for approximately three seconds.
When the system is switched off, t w o beeps
will be heard and the direction indicators will
flash twice.
6 Should the alarm system become faulty, the
vehicle should be taken to a FIAT dealer for
examination.
7 If a new key is obtained, it will be necessary
to transfer the transponder from the old key to
the new one. To d o this, prise open the old
key fob using a small screwdriver. Note: Carry
this
out
over
a table,
otherwise
the
transponder may be lost.
8 Note its location, then use a screwdriver to
carefully prise the transponder from the old
key (see illustration).
9 Carefully locate the transponder in the new
key, then refit the fob halves, pressing the t w o
halves together until they are engaged.
21 Airbag system - precautions
and general information
A
Warning: Note that the
airbag
must not be subjected
to temperatures
in excess
of 100° C.
When the airbag
is
removed,
ensure that it is stored the correct way up
to prevent possible inflation.
Do not allow
any solvents or cleaning agents to contact
the airbag assembly. It must be
cleaned
using only a damp cloth. The airbag
and
control unit are both sensitive to impact. If
either is dropped from a height of 50 cm or
more or are damaged
they should
be
renewed.
Before working
on the
airbag
components,
disconnect
the battery
and
wait
approximately
10 minutes.
Also
remove the airbag fuse from the fusebox.
1 A driver's airbag is fitted as standard on all
models, and a passenger airbag is available
as an option. Side airbags, fitted in the front
seat backrests, are also available on certain
models to protect the front seat occupants in
22 Airbag system components removal and refitting
20.8 R e m o v i n g t h e t r a n s p o n d e r f r o m t h e
i g n i t i o n key f o b
the event of a side impact of medium to high
level.
2 Where passenger and/or side airbags are
fitted, the front passenger seat is fitted with a
sensor to detect the presence of a person. If
the sensor d o e s not d e t e c t a person within
a p p r o x i m a t e l y 30 s e c o n d s , the passenger
airbag(s) are deactivated.
3 The airbag system c o n s i s t s of the airbag
units c o m p l e t e w i t h gas generators, the
control unit with integral deceleration sensor,
and a warning light on the instrument panel.
4 The airbag system is triggered in the event
of a heavy frontal i m p a c t
above
a
predetermined force, depending on the point
of i m p a c t . The airbag is inflated within
milliseconds and f o r m s a safety cushion
b e t w e e n the driver and steering wheel a n d ,
where f i t t e d , b e t w e e n the passenger and
facia. This prevents c o n t a c t b e t w e e n the
u p p e r b o d y and wheel/facia and therefore
greatly reduces the risk of injury. The airbag
then deflates almost immediately. Note that
the front seat belt reels
incorporate
pretensioners which operate entirely separate
to the airbag system and are not connected
22.2 U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e t h e t w o a i r b a g
retaining s c r e w s f r o m t h e rear of t h e
steering wheel
Note: Refer to the warnings given in Section 21
before carrying out the following operations.
Driver's
airbag
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting
the battery). Also remove
the airbag fuse f r o m the f u s e b o x . Wait
approximately 10 minutes before proceeding,
then insert the ignition key and turn it to
release the steering lock.
2 U n s c r e w and remove the t w o airbag
retaining screws from the rear of the steering
wheel, rotating the wheel as necessary to gain
access to the screws (see illustration).
3 Return the steering wheel to the straightahead position then carefully lift the airbag
assembly away f r o m the steering w h e e l .
Disconnect the yellow wiring from the rear of
the airbag (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Note that the
airbag must not be knocked or dropped and
should be stored the correct way up with its
padded surface uppermost.
Refitting
4 Reconnect the wiring to the rear of the
airbag and to the horn terminal.
5 Seat the airbag unit centrally in the steering
22.3a Carefully lift t h e a i r b a g a s s e m b l y
away f r o m the steering wheel
Body electrical systems
Front seat side
airbag
Removal
22.3b D i s c o n n e c t t h e y e l l o w w i r i n g f r o m
t h e rear of t h e a i r b a g
wheel, making sure the wires do not become
t r a p p e d . Fit the retaining screws and tighten
them to the specified torque setting.
6 Refit the airbag fuse, then r e c o n n e c t the
battery, but as a precaution against accidental
activation of the a i r b a g , ensure no one is
inside the vehicle. With the driver's door open,
reach inside and turn on the ignition, then
c h e c k the operation of the airbag warning
light.
Passenger
airbag
Removal
7 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting
the battery). Also remove
the airbag fuse f r o m the f u s e b o x . Wait
approximately 10 minutes before proceeding.
8 Open the glovebox lid, then undo the t w o
knobs and remove the upper trim from inside
the g l o v e b o x . U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts
and withdraw the glovebox from the facia.
9 W o r k i n g t h r o u g h the glovebox aperture,
unscrew and remove the four bolts securing
the airbag to the body.
10 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g a n d w i t h d r a w
t h e airbag from inside the car. Note that the
airbag must not be knocked or d r o p p e d and
should be stored the correct way up with its
padded surface uppermost.
11 Note that the c o m p l e t e facia must be
r e m o v e d in order to remove the passenger
airbag module cover. Refer to Chapter 11 and
remove the facia, then undo the screws and
drill out the rivets.
Refitting
12 If r e m o v e d , refit the m o d u l e cover and
secure with the screws and new rivets.
13 Reconnect the wiring and make sure that
the wire is correctly located in the s u p p o r t
grommet.
14 Lift the airbag into position and align the
holes in the mounting bracket with those in
the body. Insert the bolts and tighten to the
specified torque.
15 Refit the glovebox and trim.
16 Fiefit the airbag fuse, then reconnect the
battery, but as a precaution against accidental
activation of the airbag, ensure no one is inside
the vehicle. With the driver's door open, reach
inside and turn on the ignition, then check the
operation of the airbag warning light.
17 Remove the front seat as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1 1 .
18 Using a screwdriver, prise the cap from
the seat tilt adjustment knob, then pull off the
knob.
19 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the outer
plastic side cover from the seat.
20 On the inside of the seat, undo the screw
securing the inner plastic side cover.
21 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise out
the rear of the inner plastic cover f r o m the
side of the seat taking care not to damage the
cover. As it is being r e m o v e d , the spring
washer will be released from the peg on the
seat. With the cover removed, press out the
spring washer and outer cap.
22 Release and u n h o o k the b o t t o m of the
rear cover from the seat rail, disconnect the
tensioning rods, and partly pull the upholstery
u p w a r d s for a c c e s s to the side airbag
mounting nuts.
23 Unscrew the mounting nuts, and carefully
withdraw the airbag module from the side of the
seat. Carefully disconnect the wiring from the
airbag. Note that the airbag must not be
knocked or dropped and should be stored with
its padded surface uppermost.
Refitting
24 R e c o n n e c t the wiring and locate the
airbag in the side of the seat. Tighten the
mounting nuts to the specified torque.
25 Refit the upholstery and side covers to the
seat using a reversal of the removal
procedure.
26 Refit the front seat to the car w i t h
reference to Chapter 1 1 . When reconnecting
the battery, ensure no one is inside the vehicle
as a precaution against accidental activation
of the airbag. With the driver's d o o r o p e n ,
reach inside and turn on the ignition, then
c h e c k the operation of the airbag w a r n i n g
light.
Airbag
control
unit
Note: The airbag control unit must always be
renewed after a crash which activates
an
airbag.
22.28 The a i r b a g c o n t r o l unit is l o c a t e d
u n d e r t h e c e n t r e of t h e f a c i a
12*21
Removal
27 Disconnect the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting
the battery). Also
remove the airbag fuse from the fusebox. Wait
approximately 10 minutes before proceeding.
28 The airbag control unit is located under
the centre of the facia, in front of the centre
console (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Undo the screws
and release the fasteners in order to remove
the trim panel from the inside of the driver's
footwell. Push the centre locking pins of the
fasteners in order to release them.
29 Undo
the
mounting
screws
then
d i s c o n n e c t the wiring and w i t h d r a w the
control unit.
Refitting
30 Locate the control unit beneath the facia,
making sure that the arrow on top of the unit
is pointing forwards, then reconnect the wiring
and insert the mounting screws. Tighten the
screws securely.
31 Make sure that the fasteners are correctly
located in the trim panel, with the centre
locking pins in their raised position. Refit the
trim panel and secure the fasteners by
pressing in the centre locking pins until flush.
Insert and tighten the screws.
32 Refit the airbag fuse, then reconnect the
battery, but as a precaution against accidental
activation of the airbag, ensure no one is inside
the vehicle. With the driver's door open, reach
inside and turn on the ignition, then check the
operation of the airbag warning light.
Airbag
clock
spring
Removal
33 Disconnect the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting
the battery). Also
remove the airbag fuse from the fusebox. Wait
approximately 10 minutes before proceeding.
34 Remove the steering wheel as described
in Chapter 10. This p r o c e d u r e includes
removal of the driver's airbag d e s c r i b e d in
paragraphs 1 to 3 of this S e c t i o n . N o t e :
Before removing the steering wheel, make
sure it is in its central position with the front
wheels pointing straight- ahead.
35 U n d o the screws and remove the lower
shroud from the steering column, then undo
the screws and remove the upper shroud (see
illustrations).
22.35a U n d o t h e s c r e w s . . .
12*22 Body electrical systems
36 Next to the ignition switch, disconnect the
clock spring wiring, and also disconnect the
wiring from the airbag control unit (see
illustration).
37 Undo the screws (noting their locations)
and remove the clock spring f r o m the
combination switch (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . N o t e :
The clockspring incorporates spring tensioned
clips which prevent
the upper and lower
sections of the unit from turning in relation to
each other when removed from the column.
Refitting
38 Make sure the front wheels are pointing in
the straight-ahead d i r e c t i o n . Refit the
c l o c k s p r i n g to the c o m b i n a t i o n s w i t c h and
tighten the screws. Note that there are four
holes for the retaining screws, however, only
three screws are fitted, to prevent distortion of
the c l o c k s p r i n g h o u s i n g . N o t e : If a new
clockspring
is being
fitted, remove
the
temporary locking key before locating it on the
combination
switch.
22.36 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e c l o c k s p r i n g
wiring
22.37 R e m o v i n g t h e c l o c k s p r i n g retaining
screws
39 R e c o n n e c t the w i r i n g , and refit the
steering column shrouds.
40 Refit the steering wheel and airbag with
reference to Chapter 10 and paragraphs 4 to
6 of this Section.
41 Refit the airbag fuse, then reconnect the
battery, but as a precaution against accidental
activation of the a i r b a g , ensure no one is
inside the vehicle. With the driver's door open,
reach inside and turn on the ignition, then
c h e c k the operation of the airbag w a r n i n g
light.
Wiring diagrams 12*23
Fiat Brava/Bravo wiring diagrams 1995 to 1999
Key to symbols
j^g.
(o
Item number
I F11 I i
I i
F1
| I F10 I I F13
T l T I I F15 I I
F5
I I
F3
F2
I
I I F8
I '
F7 1 I F6
I
I F12 I I
Bulb
F9
F4
II
Fuse holder
Switch
Fuse allocation
—WMA—
1
Multiple contact switch
(ganged)
2
Fuse/ fusible link
3
Solenoid actuator
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Resistor
Variable resistor
Internal connection in a
component
11
12
13
14
15
Block conection, detachable
15A Exterior lights - Reversing, stop, direction indicators
electric windows, air bag, ABS
10A Front RH side light, rear LH light, RH number plate light,
radio lighting, instrument panel lighting, switch panel
lighting
10A Front LH side light, heater/air conditioner controls
lighting, rear RH light, LH number plate light
10A LH dipped beam
10A RH dipped beam, headlamp adjusters
10A RH main beam
10A LH main beam, main beam warning light
10A Rear fog lamps
10A Hazard warning lights
15A Courtesy light, luggage compartment light, clock, radio,
glove compartment light
20A Heated rear window and warning light, heated mirrors
20A Horns
20A Front and rear screen wash/wipe, headlight washer
20A Interior ventilation fan, radiator fan, cigar lighter
Wire connection, fixed
Wire colour
(green wire with yellow tracer)
>g/y <
t
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Denotes alternative wiring
variation
;
Dmgmm 5, Arrow
RH indicator signal
2
3
Interconnecting line
(thin line)
—
Index to diagrams
Connections to other circuits
Earth point with location code
Earth locations
G102
Pump/motor
-0
-6
Starting and charging, engine cooling fan, horn, heated rear
window, interior ventilation
Front and rear screen wash/wipe, headlight wash, Hazard warning
lights
Direction indicators, brake lights, reversing lights
Exterior lights, anti-lock braking system
Fog lights - front and rear, electric windows (front)
Cigarette lighter, headlight alignment, high level radio
Interior lighting, sun roof, heated and adjustable rear view mirrors
Weber IAW ignition and injection system (1.6 SX,ELX,HLX)
Bosch Mono Motronic ignition and injection system (1.4 S, SX,
Team,80)
Dashed outline denotes part
of a larger item, containing in
this case an electronic or
solid state device
Gauge/meter
H31692
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
Battery earth on bodyshell
Left front earth
Left dashboard earth
Right front earth
Left rear earth
Right rear earth
Right dashboard earth
Earth for electronic injection
Earth for electronic ignition
12»24 Wiring diagrams
Wire colours
W
R
Y
Br
P
Bl
Gr
G
White
Red
Yellow
Brown
Pink
Blue
Grey
Green
B
B l a c k
V
Violet
O Orange
Lb Light blue
#
W
H31693
Key to items
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
D 80A fuse for Junction unit
Starter motor
Alternator
Ignition switch
Engine cooling fan fuse 40/50A
Engine cooling fan
Thermostat switch on radiator
9 Steering column switch unit
10 Junction unit
R1 Ignition relay
R2 Horn relay
R3 Heated rear window relay
11 Fan speed switch
12 Fan speed resistors
13 Climate control fan
14 Heater unit light bulbs
15 Horns
Diagram 2
16 Heated rear window
17 Switch control panel
Heated rear window switch with
warning light
18 Contact board for rear connections
Wiring diagrams 12*25
Wire colours
W White
R Red
Y Yellow
Br Brown
P
Pink
Bl Blue
Gr Grey
G Green
B
Black
V Violet
O
Lb
Key to items
Orange
Light blue
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
C 60A fuse for optional extras
D 80A fuse for junction unit
5 Ignition switch
9 Steering column switch unit
A windscreen wiper speed control
B front/rear screen, headlamp
washer switch
Diagram 3
1
2
H31694'
10
18
20
21
22
23
C rear screen wiper switch
24 Headlight intermittent wash relay
D direction indicators/
25 Headlight washer pump
hazard lights relay
26 Hazard warning lights switch
Junction unit
R1 Ignition relay
Contact board for rear connections
Front/rear washer pump
Windscreen wiper motor
Rear screen wiper motor
Fuse for headlight washer (20A)
Front and rear screen wash/wipe
Hazard warning lights
Headlight wash
• R
«R
»n i 5
" Screen wash signal
*• J—l rv/ni
- L J - Gr/Bl
4
D
^
LH Direction
indicators
°"
RH Direction
indicators
*
Diagram
Arrow
4
B
m
L b / B
'
"
E4
n
J
L b
.
,
.
.
«_
.
l
." i i i
- n - » - r n
Bl/W"
/R"
BBl /l R
O
ro
n
co
1 1
E3
E2
I—,
49A
49
D
R
31
° Sram
!!>
L i g h
1
Hptl
Diagram
Arrow
r>
C
,
s
S, Arrow
o
n
S
i
g n a
|
D
12*26 Wiring diagrams
Wire colours
W
R
Y
Br
P
Bl
Gr
G
B
V
O
Lb
White
Red
Yellow
Brown
Pink
Blue
Grey
Green
Black
Violet
Direction
Orange
Light blue
H31695
Key to items
-1
2
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
5 Ignition switch
9 Steering column switch unit
D direction indicators/
hazard lights relay
E Direction indicator switch
10 Junction unit
26 Hazard warning lights switch
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Front LH light cluster
Front RH light cluster
Front LH side indicator
Front RH side indicator
Rear LH light cluster
Rear RH light cluster
Brake lights switch
Additional brake light
Reversing light switch
indicators
Brake lights
Reversing lights
Diagram 4
Wiring diagrams 12»27
Wire colours
W White
R
Red
Y Yellow
Br Brown
P
Pink
Bl Blue
Gr Grey
G Green
B
V
Violet
O Orange
Lb Light blue
B l a c k
H31696
Key to items
1
2
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
C 60A fuse for optional extras
5 Ignition switch
9 Steering column switch unit
F Sidelights switch
G Headlight dip/main switch
H Headlight flash
10 Junction unit
27 Front LH light cluster
28 Front RH light cluster
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Rear LH light cluster
Rear RH light cluster
Number plate lights
Dipped beam relay
Fuse (60A)
ABS fuse (5A)
ABS cintrol unit
Diagnostic connection
Front LH ABS sensor
Front RH ABS sensor
Rear LH ABS sensor
Rear RH ABS sensor
Diagram 5
12
12*28 Wiring diagrams
Wire colours
W White
R Red
Y
Yellow
Br Brown
P
Pink
Bl Blue
Gr Grey
G Green
B
Black
V
Violet
O Orange
Lb Light blue
H3)697
Key to items
1
2
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
C 60A fuse for optional extras
5 Ignition switch
10 Junction unit
17 Switch control panel
A rear fog lights warning light
B rear fog lamps switch
C panel lighting
Fog lights - Front and rear
Electric windows - front (trim level S - SX)
31
32
36
37
38
39
40
41
D fog lights switch
E fog lights warning light
Rear LH light cluster
Rear RH tight cluster
Front fog lights fuse 20A
Fog lights relay
Front LH fog light
Front RH fog light
Power relay
Front windows fuse 30A
Diagram 6
42 RH electric window control unit,
on LH door
43 LH electric window control unit
44 LH window motor
45 RH window motor
46 RH electric window control unit
Wiring diagrams 12*29
Wire colours
W
R
Y
Br
P
Bl
Gr
G
B
V
White
Red
Yellow
Brown
Pink
Blue
Grey
Green
Black
Violet
O Orange
Lb Light blue
Key to items
1
2
5
9
wis
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
D 80A fuse for junction unit
Ignition switch
Steering column switch unit
F Sidelights switch
G Headlight dip/main switch
H Headlight flash
10 Junction unit
R1 Ignition relay
34 Dip beam relay
50 Cigarette lighter
51 High level radio
52 Front LH speaker (Tweeter)
53 Front RH speaker (Tweeter)
54 LH door speaker
55 RH door speaker
56 Rear LH speaker
57
58
59
60
Diagram 7
Rear RH speaker
LH headlight correction unit
RH headlight correction unit
Headlight alignment control unit
12*30 Wiring diagrams
Wire colours
Key to items
w
R
Y
Br
P
Bl
Gr
G
B
V
1
2
White
Red
Yellow
Brown
Pink
Blue
Grey
Green
Black
Violet
0
Orange
Lb Light blue
H31699
Interior lights
Diagram 8
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
C 60A fuse for optional extras
D 80A fuse for junction unit
5 Ignition switch
9 Steering column switch unit
F Sidelights switch
10 Junction unit
R1 Ignition relay
Wiring variation for S-SX trim levels
"*
•
Not on Bravo model
*
•Ft—
T
E1
18
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
YY\
ill
> Y/R
•
Contact board for rear connections
Adjustable mirrors fuse 7.5A
Adjustable mirrors control panel
LH rear view mirror
RH rear view mirror
Sun roof control unit
Power relay
Fuse for sun roof 20A
Sun roof motor
Sun roof end of travel switch
Diagram
11, Arrow
• fc.Oiaaram 11, An
Lighting feed
.
.
'
P
—
u
75
"™
70 Sun roof control button
71 Instrument panel light dimmer
72 Glove compartment light
73 •Courtesy-tights
74 Luggage compartment light
75 Front courtesy light switch
76 Rear courtesy light switch
75
7fl_ ^.IB-
Wiring diagrams 12*31
Wire colours
W White
R Red
Y Yellow
Br Brown
P Pink
Bl Blue
Gr Grey
G Green
B Black
V Violet
Diagram 9
Key to items
O Orange
Lb Light blue
1
2
5
10
77
78
79
H31700
Battery
Power fuse box
A 30A fuse for injection system
B 40A fuse for ignition system
Ignition switch
Junction unit
Injection system fuse 25A
Injection/ignition control unit
fuse 5A
Water temp, sensor
80 Air temp, sensor
81 RPM and TDC sensor
82 Potentiometer on butterfly valve
83 Timing sensor
84 Heated lambda sensor
85 Injector 1
86 Injector 2
87 Injector 3
88 Injector 4
89 Idle adjustment actuator
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Absolute pressure sensor
Petrol vapour cut out valve
Diagnostic sensor
Multiple relay..
Injection/ignition control unit
Spark plugs
Ignition coils
Fuel pump
Inertia switch
Vehicle speed sensor
Weber IAW MPI ignition and fuel injection system - 1600 16V models
| ,1, ,1. JTl^.l./p-lrri?^!"^
'
l ^ l y l ^
I? r, P, l , K
3
4
1
2
I? I , ht
1
5
;| | j
I
H 7 |52|35|13|
I
H 3 7 M
I
I
I n l
JI
|24|34|14|17|31|12|
I
I
..
1471291491301
I
Air conditioning
Alarm
Air conditioning
I
I
I
.
|
|
|
I
I
N
|iS3|23| * 6 | j " l |
«
J
_..-rjt-_--»~
. „
W
|
|
|
\&\4
|
°
*-o/w — »
|
|
|54|36| 2 |39| T |3a|
I
I
|28|
I
I
I
I
I
| g * | 3 |40|2*0|-
I
I
I
I
I
l ^ D / a g r a m 11, Arrow B
Instrument panel
^Diagram
11, Arrow
A
Instrument panel
.
^^Diagram
11, Arrow
I
11, Arrow
C
C
Instrument panel
•
Diagram
Instrument panel
12
12»32 Wiring diagrams
Wire colours
w
R
Y
Br
P
Bl
Gr
G
B
V
White
Red
Yellow
Brown
Pink
Blue
Grey
Green
Black
Violet
O Orange
Lb Light blue
Key to items
1
2
5
10
79
81
82
84
Battery
Power fuse box
A 30A fuse for injection system
B 40A fuse for ignition system
Ignition switch
Junction unit
Water temp, sensor
RPM and TDC sensor
Potentiometer on butterfly valve
Heated lambda sensor
89 Idle adjustment actuator
91 Petrol vapour cut out valve
92 Diagnostic sensor
94 Injection/ignition control unit
95 Spark plugs
96 Ignition coils
97 Fuel pump
98 Inertia switch
99 Vehicle speed sensor
100 Fuel pump relay
Diagram 10
101 Injection relay
102 Injection system fuse 10A
103 Fuel pump/ lambda sensor fuse
10A
104 Injector and air temp sensor
105 Detonation sensor
Bosch Mono Motronic ignition and fuel injection system - 1370cc models
Wiring diagrams 12*33
Wire colours
Key to items
w
R
Y
Br
P
Bl
Gr
G
B
V
1
2
O Orange
Lb Light blue
White
Red
Yellow
Brown
Pink
Blue
Grey
Green
Black
Violet
H31702
115
116
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Battery
Power fuse box
B 40A fuse for ignition system
D 80A fuse for junction unit
5 Ignition switch
10 Junction unit
110 Brake fluid level switch
111 Brake pad wear sensor
112 Oil pressure switch
113 Water temperature sensor
114 Handbrake switch
Fuel level sensor
Instrument panel
Battery charging warning lamp
Injection system failure lamp
Front brake pad wear lamp
Low oil pressure warning
ABS warning lamp
Water temperature gauge
Tachometer
Panel lighting
Panel lighting
Diagram 11
j Handbrake/low brake fluid lamp
k Main beam warning
I Side lights warning
m Fuel gauge
n Fuel reserve,control module
o LH indicator
p RH indicator
q Fuel reserve warning
r Speedometer control module
s Speedometer
t Trip meter with reset
Instrument panel
E1
r|30|l5|50|-
—
5
I
5
O / W ™, _ «
1 2 ^ , M Lb/R
Lb/R
Diagram
9, Arrow
•
m
»
•
*
Injection
system
A
\
Speed sensor
Diagram
9, Arrow
. . .
*
4
A.
i
D
Speed sensor
Diagram
5
A r^:
&
C
•
| 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |6 | 7 |8 |9
M a t s and carpets s h o u l d be b r u s h e d or
vacuum-cleaned regularly, to keep them free
of grit. If they are badly stained, remove them
f r o m the vehicle for s c r u b b i n g or s p o n g i n g ,
and m a k e quite sure they are dry before
refitting. Seats and interior trim panels can be
kept clean by wiping with a d a m p cloth and
specialist cleaner. If they do become stained
(which can be more apparent on lightc o l o u r e d upholstery), use a little liquid
detergent and a soft nail brush to scour the
grime out of the grain of the material. Do not
forget to keep the headlining clean in the
s a m e way as the upholstery. When using
liquid cleaners inside the vehicle, do not overwet the surfaces being c l e a n e d . Excessive
d a m p could get into the seams and p a d d e d
interior, causing stains, offensive o d o u r s or
even rot. If the inside of the vehicle gets wet
accidentally, it is w o r t h w h i l e t a k i n g s o m e
t r o u b l e to dry it out properly, particularly
where carpets are involved. Do not leave oil or
electric heaters inside the vehicle for this
purpose.
4 Minor body damage repair
Repairs of minor
bodywork
scratches
«
in
If the scratch is very superficial, and does
not penetrate to the metal of the b o d y w o r k ,
repair is very simple. Lightly rub the area of
the scratch with a paintwork renovator, or a
very fine cutting paste, to remove loose paint
from the scratch, and to clear the surrounding
bodywork of wax polish. Rinse the area with
clean water.
Apply touch-up paint to the scratch using a
fine paint brush; continue to apply fine layers
of paint until the surface of the paint in the
s c r a t c h is level with the s u r r o u n d i n g
paintwork. Allow the new paint at least t w o
weeks to harden, then blend it into the
surrounding paintwork by rubbing the scratch
area with a paintwork renovator or a very fine
cutting paste. Finally, apply wax polish.
W h e r e the s c r a t c h has p e n e t r a t e d right
t h r o u g h to the metal of the b o d y w o r k ,
causing the metal to rust, a different repair
technique is required. Remove any loose rust
f r o m the b o t t o m of the s c r a t c h w i t h a
penknife, then apply rust-inhibiting paint t o
prevent the f o r m a t i o n of rust in the future.
Using a r u b b e r or nylon a p p l i c a t o r , fill the
scratch with bodystopper paste. If required,
this p a s t e can be m i x e d w i t h cellulose
thinners, to provide a very thin paste which is
ideal for filling narrow scratches. Before the
stopper-paste in the scratch hardens, wrap a
piece of smooth cotton rag around the top of
a finger. Dip the finger in cellulose thinners,
and quickly sweep it across the surface of the
stopper-paste in the scratch; this will ensure
that the surface of the s t o p p e r - p a s t e is
slightly h o l l o w e d . The s c r a t c h c a n n o w be
p a i n t e d over as d e s c r i b e d earlier in this
Section.
Repairs
of dents
in
bodywork
When deep denting of the vehicle's
bodywork has taken place, the first task is to
pull the dent out, until the affected bodywork
almost attains its original shape. There is little
point in trying to restore the original shape
completely, as the metal in the damaged area
will have stretched on impact, and cannot be
reshaped fully to its original contour. It is better
to bring the level of the dent up to a point which
is about 3 m m below the level of the
surrounding b o d y w o r k . In cases where the
dent is very shallow anyway, it is not worth
trying to pull it out at all. If the underside of the
dent is accessible, it can be hammered out
gently f r o m behind, using a mallet with a
wooden or plastic head. Whilst doing this, hold
a suitable block of w o o d firmly against the
outside of the panel, to absorb the impact from
the hammer blows and thus prevent a large
area of the bodywork from being 'belled-out'.
Should the dent be in a section of the
b o d y w o r k which has a double skin, or some
other factor making it inaccessible f r o m
behind, a different technique is called for. Drill
several small holes through the metal inside
the area - particularly in the deeper section.
Then screw long self-tapping screws into the
holes, just sufficiently for them to gain a good
purchase in the metal. Now the dent can be
pulled out by pulling on the protruding heads
of the screws with a pair of pliers.
The next stage of the repair is the removal of
the paint from the damaged area, and from an
inch or so of the surrounding ' s o u n d '
bodywork. This is accomplished most easily by
using a wire brush or abrasive pad on a power
drill, although it can be done just as effectively
by hand, using sheets of abrasive paper. To
complete the preparation for filling, score the
surface of the bare metal with a screwdriver or
the tang of a file, or alternatively, drill small
holes in the affected area. This will provide a
really good 'key' for the filler paste.
To complete the repair, see the Section on
filling and respraying.
Repairs of rust holes
gashes in
bodywork
or
Remove all paint from the affected area,
and from an inch or so of the s u r r o u n d i n g
'sound' bodywork, using an abrasive pad or a
wire brush on a power drill. If these are not
available, a few sheets of abrasive paper will
d o the j o b m o s t effectively. With t h e paint
removed, you will be able to judge the severity
of the c o r r o s i o n , and therefore d e c i d e
whether to renew the w h o l e panel (if this is
possible) or to repair the affected area. New
b o d y panels are not as expensive as m o s t
people think, and it is often quicker and more
satisfactory to fit a new panel than to attempt
to repair large areas of corrosion.
Remove all fittings from the affected area,
except those which will act as a guide to the
original shape of the damaged bodywork (eg
headlight shells, etc). Then, using tin snips or
a hacksaw blade, remove all loose metal and
any other metal badly affected by corrosion.
H a m m e r the edges of the hole inwards, in
order to create a slight depression for the filler
paste.
Wire-brush the affected area to remove the
p o w d e r y rust f r o m the surface of the
remaining metal. Paint the affected area with
rust-inhibiting paint; if the back of the rusted
area is accessible, treat this also.
Before filling can t a k e place, it will be
necessary to block the hole in some way. This
can be achieved by the use of aluminium or
plastic mesh, or aluminium tape.
Aluminium or plastic mesh, or glass-fibre
matting, is probably the best material to use for
a large hole. Cut a piece to the approximate
size and shape of the hole to be filled, then
Bodywork and fittings 11 »3
position it in the hole so that its edges are
below the level of the surrounding bodywork. It
can be retained in position by several blobs of
filler paste around its periphery.
Aluminium tape should be used for small or
very narrow holes. Pull a piece off the roll, trim
it to the approximate size and shape required,
then pull off the backing paper (if used) and
stick t h e t a p e over the hole; it can be
o v e r l a p p e d if t h e t h i c k n e s s of o n e piece is
insufficient. Burnish d o w n t h e edges of t h e
t a p e w i t h t h e handle of a screwdriver or
similar, t o ensure that the t a p e is securely
attached to the metal underneath.
Bodywork repairs fiiling and
respraying
Before using this Section, see the Sections
on dents, s c r a t c h e s , rust holes a n d gash
repairs.
Many types of bodyfiller are available, but
generally s p e a k i n g , t h o s e proprietary kits
which contain a tin of filler paste and a tube of
resin hardener are best for this type of repair,
which can be used directly from the tube. A
wide, flexible plastic or nylon applicator will be
found invaluable for imparting a smooth and
w e l l - c o n t o u r e d finish t o the surface of t h e
filler.
Mix up a little filler on a clean piece of card
or board - measure t h e hardener carefully
(follow the maker's instructions on the pack),
otherwise the filler will set t o o rapidly or t o o
slowly. Alternatively, a ' n o - m i x ' filler can be
used straight from t h e t u b e w i t h o u t mixing,
but daylight is required t o cure it. Using the
applicator, apply t h e filler paste t o t h e
prepared area; draw the applicator across the
surface of t h e filler t o achieve the correct
contour and to level the surface. As soon as a
contour that approximates to the correct one
is achieved, s t o p working the paste - if y o u
carry o n t o o l o n g , t h e paste will b e c o m e
sticky a n d begin t o ' p i c k - u p ' on t h e
applicator. Continue to add thin layers of filler
paste at 20-minute intervals, until the level of
the filler is just p r o u d of t h e surrounding
bodywork.
Once t h e filler has h a r d e n e d , the excess
can be removed using a metal plane or file.
From then o n , progressively-finer grades of
abrasive paper should be used, starting with a
40-grade production paper, and finishing with
a 400-grade wet-and-dry paper. Always wrap
the abrasive paper around a flat rubber, cork,
or w o o d e n block - otherwise t h e surface of
the filler will not be completely flat. During the
smoothing of the filler surface, the w e t - a n d dry paper should be periodically rinsed in
water. This will ensure that a very s m o o t h
finish is imparted to the filler at the final stage.
At this stage, the ' d e n t ' s h o u l d be
surrsunded by a ring of bare metal, which in
turn should be encircled by t h e finely
'feathered' edge of the good paintwork. Rinse
the repair area with clean water, until all of the
dust
produced
by t h e
rubbing-down
operation has gone.
Spray the w h o l e area with a light coat of
primer - this will show up any imperfections in
the surface of t h e filler. Repair these
imperfections with fresh filler paste or
b o d y s t o p p e r , a n d once more s m o o t h the
surface with abrasive paper. If bodystopper is
used, it can be mixed with cellulose thinners,
to form a really thin paste w h i c h is ideal for
filling small holes. Repeat this s p r a y - a n d repair procedure until you are satisfied that the
surface of the filler, and the feathered edge of
the paintwork, are perfect. Clean t h e repair
area with clean water, and allow to dry fully.
The repair area is n o w ready for final
spraying. Paint spraying must be carried out
in a w a r m , dry, windless and d u s t - f r e e
a t m o s p h e r e . This c o n d i t i o n can be created
artificially if you have access to a large indoor
working area, but if you are forced to work in
the open, you will have to pick your day very
carefully. If you are working indoors, dousing
the floor in the work area with water will help
to settle the dust which would otherwise be in
the atmosphere. If the repair area is confined
to one body panel, mask off the surrounding
panels; this will help to minimise the effects of
a slight mis-match in paint colours. Bodywork
fittings (eg c h r o m e strips, door handles etc)
will also need to be masked off. Use genuine
masking tape, and several thicknesses of
newspaper, for the masking operations.
Before c o m m e n c i n g t o spray, agitate t h e
aerosol can thoroughly, then spray a test area
(an o l d t i n , or similar) until t h e t e c h n i q u e is
mastered. Cover the repair area with a thick
coat of primer; the thickness should be built
up using several thin layers of paint, rather
than one thick one. Using 400-grade w e t - a n d dry paper, rub d o w n the surface of the primer
until it is really smooth. While doing this, the
work area should be thoroughly doused with
water, and the wet-and-dry paper periodically
rinsed in water. Allow to dry before spraying
on more paint.
Spray on the t o p coat, again building up the
thickness by using several thin layers of paint.
Start spraying at t h e t o p of the repair area,
and then, using a side-to-side motion, work
d o w n w a r d s until t h e w h o l e repair area a n d
about 2 inches of the s u r r o u n d i n g original
p a i n t w o r k is c o v e r e d . Remove all masking
material 10 t o 15 minutes after spraying on
the final coat of paint.
Allow the new paint at least t w o weeks to
harden, then, using a paintwork renovator or a
very fine cutting paste, blend the edges of the
paint into the existing paintwork. Finally, apply
wax polish.
Plastic
components
With the use of more and more plastic body
components by the vehicle manufacturers (eg
bumpers, spoilers, and in s o m e cases major
b o d y panels), rectification of more serious
damage t o such items has become a matter
of either entrusting repair work to a specialist
in this
field,
or renewing
complete
c o m p o n e n t s . Repair of such d a m a g e by the
DIY owner is not really feasible, owing t o the
cost of the equipment and materials required
for effecting such repairs. The basic technique
involves making a groove along the line of the
crack in the plastic, using a rotary burr in a
power drill. The damaged part is then welded
back together, using a hot air gun to heat up
and fuse a plastic filler rod into the groove.
Any excess plastic is then removed, and the
area r u b b e d d o w n t o a s m o o t h finish. It is
important that a filler rod of the correct plastic
is used, as body components can be made of
a variety of different types (eg polycarbonate,
ABS, polypropylene).
Damage of a less serious nature (abrasions,
minor cracks etc) can be repaired by the DIY
o w n e r using a t w o - p a r t epoxy filler repair
material, O n c e mixed in equal p r o p o r t i o n s ,
this is used in similar fashion to the bodywork
filler used on metal panels. The filler is usually
cured in t w e n t y t o thirty minutes, ready for
sanding and painting.
If t h e owner is renewing a c o m p l e t e
c o m p o n e n t himself, or if he has repaired it
w i t h e p o x y filler, he will be left w i t h the
problem of finding a suitable paint for finishing
which is c o m p a t i b l e with the t y p e of plastic
used. At one time, the use of a universal paint
was not possible, owing t o the complex range
of plastics encountered in b o d y c o m p o n e n t
applications. S t a n d a r d paints, generally
speaking, will not b o n d t o plastic or rubber
satisfactorily, but specialist paints, to match
any plastic or rubber finish, can be obtained
from dealers. However, it is now possible to
obtain a plastic body parts finishing kit which
consists of a pre-primer treatment, a primer
and coloured t o p coat. Full instructions are
normally supplied with a kit, but basically, the
method of use is to first apply the pre-primer
to the component concerned, and allow it to
dry for up to 30 minutes. Then the primer is
a p p l i e d , a n d left t o dry for about an hour
before finally applying the s p e c i a l - c o l o u r e d
t o p coat. The result is a c o r r e c t l y - c o l o u r e d
component, where the paint will flex with the
plastic or rubber, a property that s t a n d a r d
paint does not normally posses.
5
Major body damage repair
'
7
-^LJy
15.6a Front d o o r l o c k s t r i k e r
15.6b Rear d o o r l o c k s t r i k e r
16.2a To r e m o v e t h e f r o n t d o o r outer
handle, u n s c r e w t h e s c r e w f r o m t h e rear
e d g e of t h e d o o r . . .
c o m p l e t i o n , tighten the hinge bolts t o t h e
specified torque. Check the adjustment of the
door as follows.
necessary, slacken the s e c u r i n g bolts, and
adjust the position of the lock striker on the
body pillar to achieve satisfactory alignment
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Tighten the bolts securely
on completion.
2 U n s c r e w t h e handle securing screw
f r o m the rear edge of the door, then
unscrew the nut securing the handle
to the door, using a s o c k e t t h r o u g h the
aperture in the inner d o o r panel ' (see
illustrations).
Adjustment
5 Initially close the door carefully, in case the
alignment is incorrect, which may cause
scratching on the door or the body, and check
the fit of the door with the surrounding panels.
If adjustment is required, loosen the socketheaded hinge-to-door bolts then reposition the
door as required and retighten the bolts to the
specified torque. FIAT technicians use a
special bent spanner to do this, due to the
position of the bolts, however, it may be
possible to make up a suitable tool locally.
6 C h e c k the operation of the d o o r lock. If
16 Doorhandle
and lock components removal and refitting
Outer
door
^
handle
3 Carefully swivel out the front of the handle,
then use a screwdriver release the clips and
d i s c o n n e c t the operating rods f r o m the
handle. Alternatively, on the rear door release
the plastic adjustment clip from the operating
rod inside the door. Withdraw the handle from
the door (see illustrations).
Removal
1 Refer to Section 14 and remove the door inner
trim panel and sealing sheet.
Refitting
4 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but check
16.2b . . . a n d t h e nut l o c a t e d t h r o u g h t h e
a p e r t u r e in t h e d o o r panel
16.2c To r e m o v e t h e rear d o o r o u t e r
handle, u n s c r e w t h e s c r e w f r o m t h e rear
e d g e of t h e d o o r . . .
16.2d . . . a n d t h e nut l o c a t e d t h r o u g h t h e
a p e r t u r e in t h e d o o r p a n e l . . .
16.2e . . . t h e n s w i v e l o u t t h e handle a n d
release t h e plastic a d j u s t m e n t c l i p inside
the door
16.3a Using a s c r e w d r i v e r . . .
16.3b . . . t o d i s c o n n e c t t h e o p e r a t i n g r o d s
f r o m t h e f r o n t d o o r exterior h a n d l e
11*12 Bodywork and fittings
•
16.10 R e m o v i n g t h e s e c u r i t y c o v e r f r o m
the front door lock operating rods
the operation of the door lock before refitting the
inner door panel. On the rear door, refit the
handle then refit the plastic adjustment clip onto
the operating rod.
Outer door lock
(driver's
door)
barrel
Removal
5 Remove the outer door handle as described
in paragraphs 1 to 3.
6 Insert t h e ignition key in t h e barrel, then
carefully extract the retaining spring.
7 With t h e spring r e m o v e d , w i t h d r a w t h e
barrel from the handle.
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
16.11 R e m o v i n g t h e f r o n t d o o r l o c k
mounting screws
Door
lock
Removal
9 Remove the outer door handle as described
in paragraphs 1 t o 3.
10 Undo the screws and remove the security
cover f r o m t h e operating
rods (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If t h e s c r e w s d o not unscrew
from the inner nuts, the nuts may be turning in
the plastic cover, in w h i c h case t h e cover
should be pulled from t h e m . After removing
the cover, t h e nuts can be s u p e r - g l u e d in
position again for refitting.
11 From the rear edge of the door, unscrew
and remove the three lock mounting screws
(see illustration).
12 Release t h e clips a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e
operating rods (including the locking handle)
from the lock. The remote inner door handle
16.12b D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e r e m o t e inner
d o o r handle o p e r a t i n g r o d f r o m t h e f r o n t
d o o r e x t e r i o r handle
16.12c D i s c o n n e c t t h e m a i n
wiring plug . . .
16.12e . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e r e m a i n i n g
w i r i n g p l u g (front d o o r )
16.12f The f r o n t d o o r l o c k r e m o v e d f r o m
the door
16.12a R e m o v i n g t h e f r o n t d o o r l o c k
locking handle
operating rod can be disconnected from the
inner handle. Disconnect the wiring plugs
(after removing the cover o n t h e front door)
and w i t h d r a w the lock f r o m inside t h e door
(see illustrations).
Refitting
13 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Inner
door
handle
Removal
14 Refer to Section 14 and remove the door
inner trim panel and sealing sheet.
15 Unscrew the inner door handle mounting
nuts, then withdraw the handle and disconnect
the operating rod.
Refitting
16 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
16.12d . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e c o v e r .
16.12g T h e rear d o o r l o c k r e m o v e d f r o m
the door
Bodywork and fittings 11*13
17.2 R e m o v i n g t h e r u b b e r b o o t a n d collar
from the exterior mirror control knob
17 Exterior mirror components
- removal and refitting
17.3 R e m o v i n g t h e t r i a n g u l a r t r i m
17.4a R e m o v e t h e c o v e r . .
^
^
-.Pi
****-h^l;Vn
Mirror
assembly
(manually
operated)
' - 7
if'
.
Removal
1 Carefully remove the rubber boot from the
exterior mirror control knob.
2 Unscrew the locking collar and release the
control knob from the door (see illustration).
Note that the collar has four c u t - o u t s on its
perimeter. If a suitable tool is not available to
engage the collar, use a punch to loosen it.
3 Using a screwdriver, carefully prise the
triangular trim from the inside of the door (see
illustration).
4 Support the exterior mirror, then unscrew
the m o u n t i n g bolts and w i t h d r a w the mirror
from the outside of the door. Note that one of
the mounting bolts is located behind a cover
on the front e d g e of the d o o r (see
illustrations).
Refitting
17.4b . . . t h e n u n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g
bolts...
tool between the mirror glass and the mirror
b o d y , and carefully lever out the glass to
release it f r o m the securing clips (see
illustrations).
A
11 Carefully push the glass into position to
engage the securing clips.
HAYNES
17.4c . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e m i r r o r f r o m t h e
o u t s i d e of t h e d o o r
18 Door window glass
and regulator removal and refitting
Front door window
I
glass
Removal
Refitting
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Mirror
assembly
(electrically
operated)
Warning:
Protect
your
hands
and eyes from glass
splinters.
if*
To
aid
refitting,
lightly
grease the securing clips on
the rear of the mirror glass.
1 S w i t c h on the ignition, then position the
window glass half open.
2 Remove the door inner trim panel and the
sealing sheet, as described in Section 14.
3 W o r k i n g t h r o u g h the aperture in the door
inner panel, pull d o w n the plastic fastener clip
and release the window glass from the pin on
the regulator arm. The clip is on the end of a
loop and a pair of pliers may be used to pull
Removal
6 With the front door open, carefully prise off
the triangular trim on the inside of the mirror
location.
7 Disconnect the wiring plug leading to the
mirror.
8 Support the exterior mirror, then unscrew
the m o u n t i n g bolts and w i t h d r a w the mirror
from the outside of the door. Note that one of
the m o u n t i n g bolts is located on the front
edge of the door.
Refitting
9 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Mirror
glass
Removal
10 Insert a suitable thin plastic or w o o d e n
17.10a Use a plastic or w o o d e n t o o l t o
prise o u t t h e m i r r o r glass
17.10b The m i r r o r has s e c u r i n g c l i p s
a t t a c h e d t o its rear s u r f a c e
11*14 Bodywork and fittings
18.3a Using a pair of pliers t o u n c l i p t h e
plastic f a s t e n e r t h a t s e c u r e s t h e f r o n t
w i n d o w glass t o t h e r e g u l a t o r m e c h a n i s m
18.3b T h e plastic c l i p r e m o v e d f r o m t h e
e n d of t h e plastic pin
18.3c T h e f r o n t w i n d o w glass has a hole
w h i c h e n g a g e s w i t h t h e plastic p i n o n t h e
regulator mechanism
d o w n t h e l o o p , however, take care not t o
break t h e plastic (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If it is
tight, spray the clip with a little WD-40 before
removing t h e clip. S u p p o r t t h e glass o n a
block of w o o d , or use adhesive tape to hold it
in its raised position.
4 Unbolt and remove the security plate.
5 Carefully remove t h e inner a n d outer
mouldings from the upper section of the door,
then lower t h e w i n d o w a n d pull up the rear
window glass rubber guide moulding from the
rear guide channel (see illustrations).
6 Tilt the w i n d o w glass f o r w a r d s and
withdraw the upper rear corner of the glass
from the outside of the door (see illustration).
18.5a R e m o v e t h e f r o n t d o o r inner
moulding . . .
Refitting
7 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Before
refitting the inner trim panel, c h e c k the
operation of the w i n d o w by temporarily
reconnecting the switch wiring and switching
on the ignition.
Front
door window
regulator
Removal
18.6 Tilt t h e front w i n d o w glass forwards and
remove it upwards
18.9a D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g . . .
18.9b . . . t h e n u n s c r e w t h e b o l t s . . .
8 Remove the window glass as described in
paragraphs 1 to 5.
9 Disconnect the wiring from the motor on
electrically-operated windows, then unscrew the
5 regulator mounting bolts, then withdraw the
regulator complete with motor through the
aperture in the door inner panel (see
illustrations).
18.9c . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e f r o n t d o o r
w i n d o w regulator and motor
Bodywork and fittings 11 «15
w
r x
18.13 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e plastic c l i p f r o m
t h e e n d of t h e plastic p i n
Refitting
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Rear door window
glass
Removal
11 Fully o p e n t h e w i n d o w and note t h e
position of the regulator handle.
12 Remove the door inner trim panel and the
sealing sheet, as described in Section 14.
13 Working through the aperture in the door
inner panel, pull down the plastic fastener clip
and release the window glass from the pin on
the regulator arm (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If it is
tight, spray the clip with a little WD-40 before
r e m o v i n g t h e clip. S u p p o r t the glass o n a
block of w o o d , or use adhesive tape to hold it
in its raised position.
18.14a U n s c r e w t h e b o l t s . . .
14 Unbolt and remove the security plate (see
illustrations).
15 Remove the w i n d o w glass rear guide
channel by u n s c r e w i n g t h e retaining bolts
located on the rear edge of the door and on
the inner panel (see illustrations).
16 Carefully remove the inner and outer
mouldings from the upper section of the door.
Unbolt the outer triangular plastic cover, then
lower the window and pull up the rear window
glass
rubber
guide
moulding
(see
illustrations).
17 Lift the window glass and withdraw it from
the outside of the door (see illustration).
Refitting
18 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Before
refitting the inner trim panel, c h e c k the
—
18.15a U n s c r e w t h e rear b o l t . . .
18.14b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e s e c u r i t y plate
f r o m t h e rear d o o r
T
18.15b . . . a n d inner panel b o l t . . .
operation of t h e w i n d o w by
refitting the regulator handle.
Rear door window
temporarily
regulator
Removal
19 Fully o p e n t h e w i n d o w a n d note the
position of the regulator handle.
20 Remove the door inner trim panel and the
sealing sheet, as described in Section 14.
21 Working through the aperture in the door
inner panel, pull d o w n the plastic fastener clip
and release the window glass from the pin on
the regulator arm. If it is tight, spray the clip
with a little WD-40 before removing the clip.
Support the glass on a block of w o o d , or use
adhesive tape to hold it in its raised position.
22 Unbolt and remove the security plate.
a
18.15c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e rear w i n d o w
glass rear g u i d e c h a n n e l f r o m t h e d o o r
11*16 Bodywork and fittings
18.23a U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g n u t s . . .
18.23b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e r e g u l a t o r
t h r o u g h t h e a p e r t u r e in t h e d o o r inner
panel
23 Unscrew the 5 regulator m o u n t i n g nuts,
then w i t h d r a w the regulator t h r o u g h the
aperture in the door inner panel (see
illustrations).
remove the connector flap, then disconnect
the wiring.
5 Lift the seat out of the passenger area. Do
not lift on the adjustment bar, otherwise the
seat runners may be misaligned.
Refitting
Refitting
24 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
19 Seats removal and refitting
Front
§|
^
seats
Removal
1 On m o d e l s fitted with a side airbag and
presence sensor in the front passenger seat,
disconnect the battery (see Disconnecting
the
battery) then wait approximately 10 minutes
before p r o c e e d i n g . This is necessary to
ensure the airbag system is c o m p l e t e l y
deactivated and safe.
2 The front seats are secured to the floorpan
by four bolts. First, adjust the seat t o w a r d s
the rear of the car to gain access to the t w o
bolts at the front, then unscrew and remove
them (see illustration).
3 Adjust the seat fully forwards, then unscrew
and remove the t w o rearmost bolts (see
illustration).
4 Tilt the seat b a c k w a r d s for access to its
underside. As a p p l i c a b l e , d i s c o n n e c t the
wiring from the seat heater, lumbar adjuster,
and side airbag. Prise off the safety cap and
19.2 U n s c r e w i n g t h e f r o n t m o u n t i n g b o l t s
f r o m t h e f r o n t seat
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Note that
the location pin on the rear of the mounting
runner engages with a hole in the floor (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . When reconnecting the battery
on m o d e l s w i t h a side airbag and presence
sensor, ensure there is no one inside the
vehicle, as a precaution against accidental
activation of the airbag. With the driver's door
o p e n , reach inside and turn on the ignition,
then c h e c k the operation of the airbag
warning light.
Rear seat
backrest
Removal
7 Lower the rear seat backrest o n t o the
c u s h i o n , then undo the row of screws
securing the luggage c o m p a r t m e n t floor
covering to the b o t t o m of the backrest.
Carefully prise out the buttons and fold back
the floor covering.
8 At the outer lower corners, u n d o the t w o
screws on each side securing the backrest to
the brackets.
9 Lift the backrest from the passenger area.
Refitting
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
19.3 U n s c r e w i n g t h e rear m o u n t i n g b o l t s
f r o m t h e f r o n t seat
18.23c The rear d o o r w i n d o w r e g u l a t o r
Rear seat
cushion
Removal
11 Using an Allen key, unscrew and remove
the bolts from the mounting brackets on the
front edge of the cushion.
12 Lift the rear seat cushion and remove it
from the passenger area.
Refitting
13 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
20 Seat belt components precautions, removal
and refitting
^
*I
>^
Precautions
1 All models covered in this manual are fitted
w i t h a front seat belt a u t o m a t i c tensioner
s y s t e m w h i c h is integrated in the reel. The
tensioner is triggered by a frontal i m p a c t
a b o v e a p r e - d e t e r m i n e d f o r c e . Lesser
impacts, including impacts from behind, will
not trigger the system.
2 When the system is triggered, an internal
mass moves to release a gas generator which
is f o r c e d under spring tension against a
percussion pin. This causes c o m b u s t i o n of
the pyrotechnic charge which forces a piston
upwards to the top of the expansion chamber.
A t t a c h e d to the piston is a r o d w h i c h is
w r a p p e d a r o u n d the reel pulley at its other
end, and this retracts and locks the seat belt
19.6 L o c a t i o n pin o n t h e f r o n t seat
m o u n t i n g runner
Bodywork and fittings 11*17
20.11 R e m o v i n g t h e d o o r k i c k - p a n e l s
20.12 Pull t h e d o o r w e a t h e r s t r i p s a w a y
f r o m t h e B-pillar
20.13a Prise off t h e c o v e r . . .
inertia reel in position, holding the front seat
o c c u p a n t s firmly in p o s i t i o n . O n c e the
tensioner has been triggered, the seat belt will
be permanently l o c k e d and the assembly
must be renewed.
3 To prevent the risk of injury, note the
following warnings before contemplating any
work on the front seat belts.
Warning:
If
the
seat
belt/
tensioner mechanism
is dropped
from a height
of 1 metre
or
more, it must be renewed,
even
if it has suffered no apparent
damage. Do
not allow any solvents to come into
contact
with the tensioner cylinder. Do not
subject
the tensioner
cylinder/inertia
reel to any
form of shock as this could
accidentally
trigger the mechanism.
Do not subject
the
tensioner
cylinder
to temperatures
in
excess of 110°C
4 Pull out the door weatherstrip from the rear
side panel.
5 U n d o the s c r e w s s e c u r i n g the rear side
panel to the sill panel.
6 Prise off the cover and unscrew the bolt
securing the seat belt to the floor.
7 Prise out the covers and unscrew the side
trim s c r e w s . Also unbolt the rear seat lock.
Withdraw the side trim.
8 Extract the clip and remove the guide pin
from the B-pillar. Release the seat belt at the
same time.
9 Break the plastic protective collar around the
safety bracket with a screwdriver, and unbolt
the bracket from the tensioner. Note: This will
invalidate the manufacturer's
guarantee. The
bolt is of double-headed shear type and must
be renewed together with the bracket. Note
that as the bracket is removed, the tensioner
will be locked to prevent accidental activation.
10 Unscrew the mounting bolt and withdraw
the tensioner from inside the B-pillar. Handle
the unit very carefully and observe the
warnings given at the beginning of this Section.
5-door models
11 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the front
and rear door kick-panels (see illustration). If
preferred, the front panel front screw need not
be removed.
12 Pull the front and rear door weatherstrips
away from the B-pillar (see illustration).
13 Prise off the cover and unscrew the bolt
securing the seat belt to the inner sill panel
(see illustrations).
14 Pull off the k n o b f r o m the height
a d j u s t m e n t m e c h a n i s m , t h e n prise off the
cover and unscrew the nut securing the seat
belt to the mechanism (see illustrations).
15 Remove the cover and u n d o the s c r e w ,
then carefully prise the trim away from the Bpillar and release the seat belt f r o m it (see
illustrations).
20.13b . . . a n d u n s c r e w t h e bolt s e c u r i n g
t h e f r o n t seat belt t o t h e inner sill panel
20.14a R e m o v e t h e k n o b f r o m t h e height
adjustment mechanism . . .
A
Front seat
belts
Removal
3-door models
1 Undo the screws and remove the front door
kick-panel. The front screw is located beneath
the facia and the rear one is l o c a t e d at the
bottom of the B-pillar.
2 At the base of the B-pillar undo the screw
securing the trim, then prise off the covers,
and unscrew the bolts securing the seat belt
rail to the side panel.
3 On models with ABS, remove the rear seat
cushion as d e s c r i b e d in S e c t i o n 19, then
disconnect the wiring leading to the rear ABS
sensor.
20.14b . . . t h e n prise off t h e c o v e r .
20.14c . . . a n d u n s c r e w t h e n u t s e c u r i n g
t h e seat belt t o t h e m e c h a n i s m
20.15a R e m o v e t h e c o v e r .
11*18 Bodywork and fittings
20.15b . . . u n d o t h e s c r e w .
16 Extract the clip and remove the guide pin
from the B-pillar (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Release
the seat belt at the same time.
17 Break the plastic protective collar around
20.15c . . . prise a w a y t h e t r i m . .
the safety bracket with a screwdriver (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) , and unscrew the reel mounting
bolt w h i c h also secures the safety bracket.
N o t e : This will invalidate the
manufacturer's
20.15d . . . a n d release t h e seat belt f r o m it
guarantee. The bolt is of double-headed shear
type and must be renewed together with the
bracket. Note that as the bracket is removed,
the tensioner will be automatically locked to
prevent
accidental
activation
(see
illustration).
18 Unscrew the three bolts and withdraw the
reel/tensioner and bracket f r o m the B-pillar
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Handle the unit very
carefully and observe the warnings given at
the beginning of this Section.
All m o d e l s
19 T o r e m o v e the stalk, unbolt it f r o m the
inside of the front seat (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
There is no need to remove the plastic cover.
Refitting
20.16 Seat belt a n d g u i d e pin o n t h e
B-pillar
20.17a B r e a k i n g t h i s plastic collar will
invalidate t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s g u a r a n t e e
20 Carefully locate the tensioner (and bracket
on 5-door models) in the B-pillar, and tighten
the mounting bolt(s).
21 Refit the safety bracket t o g e t h e r w i t h a
new d o u b l e - h e a d e d shear bolt. Tighten the
shear bolt until its head breaks off. Tighten all
remaining bolts securely.
22 The remaining procedure is a reversal of
removal.
Rear seat
belts
Removal
20.17b W h e n t h e safety b r a c k e t is
r e m o v e d f r o m t h e reel, t h e t e n s i o n e r is
automatically disarmed and locked
20.18 One of t h e b o l t s s e c u r i n g t h e reel
a n d b r a c k e t t o t h e B-pillar
20.19 Seat belt s t a l k m o u n t i n g bolt o n t h e
f r o n t seat
20.23 U n s c r e w i n g t h e rear seat belt l o w e r
m o u n t i n g bolt
23 Fold the rear seat cushion forwards, then
prise off the cover and unscrew the rear seat
belt lower mounting bolt (see illustration).
24 Prise off the cover and unscrew the belt
upper
anchor
mounting
bolt
(see
illustrations).
25 Carefully prise out the speaker grille from
20.24a Prise off t h e c o v e r .
Bodywork and fittings 11*19
20.24b . . . t h e n u n s c r e w t h e b o l t . . .
20.24c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e rear belt u p p e r
a n c h o r m o u n t i n g bolt
20.25 R e m o v i n g t h e rear s p e a k e r grille
the side trim panel by depressing the t a b s
(see illustration).
26 Remove the trim panel for access to the
rear seat belt reel m o u n t i n g bolt (see
illustration). Unscrew and remove the bolt.
27 Guide the seat belt through the hole in the
rear pillar cover, and remove it complete with
the reel (see illustration).
28 To remove the stalk, unbolt it f r o m the
rear floor panel beneath the rear seat cushion.
courtesy light, then insert it in the drive and turn
to move the roof as required (see illustrations).
5 If necessary, the sunroof m o t o r may be
removed after removing the interior light/roof
switch housing by unscrewing the mounting
b o l t s / s c r e w s . The sunroof control relay is
located next to the motor (see illustrations).
M a k e sure that t h e m o t o r gear is correctly
engaged with the t w o cables before tightening
the mounting bolts/screws.
Refitting
29 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
tighten the mounting bolts securely.
21 Sunroofgeneral information
20.27 G u i d i n g t h e rear seat belt t h r o u g h
t h e hole in t h e rear pillar c o v e r
1 Due to the c o m p l e x i t y of the sunroof
mechanism, considerable expertise is needed
to repair, replace or adjust the sunroof
components successfully. Removal of the roof
first requires the headlining to be r e m o v e d ,
w h i c h is a c o m p l e x and t e d i o u s o p e r a t i o n ,
and not a task to be undertaken lightly.
Therefore, any p r o b l e m s with the sunroof
should be referred to a FIAT dealer.
2 If the sunroof m o t o r fails to operate, first
check the relevant fuse. If the fault cannot be
t r a c e d and rectified, the sunroof can be
opened and closed manually as follows.
3 Carefully prise the small covers from the
interior light/roof switch housing, and unscrew
the two bolts.
4 Remove the special key from the inside of the
21.4a R e m o v e t h e special key f r o m t h e
inside of t h e c o u r t e s y l i g h t . . .
21.4b . . . a n d insert it in t h e drive t o m o v e
the sunroof
21.5a R e m o v e t h e m o u n t i n g
bolts/screws...
21.5b . . . t h e n l o w e r t h e s u n r o o f m o t o r
a n d interior l i g h t / r o o f s w i t c h f r o m t h e
headlining
21.5c R e m o v i n g t h e s u n r o o f c o n t r o l relay
11 »20 Bodywork and fittings
23.3 Releasing t h e gear lever gaiter f r o m
the floor
23.4a R e m o v e t h e c o v e r i n g f r o m t h e
o d d m e n t s t r a y in t h e c e n t r e c o n s o l e . . .
22 Windscreen, rear window
glass, and fixed window general information
23 Facia and centre console removal and refitting
S
3Q
1 These areas of glass are b o n d e d in
position with a special adhesive. Renewal is a
difficult,
messy
and
time-consuming
task, w h i c h is b e y o n d the s c o p e of the
h o m e m e c h a n i c . Furthermore, the task
carries a high risk of breakage; this
applies especially to the laminated glass
w i n d s c r e e n . In view of this, o w n e r s are
strongly advised t o have this sort of w o r k
carried out by one of the many specialist
windscreen fitters.
%
Sfc
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 Remove the c o m b i n a t i o n s w i t c h f r o m the
t o p of the steering c o l u m n as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 12, Section 14. This p r o c e d u r e
includes the removal of the steering wheel
and shrouds.
23.4b . . . a n d u n d o t h e h i d d e n s c r e w
tray in the centre c o n s o l e , and u n d o the
hidden screw (see illustrations).
5 Prise the ashtray from the rear of the centre
c o n s o l e , and u n d o the hidden s c r e w s (see
illustrations).
6 Prise the electric rear view mirror s w i t c h
panel or d u m m y panel f r o m the centre
c o n s o l e and unscrew the hidden s c r e w s .
Disconnect the wiring where necessary (see
illustrations).
3 Release the gear lever gaiter from the floor
and pull it up the gear lever (see illustration).
4 Remove the covering f r o m the o d d m e n t s
7 Release the fasteners (depress the central
pins) and undo the screws, then remove the
heater side covers. Release the handbrake
lever gaiter and remove it from the lever, then
w i t h d r a w the centre console over the
handbrake lever, and remove from inside the
car (see illustrations).
23.5a R e m o v e t h e a s h t r a y . . .
23.5b . . . a n d u n d o t h e h i d d e n s c r e w s
23.6a R e m o v e t h e c e n t r e p a n e l . . .
23.6b . . . a n d u n s c r e w t h e h i d d e n s c r e w s
23.7a Release t h e f a s t e n e r s a n d u n d o t h e
screws . . .
23.7b . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e heater side
covers
Bodywork and fittings 11 »21
23.7d . . . a n d r e m o v e it f r o m t h e lever . . .
23.7e . . . t h e n w i t h d r a w t h e c e n t r e
c o n s o l e over t h e h a n d b r a k e lever
23.12a Heater c o n t r o l panel s u r r o u n d
mounting screws above the ashtray . . .
23.12b . . . a n d in t h e r a d i o a p e r t u r e
remove the hazard s w i t c h (see Chapter 12,
Section 14).
15 Undo the screws and withdraw the switch
panel from the front of the facia. Disconnect
the wiring and remove the switches from the
facia (see illustrations).
14 Using a small screwdriver, carefully prise
out the small covers f r o m each end of the
facia s w i t c h e s located above the heater
control k n o b s (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Also, prise
out the cover at the centre of the switches and
23.13a Pull off t h e heater v e n t i l a t i o n
centre control knob . . .
23.13b . . . a n d u n d o t h e s c r e w l o c a t e d
b e n e a t h it
23.14 Prise o u t t h e s m a l l c o v e r s . . .
23.15a U n d o t h e s c r e w s . . .
23.15b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e s w i t c h panel
f r o m t h e f r o n t of t h e facia . . .
23.7c Release t h e h a n d b r a k e lever
gaiter...
8 Remove the cover from the fuse holder
on the facia, then unscrew the facia
m o u n t i n g bolt accessible t h r o u g h the
aperture.
9 Using an Allen key, unscrew the bolts and
remove the c o w l i n g f r o m the instrument
panel. Note that the cowling incorporates the
r i g h t - h a n d air vent, w h i c h has a securing
screw accessed from below.
10 Undo the s c r e w s and w i t h d r a w the
instrument panel f r o m the facia sufficient
to d i s c o n n e c t the r e a r - m o u n t e d wiring
lugs.
With
the
wiring
disconnected,
w i t h d r a w the instrument panel f r o m the
facia.
11 Remove the r a d i o / c a s s e t t e player as
described in Chapter 12.
12 O p e n the ashtray, t h e n unscrew the
heater control panel s u r r o u n d m o u n t i n g
s c r e w s . There are t w o above the ashtray
aperture and four in the radio aperture (see
illustrations).
13 Carefully
pull
off
the
heater
ventilation centre control k n o b (taking care
not to d r o p the retaining spring clip),
using a pair of pliers and a piece of card t o
p r o t e c t the k n o b . Unscrew the panel
m o u n t i n g s c r e w located beneath it (see
illustrations).
11 »22 Bodywork and fittings
16 W i t h d r a w the heater control panel
surround from the facia (see illustration).
17 With the ashtray c l o s e d , undo the lower
m o u n t i n g screws, then o p e n the ashtray lid
and unscrew the upper m o u n t i n g s c r e w s .
W i t h d r a w the ashtray f r o m the facia and
d i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the cigar lighter
(see illustrations).
18 W o r k i n g t h r o u g h the ashtray aperture,
unscrew the facia mounting screws securing
the facia to the heater housing (see
illustration).
23.17a W i t h t h e a s h t r a y c l o s e d , u n d o t h e l o w e r m o u n t i n g
screws . . .
23.17b . . . t h e n o p e n t h e a s h t r a y a n d u n s c r e w t h e upper
mounting screws
23.17c D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e c i g a r lighter
23.18 W o r k i n g t h r o u g h t h e a s h t r a y a p e r t u r e , u n s c r e w t h e f a c i a
m o u n t i n g s c r e w s s e c u r i n g t h e facia t o t h e heater h o u s i n g
Bodywork and fittings 11 »23
23.19 R e m o v i n g t h e s c r e w s s e c u r i n g t h e
heater c o n t r o l s t o t h e facia
23.20a U n d o t h e s c r e w s . . .
23.20b . . . r e m o v e t h e t r i m . . .
23.20c . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e g l o v e b o x
f r o m t h e facia
23.21a U n d o t h e s c r e w s . . .
23.21b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e l e f t - h a n d side
air vent
23.22 R e m o v i n g t h e f a c i a m o u n t i n g b o l t
l o c a t e d in t h e i n s t r u m e n t panel a p e r t u r e
23.26 U n s c r e w t h e f a c i a m o u n t i n g b o l t s in
the speaker apertures
23.27a U n s c r e w t h e c e n t r e b o l t . . .
19 Undo the s c r e w s securing the heater
controls to the facia (see illustration). There
are four screws.
20 Open the glovebox lid, then remove the
upper trim from inside the glovebox. Unscrew
the m o u n t i n g bolts and w i t h d r a w the
glovebox from the facia (see illustrations).
21 Remove the left-hand side air vent from
the end of the facia, using a screwdriver in the
glovebox aperture to unscrew the lower
mounting screws (see illustrations).
22 U n s c r e w the facia m o u n t i n g
bolts
accessible t h r o u g h the vent and instrument
panel apertures (see illustration).
23 Unscrew the facia lower mounting bolts at
each end of the facia (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If
necessary for access to the bolts, undo the
screws and remove the trim panels located on
the outer sides of the footwells.
24 Carefully prise out the speaker grilles from
both sides of the facia, taking care not to
damage the facia material.
25 In the grille aperture on each side,
unscrew the speaker m o u n t i n g s c r e w s ,
w i t h d r a w the speakers, and d i s c o n n e c t the
wiring.
26 With the speakers removed, unscrew the
facia m o u n t i n g bolts now visible (see
illustration).
27 U n s c r e w the centre and t o p
mounting bolts (see illustrations).
facia
23.23 R e m o v i n g t h e f a c i a l o w e r m o u n t i n g
bolts
11 »24 Bodywork and fittings
23.27b . . . a n d t h e bolt in t h e i n s t r u m e n t panel a p e r t u r e
28 U n s c r e w the bolts securing the facia to
the steering column (see illustration).
29 Unscrew the lower mounting nut located
near the steering c o l u m n . Also, unscrew the
remaining side bolts and centre bolts (see
illustrations).
30 With the help of an assistant, carefully
withdraw the facia from the bulkhead slightly.
Check that nothing remains c o n n e c t e d
between the facia and bulkhead, then withdraw
it from one side of the car (see illustration).
Refitting
31 Refitting is a reversal of r e m o v a l . On
c o m p l e t i o n , reconnect the battery negative
lead and check the operation of all controls,
gauges and instruments disturbed during the
23.29b B o l t l o c a t e d a b o v e t h e f u s e b o x
removal p r o c e s s , including
ation/heating system.
23.28 R e m o v i n g t h e f a c i a - t o - s t e e r i n g c o l u m n bolt
the
24 Glovebox removal and refitting
ventil-
;sk
Removal
1 Open the g l o v e b o x lid, then on early
models undo the t w o knobs and remove the
upper trim from inside the glovebox.
2 Unscrew the mounting bolts and withdraw
the glovebox from the facia.
Refitting
3 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
23.29c B o l t l o c a t e d b e n e a t h t h e l e f t - h a n d
side of t h e f a c i a
23.30 R e m o v i n g t h e f a c i a f r o m t h e
bulkhead
10*1
Chapter 10
Suspension and steering systems
Contents
Front hub bearings - renewal
2
Front suspension anti-roll bar - removal and refitting
6
Front suspension lower arm - removal and refitting
4
Front suspension lower arm balljoint - renewal
5
Front suspension strut - removal, overhaul and refitting
3
Front suspension subframe - removal and refitting
7
General information
1
Ignition switch - removal and refitting
16
Manual steering gear assembly - removal and refitting
18
Power steering fluid level check
See Weekly checks
Power steering gear assembly - removal and refitting
19
Power steering hydraulic system - bleeding
21
Power steering pump - removal and refitting
22
Rear axle assembly - removal and refitting
13
Rear hub bearings - renewal
8
Rear shock absorber - removal and refitting
9
Rear suspension anti-roll bar - removal and refitting
12
Rear suspension coil spring - removal and refitting
10
Rear suspension trailing arm - removal and refitting
11
Steering column - removal, overhaul and refitting
15
Steering column lock and barrel - removal and refitting
17
Steering gear rubber gaiters - renewal
20
Steering wheel - removal and refitting
14
Track-rod end - removal and refitting
23
Tyre checks
See Weekly checks
Wheel alignment and steering angles - general information
24
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
experience
Jk
<2§?
^
Fairly easy, suitable
for beginner with
s o m e experience
|k
^
Fairly difficult,
|k
suitable for competent
DIY mechanic
^
Difficult, suitable for
| k
Very difficult,
experienced DIY
5^
suitable for expert DIY
mechanic
^
>*J
or professional
Specifications
Front suspension
Type
Independent, incorporating transverse lower wishbones and coil
spring strut units with integral shock absorbers. Anti-roll bar fitted to
all models.
Rear suspension
Type
Independent, incorporating trailing arms with telescopic shock
absorbers and coil springs. Anti-roll bar fitted to all models.
Steering
Type
Turns lock-to-lock:
Pre-1998 models
1998-on models
Rack-and-pinion, power assisted standard on UK models, but manual
on certain other markets
2.9 approx.
3.0
Wheel alignment and steering angles
Front wheel:
Toe-in
Camber:
Pre-1998 models
1998-on models
Castor:
Pre-1998 models without PAS
Pre-1998 models with PAS
1998-on models
Rear wheel:
Toe-in:
Up to chassis number 4.050.319
.From chassis number 4.050.320
Camber
-1.0 t o + 1 . 0 m m
- 7 ' ± 30'
- 3 3 ' ± 30'
3° 30' ± 3 0 '
2° 50' ± 30'
2° 5 0 ' ± 30'
-2.5 t o + 1 . 5 m m
0 to 4.0 m m
0° 46' ± 30'
Roadwheels
Type
Size
Tyre pressures
Pressed steel
5 V J x 1 4 , 6Jx14, 6Jx15
see Weekly Checks
2
10*2 Suspension and steering systems
Torque wrench settings
Nm
Ibf ft
40
70
31
240
69
50
30
52
23
177
51
37
100
40
70
74
30
52
108
80
40
80
59
30
56
28
108
280
150
41
21
80
207
111
60
88
44
65
70
70
48
52
52
35
25
50
48
25
20
55
50
30
40
20
18
37
35
18
15
41
37
22
30
15
86
63
Front s u s p e n s i o n
Anti-roll bar clamp nuts
Anti-roll bar end nuts
Anti-roll bar link to lower arm . .
Hub (driveshaft) nut (M22)
Lower arm to subframe
Rear engine mounting and bracket
Strut:
Damper rod nut
Upper mounting bolts
Strut to hub carrier
Subframe:
Front bolt with wide flange
Rear bolt with normal flange
Track-rod balljoint to hub carrier
Rear s u s p e n s i o n
Anti-roll bar:
End bolt
Clamp bolt
Rear axle assembly mounting
Rear hub nut
Rear suspension trailing arm pivot bolt
Shock absorber:
Upper
Lower
:. ..
Steering
Lower arm-to-hub carrier clamp bolt
Power steering gear
Power steering pump drivebelt tensioner bolt
Power steering pump mounting bolt:
M6 and M8 bolt
MIObolt
Power steering p u m p mounting bracket nut
Power steering p u m p pulley
Return union on steering gear
Steering column mounting bolts
Steering wheel nut
Supply union on steering gear
Track-rod end balljoint to steering arm on hub carrier
Universal joint clamp bolts
Roadwheels
Wheel bolts
1 General information
separate telescopic shock absorbers. A rear
anti-roll bar is fitted to all models.
Steering
Front
suspension
The front s u s p e n s i o n is independent,
comprising transverse lower wishbones, coil
spring strut units w i t h integral s h o c k
a b s o r b e r s , and an anti-roll bar. The hub
carriers are bolted to the base of the strut
units and are linked to the lower arms by
means of balljoints. The entire front
suspension assembly is m o u n t e d on a
s u b f r a m e , w h i c h is in turn bolted t o the
vehicle body.
Rear
suspension
The rear suspension incorporates a torsion
beam axle, trailing arms, coil springs and
The two-piece steering column assembly is
bolted to a bracket mounted on the bulkhead.
The upper section of the inner column runs in
bearings located in the tubular outer column.
The lower section of the column incorporates
t w o universal joints, the lower one being
clamped to the splined steering gear pinion.
The steering gear is mounted on the front
suspension subframe, and is connected to the
steering arms projecting rearwards from the
hub carriers. The t r a c k - r o d s are f i t t e d with
balljoints at their inner and outer ends, to
allow for suspension m o v e m e n t , and are
threaded to facilitate adjustment.
Hydraulically-assisted p o w e r steering is
fitted to all UK models. The hydraulic system
is p o w e r e d by a belt-driven p u m p , w h i c h is
driven from the crankshaft pulley.
All models are fitted with an airbag system
and seat belt tensioners. Sensors built into the
vehicle b o d y are triggered in the event of a
front end collision, and prompt an Electronic
Control Unit (ECU) to activate the airbag
mounted in the centre of the steering wheel
and the facia. This reduces the risk of the front
seat o c c u p a n t s striking the steering w h e e l ,
windscreen or facia during an accident. At the
s a m e t i m e the seat belt tensioners are
activated.
A
Warning:
For safety
reasons,
owners are strongly
advised
to
entrust
to an authorised
FIAT
dealer any work on the
airbag
system components.
The airbag
inflation devices contain explosive
material
and legislation
exists
to control
their
handling
and
storage.
In
addition,
specialised
test equipment
is needed
to
check
that the airbag
system
is fully
operational
following
reassembly.
Suspension and steering systems 10*3
2.5 Splash shield s e c u r i n g bolt o n t h e h u b
carrier
2 Front hub bearings renewal
^
^
Note: A balljoint separator tool, and a press or
suitable alternative
tools (see text) will be
required for this operation. The bearing will be
destroyed during the removal
procedure.
1 Remove
the
wheel
trim
from
the
appropriate
wheel,
then
loosen
the
driveshaft/hub nut with the vehicle resting on
its wheels and the handbrake firmly applied.
The nut is very tight and an extension bar may
be necessary to loosen it. Also loosen the
wheel bolts half a turn.
2 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support on axle stands (see
Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove the
appropriate roadwheel.
3 Unscrew and remove the driveshaft/hub nut
and discard it - a new one must be used on
refitting.
4 Remove the brake disc and caliper, with
reference to Chapter 9. Note that the caliper
b o d y can remain bolted to its bracket, and
there is no need to disconnect the brake fluid
hose f r o m the caliper. Tie the caliper to the
coil spring without straining the flexible brake
hose.
5 Unbolt and remove the caliper splash shield
(see illustration).
6 U n s c r e w the nut securing the steering
track-rod end to the hub carrier steering arm
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Using a balljoint removal
tool, separate the track-rod end from the arm.
2.6 Nut s e c u r i n g t h e s t e e r i n g t r a c k r o d
e n d t o t h e h u b carrier s t e e r i n g a r m
2.8a U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e t h e c l a m p
bolt...
7 On models w i t h A B S , undo the s c r e w
securing the A B S sensor to the hub carrier.
S u s p e n d the sensor away from the working
area.
8 Unscrew and remove the c l a m p bolt from
the b o t t o m of the hub carrier, then push the
lower arm d o w n and separate the balljoint
from the hub carrier (see illustrations).
10 At this stage, it is recommended that the
hub carrier be taken to an engineering
w o r k s h o p , as the hub and bearing should
ideally be removed from the hub carrier using
a hydraulic press. Owners wishing to attempt
the w o r k t h e m s e l v e s s h o u l d p r o c e e d as
follows.
9 Unscrew and remove the bolts securing the
hub carrier to the b o t t o m of the strut, then
w i t h d r a w the hub carrier f r o m the splined
driveshaft (see illustrations). Note which way
round the bolts are fitted. If necessary, use a
hide mallet to tap the driveshaft from the hub.
Caution:
Do not allow
the end of the
driveshaft
to hang down under its own
weight, a s t h i s places strain on the CV
joints; support
the end of the shaft
using
wire or string.
2.8b . . . t h e n p u s h t h e l o w e r a r m d o w n
a n d s e p a r a t e t h e balljoint f r o m t h e base of
t h e h u b carrier
11 Support the hub carrier on blocks of w o o d
with the hub drive flange facing d o w n w a r d s .
Press or drive the hub from the hub carrier.
Alternatively, use a slide hammer to remove
the hub (see illustration). Note that the inner
race will remain on the hub. To remove the
race, initially mount the hub in a vice and use
a c o l d chisel to force it a few millimetres
f r o m the shoulder, then use a puller to
withdraw it.
12 Extract the bearing circlip from the inside
face of the hub carrier, then press or drive out
2.9a R e m o v e t h e b o l t s . . .
10*4 Suspension and steering systems
1m
2.12 Wheel b e a r i n g c o m p o n e n t s
1 Hub carrier
2 Wheel bearing
3
Circlip
the bearing using a metal t u b e (see
illustration). If necessary, temporarily refit the
inner race removed in paragraph before
removing the bearing. Note that the flange on
the outer side of the carrier means that the
bearing can only be driven out in one
direction.
13 Before installing the new bearing,
thoroughly clean the bearing location in the
hub carrier.
14 Fit the new bearing from the inboard side
of the hub. Press or drive the bearing into
position, a p p l y i n g pressure o n l y to the
bearing outer race.
15 Fit the bearing retaining circlip to its
groove in the hub carrier.
2.16 T y p i c a l m e t h o d of d r a w i n g t h e h u b
into t h e w h e e l b e a r i n g u s i n g i m p r o v i s e d
tools
3.2 Release t h e b r a k e fluid line (and w h e r e
applicable, the pad wear/ABS sensor
wiring) f r o m t h e s t r u t
16 Carefully press or draw the hub into the
bearing, noting that the bearing inner race
m u s t be supported during this operation, to
prevent it from being separated from the outer
race. This can be achieved using a suitable
socket, threaded rod, washers and a length of
bar (see illustration).
17- Locate the hub on the splined end of the
driveshaft, then refit the hub carrier to the
b o t t o m of the strut. Insert the bolts as
previously noted, and tighten to the specified
torque.
18 Locate the lower arm balljoint in the
b o t t o m of the hub carrier, then insert the
clamp bolt and tighten to the specified torque.
Make sure that the bolt enters the groove in
the balljoint stub.
19 On models with ABS, refit the ABS sensor
and tighten the screw.
20 Refit the steering track-rod end to the hub
carrier steering arm, and tighten the retaining
nut to the specified torque.
21 Refit the caliper splash shield and tighten
the bolt.
22 Refit the brake caliper and disc w i t h
reference to Chapter 9.
23 S c r e w on the d r i v e s h a f t / h u b nut and
moderately tighten it at this stage.
24 Refit the roadwheel and lower the vehicle
to the ground.
25 Fully tighten the driveshaft/hub nut to the
specified torque.
26 Have the front wheel alignment checked
by a FIAT dealer or a tyre specialist at the
earliest opportunity.
3 Front suspension strut removal, overhaul and refitting
^
^
A
Warning: If renewing
the
strut
shock absorber during
overhaul,
both the left and right hand units
should be renewed as a pair, to
preserve
the handling
characteristics
of
the vehicle.
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant roadwheel.
3.3a R e m o v e t h e t w o b o l t s ( a r r o w e d ) .
3.4a U n s c r e w t h e u p p e r m o u n t i n g
bolts . . .
3.3b . . . a n d d e t a c h t h e l o w e r e n d of t h e
s t r u t f r o m t h e h u b carrier
3.4b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e s t r u t a s s e m b l y
f r o m under the wheel arch
2 Release the brake fluid line (and where
applicable, the pad wear/ABS sensor wiring)
from the bracket on the base of the strut (see
illustration).
3 Remove the t w o nuts f r o m the bolts
securing the lower end of the strut to the hub
carrier, noting which way round they are fitted
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . W i t h d r a w the bolts, and
support the hub carrier on a trolley jack.
4 Have an assistant support the strut from
under the wheel arch then, working in the
engine compartment, unscrew the upper
mounting bolts. Note that the location studs
ensure the strut can only be fitted in one
position. Do not unscrew the centre damper rod
nut yet. Release the lower end of the strut from
the hub carrier, then withdraw the assembly
from under the wheel arch (see illustrations).
Suspension and steering systems 10*5
3.5 R e m o v e t h e plastic p r o t e c t i v e c a p
f r o m t h e t o p of t h e s t r u t
3.7a U n s c r e w t h e s t r u t u p p e r nut, w h i l e
c o u n t e r h o l d i n g t h e d a m p e r r o d w i t h an
Allen key . . .
3.7b . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e nut a n d c u p
3.8a R e m o v e t h e s t r u t u p p e r m o u n t i n g
plate/bearing . . .
3.8b . . . a n d seat
3.8c The plate has a n a r r o w f o r m e d o n its
o u t e r e d g e w h i c h is l o c a t e d b e t w e e n t h e
plastic t a b s
or deformation. Check the upper bearing for
wear and roughness, and c h e c k the rubber
c o m p o n e n t s for deterioration. Renew any of
the components as necessary.
11 Examine the shock absorber for signs of
fluid leakage. Check the shock absorber rod for
signs of pitting along its entire length, and
check the strut body for signs of damage.
While holding it in an upright position, test the
operation of the shock absorber by moving the
rod through a full stroke, and then through
short strokes of 50 to 100 m m . In both cases,
the resistance felt should be s m o o t h and
continuous. If the resistance is jerky, or uneven,
or if there is any visible sign of wear or damage
to the strut, renewal is necessary. Note that the
shock
absorber
cannot
be
renewed
independently, and if leakage, d a m a g e or
corrosion is evident, the complete strut/shock
absorber assembly must be renewed. The
spring and associated c o m p o n e n t s can be
transferred to the new strut.
12 If any doubt exists about the condition of
the coil spring, carefully remove the spring
c o m p r e s s o r tools, and c h e c k the spring for
distortion and signs of cracking. Renew the
spring if there is any d o u b t about its
condition.
3.9a R e m o v e t h e coil s p r i n g c o m p l e t e w i t h
compressor...
3.9b . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e b u m p
rubber/dust cover
Overhaul
N o t e : Suitable coil spring compressor
tools
will be required for this operation, and a new
strut top nut must be used on reassembly.
5 Clamp the lower end of the strut in a vice
fitted with jaw protectors - take care to avoid
deforming the mounting bracket at the lower
end of the strut. Remove the protective plastic
cap from the top of the strut (see illustration).
6 Fit spring c o m p r e s s o r tools to the coil
spring, and compress the spring sufficiently to
enable the upper spring seat to be turned by
hand.
Warning:
Use
purpose-made
compressor
tools, and
ensure
that
the
coil
spring
is
compressed
sufficiently
to
remove
all the tension
from the
upper
spring seat before attempting
to remove
the damper rod nut.
A
7 U n s c r e w and remove the strut upper nut
and cup. Counterhold the damper rod, using a
suitable Allen key or hex bit, as the nut is
unscrewed (see illustrations). Discard the nut
- a new one must be used on reassembly.
8 Withdraw the upper mounting plate/bearing
and seat. Note that t h e plate has an arrow
f o r m e d on its outer e d g e w h i c h is located
between the plastic tabs (see illustrations).
9 W i t h d r a w the s p r i n g , c o m p l e t e with the
c o m p r e s s o r s , then w i t h d r a w the b u m p
rubber/dust cover (see illustrations).
10 With the strut assembly now dismantled,
examine all the components for wear, damage
A
Warning:
Coil
springs
are
classified
by a coloured
paint
marking
on the central
coil
(either green or yellow). Both coil
springs fitted to the vehicle must be of the
same classification
to ensure the
correct
ride height.
13 Clamp the strut body in a vice, as during
dismantling, then refit the b u m p rubber/dust
cover.
10*6 Suspension and steering systems
3.14 M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e l o w e r e n d of t h e
c o i l s p r i n g is c o r r e c t l y l o c a t e d in t h e
r e c e s s o n t h e l o w e r s p r i n g seat
3.19a Fit t h e s e c u r i n g bolts, n o t i n g t h a t
t h e n u t s f i t o n t h e rear side of t h e s t r u t . . .
3.19b . . . a n d t i g h t e n t h e m t o t h e s p e c i f i e d
torque
14 Ensure that the coil spring is compressed
sufficiently to enable the upper mounting
components to be fitted, then fit the spring onto
the strut, ensuring that the lower end of the
spring is correctly located in the recess on the
lower spring seat (see illustration).
15 Refit the upper m o u n t i n g plate/bearing
followed by the cup and new nut, making sure
that the arrow is pointing between the plastic
tabs. Ensure that the top end of the spring is
correctly located on the upper spring seat.
16 Tighten the nut to the specified t o r q u e ,
counterholding the d a m p e r rod in a manner
similar to that used during dismantling. Note
that a suitable c r o w s - f o o t a d a p t e r will be
required to tighten the damper rod top nut to
the specified torque.
17 Remove the spring compressor tools, and
refit the protective plastic cap to the top of the
strut.
the b o t t o m of the hub carrier, then push the
lower arm d o w n and separate the balljoint
from the hub carrier.
3 Unscrew the nut securing the front anti-roll
bar to the lower arm, and remove the washer
and rubber. Also unscrew the nut securing the
link to the anti-roll bar and r e m o v e the
washer. W i t h d r a w the link and recover the
washer and rubber.
b o t t o m of the hub carrier, then insert the
clamp bolt and tighten to the specified torque.
Make sure that the bolt enters the groove in
the balljoint stub.
12 Refit the roadwheel and lower the vehicle
to the ground.
13 On completion the front wheel alignment
should be checked.
Refitting
18 Manoeuvre the strut assembly into
position under the wheel arch, and engage the
locating s t u d s with the holes in the b o d y
turret. Fit the upper m o u n t i n g bolts, and
tighten them to the specified torque.
19 Attach the hub carrier to the bottom of the
strut. Insert the bolts the correct way round as
previously noted, and tighten to the specified
torque (see illustrations).
20 Refit the brake fluid line (and where
applicable, the pad wear/ABS sensor wiring)
to the bracket on the base of the strut.
21 Refit the roadwheel, and lower the vehicle
to the ground.
4 Front suspension lower arm
- removal and refitting
4 Unscrew the mounting bolts and withdraw
the lower arm from the subframe.
5 With the lower arm removed, examine the
lower arm itself, and the mounting bushes, for
wear, cracks or damage.
6 Check the balljoint for wear, excessive play,
or stiffness. Also check the balljoint dust boot
for cracks or damage.
7 The m o u n t i n g
bushes and
balljoint
assembly are integral with the lower arm, and
c a n n o t be renewed independently. If either
the bushes or the balljoint are worn or
damaged, the complete lower arm assembly
must be renewed.
Refitting
8 Locate the lower arm in the subframe, and
refit the mounting bolts. Tighten them to the
specified torque.
9 Refit the link, washer and nut to the anti-roll
bar, and at the same time refit the rubber and
washer and locate the link in the lower arm.
10 Refit the rubber and washer under the
lower arm, and fit the nut. Tighten the link nuts
to the specified torque.
11 Locate the lower arm balljoint in the
^
^
Removal
N o t e : A balljoint
separator
tool may be
required for this operation.
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant roadwheel.
2 Unscrew and remove the clamp bolt from
6.2 Nut s e c u r i n g t h e a n t i - r o l l bar t o t h e
front suspension lower arm
5 Front suspension
lower arm balljoint renewal
The balljoint is integral with the suspension
lower arm. If the balljoint is worn or damaged,
the complete lower arm must be renewed as
described in Section 4.
6 Front suspension
anti-roll bar removal and refitting
§^
|s
^
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant roadwheels.
2 Unscrew the nuts securing the anti-roll bar
links to the front suspension lower arms on
each side, and remove the washers and
rubbers (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note that the
c o n v e x sides of the washers c o n t a c t the
rubbers.
3 Unscrew the nuts and remove the washers
from each end of the anti-roll bar, and remove
the links and upper rubbers and washers.
Note that the c o n v e x sides of the washers
contact the rubbers.
4 Mark the top of the anti-roll bar with a dab
of paint to ensure correct refitting.
5 U n s c r e w the anti-roll bar c l a m p bolts
located under the s u b f r a m e , then w i t h d r a w
the anti-roll bar from one side of the vehicle.
Recover the clamps.
6 Inspect the rubber bushes for c r a c k s or
deterioration. If renewal is necessary, slide the
old bushes f r o m the bar, and fit the new
items, using soapy water as a lubricant. Do
Suspension and steering systems 10«7
not apply grease or oil as this will attack the
rubber.
7 Check the anti-roll bar for signs of damage,
wear or serious corrosion.
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but tighten
all nuts and bolts to the specified t o r q u e
where given.
7 Front suspension subframe - |t-=
removal and refitting
^
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
both front roadwheels.
2 Remove the exhaust front d o w n p i p e with
reference to Chapter 4C.
3 Remove both front suspension lower arms
as described in Section 4.
4 Remove the anti-roll bar as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 6.
5 Unbolt the rear engine mounting from the
s u b f r a m e , then unbolt the bracket f r o m the
transmission and withdraw the mounting and
bracket from under the vehicle.
6 Undo the screws and remove the exhaust
heatshield from the underbody.
7 Unscrew and remove the two central bolts
securing the steering gear to the subframe.
8 S u p p o r t the weight of the subframe on a
trolley jack and length of w o o d .
9 U n s c r e w and remove the remaining
mounting bolts and lower the subframe to the
g r o u n d . W i t h d r a w the subframe f r o m under
the car.
Refitting
10 Lift the subframe on the trolley jack, and
insert the mounting bolts, hand-tight at this
stage.
11 Using t w o 12.0 m m diameter metal rods
inserted through the two holes at the rear of the
subframe, align the subframe, then tighten the
mounting bolts progressively to the specified
torque.
12 Insert and tighten the steering gear
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
8.4 Prise t h e d u s t c a p f r o m t h e h u b w i t h a
screwdriver
8.5 The rear h u b nut
13 Refit the exhaust heatshield.
14 Refit the rear engine m o u n t i n g and
bracket and tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
15 Refit the anti-roll bar w i t h reference to
Section 6.
16 Refit b o t h front s u s p e n s i o n lower arms
with reference to Section 4.
17 Refit the exhaust front d o w n p i p e w i t h
reference to Chapter 4C.
18 Refit the roadwheels and lower the vehicle
to the ground.
Caution:
The nut is tightened
to a high
torque. Use a socket and long
extension
bar and ensure that you have access to
torque wrench capable of tightening
the
new nut to the specified
torque
setting,
before removing the existing
nut.
8 Rear hub bearings renewal
§^
Sjk
N o t e : A new rear hub nut must be used on
refitting.
1 The rear hub bearings are integral with the
hubs themselves, and c a n n o t be renewed
separately. If the bearings are w o r n
excessively, the complete hub assembly must
be renewed.
2 C h o c k the front roadwheels, then jack up
the rear of the vehicle and s u p p o r t on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove the appropriate rear roadwheel.
3 Remove the brake d r u m as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 9. Do n o t depress the brake pedal
whilst the brake drum is removed.
4 Prise the dust c a p f r o m the hub with a
screwdriver (see illustration).
5 U n s c r e w and r e m o v e the hub nut and
recover the washer (see illustration).
6 W i t h d r a w the hub and bearing assembly
f r o m the s t u b axle, and recover the inner
washer. Discard the hub nut - a new one must
be used on refitting.
7 Thoroughly clean the stub axle, then slide
the inner washer and new hub assembly into
position.
8 Fit the outer washer, then screw on the new
hub nut. Hold the stub axle stationary using a
suitable Allen key, then tighten the hub nut to
the specified torque.
9 Apply a little grease around the edge of the
dust c a p , t h e n carefully t a p it into the hub.
Refit the brake d r u m w i t h reference to
Chapter 9.
10 Refit the roadwheel then lower the vehicle
to the ground.
9 Rear shock absorber removal and refitting
^
Removal
1 C h o c k the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle and support on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant rear roadwheel.
2 Using a trolley jack positioned under the
trailing arm, raise the trailing arm slightly to
compress the coil spring.
3 Unscrew and remove the lower m o u n t i n g
bolt (see illustration).
4 Unscrew and remove the upper mounting
bolt using a socket through the access hole
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) , then pull the t o p of the
s h o c k absorber f r o m the rear suspension
subframe.
Refitting
-
k
***
9.3 Rear s h o c k a b s o r b e r l o w e r m o u n t i n g
bolt
9.4 Rear s h o c k a b s o r b e r u p p e r m o u n t i n g
bolt
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Tighten
the upper and lower m o u n t i n g bolts to the
specified t o r q u e w i t h the trolley jack
supporting the weight of the car so that the
rear suspension is compressed.
1f>8 Suspension and steering systems
13.5 Rear b r a k e hydraulic line a n d u n i o n
n u t o n t h e u n d e r b o d y in f r o n t of t h e rear
axle
10 Rear suspension coil spring
- removal and refitting
Sfc
Removal
1 C h o c k the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle and support on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant rear roadwheel.
2 Using a trolley j a c k p o s i t i o n e d under the
trailing arm, raise the trailing arm slightly to
compress the coil spring.
3 Unscrew and remove the s h o c k absorber
lower mounting bolt.
4 Lower the trailing arm gradually on the trolley
jack, until the coil spring is released from its
lower seat on the trailing arm and its upper seat
on the subframe. Make a note of the orientation
of the coil spring, to ensure correct refitting later.
5 Remove the upper and lower spring seats,
and the bump stop rubbers.
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Tighten
the shock absorber lower mounting bolt to the
specified torque.
11 Rear suspension trailing arm %
- removal and refitting
^
Removal
1 C h o c k the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle and support on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant rear roadwheel.
2 Remove the brake d r u m and rear brake
shoes as d e s c r i b e d in C h a p t e r 9. D o n o t
depress the brake pedal whilst the brake
drum is removed.
3 Fit a brake hose clamp to the flexible hose
leading t o the relevant rear brake. U n s c r e w
the union nut from the rear of the rear wheel
cylinder, then unbolt the brake line s u p p o r t
from the trailing arm.
4 Remove t h e h a n d b r a k e c a b l e f r o m the
backplate, then unbolt the backplate from the
trailing arm.
13.9 One of t h e rear axle m o u n t i n g s
5 Remove the rear hub (Section 8) and coil
spring (paragraphs 6 to 9 of this Section).
6 Unbolt the anti-roll bar from the trailing arm.
7 U n s c r e w and remove the front pivot bolt
and w i t h d r a w the trailing arm f r o m the rear
suspension subframe.
8 Check the bearings for excessive wear,
particularly on the outer bearing. Note that it is
not possible to renew the bearings separately;
the complete trailing arm must be renewed.
Refitting
9 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Tighten all
s u s p e n s i o n fixings to the specified t o r q u e
settings, but delay this operation until the full
w e i g h t of t h e vehicle is resting on the
roadwheels.
10 On completion, bleed the brake hydraulic
system and adjust the operation of the handbrake, with reference to Chapter 9.
12 Rear suspension anti-roll bar %
- removal and refitting
*k
;
Removal
1 Chock the front roadwheels, then jack up
the rear of the vehicle and s u p p o r t on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove both rear roadwheels.
2 Where f i t t e d , d i s c o n n e c t the rear brake
pressure proportioning valve spring from the
middle of the rear anti-roll bar.
3 Unscrew the bolts securing the anti-roll bar
t o the trailing arms, and w i t h d r a w it f r o m
under the car.
Refitting
4 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but tighten
the mounting bolts securely.
13 Rear axle assemblyremoval and refitting
Sjk
Removal
1 C h o c k the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle and support on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant rear roadwheel.
2 Remove the fuel t a n k as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 4A or 4B.
3 Remove the rear section of the exhaust
system as described in Chapter 4C.
4 Unscrew the filler cap from the brake fluid
reservoir, and tighten it down onto a piece of
polythene sheeting. This will reduce the loss
of
fluid
when
the
brake
lines
are
disconnected.
5 Working under the rear of the car, identify
for position then unscrew the union nuts and
disconnect the rear brake hydraulic lines on
the underbody in front of the rear axle (see
illustration). Plug the lines to prevent loss of
fluid.
6 Back off the handbrake cable adjustment
(see Chapter 9), and d i s c o n n e c t the cables
from the equaliser bar. Also detach the outer
cables from the underbody.
7 Where necessary, unbolt and remove
the A B S sensors f r o m each rear brake
backplate.
8 S u p p o r t the rear axle a s s e m b l y w i t h a
trolley jack and length of w o o d . An assistant
would also be helpful to steady the assembly
as it is being lowered t o the ground.
9 Unscrew the four mounting bolts securing
the rear axle assembly to the underbody, then
lower it to the floor (see illustration).
10 Remove the c o m p o n e n t parts of the rear
axle assembly with reference to the relevant
Sections of this Chapter.
Refitting
11 Refitting is a reversal of removal; tighten
all nuts and bolts to the specified t o r q u e
where given. Bleed the brake hydraulic
system and adjust the handbrake cables as
described in Chapter 9.
14 Steering wheel removal and refitting
§^
^
A
Warning:
For safety
reasons,
owners are strongly
advised
to
entrust
to an authorised
FIAT
dealer any work which
involves
disturbing
the airbag system
components.
The airbag
inflation
devices
contain
explosive material and legislation
exists to
control
their handling
and storage.
In
addition,
specialised
test equipment
is
needed to check that the airbag system is
fully operational
following reassembly.
The
following information
is given for the home
mechanic
who may have access
to the
necessary equipment
and storage.
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting
the battery). N o t e : The
ignition
must
be switched
off
before
Suspension and steering systems 10*9
14.3 D i s c o n n e c t t h e h o r n w i r i n g (white)
f r o m t h e base of t h e s t e e r i n g w h e e l
disconnecting
the battery leads, then it is
important to wait 10 minutes before removing
the driver's air bag.
2 Remove the driver's airbag with reference
to Chapter 12.
3 Disconnect the horn wiring (white) from the
base of the steering wheel (see illustration).
4 Turn the steering wheel to its centre
position, so that the roadwheels are pointing
straight ahead.
5 M a k e alignment marks b e t w e e n the
steering wheel and the end of the steering
column shaft, to aid correct refitting later.
6 Unscrew and remove the steering wheel
securing nut (see illustration).
7 Remove the steering wheel from the inner
c o l u m n splines, while feeding the airbag
clockspring and horn wires through the hole
(see illustration). If the steering wheel is tight,
rock it from side to side whilst pulling upwards
to release it from the shaft splines. If the wheel
is particularly tight, a suitable puller should be
used. Do n o t strike the steering wheel.
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but align
the previously made marks, and tighten the
securing nut to the specified t o r q u e . M a k e
sure that the c l o c k s p r i n g wires are pulled
completely through the hole in the base of the
steering w h e e l , otherwise they may j a m
against the plastic location t a b s on the
c l o c k s p r i n g and break t h e m . This w o u l d
require the renewal of the clockspring.
15.6 The c l a m p b o l t a t t a c h i n g t h e s t e e r i n g
c o l u m n universal j o i n t t o t h e s t e e r i n g gear
p i n i o n shaft
14.6 U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e t h e s t e e r i n g
w h e e l s e c u r i n g nut
15 Steering column removal, overhaul and refitting
14.7 Feed t h e a i r b a g c l o c k s p r i n g a n d h o r n
w i r e s t h r o u g h t h e hole w h e n r e m o v i n g t h e
steering wheel
^
Removal
1 Refer to Section 14 and r e m o v e the
steering wheel.
2 Remove the airbag c l o c k s p r i n g unit f r o m
the c o l u m n with reference to Chapter 12.
N o t e : The clockspring
incorporates
spring
tensioned clips which prevent the upper and
lower sections of the unit from turning in
relation to each other when removed from the
column.
3 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the lower
steering c o l u m n s h r o u d , then remove the
upper shroud.
4 Remove the c o m b i n a t i o n s w i t c h as
described in Chapter 12, Section 14.
5 Undo the screws and remove the left foot
rest located next to the clutch pedal.
6 At the b o t t o m of the steering c o l u m n ,
unscrew and remove the clamp bolt attaching
the universal joint to the steering gear pinion
shaft (see illustration).
7 Disconnect the wiring plug from the ignition
switch.
8 Unclip and remove the lower fusebox trim
panel located beneath the right-hand side of
the facia.
9 U n b o l t the steering c o l u m n s u p p o r t bar
(see illustration).
15.9 S t e e r i n g c o l u m n s u p p o r t bar bolt
10 S u p p o r t the steering c o l u m n , then
u n s c r e w and remove the upper m o u n t i n g
bolts and lower it from the b u l k h e a d (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Lift the steering c o l u m n and
release the lower universal joint f r o m the
steering gear pinion. Note that the pinion has
a master spline.
11 Withdraw the steering column from inside
the vehicle.
Overhaul
12 The height adjustment mechanism can be
removed by removing the nut from the end of
the pivot shaft and withdrawing it.
13 The upper and lower bushes are held in
position by staking at the ends of the column
t u b e . Relieve the staking using a mallet and
punch to extract the bushes.
14 Check for excessive radial and axial play
in the universal joints at b o t h ends of the
lower steering c o l u m n . The lower section of
the steering c o l u m n may be renewed
separately if required, by slackening the
c l a m p bolt and d e t a c h i n g it from the upper
section.
15 If the vehicle has been involved in an
accident, check for deformation in all of the
steering column components, particularly the
mounting bracket and centre tube. Renew as
required.
Refitting
16 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Tighten
all fixings to the specified torque setting.
15.10 S t e e r i n g c o l u m n u p p e r m o u n t i n g
bolt
10*10 Suspension and steering systems
16.3 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h
wiring
16 Ignition switch removal and refitting
|N=
«
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting
the battery), and remove
the ignition key from the switch.
2 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the lower
steering column shroud.
3 Disconnect the ignition switch wiring at the
connector beneath the facia (see illustration).
4 Depress the t w o plastic t a b s , using a
screwdriver in the lock housing holes, and pull
the switch from the steering lock housing (see
illustration).
Refitting
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but make
sure that the ignition key is removed when the
switch is inserted in the steering lock housing.
17 Steering column
lock and barrel removal and refitting
f|>
Sjk
^
16.4 D e p r e s s t h e t w o plastic t a b s t o
remove the ignition switch
steering c o l u m n s h r o u d , then u n d o the
screws and remove the upper shroud.
3 Insert the ignition key and turn it to the
'ignition o n ' position.
4 Using a screwdriver, depress the retaining
lug located on the side of the switch housing,
then use the key to w i t h d r a w the lock and
barrel from the housing (see illustrations).
5 With the assembly on the b e n c h , extract
the circlip holding the barrel in the lock (see
illustration).
6 Depress the parking light button on the lock
and turn the ignition key fully a n t i c l o c k w i s e
(key in the parking light position).
7 Pull out the key approximately 2 or 3 m m so
that the retaining tab is released, then
w i t h d r a w the barrel from the lock (see
illustration).
8 To r e m o v e the lock h o u s i n g , -use a pin
p u n c h t o unscrew the shear bolts, then
w i t h d r a w the housing f r o m the steering
column. New shear bolts must be obtained for
refitting.
Refitting
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting
the battery). Remove the
ignition key.
2 U n d o the s c r e w s a n d r e m o v e t h e lower
9 Locate the lock housing on the steering
column, and insert the new shear bolts. Handtighten the bolts at this stage.
10 Reassemble the barrel to the lock using a
reversal of the dismantling procedure. Before
reconnecting the battery negative lead, check
that the ignition key can be turned to all
positions, then remove the key and check that
the steering lock works correctly. Tighten the
lock housing shear bolts until their heads are
17.4b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e l o c k a n d barrel
f r o m the housing
17.5 E x t r a c t t h e c i r c l i p h o l d i n g t h e barrel
in t h e l o c k . . .
Removal
17.4a W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n key in t h e ' i g n i t i o n
o n ' p o s i t i o n , d e p r e s s t h e lug w i t h a
screwdriver...
broken off, then refit the s h r o u d s
reconnect the battery negative lead.
and
18 Manual steering gear
assembly -
Sr>
removal and refitting
3Q
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
both front roadwheels.
2 Inside the car, unscrew and remove the
c l a m p bolt at the base of steering c o l u m n
lower universal joint.
3 In the engine compartment, disconnect the
link from the gearchange.
4 Unscrew the nuts from the track-rod ends
on each side, then use a balljoint removal tool
to separate the t r a c k - r o d e n d s f r o m the
steering arms on the hub carriers.
5 Prise the gear selector rod from the top of
the steering gear.
6 U n s c r e w and r e m o v e the steering gear
m o u n t i n g bolts. W i t h d r a w the steering gear
through the wheel arch on one side of the car.
Refitting
7 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but tighten
all nuts and bolts t o the specified t o r q u e
where given. On c o m p l e t i o n , have the front
wheel alignment checked by a FIAT dealer or
tyre specialist.
17.7 . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e barrel f r o m t h e
lock
Suspension and steering systems 10*11
19 Power steering gear
assembly removal and refitting
3Q
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
both front roadwheels.
2 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
3 Syphon as much fluid as possible from the
power steering reservoir, using a pipette or an
old poultry baster. Alternatively, fit a hose
c l a m p to the hose leading to the steering
gear.
4 Undo the screws and remove the foot rest
located next to the clutch pedal.
5 Unscrew and remove the clamp bolt at the
base of the steering c o l u m n , to release the
lower universal joint f r o m the steering gear
pinion.
6 Unscrew the nuts from the track-rod ends
on each side, then use a balljoint removal tool
to separate the t r a c k - r o d e n d s f r o m the
steering arms on the hub carriers.
7 Disconnect the gearchange socket from the
ball on the transmission lever, then pull up the
clip and d i s c o n n e c t the gearchange outer
cable. Position it to one side.
8 Where applicable, disconnect the reverse
inhibition wiring from the retaining clip on top
of the transmission.
9 On the front of the engine, disconnect the
oxygen sensor wiring, then unbolt the exhaust
bracket from the cylinder block. Remove the
front exhaust d o w n p i p e by u n s c r e w i n g the
nuts securing it to the exhaust manifold, and
also unscrewing the bolts securing it to the
catalytic converter (see Chapter 4C).
10 S u p p o r t the engine using a trolley jack
and piece of w o o d beneath the s u m p ,
then unbolt and remove the rear engine
mounting
from
the transmission
and
underbody.
11 From under the engine, prise off the
gearchange from the transmission mounting.
12 Position a container beneath the steering
gear, then unscrew the nut and bolts and
d e t a c h the hydraulic fluid line s u p p o r t
brackets f r o m the s u b f r a m e and steering
gear.
13 Note the location of the hydraulic fluid
s u p p l y a n d return lines, then unscrew the
union nuts and disconnect the lines from the
steering gear (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Recover the
sealing washers. Plug the ends of the lines to
prevent loss of fluid.
14 U n s c r e w and r e m o v e the t w o bolts
securing the steering gear to the subframe.
Lower the steering gear and disconnect the
splined pinion shaft f r o m the b o t t o m of the
c o l u m n universal joint. Note that the pinion
shaft has a master spline to ensure it is only
fitted in one position.
15 Move the c o m p l e t e steering gear to the
19.13 Hydraulic f l u i d s u p p l y a n d r e t u r n
lines o n t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g gear
left, then w i t h d r a w it d o w n w a r d s f r o m the
engine compartment.
Refitting
16 Refitting is a reversal of removal w i t h
reference to Chapter 4C where necessary, but
tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified
t o r q u e where given. Refill the hydraulic
system with the specified grade and quantity
of p o w e r steering f l u i d , then bleed t h e
hydraulic system as described in Section 2 1 .
On c o m p l e t i o n , have the front wheel
alignment checked at the earliest opportunity
by a FIAT dealer or a tyre specialist.
20 Steering gear rubber gaiters
- renewal
%
Sfc
N o t e : New gaiter retaining clips should be
used on refitting.
1 Remove the relevant t r a c k - r o d end as
described in Section 23.
2 If not already done, unscrew the track-rod
end locknut from the end of the track-rod, but
measure the distance from the locknut to the
end of the track-rod before removing it.
3 Mark the fitted position of the gaiter on the
t r a c k - r o d , then release the gaiter securing
clips. Slide the gaiter from the steering gear,
and off the end of the track-rod. Note that on
manual steering gear m o d e l s , it will be
necessary to unscrew the nuts and remove
the damper and rack bracket for access to the
inner gaiter.
4 Thoroughly clean the t r a c k - r o d and the
steering gear h o u s i n g . S c r a p e off all the
grease from the old gaiter, and apply it to the
t r a c k - r o d inner balljoint. This a s s u m e s that
grease has not been lost or contaminated as a
result of damage to the old gaiter. Use fresh
grease if in doubt.
5 Carefully slide the new gaiter o n t o the
t r a c k - r o d , and locate it on the steering gear
h o u s i n g . Align the outer e d g e of the gaiter
with the mark made on the track-rod prior to
removal, then secure it in position with new
retaining clips.
6 Screw the t r a c k - r o d end locknut onto the
end of the track-rod.
7 Refit the t r a c k - r o d end as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 23.
21.3 Power steering hydraulic fluid reservoir
at the rear of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t
21 Power steering
hydraulic system bleeding
|^
3^
General
1 The following symptoms indicate that there
is air present in the power steering hydraulic
system:
a) Generation of air bubbles in fluid
reservoir.
b) Clicking noises from power steering
pump.
c) Excessive 'buzzing' or 'groaning' from
power steering pump.
2 Note that when the vehicle is stationary, or
while m o v i n g the steering wheel slowly, a
' h i s s i n g ' noise may be p r o d u c e d in the
steering gear or the fluid p u m p . This noise is
inherent in the system, and does not indicate
any cause for concern.
Bleeding
3 U n s c r e w the filler c a p f r o m the p o w e r
steering fluid reservoir (see illustration), and
c h e c k that the fluid level is up to the MAX
mark on the dipstick. If necessary, t o p - u p the
fluid level.
4 Start the engine and allow it to idle.
5 Have an assistant turn the steering f r o m
lock to lock, while you observe the fluid level.
If the fluid level d r o p s , a d d more fluid, and
repeat the operation until the fluid level no
longer d r o p s and there are no visible air
bubbles in the fluid.
6 With the fluid level correct, refit and tighten
the filler cap.
22 Power steering pump removal and refitting
f|>
Removal
1.2 l i t r e m o d e l s
1 The power steering p u m p is located on the
front r i g h t - h a n d side of the engine, and is
belt-driven from the crankshaft pulley. First,
apply the handbrake, then jack up the front of
the vehicle and support it on axle stands (see
10«12 Suspension and steering systems
22.22 R e m o v i n g t h e g u a r d f r o m over t h e
p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p drivebelt
22.24 R e m o v i n g t h e drivebelt
22.26a U n s c r e w t h e u p p e r pivot b o l t . . .
Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove the
front right-hand roadwheel.
2 Remove the splash guard for access to the
power steering pump.
3 Unbolt the shield f r o m over the p o w e r
steering p u m p pulley.
4 Loosen the lower lock/pivot bolt securing
the p u m p to the adjustment plate, then back
off the a d j u s t m e n t bolt and remove the
drivebelt.
right-hand
side
of
the
engine
(see
illustration).
23 If necessary, t h e pulley retaining bolts
may be loosened at this stage, and the pulley
removed after removing the drivebelt.
24 Loosen the power steering p u m p pulley
bolts, then loosen the locknut and back off the
adjustment bolt. Swivel the p u m p to release
the t e n s i o n , then remove the drivebelt (see
illustration).
6 Loosen the clip and disconnect the supply
hose from the t o p of the p u m p .
7 Unscrew the union nut and disconnect the
steering gear pressure s u p p l y line f r o m the
pump.
8 U n s c r e w the upper and lower m o u n t i n g
bolts and withdraw the power steering pump
from its bracket on the front of the engine.
pipe f r o m b e t w e e n the air cleaner and the
throttle housing body.
12 From the r i g h t - h a n d side of the engine,
unbolt and remove the guard from over the
auxiliary drivebelt.
13 Loosen the clip and d i s c o n n e c t the
reservoir hose f r o m the p u m p . Position a
suitable container beneath the pump to catch
spilled fluid.
14 Unscrew the union nut and disconnect the
steering gear pressure s u p p l y line from the
pump.
15 Remove the fasteners and r e m o v e the
wheel arch liner from the right-hand side.
16 Loosen the bolts securing the pulley to
the power steering pump.
17 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt w i t h
reference to Chapter 1.
18 Fully unscrew the bolts and remove the
pulley from the pump.
19 Unscrew the mounting bolts and remove
the pump.
1.4 l i t r e m o d e l s
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s
9 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the right-hand front roadwheel.
10 Drain as much fluid as possible from the
power steering fluid reservoir, using a pipette
or an old poultry baster. Alternatively, fit a
hose clamp to the hydraulic hose leading from
the reservoir to the pump.
20 Drain as much fluid as possible from the
power steering reservoir, using a pipette or an
old poultry baster. Alternatively, fit a hose
clamp to the hydraulic hose leading from the
reservoir to the pump.
5 Drain as m u c h fluid as possible f r o m the
power steering fluid reservoir, using a pipette
or an old poultry baster. Alternatively, fit a
hose clamp to the hydraulic hose leading from
the reservoir to the pump.
11 Loosen the clips and remove the air intake
22.26b . . . a n d l o w e r p i v o t b o l t . .
21 Release the clips and r e m o v e the
alternator cooling pipe f r o m the right-hand
side of the engine compartment.
22 Unbolt and remove the plastic guard from
over the power steering pump drivebelt on the
22.26c . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e p o w e r
steering p u m p f r o m the engine together
with the mounting bracket
25 Place a container beneath the pump, then
loosen the clip and disconnect the inlet hose
from the p u m p . Unscrew the union nut and
disconnect the outlet pressure line from the
pump.
26 If the pulley has already been r e m o v e d ,
unscrew and remove the mounting bolts and
remove the pump from the mounting bracket.
Alternatively, unscrew the lower pivot bolt and
upper adjustment lock bolt, and remove the
p u m p t o g e t h e r with the m o u n t i n g bracket
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Note that the upper bolt
also secures the engine lifting eye.
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
27 A p p l y the h a n d b r a k e , then jack up the
front of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove the right-hand front roadwheel.
28 Drain as much fluid as possible from the
power steering reservoir, using a pipette or an
old poultry baster. Alternatively, fit a hose
clamp to the hydraulic hose leading from the
reservoir to the pump.
22.26d P o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p
Suspension and steering systems 10*13
29 Loosen the power steering p u m p pulley
bolts.
30 Remove the fasteners and remove the
wheel arch liner from the right-hand side.
31 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt with
reference to Chapter 1.
32 Fully unscrew the bolts and remove the
pulley from the pump.
33 Unbolt the engine support mounting link
from the right-hand side of the engine, then
unbolt the link bracket from the body.
34 Disconnect the wiring c o n n e c t o r and
earth wire from over the power steering pump.
35 Loosen the clip and d i s c o n n e c t the
reservoir hose f r o m the p u m p . Position a
suitable container beneath the pump to catch
spilled fluid.
36 Unscrew the union nut and disconnect the
steering gear pressure s u p p l y line f r o m the
pump.
37 Working beneath the car, unbolt the inlet
manifold support bracket from the rear of the
engine.
38 Unbolt the alternator m o u n t i n g bracket
from the rear of the engine.
39 Unscrew the mounting bolts and remove
the pump.
Refitting
40 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified
t o r q u e where given. Refill the hydraulic
system with the specified grade and quantity
of p o w e r steering f l u i d , then bleed the
hydraulic system as described in Section 2 1 .
Adjust the tension of the power steering pump
drivebelt as described in Chapter 1.
23 Track-rod end removal and refitting
Removal
N o t e : A balljoint
separator
tool will be
required for this operation. A new
track-rod
end nut split pin should be used on refitting.
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the relevant front roadwheel.
2 Unscrew the nut securing the track-rod end
to the steering arm on'the hub carrier. Using a
balljoint separator tool, separate the track-rod
end from the steering arm (see illustrations).
3 C o u n t e r h o l d the t r a c k - r o d end using the
flats provided, then loosen the track-rod end
locknut a quarter turn (see illustration).
4 Unscrew the track-rod end from the trackrod, c o u n t i n g the exact number of turns
required to do so. !f necessary, mark the
relationship b e t w e e n the t r a c k - r o d end and
the track-rod using a dab of paint.
Refitting
5 C h e c k the t r a c k - r o d end rubber boot for
damage, and if necessary obtain a new one.
Renew the track-rod end if the movement of
the balljoint is either sloppy or too stiff. Also
check for other signs of damage such as worn
threads.
6 Carefully clean the t r a c k - r o d end and the
track-rod threads.
7 Screw the track-rod end onto the track-rod
by the number of turns noted before removal.
Tighten the locknut.
8 Ensure that the balijoint taper is clean, then
engage the taper in the steering arm on the
hub carrier.
9 Refit the balljoint nut, and tighten to the
specified torque.
10 Refit the roadwheel, and lower the vehicle
to the ground.
11 Have the front wheel alignment checked
by a FIAT d e a l e or tyre specialist at the
earliest opportunity.
r
24 Wheel alignment
and steering angles general information
General
information
1 A car's steering and suspension geometry
is defined in four basic settings; c a m b e r ,
castor, steering axis inclination, and t o e setting. With the exception of toe setting, all
angles are expressed in degrees and are not
adjustable. Toe-setting is adjustable.
Front
wheel
toe
setting
Checking
2 Due to the special measuring e q u i p m e n t
necessary to check the wheel alignment, and
the skill required to use it properly, the
checking and adjustment of these settings is
best left to a FIAT dealer or similar expert.
Most
tyre-fitting
shops
now
possess
sophisticated checking equipment.
3 For accurate checking, the vehicle must be
at the kerb w e i g h t specified in Dimensions
and weights.
4 Before starting w o r k , c h e c k first that the
tyre sizes and t y p e s are as s p e c i f i e d , then
c h e c k tyre pressures and tread wear. Also
check roadwheel run-out, the condition of the
hub bearings, the steering wheel free play and
the c o n d i t i o n of the front suspension
c o m p o n e n t s (Chapter 1). Correct any faults
found.
5 Park the vehicle on level g r o u n d , with the
front roadwheels in the s t r a i g h t - a h e a d
position. Rock the rear and front e n d s to
settle the suspension. Release the handbrake
and roll the vehicle backwards approximately
1 metre, then f o r w a r d s again, t o relieve any
stresses in the steering and suspension
components.
6 T w o m e t h o d s are available to the h o m e
mechanic for c h e c k i n g the front wheel t o e
s e t t i n g . One m e t h o d is to use a g a u g e to
measure the distance between the front and
rear inside edges of the roadwheels. The other
method is to use a scuff plate, in which each
front wheel is rolled across a movable plate
which records any deviation, or scuff, of the
tyre f r o m the s t r a i g h t - a h e a d position as it
m o v e s across the plate. Such gauges are
available in relatively-inexpensive form from
accessory outlets. It is up to the o w n e r to
d e c i d e whether the e x p e n s e is justified, in
view of the small a m o u n t of use such
equipment would normally receive.
7 Prepare the vehicle as d e s c r i b e d in
paragraphs 3 to 5 above.
8 If the measurement p r o c e d u r e is being
used, carefully measure the distance between
the front edges of the roadwheel rims and the
rear edges of the rims. S u b t r a c t the front
measurement f r o m the rear m e a s u r e m e n t ,
10*14 Suspension and steering systems
and c h e c k that the result is within the
specified range. If not, adjust the toe setting
as described in paragraph 10.
9 If scuff plates are to be u s e d , roll t h e
vehicle b a c k w a r d s , c h e c k that the r o a d wheels are in the s t r a i g h t - a h e a d p o s i t i o n ,
t h e n roll it a c r o s s the scuff plates so that
each front roadwheel passes squarely over
the c e n t r e of its r e s p e c t i v e plate. Note the
angle recorded by the scuff plates. To ensure
accuracy, repeat the check three times, and
take the average of the three readings. If the
roadwheels are running parallel, there will of
course be no angle r e c o r d e d ; if a deviation
value is shown on the scuff plates, c o m p a r e
the reading obtained for each wheel with that
supplied by the scuff plate manufacturers. If
the value r e c o r d e d is o u t s i d e the specified
t o l e r a n c e , the t o e s e t t i n g is incorrect, a n d
must be adjusted as follows.
Adjustment
10 A p p l y the h a n d b r a k e , then jack up the
front of the vehicle and support it securely on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
Turn the steering wheel onto full-left lock, and
record the number of exposed threads on the
right-hand t r a c k - r o d . N o w turn the steering
onto full-right lock, and record the number of
threads on the left-hand side. If there are the
same number of threads visible on both sides,
then subsequent adjustment should be made
equally on b o t h sides. If there are more
threads visible on one side than the other, it
will be necessary to c o m p e n s a t e for this
during a d j u s t m e n t . N o t e : It is important
to
ensure that, after adjustment,
the same
number of threads are visible on the end of
each track rod.
11 First clean the t r a c k - r o d threads; if they
are c o r r o d e d , apply penetrating fluid before
starting adjustment. Release the steering gear
rubber gaiter outboard clips, then peel back
the gaiters and apply a smear of grease, so
that b o t h gaiters are free and will not be
twisted or strained as their respective trackrods are rotated.
12 Use a s t r a i g h t - e d g e and a scriber or
similar to mark the relationship of each trackr o d to the t r a c k - r o d e n d . W o r k i n g on each
track-rod end in turn, unscrew its locking nut.
13 Alter the length of the track-rods, bearing
in mind the note in paragraph 10, by screwing
them into or out of the track-rod ends. Rotate
the t r a c k - r o d using an o p e n - e n d e d spanner
fitted to the flats p r o v i d e d . If necessary,
counterhold the track-rod end using a second
spanner. Shortening the track-rods (screwing
them into their track-rod ends) will reduce toein and increase toe-out.
14 W h e n t h e setting is correct, hold the
t r a c k - r o d s and securely tighten the locking
nuts. C h e c k that the balljoints are seated
correctly in their s o c k e t s , and c o u n t the
e x p o s e d t h r e a d s on the ends of the t r a c k rods. If the number of threads exposed is not
the same on both sides, then the adjustment
has not been made equally, and problems will
be encountered with tyre scrubbing in turns;
also, the steering wheel spokes will no longer
be horizontal w h e n the wheels are in the
straight-ahead position.
15 When the track-rod lengths are the same,
lower the vehicle to the ground and re-check
the toe setting; readjust if necessary. When
the setting is correct, tighten the locking nuts.
Ensure that the steering gear rubber gaiters
are seated correctly and are not t w i s t e d or
strained, then secure them in position with the
retaining clips.
9»1
Chapter 9
Braking system
Contents
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) components removal and refitting
19
Brake fluid - level check
See Weekly checks
Brake fluid - renewal
See Chapter 1
Brake pedal - removal and refitting
11
Front brake caliper - removal, overhaul and refitting
8
Front brake disc - inspection, removal and refitting
6
Front brake pad - condition check
See Chapter 1
Front brake pads - renewal
4
General information
1
Handbrake - checking and adjustment
14
Handbrake cables - removal and refitting
16
Handbrake lever - removal and refitting
15
Hydraulic pipes and hoses - renewal
3
Hydraulic system - bleeding
2
Master cylinder - removal, overhaul and refitting
10
Rear brake drum - removal, inspection and refitting
7
Rear brake pressure proportioning valve - removal and refitting . . . 18
Rear brake shoes - condition check
See Chapter 1
Rear brake shoes - renewal
5
Rear wheel cylinder - removal, overhaul and refitting
9
Stop-light switch - adjustment, removal and refitting
17
Vacuum servo unit - testing, removal and refitting
12
Vacuum servo unit check valve - removal, testing and refitting . . . . 13
Degrees of difficulty
Fairiy difficult,
^
Difficult, suitable for
^
for beginner with
suitable for competent
^
experienced DIY
^
suitable for expert DIY
experience
^
s o m e experience
DIY mechanic
^
mechanic
^
or professional
|k
^
§^
V e r y difficult,
Fairly easy, suitable
novice w i t h little
Easy, suitable for
Specifications
Front brakes
Type
Disc diameter
Disc thickness (new):
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre (manual) models
1.6 litre (automatic) and 1.8 litre models
Minimum disc machining thickness:
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre (manual) models
1.6 litre (automatic) and 1.8 litre models
Minimum disc thickness (wear limit):
1.2,1.4 and 1.6 litre (manual) models
1.6 litre (automatic) and 1.8 litre models
Maximum disc runout
Brake pad friction material minimum thickness
Disc with single-piston sliding calipers
257 m m
11.80 to 12.10 mm
19.80 to 20.10 m m
11.10 m m
18.55 m m
10.20 m m
18.20 m m
0.15 m m (2.0 m m from outer edge)
1.5 m m
Rear drum brakes
Drum inner diameter (new):
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (without ABS)
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (with ABS)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Maximum drum machining diameter:
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (without ABS)
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (with ABS)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Maximum drum diameter (wear limit):
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (without ABS)
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (with ABS)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Minimum shoe lining thickness
180.00 to 180.25 m m
203.10 to 203.40 m m
203.10 to 203.40 m m
180.95 m m
204.10 m m
204.10 m m
'
181.35 mm
204.70 mm
204.70 mm
1.5 m m
^
g^
9*2 Braking system
Anti-lock braking system
Type
Teves MK20
Torque wrench settings
Brake disc locating studs
Brake drum locating studs
Brake pedal pivot bolt
Brake pipe union
Caliper heat shield securing bolts
Front caliper bracket-to-hub carrier bolts
Front caliper-to-caliper bracket guide bolts
Hub carrier to strut
Pedal bracket mounting
Rear wheel cylinder mounting bolts
Roadwheel bolts
1
General information
1 The braking system is of v a c u u m s e r v o assisted, dual-circuit hydraulic t y p e . The
arrangement of the hydraulic system is such
that each circuit operates one front and one
rear brake f r o m a t a n d e m master cylinder.
Under normal c i r c u m s t a n c e s , b o t h circuits
operate in unison. However, in the event of
hydraulic failure in one circuit, full braking
force will still be available at t w o diagonallyopposite wheels.
2 All models are fitted with front disc brakes
and rear drum brakes. The front disc brakes
are a c t u a t e d by single-piston sliding t y p e
calipers. The rear d r u m brakes incorporate
leading and trailing shoes, which are actuated
by twin-piston wheel cylinders. A self-adjust
mechanism is incorporated, to automatically
c o m p e n s a t e for brake shoe wear. As the
brake shoe linings wear, the f o o t b r a k e
operation automatically operates the adjuster
m e c h a n i s m , w h i c h effectively lengthens the
shoe strut and repositions the brake shoes, to
remove the lining-to-drum clearance.
3 The
mechanical
handbrake
linkage
operates the brake shoes via a lever attached
to the trailing brake shoe.
4 Load sensitive proportioning valves operate
on the rear brake hydraulic circuits, to prevent
the possibility of the rear wheels l o c k i n g
before the front wheels under heavy braking.
Note: When servicing any part of the system,
work carefully and methodically; also observe
scrupulous cleanliness when overhauling any
part of the hydraulic system. Always renew
components (in axle sets, where applicable) if
in doubt about their condition, and use only
genuine FIAT replacement
parts, or at least
those of known good quality. Note the
warnings given in Safety first! and at relevant
points in this Chapter concerning the dangers
of asbestos dust and hydraulic fluid.
Models
system
with anti-lock
(ABS)
braking
5 Available as an option on certain m o d e l s ,
the anti-lock braking system prevents skidding
Nm
lb ft
6
12
12
30
14
5
53
12
70
15
10
86
4
9
9
22
10
4
39
9
52
11
7
63
which not only optimises stopping distances
but allows full steering control to be
maintained under maximum braking. The ABS
s y s t e m is operative while the vehicle is
travelling both forwards and rearwards. During
aquaplaning the A B S system temporarily
switches itself off, as it d e t e c t s a faulty
condition where the driving wheels rotate at a
higher speed than the driven wheels.
6 By electronically monitoring the s p e e d of
each roadwheel in relation to the other
wheels, the system can detect when a wheel
is about to lock-up, before control is actually
lost. The brake fluid pressure applied to that
wheel's brake caliper is then decreased and
restored (or modulated) several t i m e s a
second until control is regained.
7 The system c o m p o n e n t s c o m p r i s e an
Electronic C o n t r o l Unit (ECU), four wheel
speed sensors, a hydraulic unit, recycling
p u m p , brake lines and d a s h b o a r d m o u n t e d
warning lamps. The ECU is located beneath
the hydraulic unit, and the recycling p u m p is
located on t o p of the hydraulic unit, the
assembly being mounted in the left-hand side
of the engine compartment.
8 The hydraulic unit incorporates a tandem
master cylinder, a valve block which modulates
the pressure in the brake hydraulic circuits during
ABS operation, an accumulator which provides a
supply of highly pressurised brake fluid, a
hydraulic pump to charge the accumulator and
an integral electronic control unit (ECU).
9 The four wheel sensors are mounted on the
wheel h u b s . The ECU uses the signals
p r o d u c e d by the sensors t o calculate the
rotational speed of each wheel.
10 The ECU has a self-diagnostic capability
and will inhibit the operation of the A B S if a
fault is d e t e c t e d , lighting the d a s h b o a r d
m o u n t e d warning lamp. The braking system
will then revert to c o n v e n t i o n a l , n o n - A B S
o p e r a t i o n . If the nature of the fault is not
immediately o b v i o u s u p o n i n s p e c t i o n , the
vehicle must be taken to a FIAT dealer, who
will have the diagnostic equipment required to
interrogate the A B S ECU electronically and
pin-point the problem.
11 As from 10/97 (chassis number 4535478on) an additional electronic control was added
to the ABS. The system is referred to as EBD
(Electronically-operated Brake force Distribution) and it automatically controls the brake
pressure between the front and rear brake
hydraulic circuits at all times, as against
control only during emergency braking for the
A B S . Models with EBD are not fitted with a
load sensitive proportioning valve.
12 On models with EBD, the failure warning
light f u n c t i o n is slightly different to that on
m o d e l s w i t h only A B S . Failure of the A B S
system only, causes the ABS warning light to
c o m e on. Failure of the EBD system causes
both the A B S and handbrake warning lights
to c o m e o n . If the h a n d b r a k e w a r n i n g light
only c o m e s o n , this indicates that the
hydraulic brake fluid is low or that the
handbrake lever is not fully released.
2 Hydraulic system bleeding
|^
A
Warning:
Hydraulic
fluid
is
poisonous;
wash off
immediately
and thoroughly
in the case of
skin contact, and seek
immediate
medical advice if any fluid is swallowed, or
gets
into
the eyes. Certain
types
of
hydraulic
fluid are inflammable,
and may
ignite when allowed into contact with hot
components.
When servicing any
hydraulic
system, it is safest to assume that the fluid
IS inflammable,
and to take
precautions
against the risk of fire as though it is petrol
that is being handled. Hydraulic fluid is also
an effective paint stripper, and will
attack
plastics; if any is spilt, it should be washed
off immediately, using copious quantities of
fresh water. Finally, it is hygroscopic
(it
absorbs moisture
from the air) - old fluid
may be contaminated
and unfit for
further
use. When topping-up
or renewing the fluid,
always use the recommended
type, and
ensure that it comes from a
freshly-opened
sealed
container.
General
1 The correct operation of any hydraulic
system is only possible after removing all air
from the components and circuit; and this is
achieved by bleeding the system.
Braking system
2 During the bleeding p r o c e d u r e , a d d only
clean, unused
hydraulic fluid of
the
r e c o m m e n d e d t y p e ; never re-use fluid that
has already been bled f r o m the s y s t e m .
Ensure that sufficient fluid is available before
starting work.
3 If there is any possibility of incorrect fluid
being already in the s y s t e m , the brake
c o m p o n e n t s and circuit m u s t be flushed
c o m p l e t e l y with u n c o n t a m i n a t e d , correct
fluid, and new seals s h o u l d be fitted
throughout the system.
4 If hydraulic fluid has been lost f r o m the
system, or air has entered because of a leak,
ensure that the fault is cured before
proceeding further.
5 Park the vehicle on level g r o u n d , and
s w i t c h off the engine. Alternatively, position
the car over a pit or on car ramps.
6 Check that all pipes and hoses are secure,
unions tight and bleed s c r e w s c l o s e d .
Remove the dust caps (where applicable), and
clean any dirt from around the bleed screws.
7 Unscrew the master cylinder reservoir cap,
and t o p - u p the master cylinder reservoir to
the MAX level line; refit the c a p loosely.
Remember to maintain the fluid level at least
above the MIN level line t h r o u g h o u t the
procedure, otherwise there is a risk of further
air entering the system.
8 There are a n u m b e r of o n e - m a n , d o - i t yourself brake bleeding kits currently available
from
motor
accessory
shops.
It
is
r e c o m m e n d e d that one of these kits is used
whenever possible, as they greatly simplify
the bleeding operation, and also reduce the
risk of expelled air and fluid being drawn back
into the system. If such a kit is not available,
the basic (two-man) m e t h o d must be u s e d ,
which is described in detail below.
9 If a kit is to be used, prepare the vehicle as
d e s c r i b e d previously, and follow the kit
manufacturer's instructions, as the procedure
may vary slightly according to the type being
used; generally, they are as outlined below in
the relevant sub-section.
10 Whichever m e t h o d is u s e d , the s a m e
s e q u e n c e must be f o l l o w e d (paragraphs 11
and 12) to ensure the removal of all air from
the system.
Bleeding
sequence
11 If the system has been only partially
disconnected, and suitable precautions were
taken to minimise fluid loss, it s h o u l d be
necessary to bleed only that part of the
system (ie the primary or secondary circuit).
12 If the complete system is to be bled, then
it s h o u l d be d o n e w o r k i n g in the f o l l o w i n g
sequence:
a) Left-hand rear wheel.
b) Right-hand front wheel.
c) Right-hand rear wheel.
d) Left-hand front wheel.
N o t e : When bleeding the rear brakes on a
vehicle fitted with load proportioning
valves: if
the rear of the vehicle has been jacked up to
allow access to the brake wheel cylinder, the
rear suspension must be compressed so that
the load proportioning
valves remain open
throughout the bleeding process.
Bleeding - basic (two-man) method
13 Collect a clean glass jar, a suitable length
of plastic or rubber tubing which is a tight fit
over the bleed screw, and a ring spanner to fit
the screw. The help of an assistant will also be
required.
14 Remove the dust cap from the first screw
in t h e s e q u e n c e if not already d o n e . Fit a
suitable spanner and tube to the screw, place
the other end of the tube in the jar, and pour in
sufficient fluid to cover the end of the tube.
15 Ensure that the master cylinder reservoir
fluid level is maintained at least above the MIN
level line throughout the procedure.
16 Unscrew the bleed screw approximately
half a t u r n , then have the assistant fully
d e p r e s s the brake pedal and hold it d o w n .
Tighten the bleed screw and have the brake
pedal slowly released. The assistant should
maintain pedal pressure, following the pedal
d o w n to the floor, and should not release the
pedal until instructed to do so. When the flow
stops, tighten the bleed screw again, have the
assistant release the pedal slowly, and
recheck the reservoir fluid level (see
illustration).
17 Repeat the procedure given in paragraph
16, until the fluid emerging f r o m the bleed
screw is free from air bubbles. If the master
cylinder has been drained and refilled, and air
is being bled f r o m the first s c r e w in the
sequence, allow approximately five seconds
b e t w e e n cycles for the master cylinder
passages to refill. It may also be necessary to
' p u m p ' the brake pedal vigorously initially, in
order to force the fluid into the brake lines.
18 When no more air bubbles appear, tighten
the bleed screw securely, remove the tube and
spanner, and refit the dust cap. Do not
overtighten the bleed screw.
19 Repeat the p r o c e d u r e on the remaining
s c r e w s in the s e q u e n c e , until all air is
r e m o v e d f r o m the s y s t e m , and the brake
pedal feels firm again.
Bleeding - using a o n e - w a y valve kit
2.16 B l e e d i n g a rear b r a k e line
20 A s their name implies, these kits consist
of a length of t u b i n g w i t h a o n e - w a y valve
fitted, to prevent expelled air and fluid being
drawn back into the system; some kits include
a translucent container, w h i c h can be
p o s i t i o n e d so that the air b u b b l e s can be
9*3
more easily seen flowing from the end of the
tube.
21 The kit is connected to the bleed screw,
which is then opened. The user returns to the
driver's seat, depresses the brake pedal with
a smooth, steady stroke, and slowly releases
it. This is repeated until the expelled fluid is
clear of air bubbles.
22 Note that these kits simplify w o r k so
m u c h that it is easy to forget the master
cylinder reservoir fluid level. Ensure that this is
maintained at least above the MIN level line at
all times.
Bleeding using a pressure-bleeding kit
23 These kits are usually o p e r a t e d by the
reservoir of pressurised air contained in the
spare tyre. However, note that it will probably
be necessary to reduce the pressure to a
lower level than n o r m a l . Refer to the
instructions supplied with the kit.
24 By c o n n e c t i n g a pressurised, fluid-filled
container to the master cylinder reservoir,
bleeding can be carried out simply by opening
each screw in turn (in the specified sequence),
and allowing the fluid to flow out until no more
air bubbles can be seen in the expelled fluid.
25 This m e t h o d has the advantage that the
large reservoir of fluid provides an additional
safeguard against air being d r a w n into the
system during bleeding.
26 Pressure-bleeding is particularly effective
w h e n bleeding 'difficult' s y s t e m s , or w h e n
bleeding the complete system at the time of
routine fluid renewal.
All m e t h o d s
27 When bleeding is c o m p l e t e , and firm
pedal feel is restored, wash off any spilt fluid,
tighten the bleed screws securely, and refit
their dust caps.
28 C h e c k the hydraulic fluid level in the
master cylinder reservoir, and t o p - u p if
necessary (Weekly checks).
29 Discard any hydraulic fluid that has been
bled from the system, as it will not be fit for reuse.
30 Check the feel of the brake pedal. If it feels
at all spongy, air must still be present in the
system, and further bleeding is required.
Failure to bleed satisfactorily after a reasonable
repetition of the bleeding procedure may be
due to worn master cylinder seals.
31 On models with ABS, the brake hydraulic
system is bled using exactly the same method
as for n o n - A B S models, however it will take
longer.
3 Hydraulic pipes and hoses - %»
renewal
|s
N o t e : Before starting work, refer to the note at
the beginning
of Section 2 concerning
the
dangers of hydraulic fluid.
1 If any pipe or hose is to be r e n e w e d ,
minimise fluid loss by first removing the
9*4 Braking system
4.2 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e b r a k e p a d w e a r s e n s o r w i r i n g
master cylinder reservoir cap, then tighten the
cap d o w n onto a piece of polythene to obtain
an airtight seal. Alternatively, flexible hoses
can be sealed, if required, using a proprietary
brake hose c l a m p . Metal brake pipe unions
can be plugged (if care is taken not to allow
dirt into the system) or c a p p e d immediately
they are d i s c o n n e c t e d . Place a w a d of rag
under any union that is to be disconnected, to
catch any spilt fluid.
2 If a flexible hose is to be d i s c o n n e c t e d ,
unscrew the brake pipe union nut before
removing the spring clip w h i c h secures the
hose to its mounting bracket.
3 To unscrew the union nuts, it is preferable
to obtain a special brake pipe split spanner.
These are available f r o m most m o t o r
accessory shops. Failing this, a close-fitting
open-ended spanner will be required, though
if the nuts are tight or corroded, their flats may
be rounded-off if the spanner slips. In such a
case, a self-locking wrench is often the only
way to unscrew a s t u b b o r n union, but it
follows that the pipe and the d a m a g e d nuts
must be renewed on reassembly. A l w a y s
clean a union and surrounding area before
disconnecting
it.
If
disconnecting
a
component with more than one union, make a
careful note of the c o n n e c t i o n s before
disturbing any of them.
4 If a brake pipe is to be renewed, it can be
o b t a i n e d , cut t o length and w i t h the union
4.4 Releasing t h e hydraulic line s u p p o r t
grommet from the strut
4.3 R e m o v i n g t h e a n t i - r a t t l e s p r i n g f r o m t h e f r o n t b r a k e caliper
nuts and end flares in place, f r o m FIAT
dealers. All that is then necessary is to bend it
to shape, f o l l o w i n g the line of the original,
before fitting it to the vehicle. Alternatively,
most m o t o r accessory s h o p s can m a k e up
brake pipes from kits, but this requires very
careful measurement of the original, to ensure
that the replacement is of the correct length.
The safest answer is usually t o t a k e the
original to the shop as a pattern.
5 On refitting, d o not overtighten the union
nuts. If possible, use a t o r q u e w r e n c h to
ensure they are tightened correctly.
6 Ensure that the pipes and hoses are
correctly routed, with no kinks, and that they
are secured in the clips or brackets provided.
After fitting, remove the polythene f r o m the
reservoir, and bleed the hydraulic system as
d e s c r i b e d in Section 2. Wash off any spilt
fluid, and check carefully for fluid leaks.
4 Front brake pads renewal
A
braking
created
Warning: Renew BOTH sets of
front brake pads at the
same
time - NEVER renew the pads on
only
one
wheel,
as
uneven
may result. Note that the
dust
by wear of the pads may
contain
4.5 R e m o v i n g t h e g u i d e b u s h e n d c a p s
asbestos,
which is a health hazard. Never
blow it out with compressed
air, and don't
inhale any of it. An approved filtering
mask
should
be worn when working
on the
brakes. DO NOT use petrol or
petroleumbased solvents
to clean brake parts; use
proprietary
brake cleaner
or
methylated
spirit only.
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the front roadwheels.
2 If removing the left-hand front brake pads,
d i s c o n n e c t the wiring c o n n e c t o r from the
brake pad wear sensor c o n n e c t o r , and
release the wire f r o m the clip
(see
illustration).
3 Using a pair of pliers, unclip the anti-rattle
spring and remove it f r o m the brake caliper
(see illustration).
4 Release the hydraulic line support grommet
from the strut (see illustration).
5 Remove the end c a p s f r o m the guide
bushes to gain access to the caliper guide pin
bolts (see illustration).
6 U n s c r e w and remove the caliper guide
bolts, then lift the caliper and inner pad away
from the mounting bracket (see illustrations).
Tie the caliper to the suspension strut using a
piece of wire. Do not allow it to hang
unsupported on the flexible brake hose.
7 Unclip the inner pad from the caliper piston
4.6a U n s c r e w t h e caliper g u i d e b o l t s . . .
Braking system
4.6b . . . t h e n lift t h e caliper a n d inner p a d
from the mounting bracket
4.7a U n c l i p t h e inner p a d f r o m t h e caliper
piston . . .
syphon the fluid by mouth, as it is poisonous;
use a syringe or an old poultry baster.
12 Apply a little brake copper grease to t h e
back of the outer brake pad and to the upper
and lower edges of both pads which contact
the caliper. Do not apply excessive amounts.
13 Clip t h e inner pad into t h e caliper piston
and fit the outer pad to the mounting bracket,
ensuring its friction material is against t h e
9 If t h e brake pads are still serviceable,
brake disc.
carefully clean them using a clean, fine wire
brush or similar, paying particular attention to
14 Manoeuvre the caliper into position over the
the sides a n d back of t h e metal b a c k i n g .
pads, then apply a little copper grease t o the
Clean out the grooves in the friction material,
caliper guide bolts, insert t h e m , and tighten
and pick out any large embedded particles of
them to the specified torque setting.
dirt or debris. Clean the pad locations in the 15 Refit t h e e n d c a p s t o t h e caliper g u i d e
caliper mounting bracket.
bushes and locate the brake pad wear wiring
in its clip.
10 Prior t o fitting t h e pads, c h e c k that t h e
guide pin bolts are free to slide easily in t h e 16 Fit the anti-rattle spring, ensuring its ends
caliper b o d y bushes, a n d are a reasonably
are correctly located in the caliper body holes.
tight fit. Brush t h e dust a n d dirt from t h e
17 Ensure the wiring is correctly routed then
caliper and piston, but d o n o t inhale it, as it is
reconnect t h e brake p a d wear wiring t o t h e
injurious t o health. Inspect t h e dust seal
main loom.
around the piston for damage, and the piston
18 Depress the brake pedal repeatedly, until
for evidence of fluid leaks, corrosion or
the pads are pressed into firm contact with the
d a m a g e . If attention t o any of these
brake disc, a n d normal (non-assisted) pedal
components is necessary, refer to Section 8.
pressure is restored.
19 Repeat t h e above p r o c e d u r e on t h e
11 If new brake pads are to be fitted, the caliper
remaining front brake caliper.
piston must be pushed back into the cylinder to
make room for them. Either use a G-clamp or
20 Refit the roadwheels, then lower the vehicle
similar tool, or use suitable pieces of wood as
to the ground and tighten the roadwheel bolts
levers. Provided that the master cylinder
to the specified torque setting.
reservoir has not been overfilled with hydraulic
21 Check t h e hydraulic fluid level as
fluid, there should be no spillage, but keep a
described in Weekly Checkscareful watch on the fluid level while retracting
Note: New pads will not give full braking
the piston. If the fluid level rises above the MAX
efficiency
until they have bedded
in. Be
level line at any time, the surplus should be
prepared for this, and avoid hard braking as
siphoned off or ejected via a plastic tube
far as possible for the first hundred miles or so
connected to the bleed screw. N o t e : Do not after pad renewal.
and remove the outer pad from the mounting
bracket (see illustrations).
8 Measure the thickness of each brake pad's
friction material. If either pad is worn at any
point to t h e specified minimum thickness or
less, all four pads must be renewed. Also, the
pads s h o u l d be renewed if any are
contaminated with oil or grease.
5.4a D e t a c h i n g t h e l o w e r r e t u r n s p r i n g
5.4b D e t a c h i n g t h e u p p e r r e t u r n s p r i n g
f r o m t h e leading . . .
9*5
4.7b . . . a n d t h e o u t e r p a d f r o m t h e
mounting bracket
5
Rear brake shoes renewal
^
A
Warning: Renew BOTH sets of
rear brake shoes at the same
time - NEVER renew the shoes
on only one wheel, as uneven
braking
may result. Note that the dust
created by wear of the shoes may contain
asbestos,
which is a health hazard. Never
blow it out with compressed
air, and don't
inhale any of it. An approved filtering
mask
should
be worn when
working
on the
brakes. DO NOT use petrol or
petroleumbased solvents
to clean brake parts; use
proprietary
brake cleaner
or
methylated
spirit only.
Early
models
(with round steady
springs)
1 Remove the rear brake drums, as described
in Section 7.
2 Working o n one side of t h e vehicle, brush
the dirt and dust f r o m t h e brake shoes a n d
backplate, and from the drum. Avoid inhaling
the dust, as it may contain asbestos, which is
a health hazard.
3 Note t h e position of each shoe, a n d t h e
location of the return and steady springs. Also
m a k e a note of t h e adjuster c o m p o n e n t
locations, t o aid refitting later. It is advisable,
at this stage to wrap a stout rubber band or a
cable tie over t h e wheel cylinder t o prevent
the pistons from being accidentally ejected.
4 Detach t h e upper and lower return springs
from both brake shoes (see illustrations).
5.4c . . . a n d t r a i l i n g b r a k e s h o e s
9*6 Braking system
5 Unhook the self-adjuster mechanism return
spring f r o m the leading brake shoe {see
illustration). Remove the hold-down cup and
spring from the leading shoe. The spring cups
are a b a y o n e t - s t y l e fit - use a large pair of
pliers to depress and then turn them through
90°. Remove the pin.
Remove the pin. Lift the trailing shoe away
f r o m the b a c k p l a t e , and d i s c o n n e c t the
handbrake cable f r o m the brake shoe lever
(see illustration).
9 Thoroughly clean the surface of the
backplate using brake component cleaner to
remove all t r a c e s of dust and old lubricant.
Examine all c o m p o n e n t s for signs of
corrosion.
10 Apply brake grease sparingly to the shoe
contact surfaces of the brake backplate (see
illustration).
11 C o n n e c t the h a n d b r a k e cable to the
lever on the trailing brake shoe, locate
the trailing s h o e on the b a c k p l a t e and
secure in position with the pin, hold d o w n
spring and c u p . Using pliers, turn the c u p
through 90° and then release it, to lock it in
position.
12 Fit the self-adjuster mechanism into the
recess in the trailing brake shoe and anchor
the retaining spring in the slot provided in the
shoe (see illustration).
13 Fit the leading shoe in position on the
backplate and secure it with the hold d o w n
pin, spring and c u p as d e s c r i b e d for the
trailing shoe. Engage the end of the selfadjuster m e c h a n i s m w i t h the recess in the
leading brake shoe. Hook the retaining spring
into the slot provided.
14 Fit the upper and lower shoe return
springs, engaging them with the slots in the
5.7b . . . a n d r e m o v e it
5.8a R e m o v e t h e h o l d - d o w n c u p a n d
s p r i n g f r o m t h e trailing s h o e
5.8b Lift t h e trailing s h o e a w a y f r o m t h e
backplate...
5.8c . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e h a n d b r a k e
c a b l e f r o m t h e b r a k e s h o e lever
5.10 A p p l y b r a k e g r e a s e s p a r i n g l y t o t h e
s h o e c o n t a c t s u r f a c e s (arrowed) of t h e
brake backplate
5.12 Fit t h e s e l f - a d j u s t e r m e c h a n i s m into
t h e r e c e s s (arrowed) in t h e t r a i l i n g b r a k e
shoe
6 Carefully pull the leading brake shoe away
f r o m the b a c k p l a t e and r e m o v e it (see
illustration).
7 Using a suitable pair of pliers, unhook the
self-adjuster mechanism from the trailing shoe
and remove it (see illustrations).
8 Remove the h o l d - d o w n c u p and spring
f r o m the trailing shoe, using a large pair of
pliers, as d e s c r i b e d for the leading s h o e .
Braking system
9»7
5.14a L o w e r r e t u r n s p r i n g f i t t e d in p l a c e
5.14b C o r r e c t l o c a t i o n of u p p e r r e t u r n
s p r i n g in leading s h o e . . .
5.14c . . . a n d t r a i l i n g s h o e
shoes as shown (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Remove
the elastic band from the wheel cylinder.
15 Turn the serrated wheel at the end of the
self-adjuster mechanism, t o retract the brake
shoes - this will give additional clearance t o
allow the drum to pass over the shoes during
refitting.
turn t h e wheels by hand t o c h e c k that the
brake shoes are not binding.
19 Lower t h e vehicle t o t h e g r o u n d a n d
thoroughly check the operation of the braking
system.
20 Remove t h e rear brake d r u m s , as
described in Section 7.
21 Working on one side of the vehicle, brush
the dirt a n d dust f r o m t h e brake shoes a n d
backplate, and from the drum. Avoid inhaling
the dust, as it may contain asbestos, which is
a health hazard.
22 Note the position of each shoe, a n d the
location of the return and steady springs. Also
m a k e a note of t h e adjuster c o m p o n e n t
locations, t o aid refitting
later (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . It is advisable, at this stage t o
wrap a stout rubber band or a cable tie over
the wheel cylinder to prevent the pistons from
being accidentally ejected.
23 Using a pair of pliers, release the leading
brake shoe steady spring f r o m its p i n , a n d
remove the pin (see illustrations).
24 .Lever t h e b o t t o m of t h e leading brake
shoe f r o m its anchor, then d i s c o n n e c t the
b o t t o m return spring from both brake shoes
(see illustration).
25 Move the bottom end of the leading shoe
rearwards t o e x p a n d t h e t o p e n d f r o m t h e
wheel cylinder (see illustration).
26 U n h o o k a n d remove t h e upper return
spring f r o m b o t h shoes, then remove t h e
leading brake shoe (see illustration).
5.25 Releasing t h e t o p e n d of t h e leading
s h o e f r o m t h e w h e e l cylinder
5.26 U n h o o k i n g t h e u p p e r r e t u r n s p r i n g
a n d r e m o v i n g t h e leading s h o e
16 Repeat t h e p r o c e d u r e o n t h e remaining
side of the vehicle.
17 Refit the brake d r u m s as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 7. Check and if necessary adjust the
operation of the handbrake, as described in
Section 14.
18 A p p l y the brake pedal and h a n d b r a k e
lever several times to settle the self-adjusting
m e c h a n i s m . With b o t h rear roadwheels
refitted and the rear of the vehicle still raised,
5.24 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e b o t t o m r e t u r n
spring
Late
models
(with square steady
springs)
9*8 Braking system
1
5.27 R e m o v i n g t h e s e l f - a d j u s t e r
m e c h a n i s m f r o m t h e t r a i l i n g shoe
5.28 R e m o v i n g t h e trailing b r a k e s h o e
steady spring and pin
5.29 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e h a n d b r a k e c a b l e
f r o m t h e lever o n t h e b a c k of t h e t r a i l i n g
shoe
27 Remove the self-adjuster m e c h a n i s m
from the trailing shoe (see illustration).
28 Using the pliers, release the trailing brake
shoe steady spring from its pin, and remove
the pin (see illustration).
29 Turn over the trailing brake shoe and use
a pair of pliers to disconnect the handbrake
cable from the lever on the back of the shoe
(see illustration).
30 Thoroughly clean the surface of the
backplate using brake component cleaner to
remove all traces of dust and old lubricant.
Examine all c o m p o n e n t s for signs of
corrosion.
31 Apply brake grease sparingly to the shoe
contact surfaces of the brake backplate (see
illustration 5.10).
32 Connect the handbrake cable to the lever
on the back of the new trailing brake shoe.
Use a pair of l o n g - n o s e d pliers to hold the
spring away from the end of the cable while it
is being connected.
33 Offer the trailing shoe up to the backplate
and secure in position with the pin and steady
spring.
34 Before
refitting
the
self-adjuster
m e c h a n i s m , fully screw in the a d j u s t m e n t
s c r e w so that the m e c h a n i s m is set t o its
minimum length. Apply a little brake grease to
the metal contact faces of both brake shoes,
self-adjuster mechanism and handbrake lever
(see illustration).
and engage it w i t h the
self-adjuster
mechanism. Refit the upper return spring.
37 Locate the bottom of the trailing shoe on
its anchor, then refit the bottom return spring
and lever the leading shoe onto the anchor.
38 Refit the steady spring and pin to the
leading shoe. Remove the elastic band from
the wheel cylinder.
39 Repeat the p r o c e d u r e on the remaining
side of the vehicle.
40 Refit the brake d r u m s as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 7. Check and if necessary adjust the
operation of the handbrake, as described in
Section 14.
41 A p p l y the brake pedal and handbrake
lever several times to settle the self-adjusting
m e c h a n i s m . With b o t h rear roadwheels
refitted and the rear of the vehicle still raised,
turn the wheels by hand to c h e c k that the
brake shoes are not binding.
should be renewed at the same time, to
ensure even and consistent
braking. New
brake pads should also be fitted.
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the car and s u p p o r t it on axle s t a n d s .
Remove the appropriate front roadwheel.
2 Slowly rotate the brake disc so that the full
area of both sides can be checked; remove the
brake pads if better access is required to the
inboard surface. Light scoring is normal in the
area swept by the brake pads, but if heavy
scoring or cracks are found, the disc must be
renewed.
35 Refit the self-adjuster mechanism to the
trailing shoe, making sure it is the correct way
round.
36 Locate the leading shoe on the backplate
5.34 T h e rear b r a k e s e l f - a d j u s t e r
mechanism
42 Lower the vehicle to the g r o u n d and
thoroughly check the operation of the braking
system.
Front brake disc inspection, removal
and refitting
A
Warning: Before starting
work,
refer
to the warning
at
the
beginning of Section 4 concerning
the dangers of asbestos dust.
Inspection
N o t e : If either disc requires
renewal,
BOTH
6.3 M e a s u r i n g t h e b r a k e d i s c t h i c k n e s s
with a micrometer
3 It is normal to find a lip of rust around the
disc's perimeter, and this can be scraped off if
required. If, however, a lip has formed due to
excessive wear of the brake pad swept area,
then the disc's thickness must be measured
using a micrometer (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Take
measurements at several places around the
d i s c , at the inside and o u t s i d e of the p a d
swept area. If the disc has worn at any point
to the specified minimum thickness or less,
the disc must be renewed.
4 If the disc is thought to be warped, it can be
checked for run-out. First make sure that the
t w o disc retaining studs are tight. Either use a
dial gauge mounted on any convenient fixed
point, while the disc is slowly rotated, or use
feeler blades to measure (at several points all
around the disc) the clearance between the
disc and a fixed point, such as the caliper
m o u n t i n g bracket (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If the
measurements obtained are at the specified
maximum or beyond, the disc is excessively
6.4 B r a k e d i s c r u n o u t m e a s u r e m e n t DTI g a u g e m e t h o d
Braking system
9»9
warped, and must be renewed. However, it is
worth checking first that the hub bearing is in
good condition.
5 C h e c k the disc for c r a c k s , especially
around the wheel bolt holes, and any other
wear or damage, and renew if necessary.
Removal
6 Remove the brake p a d s (Section 4) then
unbolt and remove the caliper m o u n t i n g
bracket f r o m the hub carrier. Alternatively,
leave the caliper a t t a c h e d to the m o u n t i n g
bracket and unbolt the bracket from the hub
carrier (see illustrations).
7 Unscrew and remove the two disc retaining
studs and w i t h d r a w the disc f r o m the hub
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If it is tight, lightly tap its
rear face with a hide or plastic mallet to free it
from the hub.
6.6a U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s . . .
6.6b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e caliper a n d
m o u n t i n g b r a c k e t f r o m t h e h u b carrier
6.7a U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e t h e d i s c
locating studs . . .
6.7b . . . a n d lift off t h e d i s c
handbrake lever and try again. If this is
unsuccessful, prise the cover from the inside
of the backplate, and use a pair of pliers to
d i s c o n n e c t the handbrake cable f r o m the
lever on the trailing shoe. Using a screwdriver
t h r o u g h one of the roadwheel bolt holes,
press the handbrake lever from the outside so
that it slides d o w n behind the trailing shoe
and retracts the shoes. It should now be
possible to remove the d r u m , however if the
d r u m is rusted to the hub, s c r e w t w o bolts
into the drum at the stud locations (the drum
threads are larger than the stud threads), and
progressively tighten them to force the drum
from the hub (see illustrations).
3 Brush all traces of brake dust f r o m the
drum and shoes, but avoid inhaling the dust,
as it is a health hazard.
4 Clean the outside of the drum, and check it
for obvious signs of damage. Renew the drum
if necessary.
5 Carefully examine the inside of the d r u m .
Light scoring of the friction surface is normal,
but if heavy scoring is found, the drum must
be renewed.
6 It is usual to find a lip of rust on the drum's
inboard edge, which is not in contact with the
shoe linings. This rust s h o u l d be s c r a p e d
away, otherwise it may cause the brake drum
to bind on the shoes when it is being removed
at a later date.
Refitting
8 Refitting is the reverse of the removal
procedure, noting the following points:
a) Ensure that the mating surfaces of the
disc and hub are clean.
b) If a new disc has been fitted, use a
suitable solvent to wipe any preservative
coating from the disc, before refitting the
caliper. Note that new brake pads should
be fitted when the disc is renewed.
c) Tighten all bolts to the specified
where given.
torque
7 Rear brake drum removal, inspection
and refitting
A
I
Warning: Before starting
work,
refer
to the warning
at
the
beginning of Section 4 concerning
the dangers of asbestos dust.
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
both rear r o a d w h e e l s . Fully release the
handbrake.
2 U n s c r e w and r e m o v e t h e t w o studs and
pull the d r u m f r o m the hub. If the d r u m is
binding on the brake shoes, back off the
h a n d b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t nut located on the
7.2a R e m o v i n g t h e d r u m s t u d s
Inspection
N o t e : If either drum requires renewal, BOTH
should be renewed at the same time, to
ensure even and consistent
braking. New
brake shoes should also be fitted.
7 If the d r u m is t h o u g h t to be excessively
w o r n or oval, its internal diameter m u s t be
measured at several points using an internal
micrometer. Take measurements in pairs, the
s e c o n d at right-angles to the first, and
7.2b Plastic c o v e r o n t h e inside of t h e
backplate
7.2c Using t w o b o l t s t o f o r c e t h e d r u m
from the hub
9*10 Braking system
8.4 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g c o n n e c t o r
f r o m the brake pad wear sensor
compare the two, to check for signs of ovality.
Provided that it d o e s not enlarge the d r u m
beyond the specified m a x i m u m diameter, it
may be possible to have the drum refinished
by skimming or grinding. If this is not possible,
the d r u m s on both sides must be r e n e w e d .
Note that if the drum is to be skimmed, BOTH
d r u m s must be refinished to maintain a
consistent internal diameter on both sides.
Refitting
8 If a new brake d r u m is to be f i t t e d , use a
suitable solvent to remove any preservative
c o a t i n g that may have been applied t o its
internal friction surfaces. Note that it may also
be necessary to shorten the adjuster strut
length, by rotating the strut wheel, to allow the
d r u m t o pass over the brake shoes (see
Section 5).
9 Refit the brake d r u m over the shoes and
o n t o the hub, then insert the t w o locating
studs and tighten securely.
10 Depress the f o o t b r a k e repeatedly to
e x p a n d the brake shoes against the d r u m ,
and c h e c k that normal pedal pressure is
restored.
11 Check and if necessary adjust the
handbrake cable as described in Section 14.
12 Refit the roadwheels, and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
8 Front brake caliper removal, overhaul and refitting
A
handling
dust.
^
Warning: Before starting
work,
refer
to
the
notes
at
the
beginning
of Sections
2 and 4
concerning
the
dangers
of
hydraulic
fluid
and
asbestos
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the appropriate front roadwheel.
2 To minimise fluid loss during the following
o p e r a t i o n s , fit a brake hose c l a m p to the
flexible brake hose running to the caliper.
Alternatively, remove the master cylinder fluid
reservoir c a p , and tighten it d o w n onto a
piece of p o l y t h e n e sheeting to obtain an
airtight seal.
3 Clean the area around the brake hose union
on the caliper, then loosen the union nut half a
turn.
4 Disconnect the wiring c o n n e c t o r f r o m the
brake p a d wear sensor c o n n e c t o r , and
release the wire f r o m the clip
(see
illustration).
5 Using a pair of pliers, unclip the anti-rattle
spring and remove it from the brake caliper.
6 Remove the end c a p s f r o m the guide
bushes to gain access to the caliper guide pin
bolts.
7 U n s c r e w and remove the caliper g u i d e
bolts, then lift the caliper over the brake pads
and away from the mounting bracket.
8 U n s c r e w the caliper f r o m the hose and
place it o n t h e w o r k b e n c h . Plug t h e hose
outlet to prevent loss of brake fluid.
9 Remove the brake pads from the mounting
bracket (refer to Section 4 if necessary).
10 Unbolt the caliper mounting bracket from
the hub carrier. Note that the bracket
mounting bolts are self-locking and should be
renewed whenever they are removed.
Overhaul
N o t e : Before commencing
work, ensure that
the appropriate
caliper
overhaul
kit is
obtained.
11 Clean the exterior of the caliper, then
mount it in a vice.
12 Place a small block of w o o d between the
caliper b o d y and the p i s t o n . Remove the
piston by applying a jet of c o m p r e s s e d air
(such as that produced by a tyre foot pump) to
the fluid inlet port.
Warning:
Protect
your
hands
and
eyes
when
using
compressed
air in this manner brake fluid may be ejected
under
pressure
when the piston pops out of its
bore.
13 Remove the dust seal f r o m the p i s t o n ,
then use a soft, blunt instrument (ie n o t a
screwdriver) to extract the piston seal f r o m
the caliper bore. U n s c r e w and r e m o v e the
bleed screw.
14 Thoroughly clean all c o m p o n e n t s , using
only methylated spirit or clean hydraulic fluid.
Never use mineral-based solvents s u c h as
petrol or paraffin, w h i c h will attack the
hydraulic system rubber components.
15 The caliper piston seal, the dust seal and
the bleed screw dust c a p , are only available
as part of a seal kit. Since the manufacturers
recommend that the piston seal and dust seal
are renewed whenever they are disturbed, all
of these components should be discarded on
d i s a s s e m b l y and new ones f i t t e d on
reassembly as a matter of course.
16 Carefully examine all parts of the caliper
assembly, looking for signs of wear or
damage. In particular, the cylinder bore and
piston must be free f r o m any signs of
scratches, corrosion or wear. If there is any
doubt about the condition of any part of the
A
caliper, the relevant part should be renewed.
Note that the piston surface is p l a t e d , and
m u s t n o t be polished w i t h emery or similar
abrasives to remove corrosion or scratches. In
a d d i t i o n , the pistons are m a t c h e d to the
caliper bores and can only be renewed as a
part of a complete caliper assembly.
17 C h e c k that b o t h g u i d e pins are in g o o d
c o n d i t i o n and u n d a m a g e d . They m u s t be a
reasonably tight sliding fit in the m o u n t i n g
bracket bores. Remove and clean them, then
apply some copper grease and refit t h e m . If
necessary, renew the rubber boots.
18 Use compressed air from the tyre p u m p
to blow clear the fluid passages.
A
Warning:
Wear eye
when using compressed
protection
air.
19 Before c o m m e n c i n g reassembly, ensure
that all components are spotlessly-clean and
dry.
20 Dip the new piston seal in clean hydraulic
fluid, and fit it to the groove inside the cylinder
bore, using your fingers only to manipulate it
into place.
21 Fit the new dust seal to the piston groove,
then smear clean hydraulic fluid over the
surfaces of the piston and cylinder bore.
Insert the piston into the cylinder bore with a
twisting action to ensure it enters the internal
seal correctly. With the piston fully entered,
locate the dust seal in the g r o o v e on the
caliper.
Refitting
22 Clean the mating surfaces, then refit the
caliper mounting bracket to the hub carrier.
Insert the new self-locking bolts and tighten to
the specified torque. Make sure the guide pins
are correctly fitted
23 Carefully screw the caliper onto the hose,
and moderately tighten the union nut.
24 Apply a little copper grease to the brake
pad backplates as described in Section 4, and
locate them on the mounting bracket
25 Locate the caliper over the brake pads,
then refit the guide bolts and tighten to the
specified torque while holding the pins
stationary with a further spanner. Note: Make
sure that the flexible brake hose is not twisted.
It must not touch any surrounding
components
throughout its movement from lock to lock.
26 Fully tighten the hose union nut to the
specified torque.
27 Refit the end caps to the guide bushes.
28 Refit the anti-rattle spring making sure
that its e n d s are correctly located in the
bracket holes.
29 Reconnect the brake pad wear sensor
wiring and secure it in the clip.
30 Remove the brake hose c l a m p or
polythene sheeting, and t o p up the brake fluid
level in the reservoir. Bleed the hydraulic
system as described in Section 2. Note that if
no other part of the system has been
d i s t u r b e d , it s h o u l d only be necessary to
bleed the relevant front circuit.
Braking system 9»11
b) Refit the brake shoes as described in
Section 5, and the brake drum as
described in Section 7.
c) Before refitting the roadwheel and
lowering the vehicle to the ground, bleed
the hydraulic system as described in
Section 2 . Note that if no other part of the
system has been disturbed, it should only
be necessary to bleed the relevant rear
circuit.
9.2 Rear w h e e l cylinder
9.5 Rear w h e e l cylinder m o u n t i n g b o l t s
31 Refit the roadwheel and lower the vehicle
to the ground.
32 Depress the brake pedal repeatedly to
bring the p a d s into c o n t a c t w i t h the brake
disc, and ensure that normal pedal pressure is
restored.
7 Withdraw both pistons and the spring from
the wheel cylinder. Unscrew and remove the
bleed screw.
8 Remove and d i s c a r d the rubber piston
seals and the dust covers. These should be
renewed as a matter of course, and are
available as part of an overhaul kit, which also
includes the bleed nipple dust cap.
9 Rear wheel cylinder •
removal, overhaul and refitting
A
handling
dust.
Warning: Before starting
work,
refer
to
the
notes
at
the
beginning
of Sections
2 and 4
concerning
the
dangers
of
hydraulic
fluid
and
asbestos
Removal
1 Remove the brake d r u m as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 7.
2 Remove the brake shoes as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 5. Alternatively, pull the upper ends of
the brake shoes apart so that the automatic
adjustment mechanism holds them away from
the wheel cylinder (see illustration).
3 To minimise fluid loss during the following
o p e r a t i o n s , fit a brake hose c l a m p to the
flexible brake hose running to the rear wheel
cylinder. Alternatively, remove the master cylinder fluid reservoir cap, and tighten it d o w n
onto a piece of polythene sheeting to obtain
an airtight seal.
4 Clean the brake b a c k p l a t e around the
wheel cylinder m o u n t i n g bolts and the
hydraulic pipe union, then unscrew the union
nut and disconnect the hydraulic pipe. Cover
the o p e n e n d s of the pipe and the master
cylinder to prevent dirt ingress.
9 Clean the c o m p o n e n t s t h o r o u g h l y , using
only methylated spirit or clean brake fluid.
10 Check the condition of the cylinder bore
and piston surfaces w h i c h must be free of
scratches, scoring and corrosion. Renew the
complete wheel cylinder if there is any doubt.
11 Ensure that all components are clean and
dry. The pistons, spring and seals should be
fitted wet, using hydraulic fluid as a lubricant.
12 Fit the seals to the pistons, ensuring that
they are the correct way round. Use only your
fingers to manipulate the seals into position.
13 Fit the first piston to the cylinder, taking
care not to distort the seal. If the original
pistons are being re-used, the marks made on
dismantling should be used to ensure that the
pistons are refitted to their original bores.
14 Refit the spring and the second piston.
15 A p p l y a smear of rubber grease to the
exposed end of each piston and to the dust
cover sealing lips, then fit the dust covers to
each end of the wheel cylinder.
Refitting
16 Refitting is a reversal of removal, bearing
in mind the following points:
a) Tighten the mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
5 Unscrew
the
mounting
bolts
(see
illustration) then withdraw the wheel cylinder
from the backplate.
10 Master cylinder removal, overhaul and refitting
A
^
Warning: Before starting
work,
refer
to
the
note
at
the
beginning
of
Section
2
concerning
the
dangers
of
handling hydraulic
fluid.
Removal
Right-hand drive models
1 Loosen the clips and disconnect the throttle
body air duct from the air cleaner. Disconnect
the crankcase ventilation hose from the duct,
then unscrew the nuts and remove the duct
from the top of the throttle body.
2 U n d o the s c r e w and remove the relay
cover.
3 U n s c r e w the t w o bolts holding the relay
bracket to the bulkhead, then disconnect the
small wiring plug beneath it, and m o v e the
bracket to one side. Make sure that any
electrical terminals are kept insulated from the
surrounding components.
4 Release the retaining stud and pull out the
lining from the right-hand side of the bulkhead
for access to the master cylinder.
5 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the low fluid
level unit, then unscrew and remove the cap
from the top of the reservoir.
6 S y p h o n or d r a w the brake fluid f r o m the
reservoir. N o t e : Do not syphon the fluid by
mouth, as it is poisonous; use a syringe or an
old poultry baster. Place s o m e cloth rags
beneath the master cylinder to catch any spilt
fluid. Alternatively, fit hose clamps to the two
supply pipes.
7 On m o d e l s where the reservoir is located
remotely
on
the
bulkhead,
using
a
screwdriver, carefully lever the fluid s u p p l y
pipes from the top of the master cylinder. On
models where the reservoir is located on the
master cylinder, loosen the clip and
disconnect the clutch fluid supply pipe from
the the reservoir (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Plug the
pipe(s) to prevent entry of dust and dirt.
Overhaul
Left-hand drive models
N o t e : Before commencing
work, obtain the
appropriate wheel cylinder overhaul kit.
6 Remove both rubber dust covers from the
grooves in the wheel cylinder, then use paint
or similar to mark one of the pistons so that
the pistons are not interchanged
on
reassembly.
8 Remove the master cylinder fluid reservoir
c a p , and s y p h o n or d r a w the hydraulic fluid
from the reservoir. N o t e : Do not syphon the
fluid by mouth, as it is poisonous; use a syringe
or an old poultry baster. Alternatively, open
any convenient bleed screw in the system, and
gently pump the brake pedal to expel the fluid
10.7 C l u t c h f l u i d s u p p l y p i p e o n t h e b r a k e
f l u i d reservoir
9»12 Braking system
adjusted by turning the nut at the end of the
servo unit pushrod (see illustration).
K-0
Overhaul
14 If the master cylinder is faulty, it must be
r e n e w e d . Repair kits are not available f r o m
FIAT dealers.
15 The only items that can be renewed are
the m o u n t i n g seals for the fluid reservoir;
obtain new ones if necessary.
Refitting
16 Clean the mating surfaces of the master
cylinder and vacuum servo unit, then locate a
new gasket on the mounting studs.
17 Refit the master cylinder and secure with
the nuts tightened securely.
18 Wipe clean the brake pipe unions, t h e n
refit them to the correct master cylinder ports,
as noted before removal, and tighten the
union nuts securely.
Right-hand drive modelsz
10.13 C r o s s - s e c t i o n a l v i e w of v a c u u m s e r v o unit
A 22.45 to 22.65 mm
through a t u b e connected to the screw (see
Section 2). Disconnect the wiring connector
f r o m the brake fluid level sender unit, and
position the reservoir cap to one side.
9 Carefully prise the fluid reservoir from the
seals and release it from the top of the master
cylinder.
All m o d e l s
10 W i p e clean the area a r o u n d the brake
pipe unions on the master cylinder. Make a
n o t e of t h e c o r r e c t f i t t e d p o s i t i o n s of the
unions, then unscrew the union nuts and
carefully withdraw the pipes. Where adapters
are bolted to the master cylinder, unscrew the
unions from the adapters. Plug or tape over
the pipe ends and master cylinder orifices, to
minimise the loss of brake fluid, and to
prevent the entry of dirt into the system. Wash
off any spilt fluid immediately with cold water.
B Adjustment
nut
Cut the finger tips from an
old rubber glove and
secure
them over the open ends of
the brake pipes with
elastic
bands - this will help to minimise
fluid
loss
and
prevent
the
ingress
of
contaminants.
HAYNES
11 U n s c r e w and remove the nuts securing
the master cylinder to the vacuum servo unit,
then withdraw the unit from the engine c o m partment.
12 Where applicable, recover the gasket
f r o m the rear of the master cylinder, and
discard it. Obtain a new one.
13 With the master cylinder removed, check
that the distance b e t w e e n the e n d of the
v a c u u m servo unit p u s h r o d and the master
cylinder mating surface is as s h o w n in the
diagram. If necessary, the distance may be
19 Smear a little brake fluid on the s u p p l y
pipes then press t h e m firmly into the t o p of
the master cylinder.
20 Remove the hose c l a m p s where f i t t e d ,
then fill the master cylinder reservoir with new
fluid, and bleed the c o m p l e t e hydraulic
system as described in Section 2.
21 Screw on the cap and reconnect the low
fluid level unit wiring.
22 Refit the lining to the b u l k h e a d , and
secure with the stud.
23 Refit the relay bracket and tighten the
bolts. Reconnect the small wiring plug.
24 Refit the relay cover.
25 Refit the air duct to the throttle body and
air cleaner.
Left-hand drive models
26 Locate new mounting seals in the cylinder
apertures, then smear some hydraulic fluid on
the reservoir port extensions and press the
reservoir firmly into position.
27 Reconnect the wiring to the brake fluid
level sender unit.
28 Refill the master cylinder reservoir with
new fluid, and bleed the complete hydraulic
system as described in Section 2.
11 Brake pedalremoval and refitting
<2K
Removal
Right-hand drive models
11.2a A c c e l e r a t o r c a b l e a t t a c h m e n t t o t h e
t o p of t h e pedal e x t e n s i o n a r m
11.2b A c c e l e r a t o r p e d a l m o u n t i n g nuts
N o t e : If it is required to remove the pedal
bracket, proceed as described in Section 12
for the removal of the vacuum servo unit.
1 Unclip and remove the lower fusebox trim
panel located beneath the right-hand side of
the facia.
2 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the
t o p of the accelerator pedal extension arm,
then unscrew the nuts and remove the
accelerator pedal (see illustrations).
Braking system
9*13
1 Pedal bracket
2 Brake pedal
3 Vacuum servo
pushrod
4 Link
5 Relay
11.5 Pedal pivot b o l t (A) a n d c l u t c h pedal
r e t u r n s p r i n g (B)
3 Extract the split pin, and d i s c o n n e c t the
c l u t c h master cylinder p u s h r o d from the
clutch pedal.
4 Remove the s t o p - l i g h t s w i t c h from the
pedal bracket with reference to Section 17.
5 Unscrew the pedal pivot bolt and withdraw
it slowly to the right until it is possible to
remove the c l u t c h pedal from the bracket.
Disconnect the clutch pedal return spring (see
illustration).
6 Extract the split pin, and disconnect the link
from the arm on the brake pedal.
7 Withdraw the pivot bolt and lower the brake
pedal from the bracket.
8 If necessary,
remove the link
and
intermediate lever as follows. Extract the split
p i n , and d i s c o n n e c t the servo unit p u s h r o d
from the intermediate lever. Unscrew the pivot
bolt and remove the assembly from the pedal
bracket.
9 Clean and examine the c o m p o n e n t s for
wear and d a m a g e (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Renew
as necessary.
Left-hand drive models
10 Extract the split pin, and d i s c o n n e c t the
b r a k e servo unit p u s h r o d f r o m t h e pin on
the brake pedal.
11 Position the clutch pedal for access to the
brake pedal pivot bolt. Unscrew the bolt and
withdraw the pedal from the bracket.
12 Recover the bushes, spacer and washers
as necessary.
13 Clean and examine the c o m p o n e n t s for
wear and damage. Renew as necessary.
Refitting
14 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
apply a little grease to the pedal bushes
before reassembling them.
12 Vacuum servo unit testing, removal and refitting
Testing
1 To test the operation of the servo unit,
depress the f o o t b r a k e several times to
exhaust the v a c u u m , then start the engine
whilst keeping the pedal firmly depressed. As
the engine starts, there should be a noticeable
11.9 B r a k e pedal c o m p o n e n t s
give in the brake pedal as the vacuum builds
up. Allow the engine to run for at least t w o
minutes, then switch it off. If the brake pedal
is now depressed it should feel normal, but
further applications should result in the pedal
feeling firmer, with the pedal
stroke
decreasing with each application.
2 If the servo does not operate as described,
inspect the servo unit c h e c k valve as
described in Section 13.
3 If the servo unit still fails to operate
satisfactorily, the fault lies within the unit itself.
Repairs to the unit are not possible - if faulty,
the servo unit must be renewed.
Removal
Right-hand drive models
4 Remove the facia panel from inside the car
as described in Chapter 1 1 .
5 Loosen the clips and disconnect the throttle
body air duct from the air cleaner. Disconnect
the crankcase ventilation hose from the duct,
then unscrew the nuts and remove the d u c t
from the top of the throttle body.
6 Undo the s c r e w and r e m o v e the relay
cover.
7 Unscrew the t w o bolts holding the relay
bracket to the bulkhead, then disconnect the
small wiring plug beneath it, and m o v e the
bracket to one side. M a k e sure that any
electrical terminals are kept insulated from the
surrounding components.
8 Release the retaining stud and pull out the
lining from the right-hand side of the bulkhead
for access to the master cylinder.
9 Unscrew the t w o nuts securing the brake
master cylinder to the v a c u u m servo unit.
Carefully w i t h d r a w the master cylinder f r o m
the servo unit taking care not to b e n d the
brake pipes excessively. Move it just enough
to provide r o o m to remove t h e servo unit.
There is no need to remove the reservoir cap
or d i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the low fluid
warning unit.
10 Release the clip and m o v e the fuel
injection wiring to one side, then carefully
remove the vacuum hose from the servo unit.
The use of a screwdriver may be needed to do
this.
11 Working inside the car, undo the screws
and remove the footrest located next to the
clutch pedal.
12 U n s c r e w and r e m o v e the c l a m p bolt
securing the steering inner c o l u m n t o the
steering gear pinion.
13 Remove the steering column as described
in Chapter 10.
14 Disconnect the wiring from the stop-light
switch located on the brake pedal bracket.
15 U n s c r e w the accelerator pedal bracket
retaining nuts, and unhook the clutch pedal
return spring.
16 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the
pedal, and withdraw the pedal from the car.
17 Extract the rubber plug f r o m the bonnet
opening lever, then disconnect the cable.
18 Extract the split pin and d i s c o n n e c t the
pushrod from the clutch pedal.
19 Release the wiring and support from the
pedal bracket.
20 Extract the split pin and d i s c o n n e c t the
servo unit pushrod from the brake pedal link.
21 U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g nuts a n d w i t h draw the pedal bracket and servo unit from
inside the car.
22 With the pedal bracket and servo unit on
the bench, unscrew the nuts and separate the
servo unit from the bracket. Make sure that the
washer remains in position on the end of the
servo pushrod.
Left-hand drive models
23 W o r k i n g in the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ,
unscrew the nuts securing the master cylinder
to the vacuum servo unit. Carefully move the
master cylinder away f r o m the servo unit
t a k i n g care not to b e n d the brake pipes
excessively. M o v e it just enough to provide
r o o m t o remove the servo unit. There is no
need to r e m o v e t h e reservoir c a p or
d i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the low fluid
warning unit.
24 Carefully lever out the vacuum servo unit
c h e c k valve f r o m the servo unit w i t h a
screwdriver.
9»14 Braking system
25 Working inside the car, reach up over the
pedal bracket and disconnect the accelerator
cable from the t o p of the accelerator pedal.
Unscrew the nuts and remove the accelerator
pedal and plate.
26 Extract the retainers and move the floor
covering to one side. Note: The retainers are
destroyed
during removal, and must be
renewed.
27 Extract the split pin and d i s c o n n e c t the
servo pushrod from the pin on the pedal.
28 Unscrew the mounting nuts securing the
servo unit to the bulkhead.
29 W o r k i n g in the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ,
withdraw the servo unit from the car.
Refitting
30 C h e c k and if necessary adjust the
distance b e t w e e n the end of the v a c u u m
servo unit p u s h r o d and the master cylinder
mating surface as described in Section 10.
31 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
apply a little grease to the brake pedal link
and c l u t c h pedal pin before reconnecting
t h e m . Finally, test the v a c u u m servo unit as
described at the beginning of this Section.
13 Vacuum servo unit
check valve removal, testing and refitting
^
|§
Removal
1 On s o m e m o d e l s the valve is an integral
part of the servo unit vacuum hose and is not
available separately. On other m o d e l s the
valve is fitted separately in the vacuum hose
or in the servo unit itself.
2 To remove the valve from the hose, first
loosen the clips and disconnect the air inlet
duct from between the air cleaner and throttle
body. Disconnect the vacuum hoses from each
end of the valve and remove the valve. Note
which way round it is fitted to ensure correct
refitting. The valve should be marked with an
arrow pointing towards the inlet manifold.
3 To remove the valve from the servo unit, first
d i s c o n n e c t the v a c u u m hose, then carefully
lever the valve from the rubber grommet in the
servo unit. Remove the rubber grommet.
4 To remove the complete vacuum hose, first
remove the throttle body air duct from the air
cleaner, then remove the duct from the top of the
throttle body. Remove the relay cover, and move
the bracket to one side. Release the retaining
stud and pull out the lining from the right-hand
side of the bulkhead. Release the wiring from the
clip and pull out the vacuum hose from the servo
unit. Loosen the clip and disconnect the vacuum
hose from the inlet manifold.
Testing"
5 The valve may be t e s t e d by b l o w i n g
through it in both directions. Air should flow
through the valve in one direction only - when
blown through from the servo unit end of the
valve. Renew the valve if this is not the case.
6 Examine the servo unit rubber sealing
grommet and hose(s) linking the main hose to
the inlet m a n i f o l d for signs of d a m a g e or
deterioration, and renew as necessary.
Refitting
7 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but make
sure that the valve is fitted the correct way
r o u n d , w i t h the arrow pointing t o w a r d s the
engine inlet manifold.
14 Handbrake checking and adjustment
%
15.3 H a n d b r a k e ' o n ' w a r n i n g l a m p s w i t c h
Checking
1 Apply the handbrake by pulling it through
three clicks of the ratchet m e c h a n i s m and
check that this locks the rear wheels, holding
the vehicle stationary on an incline. If not, the
handbrake mechanism is need of adjustment.
Adjustment
2 C h o c k the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
3 Release the gaiter from the centre console
and remove it from the handbrake lever.
4 Unscrew the adjustment nut located under
the handbrake lever until the cable is slack.
5 Select neutral, then start the engine and
allow it to idle. Fully depress the brake pedal at
least 30 times. This will operate the rear brake
self-adjusting m e c h a n i s m and ensure the
brake shoes are set at their normal position.
6 Pull the h a n d b r a k e lever t h r o u g h three
clicks of the ratchet mechanism and leave it in
this position.
7 Tighten the a d j u s t m e n t nut until the
handbrake is fully applied at three or four
clicks, and the rear wheels are locked.
8 Release the handbrake lever and check that
the rear wheels are free to turn. There should
be no binding or dragging.
9 Reapply the handbrake and c h e c k the
adjustment again.
10 Refit the gaiter and lower the car to the
ground.
15 Handbrake leverremoval and refitting
^
^
Removal
1 Release the gear lever gaiter from the centre
console, then pull the gear lever k n o b and
gaiter together from the top of the gear lever.
2 C h o c k the rear r o a d w h e e l s , then fully
unscrew the adjustment nut located beneath
the handbrake lever.
3 Disconnect the wiring from the handbrakeon warning lamp switch, then undo the screw
and remove the switch (see illustration).
4 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support it
on axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
5 W o r k i n g under the car, unscrew the nuts
and remove the exhaust heatshield from its
location beneath the handbrake lever.
6 Unscrew the bolts securing the handbrake
lever to the u n d e r b o d y . Also unscrew the
bolts securing the handbrake cable guide to
the underbody.
7 W o r k i n g inside the car, w i t h d r a w the
handbrake lever upwards from the floor.
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but adjust
the handbrake as described in Section 14.
16 Handbrake cables removal and refitting
Removal
1 There is one primary h a n d b r a k e cable
b e t w e e n the lever and equaliser, and t w o
secondary cables between the equaliser and
rear brake shoes.
2 C h o c k the front wheels, then j a c k up the
rear of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
Primary cable
3 Release the gaiter from the centre console
and remove it from the handbrake lever.
4 Fully unscrew the adjustment nut located
beneath the h a n d b r a k e lever. Remove the
washer and the spring w h i c h operates the
warning light switch.
5 W o r k i n g under the car, unscrew the nuts
and remove the exhaust heatshield from its
location beneath the handbrake lever.
6 Unbolt and remove the h a n d b r a k e cable
guide from the underbody.
7 U n h o o k the s e c o n d a r y cables f r o m the
equaliser bar (see illustration).
8 Remove the rubber g r o m m e t f r o m the
underbody, then withdraw the primary cable
from under the car.
9 Unscrew the nut and remove the equaliser
bar from the primary cable.
Secondary cables
10 Release the gaiter from the centre console
and remove it from the handbrake lever.
11 U n s c r e w the a d j u s t m e n t nut located
under the handbrake lever until the cable is
slack.
Braking system
16.7 H a n d b r a k e c a b l e equaliser bar
16.14a Rear u n d e r b o d y s u p p o r t f o r t h e
handbrake cables
12 Working under the car, unscrew the nuts
and remove the exhaust heatshield f r o m its
location beneath the handbrake lever.
13 U n h o o k the s e c o n d a r y cables f r o m the
equaliser bar.
14 Release the cables from the support clips
on the underbody (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Where
necessary, use a screwdriver to prise the clips
apart.
15 Prise the covers from the apertures on the
inside the rear brake b a c k p l a t e s (see
illustration).
16 Using a pair of pliers, u n h o o k the inner
cables from the levers on the trailing shoes
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note the location of the
springs on the inner cables. If difficulty is
experienced, remove the rear brake shoes as
described in Section 5.
17 Pull the outer cables from the rear brake
b a c k p l a t e s (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If they are
rusted in position, remove the rear brake
shoes as described in Section 5, then use a
thin punch to drive them out.
2 If adjustment is required, pull the plunger
fully out - the switch then self-adjusts as the
brake pedal is applied and released.
Refitting
18 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
adjust t h e h a n d b r a k e as d e s c r i b e d in S e c tion 14.
17 Stop-light switch adjustment, removal
and refitting
1
Adjustment
1 The switch plunger operates on a ratchet.
9*15
16.14b H a n d b r a k e c a b l e s u p p o r t o n t h e
trailing a r m s
Removal
3 Ensure that the ignition is switched to OFF.
4 Unclip and remove the lower fusebox trim
panel located beneath the right-hand side of
the facia.
5 Disconnect the wiring plug from the switch.
6 Twist the s w i t c h a n t i - c l o c k w i s e t h r o u g h
about 60°, and withdraw the switch from the
pedal bracket. If necessary, use a spanner on
the hexagon section. Note the position of the
spacer and fitting bush.
Refitting
7 Depress the brake pedal and hold it in this
position.
8 Fit the bush and spacer over the end of the
switch, then insert the switch into its mounting
bracket. Rotate the s w i t c h b o d y c l o c k w i s e
t h r o u g h 60° until the locating lug is felt to
engage in its recess (see illustration).
9 Release the brake pedal and allow it to rest
against the s w i t c h spacer tab - this adjusts
the position of the s w i t c h b o d y inside the
bush.
10 Now depress the brake pedal again - this
has the effect of breaking off the spacer tab
and fixes the position of the switch inside the
bush. Discard the spacer tab.
11 Reconnect the wiring plug to the switch,
and refit the lower fusebox trim panel.
12 S w i t c h on the ignition and test the
operation of the brake lights.
16.15 Cover for a c c e s s t o t h e h a n d b r a k e
c a b l e a t t a c h m e n t o n t h e trailing b r a k e
shoe
18 Rear brake pressure
proportioning valve removal and refitting
N o t e : Adjustment
of a new valve requires
special tool only available at a FIAT dealer.
a
Removal
1 C h o c k the front wheels, then j a c k up the
rear of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
17.8 B r a k e light s w i t c h a s s e m b l y
16.16 U n h o o k t h e c a b l e e n d f r o m t h e
b r a k e s h o e lever (arrowed)
16.17 H a n d b r a k e c a b l e a t t a c h m e n t t o t h e
rear b r a k e b a c k p l a t e s
1 Hexagonal section
2 Bush
3 Spacer
4 Mounting bracket
5 Locating lug
9*16 Braking system
2 Unbolt the exhaust rear a n d intermediate
mountings from the underbody.
3 Unbolt the heat shield for access to the rear
brake pressure proportioning valve.
4 U n s c r e w t h e c a p from the brake fluid
reservoir and tighten it d o w n onto a piece of
polythene sheeting. This will help reduce the
loss of fluid f r o m t h e s y s t e m . Also place a
container beneath the valve to catch spilt fluid.
5 Identify the pipe locations o n t h e valve,
then unscrew the union nuts and disconnect
them. If possible, plug the ends of the pipes t o
prevent loss of fluid.
6 Disconnect the spring from the lever on t o p
of the valve.
7 Unscrew the mounting bolts and withdraw
the valve f r o m under t h e vehicle ( s e e
illustration).
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but bleed
the hydraulic system as described in Section 2,
and have the valve adjusted by a FIAT dealer.
19 Anti-lock braking system
(ABS) components removal a n d refitting
Caution:
Disconnect
the battery
before
disconnecting
any ABS system
hydraulic
union and do not reconnect
the
battery
until after the hydraulic
system has been
reconnected
and the fluid reservoir
topped
up. Failure to take this precaution
could
lead to air entering the hydraulic unit. New
hydraulic units are supplied pre-filled
with
brake fluid.
N o t e : The manufacturers
state that the
operation
of the ABS system should be
checked by a FIAT dealer using special test
equipment
after
refitting
any of the
components in this Section.
Electro-hydraulic
control
unit
1 The electro-hydraulic control unit is located
on the left-hand side of the engine compartment. The ECU and recycling p u m p are also
part of the control unit.
2 Except on 1.3 and 1.4 litre models, remove
the air inlet duct from between the air cleaner
and throttle body, by loosening the clips and
also disconnecting the crankcase ventilation
hose.
3 Remove t h e battery a n d battery tray
(Chapter 5A), then unbolt a n d remove t h e
battery m o u n t i n g bracket. M o v e t h e relay
holder b o x t o o n e side after removing the
cover and unscrewing the mounting bolts.
4 Unscrew and remove the filler cap from the
top of the brake fluid reservoir, then syphon or
draw out the hydraulic fluid. Alternatively, fit
hose c l a m p s t o t h e hoses a t t a c h e d to the
bottom of the reservoir.
5 Unbolt the fluid reservoir from the bulkhead
and position it safely to one side.
6 Remove the t w o fuses located on the side
of t h e f u s e b o x on the left-hand side of t h e
25 Release t h e wiring from t h e s u p p o r t on
the b o t t o m of the front suspension strut and
remove the front wheel sensor.
Refitting
L_
J*
.
1
18.7 Rear b r a k e p r e s s u r e p r o p o r t i o n i n g
valve m o u n t i n g b o l t s
b u l k h e a d . U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g nut, and
move the fusebox to one side.
7 Identify all the brake pipes attached to the
hydraulic unit, then unscrew the union nuts
and pull out t h e pipes so that they are just
clear of t h e unit. Ideally, a split brake pipe
spanner should be used to unscrew the nuts.
8 U n s c r e w the front m o u n t i n g nut a n d t h e
side mounting bolt.
9 Pull up the locking device and disconnect
the wiring, then withdraw the electro-hydraulic
control unit from the engine compartment.
10 Using an Allen key, unscrew the bolts and
remove the mounting bracket from the unit.
Refitting
11 Refit the mounting bracket and tighten the
bolts.
12 Refit the electro-hydraulic control unit in
the engine compartment and tighten the nut
and bolt.
13 Reconnect the wiring and secure with the
locking device.
14 R e c o n n e c t the brake pipes a n d tighten
securely. Do not overtighten them.
15 Refit the fusebox and tighten the nut, then
refit the t w o side fuses.
16 Refit the fluid reservoir to the bulkhead.
17 Refit the battery m o u n t i n g bracket a n d
tighten the mounting bolts. Refit the relay box.
18 Refit the battery and tray (Chapter 5A).
19 Except on 1.3 and 1.4 litre models, refit the
air inlet duct and crankcase ventilation hose.
20 Fill the fluid reservoir with fresh fluid (see
Weekly Checks).
21 Bleed the complete hydraulic system as
described in Section 2. Have the operation of
the ABS system checked by a FIAT dealer at
the earliest possible opportunity.
Front
wheel
sensor
Removal
22 A p p l y t h e h a n d b r a k e , then jack up the
front of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove the appropriate front wheel.
23 At t h e rear left-hand side of the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t , d i s c o n n e c t t h e front wheel
sensor wiring at the fusebox. Feed the wiring
through into the front wheel arch area.
24 Using an Allen key, unscrew the mounting
bolt, then withdraw the sensor from the hub
carrier.
26 Ensure that the sensor a n d hub carrier
location are clean, then insert the sensor and
secure with the bolt.
27 Locate the wiring in the support and feed
it through into the engine compartment.
28 Reconnect the wiring at the fusebox.
29 Using a feeler blade, c h e c k that t h e
clearance between the wheel sensor and
the serrated wheel on the front driveshaft is
0.9 m m ± 0.4 m m . The clearance is not
adjustable; if outside the tolerance, check the
sensor and serrated wheel for damage.
30 Refit the wheel and lower the vehicle to
the ground.
Rear wheel
sensor
Removal
31 Chock the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle a n d s u p p o r t it on axie
stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove the appropriate rear wheel.
32 Remove the rear seat cushion as
described in Chapter 1 1 , Section 19.
33 Lift t h e s o u n d proofing material, then
d i s c o n n e c t t h e sensor wiring on t h e
appropriate side.
34 If removing the r i g h t - h a n d side wheel
sensor, unbolt the fuel filter cover under the
rear of the car.
35 Prise out the rubber g r o m m e t a n d
withdraw the sensor wiring from under the car.
36 Remove the brake drum with reference to
Section 7. This is not strictly necessary for the
removal of t h e sensor unless it is rusted in
position, but it is necessary to check the gap
between the sensor and serrated wheel on the
hub during refitting.
37 Using an Allen key, unscrew the mounting
bolt, then withdraw the sensor from the rear
stub axle body and remove from the car.
Refitting
38 Ensure that the sensor and rear stub axle
b o d y are clean, then insert t h e sensor a n d
secure with the bolt.
39 Using a feeler blade, c h e c k that t h e
clearance between the wheel sensor and the
serrated wheel on the rear hub is 0.9 m m ±
0.4" m m . The clearance is not adjustable; if
outside the tolerance, check the sensor and
serrated wheel for damage.
40 Refit t h e brake d r u m w i t h reference t o
Section 7.
41 Feed the wiring through the floor into the
car, and reposition the rubber grommet.
42 On the right-hand side, refit the fuel filter
cover.
43 Reconnect the wiring located beneath the
seat c u s h i o n , a n d refit the s o u n d p r o o f i n g .
Refit the rear seat cushion with reference t o
Chapter 1 1 , Section 19.
44 Refit the rear wheel and lower the car t o
the ground.
8»1
Chapter 8
Driveshafts
Contents
Driveshaft gaiter check
See Chapter 1, Section 10
Driveshaft overhaul and rubber gaiter renewal
3
Driveshafts - removal and refitting
2
General information
Intermediate shaft - removal, inspection and refitting
1
4
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
experience
|k
^
Fairly easy, suitable
for beginner with
s o m e experience
| k
^
g^
Fairly d i f f i c u l t
|k
Difficult, suitable for
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
|k
^
g^
Very difficult,
^
suitable for expert DIY
^
or professional
Specifications
General
Type
Damping weight position:
1.2 and 1.4 litre models
1.6 litre models:
Early models
Later models
1.8 litre models
Inner gaiter bearing position (1.6 litre models):
Left-hand driveshaft
Right-hand driveshaft
Unequal-length, solid steel shafts, splined to inner and outer constant
velocity joints. Intermediate shaft with support bearing on 1.8 litre
models with equal length driveshafts.
201 m m from inner end of driveshaft
Either 290 to 295 m m , or 292 to 297 m m from inner end of driveshaft
Recess on driveshaft
Recess on driveshaft
Either 133 or 135 m m from inner end of driveshaft
Either 108 or 110 m m from inner end of driveshaft
Lubrication
Lubricant type
FIAT specification grease, supplied with gaiter repair kit
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibf ft
Hub^driveshaft) nut (M22)
Intermediate shaft damping weight
Intermediate shaft mounting bracket
Suspension strut-to-hub carrier bolts
Track-rod balljoint to hub carrier
Wheel bolts
240
7
49
70
40
86
177
5
36
52
30
63
8*2 Driveshafts
1 General information
Power is transmitted from the differential to
the roadwheels by the driveshafts, via inboard
and outboard constant velocity (CV) joints.
An intermediate shaft, with its own support
bearing is fitted b e t w e e n the transmission
output and right-hand driveshaft on 1.8 litre
m o d e l s . This has the effect of equalising
driveshaft angles at all suspension positions
and reduces driveshaft flexing, w h i c h
improves directional stability, particularly
under acceleration.
The outer Rzeppa t y p e CV joints allow
smooth transmission of drive to the wheels at
all steering and suspension angles. Drive is
t r a n s m i t t e d by means of a n u m b e r of steel
balls that run in grooves b e t w e e n the t w o
halves of the joint.
O n 1.2 and 1.4 litre m o d e l s , and 1.6 litre
automatic transmission models, the inboard
CV joint is of tripod type; drive is transmitted
a c r o s s the joint by m e a n s of three rollers,
m o u n t e d on t h e driveshaft in a t r i p o d
a r r a n g e m e n t , w h i c h is free t o slide in the
g r o o v e d c u p . On 1.6 litre m o d e l s w i t h
manual transmission, the inboard CV joint is
similar to that of the 1.2 and 1.4 litre models,
except that the tripod and rollers are located
directly in the differential sun gears, and the
rubber gaiters do not rotate w i t h the driveshaft. The gaiters are secured to the t r a n s m i s s i o n side f l a n g e s by c l i p s . On 1.8 litre
models, the inboard CV joints are of constant
velocity t y p e , like t h e outer j o i n t s , a n d are
bolted to drive flanges on the left-hand side
of the t r a n s m i s s i o n and on t h e r i g h t - h a n d
end of the intermediate shaft.
2.3 R e m o v i n g t h e driveshaft s e c u r i n g nut
(hub nut)
2.6 E x t r a c t i n g t h e driveshaft f r o m t h e h u b
carrier
Both driveshafts are splined at their outer
ends, to accept the wheel hubs, and are
threaded so that the hubs can be fastened to
the driveshafts by means of a large, staked nut.
trolley jack, then unscrew and remove the
bolts securing the hub carrier to the bottom of
the strut (see Chapter 10). Note w h i c h way
round the bolts are f i t t e d , and note the
location of the spacers.
2
Driveshafts removal and refitting
N o t e : A balljoint
separator
tool
required to separate the steering
end from the hub carrier.
will be
track-rod
Removal
1 Remove
the
wheel
trim
from
the
appropriate wheel, then loosen the driveshaft
securing nut w i t h the vehicle resting on its
wheels and the handbrake firmly applied. The
nut is very tight and an extension bar may be
necessary to loosen it. Also loosen the wheel
bolts half a turn.
The joint rubber gaiters are p a c k e d w i t h
grease, to provide permanent lubrication. If
wear is d e t e c t e d in the joint, it can be
d e t a c h e d f r o m the driveshaft and r e n e w e d .
Normally, the CV joints do not require
additional lubrication, unless they have been
overhauled or the rubber gaiters have been
d a m a g e d , allowing the grease to b e c o m e
contaminated. Refer to Chapter 1, Section 10,
for guidance on checking the condition of the
driveshaft gaiters.
2 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the a p p r o p r i a t e roadwheel. Note that
i m p r o v e d a c c e s s t o t h e driveshaft may be
gained by removing the wheel arch liner from
under the relevant front wing.
3 Unscrew and remove the driveshaft securing
nut (hub nut) and discard it - a new one must
be used on refitting (see illustration).
4 U n s c r e w the nut securing the steering
track-rod end to the hub carrier steering arm.
Using a balljoint removal t o o l , separate the
track-rod end from the arm.
5 S u p p o r t the suspension lower arm with a
2.8a R e m o v i n g t h e driveshaft inner j o i n t
tripod from the transmission
2.8b Driveshaft inner j o i n t t r i p o d s
removed f r o m the transmission
6 Pull out the top of the hub carrier and lower
the jack at the same time. Take care not to
stretch the hydraulic brake hose. Press the
driveshaft f r o m the splined hub (see
illustration). If it is tight, use a mallet to drive
out the driveshaft.
1.2 a n d 1.4 l i t r e m o d e l s a n d 1.6 l i t r e
models (automatic transmission)
7 Position a container beneath the t r a n s mission to catch spilt oil/fluid. Lever out the
driveshaft, using a suitable lever and piece of
thin w o o d to protect the transmission casing.
Withdraw the driveshaft from the car.
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s ( m a n u a l t r a n s m i s s i o n )
8 Position a container beneath the transmission
to catch spilt oil. Loosen the clip and release the
driveshaft gaiter from the transmission side
flange. There is no need to remove the flange
bolted to the left-hand side of the transmission.
Carefully withdraw the driveshaft inner joint
tripod from the transmission differential sun
gear, then withdraw the driveshaft from the car
(see illustrations).
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
9 Using a long extension and Allen key,
unscrew and remove the bolts securing the
driveshaft inner joint to the transmission (LHS)
or intermediate (RHS) drive flange (see
illustration). Withdraw the driveshaft from the
car.
2.9 On 1.8 litre m o d e l s , u n s c r e w t h e
driveshaft Allen b o l t s ( r i g h t - h a n d
driveshaft s h o w n )
Driveshafts 8»3
Refitting
1.2 a n d 1.4 l i t r e m o d e l s a n d 1.6 l i t r e
models (automatic transmission)
10 Before inserting the driveshaft, check the
condition of the oil seal in the transmission
casing, and if necessary renew it with reference
to Chapter 7A or 7B. Briefly, the work involves
unbolting the side flange, hooking out the old
011 seal, then driving in the new oil seal using a
suitable socket or metal tube on the hard outer
surface, and finally refitting the flange.
11 Carefully insert the inner end of the
driveshaft so that it engages the splines of the
differential gears, then press it firmly inwards
until the circlip is felt to engage the groove in
the gear.
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s ( m a n u a l t r a n s m i s s i o n )
12 Before refitting the driveshaft, check the
condition of the gaiter and if necessary renew
it with reference to Section 3.
13 Clean the flange on the side of the
transmission, then insert the driveshaft inner
joint t r i p o d into the differential sun gear.
Locate the gaiter on the transmission flange,
and tighten the clip.
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
14 Clean the drive flange then locate the
driveshaft inner joint on it and insert the bolts.
Tighten the bolts securely in a progressive
manner.
All m o d e l s
15 Locate the outer end of the driveshaft in
the splined hub and press in the t o p of the
hub carrier.
16 Engage the hub carrier with the bottom of
the strut, then insert the bolts together with the
spacers. The heads of the bolts face the rear
of the car. Tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
17 Reconnect the steering track-rod end with
the hub carrier steering a r m , then refit and
tighten the nut. If the track-rod end stub turns
in the steering a r m , press d o w n on it while
tightening the nut.
18 Screw on the new driveshaft (hub) nut and
tighten it moderately at this stage (see
illustration).
19 Refit the roadwheel and lower the car to
the ground.
2.20b S t a k e t h e r i m of t h e n u t into t h e
r e c e s s in t h e driveshaft
2.18 Fitting a n e w driveshaft nut
2.20a T i g h t e n t h e d r i v e s h a f t nut t o t h e
specified torque (roadwheel removed for
clarity)
20 Tighten the roadwheel bolts to the
specified torque, then tighten the hub nut to
the specified torque. Stake the rim of the hub
nut into the machined recess in the end of the
driveshaft using a hammer and p u n c h (see
illustrations). Refit the wheel trim.
the clips and move the gaiter away from the
driveshaft outer joint housing.
5 Mark the relationship b e t w e e n the outer
joint and the driveshaft using a scriber or a
dab of paint.
6 Using a pair of circlip pliers, e x p a n d the
circlip that holds the joint in place and
w i t h d r a w the joint f r o m the end of the
driveshaft. Note that the circlip is captive in
the joint, and need not be removed, unless it
appears damaged or worn.
21 Check and t o p - u p the transmission
oil/fluid with reference to Chapter 1.
3 Driveshaft overhaul and
rubber gaiter renewal
^
1.2 and 1.4 litre
models
and 1.6 litre
models
(automatic
transmission)
7 Slide both rubber gaiters off the driveshaft. It
is recommended that the gaiters are renewed
whenever removed from the driveshaft.
8 If necessary, the d a m p i n g weight may be
removed f r o m the r i g h t - h a n d driveshaft,
however note its fitted position first.
Inspection
4 At the outer end of the driveshaft, release
9 Thoroughly clean the driveshaft splines,
and CV joint c o m p o n e n t s with paraffin or a
suitable solvent, taking care not t o destroy
any alignment marks made during removal. It
is not r e c o m m e n d e d that the joint is
c o m p l e t e l y d i s m a n t l e d , however, if it falls
apart accidentally, it is i m p o r t a n t that it is
correctly reassembled. The small w e b s of the
hub must align w i t h the large w e b s of the
housing, and vice versa.
10 Examine the CV joint c o m p o n e n t s for
wear and d a m a g e . In particular, c h e c k the
balls and c o r r e s p o n d i n g g r o o v e s for pitting
and corrosion. If evidence of wear is visible,
then the joint must be renewed.
11 Examine the tripod joint c o m p o n e n t s for
wear. Check that the three rollers are free to
2.20c Recess m a c h i n e d into e n d of t h e
driveshaft
3.3 D r a w t h e t r i p o d j o i n t off t h e e n d of t h e
driveshaft
Dismantling
1 Remove the driveshaft from the vehicle as
described in Section 2, and mount it in a vice.
2 Release the clips and move the gaiter away
from the driveshaft inner joint housing. Slide
the inner joint housing from the tripod joint.
3 At the inboard end of the driveshaft, use a
hammer and centre p u n c h to mark the
relationship b e t w e e n the shaft and t r i p o d
joint. Remove the circlip with a pair of circlip
pliers, then using a three-legged puller if
required, draw the tripod joint off the end of
the driveshaft. Ensure that the legs of the
puller bear upon the cast centre section of the
joint, not the roller bearings (see illustration).
8*4
Driveshafts
3.23a E x t r a c t t h e c i r c l i p . . .
3.23b . . . t h e n use a s o f t - m e t a l
punch to . . .
3.23c . . . r e m o v e t h e t r i p o d j o i n t
rotate w i t h o u t resistance a n d are not w o r n ,
damaged or corroded. If wear is discovered,
the tripod joint and housing must be renewed.
than that of the driveshaft as a drift. Refit the
circlip.
15 Pack t h e t r i p o d joint, inner joint housing
and gaiter w i t h grease f r o m the service kit,
then locate the housing over the tripod joint.
Position the gaiter on the housing and secure
with the clip.
16 Fit a new rubber gaiter t o the o u t b o a r d
end of the driveshaft a n d secure it in place
with a clip.
17 Pack the CV joint and gaiter with grease
from the service kit, pushing it into the joint
ball grooves and expelling any air that may be
trapped underneath.
18 Lubricate t h e splines of the drive shaft
with a smear of grease, then slide the CV joint
o n t o t h e shaft splines while observing t h e
alignment marks made during removal. Press
on t h e joint until t h e circlip engages the
g r o o v e . Pull o n t h e shaft to c h e c k that it is
held firmly in position.
19 Position the rubber gaiter onto the outer
joint housing. Briefly lift the lip of the gaiter to
expel all the air from the joint, then secure it in
place with a clip.
20 Wipe any excess grease from t h e driveshaft, then refit the driveshaft as described in
Section 2.
22 Release t h e clip, then m o v e t h e inner
gaiter along the driveshaft away from the inner
joint tripod joint and off of the bearing.
23 Use a hammer and centre punch t o mark
the relationship between the shaft and tripod
joint. Remove the circlip with a pair of circlip
pliers, t h e n using a t h r e e - l e g g e d puller if
required, draw the tripod joint off the end of
the driveshaft. Ensure that t h e legs of t h e
puller bear upon the cast centre section of the
joint, not the roller bearings. Alternatively, use
a soft-metal punch t o drive the joint from the
driveshaft (see illustrations).
Reassembly
12 Refit the damping weight t o the right-hand
driveshaft, m a k i n g sure it is l o c a t e d in its
previously noted position as given in t h e
Specifications.
13 Fit a new rubber gaiter to the inboard end
of the driveshaft and secure it in place on the
shaft with a clip.
14 Using the alignment marks made during
removal, fit the tripod joint onto the splines of
the driveshaft and t a p it fully onto the shaft.
T o ensure that t h e t r i p o d joint rollers and
driveshaft splines are not d a m a g e d , use a
socket with an internal diameter slightly larger
1.6 litre
(manual
models
transmission)
Dismantling
3.24 U s i n g a puller t o r e m o v e t h e s e a l e d
b e a r i n g f r o m t h e inner e n d of t h e
driveshaft
21 Remove the driveshaft from the vehicle as
described in Section 2, and mount it in a vice.
3.25 Release t h e c l i p s f r o m t h e o u t e r j o i n t
gaiter
3.26 R e m o v i n g t h e o u t e r j o i n t f r o m t h e
driveshaft
24 Note t h e f i t t e d position of t h e sealed
bearing o n the driveshaft - there are t w o
possibilities for each side as given in t h e
Specifications. Using the puller, draw t h e
bearing off the inner end of the driveshaft (see
illustration).
25 At the outer end of the driveshaft, release
the clips and move the gaiter away from the
driveshaft outer joint housing (see illustration).
26 Mark the relationship between the outer
joint a n d t h e driveshaft using a scriber or a
d a b of paint. Using a pair of circlip pliers,
expand the circlip that holds the joint in place
and drive t h e joint f r o m the e n d of t h e
driveshaft ( s e e i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note that t h e
circlip is captive in the joint, and need not be
removed, unless it appears damaged or worn.
27 Slide both rubber gaiters off the driveshaft
(see illustration). It is recommended that the
gaiters are renewed whenever removed from
the driveshaft.
3.27 R e m o v i n g t h e g a i t e r s
Driveshafts 8*5
\
3.28 D a m p i n g w e i g h t o n t h e r i g h t - h a n d
driveshaft
3.35 L o c a t i n g a n e w clip a n d r u b b e r gaiter
o n t o t h e i n b o a r d e n d of t h e driveshaft
3.36 Driving t h e sealed b e a r i n g o n t o t h e
inner e n d of t h e driveshaft
28 If necessary, the damping weight may be
r e m o v e d f r o m the r i g h t - h a n d driveshaft,
however note its fitted position first (see
illustration).
35 Locate a new clip and rubber gaiter onto
the i n b o a r d end of the driveshaft (see
illustration).
36 Using a metal t u b e , drive the sealed
bearing onto the inner end of the driveshaft,
making sure that its closed end faces towards
the outer bearing position and its position
from the inner end of the driveshaft is as given
in the Specifications (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . The
tube must only locate on the inner race of the
bearing as it is being fitted.
expel all the air from the joint, then secure it in
place with a clip. Note that the clips supplied
with the new gaiters require a special tool to
tighten the clip (see illustration).
43 Wipe any excess grease from the driveshaft, then refit the driveshaft as described in
Section 2.
Inspection
29 Thoroughly clean the driveshaft splines,
and CV joint c o m p o n e n t s with paraffin or a
suitable solvent, taking care not t o destroy
any alignment marks made during removal. It
is not r e c o m m e n d e d that the joint is
c o m p l e t e l y d i s m a n t l e d , however, if it falls
apart accidentally, it is i m p o r t a n t that it is
correctly reassembled. The small webs of the
hub m u s t align w i t h the large w e b s of the
housing, and vice versa.
31 Examine the CV joint c o m p o n e n t s for
wear and d a m a g e . In particular, c h e c k the
balls and c o r r e s p o n d i n g grooves for pitting
and corrosion. If evidence of wear is visible,
then the joint must be renewed.
32 Examine the tripod joint c o m p o n e n t s for
wear. Check that the three rollers are free to
rotate w i t h o u t resistance and are not w o r n ,
damaged or corroded. If wear is discovered,
the tripod joint must be renewed, however, if
wear is found on the tripod joint location in the
differential gears, more extensive w o r k may
be required on the t r a n s m i s s i o n itself (see
Chapter 7A or 7B).
33 Examine the gaiter bearing for wear and if
necessary renew it.
Reassembly
34 Refit the damping weight to the right-hand
driveshaft, m a k i n g sure it is located in its
previously noted position (see Specifications).
37 Using the alignment marks made during
removal, fit the tripod joint onto the splines of
the driveshaft and tap it fully onto the shaft. To
ensure that the tripod joint rollers and driveshaft
splines are not damaged, use a socket with an
internal diameter slightly larger than that of the
driveshaft as a drift. Refit the circlip.
38 Locate the gaiter on the bearing and
secure with the clip.
39 Fit a new rubber gaiter t o the o u t b o a r d
end of the driveshaft and secure it in place
with a clip.
40 Pack the CV joint and gaiter with grease
from the service kit, pushing it into the joint
ball grooves and expelling any air that may be
trapped underneath (see illustration).
41 Lubricate the splines of the drive shaft
with a smear of grease, then slide the CV joint
o n t o the shaft splines while observing the
alignment marks made during removal. Press
on the joint until the circlip engages the
g r o o v e . Pull on the shaft to c h e c k that it is
held firmly in position.
42 Position the rubber gaiter onto the outer
joint housing. Briefly lift the lip of the gaiter to
1.8 litre
models
Dismantling
44 Remove the driveshaft from the vehicle as
described in Section 2, and mount it in a vice.
45 At the outer end of the driveshaft, release
the clips and move the gaiter away from the
driveshaft outer joint housing.
46 Mark the relationship between the outer
joint and the driveshaft using a scriber or a
d a b of paint. Using a pair of circlip pliers,
expand the circlip that holds the joint in place
and w i t h d r a w the joint f r o m the end of the
driveshaft. Note that the circlip is captive in
the joint, and need not be removed, unless it
a p p e a r s d a m a g e d or w o r n . Alternatively,
remove the joint by tapping it with a mallet, or
by using a slide hammer attached to the hub
nut threads on the end of the driveshaft.
47 Remove the protective cup from the inner
end of the driveshaft, then release the t w o
clips from the gaiter, and move the gaiter
away from the inner joint.
48 Mark the relationship between the inner
joint and the driveshaft using a scriber or a
d a b of paint. Using a pair of circlip pliers,
expand the circlip that holds the joint in place
and w i t h d r a w the joint f r o m the end of the
driveshaft. Note that the circlip is captive in
the joint, and need not be removed, unless it
appears damaged or worn.
49 Remove the inner a n d outer driveshaft
gaiters.
50 Identify the d a m p i n g weight for position
so that it can be refitted in exactly the same
place. U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the
w e i g h t half shells f r o m the driveshaft, then
slide off the rubber buffer.
Inspection
3.40 P a c k i n g t h e CV j o i n t w i t h g r e a s e f r o m
t h e s e r v i c e kit
3.42 U s i n g t h e special t o o l t o t i g h t e n t h e
clip onto the outer joint housing
51 Thoroughly clean the driveshaft splines,
and CV joint c o m p o n e n t s with paraffin or a
suitable solvent, taking care not to destroy
any alignment marks made during removal. It
is not r e c o m m e n d e d that the joint is
8*6 Driveshafts
4.7 U n b o l t t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft f r o m t h e
support bracket
4.8a W i t h d r a w t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft f r o m
the transmission , . .
4.5b . . . a n d r e c o v e r t h e d u s t seal
c o m p l e t e l y d i s m a n t l e d , however, if it falls
apart accidentally, it is i m p o r t a n t that it is
correctly reassembled. The small webs of the
hub must align with the large w e b s of the
housing, and vice versa.
52 Examine the CV joint c o m p o n e n t s for
wear and d a m a g e . In particular, c h e c k the
balls and c o r r e s p o n d i n g g r o o v e s for pitting
and corrosion. If evidence of wear is visible,
then the joint must be renewed.
61 Position the rubber gaiter onto the inner
joint housing. Briefly lift the lip of the gaiter to
expel all the air from the joint, then secure it in
place with a clip.
62 Wipe any excess grease f r o m the
driveshaft, t h e n refit the driveshaft as
described in Section 2.
the support bracket, and draw the splined end
of the shaft out of the t r a n s m i s s i o n . If it is
tight, attach a slide hammer to the shaft. Take
care to avoid damaging the oil seal. Recover
the dust seal (see illustrations).
9 A modified (solid) intermediate shaft w a s
fitted in 1997. replacing the previous tubular
type. Where the modified type is fitted, undo
the screws and remove the d a m p i n g weight
shells, then slide off the rubber buffer.
Reassembly
53 Refit the damping weight to the right-hand
driveshaft, m a k i n g sure it is l o c a t e d in its
previously noted position.
54 Fit a new rubber gaiter onto the inner end
of the driveshaft and secure it in place with a
clip.
55 Pack the CV joint and gaiter with grease
from the service kit, pushing it into the joint
ball grooves and expelling any air that may be
trapped underneath.
56 Lubricate the splines of the drive shaft
with a smear of grease, then slide the CV joint
o n t o the shaft splines while observing the
alignment marks made during removal. Press
on the joint until the circlip engages the
g r o o v e . Pull on the shaft to c h e c k that it is
held firmly in position.
57 Position the rubber gaiter onto the inner
joint housing. Briefly lift the lip of the gaiter to
expel all the air from the joint, then secure it in
place with a clip. Refit the protective cup onto
the inner joint housing.
58 Fit a new rubber gaiter onto the outer end
of the driveshaft and secure it in place with a
clip.
59 Pack the CV joint and gaiter with grease
from the service kit, pushing it into the joint
ball grooves and expelling any air that may be
trapped underneath.
60 Lubricate the splines of the drive shaft
with a smear of grease, then slide the CV joint
o n t o the shaft splines while observing the
alignment marks made during removal. Press
on the joint until the circlip engages the
g r o o v e . Pull-on the shaft to c h e c k that it is
held firmly in position.
4 Intermediate shaft •
removal, inspection
and refitting
Inspection
Removal
N o t e : This procedure applies only to 1.8 litre
models. Note also that the intermediate
shaft
and bearing are not available as separate
spares and can only be renewed
as a
complete assembly.
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the right-hand front roadwheel.
2 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the wheel
arch liner f r o m beneath the right-hand front
wing.
3 U n s c r e w the nut securing the steering
track-rod end to the hub carrier steering arm.
Using a balljoint removal t o o l , separate the
track-rod end from the arm.
4 Unbolt and remove the vertical link for
access to the rear of the engine.
5 Refer to Section 2 and unbolt the inboard
end of the right hand driveshaft f r o m the
intermediate shaft flange. S u s p e n d the
d i s c o n n e c t e d e n d of the driveshaft from a
convenient point on the subframe, using wire
or a cable-tie, to avoid straining the joint and
gaiter.
6 Drain the oil f r o m the t r a n s m i s s i o n ,
reference to Chapters 1 and 7A.
7 Unbolt the intermediate shaft from
support bracket on the rear of the engine
illustration).
8 Withdraw the intermediate shaft flange
with
the
(see
from
10 Examine the oil seal in the transmission
for signs of d a m a g e or deterioration a n d , if
necessary, renew it with reference to Chapter 7A.
11 Spin the bearing on the intermediate shaft
and c h e c k for roughness or seizing. If the
bearing is w o r n or d a m a g e d , the c o m p l e t e
shaft must be renewed.
12 Where applicable, check the rubber buffer
for condition and renew it if necessary.
Refitting
13 On the modified intermediate shaft, refit
the rubber buffer and damping weight shells,
and tighten the screws securely.
14 Thoroughly clean the intermediate shaft
splines and the aperture in the transmission.
Fit a new dust seal to the shaft, then apply a
thin film of grease to the oil seal lips, and to
the intermediate shaft splines and shoulders.
15 Insert the shaft squarely into the t r a n s mission, taking care to avoid damaging the oil
seal. Align the intermediate shaft bearing with
the support bracket, then insert the bolts and
tighten them securely.
16 Refit the right hand driveshaft to the
intermediate shaft with reference to Section 2.
17 Refit the vertical link and steering trackrod end, and tighten the nuts/bolts.
18 Refit the wheel arch liner.
19 Refit the roadwheel and lower the vehicle
to the ground. Tighten the roadwheel bolts to
the specified torque.
20 On completion refill the transmission with
the specified quantity and grade of oil with
reference to Chapters 1 and 7A.
9«1
Chapter 9
Braking system
Contents
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) components removal and refitting
19
Brake fluid - level check
See Weekly checks
Brake fluid - renewal
See Chapter 1
Brake pedal - removal and refitting
11
Front brake caliper - removal, overhaul and refitting
8
Front brake disc - inspection, removal and refitting
6
Front brake pad - condition check
See Chapter 1
Front brake pads - renewal
4
General information
1
Handbrake - checking and adjustment
14
Handbrake cables - removal and refitting
16
Handbrake lever - removal and refitting
15
Hydraulic pipes and hoses - renewal
3
Hydraulic system - bleeding
2
Master cylinder - removal, overhaul and refitting
10
Rear brake drum - removal, inspection and refitting
7
Rear brake pressure proportioning valve - removal and refitting . . . 18
Rear brake shoes - condition check
See Chapter 1
Rear brake shoes - renewal
5
Rear wheel cylinder - removal, overhaul and refitting
9
Stop-light switch - adjustment, removal and refitting
17
Vacuum servo unit - testing, removal and refitting
12
Vacuum servo unit check valve - removal, testing and refitting . . . . 13
Degrees of difficulty
Fairly easy, suitable
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
<3x
for beginner with
experience
gy^
s o m e experience
Fairly difficult,
| k
|k
DIY mechanic
Ij^
Difficult, suitable for
experienced DIY
suitable for competent
^
mechanic
Specifications
Front brakes
Type
Disc diameter
Disc thickness (new):
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre (manual) models
1.6 litre (automatic) and 1.8 litre models
Minimum disc machining thickness:
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre (manual) models
1.6 litre (automatic) and 1.8 litre models
Minimum disc thickness (wear limit):
1.2,1.4 and 1.6 litre (manual) models
1.6 litre (automatic) and 1.8 litre models
Maximum disc runout
Brake pad friction material minimum thickness
Disc with single-piston sliding calipers
257 m m
11.80 to 12.10 mm
19.80 to 20.10 m m
11.10 m m
18.55 m m
10.20 mm
18.20 mm
0.15 m m (2.0 mm from outer edge)
1.5 mm
Rear drum brakes
Drum inner diameter (new):
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (without ABS)
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (with ABS)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Maximum drum machining diameter:
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (without ABS)
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (with ABS)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Maximum drum diameter (wear limit):
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (without ABS)
1.2 and 1.4 litre models (with ABS)
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Minimum shoe lining thickness
180.00 to 180.25 m m
203.10 to 203.40 m m
203.10 to 203.40 m m
180.95 m m
204.10 m m
204.10 m m
"
181.35 m m
204.70 m m
204.70 m m
1.5 m m
^
2^
V e r y difficult,
suitable for expert DIY
or professional
^
7B«1
Chapter 7 Part B:
Automatic transmission
Contents
Automatic transmission - overhaul
Automatic transmission - removal and refitting
Automatic transmission fluid level check
Differential oil seals - renewal
Electronic control unit - removal and refitting
General information
Kick-down switch - removal and refitting
Safety control unit - removal and refitting
8
Selector cable - removal, refitting and adjustment
4
Selector lever position sensor - removal and refitting
6
Transmission fluid cooling radiator and fan - removal and refitting . . . . 10
Vehicle and transmission main shaft speed sensors removal, testing and refitting
9
3
2
See Chapter 1
11
7
1
5
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
| k
expenence
Fairly easy, suitable
| k
for beginner with
novice with little
gy^
s o m e experience
g^
Difficult, suitable for
| k
Very difficult
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
2^
suitable for expert DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
Fairty d i f f i c u l t
|k
g^
g^
or professional
Specifications
General
Type
Ratios:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Reverse
Vehicle speed sensor
Resistance
AISIN AW 596/Y024
2.807:
1.479:
1.000 :
0.735 :
2.769 :
648 to 792 o h m s
Main shaft speed sensor
Resistance
387 to 473 ohms
Lubrication
Lubricant type
Lubricant capacity:
From dry
Drain and refill
Torque wrench setting
Drain plug
See Lubricants
and fluids
2.8 litres
1.9 litres
Nm
24 to 55
Ibf ft
18 to 41
^
2j
g^
7B»2 Automatic transmission
1 General information
General
description
The automatic transmission is a four speed
unit, incorporating a h y d r o d y n a m i c t o r q u e
converter with a planetary gearbox.
Gear selection is achieved by means of a
floor-mounted, seven position selector lever.
The positions are P (Park), R (Reverse), N
(Neutral), D (Drive), 3 (4th gear excluded), 2
(only
1st
and
2nd
gear
selected
automatically), 1 (1st gear lock). A SPORT
b u t t o n ' enables the driver to select an
operating m o d e w h i c h provides additional
acceleration by shifting up or d o w n at higher
engine speeds. 4th gear is not selected in this
mode, and top speed is achieved in 3rd gear.
Note that increased fuel c o n s u m p t i o n will
o c c u r in this m o d e . An ICE b u t t o n may be
selected w h e n driving in ice or s n o w in
position D; 2 n d gear is used w h e n moving
away from rest in this mode.
The transmission incorporates a kick-down
feature w h i c h provides greater acceleration
when the accelerator pedal is depressed to
the floor.
The overall operation of the transmission is
m a n a g e d by the engine
management
electronic control unit (ECU) and as a result
there are no manual a d j u s t m e n t s (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Comprehensive fault diagnosis
can therefore only be carried out using
dedicated electronic test equipment.
Due to the complexity of the transmission
and its c o n t r o l s y s t e m , major repairs and
overhaul operations should be left to a FIAT
dealer, who will be equipped to carry out fault
diagnosis and repair. The information in this
Chapter is therefore limited to a description of
the removal and refitting of the transmission
as a complete unit. The removal, refitting and
a d j u s t m e n t of the selector cable is also
described.
Precautions
Observe the following precautions to avoid
damage to the automatic transmission:
a) . Do not attempt to start the engine by
pushing or towing the car.
b) It the car has to be towed for recovery,
the distance must not exceed 12 miles
(20 km), and the speed must not exceed
19 mph (30 kph). If these conditions
cannot be met, or if transmission
damage
is suspected, only tow the car with the
front wheels clear of the ground.
c) Only engage P or R when the vehicle is
stationary.
1.4 AISIN A W 596/Y024 a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n c o m p o n e n t l o c a t i o n s
1
3
4
5
6
Electronic control module
NORMAL/SPORT
mode
switch
ICE mode switch
Kick-down
switch
Stop light switch
Instrument panel
7 Mam shaft RPM sensor
(black)
8 Vehicle speed sensor (grey)
9 Transmission fluid
temperature sensor
10 Diagnostic socket
11 Selector lever position
sensor
12 Solenoid S1, gear
engagement
13 Solenoid S2, gear
engagement
14 Solenoid SL, lock-up
clutch
15 Solenoid STH, pressure
control
2 Automatic transmission removal arid refitting
^
*J
Removal
1 Select a s o l i d , level surface to park the
vehicle o n . Give yourself enough s p a c e to
m o v e around it easily. Apply the handbrake
then jack up the front of the vehicle and
s u p p o r t it on axle s t a n d s (see Jacking and
vehicle support). Remove both front wheels.
2 Unbolt the air inlet d u c t f r o m the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t front c r o s s m e m b e r ,
then
disconnect it from the air cleaner and remove.
3 Remove the air inlet d u c t and resonator
from between the air cleaner and throttle body
by loosening the clips. Also d i s c o n n e c t the
crankcase ventilation hose from the front of
the cylinder block.
4 Remove the battery and battery tray with
reference to Chapter 5A.
5 Release the wiring f r o m the rear of the
battery mounting bracket, then undo the bolt
and remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the
nuts and r e m o v e the relay box f r o m the
m o u n t i n g bracket - position the box to one
side.
6 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the engine
management
ECU
by
unclipping
the
connector. Unscrew the nuts and remove the
ECU m o u n t i n g bracket f r o m the battery
mounting bracket. The nuts also secure the
starter motor and fuel injection wiring.
7 Unscrew the nut and disconnect the earth
wire from the bracket, then unbolt and remove
the battery mounting bracket and unclip the
remaining wiring supports.
8 Remove the spring clip and washer, and
d i s c o n n e c t the selector cable end f r o m the
lever on the t r a n s m i s s i o n . Unbolt the cable
mounting bracket and position the cables to
one side.
9 Unbolt
the
earth
cable
from
the
transmission.
10 Disconnect the t w o wiring c o n n e c t o r s
located on t o p of the transmission. One is for
the selector lever position sensor and the
other is for the gear c h a n g e , l o c k - u p , a n d
pressure control solenoids.
11 Disconnect the oil t e m p e r a t u r e sensor
wiring at the front of the transmission.
12 Disconnect
the
wiring
from
the
speedometer sender.
13 U n s c r e w the bolt securing the wiring
support to the thermostat housing, and move
the wiring to one side.
14 Remove the starter motor as described in
Chapter 5A.
15 The engine must now be supported while
the transmission is being r e m o v e d . FIAT
technicians fit an engine lifting eye to the bolt
hole on the thermostat housing, however an
alternative method is to attach a hoist to the
left-hand end of the inlet manifold. With the
Automatic transmission 7B»3
24 With the help of an assistant, lower the
trolley jack, then withdraw the transmission
slightly from the engine. Using a lever, push the
torque converter back into the transmission
bellhousing so that it remains engaged with the
transmission oil p u m p . It is suggested that a
suitable piece of metal is bolted to the
bellhousing to ensure the torque converter
remains in position (see illustration).
A
Warning:
Make sure that
transmission
remains steady
the jack head.
25 W i t h d r a w the transmission f r o m
engine and lower it to the ground.
the
on
the
Refitting
2.19a T w o of t h e six b o l t s s e c u r i n g t h e d r i v e p l a t e t o t h e t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r
hoist in position, take the w e i g h t of the
engine. M a k e sure that the engine is well
s u p p o r t e d since only one other engine
m o u n t i n g will still be c o n n e c t e d w h e n the
transmission is removed. D o n o t support the
engine with a trolley jack positioned under the
s u m p because the position of the right-hand
front engine mounting dictates that the centre
of gravity of the engine mass is high, and it is
quite likely that the engine will fall to one side
d a m a g i n g either the radiator or the rear
b u l k h e a d . As an additional p r e c a u t i o n ,
position axle s t a n d s and a b l o c k of w o o d
beneath the engine.
16 Position
a container
beneath
the
transmission, then unscrew the drain plug and
allow the fluid to drain from the transmission.
On c o m p l e t i o n , clean the plug and refit it,
tightening it to the specified torque.
17 Identify the position of the t w o hydraulic
fluid hoses on the transmission, then unscrew
the union nuts and disconnect the hoses. Tie
the hoses to one side. To prevent the ingress
of dust and dirt, plug the ends of the hoses
and apertures in the transmission.
18 Unbolt the driveplate cover f r o m the
b o t t o m of the transmission bellhousing for
access to the driveplate-to-torque converter
bolts.
19 Using an Allen key, unscrew the driveplateto-converter bolts. The access hole will
accommodate two of the bolts, then it will be
necessary to turn the crankshaft (using a spanner
on the crankshaft pulley bolt) until the next pair
bolt appear in the hole. There are 6 bolts in total,
and it is important that only these bolts are used
on refitting as they are of specific length,
measuring 12.5 mm from under the head to the
end of the bolt (see illustrations). Bolts which
are too long will damage the torque converter,
and bolts which are too short may not withstand
the rotational torques.
20 Support the transmission on a trolley jack.
21 W o r k i n g under the car, unbolt the rear
engine m o u n t i n g and bracket f r o m the
transmission and underbody.
22 Unbolt the left-hand engine mounting and
bracket from the underbody and transmission.
23 Unscrew and remove the bolts securing
the transmission to the engine.
(7)
12-5iCH
4YY\
mil)
lilt
• 2 max.
'1-9
H31465
2.19b A l w a y s use t h e c o r r e c t bolts t o
secure the t o r q u e converter t o t h e
driveplate - t h e d i m e n s i o n s are given in m m
H31466
2.24 S e c u r e t h e t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r u s i n g a
p i e c e of m e t a l b o l t e d t o t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
bellhousing
26 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but note
the following points:
a) Make sure that the torque converter is
fully engaged with the transmission pump
before lifting the transmission into
position.
b) Tighten all nuts and bolts to the specified
torque where given.
c) If there is any sign of oil leaking from the
driveshaft oil seals on the sides of the
transmission, renew them with reference
to Section 11.
Automatic transmission
overhaul
In the event of a fault occurring, it will be
necessary to establish w h e t h e r the fault is
electrical, mechanical or hydraulic in nature,
before repair w o r k can be c o n t e m p l a t e d .
Diagnosis requires detailed knowledge of the
transmissions operation and construction, as
well as access to specialised test equipment,
and so is deemed to be beyond the scope of
this manual. It is therefore essential that
problems with the automatic transmission are
referred to a FIAT dealer for assessment.
Note that a faulty transmission should not
be r e m o v e d before the vehicle has been
assessed by a dealer, as fault d i a g n o s i s is
carried out with the transmission in situ.
4 Selector cable removal, refitting
and adjustment
Jk
Removal
1 Move the selector lever to position P. Chock
the front roadwheels, then jack up the rear of
the vehicle and support on axle stands (see
Jacking and vehicle support). For additional
working room, raise the front of the car as well.
2 Unbolt the air inlet d u c t f r o m the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t front c r o s s m e m b e r ,
then
disconnect it from the air cleaner and remove.
3 Remove the battery and battery tray with
reference to Chapter 5A.
4 Release the wiring from the rear of the battery
7B»4 Automatic transmission
4.7 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e s e l e c t o r c a b l e e n d
from the transmission
mounting bracket, then undo the bolt and
remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the nuts
and remove the relay box from the mounting
bracket - position the box to one side.
5 D i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the engine
management
ECU
by
unclipping
the
connector. Unscrew the nuts and remove the
ECU m o u n t i n g bracket f r o m the battery
m o u n t i n g bracket. The nuts also secure the
starter motor and fuel injection wiring.
6 Unbolt and r e m o v e the battery m o u n t i n g
bracket and unclip the remaining wiring
supports.
7 Remove the spring clip and washer, and
d i s c o n n e c t the selector c a b l e end f r o m the
lever on the transmission (see illustration).
8 Pull out the spring clip and disconnect the
outer cable from the cable mounting bracket.
9 Unscrew the bolt from the front of the gear
lever knob, then withdraw the knob upwards.
Carefully prise the indicator panel f r o m the
floor and remove over the gear lever.
10 Carefully prise the driving mode panel from
the floor and disconnect the switch wiring.
11 Release the handbrake lever gaiter from
the floor, then b a c k off the handbrake lever
a d j u s t m e n t nut. Also d i s c o n n e c t t h e wiring
from the handbrake-on warning switch.
4.14 Gear s e l e c t o r a n d h a n d b r a k e lever m o u n t i n g
12 Working under the car, unscrew the nuts
and remove the heat shield for access to the
h a n d b r a k e c a b l e s . U n h o o k the front of the
handbrake cables from the equaliser bar, then
release the outer cables from the underbody
bracket.
13 Remove the exhaust d o w n p i p e as
described in Chapter AC.
14 Unscrew the nuts/bolts securing the gear
selector and handbrake lever mounting to the
u n d e r b o d y , and w i t h d r a w it f r o m under the
car (see illustration).
15 Extract the clip and disconnect the cable
end from the selector lever, then pull out the
clip and disconnect the outer cable from the
mounting.
16 Unscrew the nuts and remove the selector
lever assembly from the mounting.
17 Unscrew t h e bolt securing the wiring to
the side of the assembly.
18 If necessary, unscrew the n u t s and
r e m o v e t h e PARK position s w i t c h and also
unbolt the shift-lock device (see illustration).
Refitting
and
adjustment
19 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but before
attaching the cable end to the selector lever on
the transmission, check the adjustment as
follows. With the selector lever in position P
and the cable attached to the lever inside the
car, check that the lever on the transmission is
also in position P. Offer the cable end onto the
transmission lever and check that the hole in
the end correctly aligns with the pin on the
lever. If not, loosen the locknut on the cable
and turn the end fitting in or out as required
until it aligns correctly with the pin, then tighten
the locknut. Locate the cable on the pin and
secure with the clip. On completion, check that
it is only possible to start the engine with the
selector lever in positions P or N. Also check
that the selector lever position shown on the
floor m o u n t e d panel matches the positions
indicated on the instrument panel.
5 Kick-down switch removal and refitting
|^
^
Removal
1 The k i c k - d o w n s w i t c h is m o u n t e d on the
accelerator pedal bracket. N o t e : It is quite
likely that the switch mounting lugs will be
broken as the switch is being removed.
2 Disconnect the wiring from the switch.
3 Release the m o u n t i n g lugs and w i t h d r a w
the switch from the accelerator pedal.
Refitting
4 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
6 Selector lever
position sensor removal and refitting
Im>a£
Removal
1 Move the selector lever to position P.
2 Unbolt the air inlet d u c t f r o m the engine
compartment front crossmember,
then
disconnect it from the air cleaner and remove.
Automatic transmission 7B«5
S§^)/
d i s c o n n e c t the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 Remove the rear seat cushion as described
in Chapter 1 1 , Section 19.
3 Remove the trim for access to the control
unit, then unscrew the bolts and nut securing
the unit mounting bracket to the floor.
4 Carefully d i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the
control unit.
5 Unscrew the nuts and remove the control
unit f r o m the m o u n t i n g bracket
(see
illustration).
H31468
Refitting
6.11 Selector lever p o s i t i o n s e n s o r
3 Remove the battery and battery tray with
reference to Chapter 5A.
4 Release the wiring f r o m the rear of the
battery mounting bracket, then undo the bolt
and remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the
nuts and remove the relay box from the
m o u n t i n g bracket - position the box to one
side.
5 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the engine
management
ECU
by
unclipping
the
connector. Unscrew the nuts and remove the
ECU m o u n t i n g bracket from the battery
mounting bracket. The nuts also secure the
starter motor and fuel injection wiring.
6 Unbolt and remove the battery m o u n t i n g
bracket and unclip the remaining wiring
supports.
7 Remove the spring clip and washer, and
d i s c o n n e c t the selector cable end f r o m the
lever on the transmission.
8 Disconnect the selector lever position
sensor wiring at the connector.
9 Unscrew the nut and remove the lever from
the sensor.
10 Release the special washer f r o m the
central nut, then unscrew and remove the nut.
11 Unscrew the mounting bolts and remove
the selector lever position sensor f r o m the
transmission (see illustration).
Refitting
12 Locate the sensor on the spindle followed
by the special washer, then tighten the nut
securely and bend up the washer tabs to lock.
13 Insert and tighten the m o u n t i n g bolts
securely.
14 With the sensor adjustment bolts loose,
turn the spindle fully clockwise to position P,
then turn it t w o n o t c h e s a n t i c l o c k w i s e to
position N.
15 Turn the sensor until the projection on its
upper surface is aligned with the m a c h i n e d
edges on the s p i n d l e (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Tighten the sensor adjustment bolts without
moving the sensor.
16 An alternative m e t h o d of setting the
sensor is to use an ohmmeter. Connect the
ohmmeter between terminals 6 and 10 of the
wiring c o n n e c t o r then turn the sensor to
d e t e r m i n e the limits of the arc where the
meter indicates continuity. Position the sensor
in the centre of this arc, then tighten the
a d j u s t m e n t bolts. The N and P internal
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Make sure
that the wiring connector is firmly pressed on.
6.15 T u r n t h e s e n s o r until t h e p r o j e c t i o n
o n its u p p e r s u r f a c e (1) is aligned w i t h t h e
m a c h i n e d e d g e s o n t h e s p i n d l e (2)
8 Safety control unit removal and refitting
|§
|k
Removal
contacts are both closed with the sensor in its
centre position.
17 Refit the lever to the spindle and tighten
the nut.
18 Reconnect the wiring.
19 Refer to S e c t i o n 4 w h e n refitting the
selector cable.
20 The remaining procedure is a reversal of
removal.
7 Electronic control unit removal and refitting
1 The safety control unit is located under the
passenger seat. First, disconnect the battery
negative (earth) lead (see Disconnecting
the
battery).
2 Adjust the front passenger seat fully
rearwards.
3 Unscrew
the
mounting
bolts,
then
disconnect the wiring and remove the safety
control unit from inside the car.
Refitting
>jk
Caution:
Handle the electronic control
unit
carefully, and do not touch the
connector
terminals.
Do not attempt
to remove
the
cover from the unit.
Removal
1 The a u t o m a t i c transmission electronic
control unit is located beneath the rear
passenger seat, on the right-hand side. First,
4 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
9 Vehicle and transmission
main shaft speed sensors removal, testing and refitting
||=
3Q
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the front left-hand roadwheel.
7.5 E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l unit
7B»6 Automatic transmission
2 Remove the trim (not the wheel arch liner)
for access to the rear of the transmission.
3 To remove either the vehicle speed sensor
(grey) or main shaft s p e e d sensor (black),
d i s c o n n e c t t h e wiring then unscrew the
mounting bolt and withdraw the sensor from
the casing.
4 Behind the battery location, disconnect the
wiring for the electric fan.
5 W o r k i n g under the left-hand wheel arch,
unscrew the mounting bolts and remove the
electric cooling fan from the rear of the fluid
cooling radiator (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Withdraw
the fan from under the car.
4 Remove the O-ring seal.
5 C o n n e c t an o h m m e t e r b e t w e e n the
terminals of the sensor, and c h e c k that the
resistance value is as given in the
Specifications.
6 Position the container beneath the fluid
cooling radiator, then unscrew the union nuts
and d i s c o n n e c t the fluid feed and return
hoses. Plug the ends of the hoses to prevent
the ingress of dust and dirt.
7 U n s c r e w the upper m o u n t i n g nuts and
withdraw the radiator from under the car.
Refitting
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but fit a
new O-ring seal and lightly smear it w i t h
grease before refitting the sensor.
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but tighten
all nuts and bolts securely. Finally, t o p - u p the
transmission fluid level with reference to
Chapter 1.
Testing
10 Transmission fluid cooling
radiator and fan removal and refitting
<5V
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove
the front left-hand roadwheel.
2 Position
a
container
beneath
the
transmission, then unscrew the drain plug and
allow the fluid t o drain. On c o m p l e t i o n , refit
and tighten the drain plug, and wipe clean the
area around the plug.
3 Unbolt the air inlet d u c t f r o m the engine
compartment
front c r o s s m e m b e r ,
then
disconnect it from the air cleaner and remove.
11 Differential oil seals •
renewal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
2 Remove t h e
relevant
driveshaft
as
described in Chapter 8.
3 Wipe clean the old oil seal and note the
fitted d e p t h b e l o w the casing e d g e . This is
necessary to d e t e r m i n e the correct fitted
position of the new oil seal.
4 Using a large screwdriver or lever, carefully
prise the oil seal out of the transmission
casing, taking care not to damage the casing.
If the oil seal is reluctant to m o v e , it is
10.5 Electric c o o l i n g fan m o u n t i n g b o l t s
o n t h e rear of t h e f l u i d c o o l i n g radiator
sometimes helpful to carefully drive it into the
transmission a little way, applying the force at
one point only. This will have the effect of
swivelling the seal out of the casing, and it can
then be pulled out. If the oil seal is particularly
difficult to r e m o v e , an oil seal removal t o o l
may be obtained from a garage or accessory
shop.
5 Wipe clean the oil seal seating in the
transmission casing, then press the new seal
a little way into the casing by h a n d , making
sure that it is square with its seating and its
closed end is facing outwards.
6 Using a suitable t u b e or large socket,
carefully drive the oil seal fully into the casing
up to its previously-noted fitted depth. Check
that the oil seal spring has not been displaced
from its location around the inner lip.
7 Refit the driveshaft w i t h reference to
Chapter 8, then lower the car to the ground.
7A»1
Chapter 7 Part A:
Manual transmission
Contents
Differential oil seals (except 1.6 litre models) - renewal
Gearchange lever and linkage - removal, overhaul and refitting . ,
General information
Manual transmission - removal and refitting
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
experience
1
3§
Fairly easy, suitable
for beginner with
s o m e experience
%
6
2
1
3
Manual transmission oil level check
Manual transmission overhaul - general information .
Reversing light switch - testing, removal and refitting
Difficult, suitable for
V e r y difficult,
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
suitable for expert DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
or professional
Fairly difficult,
|k
g^
^
5*
Specifications
General
Type
Designation:
1242 cc engine
1370 cc engine
1581 cc engine
1747 cc engine
Lubricant capacity:
1.2 and 1.4 litre models
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
Transverse mounted, front wheel drive layout with integral transaxle
differential/final drive. 5 forward speeds, 1 reverse speed
C.514.5.13
C.514.5.13, C.513.5.13
C.513.5.13
C.510.5.17
1.7 litres
2.0 litres
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibfft
Flywheel cover
Gear lever support
Oil drain and filler plugs
Reversing light switch
Speedometer pinion retaining bolt
25
15
46
30
12
18
11
34
22
9
7A»2 Manual transmission
1 General information
The manual transmission is bolted t o the
left-hand end of the engine, and incorporates
the main gears and final drive differential.
Drive is t r a n s m i t t e d f r o m the crankshaft via
the clutch to the input shaft, which is splined
t o a c c e p t the c l u t c h friction disc. From the
input shaft, drive is transmitted to the output
shaft, final drive and differential, then through
the driveshafts to the front roadwheels. The
differential unit allows the inner roadwheel to
rotate at a slower speed than the outer
roadwheel when the car is cornering.
The transmission input and output shafts
are arranged side by side, so that their gear
pinion teeth are in c o n s t a n t m e s h . Sliding
s y n c h r o m e s h units allow the gears to be
locked to their shafts when a gear is selected.
In neutral, none of the gears are engaged so
the input shaft rotates independently of the
output shaft.
Gear selection is via a floor-mounted lever.
On 1.2 litre models the gear change consists of
two cables. On 1.4 litre models the gear change
consists of a gear selector rod, a gear
1.3a G e a r c h a n g e c a b l e s a n d lever (1.2 litre m o d e l s )
1 Gear lever support
2 Gear lever
3 Selector linkage
4 Engagement linkage
5 Gear engagement cable
6 Gear selector cable
7 Cable mounting bracket
engagement cable, and a reverse inhibitor cable.
The rod selects the gear, and the main cable
engages the gear. The second cable prevents
accidental engagement of reverse gear. On 1.6
and 1.8 litre models the gear change linkage
consists of three rods operated by a single
8
9
Selector lever on
transmission
Engagement lever on
transmission
control rod. One of the rods acts as a reaction
member to ensure the remaining t w o rods
operate at a constant distance from the linkage
relay. One of the remaining rods is a gear
selector rod, and the other is a gear engagement
rod (see illustrations).
1.3b G e a r c h a n g e linkage a n d lever (1.4 litre models)
1 Sliding part of gear lever
2 Reverse gear inhibitor cable
3 Gear selector rod
4 Gear engagement
5 Gear selector link
cable
6 Gear selector and engagement
7 Reverse gear inhibitor device
rod
Manual transmission 7A»3
Gear lever mounting
Control rod
Relay for engagement
and selector linkage
Gear selector rod
Gear selector rod
Reaction member
Bearings
Relay lever
1.3c G e a r c h a n g e linkage a n d lever (1.6 a n d 1.8 litre m o d e l s )
2 Gearchange lever
and linkage
removal, overhaul a n d refitting
1.2 litre
^
models
Removal
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
2 Remove the battery and mounting tray as
described in Chapter 5A.
3 Release the wiring f r o m the rear of the
battery mounting bracket, then undo the bolt
and remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the
nuts and remove the relay box f r o m the
m o u n t i n g bracket - position t h e box t o one
side.
4 Unbolt and remove the battery m o u n t i n g
bracket.
5 Inside the car, release the gear lever gaiter
f r o m the floor, then release the upper strap
and pull the gaiter over the knob.
6 Release the handbrake lever gaiter from the
floor, then d i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the
handbrake warning light switch.
7 Carefully prise the gear engagement cable
end from the lever on the transmission, then
unbolt the mounting bracket.
8 Carefully prise the gear selector cable end
from the lever on the transmission.
9 W o r k i n g under the car, d i s c o n n e c t the
handbrake cables from the equaliser bar then
release t h e m f r o m the rear bracket and tie
them to one side.
10 Remove the c o m p l e t e exhaust system
f r o m under the car with reference to C h a p ter 4C.
11 Unscrew the bolts and remove the heat
shield assembly from the underbody.
12 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts f r o m the
handbrake and gear lever control assembly.
There are 1 3 bolts in total.
13 Carefully lower the assembly and unscrew
the nuts securing the remote control
assembly to the gear lever mounting.
14 Withdraw the linkage and cables from the
engine compartment, then lower and remove
from under the car.
Overhaul
2.17 Tool f o r r e m o v i n g t h e k n o b f r o m t h e
gear lever
15 With the assembly on the b e n c h , unbolt
a n d remove the gear lever bracket and
remove the rubber cover.
16 Extract the clips securing the t w o outer
cables to the mounting, then disconnect
the cable ends. The engagement cable end is
a press fit on the ball, and the selector cable
end is secured with a circlip.
17 Unbolt the gear lever f r o m the bracket.
FIAT technicians use a special tool to press
the k n o b f r o m the t o p of t h e lever (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) however, a t o o l may be m a d e
from t w o metal plates and a long bolt, using
nuts to hold the plates in position.
18 To dismantle the gear lever m e c h a n i s m ,
extract the circlip and slide out the shaft and
lever. U n s c r e w the nut to remove the lever
from the shaft.
19 C h e c k t h e c o m p o n e n t s for wear and
damage, and renew them as necessary.
20 Reassemble the c o m p o n e n t s using a
reversal of the dismantling procedure.
Refitting
21 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
tighten all nuts and bolts securely. Check the
operation of the handbrake and if necessary
adjust it with reference to Chapter 9.
1.4 litre
models
Removal
22 A p p l y the h a n d b r a k e , then jack up the
front of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
23 Inside the car, release the gear lever gaiter
from the floor, then pull the knob together with
the gaiter from the t o p of the gear lever.
24 Release the handbrake lever gaiter from
the floor, then disconnect the wiring from the
handbrake warning light switch.
25 Remove the clip securing the gear
engagement cable to the transmission casing,
then carefully lever the cable end fitting from
the ball on the engagement lever.
26 U n s c r e w the bolt and d i s c o n n e c t the
reverse gear inhibitor and cable from the top
of the transmission. The inhibitor is located
beneath the battery position.
27 Unbolt the reaction and gear selector link
from the transmission.
28 W o r k i n g under the car, d i s c o n n e c t the
handbrake cables from the equaliser bar then
release t h e m f r o m the rear bracket and tie
them to one side.
29 Remove the complete exhaust system from
under the car with reference to Chapter 4C.
30 Unscrew the bolts and remove the heat
shield assembly from the underbody.
7A«4 Manual transmission
2.51 G e a r c h a n g e relay a n d r o d s o n t h e
s t e e r i n g gear
31 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts f r o m the
handbrake and gear lever control assembly.
There are 13 bolts in total.
32 Carefully lower the assembly and unscrew
the nuts securing the remote control
assembly to the gear lever mounting.
33 Withdraw the linkage and cables from the
engine compartment, then lower and remove
from under the car.
Overhaul
34 With the assembly on the bench, extract
the circlip and release the reverse inhibitor
cable f r o m the gear lever, at the s a m e time
unhooking the inner cable end fitting. Release
the cable from the base.
35 Extract the circlip and d i s c o n n e c t the
gearchange cable from the pin at the bottom
of the gear lever. Pull out the retaining clip and
release the cable from the base.
36 U n s c r e w the pivot bolt and remove the
gear lever from the gear selector link rod.
37 U n s c r e w the nuts a n d r e m o v e the gear
selector rod rear c l a m p f r o m the base.
Remove the support pad.
38 Withdraw the gear selector rod from the
base.
39 C h e c k the c o m p o n e n t s for wear and
damage and renew them as necessary.
40 Reassemble the linkage using a reversal
of the dismantling procedure, but apply a little
multi-purpose grease to the bearing surfaces.
Refitting
41 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
tighten all nuts and bolts securely. Check the
operation of the handbrake and if necessary
adjust it with reference to Chapter 9.
1.6 and 1.8 litre
models
46 Remove the complete exhaust system from
under the car with reference to Chapter 4C.
47 Disconnect the h a n d b r a k e c a b l e s from
the equaliser bar then release them from the
rear bracket and tie them to one side.
48 Unscrew the bolts and remove the heat
shield assembly from the underbody.
49 W o r k i n g in the engine c o m p a r t m e n t
identify the location of the three gearchange
rods to ensure correct refitting.
50 U n s c r e w the nut and d i s c o n n e c t the
control rod from the relay lever.
51 Detach the relay lever from the pivot on
the top of the steering gear by removing the
cap, spring clip and washers, and sliding the
lever from the pivot (see illustration).
52 Disconnect the reaction, selector and
engagement rods from the transmission, then
w i t h d r a w the rods as an assembly from the
engine compartment.
53 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts f r o m the
handbrake and gear lever control assembly.
There are 13 bolts in total.
54 Carefully lower the assembly together
with the handbrake lever from the underbody,
at the same time withdrawing the control rod
from the engine compartment.
Overhaul
55 With the assembly on the bench, unscrew
the t w o bolts securing the gear lever to the
mounting, and also unscrew the bolt securing
the control rod to the b o t t o m of the lever.
Remove the lever from its mounting bracket
and also remove the control rod.
56 The relay components may be dismantled
by u n s c r e w i n g the nut. Note the order of
removal as the components are removed from
the pivot.
57 C h e c k the c o m p o n e n t s for wear and
damage and renew them as necessary.
58 Reassemble the c o m p o n e n t s using a
reversal of the dismantling p r o c e d u r e , but
apply a little m u l t i - p u r p o s e grease to the
bearing surfaces.
Refitting
59 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
tighten all nuts and bolts securely. Check the
operation of the handbrake and if necessary
adjust it with reference to Chapter 9.
3 Manual transmission removal and refitting
^
Removal
42 A p p l y the h a n d b r a k e , then jack up the
front of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
43 Inside the car, release the gear lever
gaiter from the floor, then pull the knob together
with the gaiter from the top of the gear lever.
44 U n s c r e w the front m o u n t i n g bolt for the
handbrake and gear lever control assembly.
The bolt is located just in front of the lever.
45 Release the handbrake lever gaiter from
the floor, then disconnect the wiring from the
handbrake warning light switch.
1.2 and 1.4 litre
models
Removal
1 Select a solid, level surface to park the
vehicle o n . Give yourself enough s p a c e to
m o v e around it easily. Apply the handbrake
then jack up the front of the vehicle and
s u p p o r t it on axle s t a n d s (see Jacking and
vehicle support). Remove both front wheels.
2 Remove the battery and mounting tray as
described in Chapter 5A.
3 Release the wiring f r o m the rear of the
battery mounting bracket, then undo the bolt
and remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the
nuts and r e m o v e the relay box f r o m the
m o u n t i n g bracket - position the box to one
side.
4 Unbolt and remove the battery m o u n t i n g
bracket.
5 On 1.2 litre models, carefully prise the gear
e n g a g e m e n t cable end from the lever, then
unbolt the cable m o u n t i n g bracket from the
transmission.
6 On 1.4 litre models, disconnect the selector
rod from the lever on t o p of the transmission.
7 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the reversing
light switch on top of the transmission. Also
disconnect the wiring from the speedometer
sender.
8 On 1.4 litre models, unscrew the bolt and
remove the reverse inhibitor cable from the
transmission.
9 Unscrew the nut and disconnect the earth
cable.
10 Disconnect the c l u t c h cable from the
transmission with reference to Chapter 6.
11 On 1.2 litre m o d e l s , carefully prise the
gear selector cable end from the lever, then
position both gearchange cables to one side.
12 On 1.4 litre models, pull out the clip and
disconnect the gear engagement outer cable
f r o m the t r a n s m i s s i o n , then prise the inner
cable end fitting f r o m the ball on the lever.
Position the cable to one side.
13 U n s c r e w the upper bolts securing the
starter motor to the transmission.
14 Working on each side at a time, unscrew
the nut and use a balljoint separator tool to
disconnect the steering track rod ends from
the steering arms on the hub carriers. Refer to
Chapter 10 if necessary.
15 Remove the inner panel splash g u a r d s
from under each side of the front wings, then
remove the dust guards after disconnecting
the wires from the front brake pads.
16 Position a suitable container beneath the
transmission, then unscrew and remove the
drain plug and allow the oil to drain. On
completion, refit and tighten the drain plug.
17 Remove the exhaust front d o w n p i p e as
described in Chapter 4C.
18 Remove
the
rightand
left-hand
driveshafts as described in Chapter 8. Use a
suitable lever to prise the driveshafts from the
transmission, using a thin piece of w o o d to
prevent damage to the transmission casing.
19 D i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the starter
motor, then unscrew the lower mounting bolt
and w i t h d r a w the starter m o t o r f r o m the
transmission.
20 Unbolt and remove the flywheel cover.
21 Unbolt the exhaust front d o w n p i p e
securing bracket from the front of the cylinder
block for access to the t r a n s m i s s i o n - t o engine mounting bolt. Unscrew and remove
the bolt.
22 The engine must now be supported while
the transmission is being removed. To do this,
remove the engine t o p cover and attach a
Manual transmission 7A»5
hoist to the left-hand end of the inlet manifold,
then take the weight of the engine. Make sure
that the engine is well s u p p o r t e d since only
one other engine m o u n t i n g will still be
connected when the transmission is removed.
Do n o t support the engine with a trolley jack
p o s i t i o n e d under the s u m p because the
position of the r i g h t - h a n d front engine
mounting dictates that the centre of gravity of
the engine mass is high, and it is quite likely
that the engine will fall to one side damaging
either the radiator or the rear bulkhead. As an
additional p r e c a u t i o n , position axle s t a n d s
and a block of w o o d beneath the engine.
23 Unscrew and remove the upper and lower
bolts securing the transmission to the engine,
but leave the side nut and bolt at this stage.
24 Support the transmission on a trolley jack.
25 W o r k i n g under the car, unbolt the rear
engine m o u n t i n g and bracket f r o m the
transmission and underbody.
26 U n b o l t the front engine m o u n t i n g and
bracket
from the front
valance
and
transmission.
27 Lower the transmission and engine
slightly until the transmission is clear of the
left-hand inner b o d y panels. U n s c r e w and
remove the remaining rear mounting nut and
front mounting bolt securing the transmission
to the engine, t h e n , w i t h the help of an
assistant, withdraw the transmission directly
from the left-hand end of the engine. Do not
allow the weight of the transmission to rest on
the clutch friction disc hub.
28 Lower the transmission to the ground and
withdraw from under the car.
Refitting
29 Before refitting the t r a n s m i s s i o n , c h e c k
the clutch release bearing w i t h reference to
Chapter 6 and renew it if necessary.
30 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but first
apply a little high-melting-point grease to the
clutch friction disc hub splines, taking care not
to allow any onto the friction linings. Refer as
necessary to the Chapters used for the removal
procedures. Tighten the nuts and bolts to the
specified torque where given. Fill the
transmission with the correct grade and quantity
of oil with reference to Chapter 1. Finally, adjust
the clutch as described in Chapter 6.
1.6 litre
models
Removal
31 Select a s o l i d , level surface to park the
vehicle o n . Give yourself enough s p a c e to
m o v e around it easily. Apply the handbrake
then jack up the front of the vehicle and
s u p p o r t it on axle s t a n d s (see Jacking and
vehicle support). Remove both front wheels.
32 Unbolt the air inlet duct from the engine
compartment
front c r o s s m e m b e r ,
then
disconnect it from the air cleaner and remove.
33 Remove the air inlet duct from between the
air cleaner and throttle body by loosening the
clips. Also disconnect the crankcase ventilation
hose from the front of the cylinder block.
34 Remove the battery and battery tray with
reference to Chapter 5A.
35 Release the wiring from the rear of the
battery mounting bracket, then undo the bolt
and remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the
nuts and remove the relay box from the
mounting bracket - position the box to one side.
36 D i s c o n n e c t the wiring f r o m the engine
management
ECU
by
unclipping
the
connector. Unscrew the nuts and remove the
ECU m o u n t i n g bracket f r o m the battery
mounting bracket. The nuts also secure the
starter motor and fuel injection wiring.
37 Unbolt and remove the battery mounting
bracket and unclip the remaining wiring
supports.
38 As a p p l i c a b l e , either d i s c o n n e c t the
clutch cable or unbolt the slave cylinder from
the transmission with reference to Chapter 6
(see illustration).
39 Unscrew the nut and disconnect the earth
wire from the transmission (see illustration).
40 Disconnect the gear linkage and reaction
rods from the transmission by unscrewing the
nuts or separating the rod socket from the ball
(see illustration).
41 Disconnect
the
wiring
from
the
speedometer sender (see illustration).
42 Disconnect the wiring from the reversing
light switch (see illustration).
43 Remove the electric cooling fan assembly
from the rear of the radiator with reference to
Chapter 3.
44 Disconnect the wiring from the starter
motor, then unscrew the mounting bolts and
remove the starter motor from the transmission.
Refer to Chapter 5A if necessary.
45 Position a suitable container beneath the
transmission, then unscrew and remove the
drain plug and allow the oil to drain (see
illustration). On completion, refit and tighten
the drain plug.
3.38 U n b o l t i n g t h e c l u t c h slave cylinder
from the transmission
3.39 Earth w i r e o n t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
3.40 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e gear l i n k a g e a n d
reaction rods from the transmission
3.41 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
speedometer sender
3.42 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
reversing light s w i t c h
3.45 Draining t h e oil f r o m t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
7A«6 Manual transmission
3.50 R e m o v i n g t h e f l y w h e e l c o v e r
3.52 Rear e n g i n e m o u n t i n g a n d b r a c k e t
46 Remove
the
rightand
left-hand
driveshafts as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 8. The
clips securing the inner joint gaiters to the
transmission side flanges must be removed,
and the driveshaft inner t r i p o d joints
withdrawn from the differential sun gears.
47 Unscrew and remove the upper and lower
bolts securing the transmission to the engine,
but leave the side nut and bolt at this stage.
48 The engine must now be supported while
the transmission is being r e m o v e d . FIAT
recommend fitting an eyelet to the thermostat
housing after unbolting the wiring s u p p o r t
bracket from it, however an alternative method
is to fit the lifting chain to the left-hand end of
the exhaust manifold. If the latter m e t h o d is
used, first remove the engine t o p cover then
attach a hoist to the manifold and take the
weight of the engine. D o n o t s u p p o r t the
engine with a trolley jack positioned under the
s u m p because the position of the right-hand
front engine mounting dictates that the centre
of gravity of the engine mass is high, and it is
quite likely that the engine will fall to one side
d a m a g i n g either the radiator or the rear
b u l k h e a d . As an additional precaution,
position axle s t a n d s and a block of w o o d
beneath the engine.
are not strained - if necessary, drain the
cooling system and disconnect the hoses.
55 Lower the transmission to the ground and
withdraw from under the car.
49 Support the transmission on a trolley jack.
50 Unbolt and r e m o v e the flywheel cover
(see illustration).
51 Unbolt the exhaust front d o w n p i p e from
the exhaust manifold and support on an axle
stand. Recover the gasket.
52 W o r k i n g under the car, unbolt the rear
engine m o u n t i n g and bracket f r o m the
transmission
and
underbody
(see
illustration).
53 U n b o l t the front engine m o u n t i n g and
bracket
from
the front
valance
and
transmission.
54 Lower the transmission and engine
slightly until the transmission is clear of the
left-hand inner b o d y panels. U n s c r e w and
remove the remaining rear mounting nut and
front mounting bolt securing the transmission
t o the engine, t h e n , with the help of an
assistant, withdraw the transmission directly
from the left-hand end of the engine. Do not
allow the weight of the transmission to rest on
the clutch friction disc hub. The engine may
need to be moved forward a little, but make
sure that the heater hoses on the bulkhead
1.8 litre
models
56 Select a s o l i d , level surface t o park the
vehicle o n . Give yourself enough s p a c e to
m o v e around it easily. Apply the handbrake
then j a c k up the front of the vehicle and
s u p p o r t it on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle support). Remove both front wheels.
57 Unbolt the air inlet duct from the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t front c r o s s m e m b e r ,
then
disconnect it from the air cleaner and remove.
58 Remove the battery and battery tray with
reference to Chapter 5A.
59 Remove the inlet duct from the rear of the
engine c o m p a r t m e n t by d i s c o n n e c t i n g the
wiring and crankcase ventilation hose, then
loosening the clips and d i s c o n n e c t i n g the
duct from the throttle body and air cleaner.
60 Release the wiring f r o m the rear of the
battery mounting bracket, then undo the bolt
and remove the relay box cover. Unscrew the
nuts and remove the relay b o x f r o m the
m o u n t i n g bracket - position the b o x t o one
side.
61 U n s c r e w the bolts and d i s c o n n e c t the
wiring from the battery positive terminal.
62 Unbolt the remove the battery mounting
bracket and unclip the remaining wiring.
63 D i s c o n n e c t the c l u t c h cable f r o m the
transmission with reference to Chapter 6.
64 Unscrew the nut and disconnect the earth
wire from the transmission. Also disconnect
the wiring from the speedometer sender.
65 U n s c r e w the nuts and d i s c o n n e c t the
gearchange
reaction
link
from
the
transmission.
66 Remove the electric cooling fan assembly
from the rear of the radiator with reference to
Chapter 3.
67 Unscrew and remove the two upper bolts
securing the transmission to the rear of the
engine.
68 At the r i g h t - h a n d side of the engine,
unbolt the short engine steady bar between
the cylinder head and inner body panel.
69 Remove
the
rightand
left-hand
driveshafts as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 8. If
preferred, the driveshafts can remain attached
to the front hub bearings, and tied to one side.
70 Position a suitable container beneath the
transmission, then unscrew and remove the
drain plug and allow the oil to drain. On
completion, refit and tighten the drain plug.
71 Remove the intermediate shaft from the
r i g h t - h a n d side of the transmission as
described in Chapter 8.
72 Prise the gear engagement and selector
rods from the levers on the transmission.
73 Remove the exhaust front d o w n p i p e as
described in Chapter 4C.
74 Disconnect the wiring from the starter
motor, then unscrew the mounting bolts and
remove
the
starter
motor
from
the
transmission. Refer to Chapter 5A if necessary.
75 Unbolt the exhaust front d o w n p i p e
securing bracket from the front of the cylinder
block for a c c e s s to the t r a n s m i s s i o n - t o engine mounting bolt. Unscrew and remove
the bolt.
76 The engine must now be supported while
the transmission is being r e m o v e d . FIAT
r e c o m m e n d fitting an eyelet to the left-hand
side of the cylinder block, however an
alternative method is to fit the lifting chain to
the left-hand end of the inlet manifold. Attach
a suitable hoist and take the w e i g h t of the
engine. D o n o t s u p p o r t the engine with a
trolley jack p o s i t i o n e d under the s u m p
because the position of the right-hand front
engine m o u n t i n g dictates that the centre of
gravity of the engine mass is high, and it is
quite likely that the engine will fall to one side
d a m a g i n g either the radiator or the rear
b u l k h e a d . As an additional p r e c a u t i o n ,
position axle stands and a block of w o o d
beneath the engine.
77 Support the transmission on a trolley jack.
78 W o r k i n g under the car, unbolt the rear
engine m o u n t i n g and bracket f r o m the
transmission and underbody.
79 Unbolt the engine left-hand side mounting
from the transmission and underbody.
80 Lower the transmission and engine
slightly until the transmission is clear of the
left-hand inner b o d y panels. U n s c r e w and
remove the remaining bolts and nut securing
the transmission to the engine, then, with the
help
of
an
assistant,
withdraw
the
transmission directly from the left-hand end of
the engine. Do not allow the w e i g h t of the
transmission to rest on the clutch friction disc
hub. The engine may need to be m o v e d
forward a little, but make sure that the heater
hoses on the bulkhead are not strained - if
necessary, drain the cooling system and
disconnect the hoses.
81 Lower the transmission to the ground and
withdraw from under the car.
Refitting
82 Refitting is a reversal of the removal
p r o c e d u r e w i t h reference to the Chapters
used for removal, but note the f o l l o w i n g
points.
a) Check the clutch release bearing with
reference to Chapter 6 before refitting the
transmission.
Manual transmission 7A»7
b) Apply a smear of
high-melting-point
grease to the clutch friction disc splines;
take care to avoid contaminating the
friction surfaces.
c) Tighten all bolts to the specified torque,
where given.
d) Obsen/e any special procedures for
setting the engine mountings as given in
Chapters 2A, 2B, 2C and 2D. In particular,
on 1.6 and 1.8 litre engines assemble the
left-hand mounting loosely, then tighten
the bolts securing the mounting to the
left-hand end of the transmission to 5 Nm,
followed by the bolts securing the
mounting to the front of the transmission
tightened to the same torque. Finally, fully
• tighten the bolts.
e) Refill the transmission with the correct
quantity and grade of oil with reference to
Chapter 1.
f) Adjust the clutch as described in Chapter 6.
4 Manual transmission
overhaul general information
Overhauling a manual transmission is a
difficult and involved j o b for the DIY h o m e
m e c h a n i c . In addition to dismantling and
reassembling many small parts, clearances
must
be precisely measured a n d , if
necessary, changed by selecting shims and
s p a c e r s . Internal transmission c o m p o n e n t s
are also often difficult to obtain, and in many
instances, extremely expensive. Because of
this, if the transmission develops a fault or
becomes noisy, the best course of action is to
have the unit overhauled by a specialist
repairer,
or
to
obtain
an
exchange
reconditioned unit.
Nevertheless, it is not impossible for the
more experienced mechanic to overhaul the
transmission, provided the special tools are
available, and the job is done in a deliberate
s t e p - b y - s t e p manner, so that nothing is
overlooked.
The tools necessary for an overhaul include
internal and external circlip pliers, bearing
pullers, a slide hammer, a set of pin punches,
a dial test indicator, and possibly a hydraulic
press. In addition, a large, sturdy workbench
and a vice will be required.
During dismantling of the t r a n s m i s s i o n ,
make careful notes of how each component is
f i t t e d , to make reassembly easier and more
accurate.
Before dismantling the transmission, it will
help if y o u have s o m e idea what area is
m a l f u n c t i o n i n g . Certain p r o b l e m s can be
closely related to specific areas in the
t r a n s m i s s i o n , w h i c h can m a k e c o m p o n e n t
examination and replacement easier. Refer to
the Fault finding section at the end of this
manual for more information.
5 Reversing light switch testing, removal and refitting
^
|k
Testing
1 The reversing light circuit is controlled by a
plunger-type switch screwed into the front of
the transmission casing. If a fault develops,
first ensure that the circuit fuse has not blown.
2 To test the s w i t c h , d i s c o n n e c t the wiring
connector, and use a multimeter (set to the
resistance function) or a battery-and-bulb test
circuit to c h e c k that there is continuity
b e t w e e n the s w i t c h terminals only w h e n
reverse gear is selected. If this is not the case,
and there are no obvious breaks or other
damage to the wires, the switch is faulty, and
must be renewed.
Removal
3 Access to the reversing light switch is best
achieved from under the vehicle. A p p l y the
h a n d b r a k e , then jack up the front of the
vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle s t a n d s (see
Jacking and vehicle support).
4 Position
a
container
beneath
the
transmission to catch any spilt oil.
5 D i s c o n n e c t the wiring c o n n e c t o r , then
unscrew the s w i t c h f r o m t h e transmission
casing.
Refitting
6 Refit the switch and tighten securely.
7 C h e c k and if necessary t o p up the
transmission oil level w i t h reference to
Chapter 1.
8 Reconnect the wiring then lower the vehicle
to the ground.
6 Differential oil seals
(except 1.6 litre models) renewal
|g
gQ
1 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support it on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
2 On 1.2 and 1.4 litre m o d e l s , r e m o v e the
relevant driveshaft as described in Chapter 8.
3 To renew the left-hand oil seal on 1.8 litre
models, remove the driveshaft as described in
Chapter 8. Position a container beneath the
transmission to catch spilt oil/fluid. Lever out
the drive flange, using a suitable lever and
piece of thin w o o d to protect the transmission
casing.
4 To renew the right-hand oil seal on 1.8 litre
models,
remove
the
driveshaft
and
intermediate shaft as described in Chapter 8.
5 W i p e clean the old oil seal and note the
f i t t e d d e p t h below the casing edge. This is
necessary to determine the correct fitted
position of the new oil seal.
6 Using a large screwdriver or lever, carefully
prise t h e oil seal out of t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
casing, taking care not to damage the casing.
If the oil seal is reluctant to m o v e , it is
sometimes helpful to carefully drive it into the
transmission a little way, applying the force at
one point only. This will have the effect of
swivelling the seal out of the casing, and it can
then be pulled out. If the oil seal is particularly
difficult to r e m o v e , an oil seal removal tool
may be obtained from a garage or accessory
shop.
7 Wipe clean the oil seal seating in the
transmission casing, then press the new seal
a little way into the casing by hand, making
sure that it is square with its seating and its
closed end is facing outwards.
8 Using a suitable t u b e or large s o c k e t ,
carefully drive the oil seal fully into the casing
up to its previously-noted fitted depth. Check
that the oil seal spring has not been displaced
from its location around the inner lip.
9 On 1.8 litre models, either press in the lefthand drive flange until the internal circlip
engages the groove, or refit the intermediate
shaft with reference to Chapter 8.
10 Refit the driveshaft with
reference
to Chapter 8, then lower the car to the
ground.
6»1
Chapter 6
Clutch
Contents
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
- adjustment
assembly - removal, inspection and refitting
cable - removal and refitting
hydraulic system - bleeding
master cylinder - removal and refitting
2
7
3
4
5
Clutch pedal - removal and refitting
Clutch release mechanism - removal, inspection and refitting
Clutch slave cylinder - removal and refitting
General information
9
8
6
1
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
§^
novice with little
expenence
Fairly easy, suitable
§k
for beginner with
g^
s o m e experience
^
g^
Difficult, suitable for
^
V e r y difficult,
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
^
suitable for expert DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
Fairly difficult,
^
g^
g^
or professional
2^
gQ
Specifications
General
Type
Single friction disc with diaphragm spring pressure plate, cable- or
hydraulically-operated according to model
Clutch pedal travel (cable-operated type)
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
litre
litre
litre
litre
models
models
models
models
155.0
155.0
170.0
170.0
± 10
± 10
± 10
±10
mm
mm
mm
mm
Friction disc diameter
1.2and 1.4 litre models
1.6 litre models
1.8 litre models
190.0 m m
200.0 m m
215.0 m m
Torque wrench setting
Nm
ibfft
Pressure plate retaining bolts
25
18
6*2 Clutch
1 General information
Vehicles with manual transmission are fitted
w i t h a single friction disc with d i a p h r a g m
spring pressure plate c l u t c h s y s t e m . When
the c l u t c h pedal is d e p r e s s e d , effort is
transmitted to the clutch release mechanism
either mechanically by means of a cable, or
hydraulically by means of a master cylinder
and slave cylinder. The release fork forces the
release bearing against the centre of the
d i a p h r a g m s p r i n g , w h i c h w i t h d r a w s the
pressure plate from the flywheel and releases
the friction disc.
Where a p p l i c a b l e , the hydraulic fluid
employed in the clutch system is the same as
that used in the braking system, hence fluid is
supplied to the master cylinder from a tapping
on the brake fluid reservoir. The c l u t c h
hydraulic system must be sealed before work
is carried out on any of its c o m p o n e n t s and
then on c o m p l e t i o n , t o p p e d up and bled t o
purge any accumulated air.
2 Clutchadjustment
I
Note: This procedure applies to models fitted
with
a cable-operated
clutch
release
mechanism.
No adjustment
is possible
on
models
with
the
hydraulically-operated
system.
1 The c l u t c h a d j u s t m e n t is c h e c k e d by
measuring the c l u t c h pedal travel. If a new
cable has been fitted, settle it in position by
depressing the clutch pedal at least five times.
2 Ensure that there are no o b s t r u c t i o n s
beneath the clutch pedal, then measure the
distance f r o m the upper edge of the c l u t c h
pedal pad to the floor by resting a ruler on the
floor. Position the ruler directly in line with the
movement of the clutch pedal.
3 Have an assistant fully depress the pedal,
then measure the distance f r o m the s a m e
point on the pedal to the floor.
4 Subtract the second measurement from the
first to obtain the clutch pedal travel. If this is
not
within
the
range
given
in
the
Specifications at the start of this Chapter,
adjust the clutch as follows.
5 The clutch cable is adjusted by means of
the adjuster nut on the transmission end of
the cable. Access to the nut is best achieved
from under the vehicle. Apply the handbrake,
then jack up the front of the vehicle and
s u p p o r t it on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle support).
6 Working under the left-hand side of the
engine compartment, loosen the locknut on the
end of the clutch cable. Adjust the position of
the adjuster nut, then depress the clutch pedal
several times and re-measure the clutch pedal
travel. Repeat this procedure until the clutch
pedal travel is as specified (see illustration).
7 Once the adjuster nut is correctly
positioned, and the pedal travel is correctly
set, securely tighten the cable locknut then
lower the vehicle to the ground.
3 Clutch cable removal and refitting
Note: This procedure applies to models fitted
with
a cable-operated
clutch
release
mechanism.
Removal
1 Remove the battery and battery tray as
d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 5A, and unbolt the
battery m o u n t i n g bracket. M o v e the relay
holder box to one side after removing the
cover and unscrewing the mounting bolts.
2 On 1.2 and 1.4 litre m o d e l s , unscrew the
adjustment locknut and adjuster nut from the
end of the cable fitting, then release the inner
and outer c a b l e s from the transmission
h o u s i n g . Note the position of the d a m p e r
block.
3 On 1.6 and 1.8 litre m o d e l s , release the
outer cable from the transmission and unhook
the inner cable from the release lever.
4 W o r k i n g inside the vehicle, fold back the
carpet then unhook the inner cable from the
top of the clutch pedal.
5 Returning to the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ,
release the cable from the supports then pull
it f r o m the bulkhead at the s a m e t i m e
releasing the rubber buffer. W i t h d r a w the
cable
assembly
from
the
engine,
compartment.
Refitting
2.6 C l u t c h c a b l e a d j u s t m e n t
6 Apply a smear of multi-purpose grease to
the inner cable and end fittings, then pass the
cable through the bulkhead. Make sure that
the rubber buffer is pressed firmly into the
bulkhead before locating the end of the outer
cable in it.
7 Inside the vehicle, hook the inner cable
onto the top of the clutch pedal.
8 On 1.2 and 1.4 litre models, locate the outer
cable on the transmission housing, then refit
the adjustment and lock nuts.
9 On 1.6 and 1.8 litre models, hook the inner
cable o n t o the release lever and locate the
outer cable on the transmission.
10 Adjust the cable as d e s c r i b e d in Section 2.
11 Refit the relay holder box, battery and
mounting bracket, referring to Chapter 5A as
necessary. Also refit the carpet inside the
vehicle.
4 Clutch hydraulic system
bleeding
Note: This procedure applies to models fitted
with the hydraulically-operated
clutch release
mechanism.
Warning:
Hydraulic
fluid
is
poisonous;
thoroughly
wash off
spills
from bare skin
without
delay. Seek immediate
medical
advice if any fluid is swallowed or gets into
the eyes. Certain types of hydraulic
fluid
are inflammable
and may ignite
when
brought into contact with hot
components;
when servicing any hydraulic
system, it is
safest
to assume
that
the
fluid
IS
inflammable,
and to take
precautions
against the risk of fire as though it were
petrol that was being handled.
Hydraulic
fluid is an effective paint stripper and will
also attack many plastics. If spillage
occurs
onto painted bodywork or fittings, it should
be washed off immediately,
using
copious
quantities
of fresh
water.
It is
also
hygroscopic
- it can absorb moisture
from
the air, which then renders it useless. Old
fluid may have suffered
contamination,
and should
never
be re-used.
When
topping-up
or renewing
the fluid,
always
use the recommended
grade, and
ensure
that it comes from a new sealed
container.
A
General
information
1 Whenever t h e c l u t c h hydraulic lines are
disconnected for service or repair, a certain
a m o u n t of air will enter the s y s t e m . The
presence of air in any hydraulic system will
i n t r o d u c e a degree of elasticity, and in the
c l u t c h s y s t e m this will translate into poor
pedal feel and r e d u c e d travel, leading to
inefficient gear c h a n g e s and even clutch
system failure. For this reason, the hydraulic
lines must be sealed using hose c l a m p s
before any w o r k is carried out and then on
c o m p l e t i o n , t o p p e d up and bled to remove
any air bubbles.
2 The m o s t effective w a y of bleeding the
clutch hydraulic system is to use a pressure
brake bleeding kit. These are readily available
in motor accessories shops and are extremely
Clutch 6«3
5.7 Clip s e c u r i n g t h e c l u t c h pedal t o t h e m a s t e r cylinder p u s h r o d
effective, and the following s u b - s e c t i o n
describes bleeding the clutch system using
such a kit. The alternative method is to bleed
the system by depressing the clutch pedal as
for bleeding the brake hydraulic system - refer
to Chapter 9 for details of this method.
Bleeding
3 Remove the battery and battery tray as
d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 5A, and unbolt the
battery mounting bracket for access to the
bleed screw on the clutch slave cylinder. Move
the relay holder box to one side after removing
the cover and unscrewing the mounting bolts.
Removal of the air cleaner ducting may also
provide additional working room.
4 Remove the protective cap from the bleed
screw.
5 Fit a ring spanner over the bleed screw head,
but do not slacken it at this point. Connect a
length of clear plastic hose over the nipple and
insert the other end into a clean container. Pour
hydraulic fluid into the container, such that the
end of the hose is covered.
6 Following the manufacturer's instructions,
pour hydraulic fluid into the bleeding kit
container.
7 Unscrew the brake fluid reservoir cap, then
connect the bleeding kit fluid supply hose to
the reservoir.
8 Connect the pressure hose to a supply of
compressed air - a spare tyre is a convenient
source.
Caution:
Check that the pressure
in the
tyre does not exceed the maximum
supply
pressure
quoted by the kit
manufacturer,
let some air escape to reduce the
pressure,
if necessary. Gently open the air valve and
allow
the air and fluid
pressures
to
equalise.
Check that there are no leaks
before
proceeding.
9 Using the spanner, loosen the bleed screw
until fluid and air bubbles can be seen to flow
through the tube, into the container. Maintain
a steady flow until the emerging fluid is free of
air b u b b l e s , then tighten the bleed screw.
Keep a watchful eye on the level of fluid in the
bleeding kit container and the brake fluid
5.8 U n i o n nut o n t h e c l u t c h m a s t e r cylinder
reservoir - if it is allowed to drop too low, air
may be forced into the system, defeating the
object of the exercise. To refill the container,
turn off the c o m p r e s s e d air supply, remove
the lid and pour in an appropriate quantity of
clean fluid from a new container - do not reuse the fluid collected in the receiving
container. Repeat as necessary until the
ejected fluid is bubble-free.
10 On completion, p u m p the clutch pedal
several times to assess its feel and travel. If firm,
constant pedal resistance is not felt throughout
the pedal stroke, it is probable that air is still
present in the system - repeat the bleeding
procedure until the pedal feel is restored.
11 Depressurise the bleeding kit and remove
it. At this point the fluid reservoir may be
'over-full', and the excess should be removed
using a clean pipette to reduce the level to the
MAX mark.
12 Remove the plastic hose from the bleed
screw and refit the protective cap.
13 Refit the battery and m o u n t i n g bracket,
and also the air cleaner ducting if removed.
5 Clutch master cylinder removal and refitting
A
Warning: Refer to the warning
the beginning of Section 4.
resonator (as applicable) for access to the
bulkhead at the rear of the engine compartment.
4 Release the hydraulic hose f r o m its
supports over the transmission.
5 At the brake fluid reservoir, fit a hose clamp
to the c l u t c h master cylinder s u p p l y hose.
Alternatively s y p h o n all the fluid f r o m the
reservoir.
6 Working inside the vehicle, loosen the clip
and disconnect the supply hose from the top
of the clutch master cylinder. Anticipate some
loss of fluid by placing cloth rags on the floor
below the master cylinder.
7 Extract the clip, remove the washer, and
disconnect the master cylinder pushrod from
the clutch pedal (see illustration).
8 Unscrew the c l u t c h master cylinder
m o u n t i n g nuts and w i t h d r a w the master
cylinder until the high pressure pipe union nut
can be unscrewed from the outlet on the rear
of the unit. Alternatively, unscrew the union
nut f r o m inside the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ,
although access is not easy (see illustration).
Withdraw the master cylinder from inside the
vehicle and recover the gasket.
9 It is not possible to obtain an overhaul kit
from FIAT however some motor factors may
be able to supply one. Follow the instructions
with the repair kit if obtained.
at
Note: This procedure applies to models fitted
with the hydraulically-operated
clutch release
mechanism.
Removal
1 Where applicable, remove the air cleaner air
inlet duct from the engine compartment front
crossmember by unscrewing the two bolts.
2 Remove the battery and battery tray as
d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 5A, and unbolt the
battery mounting bracket. Release the wiring
from the supports on the bracket. M o v e the
relay holder box to one side after removing
the cover and unscrewing the mounting bolts.
3 Remove the air cleaner ducting as described
in Chapter 4A or 4B. Also remove the air duct
Refitting
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
apply a little grease to the clutch pedal pivot.
T i g h t e n the m o u n t i n g bolts a n d union nut
securely. On c o m p l e t i o n bleed the c l u t c h
hydraulic system as described in Section 4.
Clutch slave cylinder removal and refitting
A
Warning: Refer to the warning
the beginning of Section 4.
at
Note: This procedure applies to models fitted
with the hydraulically-operated
clutch release
mechanism.
6«4 Clutch
6.4 C l u t c h slave cylinder l o c a t i o n o n t h e
transmission
Removal
1 Remove the battery and battery tray as
d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 5A, and unbolt the
battery mounting bracket. Release the wiring
from the supports on the bracket. M o v e the
relay holder b o x to one side after removing
the cover and unscrewing the mounting bolts.
2 Remove the air cleaner d u c t i n g as
described in Chapter 4A or 4 B . Also remove
the resonator (as applicable).
3 T o seal off the hydraulic supply to the
clutch slave cylinder, fit a brake hose clamp to
the flexible section of the hose located over
the transmission.
4 Unscrew the union nut and disconnect the
hydraulic pipe f r o m the slave cylinder (see
illustration). Be prepared for some fluid loss
by placing rags beneath the cylinder.
5 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts and release
the slave cylinder p u s h r o d f r o m the release
arm on the t r a n s m i s s i o n , then remove the
slave cylinder f r o m the engine c o m p a r t m e n t
(see illustration).
6 It is not possible to obtain an overhaul kit
from FIAT however some motor factors may
be able to supply one. Follow the instructions
with the repair kit if obtained.
Refitting
7 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but apply
a little grease to the tip of the slave cylinder
p u s h r o d . Tighten the m o u n t i n g bolts and
union nut securely. On completion bleed the
c l u t c h hydraulic s y s t e m as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
7 Clutch assembly removal, inspection
and refitting
6.6 R e m o v i n g t h e c l u t c h slave cylinder
from the transmission
7.1 V i e w of t h e c l u t c h w i t h t h e
transmission removed
with rags, dispose
of the
contaminated
rags and cleaner
in a sealed,
marked
container.
N o t e : Although some friction materials may
no longer contain asbestos, it is safest to
assume that they DO, and to take precautions
accordingly.
require renewal. It is also worth
considering
the renewal of the clutch components
on a
preventative
basis if the engine
and/or
transmission
have been removed for some
other reason.
5 Separate the pressure plate and friction
disc and place them on the bench.
6 When cleaning c l u t c h c o m p o n e n t s , read
first the warning at the beginning of this
S e c t i o n . Remove dust w o r k i n g in a w e l l ventilated atmosphere.
7 Check the friction disc facings for signs of
wear, d a m a g e or oil c o n t a m i n a t i o n . If the
friction material is c r a c k e d , burnt, scored or
d a m a g e d , or if it is contaminated with oil or
grease (shown by shiny black patches), the
friction disc must be renewed.
Removal
1 Unless the complete engine/transmission is
to be removed from the car and separated for
major overhaul (see Chapter 2E), the clutch
can be reached by removing the transmission
as described in Chapter 7A (see illustration).
2 Before disturbing the clutch, use chalk or a
marker pen to mark the relationship of the
pressure plate assembly to the flywheel.
3 Working in a diagonal sequence, unscrew
the pressure plate bolts by half a turn at a
time, until spring pressure is released and the
bolts can be removed by hand (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note that on some models, the
bolts are of Ribe-type, requiring a special key
to remove them.
4 Prise the pressure plate assembly off its
locating dowels, and collect the friction disc,
noting w h i c h way round the friction disc is
fitted (see illustration).
Inspection
Note: Due to the amount of work necessary to
remove and refit clutch components,
it is
usually considered good practice to renew the
clutch friction disc, pressure plate assembly
and release bearing as a matched set, even if
only one of these is actually worn enough to
8 If the friction material is still serviceable,
c h e c k that the centre boss splines are
unworn, that the torsion springs are in g o o d
condition and securely fastened, and that all
the rivets are tight. If any wear or damage is
found, the friction disc must be renewed.
9 If the friction material is fouled with oil, this
must be due to an oil leak from the crankshaft
rear (left-hand) oil seal, from the s u m p - t o cylinder block joint, or from the transmission
input shaft. Renew the seal or repair the joint,
as appropriate, as described in the relevant
part of Chapter 2, before installing the new
friction disc.
10 Check the pressure plate assembly for
obvious signs of wear or damage. Shake it to
c h e c k for loose rivets or w o r n or d a m a g e d
fulcrum rings, and check that the drive straps
securing the pressure plate to the cover do
g^>
S
A
Warning: Dust created by clutch
wear
and deposited
on
the
clutch components
may
contain
asbestos,
which
is a
health
hazard.
DO NOT
blow
it out
with
compressed
air, or inhale any of it. DO NOT
use petrol or petroleum-based
solvents to
clean off the dust. Brake system cleaner or
methylated
spirit should be used to flush
the dust into a suitable
receptacle.
After
the clutch components
are wiped
clean
7.3 R e m o v i n g t h e c l u t c h p r e s s u r e plate
bolts
7.4 R e m o v i n g t h e c l u t c h p r e s s u r e plate
a n d f r i c t i o n plate
Clutch 6*5
7.17 U s i n g a c l u t c h f r i c t i o n plate
centralising tool
8.2 R e m o v i n g t h e release b e a r i n g f r o m t h e
fork and guide tube
8.5 C l u t c h release shaft (1) a n d upper
shaft b u s h (2)
not show signs (such as a deep yellow or blue
discoloration) of overheating. If the diaphragm
spring fingers are worn or damaged, or if the
spring pressure is in any way s u s p e c t , the
pressure plate assembly should be renewed.
11 Check that the m a c h i n e d
bearing
surfaces of the pressure plate and flywheel
are clean, c o m p l e t e l y flat, and free f r o m
scratches or scoring. If either is discoloured
f r o m excessive heat, or s h o w s signs of
cracks, it should be renewed - although minor
d a m a g e of this nature can s o m e t i m e s be
polished away using emery paper.
crankshaft, so that the friction disc can then
be moved around until the disc is centred on
the crankshaft hole. Alternatively, a c l u t c h aligning t o o l can be used to eliminate the
guesswork; these can be obtained from most
accessory shops (see illustration). A h o m e made aligning tool can be fabricated from a
length of metal rod or w o o d e n d o w e l w h i c h
fits closely inside the crankshaft hole, and has
insulating tape wound around it to match the
diameter of the friction disc splined hole.
is tight, use a thin drift from inside the
bellhousing.
6 Lift the release shaft from the lower bush
then remove it f r o m inside the transmission
bellhousing.
7 Extract the lower bush from the casing.
12 Check that the release bearing c o n t a c t
surface rotates smoothly and easily, with no
sign of noise or roughness. Also check that
the surface itself is smooth and unworn, with
no sign of cracks, pitting or scoring. If there is
any d o u b t about its c o n d i t i o n , the bearing
must be renewed as described in Section 8.
Refitting
13 On reassembly, ensure that the bearing
surfaces of the flywheel and pressure plate
are completely clean. Use solvent to remove
any protective grease from new components.
14 Fit the friction disc so that its spring hub
assembly faces away from the flywheel. Note
that there may also be a marking s h o w i n g
which way round the disc is to be refitted.
15 Refit the pressure plate assembly, aligning
the marks made on dismantling (if the original
p r e s s u r e p l a t e is r e - u s e d ) , a n d l o c a t i n g
t h e pressure plate on its three locating
d o w e l s . Fit the pressure plate bolts, but
tighten t h e m only finger-tight, so that the
friction disc can still be moved.
16 The friction disc must now be centralised,
so that when the transmission is refitted, its
input shaft will pass through the splines at the
centre of the friction disc.
17 Centralisation can be achieved by passing
a screwdriver or other long bar t h r o u g h the
friction disc and into the hole in the
18 When the friction disc is centralised,
tighten the pressure plate bolts evenly and in
a diagonal sequence to the specified torque
setting.
19 A p p l y a smear of high melting point
grease to the splines of the friction disc and to
the c o n t a c t points of the d i a p h r a g m spring
fingers. Also apply a little grease to the
release bearing guide tube.
20 Refit the transmission w i t h reference to
Chapter 7A.
8 Clutch release mechanism removal, inspection and
refitting
Removal
1 Unless the complete engine/transmission is
to be removed from the car and separated for
major overhaul (see Chapter 2E), the clutch
release m e c h a n i s m can be reached by
removing the transmission as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 7A.
2 Unhook the release bearing from the fork
and slide it off the g u i d e t u b e (see
illustration).
3 Using circlip pliers extract the circlip from
the top of the release fork shaft.
4 Note the position of the arm then slide it off
the splines.
5 Prise out the release shaft upper bush from
the transmission casing (see illustration). If it
Inspection
8 Check the release c o m p o n e n t s , renewing
any worn or damaged parts. Carefully check
all bearing surfaces and points of contact.
9 When checking the release bearing itself,
note that it is often considered worthwhile to
renew it as a matter of course. Check that the
contact surface rotates smoothly and easily,
with no sign of roughness, and that the
surface itself is smooth and unworn, with no
signs of cracks, pitting or scoring. If there is
any d o u b t a b o u t its c o n d i t i o n , the bearing
must be renewed.
Refitting
10 A p p l y a smear of high melting point
grease to the shaft pivot bushes and the
contact surfaces of the release fork.
11 T a p the lower bush into the casing and
refit the release shaft.
12 Slide the upper bush d o w n the shaft and
t a p it into the casing making sure that the
ridge engages with the cut-out, then slide the
arm on the splines the correct way round.
13 Refit the circlip in the shaft groove.
14 Slide the release bearing onto the guide
tube and engage it with the fork.
15 Refit the transmission w i t h reference to
Chapter 7A.
9 Clutch pedal removal and refitting
The procedure is described as part of the
brake pedal removal. Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 1 1 .
5B«1
Chapter 5 Part B:
Ignition system
Contents
Fault finding - general information and preliminary checks
General information
Ignition HT coil(s) - removal, testing and refitting
Ignition power module (1.8 litre models) - removal and refitting . . . .
3
1
4
7
Ignition system - testing
Ignition system sensors - removal and refitting
Ignition timing - checking and adjustment
Spark plugs - renewal
2
6
5
See Chapter 1
Degrees of difficulty
/
Fairly easy, suitable
| k
Fairty difficult,
D i f f i c u l t suitable for
| k
V e r y difficult,
novice with little
£5?
for beginner with
§^
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
5^
suitable for expert DIY
experience
g^
s o m e experience
g^
DIY mechanic
mechanic
Easy, suitable for
|k
|k
g^
gQ
or professional
2j
g^
Specifications
General
System type:
1.2 litre models
1.4 litre models
1.6 litre models
1.8 litre models
Firing order
Ignition timing at idle
Ignition coil winding resistance (at 20°C):
Primary:
1.2 and 1.4 litre models
1.6 litre models
1.8 litre models
Secondary:
1.2 and 1.4 litre models
1.6 litre models
1.8 litre models
Crankshaft TDC sensor:
Electrical resistance:
1.2 litre models
1.4 litre models
1.6 litre models
1.8 litre models
Air gap:
1.4 litre models
1.8 litre models
All other models
Bosch Motronic 1.5.5 engine management system
Bosch Mono-Motronic engine management system
Weber IAW engine management system
Hitachi engine management system
1-3-4-2 (No 1 at timing belt end)
Under ECU control, constantly changing according to engine load, to
maintain idle speed
0.45 to 0.55 ohms
0.55 to 0.61 ohms
0.6 ohms
12 000 to 14 600 ohms
8645 to 9555 ohms
N/A
9600 ohms
774 to 946 ohms
575 to 750 ohms
440 to 570 ohms
0.8 to 1.5 m m
0.8 ± 0.4 m m
0.5 to 1.5 m m
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibf ft
Knock sensor
Spark plugs:
All except 1.6 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
25
18
25
27
18
20
5B»2 Ignition system
1 General information
The ignition system is integrated w i t h the
fuel injection s y s t e m to f o r m a c o m b i n e d
engine management system under the control
of one ECU (refer to Chapter 4, Part A or B for
information on the fuel injection side of the
system).
On all m o d e l s , the ignition side of the
system is of the static (distributorless) type.
The ECU uses its inputs f r o m the various
sensors to calculate the required ignition
advance setting and coil charging time. Some
of the sensors d e s c r i b e d in Parts A or B of
Chapter 4 are also used to determine the
appropriate ignition firing point for different
operating conditions.
The basic timing information is derived from
an inductive sensor, positioned above a reluctor
wheel mounted on the engine crankshaft. The
reluctor wheel has a number of equally-spaced
teeth around it, resembling a small flywheel. As
the crankshaft turns, the sensor detects the
teeth passing it, and sends a pulse signal to the
engine management ECU. At the crankshaft
TDC position, one of the reluctor teeth is
missing, and this creates a variation in the
signal produced by the sensor. The ECU uses
this information to determine the crankshaft
position and speed of rotation, to calculate the
optimum firing point for the engine.
All models have a knock sensor, w h i c h is
used as a safeguard against possible engine
d a m a g e f r o m pre-ignition (detonation, or
'pinking'). The sensor is bolted to the engine
block, adjacent to the top of the combustion
c h a m b e r s . The sensor is sensitive to a
particular f r e q u e n c y of v i b r a t i o n , c o r r e sponding to that produced during pre-ignition
(a condition which can occur when the wrong
grade of fuel is used, or w h e n a fuel system
problem has resulted in a weak mixture, for
example). When the k n o c k sensor d e t e c t s
pre-ignition, it s e n d s a signal to the E C U ,
w h i c h then retards the ignition t i m i n g until
pre-ignition s t o p s ; the t i m i n g is then
progressively a d v a n c e d until pre-ignition
recurs. This process is repeated many times,
until the ECU determines the most efficient
running condition for the engine.
In the event of a fault in the system due to
loss of a signal from one of the sensors, the
ECU reverts t o an emergency ('limp-home')
program. This will allow the car to be driven,
although engine operation and performance
will be limited. A w a r n i n g light on the
instrument panel will illuminate if the fault is
likely to cause an increase in harmful exhaust
emissions.
To facilitate fault d i a g n o s i s , the ignition
system is p r o v i d e d w i t h an o n - b o a r d
diagnostic facility, which can be interrogated
in the s a m e way as for other engine
management system faults, as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 4A or B.
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre
models
On all except 1.8 litre models, the system
c o m p o n e n t s consist only of a pair of t w i n output ignition coils located on the left-hand
side of the cylinder head, and four HT spark
plug leads. Note that t h e ignition coils are
housed in a single sealed unit. Each ignition
coil supplies two cylinders (one coil supplies
cylinders 1 and 4, and the other cylinders 2
and 3).
Under the control of the ECU, the ignition
coils operate on the 'wasted spark' principle,
ie. each coil produces an HT voltage at both
outputs every time its primary coil voltage is
interrupted. The result of this is that each
spark plug fires twice for every cycle of the
engine, o n c e on the c o m p r e s s i o n / i g n i t i o n
stroke and o n c e on the exhaust stroke. The
spark voltage is greatest in the cylinder which
is on its c o m p r e s s i o n stroke, due to the
c o m p o s i t i o n and high density of the air/fuel
mixture. T h e ' w a s t e d ' spark o c c u r s in the
cylinder that is on its exhaust stroke; the
c o m p o s i t i o n and low density of the exhaust
charge means that the spark produced is very
weak and so has little effect.
1.8 litre
models
On 1.8 litre models, each spark plug has its
own dedicated ' p l u g - t o p ' HT coil, which fits
directly onto the t o p of the spark plug
(conventional HT leads are therefore not
fitted). A power module, driven by the engine
m a n a g e m e n t system E C U , c o n t r o l s the
supply to the primary circuit in each one of the
four coils; unlike the 'wasted spark' system, a
spark is generated at each spark plug only
once per engine cycle.
2 Ignition system testing
| |
Genera/
1 The components of the ignition system are
normally very reliable; most faults are far more
likely to be due to loose or dirty connections,
or to ' t r a c k i n g ' of HT voltage due to dirt,
dampness or damaged insulation, than to the
failure of any of the s y s t e m ' s c o m p o n e n t s .
A l w a y s check all wiring t h o r o u g h l y before
c o n d e m n i n g an electrical c o m p o n e n t , and
w o r k methodically to eliminate all other
possibilities before deciding that a particular
component is faulty.
2 The old practice of checking for a spark by
holding the live end of an HT lead a short
distance away from the engine is n o t
recommended; not only is there a high risk of
a p o w e r f u l electric s h o c k , but the E C U , HT
coil, or p o w e r stage may be d a m a g e d .
Similarly, never try to 'diagnose' misfires by
pulling off one HT lead at a time.
3 The following tests should be carried out
when an obvious fault such as non-starting or
a clearly d e t e c t a b l e misfire exists. S o m e
faults, however, are more o b s c u r e and are
often disguised by the fact that the ECU will
a d o p t an emergency program ('limp-home')
m o d e to maintain as much driveability as
possible. Faults of this nature usually appear
in the f o r m of excessive fuel c o n s u m p t i o n ,
poor
idling
characteristics,
lack
of
p e r f o r m a n c e , k n o c k i n g or ' p i n k i n g ' noises
from the engine under certain conditions, or a
c o m b i n a t i o n of these c o n d i t i o n s . Where
p r o b l e m s such as this are experienced, the
best course is to refer the car to a suitablyequipped garage for diagnostic testing using
dedicated test equipment.
Engine
will not
start
N o t e : Remember that a fault with the antitheft alarm or immobiliser
will give rise to
apparent starting problems.
Make sure that
the
alarm
or
immobiliser
has
been
deactivated, referring to the vehicle handbook
for details. If the CODE warning light on the
instrument panel is flashing, this indicates that
the ignition key being used has not been
programmed into the immobiliser control unit
- use the master
key, and
refer
to
Disconnecting
the battery in the Reference
section.
4 If the engine either will not turn over at all,
or only turns very slowly, check the battery
and starter motor. Connect a voltmeter across
the battery terminals (meter positive probe to
battery positive terminal) then note the voltage
reading obtained while turning the engine over
on the starter for (no more than) ten seconds.
If the reading o b t a i n e d is less than
a p p r o x i m a t e l y 9.5 v o l t s , first c h e c k the
battery, starter motor and charging system as
described in Part A of this Chapter.
5 If the engine turns over at normal speed but
will not start, check the HT circuit.
6 C o n n e c t a timing light (following its
manufacturer's instructions) and turning the
engine over on the starter motor; if the light
flashes, voltage is reaching the spark plugs,
so these should be checked first. If the light
d o e s not flash, c h e c k the HT leads
themselves (where applicable). If there is a
spark, continue with the checks described in
Section 3 of this Chapter.
7 If there is still no spark, check the condition
of the coil(s), if possible by substitution with a
known good unit, or by checking the primary
and s e c o n d a r y resistances. If the fault
persists, the problem lies elsewhere; if the
fault is now cleared, a new coil is the obvious
cure. However, check carefully the condition
of the LT c o n n e c t i o n s themselves before
obtaining a new coil, to ensure that the fault is
not
due to
dirty
or
poorly-fastened
connectors.
8 If the coil is in g o o d condition, the fault is
probably within the power stage (built into the
ECU, on all except 1.8 litre models), one of the
system sensors, or related c o m p o n e n t s (as
applicable). In this case, a fault c o d e should
be logged in the diagnostic unit, which could
Ignition system 5B»3
d a m a g e d , take steps to ensure that the new
leads do not become similarly damaged.
15 If the HT leads are sound, regular misfiring
indicates a problem with the ignition coil(s) or
spark plugs. Fit new plugs as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1, or test the coil(s) as described in
Section 4. A dirty or faulty crankshaft sensor
could also be to blame - see Section 6.
16 Any further c h e c k i n g of the system
c o m p o n e n t s should be carried out after first
c h e c k i n g the ECU for fault c o d e s - see
paragraph 9.
2.8 D i a g n o s t i c c o n n e c t o r p l u g l o c a t i o n o n
a 1.4 litre m o d e l
be read using a fault c o d e reader (see
illustration).
9 Fault codes can only be extracted from the
ECU using a d e d i c a t e d fault c o d e reader. A
FIAT dealer will obviously have such a reader,
but they are also available f r o m other
suppliers, including Haynes. It is unlikely to be
c o s t - e f f e c t i v e for the private o w n e r to
purchase a fault c o d e reader, but a w e l l equipped local garage or automotive electrical
specialist will have one.
Engine
misfires
10 An irregular misfire is probably due to a
loose connection to one of the ignition coils or
system sensors.
11 With the ignition s w i t c h e d off, c h e c k
carefully through the system, ensuring that all
connections are clean and securely fastened.
12 Where applicable (not 1.8 litre models),
c h e c k the c o n d i t i o n of the s p a r k plug HT
leads. Ensure that the leads are routed and
clipped so that they c o m e into contact with
fewest possible metal surfaces, as this may
encourage the HT voltage to 'leak', via poor
or damaged insulation. If there is any sign of
damage to the insulation, renew the leads as
a set.
13 Unless the HT leads are k n o w n to have
been recently replaced, it is considered good
practice to eliminate the HT leads from fault
diagnosis in cases of misfiring, by fitting a
new set as a matter of course.
14 When fitting "new leads, remove one lead
at a t i m e , so that confusion over their fitted
positions does not arise. If the old leads were
3.4a Engine e a r t h point b e h i n d t h e
c a m s h a f t c o v e r - 1 . 4 litre m o d e l . . .
3 Fault finding general information
and preliminary checks
Note: Both the ignition and fuel systems must
ideally be treated as one inter-related
engine
management system. Although the contents
of this section are mainly concerned with the
ignition side of the system, many of the
components
perform
dual functions,
and
some of the following procedures of necessity
relate to the fuel system.
General
information
1 The fuel and ignition systems on all engines
covered by this manual incorporate an o n board diagnostic system to facilitate fault
finding and system testing. Should a fault
occur, the ECU stores a series of signals (or
fault codes) for subsequent read-out via the
diagnostic c o n n e c t o r (see the Section on
testing the fuel injection system, in Chapter 4A
or 4B).
2 If driveability
problems
have
been
experienced and engine p e r f o r m a n c e is
suspect, the on-board diagnostic system can
be used to pinpoint any problem areas, but
this requires special test equipment. Once this
has been d o n e , further tests may often be
necessary to determine the exact nature of
the fault; ie, whether a c o m p o n e n t itself has
failed, or whether it is a wiring or other interrelated problem.
3 Apart from visually checking the wiring and
connections, any testing will require the use of
a fault code reader at least. A FIAT dealer will
obviously have such a reader, but they are
also available from other suppliers, including
3.4b . . . o n t h e ECU m o u n t i n g b r a c k e t 1.6 litre m o d e l . . .
Haynes. It is unlikely to be cost-effective for
the private o w n e r to purchase a fault c o d e
reader, but a w e l l - e q u i p p e d local garage or
automotive electrical specialist will have one.
Preliminary
checks
N o t e : When carrying out these checks to
trace a fault; remember that if the fault has
appeared only a short time after any part of
the vehicle has been sen/iced or overhauled,
the first place to check is where that work was
carried out, however unrelated it may appear,
to
ensure
that
no
carelessly-refitted
components are causing the problem.
If you are tracing the cause of a 'partial'
engine fault, such as lack of performance,
in
addition to the checks outlined below, check
the compression
pressures. Check also that
the fuel filter and air cleaner element have
been renewed at the recommended
intervals.
Refer to Chapter 1 and the appropriate Part of
Chapter 2 for details of these procedures.
Remember that any fault codes which have
been logged will have to be cleared from the
ECU memory using a dedicated
fault code
reader (see paragraph 3) before you can be
certain the cause of the fault has been fixed.
4 Open the bonnet and check the condition
of the battery c o n n e c t i o n s - remake the
c o n n e c t i o n s or renew the leads if a fault is
f o u n d . Use the s a m e t e c h n i q u e s to ensure
that
all earth
points
in the
engine
compartment provide good electrical contact
through clean, metal-to-metal joints, and that
all are securely fastened (see illustrations).
5 Next work methodically around the engine
compartment, checking all visible wiring, and
the c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n sections of the
wiring loom. What you are looking for at this
stage is wiring that is obviously damaged by
chafing against sharp e d g e s , or against
moving suspension/transmission components
a n d / o r the auxiliary drivebelt, by being
t r a p p e d or c r u s h e d b e t w e e n carelesslyrefitted c o m p o n e n t s , or melted by being
forced into contact with hot engine castings,
coolant pipes, etc. In almost all cases,
d a m a g e of this sort is c a u s e d in the first
instance by incorrect routing on reassembly
after previous work has been carried out (see
the note at the beginning of this sub-Section).
6 Obviously, wires can break or short together
3.4c . . . a n d b e t w e e n t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l s 1.8 litre m o d e l
5B»4 Ignition system
inside the insulation so that no visible evidence
betrays the fault, but this usually only occurs
where the wiring loom has been incorrectly
routed so that it is stretched taut or kinked
sharply; either of these conditions should be
obvious on even a casual inspection. If this is
thought to have happened and the fault proves
elusive, the suspect section of wiring should
be c h e c k e d very carefully during the more
detailed checks which follow.
7 D e p e n d i n g on the extent of the p r o b l e m ,
damaged wiring may be repaired by rejoining
the break or splicing-in a new length of wire,
using solder to ensure a g o o d c o n n e c t i o n ,
and remaking the insulation w i t h adhesive
insulating t a p e or heat-shrink t u b i n g , as
desired. If the damage is extensive, given the
implications for the vehicle's future reliability,
the best l o n g - t e r m answer may well be to
renew that entire section of the loom, however
expensive this may appear.
8 When the actual d a m a g e has been
repaired, ensure that the wiring loom is rerouted correctly, so that it is clear of other
components, is not stretched or kinked, and is
secured out of harm's way using the plastic
clips, guides and ties provided.
9 Check all electrical c o n n e c t o r s , ensuring
that they are clean, securely f a s t e n e d , and
that each is locked by its plastic tabs or wire
clip, as appropriate. If any connector shows
external signs of corrosion (accumulations of
white or green deposits, or streaks of 'rust'),
or if any is t h o u g h t to be dirty, it must be
u n p l u g g e d and cleaned using electrical
c o n t a c t cleaner. If the c o n n e c t o r pins are
severely c o r r o d e d , the c o n n e c t o r m u s t be
renewed; note that this may mean the renewal
of that entire section of the loom.
10 If the cleaner c o m p l e t e l y removes the
corrosion to leave the c o n n e c t o r in a
satisfactory c o n d i t i o n , it w o u l d be w i s e t o
pack the c o n n e c t o r with a suitable material
w h i c h will exclude dirt and moisture, and
prevent the corrosion from occurring again; a
FIAT dealer may be able to r e c o m m e n d a
suitable product.
11 All models have an inductive sensor which
determines crankshaft s p e e d and TDC
position. On an older engine, it is possible that
the tip of the sensor may
become
contaminated with oil and/or dirt, interfering
with its operation and giving rise to a misfire.
Similarly, if the sensor air gap is incorrect, this
may result in a misfire (at best). Refer to
Section 6 for sensor removal and refitting
information.
12 Working methodically around the engine
compartment, check carefully that all vacuum
hoses and pipes are securely fastened and
correctly r o u t e d , w i t h no signs of c r a c k s ,
splits or deterioration to cause air leaks, or of
hoses that are t r a p p e d , k i n k e d , or bent
sharply enough to restrict air flow. Check with
particular care at all c o n n e c t i o n s and sharp
bends, and renew any damaged or deformed
lengths of hose.
13 Check the crankcase breather hoses for
splits, poor connections or blockages. Details
of the breather system vary a c c o r d i n g to
which engine is fitted, but all models have at
least one hose running f r o m the t o p of the
engine connected to the air inlet duct or inlet
manifold (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . The breather
hoses run from the engine block (or from the
oil filler tube) a n d carry oil fumes into the
engine, to be burned with the fuel/air mixture.
A variety of poor-running problems (especially
unstable idling) c a n result from b l o c k e d or
damaged breather hoses.
14 Working from the fuel tank, via the filter, to
the fuel rail (and including the feed and return),
check the fuel lines, and renew any that are
found to be leaking, trapped or kinked. Check
particularly the ends of the hoses - these can
crack and perish sufficiently to allow leakage.
15 Check that the accelerator cable is
correctly secured and adjusted, and that it is
routed w i t h as few sharp turns as possible.
Renew the cable if there is any doubt about its
condition, or if it appears to be stiff or jerky in
o p e r a t i o n . Refer to Chapter 4A or 4B for
further information, if required.
16 Remove the air cleaner cover as
described in Chapter 1, and check that the air
filter is not clogged or soaked. A clogged air
filter will obstruct the inlet air flow, causing a
noticeable effect on engine p e r f o r m a n c e .
Renew the filter if necessary; refer to the
relevant Sections of C h a p t e r 1 for further
information, if required.
17 Start the engine and allow it to idle.
Caution:
Working
in
the
engine
compartment
while the engine is running
requires great care if the risk of
personal
injury is to be avoided; among the dangers
are
burns
from
contact
with
hot
components,
or contact
with
moving
components
such as the radiator
cooling
fan or the auxiliary
drivebelt.
Refer
to
Safety first! at the front of this
manual
before
starting,
and ensure
that
your
hands, and any long hair or loose
clothing,
are kept well clear of hot or
moving
components
at all times.
18 Working from the air inlet, via the air
cleaner assembly and the airflow sensor (or air
mass meter) to the throttle housing and inlet
manifold (and including the various v a c u u m
hoses and pipes connected to these), check for
air leaks. Usually, these will be revealed by
sucking or hissing noises, but minor leaks may
be traced by spraying a solution of soapy water
on to the suspect joint; if a leak exists, it will be
shown by the change in engine note and the
accompanying air bubbles (or sucking-in of the
liquid, depending on the pressure difference at
that point). If a leak is f o u n d at any point,
tighten the fastening clamp and/or renew the
faulty components, as applicable.
19 Similarly, work from the cylinder head, via
the manifold to the tailpipe, to check that the
exhaust system is free from leaks. The simplest
way of doing this, if the vehicle can be raised
and supported safely and with complete security
while the check is made, is to temporarily block
the tailpipe while listening for the sound of
escaping exhaust gases; any leak should be
evident. If a leak is found at any point, tighten the
fastening clamp bolts and/or nuts, renew the
gasket, and/or renew the faulty section of the
system, as necessary, to seal the leak.
20 It is possible to make a further check of
the electrical c o n n e c t i o n s by wiggling each
electrical connector of the system in turn as
the engine is idling; a faulty connector will be
immediately evident f r o m the engine's
response as contact is broken and remade. A
faulty connector should be renewed to ensure
that the future reliability of the system; note
that this may mean the renewal of that entire
section of the loom.
21 If the preliminary checks have failed to reveal
the fault, the car must be taken to a FIAT dealer
or suitably-equipped garage for diagnostic
testing using electronic test equipment.
4 Ignition HT coil(s) removal, testing and refitting
1.2, 1.4 and 1.6 litre
f^>
models
Removal
3.13a D i s c o n n e c t i n g a b r e a t h e r hose f r o m
t h e c a m s h a f t c o v e r - 1 . 4 litre m o d e l
3.13b On 1.4 litre m o d e l s , t h e b r e a t h e r
h o s e s t u b c o n t a i n s a filter w h i c h c a n be
r e m o v e d for c l e a n i n g
1 On 1.2 and 1.4 litre m o d e l s , remove the
three bolts securing the engine top cover, and
lift away the cover for access to the spark
plug HT leads.
Ignition system 5B»5
4.4 Pull t h e HT leads off t h e s p a r k p l u g s
4.5 D i s c o n n e c t t h e LT w i r i n g p l u g f r o m t h e
ignition coil
1-4 HT lead connections
for cylinder 1 to 4
respectively
LT wiring connection
LT (primary) resistance
check, cylinders 2 and 3
LT (primary) resistance
check, cylinders 1 and 4
HT (secondary)
resistance check,
cylinders 1 and 4
D HT (secondary)
resistance check,
cylinders 2 and 3
4.6b R e m o v i n g t h e i g n i t i o n coil
2 Before removing
attach labels t o t h e
indicate w h i c h plug
leads 1 t o 4, starting
of the engine.
t h e ignition coil unit,
spark plug HT leads t o
they serve. Number the
from the timing belt end
3 As an a d d e d p r e c a u t i o n , c h e c k t o see
whether there are any cylinder n u m b e r s
marked next to the HT lead terminals on the
coil assembly itself - if not, m a k e your o w n
marks, t o c o r r e s p o n d w i t h t h e HT lead
numbering.
4 Disconnect t h e HT leads f r o m t h e spark
plugs, a n d unclip the leads f r o m their
locations on t h e t o p of t h e engine (see
illustration). Place the leads to one side.
5 Disconnect t h e LT wiring plug f r o m the
ignition coil assembly (see illustration).
6 The ignition coil assembly is secured by four
bolts from the side on 1.2 and 1.4 litre models,
and by three bolts f r o m the t o p on 1.6 litre
models. Remove the bolts, and recover the
washers (see illustrations).
7 Lift the ignition coil assembly away from the
engine, complete with HT leads. Recover the
support plate fitted to 1.4 litre models.
Testing
8 The only testing which can be carried out
without special test equipment is to measure
the coil primary a n d s e c o n d a r y resistance
valyes.
9 The primary resistances are checked on the
pins for the LT wiring p l u g . C o n n e c t an
ohmmeter between t h e centre (+) pin of the
three, and each of the outer pins in turn (see
illustrations). Both tests should give virtually
4.6a O n 1.6 litre m o d e l s , t h e coil is
s e c u r e d by t h r e e b o l t s
4.9a Ignition coil t e s t i n g details - 1.2 a n d 1.4 litre m o d e l s
LT (primary)
resistance check,
cylinders 1 and 4
LT (primary)
resistance check,
cylinders 2 and 3
HT (secondary)
resistance check,
cylinders 1 and 4
HT (secondary)
resistance check,
cylinders 2 and 3
H31454
4.9b Ignition coil t e s t i n g details - 1 . 6 litre m o d e l s
5B»6 Ignition system
4.14 R e m o v i n g t h e e n g i n e t o p c o v e r
4.15 D i s c o n n e c t t h e coil w i r i n g p l u g
4.17 U n s c r e w t h e coil retaining b o l t s
identical readings - c o m p a r e w i t h t h e
specified value.
10 To check the secondary resistances, the
HT leads m u s t b e d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m t h e
coil HT t e r m i n a l s . Ensure that t h e cylinder
n u m b e r m a r k i n g s are v i s i b l e , so that t h e
leads can be correctly refitted.
11 Check the secondary resistance between
the HT terminals for cylinders 1 and 4, then
between those for cylinders 2 and 3. Again,
both tests should give near-identical readings.
12 If t h e test results are not as e x p e c t e d ,
bear in m i n d that a fault is normally only
indicated .by a zero or infinity reading. Do not
c o n d e m n the coil without consulting a FIAT
dealer or automotive electrician first.
17 Unscrew the t w o bolts securing the coil to
the cylinder head (see illustration).
18 Carefully pull the coil and plug connector
upwards off the plug, and withdraw it from the
cylinder head recess (see illustration).
conventional
stroboscopic
timing light, as
there are no HT leads.
1 When t h e engine is running, t h e ignition
timing is constantly being m o n i t o r e d and
adjusted by the engine management system.
When the engine is idling, small changes are
made to the ignition timing, to help maintain a
constant idle speed.
2 Although it is possible to observe the base
ignition timing using a standard timing light, it
is not possible t o adjust it. The reading
obtained will only be approximate, due to the
constantly changing ignition timing.
3 On most models, timing marks are provided
on t h e flywheel, a c c e s s e d after removing a
rubber
bung
from
the
transmission
bellhousing (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . However, it is
generally not possible t o view t h e marks
w i t h o u t significant further dismantling - the
m a r k s are only intended for setting up t h e
camshaft t i m i n g , and are not ideal for this
check. On t h e 1.6 litre engine, for example,
the thermostat housing and battery tray must
be removed for proper access t o the flywheel
marks.
4 For t h o s e wishing t o observe the ignition
t i m i n g , a s t r o b o s c o p i c t i m i n g light will be
required. The light will need t o be t h e t y p e
which incorporates a variable delay, so that
the advance angle can be determined from a
single T D C marking on t h e flywheel. It is
r e c o m m e n d e d that the t i m i n g mark is
highlighted as follows.
5 Remove the rubber b u n g f r o m the t o p of
the transmission casing, then turn the engine
slowly (using a spanner on t h e crankshaft
pulley bolt) until the timing mark scribed on
the edge of t h e flywheel a p p e a r s in the
aperture. Highlight the line with quick-drying
white paint; typist's correction fluid is ideal. If
marks are not present, set the engine to TDC
as described in the relevant Part of Chapter 2,
and make your o w n TDC markings on the
flywheel and transmission casing.
6 Start the engine a n d run it t o normal
operating temperature, then stop it.
7 C o n n e c t the t i m i n g light to No 1 cylinder
spark plug lead (No 1 cylinder is at the
transmission end of the engine) as described
in the timing light manufacturer's instructions.
8 Start the engine, allow it t o idle, and point
the timing light at the transmission housing
Refitting
13 Refitting is a reversal of removal, making
sure that the LT and HT wiring is correctly and
securely reconnected.
1.8 litre
models
Removal
14 Unscrew the oil filler cap, and remove the
two bolts concealed underneath. Remove the
six main cover bolts, and lift off the engine t o p
cover, for a c c e s s t o t h e ignition coil
assemblies (see illustration).
15 Disconnect the wiring plugs from the
ignition coil which fits over each spark plug
(see illustration).
16 If all four coils are to be r e m o v e d , mark
the coil assemblies for position, noting that
No 1 coil is nearest the timing belt end of the
engine.
4.18 Pull t h e coil u p w a r d s off its s p a r k
plug
Testing
19 The primary resistances are checked on
the pins for t h e LT wiring p l u g . C o n n e c t an
o h m m e t e r b e t w e e n the t w o outer pins compare the result with the specified value.
20 If t h e test results are not as e x p e c t e d ,
bear in m i n d that a fault is normally only
indicated by a zero or infinity reading. Do not
c o n d e m n t h e coil without consulting a FIAT
dealer or automotive electrician first.
21 At the time of writing, details for checking
the coil s e c o n d a r y resistance were not
available - seek the advice of a FIAT dealer.
Refitting
22 Refitting is a reversal of removal, making
sure that the coils are refitted t o the correct
spark plugs, a n d that the wiring plug is
securely reconnected.
5 Ignition timing checking and adjustment
gS
^
N o t e 1 : No ignition timing specifications
are
available from FIAT, so the results will be of
academic interest only.
N o t e 2: Checking
the timing on 1.8 litre
models
may not be possible
with a
5.3 R e m o v e t h e r u b b e r b u n g f o r a c c e s s t o
the flywheel timing marks
Ignition system 5B»7
6.1 C r a n k s h a f t s e n s o r o n 1.6 litre m o d e l
(1.2 litre similar)
6.4 R e m o v i n g t h e c r a n k s h a f t s e n s o r 1.6 litre m o d e l
aperture/crankshaft pulley. Adjust the timing
light firing point using the variable delay
function, until the TDC marks are aligned with
each other, and read off the c o r r e s p o n d i n g
ignition advance figure.
9 No ignition timing figures are available from
FIAT. If there are s y m p t o m s w h i c h suggest
the ignition timing is incorrect, it may be that
the engine management system has detected
a fault, and entered its e m e r g e n c y running
m o d e . When this h a p p e n s , the timing is
usually set to a fixed value, which may not be
ideal for all conditions. In this case, take the
car for testing using special d i a g n o s t i c
equipment.
12 One way to check the air gap is to remove
the flywheel, as described in the relevant Part
of Chapter 2. This should provide sufficient
access to c h e c k the air g a p using a feeler
blade, as for 1.2 and 1.6 litre models.
13 The only w a y to avoid removing the
flywheel for this c h e c k w o u l d be to use an
accurate d e p t h gauge inserted t h r o u g h the
sensor hole, t o measure the d e p t h to the
reluctor wheel teeth from the outer surface of
the engine. By then measuring the fitted depth
of the sensor itself (allowing for any s h i m s
used), the air gap could be established.
10 After making the check s t o p the engine,
d i s c o n n e c t the t i m i n g light, and refit the
rubber b u n g to the t o p of the transmission
casing, and the wheel arch liner and
roadwheel, if removed.
6 Ignition system sensors removal and refitting
%
N o t e : Certain other engine
management
system sensors are used in calculating
the
optimum ignition setting, but the two listed
here have the most direct influence on the
ignition system, and so appear in this Chapter,
rather than in Chapter 4A or 4B.
Crankshaft
sensor
TDC/engine
RPM
1 On 1.2 and 1.6 litre models, the sensor is
located at the right-hand end of the engine,
m o u n t e d on a bracket, adjacent to the
crankshaft pulley (see illustration).
2 On 1.4 and 1.8 litre models, the sensor is
mounted at the flywheel end of the engine, to
the rear (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . A c c e s s to the
sensor may be f o u n d easier f r o m below, in
which case, jack up the front of the car and
s u p p o r t on axle s t a n d s (see Jacking
and
vehicle support).
Renloval
3 Ensure that the ignition is switched off, then
trace the wiring from the sensor back to the
c o n n e c t o r and unplug it from the main
harness.
4 Unscrew the securing bolt and remove the
6.2 C r a n k s h a f t sensor o n 1.4 litre m o d e l
(1.8 litre similar)
7 Sensor
2 Pickup wheel
3
Flywheel
sensor from the engine (see illustration). On
1.4 and 1.8 litre models, recover any shims
fitted between the sensor and the engine.
5 On 1.6 litre m o d e l s , note that the sensor
bracket must not be removed, otherwise the
sensor setting will be lost. One of the bolts
securing the sensor bracket is of shear-head
type, to discourage removal. A special FIAT
tool is required to reset the sensor position, if
the bracket is disturbed.
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal, noting the
following points:
a) The sensor must be clean - any oil or dirt
on the sensor tip may interfere with the
sensor's
operation.
b) Ensure that the sensor mounting bolt is
securely tightened, and the sensor wiring
is correctly routed and securely
reconnected.
c) Check the sensor air gap as described
below.
14 As m e n t i o n e d in paragraph 10, air gap
measurement is only essential if the engine is
not running well, and fault diagnosis is being
carried out.
15 If the air g a p proves t o be incorrect, it
w o u l d be possible to alter it using suitable
shims b e l o w the sensor. Refer to a FIAT
dealer for advice.
Knock
sensor
Removal
16 On all m o d e l s e x c e p t the 1.6 litre, the
k n o c k sensor is fitted on the rear of the
engine, b e t w e e n Nos 2 and 3 cylinders;
access is poor from above, but better f r o m
Air gap checking
1.2 a n d 1.6 litre m o d e l s
7 On 1.2 and 1.6 litre models, using a feeler
gauge, check the air gap between the end of
the sensor and the tips of the teeth on the
reluctor
wheel,
mounted
behind
the
crankshaft pulley (see illustration).
8 If the gap is not within the tolerance given in
the Specifications, this can only mean that the
sensor mounting bracket has been disturbed,
or that the sensor is damaged.
9 If the mounting bracket has been m o v e d ,
FIAT special tools will be required t o
accurately re-position it.
10 If the engine runs satisfactorily, it is not
wise to move the bracket to correct a small
discrepancy in the air gap.
1.4 a n d 1.8 litre m o d e l s
11 Checking the air gap on these models is
less easy, as there is no access to the sensor
tip and reluctor teeth o n c e the sensor has
been fitted.
it
4(
H31456
6.7 C h e c k i n g t h e s e n s o r air g a p o n a
1.2 litre m o d e l
5B«8 Ignition system
6.16a K n o c k s e n s o r o n a 1.4 litre m o d e l seen w i t h inlet m a n i f o l d r e m o v e d
6.16b K n o c k s e n s o r o n a 1.6 litre m o d e l
below - jack up the front of the car if
necessary, and support it on axle stands (see
Jacking and vehicle support).
On 1.6 litre
models, the knock sensor is on the front of the
engine, next to the oil filter (see illustrations).
17 Trace the wiring for the k n o c k sensor
back f r o m its location on the engine, and
d i s c o n n e c t its wiring c o n n e c t o r . Where
applicable, release the wiring connector from
its mounting bracket.
the engine, and remove the sensor from the
engine compartment (see illustration).
18 Unscrew the bolt securing the sensor to
Refitting
19 Ensure that the sensor and its location on
the engine are clean, then refit the securing bolt
and tighten to the specified torque. The bolt
must be tightened correctly for the sensor to
function.
20 Refit the sensor wiring t o the m o u n t i n g
bracket (where applicable) and reconnect it.
6.18 R e m o v i n g t h e k n o c k s e n s o r
7 Ignition power module
(1.8 litre models)removal and refitting
%
||
Removal
1 The ignition power module is fitted to the
right-hand end of the inlet manifold (right as
seen from the driver's seat).
2 Ensure that the ignition is switched off (take
out the key).
3 Release the clip securing the expansion
tank hose to the right-hand end of the inlet
manifold, and move the hose out of the way
(see illustration).
4 Noting
their
respective
positions,
disconnect the wiring plugs at either end of
the module (see illustration).
5 Unscrew the t w o s o c k e t - h e a d s c r e w s
securing the module, and remove the module
from the engine.
Refitting
7.3 Unclip t h e e x p a n s i o n t a n k h o s e
7.4 Ignition p o w e r m o d u l e w i r i n g p l u g s
(arrowed)
5 Refitting is a reversal of removal, ensuring
that the wiring connections are correctly and
securely remade.
5A»1
Chapter 5 Part A:
Starting and charging systems
Contents
Alternator - brush holder/regulator module renewal
6
Alternator - removal and refitting
5
Alternator/charging system - testing in vehicle
4
Auxiliary drivebelt - removal, refitting and adjustment . .See Chapter 1
Battery - condition check
See Weekly checks
Battery - electrolyte level check
See Chapter 1
Battery - removal and refitting
3
Battery - testing and charging
Electrical fault finding - general information
General information and precautions
Starter motor - removal and refitting
Starter motor - testing and overhaul
Starting system - testing
2
See Chapter 12
1
8
9
7
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
expenence
|k,
Fairty easy, suitable
| k
<2§?
for beginner with
^
g^
s o m e experience
g^
Fairly difficult,
| k
D i f f i c u l t suitable for
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
Very difficult
suitable for expert DIY
gQ
or professional
Specifications
General
System type
12-volt, negative-earth
Starter motor
Type
Rating
Magneti-Marelli pre-engaged
12 volts, 0.9 to 1.4 kW, depending on model
Battery
Capacity
40 to 50 amp-hours
Alternator
Type
Output
Regulated voltage
Bosch or Magneti-Marelli
65 to 80 amps, depending on model
14.3 to 14.6 volts
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibf ft
Alternator:
M8 nuts/bolts
M10 nuts/bolts
M12 nuts/bolts
Battery support tray
25
50
70
29
18
37
52
21
5^
g^
5A«2 Starting and charging systems
1
General information and
precautions
General
information
The engine electrical system c o n s i s t s
mainly of the charging and starting systems.
Because of their engine-related f u n c t i o n s ,
these c o m p o n e n t s are c o v e r e d separately
from the body electrical devices such as the
lights, instruments, etc (which are covered in
Chapter 12). Refer t o Part B for information on
the ignition system.
The electrical system is of 12-volt negativeearth type.
The battery fitted as original equipment is of
'limited-maintenance' type and is charged by
the alternator, w h i c h is belt-driven from the
crankshaft pulley. The o r i g i n a l - e q u i p m e n t
battery does not require regular t o p p i n g - u p ,
and s o m e of t h e t y p e s f i t t e d c a n n o t be
t o p p e d - u p (see Chapter 1).
The starter m o t o r is of t h e p r e - e n g a g e d
t y p e , incorporating an integral solenoid. On
starting, the solenoid moves the drive pinion
into engagement w i t h the flywheel ring gear
before the starter motor is energised. Once the
engine has started, a one-way clutch prevents
the motor armature being driven by the engine
until the pinion disengages from the flywheel.
Further details of the various systems are
given in the relevant Sections of this Chapter.
While some repair procedures are given, the
usual course of a c t i o n is t o renew the
c o m p o n e n t c o n c e r n e d . The owner w h o s e
interest e x t e n d s b e y o n d mere c o m p o n e n t
renewal should obtain a c o p y of the
Automobile
Electrical & Electronic
Systems
Manual, available from the publishers of this
manual.
Precautions
Warning: It is necessary
to take
extra care when working on the
electrical
system
to
avoid
damage
to
semi-conductor
devices
(diodes and transistors),
and to
avoid the risk of personal injury. In addition
to the precautions
given in Safety
first!,
observe the following when working on the
system:
Always
remove
rings,
watches,
etc
before working
on the electrical
system.
Even
with
t h e battery
disconnected,
capacitive d i s c h a r g e c o u l d o c c u r if a
c o m p o n e n t ' s live terminal is earthed through
a metal object. This could cause a shock or
nasty burn.
Do not reverse the battery
connections.
C o m p o n e n t s such as the alternator, electronic
control units, or any other components having
semi-conductor circuitry could be irreparably
damaged.
Never disconnect
the battery
terminals,
the alternator, any electrical
wiring or any
test instruments
when
the engine
is
running.
Do not allow the engine
to turn the
alternator
when
the alternator
is not
connected.
Never
'test' for alternator
output
by
'flashing' the output lead to earth.
Always ensure that the battery
negative
lead is disconnected
when working on the
electrical
system.
If t h e engine is being started using j u m p
leads a n d a slave battery, c o n n e c t the
batteries positive-to-positive
and negativeto-negative
(see Jump starting). This also
applies when connecting a battery charger.
Never
use an o h m m e t e r of the t y p e
incorporating a h a n d - c r a n k e d generator for
circuit or continuity testing.
Before
using
electric-arc
welding
e q u i p m e n t o n t h e car, disconnect
the
battery, alternator
and components
such
as the electronic
control
units
(where
applicable) t o protect t h e m from the risk of
damage.
The radio/cassette unit fitted as standard
equipment by FIAT is equipped with a built-in
security code, to deter thieves. If the power
source to the unit is cut, the anti-theft
system will activate - see Disconnecting
the
battery in t h e Reference section for more
information.
2
Battery-
%
testing and charging
Standard or
maintenance
limitedbattery -
^
testing
N o t e : Some models are fitted with a limitedmaintenance battery which is sealed, meaning
that the electrolyte specific gravity cannot be
checked. The condition
of the battery can
therefore only be tested using a voltmeter refer to paragraphs 6 to 8.
1 If the vehicle covers a small annual mileage,
it is worthwhile checking the specific gravity
of t h e electrolyte every three m o n t h s t o
determine the state of charge of the battery.
Use a h y d r o m e t e r to m a k e t h e c h e c k , a n d
compare the results with the following table.
Note that the specific gravity readings assume
an electrolyte t e m p e r a t u r e of 15°C (60°F);
for every 10°C (18°F) below 15°C (60°F)
subtract 0.007. For every 10°C (18°F) above
15°C (60°F)add 0.007.
A b o v e 25°C
B e l o w 25°C
Fully charged
1.210 to 1.230 1.270 to 1.290
70% charged
1.170 to 1.190 1.230 to 1.250
Discharged
1.050 to 1.070 1.110 to 1.130
2 If the battery c o n d i t i o n is s u s p e c t , first
c h e c k t h e specific gravity of electrolyte in
each cell. A variation of 0.040 or more
between any cells indicates loss of electrolyte
or deterioration of the internal plates.
3 If the specific gravity variation is 0.040 or
more, the battery should be renewed. If the
cell variation is satisfactory but the battery is
d i s c h a r g e d , it s h o u l d be c h a r g e d as
described later in this Section.
Maintenance-free
testing
battery
-
4 In cases where a 'sealed for life'
maintenance-free battery is fitted, topping-up
and testing of the electrolyte in each cell is not
possible. The c o n d i t i o n of t h e battery can
therefore only be assessed using the battery
condition indicator or a voltmeter.
5 Certain models may have been fitted with a
maintenance-free battery with a built-in
charge c o n d i t i o n indicator. The indicator is
located in the t o p of the battery casing, and
indicates the condition of the battery from its
colour. If the indicator shows green, then the
battery is in a g o o d state of c h a r g e . If the
indicator turns darker, eventually t o black,
then t h e battery requires c h a r g i n g , as
described later in this Section. If the indicator
shows clear/yellow, then the electrolyte level
in the battery is too low to allow further use,
and the battery should be renewed. D o n o t
attempt to charge, load or jump start a battery
when the indicator shows clear or yellow.
6 If testing the battery using a voltmeter,
connect the voltmeter across the battery
terminals. The test is only accurate if the battery
has not been subjected to any kind of charge
for the previous six hours. If this is not the case,
switch on the headlights for 30 seconds, then
wait four to five minutes before testing the
battery after switching off the headlights. All
other electrical circuits must be switched off, so
check that the doors and tailgate are fully shut
when making the test.
7 If the voltage reading is less than 12 volts,
then the battery is d i s c h a r g e d , whilst a
reading of 12.0 t o 12.4 volts indicates a
partially-discharged condition.
8 If the battery is t o be c h a r g e d , remove it
from the vehicle (Section 3) and charge it as
described later in this Section.
Standard or
maintenance
limitedbattery •
charging
N o t e : The following is intended as a guide
only. Always refer to the
manufacturer's
recommendations
(often printed on a label
attached
to the battery) before charging a
battery.
9 Charge the battery at a rate of 3.5 to 4 amps
and continue to charge the battery at this rate
until no further rise in specific gravity is noted
over a 4-hour period.
10 Alternatively, a trickle charger charging at
the rate of 1.5 a m p s can safely be used
overnight.
11 Specially rapid 'boost' charges which are
claimed to restore the power of the battery in
1 t o 2 hours are not r e c o m m e n d e d , as they
can cause serious d a m a g e t o the battery
plates through overheating.
12 While charging t h e battery, note that the
temperature of the electrolyte should never
exceed 37.8°C (100°F).
Starting and charging systems 5A»3
3.3a U n s c r e w t h e c l a m p plate b o l t . . .
Maintenance-free
charging
battery
-
N o t e : The following is intended as a guide
only. Always refer to the
manufacturer's
recommendations
(often printed on a label
attached
to the battery) before charging a
battery.
13 This battery t y p e takes c o n s i d e r a b l y
longer to fully recharge than the standard
type, the time taken being dependent on the
extent of discharge, but it can take anything
up to three days.
14 A constant voltage type charger is required,
to be set, when connected, to 13.9 to 14.9 volts
with a charger current below 25 amps. Using
this m e t h o d , the battery should be usable
within three hours, giving a voltage reading of
12.5 volts, but this is for a partially discharged
battery and, as mentioned, full charging can
take considerably longer.
3.5a R e m o v i n g t h e b a t t e r y d r i p t r a y
3.3b . . . t h e n lift a w a y t h e h o l d i n g s t r a p
3.4 R e m o v i n g t h e b a t t e r y
15 If the battery is to be charged from a fully
discharged state (condition reading less than
12 volts), have it recharged by your FIAT
dealer or local automotive electrician, as the
charge rate is higher and constant supervision
during charging is necessary.
1 Loosen the clamp bolt and disconnect the
battery negative cable from the terminal (see
illustration).
2 Lift up the plastic cover, and disconnect the
positive cable in the s a m e manner (see
illustrations).
3 At the base of the battery, unscrew the bolt
from the battery holding clamp plate, and lift
away the c l a m p plate and battery holding
strap (see illustrations).
4 Remove the battery f r o m the engine
compartment (see illustration).
5 If necessary, the plastic tray beneath the
battery can be lifted out. The main battery tray
may be removed by unscrewing the bolts note, however, that on 1.6 litre models, this
also entails removing the ECU - see C h a p ter 4 B , Section 4. Before removing the tray
completely, unbolt the relay holder(s) (where
applicable) and place to one side (see
illustrations).
3.5b Lift off t h e f u s e / r e l a y carrier lid . . .
3.5c . . . for a c c e s s t o t h e m o u n t i n g n u t s
3
Batteryremoval and refitting
^
N o t e : If the vehicle has a
security-coded
radio, check that you have a copy of the code
number before disconnecting
the
battery
cable; refer to Disconnecting the battery in the
Reference section for details.
Removal
5A»4 Starting and charging systems
" " " X
/
"
-
^
-
^
3.5d R e m o v i n g t h e rear f u s e / r e l a y carrier
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but make
sure that the positive terminal is c o n n e c t e d
first, followed by the negative terminal.
4 Alternator/charging system
testing in vehicle
I
N o t e : Refer to the warnings given in Safety
first! and in Section 1 of this Chapter before
starting work.
1 If the ignition warning light fails to illuminate
when the ignition is switched o n , first check
the alternator wiring connections for security.
If satisfactory, c h e c k that t h e w a r n i n g light
bulb has not blown, and that the bulbholder is
secure in its location in the instrument panel.
If t h e light still fails to illuminate, c h e c k the
continuity of the warning light feed wire from
the alternator t o the bulbholder. If all is
satisfactory, t h e alternator is at fault a n d
s h o u l d be r e n e w e d or taken to an a u t o electrician for testing and repair.
2 If the ignition warning light illuminates when
the engine is running, stop the engine and check
that the drivebelt is correctly tensioned (see
Chapter 1) and that the alternator connections
are secure. If all is so far satisfactory, have the
alternator checked by an auto-electrician.
3.5e R e m o v i n g t h e battery t r a y
5.9 R e m o v e t h e p l a s t i c c o v e r f r o m t h e
alternator connections
5 Increase t h e engine s p e e d until t h e
voltmeter reading remains steady; the reading
should be approximately 12 to 13 volts, and
no more than 14 volts.
6 S w i t c h on as many electrical accessories
(eg, the headlights, heated rear w i n d o w and
heater blower) as possible, and check that the
alternator maintains the regulated voltage at
around 13 to 14 volts.
7 If the regulated voltage is not as stated, the
fault may be due to worn brushes, weak brush
springs, a faulty voltage regulator, a faulty
d i o d e , a severed phase w i n d i n g or w o r n or
damaged slip rings. The alternator should be
renewed or taken to an automotive electrician
for testing and repair.
bolt t h e n remove t h e alternator from t h e
engine compartment.
5 Alternatorremoval and refitting
1.2 and 1.4 litre
|
models
Removal
3 If the alternator output is suspect even
though the warning light functions correctly, the
regulated voltage may be checked as follows.
4 C o n n e c t a v o l t m e t e r across the battery
terminals and start the engine.
1 Disconnect the battery negative cable and
position it away from the terminal.
2 Refer t o Chapter 1 and remove the auxiliary
drivebelt which drives the alternator.
3 Unplug t h e wiring f r o m the rear of the
alternator at the connectors.
4 Unscrew and remove the bolts securing the
upper mounting bracket to the alternator and
the engine, then remove the bracket from the
engine compartment.
5 Slacken and withdraw the lower mounting
5.10a R e m o v e t h e u p p e r m o u n t i n g n u t . .
5.10b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e bolt
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Refer t o
Chapter 1 for details of refitting and tensioning
the auxiliary drivebelt. On completion, tighten
all mounting bolts securely.
1.6 and 1.8 litre models
air
conditioning
without
Removal
7 Disconnect the battery negative cable and
position it away from the terminal.
8 Refer to Chapter 1 and remove the auxiliary
drivebelt which drives the alternator.
9 Remove t h e plastic cover w h i c h fits over
the alternator wiring c o n n e c t i o n s (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Noting t h e locations of t h e
wiring, and of any washers used, unscrew the
terminal nuts and disconnect the wiring from
the rear of the alternator.
10 Slacken and remove the alternator upper
mounting nut and bolt (see illustrations).
11 Slacken the nut on the alternator's captive
lower m o u n t i n g bolt, noting that this w a s
found to be extremely tight on the project car,
and with the limited access, loosening it was
not easy. Success w a s finally achieved using
a socket and very long extension bar, working
to the left of the exhaust downpipe.
1.6 litre m o d e l s
12 Remove the lower mounting bolt nut and
two washers. Supporting the alternator (which
is quite heavy), withdraw the lower mounting
bolt, and m o v e t h e alternator t o the rear,
resting it on the subframe (see illustration).
5.12 W i t h d r a w t h e l o w e r m o u n t i n g bolt,
a n d m o v e t h e a l t e r n a t o r t o t h e rear
Starting and charging systems 5A»5
5.13a U n s c r e w t h e b o l t s s e c u r i n g t h e
alternator lower mounting b r a c k e t . . .
5.13b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e b r a c k e t
13 Remove the four bolts securing the
alternator m o u n t i n g bracket to the engine
block, and remove the m o u n t i n g (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . A c c e s s to the bolts is
hampered by the driveshaft, but they are less
tight than the alternator lower mounting bolt.
14 With the mounting bracket removed, the
alternator can be removed through the inner
wheelarch, and out from under the car (see
illustration).
1.8 litre m o d e l s
15 In order for the alternator to be withdrawn,
the r i g h t - h a n d driveshaft and its s u p p o r t
bracket/shield must be r e m o v e d , with
reference to Chapter 8 (see illustration).
16 With the driveshaft removed, support the
alternator, then remove the lower m o u n t i n g
bolt and lower the alternator out of position.
21 Prise o p e n the protective plastic cover
and u n p l u g the wiring f r o m the rear of the
alternator at the connectors.
22 Support the engine and transmission on a
trolley jack, then unbolt the rear engine
mounting from the engine, with reference to
Chapter 2D. Lower the rear of the engine
slightly using the trolley j a c k , to allow the
alternator
to
be
withdrawn
without
obstruction.
Refitting
23 U n d o the upper and lower alternator
m o u n t i n g bolts and remove the alternator
from the engine compartment.
Refitting
24 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Refer to
Chapter 1 for details of refitting and tensioning
the auxiliary drivebelt. On completion, tighten
the mounting bolts securely.
5.14 W i t h d r a w t h e a l t e r n a t o r t h r o u g h t h e
inner w h e e l a r c h
6 Alternator brush holder/regulator
module renewal
^
^
3^
1 Remove the alternator as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 5.
2 Where a p p l i c a b l e , r e m o v e the s c r e w and
nut securing t h e alternator rear cover, and
take off the cover (see illustrations).
3 Extract the t w o small screws (marked with
green paint, on our project vehicles) and
withdraw the brush holder (see illustrations).
4 Using a steel rule c h e c k the length of the
brushes. If less than 5.0 m m , the c o m p l e t e
brush holder assembly should be r e n e w e d .
N o t e : On Bosch
alternators,
it may be
possible to obtain the brushes separately, in
which
case the brush leads should
be
17 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Refer to
Chapter 1 for details of refitting and tensioning
the auxiliary drivebelt. On completion, tighten
all mounting bolts securely.
1.8 litre models
conditioning
with
air
Removal
18 Disconnect the battery negative cable and
position it away from the terminal.
19 Refer to Chapter 1 and remove the
auxiliary drivebelt.
20 Unbolt and remove the exhaust system
d o w n p i p e from the exhaust manifold and
catalytic converter, as described in Chapter 4C.
6.2b . . . a n d t h e n u t . . .
5.15 R i g h t - h a n d driveshaft s u p p o r t / s h i e l d ,
w i t h a l t e r n a t o r visible a b o v e (seen f r o m
below)
6.2a R e m o v e t h e c o v e r s c r e w . . .
6.2c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e a l t e r n a t o r rear
cover
6.3a U n s c r e w t h e b r u s h h o l d e r s c r e w s
(arrowed)...
5A»6 Starting and charging systems
2
6.3b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e b r u s h h o l d e r
f r o m the alternator
8.4a U n s c r e w t h e n u t . . .
8.4b . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e smaller w i r e
from the solenoid
unsoldered
from the terminals and the new
brush leads soldered onto the terminals. Refer
to an automotive
electrical
specialist
for
advice.
5 Check the slip rings for excessive wear and
clean t h e m w i t h a c l o t h ; d o not use coarse
abrasives that may d a m a g e the c o n t a c t
surface.
6 Fit the new holder using a reversal of the
removal procedure, but make sure that each
brush moves freely.
operated, but the battery is in good condition,
then this indicates that either the starter motor
is faulty, or there is considerable resistance
somewhere in the circuit.
4 If a fault in the circuit is s u s p e c t e d ,
d i s c o n n e c t the battery leads (including the
earth c o n n e c t i o n to the body), the starter/
solenoid wiring and the engine/transmission
earth
strap.
Thoroughly
clean
the
c o n n e c t i o n s , and reconnect the leads and
wiring, then use a voltmeter or test light to
check that full battery voltage is available at
the battery positive lead c o n n e c t i o n to the
solenoid, and that the earth is sound. Smear
petroleum jelly around the battery terminals to
prevent corrosion - corroded connections are
a m o n g s t the most frequent causes of
electrical system faults.
In this event, it may be possible to have the
starter motor overhauled by a specialist, but
c h e c k on the cost of spares before
proceeding, as it may prove more economical
to obtain a new or exchange motor.
7 Starting system testing
||
N o t e : Refer fo the precautions given in Safety
first! and in Section 1 of this Chapter before
starting work.
1 If the starter motor fails to operate when the
ignition key is t u r n e d to the a p p r o p r i a t e
position, the following possible causes may
be to blame.
a) The battery is faulty.
b) The electrical connections between the
switch, solenoid, battery and starter
motor are somewhere failing to pass the
necessary current from the battery
through the starter to earth.
c) The solenoid is faulty.
d) The starter motor is mechanically or
electrically
defective.
ej On models fitted with an ignition
immobiliser or anti-theft alarm, either the
immobiliser has not been deactivated, or
is faulty.
2 To c h e c k the battery, s w i t c h on the
headlights. If they d i m after a few s e c o n d s ,
this indicates that the battery is discharged recharge (see Section 2) or renew the battery.
If the headlights g l o w brightly, operate the
ignition switch and observe the lights. If they
d i m , then this indicates that current is
reaching the starter motor, therefore the fault
must lie in the starter motor. If the lights
c o n t i n u e to glow brightly (and no clicking
s o u n d can be heard f r o m the starter m o t o r
solenoid), this indicates that there is a fault in
the circuit or solenoid - see following
paragraphs.
3 If the starter m o t o r turns slowly
when
5 If the battery and all connections are in good
condition, check the circuit by disconnecting
the wire from the solenoid blade terminal.
Connect a voltmeter or test light between the
wire end and a good earth (such as the battery
negative terminal), and check that the wire is
live when the ignition switch is turned to the
'start' position. If it is, then the circuit is sound
- if not, the circuit wiring can be checked as
described in Chapter 12.
6 The solenoid contacts can be checked by
connecting a voltmeter or test light across the
solenoid. When the ignition switch is turned to
the 'start' position, there should be a reading
or lighted bulb, as applicable. If there is no
reading or lighted bulb, the solenoid is faulty
and should be renewed.
7 If the circuit and solenoid are proved
sound, the fault must lie in the starter motor.
8 Starter motor removal and refitting
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative cable and
position it away from the terminal.
2 On 1.8 litre models, carry out the following:
a) Remove the battery and its support tray
as described in Section 3.
b) Remove the airflow meter and its
associated air ducting as described in
Chapter 4B, Section 4.
c) Unbolt the throttle body housing from the
inlet manifold, as described in Chapter 4B,
Section 4, and move it to one side leaving
all coolant hoses and wiring attached.
3 Apply the handbrake, then jack up the front
of the vehicle and support on axle stands (see
Jacking and vehicle support).
4 Working beneath the vehicle, unscrew the
nut and disconnect the smaller wire from the
solenoid lower terminal (see illustrations).
5 Raise the plastic cover, then disconnect the
wiring from the larger solenoid terminal. Note
the fitted order of all c o m p o n e n t s , for use
when refitting. Separate the wiring connector
incorporated into the main battery lead (see
illustrations).
V
8.5a Lift u p t h e outer c o v e r . . .
^
f|
Removal
1 Unscrew and remove the two bolts from the
front crossmember, and lift out the air intake,
disconnecting it from the air inlet duct leading
to the air cleaner (slacken the securing clip,
where applicable) (see illustration).
2 The first section of the air inlet duct can be
r e m o v e d f r o m t h e air cleaner either by
slackening the securing clip, or by pulling and
t w i s t i n g the d u c t to release it (see
illustration).
3 On 1.8 litre models, a resonator box is fitted
under the front c r o s s m e m b e r . This can be
r e m o v e d if required by slackening the clip
securing the air hose to the air cleaner elbow,
and then removing the bolt securing the
resonator to the front crossmember.
Fuel system - multi-point injection 4B«3
2.5 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e b r e a t h e r hose f r o m
t h e air inlet d u c t
2.6 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e air inlet d u c t f r o m
t h e air cleaner lid
2.7a U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e t h e a i r f l o w
meter mounting bolts . . .
2.7b . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e a i r f l o w m e t e r
w i r i n g plug
2.8 R e m o v i n g t h e air inlet d u c t
2.9a T o r e m o v e t h e air cleaner, u n d o t h e
bolt a t t h e f r o n t . . .
4 Remove t h e air cleaner element as
described in Chapter 1 .
5 Where a p p l i c a b l e , slacken t h e clips a n d
d i s c o n n e c t t h e crankcase ventilation hoses
from the main air inlet duct that connects the
throttle b o d y t o t h e air cleaner ( s e e
illustration).
6 If not already d o n e , release t h e clip a n d
detach t h e main air inlet d u c t from t h e air
cleaner lid (see illustration).
7 On 1.8 litre models, unscrew the t w o bolts
securing t h e airflow meter to its m o u n t i n g
bracket, then disconnect the wiring plug (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Unless the airflow meter is
being w o r k e d o n , it is best t o remove t h e
meter with the inlet duct - otherwise the t w o
clips at either e n d of t h e meter must be
disturbed.
8 Release the hose clips securing the main
intake duct to the throttle body, then pull the
d u c t away from t h e throttle b o d y ( s e e
illustration). Recover the sealing ring (where
fitted). Check the ring for condition and renew
it if necessary.
9 Slacken a n d w i t h d r a w t h e securing bolts
(see illustrations) and lift the air cleaner from
the engine compartment, noting the following
points:
a) On 1.2 litre models, it will be necessary to
disconnect the secondary resonator pipe
before removing the intake duct.
b) On the models seen in our workshop, it
was found that the air cleaner would not
come out upwards, and in fact the lefthand wheelarch liner had to be removed
to lower the air cleaner from its location.
Refitting
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
3 Accelerator cable removal, refitting
and adjustment
f|
^
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative cable and
position it away f r o m t h e terminal as
described in Chapter 5A.
2 Working in the driver's footwell, undo the
three securing screws a n d remove t h e
footrest. Remove t h e t r i m panels f r o m t h e
underside of the facia, as necessary t o gain
access t o the foot pedal mountings.
3 Release the plastic eyelet at the end of the
accelerator cable from the spigot at the t o p of
the accelerator pedal linkage.
2.9b . . . a n d a t t h e rear, s e c u r i n g t h e air
cleaner t o t h e inner w i n g
4 Relieve t h e tension f r o m t h e accelerator
cable by grasping the throttle quadrant and
turning it by hand. Unhook the nipple at the
end of the cable inner f r o m t h e throttle
quadrant (see illustration).
5 Working at the accelerator cable mounting
bracket, u n s c r e w t h e adjuster sleeve (or
remove the adjustment, clip), then w i t h d r a w
the accelerator cable outer from the bracket
grommet. Prise the grommet from the bracket
(where necessary) and move the cable away
from the throttle body (see illustration). Note
that on earlier 1.6 litre models, the cable outer
is secured to the bracket by means of a metal
spring clip. Slide the clip free to release the
cable f r o m the bracket, but note the slot t o
which clip was fitted, to aid refitting.
6 Release the accelerator cable from the clip
located underneath t h e power steering fluid
reservoir, at t h e rear of the engine
compartment.
3.4 O p e n t h e t h r o t t l e by h a n d , a n d u n h o o k
the cable end fitting f r o m the throttle
quadrant
4B
4B»4 Fuel system - multi-point injection
7 Unscrew and remove the nut securing the
plastic cable mounting to the bulkhead, and
release the mounting from the grommet in the
bulkhead (see illustration).
8 Withdraw the accelerator cable through the
bulkhead aperture f r o m the inside of the
vehicle into the engine compartment.
Refitting
9 Refitting is a reverse of the removal
process. On completion, adjust the cable as
described in the next sub-Section.
Adjustment
early 1.6 litre
models
10 W o r k i n g at the cable m o u n t i n g bracket
adjacent to the throttle b o d y in the engine
compartment, remove the spring clip from the
slotted section of the accelerator cable outer.
11 Pull the cable lightly through the mounting
bracket to tension it, so that all slack in the
cable inner is taken up, however do apply so
much tension that the throttle disc starts to
turn.
12 Press the spring clip into the nearest
accessible slot in cable outer, so that the clip
bears against the surface of the m o u n t i n g
bracket.
13 Check that throttle disc is positioned
against its end s t o p - if it is not, there is too
3.5 U n s c r e w t h e a d j u s t e r a n d release t h e
c a b l e e n d f i t t i n g f r o m its m o u n t i n g b r a c k e t
3.7 A c c e l e r a t o r c a b l e guide s e c u r i n g n u t
(arrowed)
much tension in the accelerator cable - correct
this by repositioning the spring clip in the
adjacent slot (see illustration). When correctly
adjusted, the accelerator cable should eliminate any free m o v e m e n t at the accelerator
pedal; check this by moving the pedal by hand.
slack is removed f r o m the cable inner (see
illustration).
15 Check that throttle disc is positioned
against its end stop - if it is not, there is too
m u c h tension in the accelerator cable slacken the adjustment sleeve slightly. When
correctly a d j u s t e d , the accelerator cable
s h o u l d eliminate any free m o v e m e n t at the
accelerator pedal; check this by moving the
pedal by hand.
Adjustment
1.2 litre, later 1.6 litre
and 1.8 litre
models
14 W o r k i n g at the cable m o u n t i n g
adjacent to the throttle b o d y in the
c o m p a r t m e n t , loosen the locknut
fitted) and turn the adjustment sleeve
bracket
engine
(where
until all
16 With the engine s w i t c h e d off, have an
assistant depress the accelerator pedal fully,
then check that the throttle disc is wide open
by looking d o w n into the throttle body. Repeat
the adjustment process if this is not the case.
Where applicable, tighten the locknut on
completion.
4 Engine management
system components removal and refitting
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
before
proceeding.
Throttle
body
in Section
1
assembly
Removal
1 Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery terminal.
2 With reference to Section 2, remove the
section of air inlet d u c t that c o n n e c t s the
throttle body to the air cleaner.
3 Unplug the wiring connectors from the idle
air control valve and the throttle potentiometer
(see illustrations).
3.14 A c c e l e r a t o r c a b l e l o c k n u t a n d
a d j u s t e r n u t (arrowed) - 1 . 8 litre m o d e l
4.3a D i s c o n n e c t t h e idle air c o n t r o l
valve...
4.3b . . . a n d t h e t h r o t t l e p o t e n t i o m e t e r
(1.6 litre model)
Fuel system - multi-point injection 4B»5
4.3c D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e t h r o t t l e
p o t e n t i o m e t e r o n a 1.8 litre m o d e l
4 With reference to Section 3, release the
accelerator cable inner f r o m the throttle
quadrant, then free the cable outer f r o m its
retaining bracket. Position the cable clear of
the throttle body.
5 Where applicable, release the clips and
disconnect the EVAP purge valve and crankcase ventilation hoses from the throttle body.
6 On 1.6 litre and 1.8 litre m o d e l s , apply
c l a m p s to the coolant hoses leading to and
from the throttle body, then release the clips
and d i s c o n n e c t the hoses f r o m the throttle
body ports (see illustrations).
7 Release the wiring harness as necessary
f r o m the clips in the vicinity of the throttle
body, noting how it is routed.
8 Slacken and remove the bolts securing the
throttle body assembly to the inlet manifold,
then remove the assembly along with its
insulating spacer (where fitted). On later 1.6 litre
4.6a Release t h e h o s e clips .
models, note the wiring harness bracket which
is retained by one of the throttle body bolts move it to one side (see illustrations).
Refitting
9 Refitting is a reversal of the removal
p r o c e d u r e , bearing in m i n d the f o l l o w i n g
points:
a) Examine the insulating spacer for signs of
damage, and renew if necessary.
b) Ensure the throttle body, inlet manifold
and insulating spacer mating surfaces are
clean and dry, then fit the throttle body
and spacer, and securely tighten the
retaining bolts.
c) Where applicable, ensure all hoses are
correctly reconnected and that their
retaining clips are securely tightened.
dj Adjust the accelerator cable as described
in Section 3.
...__..r
4.8a T h r o t t l e b o d y s e c u r i n g b o l t s
(arrowed) - 1 . 6 litre m o d e l
4.8c R e m o v i n g t h e t h r o t t l e b o d y
4.8b On 1.6 litre m o d e l s , o n e of t h e
throttle body bolts secures this wiring
harness bracket
4.13a Fuel h o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d a r r o w
m a r k i n g s - 1 . 8 litre m o d e l
4.6b . . . t h e n d i s c o n n e c t t h e c o o l a n t
hoses from the throttle body
Fuel rail and
injectors
Removal
A
Warning: Ensure that the
engine
has cooled
completely
before
starting
work.
10 Depressurise
the
fuel
system
as
described in Section 7.
11 On 1.2 and 1.6 litre models, remove the
throttle body assembly as described earlier in
this Section.
12 On 1.2 and 1.6 litre models, remove the
upper section of the inlet manifold as
described in Section 8. On 1.6 litre models,
the lower section of the inlet manifold must
also be removed - see Section 8.
13 Loosen the clips and disconnect the fuel
inlet and outlet hoses from the fuel rail, or at
the rear of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t - be
prepared for some fuel spillage. Note the fitted
positions of the hoses to aid refitting later.
Later models are equipped with quick-release
fuel hose c o u p l i n g s , w h i c h are released by
squeezing the sides of the c o u p l i n g , and
pulling apart (see illustrations).
14 Unplug the main injector wiring harness
connector,
where
applicable
(see
illustration).
15 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel
pressure regulator (early 1.6 litre models, and
all 1.8 litre models) (see illustration).
16 U n s c r e w the bolts securing the fuel rail
assembly to the inlet manifold, then carefully
pull the fuel rail, t o g e t h e r w i t h the fuel
injectors, f r o m the inlet manifold (see
illustrations).
4.13b D i s c o n n e c t i n g a q u i c k - r e l e a s e fuel
line - 1.6 litre m o d e l
4B«6 Fuel system - multi-point injection
4.14 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e i n j e c t o r w i r i n g 1.6 litre m o d e l
4.15 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e fuel p r e s s u r e
r e g u l a t o r v a c u u m h o s e - 1 . 8 litre m o d e l
4.16a U n s c r e w t h e fuel rail m o u n t i n g b o l t s
(arrowed)...
17 Remove the assembly f r o m the engine
and remove the injector lower O-ring seals
(see illustrations).
18 The injectors can be removed individually
from the fuel rail by unplugging the relevant
wiring c o n n e c t o r , sliding out the metal clip
(where fitted) and easing the injector from the
rail. Remove the injector upper O-ring seals
(see illustrations).
19 On m o d e l s so e q u i p p e d , r e m o v e the
retaining clip, or u n d o the securing s c r e w s
(as applicable) and w i t h d r a w the fuel
pressure regulator f r o m the fuel rail (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Recover the seal, and renew if
necessary.
4.16b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e fuel rail a s s e m b l y
f r o m t h e inlet m a n i f o l d - 1 . 6 litre m o d e l
4.16c O n e of t h e f u e l rail m o u n t i n g
4.17a R e m o v i n g t h e i n j e c t o r l o w e r O-ring
seals o n a 1.6 litre m o d e l . . .
4.17b . . . a n d prising t h e m o u t o n a
1.8 litre m o d e l
4.18b . . . slide o u t t h e l o c k i n g c l i p (where
4.18c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e i n j e c t o r f r o m t h e
f u e l rail (O-ring seal a r r o w e d )
4.19 Prise off t h e p r e s s u r e r e g u l a t o r
r e t a i n i n g c l i p t o r e m o v e it
Fuel system - multi-point injection 4B»7
Refitting
20 Refit the injectors and fuel rail by following
the removal procedure, in reverse, noting the
following points:
a) Renew the O-ring seals before refitting
the injectors. Take care when fitting the
injectors to the fuel rail, and do not press
them in further than required to fit the
retaining clip, otherwise the O-ring seal
may be damaged.
b) Ensure that the injector retaining clips are
securely seated.
c) Make sure the fuel supply hose (and
where applicable, the fuel return hose) are
correctly fitted as noted on removal.
d) Check that all vacuum and electrical
connections are remade correctly and
securely.
e) On completion check the fuel rail and
injectors for fuel leaks.
Fuel pressure
regulator
N o t e : Later models with the 'returnless' fuel
system (see Section 1) have their
pressure
regulator
mounted
inside the fuel pump/
sender unit in the fuel tank. Refer to Section 5
for details of pump/sender unit removal.
Removal
Early 1.6 litre m o d e l s
21 Remove t h e throttle b o d y assembly as
described earlier in this Section.
22 Depressurise
t h e fuel
system
as
described in Section 7.
23 Unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r s from t h e
inlet air t e m p e r a t u r e a n d manifold pressure
sensors.
24 Release the clip and disconnect the EVAP
hose from the inlet manifold port.
25 Remove the upper section of the inlet
manifold with reference to Section 8.
26 Disconnect the v a c u u m hose f r o m t h e
port on the side of the regulator.
27 Extract the retaining clip and pull t h e
pressure regulator out of the fuel rail; recover
the O-ring seal.
1.8 litre m o d e l s
28 Remove the fuel rail a n d injectors as
described earlier in this Section.
29 Disconnect the v a c u u m hose f r o m t h e
port on the side of the regulator.
30 Extract the retaining clip and pull t h e
pressure regulator out of the fuel rail; recover
the O-ring seal.
Refitting
31 Refit t h e fuel pressure regulator by
following t h e removal procedure in reverse.
Renew the O-ring seal and refit the v a c u u m
hose securely.
Idle air control
valve
(1.6 and 1.8 litre
models)
Removal
32 Disconnect t h e battery negative cable,
then unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e
actuator valve (see illustration).
33 On early models, undo the securing screws
4.32 D i s c o n n e c t t h e idle air c o n t r o l valve
wiring plug
4.33 Idle air c o n t r o l valve retaining s c r e w s
(arrowed)
and withdraw the valve from the throttle body
(see illustration); on later models, unscrew the
unit itself.
b) On 1.8 litre models, ensure that drive dog
on the sensor rotor is above the
corresponding pin on the throttle disc
shaft, when the sensor is refitted.
c) Clean the threads of the screws or valve
body, and apply a coat of locking
compound to the threads before refitting.
Refitting
34 Refit the actuator by following the removal
p r o c e d u r e in reverse. Noting the f o l l o w i n g
points:
a) Clean the threads of the screws or valve
body, and apply a coat of locking
compound to the threads before refitting.
b) Take great care to ensure that the plunger
is correctly aligned with its bore, before
tightening the actuator securing screws.
c) Delay reconnecting the battery negative
cable for about 20 minutes. After this, the
ECU will correctly reposition the idle
actuator valve when the engine is started
for the first time.
Idle actuator
(1.2 litre
models)
N o t e : On 1.2 litre models,
the
throttle
potentiometer is integral with the idle actuator.
35 Disconnect t h e battery negative cable,
then unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r f r o m the
actuator valve.
36 Undo the securing screws and withdraw
the valve from the throttle body.
Refitting
37 Refit the actuator by following the removal
procedure in reverse.
Throttle
potentiometer
Note: On 1.2 litre models, the throttle potentiometer is integral with the idle actuator.
38 Disconnect the battery negative cable,
then unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r from t h e
potentiometer.
39 On early models, undo the securing screws
and withdraw the valve from the throttle body
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) ; on later models, the
potentiometer appears t o be integral with the
throttle body.
Intake
air temperature
sensor
Removal
41 On 1.2 litre and later 1.6 litre models, the
intake air temperature sensor is integral with
the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
On 1.8 litre models, an intake air temperature
sensor is not fitted (see Section 1). On early
1.6 litre models, the sensor is mounted at the
rear of the upper section of the inlet manifold.
42 Ensure that the ignition is s w i t c h e d off,
then unplug the wiring from the sensor at the
connector.
43 U n s c r e w the sensor f r o m t h e m a n i f o l d ,
t a k i n g care t o avoid d a m a g i n g t h e plastic
connector.
Refitting
44 Refit the sensor by following the removal
procedure in reverse.
Manifold absolute
(MAP) sensor
pressure
Removal
45 On early 1.6 litre models, the MAP sensor
is m o u n t e d on a bracket at the rear of t h e
engine compartment. Ensure that the ignition
is switched off , then unplug the vacuum hose
and wiring connector from the sensor, undo
Refitting
40 Refit the potentiometer by following t h e
removal p r o c e d u r e in reverse, noting t h e
following points:
a) Note that the mounting holes are not
slotted; no adjustment of the potentiometer's position is possible or necessary, as
the ECU adapts to the potentiometer and
'learns' the idle and full throttle positions.
4.39 D i s c o n n e c t t h e t h r o t t l e p o t e n t i o m e t e r
wiring plug - securing screws arrowed
4B»8 Fuel system - multi-point injection
4.46a U n p l u g t h e w i r i n g c o n n e c t o r . . .
4.46b . . . t h e n u n s c r e w t h e r e t a i n i n g
screws (arrowed)...
4.46c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e M A P s e n s o r
f r o m t h e inlet m a n i f o l d
the three securing s c r e w s a n d remove the
sensor from its bracket. Refitting is a reversal
of removal.
46 On 1.2 litre m o d e l s and later 1.6 litre
models,
the
combined
MAP/inlet
air
temperature sensor is fitted to the right-hand
end of t h e inlet m a n i f o l d . Ensure that the
ignition is switched off, then unplug the wiring
connector from the sensor, undo the securing
s c r e w s and r e m o v e the sensor
(see
illustrations).
and 1.8 litre models, the sensor is located at
t h e left-hand end of t h e engine, on t h e
thermostat housing.
51 Drain the cooling system with reference to
Chapter 1, or be prepared for coolant spillage.
Ensure that the ignition is switched off, then
u n p l u g the w i r i n g f r o m the sensor at the
connector (see illustrations).
52 Unscrew the sensor and remove it f r o m
the cylinder head. Recover the sealing washer
where fitted. If using a socket, take care not to
damage the wiring connector on the sensor.
connectors are secured in position by locking
bars. T o release t h e c o n n e c t o r s , pivot the
locking bars u p w a r d s and then pull the
connectors squarely away from the ECU. The
ECU can then be removed by slackening and
withdrawing its securing bolts.
56 Refitting is a reversal of removal - ensure
that the connector locking bars are pressed
firmly home.
47 A M A P sensor is not f i t t e d to 1.8 litre
models (see Section 1).
Refitting
49 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Coolant
temperature
sensor
50 On 1.2 litre models, the coolant temperature sensor is located at the rear of the cylinder head on the left-hand side. On 1.6 litre
Refitting
53 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Where
applicable, fit a new sealing washer. Tighten
the sensor to t h e specified t o r q u e . Do not
exceed the specified torque, otherwise the
unit's threads may be damaged.
Electronic
control
unit
(ECU)
N o t e : The ECU communicates
with the antitheft/immobiliser
system when the vehicle is
started. Once the ignition key electronic code
has been stored by the ECU, the unit cannot
be used on any other vehicle. For this reason,
do not attempt to diagnose problems with the
engine management
system by
connecting
the ECU to another vehicle, or by substituting
an ECU from another vehicle.
54 D i s c o n n e c t the negative cable f r o m the
battery terminal as described in Chapter 5A,
before starting work.
4.51b . . . a n d o n a 1.8 litre m o d e l
58 On later 1.6 litre m o d e l s , the ECU is
mounted in the same place, but there are t w o
ECU wiring c o n n e c t o r s , b o t h secured by
locking bars which must be slid to one side to
allow disconnection. The upper section of the
ECU m o u n t i n g bracket must be u n b o l t e d
moved to one side to allow the removal of the
ECU itself (see illustrations).
59 Refitting is a reversal of removal - where
applicable, ensure that the connector locking
bars are pressed firmly home.
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
55 On 1.2 litre models, the ECU is mounted
at the rear left-hand corner of the engine
compartment.
The
multiway
harness
60 The ECU is mounted inside the right-hand
footwell, at the base of the A-pillar behind a
plastic trim panel. Remove the trim panel;
note that on left-hand drive models, it will be
necessary to remove the glovebox assembly
from the facia, with reference to Chapter 1 1 .
4.58a Release t h e l o c k i n g c l i p a n d
d i s c o n n e c t t h e large m u l t i - p l u g . . .
4.58b . . . t h e n release t h e h a r n e s s
clips...
1.2 l i t r e m o d e l s
4.51a D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e c o o l a n t
t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r o n a 1.6 litre m o d e l .
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s
57 On early 1.6 litre m o d e l s , the ECU is
mounted at the side of the battery, in the front
left-hand corner of the engine compartment.
To r e m o v e it, unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r
then slacken and withdraw the four securing
bolts. Access to the lower two bolts is limited,
a n d may be i m p r o v e d by raising and
supporting the front of the vehicle.
Fuel system - multi-point injection 4B«9
Unplug t h e wiring c o n n e c t o r s a n d unscrew
the earth cable from the bodywork. Undo the
m o u n t i n g bracket securing s c r e w s a n d
remove the ECU from the vehicle.
61 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Inertia
switch
62 Refer t o t h e information given in C h a p -
65 The individual fuses for the fuel p u m p and
injection/ignition are located in one of the fuse
locations inside the car - refer to Chapter 12
a n d / o r t h e wiring d i a g r a m s for details (see
illustration).
Airflow
meter
(1.8 litre
models)
ter 4A, Section 5.
Removal
Fuel injection
relays
66 Disconnect t h e battery negative lead as
described in Chapter 5A.
67 Unplug t h e wiring c o n n e c t o r f r o m the
airflow meter.
68 Release t h e hose clips a n d r e m o v e t h e
meter from the inlet air ducting.
system
fuses and
63 The injection system relays are located in
similar positions to those described in Chapter 4A, Section 5.
64 The main system fuse is located underneath a plastic cover at the left-hand rear corner
of the engine compartment (see illustrations).
4.64b . . . a n d pull o u t t h e m a i n s y s t e m
fuse
Camshaft
position
sensor
1.6 litre models
70 The camshaft position sensor is only fitted
to pre-1999 models, prior t o the introduction
of the Step A engine.
71 Remove the timing belt and inlet camshaft
s p r o c k e t as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 2 C , Sections 4 and 5.
72 Remove the t w o bolts securing the sensor
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Withdraw the sensor from
the engine, and disconnect the wiring plug.
73 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Refitting
69 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
4.65 R e m o v i n g t h e fuel p u m p f u s e o n a
1.6 litre m o d e l
4.72 Camshaft p o s i t i o n s e n s o r l o c a t i o n
a n d s e c u r i n g b o l t s - 1 . 6 litre m o d e l
4B»10 Fuel system - multi-point injection
5.3a R e m o v e t h e s c r e w s . . .
4.75 C a m s h a f t p o s i t i o n s e n s o r l o c a t i o n
a n d s e c u r i n g b o l t s - 1 . 8 litre m o d e l
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
74 Remove the timing belt and exhaust c a m shaft s p r o c k e t as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 2 D ,
Sections 4 and 5.
75 Remove the two bolts securing the sensor
(see illustration). Withdraw the sensor from the
engine, and disconnect the wiring plug at the
rear of the timing belt cover.
76 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Vehicle
sensor
speed
(speedometer)
77 Refer to the information given in C h a p ter 4A, Section 5.
5 Fuel pump/
fuel gauge sender unit removal and refitting
fk
S£
3^
5.4 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e fuel s u p p l y pipe
f r o m t h e s e n d e r unit
5.5 U n p l u g t h e w i r i n g c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e
s e n d e r unit
3 U n d o the s c r e w s and remove the dust
cover from the access aperture in the floorpan
(see illustrations).
4 Bearing in m i n d the w a r n i n g given in
Section 1 , disconnect the fuel supply line by
pressing the tabs and separating the quickrelease connection (see illustration). Plug the
end of the line or cover with adhesive tape, to
prevent the ingress of debris.
5 Unplug the wiring connectors from the top
of the fuel p u m p / g a u g e sender unit (see
illustration).
6 As applicable, disconnect the breather pipe
and/or return line f r o m the sender unit. The
breather pipe on later models is secured by a
nut, and is then pulled out of the tank (see
illustration).
7 Using a suitable tool, unscrew the large ring
nut that secures the pump/sender unit to the
t o p of the fuel tank. We m a d e up a simple
claw tool in the workshop, which engages in
the ribs around the edge of the ring nut (see
T o o l Tip)
8 Carefully w i t h d r a w t h e unit f r o m the fuel
tank. S o m e careful manipulation will be
required, to allow the sender unit float arm to
exit the tank without snagging. Suspend the
unit above the tank aperture for a few
minutes, to allow the excess fuel to drain
away (see illustration).
Removal
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
in Section 1
before
proceeding.
1 Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery terminal.
2 Remove the press stud fixings and detach
the carpet from the load space floor.
5.6 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e fuel t a n k b r e a t h e r
pipe
9 Recover the sealing ring from the fuel tank
aperture, if it wasn't removed with the sender
unit.
With the limited access available to the
sender unit ring nut, and the fact that
the nut is very tight, we had to make up
a tool to unscrew
it. The tool is made
from two metal strips - one bent to fit
across the ring nut to provide two 'legs'
which engage in the ribs on the ring
nut, and one bolted to the first, to act
as a handle.
5.8 R e m o v i n g t h e p u m p / s e n d e r unit
Fuel system - multi-point injection 4B«11
5.10a O n c e t h e b a s e of t h e unit has b e e n
undipped...
If the pump/sender
unit is
not being refitted
immediately, screw
the
retaining
nut
back
onto
the
tank
temporarily,
as the fittings
may swell
over a period of time, making
refitting
difficult.
HAYNES
10 The sender unit fuel filter can be inspected
by unclipping the round cover at the base of
the unit. The float assembly can also be
u n d i p p e d f r o m the side of the unit, and the
wiring disconnected (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . The
pump unit hoses must be disconnected before
it too is undipped from the base of the unit - it
appears, however, that separating the hose
c o n n e c t i o n s may destroy t h e m , so have
replacement hoses available for refitting.
11 From the FIAT information available at the
t i m e of w r i t i n g , it appears that no p u m p /
sender unit c o m p o n e n t s are available
separately. On later models with a 'returnless'
fuel s y s t e m , the pressure regulator fitted to
top of the sender unit is not available, nor was
it even clear how it might be r e m o v e d (see
illustration).
5.10b . . . t h e p u m p filter c a n also be
undipped and removed
5.10c R e m o v i n g t h e f l o a t a s s e m b l y
d) Align the arrowhead marking on top of the
tank with the similar mark on the sender
unit (see
illustration).
e) Prior to refitting the dust cover, reconnect
the battery, then start the engine and
check the unions for signs of leakage.
time after the ignition has been switched off,
and must be relieved before any of these
components are disturbed for servicing work.
2 Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(take out the key).
3 Referring to Section 4, pull out the fuse for
the fuel pump (or remove the fuel pump relay).
If the injection/ignition fuse or the main system
fuse are removed, the injectors will not open,
so defeating the purpose of this exercise.
6 Fuel tank removal and refitting
Refer to Section 7 in Chapter 4A.
7 Fuel injection system depressurisation
12 Refitting is a reversal of the removal
procedure, noting the following points:
a) It is advisable to use a new sealing ring.
b) Refit the ring nut loosely to the top of the
sender unit before offering it into position
(see
illustration).
c) Take care as the unit is fitted that the sealing
ring does not get pushed into the tank.
N o t e 1: Refer to the precautions in Section 1
before
proceeding.
N o t e 2: On later models with a 'returnless' fuel
supply system, the fuel pressure
can be
relieved via the quick-release coupling at the
end of the fuel rail. This should carried out
using a FIAT fuel pressure discharge kit; it may
be possible to hire or borrow a kit from you
local dealer, if required.
1 The fuel supply system referred to in this
Section is defined as the t a n k - m o u n t e d fuel
p u m p , the fuel filter, the throttle body and
pressure regulator components, and the metal
pipes and flexible hoses of the fuel lines
between these components. All these contain
fuel which will be under pressure while the
engine is running and/or while the ignition is
switched on. The pressure will remain for some
5.11 V i e w of t h e p r e s s u r e r e g u l a t o r a n d its
wiring connections
5.12a M a k e s u r e t h e ring n u t is in p o s i t i o n
b e f o r e f i t t i n g t h e unit
Refitting
4 Try to start the engine, keeping the engine
cranking for several seconds. It may fire and
run for a little while - if so, let it run until it stops.
5 Once the injectors have opened and closed
several times, this will reduce the fuel pressure to a safer level. However, fuel will still be
present in the system, and care should still be
taken.
6 Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery terminal, then refit the fuel pump fuse
(or relay).
7 On later models, a Schrader-type valve (like
a tyre valve) is fitted to the end of the fuel rail,
and this may be used to depressurise the
system. Unscrew the plastic valve c a p , then
place rags around the valve, to soak up spilt
fuel (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Use a suitable tool to
depress the centre of the valve, and release
the fuel under pressure. O n c e the pressure
has dissipated, refit the plastic valve cap.
8 Even when the pressure has been released,
care should still be taken when opening a fuel
line connection. Place a container beneath the
relevant connection/union to be disconnected,
and have a large rag ready t o soak up any
escaping fuel not being caught by the container.
J
5.12b A r r o w h e a d m a r k i n g o n t o p of t h e
fuel t a n k
4E>12 Fuel system - multi-point injection
fuel has been soaked up, disconnect the fuel
line, and insert plugs to minimise fuel loss and
prevent the entry of dirt into the fuel system.
8 Inlet manifold removal and refitting
§|
^
Note: Refer to the warning given in Section 1
before
proceeding.
7.7 Plastic c a p r e m o v e d f r o m fuel rail
p r e s s u r e relief valve - seen o n a 1.6 litre
m o d e l , w i t h t h e inlet m a n i f o l d r e m o v e d
9 Slowly open the connection or union nut (as
applicable) to avoid a sudden release of fuel,
and wrap the rag around the connection to
catch any fuel which may be expelled. Once the
Removal 1.2 and 1.6 litre
models
Upper section
1 Remove the throttle b o d y a s s e m b l y as
described in Section 4.
2 Unplug the wiring connector from the inlet
air temperature and manifold pressure (MAP)
sensor (see illustration).
3 Release the clip and disconnect the EVAP
hose from the inlet manifold port. Alternatively
on later models, trace the EVAP hose back,
and separate the quick-release connection at
the right-hand side of the engine c o m p a r t ment (this saves destroying another hose clip)
(see illustration).
1.6 litre m o d e l s
4 As a p p l i c a b l e , d i s c o n n e c t the c r a n k c a s e
breather pipe and brake servo v a c u u m pipe
from the rear of the manifold, identifying them
for location if necessary (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) .
On early models, disconnect the vacuum pipe
for the fuel pressure regulator.
5 To gain access to some of the manifold bolts,
it is necessary to unbolt the oil filler tube from
the front of the engine; one of the bolts also
secures the oil dipstick tube (see illustration).
6 On later models, also unbolt the bracket for
the knock sensor (see illustration).
7 Move the oil filler tube forwards, clear of the
engine - it c a n be removed c o m p l e t e l y if
preferred (see illustration).
All m o d e l s
8 Progressively slacken and withdraw the securing bolts or nuts, and detach the upper
section of the inlet manifold from the lower section. Note the location of any wiring harness or
hose brackets fitted to the bolts, and recover
the gasket(s) (see illustrations).
Lower section
1.2 litre m o d e l s
9 Unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r f r o m the
coolant temperature sensor (situated on the
left-hand side of the manifold).
8.2 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e M A P sensor w i r i n g
plug
8.3 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e EVAP (charcoal
canister) hose at t h e inner w i n g c o n n e c t i o n
8.4a D i s c o n n e c t t h e b r e a t h e r h o s e s . . .
8.4b . . . a n d t h e b r a k e s e r v o v a c u u m h o s e
8.5 R e m o v e t h e b o l t s s e c u r i n g t h e oil filler
tube
8.6 R e m o v e t h e k n o c k s e n s o r m o u n t i n g
b r a c k e t bolt, a n d m o v e t h e b r a c k e t t o o n e
side
8.7 M o v e t h e oil filler t u b e clear of t h e inlet
manifold
8.8a On 1.6 litre m o d e l s , u n s c r e w t h i s
nut...
Fuel system - multi-point injection 4B»13
8.8b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h i s w i r i n g h a r n e s s
bracket...
8.8c . . . f o r a c c e s s t o o n e of t h e m a n i f o l d
bolts
8.8d R e m o v e t h e r e m a i n i n g b o l t s
(arrowed)...
hose(s) from the fuel rail and injectors, using
the information in Section 4.
15 The lower s e c t i o n of the m a n i f o l d is
secured by eight bolts and t w o s t u d s / n u t s
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note that the manifold is
slotted where it fits over the studs, to make
removal and refitting easier.
All m o d e l s
16 U n d o the retaining nuts and bolts, and
remove the lower section of the manifold from
the cylinder h e a d . Remove the gasket and
d i s c a r d it; a new one s h o u l d be used on
refitting (see illustrations).
8.8e . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e u p p e r s e c t i o n of
t h e inlet m a n i f o l d
10 U n d o the bolt securing the accelerator
cable mounting bracket to the manifold, and
position it clear of the manifold.
11 Slacken the retaining clip and disconnect
the coolant hose from the rear of the manifold.
8.15 L o w e r inlet m a n i f o l d f a s t e n e r s
(arrowed)
12 Disconnect the brake vacuum hose.
1.6 litre m o d e l s
13 Remove the upper section of the manifold
as described above.
14 Disconnect the wiring plug and fuel
8.16a R e m o v e t h e inlet m a n i f o l d l o w e r
section...
8.16b . . . a n d r e c o v e r t h e g a s k e t
8.18 Fuel h o s e g u i d e b r a c k e t b o l t
(arrowed)
8.19a D i s c o n n e c t t h e c o o l a n t h o s e at t h e
rear of t h e e x p a n s i o n t a n k . . .
Removal
-1.8
litre
models
17 The u p p e r and lower sections of the
manifold are removed together, and can be
separated after removal if required.
18 Remove the throttle body, and the fuel rail
and injectors, as d e s c r i b e d in Section 4.
Unbolt the fuel hose guide bracket from the
t o p of the manifold (see illustration).
19 Disconnect the coolant hose at the rear of
the e x p a n s i o n tank, and unclip it f r o m the
support brackets at the right-hand end of the
manifold (right as seen from the driver's seat)
(see illustrations).
20 Disconnect the EVAP hose (coloured blue)
f r o m the manifold by depressing the hose
collar with a small screwdriver, and pulling out
the hose (see illustration).
21 Noting their locations, disconnect the two
wiring plugs from the ignition power module at
the r i g h t - h a n d end of the manifold (see
illustration).
22 Jack up the front of the car, and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
8.19b . . . a n d unclip t h e hose f r o m t h e
s u p p o r t b r a c k e t s (arrowed) o n t h e m a n i f o l d
4B«14 Fuel system - multi-point injection
8.20 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e EVAP h o s e f r o m
t h e inlet m a n i f o l d
8.21 Ignition p o w e r m o d u l e w i r i n g p l u g s
(arrowed)
23 Unbolt the t w o manifold support brackets
f r o m the rear of the engine. The t w o bolts
securing each one are not easy to get to - the
first pair is just above the bearing/shield for
the right-hand driveshaft, with the second pair
(on an alloy bracket) directly above the first.
24 Returning t o the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ,
progressively loosen and remove the nuts
securing the inlet manifold assembly to the
cylinder head. Carefully withdraw the manifold
f r o m the s t u d s , and out f r o m the engine
compartment. Recover the gasket.
2 If a fault a p p e a r s in the fuel injection
system, first ensure that all the system wiring
connectors are securely connected and free
of corrosion. Also check the wiring harness for
signs of d a m a g e , such as may result if the
wiring is routed too close to a hot component,
for example.
Refitting
- all
models
25 Refitting is a reverse of the removal
procedure, noting the following points:
a) Ensure that the manifold and cylinder head
mating surfaces are clean and dry, and fit a
new manifold gasket. Refit the manifold
and securely tighten its retaining nuts.
b) Ensure all relevant hoses are reconnected to
their original positions and are securely held
(where necessary) by the retaining clips.
c) Refit the fuel rail and injectors, and the
throttle body assembly (Section 4).
d) On completion, refill the cooling system
as described in Chapter 1.
9 Fuel injection system checking and adjustment
gS
S
Checking
Note: Also see Chapter 5B, Section 3.
1 Before d i s c o n n e c t i n g any of the injection
s y s t e m w i r i n g , ensure that the ignition is
switched off (take out the key).
3 Remove the cover(s) f r o m the fuse/relay
box(es) on the engine compartment bulkhead,
and check the connections to the fuses and
relays. With the ignition switched off, remove
the fuses and relays in turn, and c h e c k that
the fuse and relay contacts, and their sockets
in t h e box, are clean. Refit the fuses and
relays securely.
4 The s y s t e m ' s main earth point
according to model, as follows:
varies
1.2 litre engine - adjacent to the knock
sensor, at the rear of the engine, between
cylinders 2 and 3.
1.6 litre engine - on the rear bolt securing
the exhaust camshaft housing end cover.
1.8 litre engine - at the rear of the cylinder
block, just behind the timing belt cover.
5 Remove the nut or bolt securing the earth
terminal, and clean all c o n t a c t surfaces
thoroughly. Refit the terminal, and tighten the
nut or bolt securely.
6 Then ensure that the fault is not due to poor
m a i n t e n a n c e ; ie, c h e c k that the air cleaner
filter element is clean, the spark plugs are in
good condition and correctly gapped, the HT
leads are securely c o n n e c t e d and in g o o d
condition, and that the engine breather hoses
are clear and undamaged.
7 Check all the ignition system c o m p o n e n t s
and wiring as far as possible, using the
information in Chapters 1 and 5B. Sometimes
it can be difficult t o determine whether a
misfire is fuel or ignition-related.
8 If the engine is difficult to start, or runs
poorly, when c o l d , the problem may be that
the engine management system has gone into
e m e r g e n c y b a c k - u p m o d e . This, and the
nature of the fault that caused it to happen,
can only be d e t e r m i n e d using diagnostic
equipment such as a fault code reader.
9 A diagnostic c o n n e c t o r is p r o v i d e d , into
which a fault code reader can be plugged. The
test equipment is capable of 'interrogating' the
engine management system electronically and
accessing its internal fault log. The location of
the diagnostic connector varies according to
model, as follows:
1.2 litre engine - on the fuse/relay box at the
left-hand rear of the engine
compartment.
1.6 litre engine - adjacent to the
injection/ignition
ECU, or on the fuse/relay
box at the left-hand rear of the engine
compartment (see
illustration).
1.8 litre engine - at the rear right-hand side
of the engine compartment, just in front of
the suspension strut top mounting, or
between the battery and air cleaner (see
illustration).
10 Fault c o d e s can only be extracted f r o m
the ECU using a dedicated fault c o d e reader.
A FIAT dealer will o b v i o u s l y have such a
reader, but they are also available from other
suppliers, including Haynes. It is unlikely to be
c o s t - e f f e c t i v e for the private o w n e r to
purchase a fault c o d e reader, but a w e l l equipped local garage or automotive electrical
specialist will have one.
11 Using this e q u i p m e n t , faults can be
p i n p o i n t e d quickly a n d simply, even if their
o c c u r r e n c e is intermittent. Testing all the
system components individually in an attempt
t o locate the fault by elimination is a t i m e c o n s u m i n g operation that is unlikely t o be
fruitful (particularly if the fault o c c u r s
dynamically), and carries high risk of damage
to the ECU'S internal components.
Adjustment
12 Experienced h o m e mechanics e q u i p p e d
with an accurate tachometer and a carefullycalibrated exhaust gas analyser may be able
to check the exhaust gas CO content and the
engine idle speed; if these are found to be out
of s p e c i f i c a t i o n , then the vehicle must be
taken to a suitably-equipped FIAT dealer for
assessment.
13 Neither the air/fuel mixture (exhaust gas
CO content) nor the engine idle s p e e d are
manually adjustable; incorrect test results
indicate the need for maintenance (possibly,
injector cleaning) or a fault within the fuel
injection system.
10 Unleaded petrol general information and usage
9.9a D i a g n o s t i c c o n n e c t o r o n
1.6 litre m o d e l
9.9b D i a g n o s t i c c o n n e c t o r o n
1.8 litre m o d e l
Refer to Section 11 in Chapter 4A.
4A«1
Chapter 4 Part A:
Fuel system - single-point injection
Contents
Accelerator cable - removal, refitting and adjustment
4
Air cleaner and inlet system - removal and refitting
2
Air cleaner filter element - renewal
See Chapter 1
Engine management system components - removal and refitting . . 5
Fuel filter - renewal
See Chapter 1
Fuel injection system - depressurisation
8
Fuel injection system - testing and adjusting
10
Fuel pump/fuel gauge sender unit - removal and refitting
Fuel tank - removal and refitting
General information and precautions
Inlet air temperature regulator - removal and refitting
Inlet manifold - removal and refitting
Unleaded petrol - general information and usage
6
7
1
3
9
11
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
| k
Fairty easy, suitable
novice with little
Jk
for beginner with
experience
g^
s o m e experience
| k
^
g^
Fairty difficult,
|k
Difficult, suitable for
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
| k
^
g^
V e r y difficult,
suitable for expert DIY
or professional
^
g^
Specifications
System type
1.4 litre models .
Fuel injection system data
Fuel p u m p type
Fuel p u m p delivery rate
Regulated fuel pressure
Inlet air temperature sensor resistance (approx.):
At 20°C
At-10°C
Coolant temperature sensor resistance (approx.):
At-10°C
At 20°C
At 100°C
Injector duration (at idle)
Engine idle speed (not adjustable)
Exhaust emissions limits:
CO
HC
C0
Accelerator cable throttle disc cam-to-stop clearance
2
Bosch Mono-Motronic
Electric, immersed in fuel tank
120 litres/hour minimum
1.0 ± 0.2 bar
2300 ohms
9000 ohms
4A
9000 ohms
2300 ohms
180 ohms
1.5 ms
850 ± 50 rpm
0.35 % maximum
90 p p m maximum
13 % maximum
0.2 to 0.5 m m
Recommended fuel
Minimum octane rating
Torque wrench settings
Fuel tank
Inlet manifold
Inlet-union to filter
Outlet union to filter
Throttle body-to-manifold bolts:
M6 bolts
M8 bolts
Throttle potentiometer
95 RON unleaded (Premium unleaded)
Nm
Ibf ft
25
5
28
4
25
31
15
18
4
21
3
18
23
11
9
25
25
7
18
18
4A»2 Fuel system - single-point injection
Bosch Mono-Motronic system is only possible
with d e d i c a t e d electronic test equipment.
Problems with the system should therefore be
referred to a FIAT dealer for assessment. Once
the fauii has been identified, the appropriate
removal/refitting procedures detailed in the
following Sections can then be followed.
Precautions
2.2a U n s c r e w t h e air b o x s e c u r i n g n u t s . .
1
General information and
precautions
General
information
The B o s c h M o n o - M o t r o n i c single point
injection (SPI) system fitted only to 1.4 litre
engine m o d e l s is a s e l f - c o n t a i n e d engine
management system, which controls both the
fuel injection and ignition. This Chapter deals
with the fuel supply and fuel injection system
c o m p o n e n t s only - refer t o Chapter 5B for
details of the ignition system components.
The fuel s u p p l y system c o m p r i s e s a fuel
tank, an electric fuel p u m p , a fuel filter, fuel
s u p p l y a n d return lines. The fuel injection
system components include the throttle body
with an integral electromagnetic fuel injector,
and an Electronic Control Unit (ECU) together
w i t h its a s s o c i a t e d sensors, actuators and
wiring.
The fuel p u m p is m o u n t e d inside the fuel
tank, s u b m e r g e d in the fuel. It delivers a
c o n s t a n t supply of fuel t h r o u g h a cartridge
filter, mounted underneath the floorpan, to the
throttle body. The fuel pressure regulator
(integral with the throttle body) maintains a
constant fuel pressure at the fuel injector and
returns excess fuel t o the tank via the return
line. This constant flow system also helps to
r e d u c e fuel t e m p e r a t u r e a n d prevents
vaporisation.
The fuel injector is opened a n d closed by
an Electronic Control Unit (ECU), w h i c h
2.3a Release t h e c l i p s e c u r i n g t h e air inlet
duct...
2.2b . . . a n d pull o*f t n e b r o t h e r h o s e
from the camshaft cover
calculates t h e injection timing and duration
according to engine speed, throttle position
and rate of o p e n i n g , iniet air t e m p e r a t u r e ,
coolant temperature an.j exhaust gas oxygen
content information, received from sensor;,
mounted on the engine.
Inlet air is drawn into the engine through the
air cleaner, which contains a renewable paper
filter element. The inle! air t e m p e r a t u r e is
regulated by a v a c u u m operated valve
mounted in the air ducting, which blends air at
ambient temperature with hot air, drawn from
over the exhaust manifold.
Idle speed is controlled principally by a
stepper motor located on the side of the
throttle body. In addition, fine control of the
idle speed is achieved Py the FCU acvaneing
or retarding the - g r i i i o n t i m i n g in small
increments, to adjust the torque produced by
the engine. The ECU provides cold starting
enrichment by monitoring the coolant and
inlet
air t e m p e r a t u r e
parameters
and
increasing the injector opening duration
accordingly.
The exhaust gas oxygen c o n t e n t is
constantly m o n i t o r e d by the ECU via the
oxygen (or lambda) sensor, which is mounted
in the exhaust downpipe. The ECU then uses
this information to modify ihe injection timing
and duration to maintain the optimum air/fuel
ratio. An exhaust catalyst :s fitted to all SPI
models. The ECU also controls the operation
of t h e activated charcoal filter evaporative
loss system - refer to Chapter 4C tor further
details.
It should be noted that fault diagnosis of the
2.3b . . . a n d lift t h e d u c t a n d air box f r o m
the throttle body
Many procedures in this Chapter require
the disconnection and/or removal of fuel lines,
which may result in fuel spillage. Before
carrying out any work on the fuel system, refer
So the precautions given in Safety first! at the
beginning of this manual, and follow t h e m
implicitly. Petrol is a highly dangerous and
volatile liquid, and the precautions necessary
when handling It cannot be overstressed.
Note that residual pressure will remain in
trie fuel lines long after the vehicle w a s last
used When disconnecting any fuel line, first
depressurise the fuel system as described in
Section 8.
Air cleaner and inlet system
- removal a n d refitting
Removal
1 Remove the air cleaner element as
described in Chapter 1.
2 Slacken and withdraw the three nuts and
release the air box from the top of the throttle
body. Release the clips and disconnect the
breather hoses from the side of the air box or
from the camshaft cover (see illustrations).
3 Disconnect the air duct from ihe air cleaner,
then lift the air box and duct from the engine
compartment (see illustrations). Recover the
sealing ring from the throttle body aperture.
4 Disconnect the v a c u u m hoses from the
throttle body and the air temperature control
valve (see illustration)
5 Detach the warni-air inlet, hose f r o m the
exhaust manifold c o w l . Undo the securing
screws and detach the air inlet elbow from the
Inner w i n g ; pull off t h e (front) air inlet d u c t
which fits between the elbow a n d the air
cleaner lid (see illustrations).
2.4 D i s c o n n e c t t h e v a c u u m h o s e s f r o m
t h e t e m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l valve
Fuel system - single-point injection 4A«3
6 Slacken and withdraw the securing screws
and remove the air cleaner f r o m the engine
compartment (see illustrations).
Refitting
7 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
3 Inlet air temperature
regulator removal and refitting
Flap
%
Js;
gQ
valve
2.5a Pull off t h e w a r m - a i r inlet d u c t . . .
2.5b . . . a n d u n s c r e w t h e air inlet e l b o w
f r o m t h e inner w i n g
2.6a Air cleaner m o u n t i n g bolt at t h e
front...
2.6b . . . a n d t h e rear of t h e inner w i n g
(arrowed)
2 Remove the air b o x f r o m the t o p of the
throttle body as described in Section 2.
3 Relieve the strain f r o m the accelerator
cable by grasping the remote throttle disc
cam and turning it by hand. Unhook the nipple
at the end of the cable inner from the throttle
disc cam (see illustration).
4 Remove the outer cable locking clip, then
3.7 View of t h e t e m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l valve
w i t h t h e air cleaner lid r e m o v e d
3.8 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e t e m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l
valve v a c u u m h o s e s f r o m t h e air cleaner
Checking
1 The flap valve is located in the section of
intake d u c t i n g that runs between the intake
scoop,
at the
front
of
the
engine
compartment, and the front of the air cleaner.
2 To c h e c k the operation of the valve,
d i s c o n n e c t the hot-air inlet hose with the
engine c o l d , and use a mirror to c h e c k that
the flap is positioned horizontally, to a d m i t
only air f r o m the hot-air inlet hose exhaust
manifold.
3 Next, warm up the engine and check that
the flap moves to admit a mixture of cold air
and hot air f r o m the inlet d u c t s . If no
movement is observed, apply vacuum directly
to the flap valve vacuum hose and check for
m o v e m e n t . If the valve now operates, the
thermostatic vacuum valve may be faulty.
Removal
4 Remove the front intake duct from the air
cleaner lid as described in Section 2.
5 Unscrew the retaining screw and remove
the flap valve unit from the air duct.
Refitting
6 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Temperature
control
valve
Removal
7 Remove the lid f r o m the air cleaner, as
described in the air filter renewal procedure in
Chapter 1 (see illustration).
8 Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the valve
ports (see illustration). Make a careful note of
their order of fitment - on the project car, the
brown end fitting was the lower connection.
9 Carefully prise off the metal retaining clip
and release the valve from the air cleaner lid
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Recover the gasket and
renew it.
Refitting
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
4 Accelerator cable removal, refitting
*and adjustment
§|
|S
Removal
1 Disconnect the battery negative cable and
position it away from the terminal.
4.3 U n h o o k t h e t h r o t t l e c a b l e f r o m t h e
cam
4A»4 Fuel system - single-point injection
4.5 R e m o v i n g t h e f u s e panel c o v e r
4.7 A c c e l e r a t o r c a b l e g u i d e s e c u r i n g nut
(arrowed)
d i s e n g a g e the inner cable f r o m the remote
throttle disc c a m , and release the outer cable
from its mounting bracket (see illustrations).
Mark the slot in w h i c h the locking clip w a s
fitted, to ensure correct refitting.
5 Undo the securing screw and remove the
protective cover f r p m t h e fuse panel at t h e
rear of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t (see
illustration). Slacken and withdraw the bolts
then detach the fuse panel from the bulkhead
and position it one side. There is no need to
unplug the harness connectors, but take care
to avoid straining the wiring.
6 Prise out the s t u d and d e t a c h the righthand end of the padding panel from the bulkhead, at the rear of the engine compartment.
7 Undo the nut and d e t a c h the accelerator
cable g u i d e f r o m the b u l k h e a d
(see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Prise the rubber g r o m m e t from
the bulkhead aperture.
8 Release the accelerator cable from the clip
located underneath the engine management
s y s t e m ECU, at the rear of the engine
compartment.
9 W o r k i n g in the driver's f o o t w e l l , undo the
three securing s c r e w s and remove the
footrest.
10 Remove the trim panels from the
underside of the facia, as necessary to gain
access to the foot pedal mountings. Release
the nipple at the end of the accelerator cable
from the spigot at the t o p of the accelerator
pedal linkage.
11 W i t h d r a w the accelerator cable t h r o u g h
the bulkhead aperture from the inside of the
vehicle into the engine compartment.
Refitting
12 Refitting is a reverse of the
process
removal
Adjustment
4.18 A c c e l e r a t o r c a b l e a n d l i n k r o d a d j u s t m e n t details
1
2
Linkrod
Throttle body throttle
lever
3 Remote throttle disc cam
4 Throttle body throttle
disc cam
5
Locknut
6
Locknut
7 Hexagonal
section
13 Disconnect the linkrod f r o m the throttle
disc cam by pressing off one of the ball joints.
14 Remove the locking clip f r o m the
accelerator cable outer.
15 Adjust the position of the cable in its
m o u n t i n g bracket s u c h that all slack is
removed from the cable inner, then refit the
clip by sliding it into the slot closest to the
surface of the cable mounting bracket.
16 C h e c k that throttle disc is positioned
against its end stop - if it is not, there is too
m u c h tension in the accelerator c a b l e ;
reposition the locking clip to slacken the cable
slightly. When correctly a d j u s t e d , the
accelerator cable should eliminate any free
movement at the accelerator pedal; check this
by moving the pedal by hand.
17 Reconnect the linkrod to the throttle disc
c a m by pressing the balljoint back o n t o its
spigot. Start the engine and allow it to reach
operating temperature, then switch the engine
off.
18 At the throttle body, with the accelerator
pedal in the rest p o s i t i o n , c h e c k that the
clearance between the throttle disc cam and
its s t o p is as listed in the Specifications. If
Fuel system - single-point injection 4A»5
5.1 D i s c o n n e c t t h e b r e a t h e r h o s e f r o m t h e
throttle body
necessary, adjust the length of the linkrod by
s l a c k e n i n g the l o c k n u t s and rotating the
hexagonal section of the r o d , t o obtain the
correct clearance. On completion, tighten the
locknuts securely (see illustration).
19 With the engine s w i t c h e d off, have an
assistant depress the accelerator pedal fully,
then check that the throttle disc is wide open
by looking down into the throttle body. Repeat
the adjustment process if this is not the case.
5.2a Release t h e h o s e c l i p s . . .
5 Engine management
system components removal and refitting
5.2b . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e fuel s u p p l y . . .
2Q
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
in Section 1
before
proceeding.
Also,
check
parts
availability before dismantling - new parts may
have to be sourced from a Bosch agent, rather
than from a FIAT dealer.
5.2c . . . a n d r e t u r n h o s e s f r o m t h e t h r o t t l e
body
Throttle
body
assembly
Removal
1 Remove the air box and the associated air
d u c t i n g from the t o p of the throttle b o d y as
d e s c r i b e d in S e c t i o n 2. D i s c o n n e c t t h e
crankcase breather hose from the front of the
throttle body (see illustration).
2 Depressurise the fuel system with reference
to Section 8, then release the retaining clips
and disconnect the fuel feed and return hoses
f r o m the throttle b o d y a s s e m b l y (the fuel
supply hose is at the front, and has an arrow
indicating direction of fuel flow). If the original
FIAT retaining clips are still fitted, cut the clips
and discard them; replace them with standard
fuel hose clips on refitting (see illustrations).
3 Unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r s for the idle
control stepper motor, fuel injector, and
throttle p o t e n t i o m e t e r (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) .
Label each connector to avoid confusion on
refitting.
5.3d . . . a n d t h r o t t l e p o t e n t i o m e t e r w i r i n g
plugs
4A»6 Fuel system - single-point injection
not r e c o m m e n d e d that the upper and lower
halves of the throttle b o d y are separated these are held together by two inner throughbolts. If the two halves are split, a new gasket
must be used on reassembly.
Refitting
5.5 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e c h a r c o a l c a n i s t e r
h o s e at t h e inner w i n g
5.6 T h r o t t l e b o d y t h r o u g h - b o l t s (A), fuel
p r e s s u r e r e g u l a t o r s c r e w s (B) a n d i n j e c t o r
s e c u r i n g s c r e w (C)
4 Disconnect the accelerator cable inner from
the remote throttle disc cam as described in
Section 4, then disconnect the link rod from
the spigot on the throttle disc cam.
5 Disconnect the v a c u u m hoses that serve
the EVAP purge valve and intake air flap valve
from the throttle body. Alternatively, the EVAP
hose can be d i s c o n n e c t e d at the connector
above the inner wing (see illustration).
6 Slacken and remove the four through-bolts
securing the throttle b o d y assembly to the
inlet m a n i f o l d , then r e m o v e the assembly
along with its insulating spacer
(see
illustration). Unless specifically required, it is
7 Refitting is a reversal of the removal procedure, bearing in mind the following points:
a) Examine the insulating spacer for signs of
damage, and renew if necessary.
b) Ensure that the throttle body, inlet
manifold and insulating spacer mating
surfaces are clean and dry, then fit the
throttle body and spacer, and securely
tighten the retaining bolts.
c) Ensure that all hoses are correctly
reconnected and, where necessary, that
their retaining clips are securely tightened.
d) Adjust the accelerator cable as described
in Section 4.
Fuel
injector
N o t e : If a faulty injector is suspected, before
condemning the injector, it is worth trying the
effect of one of the proprietary
injector
cleaning
treatments.
Removal
8 Remove the air box and the associated air
ducting from the t o p of the throttle body as
described in Section 2.
9 Refer to Section 8 and depressurise the fuel
system, then disconnect the battery negative
lead and position it away from the terminal.
10 Unplug the wiring harness f r o m the
injector.
11 Remove the screw and lift off the injector
retaining cap/inlet air t e m p e r a t u r e sensor
housing. Recover the gasket.
12 Release the securing washer, then lift the
injector out of the throttle body, recovering
the O-ring seals (see illustration).
Refitting
13 Refit the injector by following the removal
p r o c e d u r e in reverse, renewing all O-ring
seals and gaskets. Apply a suitable sealant to
the screw threads, then insert and tighten the
retaining screw.
Fuel pressure
regulator
Removal
5.12 U p p e r half of t h r o t t l e body, s h o w i n g i n j e c t o r f i t t i n g details
Throttle body upper
section
Fuel pressure regulator
O-ring
Securing washer
Gasket
6
Injector/air
inlet
temperature sensor
securing screw
Air inlet temperature
sensor
Fuel injector
9 Fuel supply
connection
10 Upper-to lower section
gasket
11 Fuel return
connection
12 Seal
13 Fuel hose connection stub
14 Remove the air box and the associated air
ducting from the t o p of the throttle b o d y as
described in Section 2.
15 Using a marker p e n , make alignment
marks b e t w e e n the regulator cover and the
throttle b o d y , then u n d o the three Torx
retaining screws. As the screws are loosened,
place a rag over the cover to catch any fuel
spray which may be released.
16 Lift off the cover, then remove the spring
and withdraw the diaphragm, noting its correct
fitted orientation. Remove all traces of dirt, and
examine the diaphragm for signs of splitting. If
d a m a g e is f o u n d , it may be necessary to
renew the complete throttle body assembly consult a FIAT dealer or Bosch agent.
Fuel system - single-point injection 4A»7
Refitting
17 Refitting is a reversal of removal, ensuring
that t h e d i a p h r a g m a n d cover are fitted t h e
correct w a y r o u n d , a n d that t h e retaining
screws are securely tightened.
Idle control
stepper
motor
Removal
18 Remove the air box and the associated air
ducting from the t o p of the throttle body as
described in Section 2.
19 Using a crosshead screwdriver, unscrew
the three m o u n t i n g s c r e w s a n d r e m o v e the
stepper motor from the throttle body. Recover
the gasket.
20 Clean the unit and check for damage and
wear.
Refitting
21 When refitting the unit, use a new gasket
and m a k e sure that t h e plunger is inserted
correctly using the following procedure:
a) Insert the unit and refit the mounting
screws loosely.
b) Reconnect the wiring, then switch on the
ignition several times so that the unit
centralises itself.
c) Securely tighten the mounting screws.
d) Disconnect the battery negative cable,
and leave it disconnected for about
20 minutes - the injection/ignition ECU
will then position the idle control stepper
motor correctly when the battery is
reconnected and the engine is started for
the first time.
Throttle
5.32 Engine m a n a g e m e n t E C U
on t h e left-hand side of t h e cylinder h e a d ,
threaded into the coolant outlet elbow.
25 Drain the cooling system with reference to
Chapter 1.
26 Unplug the wiring from the sensor at the
connector (see illustration).
27 Unscrew the sensor a n d remove it from
the cylinder head. Recover the sealing washer
where fitted. If using a socket, take care not to
damage the wiring connector on the sensor.
necting the ECU multi-plug while there is any
p o w e r c o n n e c t e d t o it m a y well result in
damage t o the ECU.
32 Release the locking clip at the lower end
of t h e multiway connector, then unhook t h e
upper e n d by pivoting t h e c o n n e c t o r away
from the ECU. Undo the retaining screws and
r e m o v e t h e ECU t r o m its bracket (see
illustration).
Refitting
33 Refitting is a reversal of removal, making
sure that t h e wiring c o n n e c t o r is securely
reconnected.
28 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Where
applicable, fit a new sealing washer. Tighten
the sensor t o t h e specified t o r q u e . Do not
e x c e e d t h e specified t o r q u e otherwise t h e
unit's threads may be damaged.
Crankshaft
22 The position of the throttle potentiometer
with respect to the throttle disc is pre-set at
the factory. Consequently, if t h e p o t e n tiometer is f o u n d t o be faulty, t h e entire
throttle body must be renewed.
sensor
23 The inlet air t e m p e r a t u r e sensor is an
integral part of the fuel injector assembly, and
c a n n o t apparently b e renewed separately check with a FIAT dealer or Bosch agent.
TDC
sensor
29 Refer to Chapter 5B, Section 6.
Electronic
potentiometer
Inlet air temperature
5.26 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
coolant temperature sensor
control
unit (ECU)
N o t e : The ECU communicates
with the antitheft/immobiliser
system when the vehicle is
started; once the ignition key electronic code
has been stored by the ECU, it cannot be
used on any other vehicle. For this reason, do
not attempt to diagnose problems
with the
engine management
system by
connecting
the ECU to another vehicle, or by substituting
an ECU from another vehicle.
Removal
Refitting
Inertia
switch
Removal - early models
34 The inertia safety s w i t c h is located
underneath t h e driver's seat. Slide t h e seat
b a c k as far as possible then pull b a c k t h e
carpet for access.
35 U n s c r e w t h e t w o securing bolts, then
disconnect the wiring and remove the switch
from the vehicle.
Refitting
36 Refitting is a reversal of removal. If t h e
s w i t c h w a s t r i p p e d during removal, reset it
after refitting by depressing the centre of the
rubber cap.
Removal - later m o d e l s
24 The coolant temperature sensor is located
30 The ECU (electronic control unit) is
m o u n t e d on t h e bulkhead at the rear of the
engine compartment.
31 Prior t o removal, d i s c o n n e c t the battery
negative cable f r o m its terminal. D i s c o n -
37 On later m o d e l s , t h e inertia s w i t c h is
located behind a plastic panel to the left of the
passenger's footwell.
38 Remove t h e sill t r i m panel by removing
the t w o s c r e w s and releasing t h e securing
clips (see illustrations).
5.38a R e m o v e t h e s c r e w a t t h e f r o n t . . .
5.38b . . . a n d a t t h e r e a r . . .
5.38c . . . t h e n release t h e c l i p s a n d
r e m o v e t h e sill t r i m panel
Coolant
temperature
sensor
Removal
4A»8 Fuel system - single-point injection
5.39 View of t h e inertia s w i t c h , s h o w i n g
t h e w i r i n g p l u g a n d o n e of t h e s e c u r i n g
bolts
5.40 T h e inertia s w i t c h c a n be reset
w i t h o u t r e m o v i n g t h e sill t r i m p a n e l , if
required
5.41a R e m o v e t h e s c r e w a n d lift off t h e
engine compartment fusebox outer
cover...
Vehicle
sensor
speed
(speedometer)
Removal
46 The vehicle speed sensor is mounted on
the top of the transmission casing.
47 Unplug the wiring c o n n e c t o r , then
unscrew the sensor f r o m the transmission
casing (see illustration).
Refitting
48 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
5.41b . . . t h e n lift off t h e inner c o v e r for
access to the fuses
5.42a U n s c r e w t h e k n o b a n d r e m o v e t h e
cover...
39 Unscrew the t w o securing bolts, then
disconnect the wiring and remove the switch
from the vehicle (see illustration).
rear corner of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t (see
illustrations).
42 Individual fuses for the fuel pump and the
injection/ignition system are m o u n t e d in the
relay box, l o c a t e d to the rear of the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t , directly behind the throttle
body intake air box. To gain access, unscrew
the k n o b and lift off the cover (see
illustrations).
Refitting
40 Refitting is a reversal of removal. If the
s w i t c h w a s t r i p p e d during removal, reset it
after refitting by depressing the centre of the
rubber cap (see illustration).
Fuel injection
relays
system
fuses
and
Removal
41 The main s y s t e m 30A fuse is located
underneath a plastic cover at the left-hand
43 To renew a fuse, ensure that the battery
negative cable is disconnected, then pull the
existing fuse from its socket and press a new
one into place.
44 To remove a relay, ensure that the battery
negative cable is d i s c o n n e c t e d , then unclip
the relay from its mountings and unplug the
wiring connector.
Refitting
45 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
6 Fuel pump/
fuel gauge sender unit
removal and refitting
Removal
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
in Section 1
before
proceeding.
1 Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery terminal.
2 Remove the press-stud fixings and detach
the carpet from the load space floor.
3 Undo the s c r e w s and remove the dust
cover from the access aperture in the floorpan
(see illustrations).
4 Bearing in m i n d the warning given in
Section 1, d i s c o n n e c t the fuel s u p p l y and
return lines from the fuel pump/gauge sender
unit by pressing the t a b s (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Plug the ends of the lines or cover them with
adhesive t a p e , to prevent the ingress of
5.42b . . . f o r a c c e s s t o t h e f u s e s a n d
relays
1 Fuel pump fuse
2 Injection/ignition
system fuse
3 Injection/ignition
system relay
4 Fuel pump relay
5.47 U n p l u g t h e c o n n e c t o r f o r t h e
speedometer sensor
|
6.3a R e m o v e t h e s c r e w s . . .
Fuel system - single-point injection 4A»9
6.3b . . . a n d t a k e off t h e d u s t c o v e r f o r
a c c e s s t o t h e s e n d e r unit
6.4 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e f u e l supply pipe
f r o m t h e s e n d e r unit
debris. Label the fuel lines to ensure correct
refitting.
5 Unplug the wiring connector from the top of
the fuel p u m p / g a u g e sender unit (see
illustration).
6 Where applicable, remove the nut securing
the breather pipe to the tank, then prise the
pipe end fitting out of the tank (see
illustration).
7 Using a suitable tool, unscrew the large ring
nut that secures the pump/sender unit to the
t o p of the fuel tank (see T o o l Tip).
8 Carefully w i t h d r a w the unit f r o m the fuel
tank. S o m e careful manipulation will be
required, to allow the sender unit float arm to
exit the tank without snagging. Suspend the
unit above the t a n k aperture for a few
minutes, to allow the excess fuel to drain
away (see illustration).
9 Recover the sealing ring from the fuel tank
aperture.
TOOL
If the pump/sender
unit is
not being refitted
immediately, screw
the
retaining
nut
back
onto
the
tank
temporarily,
as the fittings
may swell
over a period of time, making
refitting
difficult.
HAYNES
10 The sender unit fuel filter can be
i n s p e c t e d by unclipping the round cover at
the base of the unit. The float assembly can
With the limited access available to the
sender unit ring nut, and the fact that
the nut is very tight, we had to make up
a tool to unscrew
it. The tool is made
from two metal strips - one bent to fit
across the ring nut to provide two 'legs'
which engage in the ribs on the ring
nut, and one bolted to the first, to act
as a handle.
4
6.5 U n p l u g t h e w i r i n g c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e
s e n d e r unit
6.6 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e fuel t a n k breather
pipe
also be u n d i p p e d f r o m the side of the unit,
and
the
wiring
d i s c o n n e c t e d • (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . The p u m p unit hoses must be
disconnected before it too is u n d i p p e d from
the base of the unit - it appears, however, that
separating the hose connections may destroy
t h e m , so have replacement hoses available
for refitting.
11 From the FIAT information available at the
time of w r i t i n g , it appears that
no
pump/sender unit c o m p o n e n t s are available
• separately.
Refitting
6.8 R e m o v i n g t h e p u m p / s e n d e r unit
tit
12 Refitting is a reversal of the removal
procedure, noting the following points:
a) It is advisable to use a new sealing ring.
b) Refit the ring nut loosely to the top of the
sender unit before offering it into position
(see
illustration).
c) Take care as the unit is fitted that the
•
V
1.1 Oa O n c e t h e b a s e of t h e unit has been
undipped . . .
6.10b . . . t h e p u m p filter c a n also be
undipped and removed
6.10c R e m o v i n g t h e f l o a t a s s e m b l y
4A»10 Fuel system - single-point injection
6.12a M a k e s u r e t h e ring n u t is in p o s i t i o n
b e f o r e f i t t i n g t h e unit
6.12b A r r o w h e a d m a r k i n g o n t o p of t h e
fuel t a n k
sealing ring does not get pushed into the
tank.
d) Align the arrowhead marking on top of the
tank with the similar mark on the sender
unit (see
illustration).
e) Prior to refitting the access cover,
reconnect the battery, then start the
engine and check the unions for signs of
leakage.
via the wheel a r c h , u n d o the s c r e w and
release the filler neck from the bodywork.
6 Position a trolley j a c k or similar centrally
underneath the fuel tank and raise it until it is
just supporting the weight of the tank. Prevent
d a m a g e to the underside of the tank by
placing a b l o c k of w o o d b e t w e e n the jack
head and the tank.
7 Fuel tankremoval and refitting
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
before
proceeding.
^
in Section
1
Removal
1 Before removing the fuel tank, all fuel must
be drained f r o m the tank. Since a fuel t a n k
drain plug is not p r o v i d e d , it is therefore
preferable to carry out the removal operation
when the tank is nearly e m p t y . Before
proceeding, disconnect the battery negative
lead and syphon or hand-pump the remaining
fuel from the tank.
7 U n d o the front and rear fuel tank strap
securing bolts, recover the spacer washers,
then carefully lower the fuel tank away from
the floorpan (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Loosen the
clips and d i s c o n n e c t the EVAP purge hose
and breather hose from the fuel tank as they
become accessible.
8 C h e c k that all hoses and wiring 'are
d i s c o n n e c t e d , then lower the t a n k t o the
g r o u n d and remove it f r o m underneath the
vehicle.
Refitting
9 Refitting is a reversal of the removal
p r o c e d u r e , ensuring all hoses are correctly
routed and securely reconnected.
8 Fuel injection system depressurisation
|^
^
2 Remove the fuel p u m p / f u e l gauge sender
unit as described in Section 6.
3 C h o c k the front wheels, then jack up the
rear of the vehicle and support on axle stands
(see Jacking and vehicle support).
4 Open the fuel filler flap and carefully release
the filler neck flexible gaiter f r o m the
bodywork.
5 To improve access, remove the fasteners
securing the rear wheel arch liner(s). Working
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
in Section 1
before
proceeding.
1 The fuel s u p p l y system referred t o in this
Section is defined as the t a n k - m o u n t e d fuel
p u m p , the fuel filter, the throttle b o d y and
pressure regulator components, and the metal
pipes and flexible hoses of the fuel lines
7.7a Fuel t a n k retaining s t r a p f r o n t . . .
7.7b . . . a n d rear b o l t s
between these components. All these contain
fuel w h i c h will be under pressure while the
engine is running and/or while the ignition is
s w i t c h e d o n . The pressure will remain for
s o m e t i m e after the ignition has been
switched off, and must be relieved before any
of these c o m p o n e n t s are d i s t u r b e d for
servicing work.
2 Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(take out the key). U n s c r e w the k n o b and
remove the cover from the fuse/relay holder
directly behind the throttle body air box.
3 Referring to Section 5, pull out the fuse for
the fuel p u m p . If the injection/ignition fuse or
the main system fuse are r e m o v e d , the
injector will not o p e n , so defeating the
purpose of this exercise.
4 Try to start the engine, keeping the engine
cranking for several seconds. It may fire and
run for a little while - if so, let it run until it
stops.
5 Once the injector has o p e n e d and closed
several times, this will reduce the fuel pressure
to a safer level. However, fuel will still be
present in the system, and care should still be
taken.
6 Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery terminal, then refit the fuel p u m p fuse
and the fuse/relay box cover.
7 Place a container beneath the relevant
c o n n e c t i o n / u n i o n to be d i s c o n n e c t e d , and
have a large rag ready to soak up any
e s c a p i n g fuel not being c a u g h t by the
container.
8 Slowly loosen the connection or union nut
(as applicable) to avoid a sudden release of
fuel, and wrap the rag around the connection
t o c a t c h any fuel w h i c h may be e x p e l l e d .
Once the fuel has been s o a k e d up,
d i s c o n n e c t the fuel line, and insert plugs to
minimise fuel loss and prevent the entry of dirt
into the fuel system.
9 Inlet manifold removal and refitting
N o t e : Refer to the precautions
before
proceeding.
|^
|S
in Section
1
Removal
1 Remove the throttle b o d y assembly as
described in Section 5. Alternatively, using the
information in Section 5, disconnect the wiring
plugs and hoses from the throttle body, and
remove with the manifold as an assembly.
2 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
3 Disconnect the wiring connector from the
coolant temperature sensor (situated on the
left-hand side of the manifold).
4 U n d o the bolt securing the accelerator
cable mounting bracket to the manifold, and
position it clear of the manifold.
5 Slacken the retaining clip and disconnect
the coolant hose from the rear of the manifold.
Alternatively, this hose can be disconnected
Fuel system - single-point injection 4A»11
D i s c o n n e c t t h e inlet m a n i f o l d c o o l a n t
s u p p l y hose
9.6 U n s c r e w t h e clip a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e
b r a k e servo v a c u u m hose
9.7a U n s c r e w t h e m a n i f o l d retaining n u t s
(seven of eight a r r o w e d ) . . .
m
, 'X\ '
v !
9.7b . . . w i t h d r a w t h e m a n i f o l d f r o m t h e
cylinder head s t u d s . . .
at the coolant elbow in front of the tinning belt
cover (see illustration).
6 Disconnect the brake v a c u u m hose (see
illustration).
7 Undo the eight manifold retaining nuts,
recover the split washers, and remove the
manifold from the engine. Remove the gasket
and discard it; a new one should be used on
refitting (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Note the plastic
locating pins used to secure the gasket to the
inlet manifold - transfer them to the new gasket.
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reverse of the removal
procedure, noting the following points:
a) Check the condition of the core plugs
fitted to the base of the manifold. If signs
of leakage are evident, the plugs should
be removed, and new ones tapped in.
b) Ensure that the manifold and cylinder
head mating surfaces are clean and dry,
and fit a new manifold gasket. Use the
plastic locating pins to secure the gasket
to the manifold - tap them in with a pin
punch until they are flush with the gasket
surface (see
illustrations).
c) Refit the manifold and washers over the
cylinder head studs, and securely tighten
the retaining nuts.
d) Ensure that all relevant hoses are
reconnected to their original positions and
are securely held (where necessary) by
the retaining clips.
e) Refit (or reconnect) the throttle body with
reference to Section 5.
f) On completion, refill the cooling system
as described in Chapter 1.
9.7c . . . a n d r e m o v e it f r o m t h e engine
10 Fuel injection system checking and adjustment
Checking
Note: Also see Chapter 5 6 , Section 3.
1 Before d i s c o n n e c t i n g any of the injection
system wiring, ensure that the ignition is
switched off (take out the key).
2 If a fault a p p e a r s in t h e fuel injection
system, first ensure that all the system wiring
connectors are securely connected and free
of corrosion. Also check the wiring harness for
signs of d a m a g e , such as may result if the
wiring is routed too close to a hot component,
for example.
9.7d R e m o v i n g t h e inlet m a n i f o l d g a s k e t
ignition s w i t c h e d off, remove the fuses and
relays in turn, and c h e c k that the fuse and
relay contacts, and their sockets in the box,
are clean. Refit the fuses and relays securely.
Similarly check the 30A fuse in the box at the
left rear corner of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t
(refer to Section 5).
4 The system's main earth point is located at
the right-hand rear of the cylinder head, just in
front of No 1 spark p l u g . Remove the bolt
securing the earth terminal, and clean all
contact
surfaces
thoroughly
(see
illustrations). Refit the terminal and bolt, and
tighten it securely.
3 Remove the cover from the fuse/relay box
behind the throttle body, and c h e c k the
connections to the fuses and relays. With the
5 Then ensure that the fault is not due to poor
maintenance; ie, c h e c k that the air cleaner
filter element is clean, the spark plugs are in
good condition and correctly gapped, the HT
leads are securely c o n n e c t e d and in g o o d
condition, and that the engine breather hoses
are clear and undamaged.
9.8a Transfer t h e plastic l o c a t i n g pins t o
the new g a s k e t . . .
9.8b . . . a n d t a p t h e m in f l u s h w i t h a pin
punch
4A«12 Fuel system - single-point injection
10.4a U n s c r e w t h e b o l t (arrowed) b e l o w
the wiring harness b r a c k e t . . .
10.4b . . . a n d t a k e off t h e e a r t h lead
6 Check all the ignition system c o m p o n e n t s
and wiring as far as possible, using the
information in Chapters 1 and 5B. Sometimes
it can be difficult t o d e t e r m i n e w h e t h e r a
misfire is fuel or ignition-related.
7 If the engine is difficult to start, or runs
poorly, when cold, the problem may be that
the engine management system has gone into
e m e r g e n c y b a c k - u p m o d e . This, and the
nature of the fault that caused it to happen,
can only be d e t e r m i n e d using diagnostic
equipment such as a fault code reader.
10 Using this e q u i p m e n t , faults c a n be
p i n p o i n t e d quickly and simply, even if their
o c c u r r e n c e is intermittent. Testing all the
system components individually in an attempt
to locate the fault by elimination is a t i m e c o n s u m i n g operation that is unlikely t o be
fruitful (particularly if the fault o c c u r s
dynamically), and carries high risk of damage
to the ECU'S internal components.
8 A diagnostic c o n n e c t o r is located behind
the throttle b o d y , into w h i c h a fault c o d e
reader can be plugged (see Ntustration). The
test e q u i p m e n t is c a p a b l e of 'interrogating'
the engine management system electronically
and accessing its internal fault log.
9 Fault codes can only be extracted from the
ECU using a dedicated fault c o d e reader. A
FIAT dealer will obviously have such a reader,
but they are also available f r o m other
suppliers, including Haynes. It is unlikely to be
c o s t - e f f e c t i v e for the private o w n e r t o
purchase a fault c o d e reader, but a w e l l e q u i p p e d local garage or auto electrical
specialist will have one.
10.8 D i a g n o s t i c c o n n e c t o r (arrowed)
located behind the throttle body
11 Unleaded petrol general information and usage
N o t e : The information given in this Chapter is
correct at the time of writing. If updated
information is thought to be required, check
with a FIAT dealer. If travelling abroad, consult
one of the motoring organisations (or a similar
authority) for advice on the fuel available.
Adjustment
11 Experienced h o m e mechanics e q u i p p e d
with an accurate tachometer and a carefullycalibrated exhaust gas analyser may be able
to check the exhaust gas CO content and the
engine idle speed; if these are found to be out
of s p e c i f i c a t i o n , then the vehicle must be
taken to a suitably-equipped FIAT dealer for
assessment.
12 Neither the air/fuel mixture (exhaust gas
CO content) nor the engine idle s p e e d are
manually adjustable; incorrect test results
indicate the need for maintenance (possibly,
injector cleaning) or a fault within the fuel
injection system.
1 The fuel recommended by FIAT is given in
the Specifications at the start of this Chapter,
followed by the equivalent petrol currently on
sale in the UK.
2 All m o d e l s are f i t t e d with a catalytic
converter and must be run on unleaded fuel
only, with a minimum octane rating of 95 RON.
Under no c i r c u m s t a n c e s should leaded fuel
(eg UK 4-star) or lead replacement petrol
(LRP) be used, as this may damage the c o n verter.
3 Super unleaded petrol (98 octane) can also
be used in all models if desired.
3«1
Chapter 3
Cooling, heating and ventilation systems
Contents
Air conditioning components - removal and refitting
11
Air conditioning system - general information and precautions . . . . 10
Coolant pump - removal, inspection and refitting
8
Coolant temperature sensor - testing, removal and refitting
7
Cooling fan thermoswitch - testing, removal and refitting
6
Cooling system hoses - disconnection and renewal
2
Electric cooling fan - testing, removal and refitting
General information and precautions
Heater/ventilation components - removal and refitting
Radiator - removal, inspection and refitting
Thermostat - removal, testing and refitting
5
1
9
3
4
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
§N
novice with little
expenence
gy^
Fairly difficult,
Fairly easy, suitable
for beginner with
^
s o m e experience
g^
§^
suitable for competent
DIY mechanic
g^
Difficult, suitable for
|k
V e r y difficult,
experienced DIY
3^
suitable for expert DIY 3 ^
mechanic
g^
or professional
g^
Specifications
General
Expansion tank relief valve opening pressure
Coolant p u m p impeller-to-casing clearance (1.6 litre engine only) . . . .
0.98 bar
0.3 to 1.1 mm
Thermostat
Opening temperature:
1.2 litre engine:
Starts to open
Fully open
1.4 litre engine:
Starts to open
Fully open
1.6 litre engine:
Starts to open
Fully open
1.8 litre engine:
Starts to open
Fully open
Maximum thermostat lift (approximate):
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
81 to 85°C
103°C
81 to 85°C
101 to 105°C
81 to 85°C
99 to 103°C
81 to 85°C
98 to 102°C
9.5 m m
9.5 m m
9.5 m m
> 7.5 m m
Electric cooling fan thermoswitch
Note: 7.6 litre models manufactured
control unit.
Models without air conditioning:
Cut-in temperature
Cut-out temperature
Models with air conditioning:
Cuf-in temperature:
1st stage
2nd stage
Cut-out temperature:
1st stage
2nd stage
from April 1998-on are not fitted with a thermoswitch
90 to 94°C
85 to 89°C
90 to 94°C
95 to 99°C
85 to 89°C
90 to 94°C
because the electric cooling fan is switched
on by the
3«2 Cooling, heating and ventilation systems
Coolant temperature sensor
Temperature:
0°
20°
40°
60°
80°
100°
120°
:.
R e s i s t a n c e (approx)
6000 ohms
2300 o h m s
1000 ohms
550 ohms
300 ohms
180 ohms
100 ohms
Torque wrench settings
Nm
Ibf ft
Air conditioning compressor bracket to cylinder block
Coolant pump:
M8bolt
M8 nut with flange
Coolant temperature sensor:
M12
M14
M16
Inlet pipe to cylinder head:
M6 bolt on 1.4 and 1.8 litre models
M8 bolt on 1.4 and 1.6 litre models
Thermostat to cylinder head:
M8bolt
M8 nut
Timing belt guard brackets (1.8 litre engine)
50
37
25
20
18
15
25
30
34
18
22
25
9
25
7
18
25
20
9
18
15
7
1 General information and
precautions
General
information
The engine cooling/interior heating system
is of pressurised type, comprising a coolant
p u m p , a c r o s s f l o w radiator, a coolant
e x p a n s i o n tank, an electric cooling f a n , a
thermostat, heater matrix, and all associated
hoses and switches. On 1.2 litre models, the
coolant pump is driven by the toothed timing
belt. On 1.4 litre models, the coolant pump is
driven off the back of the timing belt. On 1.6
litre models the coolant p u m p is driven by the
auxiliary drivebelt from the crankshaft pulley.
On 1.8 litre m o d e l s , the coolant p u m p is
driven off the back of the timing belt.
The system f u n c t i o n s as f o l l o w s . The
coolant p u m p circulates c o l d water around
the cylinder b l o c k and head passages,
through the heater matrix, returning it to the
pump. On certain engines it also circulates it
through the inlet manifold and throttle body.
W h e n the engine is c o l d , the t h e r m o s t a t
remains c l o s e d a n d prevents c o o l a n t f r o m
c i r c u l a t i n g t h r o u g h the radiator. W h e n the
c o o l a n t reaches a p r e d e t e r m i n e d t e m p erature, t h e t h e r m o s t a t o p e n s , and the
coolant passes through the t o p hose to the
radiator. As the c o o l a n t c i r c u l a t e s t h r o u g h
the radiator, it is cooled by the in-rush of air
w h e n the bar is in f o r w a r d m o t i o n . The
airflow is supplemented by the action of the
electric cooling fan, w h e n necessary. From
t h e b o t t o m of the radiator t h e c o o l a n t is
returned to the coolant p u m p , and the cycle
is repeated.
When
the
engine
reaches
normal
operating temperature, the coolant expands,
and s o m e of it is displaced into the expansion tank. Coolant collects in the tank, and is
returned t o t h e radiator w h e n t h e s y s t e m
c o o l s . On 1.2 litre m o d e l s w i t h o u t air
conditioning, all 1.4 litre models, and 1.6 litre
m o d e l s w i t h manual t r a n s m i s s i o n , the
expansion tank is integrated into the side of
the radiator. On 1.2 litre m o d e l s w i t h air
conditioning, 1.6 litre models with automatic
t r a n s m i s s i o n , and 1.8 litre m o d e l s , a
s e p a r a t e e x p a n s i o n t a n k is l o c a t e d on the
right-hand side of the engine compartment.
The electric cooling fan m o u n t e d on the
rear of the radiator is c o n t r o l l e d by a
thermostatic switch except on 1.6 litre models
m a n u f a c t u r e d f r o m April 1 9 9 8 - o n . At a
p r e d e t e r m i n e d coolant t e m p e r a t u r e , the
s w i t c h / s e n s o r actuates the fan to provide
additional airflow t h r o u g h the radiator. The
s w i t c h cuts the electrical supply to the fan
when the coolant temperature has d r o p p e d
below a preset threshold (see Specifications).
On 1.6 litre models manufactured from April
1998-on, the electric cooling fan is switched
on by the control unit.
Precautions
A
Warning:
Do not
attempt
to
remove
the
expansion
tank
pressure
cap, or to disturb
any
part of the cooling
system,
while
the
engine is hot, as there is a high risk of
scalding.
If the expansion
tank
pressure
cap must be removed
before the
engine
and radiator have fully cooled (even though
this is not recommended),
the pressure
in
the cooling system must first be relieved.
Cover the cap with a thick layer of cloth, to
avoid scalding,
and slowly unscrew
the
pressure cap until a hissing sound is heard.
When the hissing stops, indicating
that the
pressure has reduced, slowly unscrew
the
pressure
cap until it can be removed; if
more hissing sounds are heard, wait until
they have stopped before unscrewing
the
cap completely. At all times, keep your face
well away from the pressure cap
opening,
and protect your hands.
A
Warning: Do not allow
antifreeze
to come into contact
with
your
skin, or with the painted
surfaces
of the vehicle. Rinse off spills
immediately,
with plenty of water. Never leave
antifreeze
lying around in an open container, or in a
puddle in the driveway
or on the
garage
floor. Children and pets are attracted by its
sweet smell, but antifreeze
can be fatal if
ingested.
A
Warning: If the engine is hot, the
electric
cooling
fan may
start
rotating
even if the engine
and
ignition
are switched
off. Be careful
to
keep your hands, hair, and any
loose
clothing
well clear when working
in the
engine
compartment.
A
Warning: Refer to Section
10 for
precautions
to be observed
when
working on models equipped
with
air
conditioning.
2 Cooling system hosesdisconnection and renewal
Note: Refer to the warnings given in Section 1
of this Chapter before proceeding.
Hoses
should only be disconnected once the engine
has cooled sufficiently to avoid scalding.
1 If the checks described in Chapter, Section 9,
Cooling, heating and ventilation systems 3»3
reveal a faulty hose, it must be renewed as
described in the following paragraphs.
2 First drain the cooling system (see Chapter 1).
If the coolant is not due for renewal, it may be reused, providing it is collected in a clean
container.
3 To disconnect a hose, use a screwdriver to
slacken the clips, then move them along the
hose, clear of the relevant inlet/outlet.
Carefully work the hose free. The hoses can
be removed with relative ease when new - on
an older car, they may have stuck.
4 If a hose proves to be difficult to remove, try
to release it by t w i s t i n g its e n d s before
attempting to free it. Gently prise the end of
the hose with a blunt instrument (such as a
flat-bladed screwdriver), but do not apply too
much force, and take care not to damage the
pipe stubs or hoses. Note in particular that the
radiator inlet s t u b is fragile; d o not use
excessive force when attempting to remove
the hose. If all else fails, cut the hose with a
sharp knife, then slit it so that it can be peeled
off in t w o pieces. A l t h o u g h this may prove
expensive
if the
hose
is
otherwise
undamaged, it is preferable to buying a new
radiator. C h e c k first, however, that a new
hose is readily available.
5 When fitting a hose, first slide the clips onto
the hose, then ease the hose into position.
CTTTTTB
If the hose is stiff, use a little
s o a p y water as a
lubricant,
or
soften
the
hose
by
soaking
it in hot water. Do
not use oil or grease, which may attack
the rubber.
"
« !*
I t r
6 Ensure the hose is correctly routed, then
slide each clip back along the hose until it
passes over the end of the relevant
inlet/outlet, before tightening the clip securely.
7 Refill the cooling system with reference to
Chapter 1.
8 Check t h o r o u g h l y for leaks as soon as
possible after d i s t u r b i n g any part of t h e
cooling system.
3 Radiator removal, inspection
and refitting
I
3.11a U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s . . .
3.11b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e air inlet s h r o u d
f r o m over t h e r a d i a t o r
4 On the rear of the radiator, disconnect the
wiring plugs leading to the electric cooling
fan. The plugs are located on the cowl.
5 Unbolt the air inlet d u c t f r o m the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t front c r o s s m e m b e r , and also
disconnect it from the air cleaner.
6 On models with air conditioning, release the
clip and disconnect the expansion tank purge
hose f r o m the t o p r i g h t - h a n d side of t h e
radiator.
7 Remove the electric cooling fan assembly
from the rear of the radiator with reference to
Section 5.
8 On models with air conditioning, unscrew
and remove the bolts securing the radiator to
the air c o n d i t i o n i n g c o n d e n s e r and front
valance.
14 If necessary for additional working room,
remove the electric cooling fan assembly from
the rear of the radiator w i t h reference to
Section 5.
15 On models with air conditioning, unscrew
and remove the bolts securing the radiator to the
air conditioning condenser and front valance.
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
9 Loosen the clips and d i s c o n n e c t the t o p
and bottom coolant hoses from the radiator.
10 On the rear of the radiator, disconnect the
wiring plug leading to the electric cooling fan.
The plug is located on the c o w l .
16 Loosen the clips and disconnect the top
and bottom coolant hoses from the radiator.
17 Unscrew the mounting bolts on the engine
compartment front crossmember, and remove
the air inlet shroud from over the radiator.
18 Remove the electric cooling fan assembly
from the rear of the radiator with reference to
Section 5.
19 Release the clip a n d d i s c o n n e c t the
expansion tank purge hose from the top of the
radiator.
20 U n s c r e w and remove the upper bolts
securing the air conditioning condenser to the
front of the radiator. Loosen only the
condenser lower mounting bolts.
1.4 l i t r e m o d e l s
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s
All m o d e l s
11 Unscrew the mounting bolts on the engine
compartment front crossmember, and remove
the air inlet shroud from over the radiator (see
illustrations).
12 Loosen the clips and disconnect the t o p
and b o t t o m coolant hoses from the radiator
(see illustrations).
13 On models with a u t o m a t i c transmission
and/or air conditioning, release the clip and
d i s c o n n e c t the expansion t a n k purge hose
from the top of the radiator.
21 U n s c r e w and remove the t w o radiator
upper m o u n t i n g nuts located on the engine
c o m p a r t m e n t front c r o s s m e m b e r . Remove
the upper m o u n t i n g b r a c k e t s and rubbers
from the top of the radiator (see illustrations).
22 Carefully lift the radiator (together with the
electric fan unit where applicable) f r o m the
lower m o u n t i n g rubbers in the engine
compartment, taking care not to damage the
radiator fins as they are easily d e n t e d (see
illustrations).
3.12a D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e t o p . .
3.12b . . . a n d b o t t o m h o s e s f r o m t h e
radiator
Removal
N o t e : If leakage is the reason for removing the
radiator, bear in mind that minor leaks can
often be cured using proprietary
radiator
sealing compound, with the radiator in situ.
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
1.2 l i t r e m o d e l s
3 Loosen the clips and d i s c o n n e c t the t o p
and bottom coolant hoses from the radiator.
3*4 Cooling, heating and ventilation systems
3.21a U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g n u t s . . .
3.21b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e u p p e r m o u n t i n g
brackets and rubbers
3.22a R e m o v i n g t h e radiator f r o m t h e
engine compartment
3.22b R a d i a t o r a n d e l e c t r i c f a n unit
r e m o v e d f r o m t h e car
3.23 O n e of t h e r a d i a t o r b o t t o m m o u n t i n g
rubbers
23 With the radiator
on the
bench,
disconnect the wiring from the thermoswitch
where fitted. As applicable, unscrew the bolts
and remove the electric fan unit f r o m t h e
radiator, and unbolt the lower front air d u c t
from the radiator. Remove the lower mounting
rubbers (see illustration).
Inspection
24 If the radiator has been removed due to
suspected blockage, it may be flushed out as
described in Chapter 1, Section 3 1 . Clean dirt
and debris from the radiator fins, using an air
line (in which case, wear eye protection) or a
soft brush. Be careful, as the fins are sharp,
and can also be easily damaged.
25 If necessary, a radiator specialist can
perform a 'flow t e s t ' on t h e radiator, t o
establish whether an internal blockage exists.
26 A leaking radiator must be referred to a
specialist for permanent repair. N o t e : In an
emergency, minor leaks from the radiator can
often be cured by using a suitable
radiator
sealing compound,
in accordance
with its
manufacturer's
instructions,
with the radiator
in situ.
27 If the radiator is to be sent for repair or is
to be renewed, remove all hoses and, where
applicable, the cooling fan thermoswitch.
28 Inspect the radiator m o u n t i n g r u b b e r s ,
and renew them if necessary.
Refitting
29 Refitting is a reversal of removal, but
securely tighten the radiator mounting bolts
and hose c l i p s . On c o m p l e t i o n , refill t h e
cooling system as described in Chapter 1.
4 Thermostat removal, testing and refitting
left-hand e n d of the cylinder head (see
illustration).
5 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts and remove
the thermostat housing from the cylinder head
(see illustration). Recover the gasket.
General
1 . 4 , 1 . 6 a n d 1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
1 The thermostat housing is bolted to the left
hand end of the cylinder head. The thermostat
itself cannot be separated from the housing
and can only be renewed as a c o m p l e t e
assembly.
6 Loosen the clip and disconnect the radiator
top hose from the thermostat housing on the
left-hand end of the cylinder head, below the
ignition coil.
7 Loosen the clip and disconnect the throttle
b o d y coolant hose f r o m the rear of the
thermostat housing. Also disconnect the bypass hose from the bottom of the housing.
8 Disconnect the wiring from the temperature
sender(s) on the thermostat housing.
9 U n s c r e w t h e m o u n t i n g bolts and remove
the t h e r m o s t a t housing f r o m the cylinder
head. Recover the gasket/O-ring.
Removal
2 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
3 f o r improved access, remove the battery
as described in Chapter 5A.
1.2 l i t r e m o d e l s
4 Loosen the clip and disconnect the radiator
top hose from the thermostat housing on the
Testing
10 A rough test of t h e t h e r m o s t a t may be
made by suspending it with a piece of string in
a container full of water. Heat the water to
bring it to the boil - the thermostat must open
by the time the water boils. If not, renew the
complete thermostat/housing assembly.
11 If a thermometer is available, the precise
opening temperature of the thermostat may
be d e t e r m i n e d ; c o m p a r e w i t h the figures
given in the Specifications.
The o p e n i n g
t e m p e r a t u r e should also be m a r k e d on the
thermostat housing.
4.4 T h e r m o s t a t h o u s i n g a n d t o p h o s e d i s t r i b u t o r r e m o v e d f o r clarity
(1.2 litre m o d e l s )
4.5 R e m o v i n g t h e t h e r m o s t a t h o u s i n g
(1.2 litre models)
13 Note that a thermostat which fails to close
completely as the water cools must also be
renewed.
Cooling, heating and ventilation systems 3*5
new sealing ring on the sensor. S c r e w the
t h e r m o s w i t c h into the radiator and tighten
securely.
9 Reconnect the wiring.
10 R e c o n n e c t t h e battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
11 Refill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
Refitting
14 Ensure that the cylinder head and
t h e r m o s t a t housing mating surfaces are
completely clean and free from all traces of
the old gasket material.
15 Locate a new gasket in position on the
cylinder head, then fit the thermostat housing
and insert retaining bolts, tightening t h e m
securely.
16 The remaining procedure is a reversal of
removal, but refill the cooling system as
described in Chapter 1.
5 Electric cooling fan testing, removal and refitting
%•
Testing
1 Detailed fault diagnosis should be carried
out by a FIAT dealer using d e d i c a t e d test
equipment, but basic diagnosis can be carried
out as follows. Note that on models equipped
with air c o n d i t i o n i n g , t w o fans are fitted
together with a two-speed control unit.
2 If the fan does not appear to work, run the
engine until normal operating temperature is
reached, then allow it to idle. The fan should
cut in just before the t e m p e r a t u r e gauge
needle enters the red section. If not, switch off
the ignition and d i s c o n n e c t the cooling fan
motor wiring connector.
3 The motor can be tested by disconnecting
it from the wiring loom, and connecting a 12volt supply and an earth wire directly to it. The
motor should operate - if not, the motor, or
the motor wiring, is faulty.
4 If the m o t o r operates w h e n tested as
d e s c r i b e d , t h e fault m u s t lie in t h e engine
wiring harness or the temperature sensor. The
temperature sensor/switch can be tested as
d e s c r i b e d in Section 6. Any further fault
diagnosis should be referred to a suitablyequipped FIAT dealer - d o n o t attempt to test
the electronic control unit.
Removal
5 Make sure that the ignition switch is turned
off, and that the engine is cold.
Warning: The electric
fan
could
start to operate
if the engine is
hot,
even
if the
ignition
is
switched
off.
6 On 1.6 and 1.8 litre m o d e l s , unscrew the
bolts and remove the inlet air duct from over
the radiator.
7 Disconnect the electric cooling fan wiring
from the loom and where necessary from the
thermoswitch (see illustration).
8 On 1.8 litre models, improved access to the
lower m o u n t i n g bolts may be gained by
raising the front of the vehicle. A p p l y the
h a n d b r a k e , then j a c k up the front of the
vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle stands (see
Jacking and vehicle support).
Remove the
splash shield f r o m under the engine
compartment.
A
1
7 Coolant temperature sensor
- testing, removal and refitting Sk;
5.7 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e w i r i n g f r o m t h e
electric c o o l i n g f a n unit o n t h e r a d i a t o r
9 Support the electric cooling fan assembly,
then unscrew the bolts securing it to the rear
of the radiator. Carefully lift the assembly from
the engine c o m p a r t m e n t , taking care not to
damage the radiator cooling fins.
Refitting
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
6 Cooling fan thermoswitch testing, removal and refitting
§|
^
N o t e : 7.6 litre models manufactured
from
April 1998-on are not fitted with a thermoswitch because the electric cooling fan is
switched on by the control unit.
Testing
1 Where fitted, the switch is threaded into the
lower left hand corner of the radiator.
2 The s w i t c h can be tested by removing it,
and checking that the switching action occurs
at the correct temperature (heat the sensor in
a container of water, and monitor the
temperature with a thermometer).
3 There should be no continuity between the
switch terminals until the specified cooling fan
cut-in
temperature
is r e a c h e d ,
when
continuity (and zero resistance) should exist
between the terminals.
Removal
4 Make sure that the ignition switch is turned
off, and that the engine is cold.
Warning: The electric
fan
could
start to operate
if the engine is
hot,
even
if the
ignition
is
switched
off.
5 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
6 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the t h e r m o switch.
7 Carefully unscrew the sensor a n d , where
applicable, recover the sealing ring.
Refitting
8 If the t h e r m o s w i t c h w a s originally fitted
using sealing c o m p o u n d , clean the sensor
threads thoroughly, and coat them with fresh
sealing c o m p o u n d . If the t h e r m o s w i t c h w a s
originally fitted using a sealing ring, locate a
Testing
1 The coolant temperature sensor is located
o n the t h e r m o s t a t housing on the left-hand
side of the cylinder head.
2 The sensor is a thermistor - an electronic
c o m p o n e n t w h o s e electrical
resistance
decreases at a predetermined rate as its
t e m p e r a t u r e rises. The fuel injection/engine
management ECU supplies the sensor with a
set voltage, and by measuring the current
flowing in the sensor circuit, it determines the
engine temperature.
3 If the sensor circuit should fail to provide
a d e q u a t e i n f o r m a t i o n , the ECU b a c k - u p
facility will override the sensor signal. In this
event, the ECU a s s u m e s a p r e d e t e r m i n e d
setting w h i c h will allow the fuel i n j e c t i o n /
engine management system to run, albeit at
r e d u c e d efficiency. When this o c c u r s , the
engine warning tight on the instrument panel
will come on, and the advice of a FIAT dealer
should be sought.
4 The sensor can be tested by removing it,
and checking that its resistance is correct at
different t e m p e r a t u r e s (see Specifications).
Heat the sensor in a container of water, and
monitor the temperature and resistance using
a thermometer and ohmmeter.
Caution:
Do not attempt
to test the ECU
circuit. This must be entrusted
to a FIAT
dealer using special diagnostic
equipment.
Removal
5 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1. Alternatively, if a new sensor has
already been obtained, it is possible to fit the
new unit immediately after removing the old
one. If this method is used, make sure that the
engine is c o l d , then release any remaining
pressure in the cooling system by removing
the expansion tank filler cap and refitting it.
6 If necessary for improved access, remove
the battery as described in Chapter 5A.
7 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the sensor.
Where necessary, remove the rubber boot
from the top of the sensor and disconnect the
fly lead/terminal.
8 Unscrew the sensor and, where applicable,
recover the sealing ring.
Refitting
9 Screw the sensor into the t h e r m o s t a t
housing (together w i t h a new sealing ring
3»6 Cooling, heating and ventilation systems
and return hose bracket f r o m the inlet
m a n i f o l d , then loosen the union nuts and
d i s c o n n e c t the fuel lines for a c c e s s to the
power steering pump.
19 Unbolt the power steering pump drivebelt
guard from the pump.
20 Loosen the p o w e r steering p u m p pivot
and a d j u s t m e n t nuts, then back off the
a d j u s t m e n t bolt and release the drivebelt.
C o m p l e t e l y remove t h e m o u n t i n g nuts and
position the power steering pump to one side.
Do n o t disconnect the hydraulic lines from the
pump.
8.5a U n s c r e w t h e s e c u r i n g b o l t s . .
8.5b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e c o o l a n t p u m p
(1.2 litre m o d e l s )
where applicable) and tighten to the specified
t o r q u e . The m a n u f a c t u r e r s
recommend
applying anaerobic sealant t o the t a p e r e d
threads of the sensor before refitting it.
10 R e c o n n e c t the w i r i n g , and
where
r e m o v e d , refit the battery as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 5A.
11 Refill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
8 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt as described
in Chapter 1.
9 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2B.
10 Remove the camshaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Chapter 2 B , Section 5.
11 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g bolts, and
withdraw the coolant p u m p from the cylinder
head. Recover the O-ring seal.
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s
8 Coolant pump removal, inspection
and refitting
X
3^
Removal
1.2 l i t r e m o d e l s
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
3 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt(s) as
described in Chapter 1.
4 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2A.
5 U n s c r e w the m o u n t i n g b o l t s / n u t s , and
withdraw the coolant p u m p from the cylinder
block casting (see illustrations). If the p u m p
is stuck, tap it gently using a soft-faced mallet
to release the sealing c o m p o u n d .
1.4 l i t r e m o d e l s
6 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
7 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
N o t e : The coolant pump is mounted on a
housing, which is bolted to the engine. A new
pump may be supplied with a new housing,
but removing the pump AND housing is quite
difficult, and involves more dismantling
then
simply unbolting the pump from the housing.
Both methods are described below.
12 Disconnect t h e battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
13 Drain the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
14 A p p l y the h a n d b r a k e , then j a c k up the
front of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
s t a n d s (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove the front right-hand side roadwheel.
15 U n d o the fastenings and remove the
wheel arch liner from under the front wing.
16 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt
as
d e s c r i b e d in C h a p t e r 1, then unbolt and
c o m p l e t e l y remove the drivebelt tensioner
a s s e m b l y . Loosen the alternator lower
mounting bolt.
17 Where f i t t e d , remove the alternator
cooling hose from the right-hand side of the
engine compartment.
18 On early m o d e l s , unbolt the fuel supply
V
8.25 C o o l a n t p u m p l o c a t i o n
(1.6 litre m o d e l s )
5
8.26 S e p a r a t i n g t h e c o o l a n t p u m p f r o m its
h o u s i n g (1.6 litre m o d e l s )
Method 1 - pump and housing removal
21 Unbolt the heat shrouds from the exhaust
manifold and downpipe.
22 Unbolt and remove the alternator upper
mounting bracket, noting that one of the bolts
secures the coolant p u m p housing.
23 Loosen the alternator lower mounting bolt
and swivel the alternator b a c k w a r d s to
provide access to the coolant pump.
24 U n s c r e w the bolts securing the coolant
pipe to the rear of the coolant p u m p , and free
the pipe. Access to the bolt nearest the back
of the engine is particularly difficult - in the
w o r k s h o p , w e had to use a socket and very
long extension bar. Recover the O-ring seal
from the end of the coolant pipe.
25 U n s c r e w the remaining three bolts
securing the coolant p u m p housing to the
cylinder block, and w i t h d r a w the assembly.
Recover the gasket (see illustration).
26 Note that a new c o o l a n t p u m p may be
supplied together with the housing - however,
it is possible to obtain the p u m p - t o - h o u s i n g
O-ring seal separately. Unscrew the four bolts
and separate the pump from its housing (see
illustration).
Method 2 - p u m p removal from housing
27 Remove the alternator upper m o u n t i n g
bolt, then loosen t h e alternator lower
m o u n t i n g bolt and swivel the alternator
backwards to provide access to the coolant
pump.
28 Remove the four bolts securing the
coolant p u m p to the housing, and withdraw
the pump. Recover the large O-ring seal, and
d i s c a r d it - a new seal must be used w h e n
refitting.
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
29 D i s c o n n e c t the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
30 Drain the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
31 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt
as
described in Chapter 1.
32 A p p l y the h a n d b r a k e , then j a c k up the
front of the vehicle and s u p p o r t it on axle
s t a n d s (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
Remove the right-hand front roadwheel.
33 U n d o the fastenings and remove the
wheel arch liner from under the front wing.
34 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2D.
35 Remove the inlet (rear) camshaft sprocket
as described in Chapter 2D, Section 5.
Cooling, heating and ventilation systems 3*7
36 Unbolt and remove the timing belt guard
brackets from over the coolant p u m p . One is
located on the rear of the engine and the other
is located b e l o w the exhaust camshaft
sprocket.
37 Unscrew the mounting bolts and withdraw
t h e coolant p u m p f r o m the cylinder h e a d .
Recover the O-ring seal.
Inspection
38 Check the p u m p b o d y and impeller for
signs of excessive corrosion. Turn the impeller,
and c h e c k for stiffness due to corrosion, or
roughness due to excessive end play.
39 On 1.6 litre engines, check the clearance
between the p u m p impeller and the casing.
Either use vernier calipers to calculate the
clearance, or use a feeler blade inserted
through the aperture at the rear of the p u m p
housing. If the clearance is different to that
given in the Specifications, the pump must be
renewed.
Refitting
40 C o m m e n c e
refitting
by
thoroughly
cleaning the mating faces of the p u m p and
cylinder block/head/housing.
1.2 l i t r e m o d e l s
41 Apply a continuous bead of sealant (liquid
gasket) to the cylinder b l o c k mating face of
the p u m p (see illustration).
42 Locate the p u m p in the cylinder block
casting and insert the m o u n t i n g b o l t s / n u t s .
Progressively tighten t h e m to the specified
torque.
43 Refit the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2A.
44 Refit the auxiliary drivebelt(s) as described
in Chapter 1.
45 Refill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
46 Reconnect the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
1.4 l i t r e m o d e l s
47 Locate a new O-ring seal on the coolant
p u m p , then locate it on the cylinder head and
insert the m o u n t i n g bolts. Progressively
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
48 Refit the camshaft sprocket as described
in Chapter 2B, Section 5.
49 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2B.
50 Refit the auxiliary drivebelt as described in
Chapter 1.
51 Refill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
52 R e c o n n e c t the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
55 Locate the coolant pipe on the rear of the
coolant p u m p together with a new O-ring seal,
insert the bolts and tighten them securely.
56 Refit the alternator u p p e r m o u n t i n g
bracket and tighten the bolts securely.
57 Refit the heat s h r o u d s t o the exhaust
manifold and downpipe, and tighten the bolts.
Method 2
58 Locate the coolant p u m p in its housing
together with a new O-ring. Insert the bolts
and tighten them securely.
59 Refit the alternator upper mounting bolt,
tightening it securely.
All m e t h o d s
60 Refit the p o w e r steering p u m p and
tension the drivebelt w i t h reference to
Chapters 10 and 1. Refit the drivebelt guard
and tighten the bolts.
61 On early models, reconnect the fuel lines
and tighten the union nuts. Refit the hose
bracket to the inlet manifold and tighten the
bolts.
62 Where a p p l i c a b l e , refit the alternator
c o o l i n g hose to the r i g h t - h a n d side of the
engine compartment.
63 Refit the drivebelt tensioner, and tension
the alternator drivebelt w i t h reference to
Chapter 1.
64 Refit the wheel arch liner under the righthand front wing, then refit the roadwheel and
lower the vehicle to the ground.
65 Refill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
66 R e c o n n e c t the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
1.8 l i t r e m o d e l s
8.41 A p p l y a c o n t i n u o u s b e a d of sealant
(liquid gasket) t o t h e p u m p m a t i n g f a c e
(1.2 litre models)
75 Reconnect the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
9
Heater/ventilation
components removal and refitting
Complete heater
assembly
(models without
air
conditioning)
A
Warning: On models fitted with air
conditioning,
do not attempt
to
remove the evaporator,
which is
located between the heater blower motor and
the heater matrix. Removal of the evaporator
entails disconnection
of refrigerant lines, and
this work should be entrusted
to a FIAT
dealer or refrigeration
engineer.
67 Locate the coolant p u m p on the cylinder
head together with a new O-ring seal. Insert the
bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.
68 Refit the timing belt guard brackets and
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
69 Refit the inlet camshaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Chapter 2D, Section 5.
70 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2D.
71 Refit the wheel arch liner under the front
wing and tighten the fastenings.
72 Refit the right-hand front roadwheel.
73 Refit the auxiliary drivebelt as described in
Chapter 1.
74 Refill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
1 Disconnect the battery negative (earth) lead
(see Disconnecting the battery).
2 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
3 Remove the facia and centre console as
described in Chapter 1 1 .
4 At the rear of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t ,
loosen t h e c l i p s a n d d i s c o n n e c t the heater
hoses f r o m the heater matrix s u p p l y and
return stubs (see illustration).
5 Inside the vehicle, release the airbag wiring
f r o m the retainers on the bulkhead (see
illustration). Note the position of the wiring to
ensure correct refitting.
9.4 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e heater h o s e s f r o m
t h e heater m a t r i x s u p p l y a n d r e t u r n s t u b s
9.5 Releasing t h e a i r b a g w i r i n g f r o m t h e
retainers
Removal
1.6 l i t r e m o d e l s
Method 1
53 Locate the coolant p u m p in its housing
together w i t h a new O-ring. Insert t h e bolts
and tighten them securely.
54 Locate the pump housing on the cylinder
block together with a new gasket, then refit
the three shorter bolts and tighten them to the
specified torque.
3*8 Cooling, heating and ventilation systems
9.7 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g near t h e heater
motor
9.9a U n d o t h e s u p p o r t b r a c k e t s c r e w s . . .
9.9b . . . a n d m o v e t h e relays t o o n e side
9.9c Heater u p p e r m o u n t i n g bolt
9.9d Heater l o w e r m o u n t i n g bolt
9.9e R e m o v i n g t h e heater a s s e m b l y f r o m
inside t h e car
6 Disconnect the wiring at the plug located
next to the clutch pedal.
7 Disconnect the wiring at the plug located
next to the heater blower m o t o r on the lefthand side of the heater a s s e m b l y (see
illustration).
8 Place s o m e cloth rags on the passenger
floor to absorb any spilt coolant.
9 Unscrew the mounting bolts and withdraw
the complete heater assembly, including the
heater controls and the blower motor. There
are five bolts accessible from the t o p of the
assembly, and t w o accessible under the lefthand side. For access to the left-hand bolts,
m o v e the relays to one side. Remove the
assembly from the vehicle (see illustrations).
Refitting
9.10 B u l k h e a d r u b b e r g r o m m e t for t h e
heater m a t r i x p i p e s
9.12 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g ,
10 Refitting is a reversal of removal, with
reference to Chapter 11 and 1 for the refitting
of the facia and refilling of the cooling system.
C h e c k that the b u l k h e a d rubber g r o m m e t
(see illustration) is in g o o d condition before
refitting the heater. Make sure that all wiring
and cables are routed as n o t e d during
dismantling.
9.13a . . . t h e n u n d o t h e m o u n t i n g
screw...
Heater
blower
motor
Removal
11 The heater blower motor is located below
the left-hand side of the facia. First make sure
that the ignition and heater c o n t r o l s are
s w i t c h e d off. For i m p r o v e d access, remove
the glovebox as described in Chapter 1 1 .
12 Disconnect the wiring f r o m the blower
motor (see illustration).
13 Undo the mounting screw and lower the
blower m o t o r f r o m the housing
(see
illustrations).
Refitting
14 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Heater
matrix
Removal
15 Remove the complete heater assembly as
described earlier in this Section.
9.13b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e heater b l o w e r
m o t o r (heater r e m o v e d for clarity)
Cooling, heating and ventilation systems 3»9
9,16a R e m o v e t h e sealing p a c k i n g . . .
9.16b . . , t h e n r e m o v e t h e p i p e s u p p o r t . . .
16 Unscrew the bolt and remove the pipe
s u p p o r t from the heater body. Also remove
the sealing packing and the matrix end cover
(see illustrations).
17 Identify the t w o pipes for position, then
undo the screw and -©move the holding plate.
Ease the pipes from the matrix and recover
the O 'i'-Q seals (see illustrations).
18 Undo the securing screw and w i t h d r a w
the matrix from ihe heater body taking care
9.16c . . . a n d m a t r i x e n d c o v e r
not to d a m a g e
illustration).
the
delicate
fins
(see
Refitting
19 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
Heater
blower
motor
resistor
Removal
20 The resistor is located at the bottom of the
heater casing, behind the blower motor.
21 For improved access, remove the blower
m o t o r as d e s c r i b e d in the previous s u b Section.
22 Disconnect the wiring plug f r o m the
resistor (see illustration).
23 Remove
the
securing
screws,
and
withdraw the resistor (see illustrations).
Refitting
9.17a U n d o t h e s c r e w . . .
9,17b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e plate . . .
9.22 D i s c o n n e c t t h e w i r i n g . . .
9.23a . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e s e c u r i n g
screws . . .
24 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
9.23b . . . a n d w i t h d r a w t h e b l o w e r m o t o r
resistor (heater r e m o v e d f o r clarity)
3*10 Cooling, heating and ventilation systems
9.29 R e m o v i n g t h e f r e s h air c o n t r o l k n o b
Heater
control
panel
Removal
25 Disconnect the battery negative (earth)
lead (see Disconnecting the battery).
26 Remove the r a d i o / c a s s e t t e player as
described in Chapter 12.
27 Remove the g l o v e b o x as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 11.
28 Open the ashtray, then unscrew the
heater control panel s u r r o u n d m o u n t i n g
screws. There are two in the ashtray aperture
and two more above the radio position.
29 Carefully pull off the heater ventilation
centre control knob, using a pair of pliers and
a piece of card to protect the knob. Unscrew
the panel mounting screw located beneath it.
Also pull off the fresh air control k n o b (see
illustration).
30 Using a small screwdriver, carefully prise
out the small covers f r o m each end of the
facia s w i t c h e s located a b o v e the heater
control k n o b s (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Also, prise
out the cover at the centre of the s w i t c h e s
noting that on some models the alarm system
warning light is located in this position.
31 Undo the screws and withdraw the switch
panel from the front of the facia. Disconnect
the wiring and remove the switches from the
facia.
32 W i t h d r a w the heater control panel
surround from the facia and d i s c o n n e c t the
wiring from the hazard warning switch.
33 With the ashtray closed, undo the lower
m o u n t i n g screws, then o p e n the ashtray lid
and unscrew the upper m o u n t i n g s c r e w s .
W i t h d r a w the ashtray from the facia and
disconnect the wiring from the cigar lighter.
34 U n d o the s c r e w s securing the heater
controls to the facia. There are four screws.
35 Working in the front footwells, remove the
inner trim panels for access to the heater
body.
36 Identify the heater c o n t r o l cables for
position, then disconnect them and withdraw
the heater control panel from the facia (see
illustrations).
9.30 Prise o u t t h e s m a l l c o v e r s f r o m e a c h
e n d of t h e f a c i a s w i t c h e s
9.36a C o n t r o l c a b l e o n t h e side of t h e
heater
Refitting
37 Refitting is a reversal of removal.
10 Air conditioning system general information
and precautions
General
information
Air conditioning is available as an option on
certain models. It enables the temperature of
i n c o m i n g air to be l o w e r e d , and also
d e h u m i d i f i e s t h e air, w h i c h allows rapid
demisting and increased comfort.
The cooling side of the system works in the
s a m e way as a d o m e s t i c
refrigerator.
Refrigerant gas is d r a w n into a belt-driven
c o m p r e s s o r where the increase in pressure
causes the refrigerant gas to turn to liquid. It
then passes through a condenser mounted on
the front of the radiator, where it is c o o l e d .
The liquid then passes through an expansion
valve to an evaporator, where it changes from
liquid under high pressure to gas under low
pressure. This change is a c c o m p a n i e d by a
d r o p in t e m p e r a t u r e , w h i c h c o o l s the
evaporator and hence the air passing over it.
The refrigerant returns to the compressor, and
the cycle begins again.
The air b l o w n t h r o u g h the evaporator
passes to the air distribution unit where it is
mixed, if required, with hot air blown through
the heater matrix to achieve the desired
temperature in the passenger compartment.
The heating side of the system works in the
s a m e way as on m o d e l s w i t h o u t air
conditioning (see Section 9).
The system is electronically-controlled. Any
problems with the system should be referred
to a FIAT dealer.
Precautions
With an air c o n d i t i o n i n g s y s t e m , it is
necessary to observe special precautions
whenever dealing with any part of the system,
or its a s s o c i a t e d c o m p o n e n t s . If for any
9.36b Heater c o n t r o l panel
reason the system must be disconnected, it is
essential that y o u entrust this task to your
FIAT dealer or a refrigeration engineer.
Warning: The refrigeration
circuit
contains a liquid refrigerant,
and
it is dangerous
to disconnect
any
part of the system
without
specialised
knowledge
and
equipment.
11 Air conditioning components gS
- removal and refitting
A
Warning: Do not attempt
to open
the refrigerant
circuit. Refer to
the precautions
given
in Section 10.
The only operation which can be carried out
easily without discharging the refrigerant is
renewal of the compressor drivebelt - this
procedure is described in Chapter 1, Section 2 1 .
All other operations must be referred to a FIAT
dealer or an air conditioning specialist.
If
necessary
for
access
to
other
c o m p o n e n t s , the c o m p r e s s o r can easily be
unbolted
and
moved
aside,
without
disconnecting
its
flexible
hoses,
after
removing the drivebelt. A c c e s s is gained by
jacking up the front of the vehicle and support
it on axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support), then removing the wheel arch liner.
2E»1
Chapter 2 Part E:
Engine removal and overhaul procedures
Contents
Auxiliary shaft (1.6 litre engines) - removal, inspection and refitting .
Crankshaft - refitting and main bearing running clearance check . . .
Crankshaft - removal and inspection
Cylinder block/crankcase - cleaning and inspection
Cylinder head - dismantling, cleaning, inspection and reassembly .
Engine - initial start-up after overhaul and reassembly
Engine and transmission removal - preparation and precautions . . .
7
11
6
8
4
12
1
Engine and transmission - removal, separation, connection and
refitting
Engine overhaul - preliminary information
Engine overhaul - reassembly sequence
Main and big-end bearings - inspection and selection
Pistons and connecting rods - removal, inspection, and big-end
running clearance check
2
3
10
9
5
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
§k
experience
Fairly easy, suitable
| k
for beginner with
novice with little
gj^
s o m e experience
g^
Fairty difficult,
^
Difficult, suitable for
Engine codes
3*
suitable for expert DIY 3 *
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
or professional
g^
in relevant Part of Chapter 2.
Cylinder head
Camshaft bearing diameters:
1.2 and 1.6 litre engines
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Valve seat angle:
Except 1.2 litre engine
1.2 litre engine
Tappet running clearance in head:
1.4 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
See Chapter 2A or 2C
26.045 to 26.070 m m
45° ± 5'
45° ± 20'
0.016 to 0.055 m m
0.025 to 0.066 m m
Valves
Valve stem diameter:
Inlet:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 and 1.6 litre engines
1.8 litre engine
Exhaust:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
Valve face angle:
Except 1.2 litre engine
1.2 litre engine
Valve stem-to-guide clearance:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 and 1.6 litre engines
1.8 litre engine
5.974 to 5.992 m m
6.982 to 7.000 m m
6.975 to 6.990 m m
5.974
6.982
6.974
6.960
to
to
to
to
5.992
7.000
6.992
6.975
mm
mm
mm
mm
45° 30' ± 5'
45° 3 0 ' ± 20'
0.030 to 0.066 m m
0.022 to 0.058 m m
0.032 to 0.065 m m
Camshaft
Camshaft bearing running clearance (1.4 and 1.8 litre engines)
Camshaft endfloat (1.4 and 1.8 litre engines)
0.030 to 0.070 m m
0.100 to 0.230 mm
Auxiliary shaft (1.6 litre engine)
Shaft bearing running clearance
Shaft bearing diameters:
Innermost bearing
Outermost bearing
V e r y difficult,
experienced DIY
Specifications
Refer to Specifications
^
suitable for competent g ^
0.040 to 0.091 m m
35.593 to 35.618 m m
31.940 to 31.960 m m
g^
2E«2 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
Cylinder block
Bore diameter:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Undersizes
70.800 to 70.830 m m
86.400 to 86.430 m m
70.800 to 70.830 m m
Increments of 0.010 m m
Pistons and piston rings
Piston diameter:
Grade A:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Grade B:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Grade C:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Piston-to-bore clearance:
Except 1.2 litre engine
1.2 litre engine
Maximum difference in weight between pistons
Gudgeon pin diameter:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Gudgeon pin to piston clearance:
Except 1.2 litre engine
1.2 litre engine
Piston ring-to-ring wall clearance:
T o p compression ring:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
2nd compression ring:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
Oil scraper ring:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
Piston ring end gap:
Top compression ring:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
2nd compression ring:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
Oil scraper ring:
1.2 litre engine
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
70.760 to 70.770 m m
86.352 to 86.362 m m
81.952 to 81.962 m m
70.770 to 70.780 m m
86.359 to 86.371 m m
81.959 to 81.971 m m
70.780 to 70.790 m m
86.368 to 86.378 m m
81.968 to 81.978 m m
0.038 to 0.062 m m
0.030 to 0.050 m m
± 5g
17.970 to 17.974 m m
21.990 to 21.995 m m
19.996 to 20.000 m m
0.002 to 0.011 m m
0.008 to 0.016 m m
0.000
0.050
0.035
0.050
to
to
to
to
0.060
0.090
0.075
0.085
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.000
0.040
0.020
0.040
to
to
to
to
0.055
0.075
0.060
0.075
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.000
0.075
0.065
0.030
to
to
to
to
0.055
0.105
0.095
0.065
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.200
0.250
0.200
0.300
to
to
to
to
0.400
0.500
0.450
0.500
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.250
0.300
0.250
0.300
to
to
to
to
0.450
0.500
0.500
0.500
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.200
0.400
0.400
0.250
to
to
to
to
0.450
1.400
1.400
0.450
mm
mm
mm
mm
Connecting rods
Gudgeon pin-to-small end clearance:
1.4 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.8 litre engine
0.006 to 0.016 m m
0.009 to 0.020 m m
0.006 to 0.020 m m
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»3
Crankshaft
Main bearing journal diameters:
1.2 litre engine:
Grade 1
Grade 2
Grade 3
-.
1.6 litre engine:
Grade 1
Grade 2
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines:
Grade 1
Grade 2
Grade 3
Crankpin journal diameters:
1.2 litre engine:
Grade A
1.4 litre engine:
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
1.6 litre engine:
Grade A
Grade B
1.8 litre engine:
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
Main bearing running clearance:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Big-end bearing running clearance:
1.2 litre engine
1.6 litre engine
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
Crankshaft endfloat:
1.2 and 1.6 litre engines
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines
47.982 to 47.988 m m
47.988 to 47.994 m m
47.994 to 48.000 m m
50.790 to 50.800 m m
50.780 to 50.790 m m
52.994 to 53.000 m m
52.988 to 52.994 m m
52.982 to 52.988 m m
41.990 to 42.008 m m
40.884 to 40.890 m m
40.878 to 40.884 mm
40.872 to 40.878 m m
45.513 to 45.523 m m
45.503 to 45.513 m m
50.799 to 50.805 m m
50.793 to 50.799 mm
50.787 to 50.793 m m
0.025 to 0.040 m m
0.019 to 0.050 m m
0.025 to 0.052 m m
0.024 to 0.060 m m
0.025 to 0.063 m m
0.030 to 0.056 mm
0.055 to 0.265 m m
0.059 to 0.161 m m
Torque wrench settings
Refer to Specifications
in relevant Part of Chapter 2.
1 Engine and
transmission removal preparation and precautions
If y o u have d e c i d e d the engine must be
r e m o v e d for overhaul or major repair w o r k ,
several preliminary steps should be taken.
Locating a suitable place to w o r k is
extremely important. Adequate work s p a c e ,
along with storage space for the vehicle, will
be n e e d e d . If a w o r k s h o p or garage isn't
available, at the very least a flat, level, clean
work surface is required.
If possible, clear some shelving close to the
w o r k area, and use it t o store the engine
c o m p o n e n t s and ancillaries as they are
removed and dismantled. In this manner, the
components stand a better chance of staying
clean and u n d a m a g e d during the overhaul.
Laying out c o m p o n e n t s in g r o u p s t o g e t h e r
w i t h their retaining nuts and bolts, etc will
save t i m e and avoid confusion w h e n the
engine is refitted.
Clean the engine compartment and engine/
transmission before beginning the removal
procedure; this will help visibility and help to
keep tools clean.
The help of an assistant s h o u l d be
available; there are certain instances w h e n
one person cannot safely perform all of the
operations required to remove the engine
f r o m the vehicle. Safety is of primary
importance, considering the potential hazards
involved in this kind of operation. A s e c o n d
person should always be in a t t e n d a n c e to
offer help in an emergency. If this is the first
time you have removed an engine, advice and
aid from s o m e o n e more experienced w o u l d
also be beneficial.
Plan the operation ahead of t i m e . Before
starting work, obtain (or arrange for the hire
of) all of the tools and e q u i p m e n t you will
need. Access to the following items will allow
the task of removing and refitting the
engine/transmission to be c o m p l e t e d safely
and w i t h relative ease; a h e a v y - d u t y trolley
jack - rated in excess of the combined weight
of the engine and transmission, complete sets
of spanners and s o c k e t s (see Tools and
working facilities), wooden blocks, and plenty
of rags and cleaning solvent for mopping up
spilled oil, coolant and fuel. A selection of
different-sized plastic storage boxes will also
prove
useful
for
keeping
dismantled
c o m p o n e n t s grouped together. If any of the
equipment must be hired, make sure that you
arrange for it in advance, and perform all of
the operations possible without it beforehand;
this may save you time and money.
Plan on the vehicle being out of use for
quite a while, especially if you intend to carry
out an engine overhaul. Read t h r o u g h the
whole of this section and work out a strategy
based on your own experience and the tools,
time and workspace available to you. Some of
the overhaul processes may have to be
carried out by a FIAT dealer or an engineering
works - these establishments often have busy
schedules, so it would be prudent to consult
t h e m before removing or dismantling the
engine, to get an idea of the amount of time
required to carry out the work.
When removing the engine from the vehicle,
be m e t h o d i c a l about the d i s c o n n e c t i o n of
2E»4 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
2.7a R e m o v i n g t h e b a t t e r y d r i p t r a y
2.7b Lift off t h e f u s e / r e l a y carrier lid . . .
2.7c . . . f o r a c c e s s t o t h e m o u n t i n g n u t s
external c o m p o n e n t s . Labelling cables and
hoses as they are removed will greatly assist
the refitting process.
Always be extremely careful when lifting the
engine/transmission assembly f r o m the e n gine bay. Serious injury c a n result f r o m
careless actions. If help is required, it is better
to wait until it is available rather t h a n risk
personal injury and/or damage to components
by continuing alone. By planning ahead and
taking your time, a job of this nature, although
major, can be accomplished successfully and
without incident.
On all models described in this manual, the
engine and transmission are r e m o v e d as a
c o m p l e t e assembly d o w n w a r d s f r o m the
engine compartment.
vehicle upon. Give yourself enough space to
move around it easily. Apply the handbrake,
and securely c h o c k the rear wheels as an
added precaution - the front of the car has to
be raised significantly to withdraw the engine,
so the car will be at quite an angle.
2 On m o d e l s not fitted w i t h alloy wheels,
remove the front wheel trims and loosen the
driveshaft nuts. The nuts are tightened to a
very high t o r q u e , so only use g o o d - q u a l i t y ,
close-fitting tools to loosen them. This task is
most safely performed while the front wheels
are still on the g r o u n d . Leave the nuts in
place, hand-tight.
the rear of the engine
compartment,
d i s c o n n e c t the hoses leading t h r o u g h the
bulkhead to the heater. Label any hose whose
fitted location is not obvious.
11 To improve working room, remove the two
bolts securing the air intake at the front of the
engine compartment, and lift the intake out of
position, detaching it from the intake duct.
12 To avoid any possibility of damage to the
radiator as the engine is r e m o v e d , refer to
Chapter 3 and remove the radiator.
13 Loosen the hose clips and disconnect the
air duct which runs from the air cleaner to the
inlet manifold; also disconnect any associated
breather pipes.
14 Taking precautions against fuel spillage,
d i s c o n n e c t the fuel supply and return
c o n n e c t i o n s with reference to the relevant
part of Chapter 4.
15 Again referring to Chapter 4, disconnect
the fuel injection wiring from the throttle body
or fuel rail.
16 Disconnect the LT wiring plug f r o m the
ignition coil assembly (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . On
1.8 litre m o d e l s , refer to Chapter 5B and
unbolt the coil wiring harness f r o m the
cylinder head; disconnect the harness at the
large wiring connector at the left-hand end of
the cylinder head.
2 Engine and transmission removal, separation,
connection and refitting
S
3^
N o t e 1: The engine is lowered from the engine
compartment
as a complete
unit with the
transmission; the two are then separated for
overhaul.
N o t e 2: On 1.2 and 1.8 litre models with air
conditioning, the air conditioning system must
be discharged before the engine is removed.
This work MUST be carried out by a FIAT
dealer or air conditioning
specialist, and it is
advisable to have this done before starting to
remove the engine.
3 Depressurise the fuel system as described
in the relevant part of Chapter 4.
4 Remove the battery as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 5A.
5 Where a p p l i c a b l e , unscrew the nuts and
disconnect any additional wiring attached to
the battery positive terminal, noting its
location for refitting.
6 On 1.6 litre models, remove the engine management ECU as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 4 B ,
Section 4.
7 Remove the plastic drip tray from the main
battery tray, d i s c o n n e c t i n g the drain t u b e
from it. Remove the fuse/relay carrier from the
battery tray, labelling and disconnecting the
wiring plugs as necessary (see illustrations).
1 Select a s o l i d , level surface to park the
8 Unscrew the bolts securing the battery tray
to the b o d y , and remove the tray f r o m the
engine compartment (see illustration).
9 Drain the c o o l i n g s y s t e m as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
10 Disconnect the hoses from the radiator,
expansion tank and t h e r m o s t a t h o u s i n g . At
2.8 R e m o v i n g t h e b a t t e r y t r a y
2.16 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e LT w i r i n g p l u g
Removal
17 Disconnect the accelerator cable as
described in the relevant part of Chapter 4.
18 Trace the (blue) pipes from the charcoal
canister (mounted in the r i g h t - h a n d rear
corner of the engine c o m p a r t m e n t , or under
the r i g h t - h a n d wheel arch), and d i s c o n n e c t
the pipes at the connections on the inner wing
(see illustration).
2.18 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e c h a r c o a l c a n i s t e r
pipes
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»5
2.20a R e m o v i n g t h e c o v e r f r o m t h e
bulkhead fuse/relay bracket
2.20b On 1.4 litre m o d e l s , d i s c o n n e c t t h e
ECU m u l t i - p l u g
2.21b . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s
(arrowed) a n d r e m o v e t h e air inlet e l b o w
f r o m t h e inner w i n g
2.22a D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e reversing light
switch...
19 Disconnect the v a c u u m pipe f r o m the
brake servo.
20 At the engine c o m p a r t m e n t bulkhead,
loosen the screw and remove the plastic cover
from the relay carrier bracket. Labelling the
wiring if necessary, disconnect the wiring plugs
from the relays and other components. On 1.4
litre models, also disconnect the ECU wiring
plug from the bulkhead (see illustrations).
21 On 1.4 litre models, disconnect the hot-air
flexible duct from the shroud over the exhaust
manifold. To make room for the engine to be
removed, unbolt the air inlet elbow from the
right-hand inner wing (see illustrations).
22 On manual transmission models, carry out
the following:
a) Disconnect the reversing light switch,
earth lead and reverse gear inhibitor cable
(as applicable) from the transmission
housing, noting their locations (see .
illustrations).
b) Disconnect the speedometer wiring plug
from the rear of the transmission (see
illustration).
c) On models with a cable clutch,
disconnect the clutch cable from the
transmission (refer to Chapter 6).
d) On models with a hydraulic clutch, unbolt
the clutch slave cylinder from the top of
the transmission, then fit a cable-tie
around it to prevent the piston coming
out. Position the cylinder to one side (see
illustrations).
e) Disconnect the gearchange control cables
and rods, referring to Chapter 7A as
necessary. Details vary according to model,
but dismantling procedures are self-evident.
Disconnecting the cable end fittings either
involves prising off the ball-and-socket joint,
or unscrewing the through-bolt and nut (see
illustrations). Mark the components if
necessary, to aid refitting.
f) Drain the transmission oil using the
information in Chapter 7A (see illustration).
2.22e . . . a n d m o v e it t o o n e s i d e
2.22f Prising off t h e b a l l - a n d - s o c k e t j o i n t ,
using a screwdriver
2.22c D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e s p e e d o m e t e r
wiring plug
2.22d U n b o l t t h e c l u t c h slave cylinder .
2.21a On 1.4 litre m o d e l s , d i s c o n n e c t t h e
flexible hot-air d u c t . . .
2.22b
. . a n d t h e e a r t h lead at t h e f r o n t of
the transmission
2E»6 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
2.22g U n s c r e w t h e t h r o u g h - b o l t a n d
nut...
2.22h . . . a n d s e p a r a t e t h e g e a r c h a n g e
rods
2.22i Draining t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n oil
23 On automatic transmission models, carry
out the following:
a) Remove the three bolts securing the
selector cable mounting bracket to the
top of the transmission, prise off the cable
end fitting, and move the bracket aside
(see
illustration).
b) Disconnect the earth lead from below the
transmission selector lever (see
illustration).
c) Disconnect the three wiring plugs in the
immediate vicinity of the transmission.
d) Disconnect the speedometer wiring plug
from the rear of the transmission.
e) Unbolt the pipe and wiring harness
support bracket fitted just behind the
transmission selector lever.
f) Drain the transmission fluid as described
in Chapter 7B, Section 2.
24 Where applicable, prise up the cover over
the starter motor. Disconnect the starter
motor wiring, noting the location of each wire,
and the fitted s e q u e n c e of the nuts and
washers (see illustration).
25 Drain or syphon the fluid from the power
steering reservoir, then refer to Chapter 10,
S e c t i o n 2 2 , and d i s c o n n e c t the fluid pipes
(and wiring, where applicable) from the power
steering p u m p , taking precautions against
further fluid spillage. Cover the p u m p
connections, to prevent the ingress of dirt. On
some models (such as those with the 1.6 litre
engine), it is possible to unbolt the steering
p u m p from the engine, and leave it in the
engine compartment.
from the bulkhead, and tie it to the engine
for removal.
b) Disconnect the oxygen sensor wiring from
the clip at the front of the thermostat
housing. Trace the wiring back to the
wiring plug, and disconnect it.
c) Unbolt the engine oil dipstick from the
exhaust manifold.
d) Where applicable, have the air
conditioning system discharged by a FIAT
dealer or suitable specialist.
e) Pull up the weatherstrip from the rear of
the engine compartment, then remove the
four screws securing the section of plastic
scuttle panel on the passenger side. To
remove the panel, it will also be necessary
to remove the passenger wiper blade.
f) Remove the glovebox as described in
Chapter 11. Working in the glovebox
aperture, disconnect the wiring plugs from
the engine management ECU, and from
the various relays, etc, marking each as
necessary for position. Approximately eight
plugs must be disconnected, according to
model. Feed the wiring harness through
the aperture created by removing the
plastic scuttle panel, into the engine
compartment, and tie it to the engine.
27 If not already done, loosen the front wheel
bolts, then jack up the front of the car and
support it on axle stands. Remove the front
wheels. Note that the car must (eventually, if
not now) be raised to a sufficient height that
the engine/transmission can be removed from
below.
2.23a R e m o v e t h e s e l e c t o r c a b l e
m o u n t i n g b r a c k e t b o l t s (arrowed)
2.23b D i s c o n n e c t t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n e a r t h
lead
2.24 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e s t a r t e r m o t o r
wiring
26 On 1.8 litre m o d e l s , carry out the
following:
a) Unbolt the power steering fluid reservoir
2.30 Exhaust m a n i f o l d - t o - d o w n p i p e nuts
(arrowed)
28 Locate the oxygen sensor at the top of the
exhaust downpipe, immediately below the exhaust m a n i f o l d . Trace the wiring from the
sensor back to its wiring plug, and disconnect
it.
29 Referring to Chapter 4C as required,
loosen the bolts securing the exhaust
downpipe to the catalytic converter.
30 Remove the m a n i f o l d - t o - d o w n p i p e nuts,
and separate the downpipe from the manifold
(see illustration). In some cases, the manifold
studs will c o m e out with the nuts - this poses
no great p r o b l e m , and the s t u d s can be
refitted if they are in g o o d c o n d i t i o n . For
preference, however, a complete set of studs
and nuts should be obtained as required, as
the old ones are likely to be in l e s s - t h a n perfect condition.
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»7
2.33 R e m o v i n g t h e l e f t - h a n d w h e e l a r c h
inner a c c e s s panel
2.34 S e p a r a t i n g a t r a c k r o d e n d balljoint
31 Remove the exhaust
downpipe-tocatalytic converter bolts, and remove the
downpipe from under the car. Take care while
the d o w n p i p e is r e m o v e d that the o x y g e n
sensor is not k n o c k e d - it is fragile. Also, if
necessary, tie the catalytic converter up at the
front, to s u p p o r t it while the d o w n p i p e is
removed.
32 If not already done, loosen the driveshaft
nuts. The nuts are t i g h t e n e d t o a very high
torque, so only use good-quality, close-fitting
tools to loosen them. If the job is being done
w i t h the car raised, m a k e sure that it is
securely s u p p o r t e d , as c o n s i d e r a b l e f o r c e
may be needed to loosen the nuts.
33 To improve access to the suspension
components and the driveshafts, remove the
access panels fitted in the inner wheel arch
liners. It will be necessary on most models to
remove the front section of the liner, as well as
the inner s e c t i o n . The a c c e s s panels are
secured by a combination of bolts and plastic
studs (see illustration). It may be necessary
to d i s c o n n e c t the brake pad wear sensor
wiring to remove the panels.
34 Unscrew the nuts retaining the track rod
ends on the swivel hubs, and use a balljoint
separator tool to d i s c o n n e c t t h e m (see
illustration).
35 Release the flexible brake fluid hoses and
A B S / p a d wear sensor wiring f r o m the front
suspension struts (see illustration).
36 Unscrew the t w o nuts/bolts securing the
right-hand swivel hub assembly to the front
suspension strut, then m o v e the hub
assembly outwards, taking care not to strain
the flexible brake hose (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Release the outer end of the driveshaft from
the hub assembly.
37 M o v e the driveshaft to one side, then
temporarily refit the hub assembly to the strut.
Note that it is not recommended to allow the
driveshaft to hang d o w n under its own weight,
or to turn the inner or outer joints through too
acute an angle, or the joints may separate and
be damaged.
38 Disconnect the left-hand driveshaft using
the p r o c e d u r e d e s c r i b e d in paragraphs 36
and 37.
39 On 1.6 litre m o d e l s , r e m o v e the three
bolts securing the inner end of the left-hand
driveshaft (see illustration). At the inner end
of the right-hand driveshaft, release the inner
CV boot from the transmission.
40 On 1.8 litre models, loosen and remove
the socket-headed flange bolts securing the
inner
ends
of
the
driveshafts
(see
illustration).
41 Using a suitable flat-bladed tool between
the driveshaft inner joint and the transmission
housing as necessary, prise out and separate
the inner ends of the driveshafts f r o m the
transmission (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Be prepared
for oil or fluid spillage if the transmission was
not d r a i n e d . Remove the driveshafts f r o m
under the car.
42 On a u t o m a t i c transmission
models,
loosen the union nuts and disconnect the fluid
pipes at the side of the transmission. Again,
be prepared for fluid spillage. Move the pipes
out of the way, so that they are not damaged
as the engine is lowered.
2.39 Driveshaft f l a n g e b o l t s (arrowed) •
1.6 litre m o d e l
2.40 Driveshaft f l a n g e b o l t s o n a
1.8 litre m o d e l
2.35 Pull t h e b r a k e h o s e f r o m t h e c l i p o n
the suspension strut
2.36 S u s p e n s i o n s t r u t - t o - s w i v e l h u b
s e c u r i n g n u t s (arrowed)
43 At this stage, the front of the car must be
raised
sufficiently
to
allow
the
engine/transmission assembly to be lowered
and removed from under the front of the car.
This will entail raising the car m u c h higher
than w o u l d normally be the case for m o s t
servicing work. Do not, however, be tempted
to use makeshift means of s u p p o r t - before
p r o c e e d i n g further, m a k e sure the car is
stable.
44 C o n n e c t a hoist and raise it so that the
weight of the engine and transmission are just
supported. Arrange the hoist and sling so that
the engine and transmission are kept level
w h e n they are being w i t h d r a w n f r o m the
vehicle.
45 Unscrew and remove the engine and
transmission m o u n t i n g s , referring t o the
relevant Part of Chapter 2 as necessary.
Where possible, leave the b o n d e d rubber
mountings attached to the support points; this
2.41 U s i n g a large f l a t - b l a d e d s c r e w d r i v e r
t o s e p a r a t e t h e driveshaft inner e n d s f r o m
the transmission
2E»8 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
2.48a As t h e e n g i n e is l o w e r e d , g u i d e it
past the subframe
2.48b L o w e r i n g t h e e n g i n e o u t of t h e car
2.61 A p p l y grease t o t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
input shaft splines
will avoid the need for realignment during
refitting. On models fitted with a reaction rod
on the right-hand mounting, the rod should be
removed completely, to make engine removal
easier.
46 C h e c k around the engine and t r a n s mission assembly from above and below, to
ensure that all a s s o c i a t e d a t t a c h m e n t s are
disconnected and positioned out of the way.
Engage the services of an assistant to help in
guiding the assembly clear of s u r r o u n d i n g
components.
47 Consider how the engine will be removed
f r o m under the car, before lowering it. If a
w h e e l e d trolley is available, this makes the
task of moving the engine much easier. If the
engine is d r o p p e d onto its s u m p , the s u m p
may be d a m a g e d ; a piece of old f o a m or
carpet will offer some protection. If the engine
is lowered onto a piece of carpet or a sheet of
w o o d , this can be used to drag the engine out
from under the car, without damage.
48 Carefully lower the engine/transmission
a s s e m b l y clear of t h e m o u n t i n g s , g u i d i n g
the assembly past any o b s t r u c t i o n s , and
taking care that surrounding components are
not damaged. Remove the assembly from the
front of the car (see illustrations).
49 Once the engine/transmission assembly is
clear of the vehicle, move it to an area where it
can be cleaned and worked on.
w o o d e n b l o c k s as w e d g e s to keep the unit
steady.
51 Note the routing and location of any
wiring on the engine/transmission assembly,
then methodically disconnect it.
52 Remove the starter motor (Chapter 5A).
53 Unscrew the remaining bolts and remove
the transmission lower cover.
their positions as they are removed.
59 Starting at the b o t t o m , remove all the
bolts, then carefully d r a w the transmission
away from the engine, resting it securely on
wooden blocks. Recover the backplate, which
will fall out as the engine and transmission are
separated.
Manual transmission models
54 Support the transmission with blocks of
w o o d . The transmission is secured to the
engine by a combination of bolts, and studs
and nuts. A locating dowel is fitted to the top
bolt location. U n s c r e w the t r a n s m i s s i o n - t o engine nuts and bolts, noting their locations.
55 Lift the transmission directly from the
engine, taking care to keep it level so that the
transmission input shaft does not hang on the
clutch. Recover the backplate, which will fall out
as the engine and transmission are separated.
56 Refer to Chapter 6, and remove the clutch
release m e c h a n i s m , pressure plate and
friction plate.
Caution:
Take care to prevent
the
torque
converter from sliding off the
transmission
input
shaft
- hold it in place
as the
transmission
is
withdrawn.
60 Place a length of batten across the open
face of the bellhousing, fastening it w i t h
cable-ties, to keep the t o r q u e converter in
place in its housing.
Reconnection
Manual transmission models
Separation
57 Mark the position of the torque converter
with respect to the driveplate, using chalk or a
marker p e n . Remove the six s o c k e t - h e a d
bolts that secure the driveplate to the torque
converter; turn the engine over using a socket
and w r e n c h on the crankshaft s p r o c k e t to
rotate the driveplate and expose each nut in
turn.
50 Rest the engine and
transmission
assembly on a firm, flat surface, and use
58 The transmission is secured to the engine
by ten bolts of three different lengths - note
61 Smear a little h i g h - m e l t i n g - p o i n t grease
on the splines of the transmission input shaft
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Do not use an excessive
amount, as there is the risk of contaminating
the clutch friction plate.
62 Refit the backplate, then carefully offer up
the transmission to the cylinder block, guiding
it onto the dowel (see illustrations).
63 Refit the bellhousing bolts and nuts,
hand-tightening
them
to
secure
the
transmission in position (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Note: Do not tighten them to force the engine
and transmission
together. Ensure that the
bellhousing and cylinder block mating faces
will butt together evenly without obstruction,
before tightening the bolts and nuts fully.
2.62a Refitting t h e b a c k p l a t e
2.62b To ease f i t t i n g , apply a little g r e a s e
to the locating dowel
2.62c Fitting t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n b a c k o n t h e
engine
Automatic transmission models
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E«9
Automatic transmission models
64 Remove the torque converter restraint from
the face of the bellhousing. Check that the
torque converter is still fully engaged with the
transmission fluid pump.
65 Refit the backplate, then carefully offer up
the transmission to the cylinder block.
Observe the markings made during the
removal, to ensure correct alignment between
the torque converter and the driveplate.
66 Refit the bellhousing bolts to the positions
n o t e d on removal, h a n d - t i g h t e n i n g t h e m to
secure the transmission in position. Note: Do
not tighten them to force the engine and
transmission
together.
Ensure that the
bellhousing and cylinder block mating faces
will butt together evenly without obstruction,
before tightening the bolts and nuts fully.
All m o d e l s
67 Refit the transmission lower cover,
tightening the bolts securely.
68 Refit the starter motor, referring to
Chapter 5A if necessary.
69 Reconnect
any
wiring
on
the
engine/transmission assembly, routing it as
noted on removal.
Refitting
70 Manoeuvre the engine and transmission
into place under the front of the car.
71 Attach the hoist or engine support bar to
the engine.
72 With the help of an assistant, carefully lift
the assembly up into the engine compartment
and onto the engine mountings, taking care
not to damage the surrounding components.
73 Reconnect
the
engine/transmission
mountings, and tighten the nuts and bolts.
74 When the engine is securely reconnected,
disconnect the hoist from the engine.
75 The remainder of the refitting procedure is
the direct reverse of the removal procedure,
noting the following points:
a) Ensure that all sections of the wiring
harness follow their original routing; use
new cable-ties to secure the harness in
position, keeping it away from sources of
heat and abrasion.
b) On vehicles with manual
transmission,
check and if necessary adjust the
gearchange linkage with reference to
Chapter 7A.
c) On vehicles with automatic
transmission,
check and if necessary adjust the kickdown and selector cables with reference
to Chapter 7B.
d) Ensure that all hoses are correctly routed
and are secured with the correct hose
clips, where applicable. If the hose clips
cannot be used again; proprietary wormdrive clips should be fitted in their place.
e) Befill the cooling system as described in
Chapter 1.
f) Refill the engine with appropriate grade
and quantity of oil (Chapter 1).
g) Refill or top-up the transmission oil or
fluid (see Chapter 1 or Chapter 7).
2.63 Fit a n d t i g h t e n t h e e n g i n e - t o bellhousing bolts
h) Check and if necessary adjust the
auxiliary drivebelt(s) with reference to
Chapter 1.
i) Check and if necessary adjust the
accelerator cable with reference to
Chapter 4.
j) When the engine is started for the first
time, check for air, coolant, lubricant and
fuel leaks from manifolds, hoses etc. If the
engine has been overhauled, read the
notes in Section 12 before attempting to
start it.
3 Engine overhaul preliminary information
It is much easier to dismantle and work on
the engine if it is m o u n t e d on a portable
engine stand. These stands can often be hired
f r o m a t o o l hire s h o p . Before the engine is
mounted on a stand, the flywheel should be
r e m o v e d , so that the stand bolts c a n be
t i g h t e n e d into the end of the cylinder
block/crankcase.
If a stand is not available, it is possible to
dismantle the engine with it blocked up on a
sturdy w o r k b e n c h , or on the floor. Be very
careful not to tip or d r o p the engine w h e n
working without a stand.
If y o u intend t o obtain a r e c o n d i t i o n e d
engine, all ancillaries must be removed first, to
be transferred to the replacement engine (just
as they will if you are doing a complete engine
overhaul yourself). These components include
the following:
a) Power steering pump if removed with the
engine (Chapter 10).
b) Air conditioning compressor (Chapter 3) where applicable.
c) Alternator (including mounting brackets)
and starter motor (Chapter 5A).
d) The ignition system and HT components
including all sensors, HT leads (where
applicable) and spark plugs (Chapters 1
and 5).
e) The fuel injection system
components
(Chapter 4A and 4B).
f) All electrical switches, actuators and
sensors, and the engine wiring harness
(Chapter 4A and 4B, and Chapter 5B).
g) Inlet and exhaust manifolds (Chapter 4).
h) Engine oil dipstick and tube (relevant Part
of Chapter 2).
I) Engine mountings (relevant Part of
Chapter 2).
j) Flywheel'driveplate
(relevant Part of
Chapter 2).
k) Clutch components (Chapter 6) - manual
transmission.
I) Coolant pump (Chapter 3).
Note:
When
removing
the
external
components
from the engine, pay close
attention
to details that may be helpful or
important
during refitting. Note the fitted
position
of gaskets, seals, spacers,
pins,
washers, bolts, and other small
components.
If y o u are o b t a i n i n g a 'short' engine (the
engine cylinder block/crankcase, crankshaft,
pistons and c o n n e c t i n g rods), all fully
assembled), then the cylinder head, sump, oil
p u m p , timing belt (together with its tensioner,
guide pulleys and covers), auxiliary belt(s),
coolant p u m p , t h e r m o s t a t h o u s i n g , and
coolant outlet elbows (as applicable) will also
have to be removed.
If y o u are planning a full overhaul, the
engine can be dismantled in the order given
below:
a)
Flywheel/driveplate.
b) Timing belt, sprockets, and tensioner.
c) Inlet and exhaust manifolds.
d) Cylinder head.
e) Sump.
f) Oil pump.
g) Pistons and crankshaft.
4 Cylinder head dismantling, cleaning,
inspection and reassembly
^
3^
N o t e 1 : New and reconditioned
cylinder
heads are available from the manufacturer or
engine overhaul specialists.
Be aware that
some specialist
tools are required
for the
dismantling and inspection procedures,
and
new components may not be readily available.
It may therefore
be more practical
and
economical
for the home
mechanic
to
purchase a reconditioned
head, rather than
dismantle, inspect and recondition the original
head.
N o t e 2: On 1.2 and 1.6 litre engines, camshaft
and tappet removal is described in Chapter 2A
or 2C respectively.
Dismantling
1 On 1.4 and 1.8 litre engines, r e m o v e the
camshaft s p r o c k e t with reference to C h a p ter 2B or 2D.
2 Remove the cylinder head as described in
the relevant Part of this Chapter.
3 If not already d o n e , remove the inlet and
exhaust manifolds w i t h reference to the
relevant Part of Chapter 4.
4 Unbolt and remove the ignition coil
mounting.
2E»10 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
4.7 M a r k t h e c a m s h a f t bearing c a p s f o r
p o s i t i o n a n d o r i e n t a t i o n - 1 . 4 litre e n g i n e
shown
5 On 1.2 litre engines, unscrew
t e m p e r a t u r e sensor from the
housing on the left-hand end of
h e a d . Unbolt and remove the
housing, and recover the gasket.
the coolant
thermostat
the cylinder
thermostat
1.4 a n d 1.8 l i t r e e n g i n e s
6 Unbolt and remove the coolant pump from
the right-hand end of the cylinder head, and
recover the gasket.
7 Mark the positions of the camshaft bearing
c a p s , n u m b e r i n g t h e m f r o m the timing e n d ,
and marking them so they are refitted the right
way round (on 1.4 litre engines, the curved
surface on the c a p s faces the rear) (see
illustration).
8 On 1.4 litre engines, unbolt and remove the
lubrication pipe (prise the oil feed s t u b out
with a screwdriver). Recover the oil feed pipe
seals w h i c h fit into the cylinder head - new
4.8c Recover t h e oil f e e d p i p e oil seals
4.9 R e m o v i n g o n e of t h e c a m s h a f t b e a r i n g
4.8a U n b o l t t h e oil f e e d pipe
seals must be fitted on c o m p l e t i o n (see
illustrations).
9 Unscrew the remaining bolts and take off
the bearing caps (see illustration).
10 Lift the camshaft(s) carefully f r o m the
cylinder head, c h e c k i n g that the hydraulic
tappets (and followers on 1.4 litre engines) are
not withdrawn by the 'adhesion' of the oil (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . On 1.4 litre engines, note that
the pair of inlet valves per cylinder are
operated by the wider camshaft lobes.
11 Remove the hydraulic t a p p e t s (and
followers on 1.4 litre engines), but keep them
in their originally fitted order. S t a n d the
hydraulic tappets in an oil bath, so that the oil
does not drain from them.
All e n g i n e s
12 Stand the cylinder head on its end. Using
a valve spring c o m p r e s s o r , c o m p r e s s each
valve spring in turn, extracting the split collets
w h e n the upper valve spring seat has been
p u s h e d far enough d o w n the valve s t e m to
free them. If the spring seat sticks, lightly tap
the upper jaw of the spring compressor with a
hammer to free it.
13 Release the valve spring compressor and
remove the upper spring seat, valve spring(s),
and lower spring seat. The 1.2 and 1.4 litre engines have one spring per valve - the other
engines have t w o ; note how they are fitted.
Also identify the upper and lower spring seats,
to avoid confusion on refitting.
14 Withdraw the valve from the head gasket
side of the cylinder head, then use a pair of
pliers to extract the valve stem oil seal from
4.10 Lifting o u t t h e c a m s h a f t o n a 1.4 litre
engine
4.8b . . . t h e n prise o u t t h e oil f e e d s t u b
(location a r r o w e d ) a n d r e m o v e it
the top of the guide. If the valve sticks in the
guide, carefully deburr the end face with fine
abrasive paper. Repeat this process for the
remaining valves.
15 It is essential that each valve is stored
together with its collets, spring(s), and spring
seats. The valves should also be kept in their
correct sequence, unless they are so badly
worn that they are to be renewed. If they are
going to be kept and used again, place each
valve assembly in a labelled polythene bag or
similar small container, labelled as f o l l o w s
(see illustration):
a) No 1 valve is at the timing end of the
engine.
b) On 1.4 litre engines, there are two inlet
valves per cylinder - the inlet valves are
smaller than the exhaust valve, and are
operated by the wider camshaft lobes.
Number the inlet valves 1 to 8, the
exhaust valves 1 to 4.
c) On 1.2 and 1.8 litre engines, exhaust valves
are at the front, inlet valves at the rear.
Number the inlet and exhaust valves 1 to 8.
d) On 1.6 litre engines, inlet valves are at the
front, exhaust valves at the rear. Number
the inlet and exhaust valves 1 to 8.
Cleaning
16 Using a suitable degreasing agent,
remove all traces of oil d e p o s i t s f r o m the
cylinder head, paying particular attention to
the journal bearings, valve follower bores,
valve guides a n d oilways. S c r a p e off any
traces of old gasket from the mating surfaces,
4.15 K e e p t h e valve c o m p o n e n t s t o g e t h e r
in a labelled b a g or box
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»11
4.20 L o o k for c r a c k i n g b e t w e e n t h e valve
seats
4.21 M e a s u r i n g t h e d i s t o r t i o n of t h e
cylinder head g a s k e t e d s u r f a c e
taking care not t o score or g o u g e t h e m . If
using emery paper, do not use a grade of less
than 100. Turn the head over and using a
blunt blade, scrape any carbon deposits from
the combustion chambers and ports.
Caution: Do not erode the sealing
surface
of the valve seat.
22 Examine the valve seats in each of the
c o m b u s t i o n c h a m b e r s . If they, are severely
pitted, c r a c k e d , or burned, they will need to
be renewed or re-cut by an engine overhaul
specialist. If they are only slightly pitted, this
can be r e m o v e d by grinding-in the valve
heads and seats w i t h fine valve-grinding
c o m p o u n d , as described below.
17 Finally, wash the entire head casting with
a suitable solvent to remove the remaining
debris.
18 Clean the valve heads and stems using a
fine wire brush. If the valve is heavily c o k e d ,
scrape off the majority of the deposits with a
blunt blade first, then use the wire brush.
Caution: Do not erode the sealing
surface
of the valve face.
19 Thoroughly clean the remainder of the
components using solvent, and allow them to
dry completely. Discard the oil seals, as new
items must be fitted when the cylinder head is
reassembled.
Inspection
Cylinder head
20 Inspect the head very carefully for cracks,
evidence of coolant leakage, and other
damage (see illustration). If cracks are found,
a new cylinder head should be obtained.
21 Use a s t r a i g h t - e d g e and feeler blade to
check that the cylinder head gasket surface is
not distorted (see illustration). If it is, it may
be possible to have it machined (skimmed),
provided not too much material is removed.
M i n i m u m head heights are not q u o t e d by
FIAT, so seek the advice of an engine
overhaul specialist.
4.25 A n e x a m p l e of a b a d l y - w o r n c a m s h a f t
23 C h e c k the valve guides for wear by
inserting the relevant valve, and checking for
side-to-side motion of the valve. A very small
a m o u n t of m o v e m e n t is a c c e p t a b l e . If the
m o v e m e n t seems excessive, remove the
valve. Measure the valve stem diameter at
several points, and renew the valve if it is
worn (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If the valve stem is
not worn, the wear must be in the valve guide,
and the guide must be renewed. The renewal
of valve guides is best carried out by an
engine overhaul specialist, who will have the
necessary tools available.
24 If renewing the valve guides, the valve
seats should be re-cut or re-ground only after
the guides have been fitted.
Camshaft(s), tappets and followers 1.4 a n d 1.8 l i t r e e n g i n e s
25 Inspect the camshaft(s) for wear on the
surfaces of the lobes and journals. Normally
their surfaces should be s m o o t h and have a
dull shine; look for s c o r i n g and pitting.
A c c e l e r a t e d wear will o c c u r o n c e the
hardened exterior of the camshaft has been
damaged (see illustration).
26 Examine the bearing c a p and journal
surfaces for signs of wear (see illustration).
4.26 E x a m i n i n g t h e c a m s h a f t b e a r i n g c a p s
- t h e t o p o n e is f i n e , t h e b o t t o m o n e is
badly w o r n
4.23a M e a s u r e t h e d e f l e c t i o n of t h e valve
in its guide, u s i n g a dial g a u g e
4.23b M e a s u r i n g t h e d i a m e t e r of a valve
stem
27 If excessive c a m lobe wear is n o t e d ,
examine the relevant tappet and/or follower(s)
for similar signs of wear. It is advisable to
renew the camshaft, tappets (and followers,
on the 1.4 litre engine) as a set, even if only
one lobe is w o r n ; this is particularly true if the
car has completed a large mileage.
28 T o measure the camshaft endfloat,
temporarily refit the camshaft, then push the
camshaft to one end of the cylinder head as
far as it will travel. Attach a dial test indicator
to the cylinder head and zero it, then push the
camshaft as far as it will go to the other end of
the cylinder head and record the gauge
reading (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Verify the reading
by pushing the camshaft back to its original
position and c h e c k i n g that the g a u g e
indicates zero again.
29 The camshaft bearing running clearance
may be c h e c k e d using Plastigauge as
described later in this Chapter.
4.28 C h e c k i n g t h e c a m s h a f t e n d f l o a t
u s i n g a dial g a u g e
2E»12 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
4.37 G r i n d i n g - i n a valve
4.41 C h e c k i n g t h e s q u a r e n e s s of a valve
spring
4.43a Fit t h e l o w e r s p r i n g s e a t . . .
30 Where the camshaft and bearings are
w o r n excessively, consider renewing the
c o m p l e t e cylinder head t o g e t h e r w i t h c a m shafts), tappets (and followers, on the 1.4 litre
engine). A r e c o n d i t i o n e d head may be
available f r o m engine repairers. T a p p e t
(and/or follower) wear serious enough t o
warrant new c o m p o n e n t s will be obvious on
inspection.
and a grinding tool - this can either be of the
d o w e l and rubber sucker t y p e , or the
automatic t y p e which are driven by a rotary
power tool.
35 If the seat is only lightly pitted, or if it has
been re-cut, fine grinding c o m p o u n d only
should be used to produce the required finish.
Coarse valve-grinding c o m p o u n d should not
be u s e d , unless a seat is badly b u r n e d or
deeply pitted. If this is the case, the cylinder
head and valves should be inspected by an
expert, to decide whether seat re-cutting, or
even the renewal of the valve or seat insert
(where possible) is required.
sunk into the cylinder head.
39 When all the valves have been ground-in,
carefully w a s h off all traces of grinding
c o m p o u n d using paraffin or a suitable solvent,
before reassembling the cylinder head.
40 Examine the valve springs for signs of
d a m a g e and d i s c o l o r a t i o n . If possible,
c o m p a r e the length of the springs with new
ones, and renew them if necessary.
41 Stand each spring on a flat surface, and
check it for squareness (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If
any of the springs are damaged, distorted or
have lost their tension, obtain a complete new
set of springs. It is normal to renew the valve
springs as a matter of course if a major
overhaul is being carried out.
31 On 1.4 litre engines, clean out the
camshaft oil feed pipe assembly before
refitting. This can be achieved using an
aerosol can of engine degreasant, or
carburettor cleaner. Make sure the solvent is
drained off before the pipe is refitted.
Valves and associated c o m p o n e n t s
32 Examine the head of each valve for
pitting, b u r n i n g , c r a c k s , and general wear.
Check the valve stem for scoring and wear
ridges. Rotate the valve, and c h e c k for any
obvious indication that it is bent. Look for pits
or excessive wear on the tip of each valve
stem. Renew any valve that shows any such
signs of wear or damage.
33 If the valve appears satisfactory at this
stage, measure the valve stem diameter at
several points using a micrometer. Any
significant difference in the readings obtained
indicates wear of the valve stem. Should any
of these conditions be apparent, the valve(s)
must be renewed.
34 If the valves are in satisfactory condition,
they should be g r o u n d (lapped) into their
respective seats, to ensure a s m o o t h , g a s tight seal. To complete this process, you will
need a quantity of fine/coarse grinding paste
36 Valve grinding is carried out as f o l l o w s .
Place the cylinder head u p s i d e - d o w n on a
bench.
37 Smear a t r a c e of (the appropriate grade
of) valve-grinding c o m p o u n d on the seat face,
and attach the grinding tool o n t o the valve
head. With a semi-rotary a c t i o n , grind the
valve head to its seat, lifting the valve
occasionally to redistribute the grinding
c o m p o u n d (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . A light spring
placed under the valve head will greatly ease
this operation.
38 If coarse grinding c o m p o u n d is being
used, work only until a dull, matt even surface
is p r o d u c e d on b o t h the valve seat and the
valve, then wipe off the used c o m p o u n d , and
repeat the process with fine c o m p o u n d . When
a s m o o t h u n b r o k e n ring of light grey matt
finish is produced on both the valve and seat,
the grinding operation is c o m p l e t e . Do not
grind-in the valves any further than absolutely
necessary, or the seat will be prematurely
42 Renew the valve stem oil seals regardless
of their apparent condition.
Reassembly
43 Refit the lower spring seat then, working
on the first valve, dip the new valve stem seal
in fresh engine oil. Carefully locate it onto the
guide. Take care not to damage the seal as it
is passed over the valve stem. Use a suitable
socket or metal tube to press the seal firmly
onto the guide (see illustrations).
44 Lubricate the s t e m s of the valves, and
insert the valves into their original locations
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If new valves are being
fitted, insert them into the locations to which
they have been ground.
45 Locate the valve spring (or the inner and
outer springs, on 1.6 and 1.8 litre engines) on
t o p of the lower seat, then refit the upper
spring seat (see illustrations).
F~
4.43b . . . t h e n t h e valve s t e m oil s e a l . . .
4.43c . . . p r e s s i n g t h e seal h o m e u s i n g a
deep socket
;
'
<'"
——y~
4.44 Oil t h e valve s t e m s b e f o r e f i t t i n g
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E«13
4.45b . . . a n d o u t e r valve s p r i n g s
(1.6 litre e n g i n e s h o w n ) . . .
4.45c . . . t h e n fit t h e u p p e r s p r i n g seat
4.46a Fit t h e valve s p r i n g c o m p r e s s o r . . .
4.46b . . . t h e n insert t h e split c o l l e t s , u s i n g
a s m a l l s c r e w d r i v e r t o g u i d e t h e m in
4.47 Using a hide mallet t o settle t h e valve
components
46 Compress the valve spring(s), and locate
the split collets in the recess in the valve stem
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Release the compressor,
then repeat the procedure on the remaining
valves.
hydraulic tappets is held fully compressed for
15 minutes - this will bleed any air from the
t a p p e t s , w h i c h w o u l d otherwise impair their
correct operation w h e n the engine is
eventually started.
52 Refit the coolant p u m p , using a new
gasket. Refer to Chapter 3 as necessary.
On 1.6 litre engines, remove the oil p u m p
completely, as described in Chapter 2C.
2 The big-end bearing shells can be renewed
without having to remove the cylinder head, if
the
caps
are
unbolted
and
the
p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g rod p u s h e d gently about
one inch up the bore (the crankpin being at its
lowest point). If these shells are w o r n ,
however, the main bearing shells will almost
certainly be w o r n as well. In this case, the
crankshaft should be removed for inspection.
4.45a L o c a t e t h e inner .
HAYNES
Use a dab of grease to hold
the collets in position on the
valve stem while the
spring
compressor
is released.
47 With all the valves installed, place t h e
cylinder head flat on the bench and, using a
hammer and interposed block of w o o d (or a
hide mallet), tap the end of each valve stem to
settle the components (see illustration).
All engines
53 Further refitting is a reversal
relevant removal procedure.
of
the
Removal
3 To remove the pistons and c o n n e c t i n g
r o d s , remove the cylinder head first, as
described in the relevant Part of Chapter 2.
4 On the 1.2 litre engine, to improve access,
remove the ten bolts securing the vibration
damping plate to the main bearing caps, and
remove the plate, noting which way round it
fits.
1 Remove the sump and oil pump pick-up with
reference to the relevant Part of Chapter 2.
5 The big-end caps and the connecting rods
should be n u m b e r e d 1, 2, 3 and 4 f r o m the
5 Pistons and connecting rods ^
- removal, inspection, and bigend running clearance check 3Q
1.4 a n d 1.8 l i t r e e n g i n e s
48 Fit the hydraulic tappets (to their original
positions, if they were not renewed). On 1.4 litre
engines, similarly refit the followers (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Lubricate all c o m p o n e n t s with
fresh oil as they are fitted.
49 Oil the journals, then locate
the
camshaft(s) in the cylinder h e a d . The c a m
lobes of No 1 cylinder s h o u l d be facing
upwards (ie No 1 cylinder at TDC).
50 Refit the bearing c a p s in their correct
positions, t o g e t h e r w i t h new camshaft oil
seal(s). On 1.4 litre engines, locate the
lubrication pipe and new end seals on the
h e a d , and press in the oil feed s t u b before
refitting the bolts. Tighten the bearing c a p
bolts by a quarter-turn at a t i m e , to the
specified torque.
51 On the 1.4 litre engine, FIAT state that the
camshaft should be turned so that each of the
4.48a On 1.4 litre e n g i n e s , refit t h e
hydraulic tappets . . .
4.48b
, and followers
2E»14 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
5.5 No 3 c o n n e c t i n g rod a n d b e a r i n g c a p
markings
5.11a Using a feeler blade t o r e m o v e t h e
s e c o n d c o m p r e s s i o n ring
5.11 b R e m o v i n g t h e oil s c r a p e r e x p a n d e r
ring
t i m i n g belt cover end of the engine. Note
which side the marks appear, relative to the
front- or rear-facing side of the engine, for use
when refitting. If no marks are present, make
your o w n marks using a c e n t r e - p u n c h (see
illustration).
6 Turn the crankshaft as necessary to bring
the first- c r a n k p i n to its lowest point, then
unscrew the bolts (or nuts, on the 1.6 litre
engine) and remove the big-end cap and shell
bearing.
feeler blades will be helpful in preventing the
rings dropping into empty grooves. Be careful
not to scratch the piston with the ends of the
ring. The rings are brittle, and will snap if they
are spread too far. They are also very sharp protect your hands and fingers. Always
remove the rings from the t o p of the piston.
Keep each set of rings with its piston if the old
rings are to be re-used. Note the fitted order
of all c o m p o n e n t s , w h i c h ring is f i t t e d to
which groove, and which way up each is fitted
(see illustrations).
12 Scrape away all traces of carbon from the
top of the piston. A hand-held wire brush (or a
piece of fine emery cloth) can be used, once
the majority of the d e p o s i t s have been
scraped away.
13 Remove the carbon from the ring grooves
in the piston, using an old ring. Break the ring in
half to do this (be careful not to cut your fingers
- piston rings are sharp). Be careful to remove
only the carbon deposits - do not remove any
metal, and do not nick or scratch the sides of
the ring grooves.
14 O n c e the d e p o s i t s have been r e m o v e d ,
clean the p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g rod assembly
with paraffin or a suitable solvent, and dry
thoroughly. Make sure that the oil return holes
in the ring grooves are clear. Fit the rings to
their respective grooves, making sure they are
positioned the correct way round where
applicable.
15 If the pistons and cylinder bores are not
d a m a g e d or w o r n excessively,, and if the
cylinder block does not need to be rebored,
the original pistons can be refitted (see
illustration). Normal piston wear shows up as
even vertical wear on the piston thrust
surfaces, and slight looseness of the top ring
in its groove. New piston rings should always
be used when the engine is reassembled.
16 Carefully inspect each piston for cracks
around the skirt, around the g u d g e o n pin
holes, and at the piston ring 'lands' (between
the ring grooves).
17 L o o k for s c o r i n g and scuffing on the
piston skirt, holes in the piston c r o w n , and
burned areas at the edge of the crown. If the
skirt is s c o r e d or s c u f f e d , the engine may
have been suffering from overheating, and/or
abnormal
combustion
which
caused
excessively high operating temperatures. The
cooling and lubrication s y s t e m s should be
checked thoroughly.
18 Scorch marks on the sides of the pistons
show that piston ring blow-by has occurred. A
hole in the piston c r o w n , or burned areas at
the edge of the piston c r o w n , indicates that
abnormal combustion has been occurring. If
any of the above problems exist, the causes
must be investigated and c o r r e c t e d , or the
d a m a g e will o c c u r again. The causes may
include incorrect ignition t i m i n g , or a fuel
s y s t e m fault w h i c h has led t o the engine
running on too weak a fuel/air mixture.
19 Corrosion of the p i s t o n , in the f o r m of
p i t t i n g , indicates that coolant has been
leaking into the combustion chamber and/or
the c r a n k c a s e . Again, the cause must be
corrected, or the problem may persist in the
rebuilt engine.
20 Examine each connecting rod carefully for
signs of damage, such as cracks around the
big-end and small-end bearings. Check that
the rod is not bent or d i s t o r t e d . Damage is
highly unlikely, unless the engine has been
seized or badly overheated. Detailed checking
of the connecting rod assembly can only be
carried out by an engine repair specialist with
the necessary equipment.
21 A l t h o u g h not essential, it is highly
recommended that the big-end cap bolts (and
nuts, on 1.6 litre engines) are renewed as a
c o m p l e t e set prior to refitting. On 1.6 litre
engines, the bolts can be t a p p e d out of the
connecting rods for renewal.
22 On 1.2 litre engines, piston and/or
connecting rod renewal should be entrusted to
an engine repair specialist, who will have the
necessary facilities to remove and install the
gudgeon pins. The gudgeon pins can only be
removed or refitted after heating the pistons
and connecting rods to 240°C.
23 On engines except the 1.2 litre, the
gudgeon pins are of the floating type, secured
in position by two circlips. On these engines,
the pistons and c o n n e c t i n g rods can be
separated as follows.
24 Using a small f l a t - b l a d e d screwdriver,
prise out the circlips, and r e m o v e the
gudgeon pin (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Identify the
piston and rod to ensure correct reassembly.
Discard the circlips - new ones must be used
on refitting.
7 On the 1.6 litre engine, wrap a piece of tape
around the big-end cap bolts (which remain in
the connecting rod). The tape is intended to
prevent the bolt threads from scratching the
crankshaft journals as the connecting rods are
removed.
8 Push the piston/rod assembly up the bore
and out of the cylinder block. There is one
reservation; if a wear ridge has developed at
the t o p of the bores, remove this by careful
scraping before trying to remove the
p i s t o n / r o d assemblies. The ridge
will
otherwise prevent removal, or will break the
piston rings during the attempt.
9 Remove the remaining p i s t o n s / r o d s in a
similar way. If the bearing shells are to be
used again, tape them to their respective caps
or rods.
Inspection
10 Before the inspection process can begin,
the p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g rod assemblies must
be c l e a n e d , and the original piston rings
removed from the pistons.
11 Carefully e x p a n d the old rings over the
top of the pistons. The use of two or three old
It''**
5.15 Piston size c l a s s m a r k i n g (arrowed)
o n u n d e r s i d e of p i s t o n
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E«15
5.24a U s i n g a s m a l l s c r e w d r i v e r . . .
5.24b . . . prise o u t t h e g u d g e o n pin
circlip...
5.24c . . . a n d u s i n g a suitable s o c k e t if
necessary...
25 Examine the gudgeon pin and connecting
rod s m a l l - e n d bearing for signs of wear or
damage. Bush renewal should be entrusted to
an engine overhaul specialist.
26 The c o n n e c t i n g rods themselves should
not be in need of renewal, unless seizure or
s o m e other major mechanical failure has
o c c u r r e d . C h e c k the alignment of the
connecting rods visually, and if the rods are
not straight, take them to an engine overhaul
specialist for a more detailed check.
the bearing locations in both the connecting
rod and bearing cap.
31 Press the bearing shells into their
locations, ensuring that the tab on each shell
engages in the notch in the c o n n e c t i n g rod
and cap (see illustrations). Take care not to
t o u c h any shell's bearing surface w i t h your
fingers. If the original bearing shells are being
used for the c h e c k , ensure that they are
refitted in their original locations. The
clearance can be c h e c k e d in either of t w o
ways.
35 Tighten the bearing cap nuts/bolts, taking
care not to disturb the Plastigauge or rotate
the c o n n e c t i n g rod during the tightening
sequence.
36 Dismantle
the
assemblies
without
rotating the c o n n e c t i n g rods. Use the scale
p r i n t e d on the Plastigauge e n v e l o p e t o
measure the crushed Plastigauge strand, and
t h u s o b t a i n the b i g - e n d bearing running
clearance.
37 If the clearance is significantly different
from that expected, the bearing shells may be
the w r o n g size (or excessively w o r n , if the
original shells are being re-used). Make sure
that no dirt or oil w a s t r a p p e d b e t w e e n the
bearing shells and the caps or block when the
clearance w a s measured. If the Plastigauge
w a s wider at one end than at the other, the
crankshaft journal may be tapered.
38 On completion, carefully scrape away all
t r a c e s of the Plastigauge material f r o m the
crankshaft and bearing shells. Use your
fingernail, or s o m e other object w h i c h is
unlikely to score the bearing surfaces.
27 Examine all components, and obtain any
new parts as necessary. If new pistons are
p u r c h a s e d , they will be s u p p l i e d c o m p l e t e
with gudgeon pins and circlips.
28 On reassembly, position the piston on the
c o n n e c t i n g r o d . A p p l y a smear of clean
engine oil to the gudgeon pin. Slide it (or tap
it) into the piston and through the connecting
rod s m a l l - e n d . C h e c k that the piston pivots
freely on the rod, then secure the gudgeon pin
in position with two new circlips. Ensure that
each circlip is correctly located in its groove in
the piston.
Refitting
running
and big-end
bearing
clearance
check
29 Prior to refitting the piston/connecting rod
assemblies, it is r e c o m m e n d e d that the bigend bearing running clearance is checked as
follows.
Big-end bearing running clearance
check
30 Clean the backs of the bearing shells, and
J i .
32 One method is to refit the big-end bearing
cap to the connecting rod, ensuring that they
are fitted the correct way a r o u n d , with the
bearing shells in place. With the cap retaining
nuts/bolts correctly tightened, use an internal
micrometer or vernier caliper to measure the
internal diameter of each assembled pair of
bearing shells. If the diameter of each
corresponding crankshaft journal is measured
and then subtracted from the bearing internal
diameter, the result will be the b i g - e n d
bearing running clearance.
33 The second, and more accurate method is
to use a product called Plastigauge. Ensure
that the bearing shells are correctly f i t t e d ,
then place a strand of Plastigauge on each
(cleaned) crankpin journal.
34 Refit the (clean) p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g rod
assemblies to the crankshaft, and refit the
big-end bearing caps, using the marks made
or noted on removal to ensure that they are
fitted the correct way around.
Final p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g r o d refitting
39 Ensure that the bearing shells are
correctly fitted. If new shells are being fitted,
ensure that all traces of the protective grease
are cleaned off using paraffin. Wipe dry the
shells and c o n n e c t i n g rods with a lint-free
cloth.
40 Lubricate the cylinder bores, the pistons,
and piston rings, then lay out each
,
5.24d . . . t a p or p u s h o u t t h e g u d g e o n pin
5.31a Fit t h e b e a r i n g shells t o t h e
connecting rods . . .
5.31b . . . a n d b i g - e n d b e a r i n g c a p s
2E»16 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
5.40a L u b r i c a t e t h e c y l i n d e r b o r e s . . .
5.40b . . . p i s t o n s , a n d p i s t o n r i n g s
5.41 C l a m p t h e p i s t o n rings u s i n g a p i s t o n
ring c o m p r e s s o r
p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g rod assembly in its
respective position (see illustrations).
41 Start w i t h assembly No 1. Position the
piston ring gaps 120° apart, then clamp them
in position with a piston ring compressor (see
illustration).
42 Insert the piston/connecting rod assembly
into the top of cylinder, making sure it is the
correct way round, as follows:
a) On 1.2 litre engines, the arrows on the
piston crowns point to the timing belt end
of the engine.
b) On 1.4 and 1.6 litre engines, the arrow
markings on the base of the pistons
indicate the direction of engine rotation,
and should point to the front of the engine
(as seen installed in the car). Some
models may have a punched mark offcentre in the piston crown, which should
be nearest the timing belt end and front of
the engine (see
illustrations).
side of the engine (the rear of the engine,
as seen installed in the car).
43 Using a block of w o o d or hammer handle
against the piston c r o w n , tap the assembly
into the cylinder until the piston crown is flush
with the top of the cylinder (see illustration).
44 Ensure that the bearing shell is still
correctly installed. Liberally lubricate the crankpin and both bearing shells (see illustration).
Taking care not to mark the cylinder bores, pull
the piston/connecting rod assembly down the
bore and onto the crankpin.
c) On 1.8 litre engines, the larger recesses in
the piston crowns are for the inlet valves,
so these must be positioned on the inlet
45 On 1.6 litre engines, remove the tape from
the connecting rod bolt threads (where used).
46 Refit the big-end bearing cap, tightening
its retaining bolts or nuts finger-tight at first
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Note that the faces with
the identification marks must m a t c h (which
means that the bearing shell locating t a b s
abut each other).
5.42b P u n c h m a r k (arrowed) o n p i s t o n
crown
5.42c Inserting t h e p i s t o n / c o n n e c t i n g r o d
assembly
5.43 T a p p i n g t h e a s s e m b l y into t h e
cylinder
5.44 L u b r i c a t i n g a b i g - e n d b e a r i n g shell
5.46a Refit t h e b i g - e n d bearing c a p s . . .
5.46b . . . a n d s e c u r e w i t h t h e n u t s (as o n
1.6 litre e n g i n e s h o w n ) or b o l t s
5.42a A r r o w m a r k i n g (arrowed) o n p i s t o n
i n d i c a t e s d i r e c t i o n of r o t a t i o n
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»17
5.47 T i g h t e n i n g t h e b i g - e n d b e a r i n g c a p s
6.4 C h e c k i n g c r a n k s h a f t e n d f l o a t w i t h a
dial g a u g e
6.5 Using feeler b l a d e s t o a s s e s s
c r a n k s h a f t e n d f l o a t - 1 . 6 litre engine s h o w n
47 Tighten the bearing cap retaining nuts or
bolts evenly and progressively to the
specified torque setting (see illustration). On
1.4 and 1.8 litre engines, tighten the bolts to
the Stage 1 torque, then angle-tighten t h e m
to the s p e c i f i e d angle using an a n g l e measuring gauge.
48 Once the bearing c a p s have been
correctly t i g h t e n e d , rotate the crankshaft.
Check that it turns freely; some stiffness is to
be e x p e c t e d if new c o m p o n e n t s have been
fitted, but there should be no signs of binding
or tight spots.
49 Refit the remaining three piston/connecting
rod assemblies in the same way.
50 On 1.2 litre m o d e l s , refit the vibration
d a m p i n g plate to the main bearing c a p s ,
tightening the bolts securely.
51 Refit the cylinder head, oil pump (or pickup) and s u m p with reference to the relevant
Part of Chapter 2.
rods, there is no need to remove the cylinder
head, or to push the pistons out of the
cylinder bores. The pistons should just be
pushed far enough up the bores that they are
positioned clear of the crankshaft journals.
3 Unbolt the crankshaft rear oil seal housing
f r o m the cylinder block, and recover the
gasket (where fitted).
4 Before removing the crankshaft, check the
endfloat using a dial gauge (see illustration).
Push the crankshaft fully one way, and then
zero the gauge. Push the crankshaft fully the
other way, and check the endfloat. The result
can be compared with the specified amount,
and will give an indication as to whether new
thrustwashers are required.
7 Loosen and remove the main bearing cap
retaining bolts, and lift off each bearing cap.
Recover the lower bearing shells, and tape
t h e m to their respective c a p s for safekeeping.
8 Lift the crankshaft from the crankcase, and
r e m o v e t h e u p p e r bearing shells f r o m t h e
crankcase. If the shells are to be used again,
k e e p t h e m identified for p o s i t i o n . W h e r e
a p p l i c a b l e , also r e m o v e the t h r u s t w a s h e r s
f r o m their position either side of the centre
main bearing (1.4 and 1.8 litre engines) or
rear main bearing (1.6 litre engines). On 1.2 litre
engines, the upper half of the centre main
bearing shell has thrust flanges.
6 Crankshaft -
removal and inspection
5 If a dial gauge is not available, feeler blades
can be used. First push the crankshaft fully
towards the flywheel end of the engine, then
use feeler blades to measure the gap - on all
engines except the 1.6 litre, measure between
the centre main bearing thrustwasher and the
crankshaft web; on 1.6 litre engines, measure
b e t w e e n the rear main bearing and the
crankshaft web (see illustration).
1 Remove the s u m p , oil p u m p and p i c k - u p
tube, and the flywheel/driveplate as described
in the relevant Part of Chapter 2. Where
applicable, unbolt and remove the oil spill
tube from the base of the engine.
2 Remove the pistons and connecting rods,
as described in Section 5. However, if no work
is to be done on the pistons and connecting
6 Note the markings on the main bearing
c a p s . There should be one line on the c a p
nearest the t i m i n g e n d , t w o on the s e c o n d
cap, C on the centre cap, then three and four
lines on the remaining caps. Alternatively, on
some engines there are no notches on the cap
nearest the t i m i n g end (No 1 cylinder), one
notch on No 2 cap, two notches on No 3 cap,
and three notches on No 4 cap. If you are in
any doubt about the markings on your engine,
make your own using paint or a centre-punch
(see illustrations).
6.6a S h o w i n g t h e n o t c h e s identifying t h e
main bearing cap locations
6.6b On t h i s e n g i n e , w e m a r k e d t h e rear
c a p t o s h o w its f i t t e d d i r e c t i o n
Removal
Inspection
9 Wash the crankshaft in a suitable solvent
and allow it to dry. Flush the oil holes
thoroughly, to ensure that are not blocked use a pipe cleaner or a needle brush if
necessary. Remove any sharp edges from the
edge of the holes which may damage the new
bearings when they are installed.
10 Inspect the main bearing and c r a n k p i n
journals carefully; if uneven wear, c r a c k i n g ,
scoring or pitting are evident, the crankshaft
s h o u l d be reground by an engineering
w o r k s h o p , and refitted to the engine w i t h
undersize bearings.
11 Use a m i c r o m e t e r to measure the
diameter of each main bearing journal (see
illustration).
Taking
a
number
of
measurements on the surface of each journal
will reveal if it is worn unevenly. Differences in
diameter measured at 90° intervals indicate
that the journal is out-of-round. Differences in
6.11 C h e c k i n g t h e c r a n k s h a f t j o u r n a l s
using a micrometer
2E*18 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
eft.
7.3 W i t h d r a w i n g t h e auxiliary shaft
diameter measured along the length of the
journal, indicate that the journal is t a p e r e d .
Again, if wear is detected, the crankshaft can
be reground by an engineering workshop and
refitted with undersize bearings.
12 Check the oil seal journals at either end of
the crankshaft. If they appear excessively
scored or damaged, they may cause the new
seals to leak when the engine is reassembled.
It may be possible to repair the journal; seek
the advice of an engineering workshop.
13 Measure the crankshaft runout by setting
up a DTI gauge on the centre main bearing
journal and rotating the shaft in V - b l o c k s .
The m a x i m u m deflection of the g a u g e will
indicate the runout. Take precautions t o
protect the bearing journals and oil seal
mating surfaces f r o m d a m a g e during this
p r o c e d u r e . A m a x i m u m runout figure is not
q u o t e d by the manufacturer, but use the
figure of 0.05 m m as a rough guide. If the
runout exceeds this figure, crankshaft renewal
should be c o n s i d e r e d - consult your FIAT
dealer or an engine rebuilding specialist for
advice.
14 Refer to Section 9 for details of main and
big-end bearing inspection.
7 Auxiliary shaft
§^
(1.6 litre engines) removal, inspection and refitting
Removal
1 Remove the auxiliary shaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Chapter 2C, Section 5.
7.5 Auxiliary shaft oil p u m p d r i v e n gear
2 Unscrew the three bolts, and withdraw the
auxiliary shaft flange from the engine. Recover
the gasket.
3 The auxiliary shaft can now be w i t h d r a w n
from the engine (see illustration). Note that, if
the oil p u m p has not been r e m o v e d , the oil
p u m p driveshaft will turn as the shaft is
removed.
4 Turn the auxiliary shaft as necessary so that
it does not hang up on the bearings inside the
engine. Keep the shaft horizontal as it is
w i t h d r a w n ; f o r c e should not be u s e d , or
required, otherwise the shaft and bearings
could be damaged.
Inspection
5 C h e c k the c o n d i t i o n of the oil p u m p
drivegear. If the teeth are excessively worn, it
is likely that a new shaft will be needed, but
consult an engine rebuilding specialist first.
Also c h e c k the condition of the driven gear
mounted in the crankcase (see illustration).
6 Examine the shaft's two bearings for signs
of scoring or excessive wear. If a micrometer
is available, the bearing diameters c a n be
checked against the specified values.
7 If the shaft bearings are w o r n , it is likely
that the shaft bushes in the cylinder block will
also be w o r n . Renewal is p o s s i b l e , but a
press will be required, making this a j o b for
an engine specialist.
Refitting
8 Refitting is a reversal of removal, using a
new flange gasket. It is advisable to fit a new
auxiliary shaft oil seal, as described in Chapter 2C, Section 9. If the oil pump has not been
removed, check (by turning the auxiliary shaft)
that the oil p u m p drive is working properly.
8 Cylinder block/crankcase
cleaning and inspection
Cleaning
1 Remove all external c o m p o n e n t s and
brackets f r o m the block, including (as
applicable) the rear engine plate, oil pressure
s w i t c h , breather pipe, coolant p u m p and
alternator/power steering pump/air conditioning compressor mounting brackets.
2 For c o m p l e t e c l e a n i n g , the c o r e plugs
should ideally be removed. Drill a small hole
in the plugs, then insert a self-tapping screw
into the hole. Pull out the plugs by pulling on
the screw with a pair of grips, or by using a
slide hammer.
3 Where applicable, undo the retaining bolts
and remove the piston oil jet spray tubes from
inside the cylinder block.
4 Scrape all traces of gasket from the cylinder
block/crankcase, taking care not to d a m a g e
the gasket/sealing surfaces.
5 Remove all oil gallery plugs (where fitted).
The plugs are usually very tight - they may
have to be drilled out, and the holes re-
t a p p e d . Use new plugs w h e n the engine is
reassembled.
6 If the b l o c k is very dirty have it s t e a m cleaned, otherwise use paraffin to clean it.
7 Clean all oil holes and oil galleries again and
dry thoroughly, then apply a light film of oil to
all mating surfaces, to prevent rusting. Smear
the cylinder bores with a light coating of oil.
8 All threaded holes must be clean, to ensure
accurate torque readings during reassembly.
To clean the threads, run the correct-size tap
into each of the holes to remove rust,
c o r r o s i o n , thread sealant or sludge, and to
restore damaged threads (see illustration). If
possible, use c o m p r e s s e d air to clear the
holes of debris produced by this operation.
9 Apply suitable sealant to the new oil gallery
plugs, and insert t h e m into the holes in the
block. Tighten them securely.
10 Where applicable, refit the piston oil jet
spray t u b e s to the cylinder block, and
securely tighten the retaining bolts. Bend over
the tabs to lock the bolts.
11 Fit the new core plugs w i t h sealant
applied to their perimeters before using a
suitable metal tube to drive them squarely into
position.
Inspection
12 Visually c h e c k the cylinder block for
c r a c k s and c o r r o s i o n . Look for s t r i p p e d
threads in the t h r e a d e d holes. If there has
been any history of internal water leakage, it
may be worthwhile having an engine overhaul
specialist check it with special equipment.
13 Check each cylinder bore for scuffing and
scoring. Check for signs of a wear ridge at the
top of the cylinder, indicating that the bore is
excessively worn.
14 If the necessary measuring equipment is
available, measure the bore diameters at the
t o p (just under the wear ridge), centre, and
b o t t o m , parallel to the crankshaft axis (see
illustration).
15 Next, measure the bore diameters at the
same three locations, at right-angles to the
crankshaft axis. If there is any doubt about the
c o n d i t i o n of the cylinder bores, seek the
advice of a FIAT dealer or suitable engine
reconditioning specialist.
16 If the engine is not going to be reassembled right away, cover it with a large plastic
8.8 To clean t h e cylinder block bolt threads,
run a correct-size t a p into t h e holes
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»19
system. It may get into the oil, and from there
into the bearings. Metal chips from machining
operations and normal engine wear are often
present. Abrasives are s o m e t i m e s left in
engine c o m p o n e n t s after r e c o n d i t i o n i n g ,
especially w h e n parts are not t h o r o u g h l y
cleaned using the proper cleaning methods.
5 Whatever the source, these foreign objects
often end up e m b e d d e d in the soft bearing
material, and are easily r e c o g n i s e d . Large
particles will not e m b e d in the bearing, and
will score or gouge the bearing and journal.
The best prevention for this cause of bearing
failure is to clean all parts t h o r o u g h l y , and
keep everything spotlessly-clean during
engine assembly. Regular engine oil and filter
changes are also recommended.
8.14 Three b o r e m e a s u r e m e n t p o i n t s d i m e n s i o n s in m m
A
Measure at right-angles to the crankshaft
axis
B Measure in line with the crankshaft axis
bag to keep it clean and prevent rusting. If the
engine is ready for reassembly, refit all the
components and brackets removed.
Main and big-end bearings
inspection and selection
Inspection
1 Even though the main and big-end bearings
should be renewed during the engine
overhaul, the old bearings should be retained
for close e x a m i n a t i o n , as they may reveal
valuable information about the c o n d i t i o n of
the engine (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . The bearing
shells are available in different thicknesses to
match the diameter of the journal.
2 Bearing failure can o c c u r due to lack of
lubrication, the presence of dirt or other
foreign particles, overloading the engine, or
corrosion. Regardless of the cause of bearing
failure, the cause must be corrected (where
applicable) before the engine is reassembled,
to prevent it from happening again.
3 When examining the bearing shells, remove
them from the cylinder block/crankcase, the
main bearing caps, the connecting rods and
the connecting rod big-end bearing caps. Lay
t h e m out on a clean surface in the same
general position as their location in the engine.
This will enable you to m a t c h any bearing
problems with the corresponding crankshaft
journal. Do not t o u c h any shell's bearing
surface with your fingers while checking it.
4 Dirt and other foreign matter gets into the
engine in a variety of ways. It may be left in
the engine during assembly, or it may pass
t h r o u g h filters or the c r a n k c a s e ventilation
6 Lack of lubrication (or lubrication breakdown) has a number of interrelated causes.
Excessive heat (which thins the oil), overloading
(which squeezes the oil from the bearing face)
and oil leakage (from excessive bearing
clearances, worn oil p u m p or high engine
speeds) all contribute to lubrication breakdown.
Blocked oil passages, which can be the result
of misaligned oil holes in a bearing shell, will
also oil-starve a bearing, and destroy it.
7 When lack of lubrication is the cause of
bearing failure, the bearing material is wiped
or e x t r u d e d f r o m the steel backing of the
bearing. Temperatures may increase to the
point where the steel backing turns blue from
overheating.
8 Driving habits can have a definite effect on
bearing life. Full-throttle, low-speed operation
(labouring the engine) puts very high loads on
bearings, tending to squeeze out the oil film.
These loads cause the bearings to flex, which
p r o d u c e s fine c r a c k s in the bearing face
(fatigue failure). Eventually, the bearing
material will loosen in pieces, and tear away
from the steel backing.
FATIGUE FAILURE
CRATERS OR P O C K E T S
SCRATCHED BY DIRT
DIRT E M B E D D E D INTO
BEARING MATERIAL
EXCESSIVE WEAR
OVERLAY WIPED OUT
IMPROPER SEATING
BRIGHT
(POLISHED) SECTIONS
LACK OF OIL
OVERLAY WIPED OUT
TAPERED JOURNAL
RADIUS
RIDE
9.1 Typical b e a r i n g failures
9 Short-distance driving leads to corrosion of
bearings, because insufficient engine heat is
p r o d u c e d to drive off the c o n d e n s e d water
and corrosive gases. These products collect in
the engine oil, forming acid and sludge. As the
oil is carried to the engine bearings, the acid
attacks and'corrodes the bearing material.
10 Incorrect bearing installation during
engine assembly will lead to bearing failure as
well. Tight-fitting bearings leave insufficient
bearing running'clearance, and will result in oil
starvation. Dirt or foreign particles t r a p p e d
behind a bearing shell result in high spots on
the bearing, which lead to failure.
11 Do not touch any shell's bearing surface
with your fingers during reassembly; there is a
risk of scratching the delicate surface, or of
depositing particles of dirt on it.
12 As m e n t i o n e d at the beginning of this
Section, the bearing shells should be renewed
as a matter of course during engine overhaul;
not to do so is false economy.
Selection
13 Main and big-end bearings are available in
standard sizes and a range of undersizes to
suit reground
crankshafts
- refer
to
Specifications
for details. The
engine
reconditioner will select the correct bearing
shells for machined crankshaft.
14 The running clearances can be checked
w h e n the crankshaft is refitted with its new
bearings.
10 Engine overhaul reassembly sequence
1 Before reassembly begins, ensure that all
new parts have been obtained, and that all
necessary tools are available. Read through the
entire procedure to familiarise yourself with the
work involved, and to ensure that all items
necessary for reassembly of the engine are at
hand. In addition to all normal tools and
materials, thread-locking c o m p o u n d will be
needed. A tube of sealant will also be required
for the joint faces that are fitted without gaskets.
2 In order to save time and avoid problems,
engine reassembly can be carried out in the
following order:
a) Crankshaft (Section 11).
b) Piston/connecting
rod assemblies
(Section 5).
c) Oil pump (relevant Part of Chapter 2).
d) Sump (relevant Part of Chapter 2).
e) Flywheel (relevant Part of Chapter 2).
f) Cylinder head (relevant Part of Chapter 2).
g) Coolant pump (see Chapter 3)
h) Timing belt tensioner and sprockets, and
timing belt (relevant Part of Chapter 2).
I) Engine external
components.
3 At this stage, all engine components should
be absolutely clean and dry, w i t h all faults
repaired. The components should be laid out
on a completely clean work surface.
2E»20 Engine removal and overhaul procedures
Crankshaft
- initial
refitting
1 Crankshaft refitting is t h e first stage of
engine reassembly following overhaul. At this
point, it is a s s u m e d that t h e crankshaft,
cylinder block/crankcase and bearings have
been cleaned, inspected and reconditioned or
renewed.
2 Place the cylinder block on a clean, level
w o r k surface, w i t h the c r a n k c a s e facing
u p w a r d s . Where necessary, unbolt t h e
bearing c a p s and lay t h e m out in order t o
ensure correct reassembly. If they are still in
place, r e m o v e t h e bearing shells f r o m the
caps a n d t h e c r a n k c a s e , a n d w i p e o u t t h e
inner surfaces with a clean rag - they must be
kept spotlessly clean. Clean the bearing c a p
bolts, a n d c h e c k their t h r e a d s for signs of
damage.
3 Clean the rear surface of the new bearing
shells with a rag, and fit them on the bearing
saddles. Ensure that the orientation lugs on
the shells e n g a g e w i t h t h e recesses in t h e
saddles, and that t h e oil holes are correctly
aligned (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Do not hammer or
otherwise force the bearing shells into place.
It is critically important that the surfaces of the
bearings are kept free f r o m d a m a g e a n d
contamination.
4 On 1.2 litre engines, locate the bearing shell
with t h e thrust flanges into t h e centre main
bearing position.
11.5 Fitting t h e plain c e n t r e b e a r i n g o n a
1.6 litre e n g i n e
11.6 Fitting t h e c r a n k s h a f t t h r u s t w a s h e r s
o n a 1.6 litre e n g i n e
5 On 1.6 litre engines, t h e centre main
bearings are plain - ie they d o not have
lubrication grooves (see illustration).
6 On engines e x c e p t t h e 1.2 litre, fit t h e
crankshaft t h r u s t w a s h e r s t o their relevant
locations (where necessary, stick t h e m in
position w i t h a little grease). O n 1.6 litre
engines, the washers are fitted to No 5 main
bearing; on the 1.4 and 1.8 litre engines, the
washers fit a r o u n d t h e centre main bearing
(see illustration).
11 Wipe off t h e rear surfaces of t h e new
lower half main bearing shells and fit them t o
the main bearing caps, again ensuring that the
locating lugs engage correctly.
12 Fit the caps in their correct locations on
the bearing saddles, using the manufacturers
m a r k i n g s as a guide. Ensure that they are
correctly orientated - the caps should be fitted
such that the recesses for the bearing shell
locating lugs are on the same side as those in
the bearing saddle.
7 Give the newly-fitted bearing shells and the
crankshaft journals a final clean w i t h a rag.
Check that the oil holes in the crankshaft are
free f r o m dirt, as any left here will b e c o m e
e m b e d d e d in t h e new bearings w h e n t h e
engine is first started.
8 Carefully lay the crankshaft in t h e
c r a n k c a s e , taking care not t o d i s l o d g e t h e
bearing shells.
Main bearing
check
running
clearance
9 When the crankshaft a n d bearings are
refitted, a clearance must exist between them
to allow lubricant to circulate. This clearance
is impossible to check using feeler blades, but
a p r o d u c t called Plastigauge can b e u s e d .
This consists of a thin strip of soft plastic that
is crushed b e t w e e n the bearing shells a n d
journals when the bearing caps are tightened
up. The w i d t h of the c r u s h e d strip then
indicates the size of the clearance g a p .
10 Cut off five pieces of Plastigauge, just
shorter than t h e length of the crankshaft
journal. Lay a piece on each journal, in line
with its axis (see illustration).
13 On engines e x c e p t t h e 1.2 litre, fit t h e
remaining crankshaft thrustwashers, using the
information in paragraph 6.
14 Insert and tighten the main bearing bolts
until they are all correctly t o r q u e d . Do not
allow the crankshaft to rotate at all whilst the
Plastigauge is in place. Progressively unbolt
the bearing caps a n d remove t h e m , taking
care not t o dislodge the Plastigauge.
15 The width of the crushed Plastigauge can
now be measured, using the scale provided
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Use t h e correct scale, as
b o t h imperial a n d metric are p r i n t e d . This
measurement indicates the running clearance
- compare it with that listed in Specifications.
16 If the clearance is outside the tolerance, it
may be due to dirt or debris trapped under the
bearing surface; try cleaning them again and
repeat the clearance check. If the results are
still u n a c c e p t a b l e , r e - c h e c k the journal
diameters and the bearing sizes. Note that if
the Plastigauge is thicker at one e n d , t h e
journals m a y be t a p e r e d a n d as s u c h , will
require regrinding.
17 When y o u are satisfied that t h e
clearances are correct, carefully remove the
remains of the Plastigauge from the journals
a n d bearing faces. Use a soft, plastic or
wooden scraper, as anything metallic is likely
to damage the surfaces.
Crankshaft
11.10 Lay a p i e c e of Plastigauge o n e a c h
j o u r n a l , in line w i t h t h e c r a n k s h a f t axis
11.15 M e a s u r e t h e w i d t h of t h e c r u s h e d
Plastigauge, u s i n g t h e scale p r o v i d e d
- final
refitting
18 Lift t h e crankshaft out of the crankcase.
Wipe off t h e surfaces of t h e bearings in t h e
c r a n k c a s e a n d the bearing c a p s . Where
a p p l i c a b l e (see paragraph 6), fit t h e thrust
w a s h e r s , using grease t o hold t h e m in
position. Ensure they are seated correctly in
the machined recesses, with the oil grooves
facing outwards
Engine removal and overhaul procedures 2E»21
11.19 L u b r i c a t e t h e c r a n k c a s e m a i n
b e a r i n g shells
11.20 Fitting t h e c r a n k s h a f t
11.21 L u b r i c a t e t h e m a i n bearing c a p
shells - plain No 3 shell o n a 1.6 litre
engine shown
19 Liberally coat the bearing shells in the
c r a n k c a s e w i t h clean engine oil (see
illustration).
20 Lower the crankshaft into position in the
crankcase (see illustration).
21 Lubricate the lower bearing shells in the
main bearing caps with clean engine oil. Make
sure that the locating lugs on the shells are
still engaged with the corresponding recesses
in the caps (see illustration).
the front oil seal flange, using a new seal refer to Chapter 2C.
25 Check that the crankshaft rotates freely
by turning it by manually. If resistance is felt,
re-check the running clearances, as described
above.
26 Carry out a c h e c k of the crankshaft
endfloat as d e s c r i b e d in S e c t i o n 6. If the
thrust surfaces of the crankshaft have been
c h e c k e d and new thrust bearings (or main
bearings, on the 1.2 litre engine) have been
f i t t e d , then the endfloat should be within
specification.
27 Refit the pistons and connecting rods as
described in Section 5.
28 Refit the flywheel/driveplate, oil p u m p and
pick-up tube, and sump with reference to the
relevant Parts of Chapter 2. Where applicable,
refit the oil spill tube to the base of the engine
before fitting the sump.
1 With the engine refitted in the vehicle,
d o u b l e - c h e c k the engine oil and coolant
levels. Make a final check that everything has
been reconnected, and that there are no tools
or rags left in the engine compartment.
2 Remove the spark plugs, then remove the
fuel p u m p fuse or relay (refer to Chapter 12 if
necessary).
3 Turn the engine on the starter until the oil
pressure w a r n i n g light g o e s out. Refit the
spark plugs, and reconnect the ECU.
4 Start the engine, noting that this may take a
little longer than usual, due to the fuel system
components having been disturbed.
5 While the engine is idling, c h e c k for fuel,
water and oil leaks. Don't be alarmed if there
are s o m e o d d smells and s m o k e from parts
getting hot and burning off oil deposits.
6 Assuming all is well, keep the engine idling
until hot water is felt circulating through the
top hose, then switch off the engine.
7 Recheck the oil and coolant levels as
d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 1, and t o p - u p as
necessary.
8 There is no need to re-tighten the cylinder
head bolts once the engine has first run after
reassembly.
9 If new pistons, rings or crankshaft bearings
have been fitted, the engine must be treated as
new, and run-in for the first 500 miles (800 km).
Do not operate the engine at full-throttle, or
allow it to labour at low engine speeds in any
gear. It is recommended that the oil and filter
be changed at the end of this period.
11.22b . . . a n d loosely fit t h e retaining
bolts
11.23 T i g h t e n t h e m a i n b e a r i n g c a p b o l t s
to the specified torque
22 Fit the main bearing caps in the correct
order and orientation. Lightly oil the bearing
c a p bolt t h r e a d s , then insert the bolts, and
hand-tighten them only (see illustrations).
23 W o r k i n g f r o m the centre bearing c a p
o u t w a r d s , tighten the main bearing bolts to
their specified torque (see illustration). On all
engines e x c e p t the 1.6 litre, the bolts are
tightened in two stages - tighten all the bolts
to the Stage 1 setting before tightening further
t h r o u g h the specified angle (use an anglemeasuring gauge if possible, to ensure
accuracy).
24 Fit a new oil seal to the crankshaft rear oil
seal housing (or fit a new oil seal housing, as
applicable). A p p l y grease to the seal lips.
Where applicable, tighten the housing bolts
securely, ensuring that the e d g e of the
housing is kept s q u a r e to the e d g e of the
crankcase. On 1.6 litre engines, similarl^f/efit
11.22a Fit t h e m a i n bearing c a p s .
12 Engine initial start-up after
overhaul and reassembly
1
2D-1
Chapter 2 Part D:
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Contents
Auxiliary drivebelt - removal and refitting
See Chapter 1
Camshaft cover - removal and refitting
6
Camshaft oil seals - renewal
7
Camshafts - removal and refitting
See Chapter 2E, Section 4
Crankshaft oil seals - renewal
8
Cylinder compression test
3
Cylinder head - dismantling and overhaul
See Chapter 2E
Cylinder head - removal and refitting
9
Engine mountings - inspection and renewal
11
Engine oil and filter - renewal
See Chapter 1
Engine oil level - check
See Weekly Checks
Flywheel - removal, inspection and refitting
10
General information
1
Location of TDC on No 1 cylinder
2
Oil pressure switch - removal and refitting
14
Oil pump and pick-up tube - removal and refitting
13
Sump - removal and refitting
12
Timing belt and covers - removal and refitting
4
Timing belt sprockets and tensioner - removal and refitting
5
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
|k
novice with little
expenence
Fairty easy, suitable
| k
for beginner with
g^
s o m e experience
g^
Difficult, suitable for
| k
Very difficult,
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
3^
suitable for expert DIY 3 ^
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
or professional
Fairty d i f f i c u l t
^
g^
Specifications
General
Engine code*
Bore
Stroke
Compression ratio
Firing order
No 1 cylinder location
* N o t e : See 'Vehicle identification
numbers'
182A2.000
82.0 m m
82.7 m m
10.3:1
1-3-4-2
Timing (right-hand) end of engine
for the location of code marking on the engine.
Lubrication system
Oil pump type
Outer rotor-to-housing clearance
Axial clearance
Oil pressure (at operating temperature)
Bi-rotor driven from front of crankshaft
0.080 to 0.186 m m
0.025 to 0.070 m m
15 psi at idle, 50 to 72 psi at 4000 rpm
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibf ft
Air conditioning compressor mounting bracket-to-block
Alternator mounting bracket-to-block:
M8 bolts
M10 bolts
Big-end (connecting rod) bearing cap bolts:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Camshaft bearing caps
Camshaft cover
Camshaft sprocket bolt
Coolant pipe to block
Crankshaft pulley-to-sprocket bolts
Crankshaft sensor
Crankshaft sprocket bolt (left-hand thread)
Cylinder head:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
50
37
25
70
18
52
25
Angle-tighten a further 60°
15
9
120
9
32
9
360
18
20
40
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Angle-tighten a further 90°
11
7
89
7
24
7
266
15
30
g^
2D»2 1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Torque wrench settings (continued)
Nm
Engine/transmission mountings:
Mounting brackets-to-transmission:
50
M10 bolts
80
M12 bolts
Mounting through-bolts:
Front mounting
38
Left- and right-hand mountings
80
Reaction rod through-bolt
25
Mountings to bodyshell
32
Right-hand mounting brackets-to-block
70
Right-hand mounting reaction rod to strut bracket
50
Exhaust manifold nuts
25
160
Flywheel*
Inlet manifold nuts
25
Knock sensor
25
Main bearing cap bolts:
Stage 1
25
Stage 2
Angle-tighten a further 100°
Oil pressure switch
32
Oil p u m p bolts:
M6bolt
9
25
M8bolt
Sump bolts:
M6bolt
9
25
M8bolt
25
Thermostat housing bolts
Timing belt covers
9
Timing belt fixed guide pulley bolt
25
Timing belt tensioner nut
25
'Although not specifically recommended by FIAT, use new bolts and locking fluid.
1 General information
Using this
Chapter
Chapter 2 is divided into five Parts; A to E.
Repair operations that can be carried out with
the engine in the car are described in Parts A
to D. Part E covers the removal of the
engine/transmission as a unit, and describes
the
engine
dismantling
and
overhaul
procedures.
In Parts A to D, the a s s u m p t i o n is m a d e
that the engine is installed in the car, with all
ancillaries connected. If the engine has been
r e m o v e d for overhaul, t h e
preliminary
dismantling information which precedes each
operation may be ignored.
Engine
description
The 1.8 litre engine is a w a t e r - c o o l e d ,
d o u b l e overhead c a m s h a f t , in-line fourcylinder unit, with cast-iron cylinder block and
aluminium-alloy cylinder head. The engine is a
16-valve unit, with t w o inlet valves and t w o
exhaust valves per cylinder. The engine is
mounted transversely at the front of the car,
with the transmission bolted to the left-hand
side of the engine.
The cylinder head carries the c a m s h a f t s ,
w h i c h are driven by a t o o t h e d t i m i n g belt.
Each camshaft runs in six bearings. The
cylinder head also houses the inlet and
exhaust valves, w h i c h are c l o s e d by single
coil springs, and which run in guides pressed
into the cylinder head. The camshafts actuate
the valves directly via hydraulic t a p p e t s
m o u n t e d in the cylinder head. The cylinder
head contains integral oilways w h i c h supply
and lubricate the tappets.
The crankshaft is s u p p o r t e d by five main
bearings, and endfloat is controlled by thrust
washers fitted either side of the centre main
bearing.
Engine coolant is circulated by a p u m p ,
driven by the t i m i n g belt. For details of the
cooling system, refer to Chapter 3.
Lubricant is circulated under pressure by a
pump, driven from the front of the crankshaft.
Oil is drawn from the s u m p through a strainer,
and then f o r c e d t h r o u g h an externallym o u n t e d , replaceable s c r e w - o n filter. From
there, it is distributed to the cylinder head,
where it lubricates the camshaft journals and
tappets, and also to the crankcase, where it
lubricates the main bearings, connecting rod
big and small-ends, gudgeon pins and cylinder
bores. Four jets mounted on the base of the
crankcase spray oil onto the undersides of the
pistons, to aid cooling.
N o t e : Several components are secured by
Ribe bolts, which are similar in appearance to
Torx types, but require different tools. A set of
Ribe sockets can be obtained from good tool
stockists. Among the components
affected
are the camshaft cover, sump and cylinder
head.
ibf ft
37
59
28
59
18
24
52
37
18
118
18
18
18
24
7
18
7
18
18
7
18
18
Repair operations
the engine in the
possible
car
with
The following work can be carried out with
the engine in the car:
a) Auxiliary drivebelt - removal and refitting
(see Chapter 1).
b) Camshafts - removal and refitting*.
c) Camshaft oil seals - renewal.
d) Camshaft sprockets - removal and
refitting.
ej Coolant pump - removal and refitting
(refer to Chapter 3).
fj Crankshaft oil seals - renewal.
g) Crankshaft sprocket - removal and
refitting.
h) Cylinder head - removal and refitting.
i) Engine mountings - inspection and
renewal.
j) Oil pump and pickup assembly - removal
and refitting,
k) Sump.
I) Timing belt, sprockets and cover removal, inspection and refitting.
'Cylinder head dismantling
procedures
are
detailed
in Chapter
2E, with details
of
camshaft and tappet removal.
Note: It is possible to remove the pistons and
connecting rods (after removing the cylinder
head and sump) without removing the engine.
However, this is not recommended.
Work of
this nature is more easily and
thoroughly
completed with the engine on the bench, as
described in Chapter 2E.
2D»1
Chapter 2 Part D:
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Contents
Auxiliary drivebelt - removal and refitting
See Chapter 1
Camshaft cover - removal and refitting
6
Camshaft oil seals - renewal
7
Camshafts - removal and refitting
See Chapter 2E, Section 4
Crankshaft oil seals - renewal
8
Cylinder compression test
3
Cylinder head - dismantling and overhaul
See Chapter 2E
Cylinder head - removal and refitting
9
Engine mountings - inspection and renewal
11
Engine oil and filter - renewal
See Chapter 1
Engine oil level - check
See Weekly Checks
Flywheel - removal, inspection and refitting
10
General information
1
Location of TDC on No 1 cylinder
2
Oil pressure switch - removal and refitting
14
Oil pump and pick-up tube - removal and refitting
13
Sump - removal and refitting
12
Timing belt and covers - removal and refitting
4
Timing belt sprockets and tensioner - removal and refitting
5
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
| k
novice with little
experience
Fairty easy, suitable
| k
for beginner with
g^
s o m e experience
Fairly difficult,
|k
suitable for competent
g^
DIY mechanic
^
g^
Difficult, suitable for
^
Very difficult,
^
experienced DIY
3^
suitable for expert DIY 3 ^
mechanic
g^
or professional
g^
Specifications
General
Engine code*
Bore
Stroke
Compression ratio
Firing order
No 1 cylinder location
* N o t e : See 'Vehicle identification
numbers'
182A2.000
82.0 m m
82.7 mm
10.3:1
1-3-4-2
Timing (right-hand) end of engine
for the location of code marking on the engine.
2D
Lubrication system
Oil pump type
Outer rotor-to-housing clearance
Axial clearance
Oil pressure (at operating temperature)
Bi-rotor driven from front of crankshaft
0.080 to 0.186 m m
0.025 to 0.070 m m
15 psi at idle, 50 to 72 psi at 4000 rpm
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibf ft
Air conditioning compressor mounting bracket-to-block
Alternator mounting bracket-to-block:
M8 bolts
M10 bolts
Big-end (connecting rod) bearing cap bolts:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Camshaft bearing caps
Camshaft cover
Camshaft sprocket bolt
Coolant pipe to block
Crankshaft pulley-to-sprocket bolts
Crankshaft sensor
Crankshaft sprocket bolt (left-hand thread)
Cylinder head:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
50
37
25
70
18
52
25
Angle-tighten a further 60°
15
9
120
9
32
9
360
18
20
40
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Angle-tighten a further 90°
11
7
89
7
24
7
266
15
30
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2D»3
Location of TDC on
No 1 cylinder
1 Remove the camshaft cover as described in
Section 6.
2 With the car parked on a level surface,
apply the handbrake and c h o c k the rear
wheels. Loosen the right-hand front wheel
bolts.
3 Raise the front of the car, rest it securely on
axle stands and remove the right-hand front
roadwheel.
4 Unscrew and release the fasteners, a n d
remove the wheelarch inner panel, t o gain
access to the crankshaft pulley.
5 Have an assistant turn the engine using a
spanner or socket on the crankshaft pulley
bolt. As this is done, place your hand over No 1
spark plug hole, and feel for pressure build-up.
6 Once pressure is felt, insert the shaft of a
large screwdriver (or, if available, a dial gauge
and probe) d o w n No 1 spark plug hole. When
TDC is r e a c h e d , the screwdriver will s t o p
rising (or the reading on the dial gauge will
stop increasing).
7 Once the screwdriver (or dial gauge
reading) starts to rise, continue turning the
engine until the crankshaft pulley timing mark
is aligned with the mark on the timing belt
lower cover (see illustration).
8 A further TDC mark is p r o v i d e d o n the
flywheel, and this can be viewed through the
aperture in the transmission bellhousing
(remove the aperture cover, where fitted) (see
illustrations). When the flywheel mark aligns
with the notch on the bellhousing, the engine
is set to T D C . This mark is quite difficult to
see, however, without further dismantling.
2.7 C a m s h a f t pulley t i m i n g m a r k a l i g n e d
w i t h m a r k o n t i m i n g belt l o w e r c o v e r
screws into the plug thread is to be preferred.
6 Have the assistant hold the throttle w i d e
o p e n , and crank the engine on the starter
motor; after one or t w o revolutions, the
c o m p r e s s i o n pressure s h o u l d build up to a
m a x i m u m figure, and then stabilise. Record
the highest reading obtained.
7 Repeat the test on the remaining cylinders,
recording the pressure in each.
8 All cylinders s h o u l d p r o d u c e very similar
pressures; any excessive difference indicates
the existence of a fault. Note that the
c o m p r e s s i o n should build up quickly in a
healthy engine; low compression on the first
stroke, f o l l o w e d by gradually increasing
pressure on s u c c e s s i v e strokes, indicates
worn piston rings. A low compression reading
on t h e first stroke, w h i c h d o e s not build up
during successive strokes, indicates leaking
valves or a b l o w n head gasket (a c r a c k e d
head could also be the cause).
2.8a R e m o v i n g t h e f l y w h e e l a p e r t u r e
c o v e r - seen w i t h t h e a i r f l o w m e t e r
removed
9 If the pressure in any cylinder is very low,
carry out the f o l l o w i n g test to isolate the
c a u s e . I n t r o d u c e a t e a s p o o n f u l of clean oil
into that cylinder through its spark plug hole
and repeat the test.
10 If the addition of oil temporarily improves
the compression pressure, this indicates that
bore or piston wear is responsible for the
pressure loss. No improvement suggests that
leaking or burnt valves, or a b l o w n head
gasket, may be to blame.
11 A low reading from two adjacent cylinders
is almost certainly due to the head gasket
having blown between them; the presence of
coolant in the engine oil will confirm this.
12 If one cylinder is about 20 percent lower
than the others and the engine has a slightly
rough idle, a worn camshaft lobe could be the
cause.
13 On completion of the test, refit the spark
plugs and restore the ignition and fuel systems.
9 The engine is now set at TDC on No 1 cylinder.
3 Cylinder compression test
1 When engine p e r f o r m a n c e is d o w n , or if
misfiring occurs which cannot be attributed to
the ignition or fuel s y s t e m s , a c o m p r e s s i o n
test can provide diagnostic clues as to the
engine's c o n d i t i o n . If the test is p e r f o r m e d
regularly, it can give warning of trouble before
any other symptoms become apparent.
2 The engine must be fully w a r m e d - u p to
normal operating t e m p e r a t u r e , the battery
must be fully charged, and all the spark plugs
must be removed (Chapter 1). The aid of an
assistant will also be required.
3 Disable
the
ignition
system
by
d i s c o n n e c t i n g the LT wiring plug to the
ignition coil.
4 To prevent possible damage to the catalytic
converter, depressurise and disable the fuel
injection system by removing the fuel p u m p
fuse or relay (see Chapter 4B, Section 7).
5 Fit a compression tester to the No 1 cylinder
spark plug hole - the t y p e of tester w h i c h
2.8b S h o w i n g f l y w h e e l a l i g n m e n t at T D C - also s h o w s c r a n k s h a f t s p r o c k e t a l i g n m e n t
with sump
2D«4 1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
4.7a R e m o v i n g o n e of t h e t i m i n g belt
cover bolts
4 Timing belt and covers removal and refitting
Note: If the timing belt is being removed, it is
a wise precaution
to check the condition of
the coolant pump at the same time (check for
signs of coolant leakage). This may avoid the
need to remove the timing belt again at a later
stage, should the coolant pump fail.
General
information
1 The function of the timing belt is to drive the
camshafts and coolant pump. Should the belt
slip or break in service, the valve timing will be
d i s t u r b e d and p i s t o n - t o - v a l v e c o n t a c t will
occur, resulting in serious engine damage.
2 For this reason, it is important that a new
timing belt is fitted at or before the specified
mileage (see Chapter 1). If the car has been
r
Jli
WW.
4.7b R e m o v i n g t h e t i m i n g belt c o v e r
4.9 R e m o v e t h e f o u r small b o l t s a n d t a k e
off t h e c r a n k s h a f t pulley
p u r c h a s e d s e c o n d - h a n d , and its history is
unknown, renewing the timing belt should be
treated as a priority.
3 FIAT garages use a number of special tools
to keep the camshaft s p r o c k e t s and
crankshaft s p r o c k e t (flywheel) at the TDC
position, since it is possible that the sprockets
may turn as the old belt is removed and the
new one fitted. If they turn independently, the
valve timing will be lost, and the engine will
not run properly w h e n restarted - w o r s e ,
piston-to-valve contact may occur.
4 In the absence of the special tools, great
care must be taken w h e n r e m o v i n g and
refitting the belt that the s p r o c k e t s do not
move. Marks may be found on the sprockets,
w h i c h align w i t h markings on the cylinder
head or oil pump housing. If none are present,
take care to m a k e your o w n , using typists
correction fluid or similar, b e f o r e removing
the belt.
5 If the special tools are not u s e d , the
procedure given below will suffice to change
the belt successfully, but if care is not taken
and the camshaft timing is slightly out, the
engine may not run very well on completion. It
is advisable to have a FIAT dealer confirm the
camshaft timing after a new belt is fitted, if the
special tools are not used.
6 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt, then remove
the spark plugs (refer to.Chapter 1).
7 Unbolt and remove the timing belt cover,
which is secured by a total of eight bolts (see
illustrations). T w o of the bolts are longer than
the rest - note their locations as they are
r e m o v e d . Recover the rubber gasket fitted
b e t w e e n the outer and inner covers, if it is
loose.
8 Set the engine to TDC as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 2, then e n g a g e t o p gear; if the
h a n d b r a k e is firmly a p p l i e d , this s h o u l d
prevent the crankshaft from moving.
9 Remove the four small Ribe bolts and take
off the crankshaft pulley (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Note that the pulley fits over a locating peg on
the crankshaft sprocket.
10 If the special holding tools are not
available, make your o w n sprocket alignment
marks as necessary before removing the belt
(see paragraph 4).
11 In particular, mark the relative positions of
the camshaft sprockets. When the engine is at
TDC, it should be found that the teeth on each
sprocket line up with each other at the point
where the sprockets are closest - if one tooth
on each s p r o c k e t is m a r k e d for horizontal
alignment, this can be used to c o n f i r m the
TDC position. Alternatively, refit the camshaft
cover, and mark each sprocket at the top, in
relation to the e d g e of the cover (see
illustration).
12 The crankshaft s p r o c k e t should also be
m a r k e d for position, if no timing marks are
evident. The s p r o c k e t is keyed to the
crankshaft, so can only be fitted in one
position, but a timing mark would be useful as
confirmation. When the engine is at TDC, the
locating peg for the crankshaft pulley should
be perpendicular to the s u m p mating flange
(see illustrations).
4.12b . . . s h o u l d be a l i g n e d vertically w i t h
i n d e n t in s u m p ( p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o s u m p
flange)
4.12c W e m a d e a l i g n m e n t m a r k s b e t w e e n
t h e s p r o c k e t a n d oil p u m p f l a n g e
Removal
4.11 M a r k t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t s for TDC
position
4.12a L o c a t i n g p e g in c r a n k s h a f t s p r o c k e t
(arrowed)...
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2D»5
4.13a R e m o v i n g No 3 e x h a u s t c a m s h a f t
bearing cap
13 The FIAT tools (1860875000) for holding
the c a m s h a f t s stationary are modified No 2
inlet (rear) and No 3 exhaust camshaft bearing
caps w h i c h locate over their respective
camshaft lobes, preventing rotation and
maintaining the camshaft timing. If available,
the tools are fitted after removing the
camshaft cover, as d e s c r i b e d in Section 6
(see illustrations).
14 The t o o l used to lock the flywheel
(1860898000) is a metal plate which is fitted
after removing the lower a c c e s s plate f r o m
the base of the flywheel. The tool engages the
flywheel ring gear teeth, and prevents the flywheel (and therefore, the crankshaft sprocket)
f r o m t u r n i n g . The s a m e effect c o u l d be
achieved by j a m m i n g a suitable screwdriver
blade in the flywheel ring gear. However, if the
p r o c e d u r e in paragraph 8 is f o l l o w e d , even
this should not be necessary.
15 Release the nut on the timing belt
tensioner, move the sprocket away from the
belt and retighten the nut to hold the sprocket
in the retracted position.
16 Slide the timing belt from the sprockets,
taking great care not to turn t h e m if locking
tools have not been used.
4.13b S h o w i n g FIAT special t o o l s f o r l o c k i n g a n d t i m i n g t h e c a m s h a f t s
while the retaining bolt is loosened, make up a
tool as described in Section 5.
19 If the special locking tools are not being
used, it is not advisable to loosen the camshaft
sprocket bolts unless absolutely necessary. If
the timing belt teeth will not engage the c a m shaft sprockets satisfactorily, it is permissible
to loosen the bolts and turn the sprockets very
slightly, both in the same direction.
20 Fit the belt so that the arrows on the belt
(where applicable) point in the direction of
engine rotation. Also where a p p l i c a b l e , the
lines painted on the belt should coincide with
marks on the sprockets.
Refitting
21 Engage the timing belt with the crankshaft
sprocket first, then place it around the fixed
guide pulley, exhaust (front) camshaft
s p r o c k e t , inlet camshaft s p r o c k e t and the
tensioner s p r o c k e t . Finally, slip the belt
around the coolant p u m p s p r o c k e t . Ensure
that any slack in the belt is on the tensioner
side of the belt run (see illustration).
17 When refitting the new belt, first m a k e
sure that the sprocket timing marks are still in
alignment.
18 If the special locking tools are being used,
the camshaft s p r o c k e t bolts should be
l o o s e n e d to allow the s p r o c k e t s to m o v e
slightly as the t i m i n g belt is refitted and
tensioned. To hold each sprocket stationary
22 Release the tensioner nut and push the
sprocket against the belt, using the raised rib on
the tensioner backplate. Inserting an 8 m m bolt
into the hole next to the tensioner will provide a
levering point. This hole could also be used to
locate the tool we made from an 8 m m bolt, two
nuts and an oversize washer (see illustrations
b e l o w a n d Tool Tip overleaf).
4.22a Rib (1) o n t e n s i o n e r b a c k p l a t e a n d
hole (2) f o r inserting b o l t or t o o l
4.22b Levering against a n 8 m m bolt
V
\
\
x
1
JJ
© - Q
(D—|.
H31444
V__
77
CD
4.21 Order of f i t t i n g t h e t i m i n g belt over
the sprockets
1
2
3
Crankshaft
sprocket
Fixed guide pulley
Exhaust camshaft
sprocket
4
5
6
Inlet camshaft
sprocket
Tensioner
Coolant pump
sprocket
4.22c W o r k s h o p t o o l inserted in hole
2D»6 1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Refitting
TOOL
6 Hold the t i m i n g belt aside, then slide the
tensioner over the mounting stud and secure
loosely with the nut. Ensuring that all slack is
taken out of the belt, engage the timing belt
with tensioner sprocket.
Tip
7 Set the belt tension w i t h reference to
Section 4, paragraphs 22 to 26.
8 Refit the timing belt cover (and gasket) and
tighten the bolts.
9 Refit the auxiliary drivebelt as described in
Chapter 1.
The timing belt tensioning
tool
consists
of an 8 mm bolt, two 8 mm nuts, and an
oversize washer. Clamp the washer so
that it is off-centre,
using the two nuts
VERY firmly tightened
(use two
smaller
washers either side of the main washer,
if wished).
The short end of the bolt
locates in the hole already shown. The
off-centre
washer acts like an
eccentric
against the tensioner rib - as the bolt is
turned, the washer bears on the rib and
pushes the tensioner, thus
tensioning
the timing belt
23 Initially, the belt should be set to the
maximum tension possible using reasonable
force. Tighten the tensioner nut securely.
24 If the camshaft s p r o c k e t bolts were
loosened, tighten t h e m to the specified
t o r q u e , holding each s p r o c k e t in the s a m e
way as when they were loosened.
25 Remove any locking tools u s e d , a n d / o r
select neutral. Using a spanner or socket on
the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the engine
t h r o u g h t w o c o m p l e t e turns in the normal
direction of rotation. Check (as far as
possible) that the sprocket timing marks come
back into alignment.
26 Loosen the tensioner nut, and align the
pointer with the small hole on the tensioner
backplate (see illustration). Hold the tensioner
in this position, and tighten the tensioner nut to
the specified torque.
27 Refitting the c o m p o n e n t s r e m o v e d for
access is a reversal of removal.
5 Timing belt sprockets
and tensioner removal a n d refitting
Timing
belt
I
Camshaft
Removal
4.26 T i m i n g belt t e n s i o n e r details p o i n t e r (1) m u s t align w i t h hole (2)
fully
engaged
with
the
camshaft,
crankshaft
and coolant
pump
sprockets
during the following
procedure,
it is not
necessary
to align the timing TDC marks.
However if any doubt exists, read
through
the full procedure
given in Section
4,
noting the advice on setting to TDC, and
ensuring
that the timing is not lost. The
timing belt does not have to be
removed
for this procedure,
but if the belt slips from
the sprockets,
the timing could be lost.
3 Loosen the nut on the timing belt tensioner
and move the pulley away from the belt (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If necessary, keep the belt
engaged with the sprockets using cable-ties,
elastic bands or string.
4 C o m p l e t e l y unscrew the nut, recover the
washer, and slide the tensioner off the
mounting stud.
Inspection
10 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4. In addition to the alignment marks
suggested in Section 4, it is useful to have a
mark between each sprocket and the cylinder
head - m a k e your o w n if none are present,
particularly if the camshaft holding tools
described in Section 4 are not available.
11 The camshaft sprocket must now be held
stationary while the retaining bolt is loosened;
if the sprocket turns very far, there is a risk
that the valves will hit the pistons. Make up a
t o o l and engage it w i t h the holes in the
sprocket (see Tool T i p below).
12 Alternatively, pass a rod t h r o u g h one of
the holes in the camshaft sprocket to prevent
it rotating. Position a pad of rag or a piece of
w o o d under the rod to avoid d a m a g i n g the
cylinder head.
13 Unscrew the bolt, and slide the sprocket
from the end of the camshaft. Note the integral
location key on the inner face of the sprocket.
Inspection
14 With the sprockets removed, examine the
TOOL
5 Wipe the tensioner clean, but d o not use
excessive amounts of solvent, as these may
contaminate the bearings. Spin the tensioner
pulley on its hub by hand. Stiff movement or
excessive freeplay is an indication of severe
wear; the tensioner is not a serviceable
c o m p o n e n t , and should be renewed if its
condition is suspect, or as a precaution at the
time of a major engine overhaul.
tensioner
Removal
1 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt as described
in Chapter 1.
2 Unbolt and remove the timing belt cover,
which is secured by a total of eight bolts. Two
of the bolts are longer than the rest - note
their locations as they are removed. Recover
the rubber gasket fitted b e t w e e n the outer
and inner covers, if it is loose.
Caution:
Provided
the timing belt is kept
sprockets
5.3 T i m i n g belt t e n s i o n e r - s e c u r i n g nut
arrowed
To make a camshaft
sprocket
holding
tool, obtain two lengths of steel
strip
about 6 mm thick by 30 mm wide or
similar, one 600 mm long, the
other
200 mm long (all dimensions
approximate). Bolt the two strips together
to
form a forked end, leaving the bolt slack
so that the shorter strip can pivot freely.
At the end of each 'prong' of the fork,
secure a bolt with a nut and a locknut,
to act as the fulcrums; these will engage
with the cut-outs
in the sprocket,
and
should protrude by about 30 mm.
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2D»7
- d o not lubricate the t h r e a d s . It is not
advisable to re-use the old bolt, given the
extremely high torque to which it is tightened.
26 Fit the new bolt and washer, tightening the
bolt to the specified torque while holding the
crankshaft stationary using the m e t h o d
described in" paragraph 20. Also bear in mind
the advice in paragraph 2 1 .
27 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
camshaft oil seals for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 7 and renew them.
15 Check the sprocket teeth for damage.
16 W i p e clean the s p r o c k e t and c a m s h a f t
mating surfaces.
Refitting
17 Locate the s p r o c k e t on the end of the
camshaft, then refit the bolt and washer and
tighten to the specified torque while holding
the camshaft stationary using the m e t h o d
described previously.
18 Align the marks m a d e b e t w e e n the
camshaft sprockets and cylinder head, then
refit the timing belt as described in Section 4.
Crankshaft
sprocket
Removal
19 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4. It is essential that an alignment
mark is made between the sprocket and the
engine, to preserve the t i m i n g - make your
own if none are present.
20 Working beneath the engine, unbolt and
remove the flywheel lower cover, then hold
the flywheel stationary, preferably using a tool
which engages the flywheel starter ring gear
(see S e c t i o n 10). Alternatively, have an
assistant engage a w i d e - b l a d e d screwdriver
with the starter ring gear.
21 U n s c r e w
the
crankshaft
sprocket
retaining bolt - this is t i g h t e n e d to a
particularly high torque, so ensure that the car
is adequately s u p p o r t e d . Use only g o o d quality,
close-fitting
tools,
and
take
precautions against personal injury, especially
when the bolt eventually loosens (wear gloves
Fixed guide
5.29 T i m i n g belt f i x e d g u i d e pulley
to p r o t e c t your hands). The bolt has a lefth a n d t h r e a d - ie it unscrews c l o c k w i s e .
22 Slide the s p r o c k e t off the end of the
crankshaft. If it is tight, r e m o v e it using a
puller or a pair of suitable screwdrivers. The
sprocket may have an integral location key on
its inner face, or a separate key which locates
in a groove in the crankshaft nose. Recover
the spacer fitted behind the sprocket.
Inspection
23 With the sprocket removed, examine the
crankshaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 8 and renew it.
24 W i p e clean the sprocket and crankshaft
mating surfaces. Check the sprocket teeth for
damage.
Refitting
25 Slide the s p r o c k e t and spacer o n t o the
crankshaft, making sure the sprocket engages
the integral key or separate key. Fit a new bolt
Removal
28 Remove the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
29 Loosen and remove the pulley bolt and its
washer, and take off the pulley (see
illustration).
Inspection
30 Check the pulley for any sign of damage,
and check that it spins freely, with no sign of
roughness. Wipe the pulley clean before
fitting.
Refitting
31 Offer the pulley up to the engine, and
secure with the retaining bolt and washer.
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
32 Refit the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
6 Camshaft cover removal and refitting
^
|S
Removal
1 Unscrew the t w o bolts securing the plastic
cover at the left-hand end of the cylinder
head,
and
remove
the
cover
(see
illustrations).
2 Disconnect the breather hose from the lefthand end of the camshaft cover, then
unscrew the retaining bolt and r e m o v e the
breather pipe stub from the end of the cover
(see illustrations).
3 Unclip the wiring plugs from the bracket at
the left-hand end of the cover, and lay them to
one side (note that, unless further w o r k is
being carried out, there should be no need to
separate the wiring plugs) (see illustration).
6.1a U n s c r e w t h e t w o b o l t s ( a r r o w e d ) . . .
6.2a U n s c r e w t h e retaining b o l t .
pulley
6.2b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e b r e a t h e r pipe
stub
6.3 Unclip t h e w i r i n g p l u g s f r o m t h e e n d of
the cover
2D»8 1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
6.4 R e m o v i n g o n e of t h e Allen s c r e w s
u n d e r t h e oil filler c a p
6.5 R e m o v i n g t h e e n g i n e t o p c o v e r
6.6 D i s c o n n e c t i n g No 1 coil w i r i n g p l u g
4 Unscrew and remove the oil filler cap, and
remove the t w o Allen s c r e w s c o n c e a l e d
underneath (see illustration).
5 Remove the six main bolts securing the
engine top cover, then lift the cover away (see
illustration).
6 Label the ignition coil connector plugs for
position (No 1 is at the timing belt end of the
engine),
then
disconnect
them
(see
illustration).
7 Ensuring that they are marked for position,
remove each of the ignition coils by
u n s c r e w i n g the t w o m o u n t i n g bolts and
pulling them upwards off the spark plugs (see
illustrations).
and one in the centre (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Progressively unscrew the bolts in a diagonal
s e q u e n c e . When all the bolts are loose,
remove them, noting their locations, as one is
longer than the rest.
11 Lift off t h e cover, and recover the main
seal (see illustration). If the cover sticks, do
not attempt to lever it off - instead free it by
working around the cover and tapping it lightly
with a soft-faced mallet.
6.7a U n s c r e w t h e t w o m o u n t i n g b o l t s . . .
6.8c . . . a n d m o v e t h e h a r n e s s clear of t h e
cover
8 Disconnect the earth lead between coil Nos
2 and 3, unscrew the t w o bolts securing the
harness b r a c k e t s , then m o v e the harness
aside (see illustrations).
9 On models with air conditioning, trace the
wiring back f r o m the c o m p r e s s o r , and
disconnect it at the wiring plug.
10 The camshaft cover is secured by a total
of nine Ribe bolts - eight around the sides,
12 Peel off the main rubber seal from around
the inside of the cover, and c h e c k its
c o n d i t i o n . It is permissible to re-use it,
p r o v i d e d it is not perished, c r u s h e d or
otherwise d a m a g e d . Clean the mating
surfaces of the cylinder head and camshaft
cover thoroughly.
13 C h e c k the c o n d i t i o n of the four round
seals fitted to the inside of the cover, which fit
over the ignition coils.
6.8a D i s c o n n e c t t h e c e n t r a l e a r t h lead . . .
6.8b . . . u n s c r e w t h e h a r n e s s b r a c k e t
bolts ( a r r o w e d ) . . .
6.10 R e m o v i n g t h e c a m s h a f t c o v e r b o l t s
6.11 Lifting off t h e c a m s h a f t c o v e r
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2D»9
14 If necessary, remove and clean the baffle
plate fitted inside the cover. If this is
particularly in need of cleaning, also check the
breather pipe s t u b w h i c h w a s removed in
paragraph 2. When refitting the s t u b , check
the c o n d i t i o n of the O-rings w h i c h seal the
stub to the cover, and renew if necessary.
Refitting
15 Locate the main seal in the cover, making
sure it is correctly seated in its groove (see
illustration).
16 Apply a little sealant to the joints between
the camshaft front bearing c a p (nearest the
sprockets) and the cylinder head (see
illustration).
17 Lower the cover into position on the
cylinder head, making sure the seals are not
displaced.
18 Insert the bolts and tighten t h e m
progressively in a diagonal sequence to the
specified torque.
19 Refit all components removed for access,
using a reversal of the removal procedure.
7 Camshaft oil seals renewal
§^
w
1
1
/
f°
°
4
10
4
V
V»<
\
\
°)
9
H22750
IN
9.35a Cylinder h e a d bolt t i g h t e n i n g s e q u e n c e
9.35b T i g h t e n i n g t h e cylinder head b o l t s
using a torque w r e n c h
9.37 A n g l e - t i g h t e n i n g t h e cylinder head
bolts
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
6 Place a trolley jack beneath the right-hand
side of the engine, with a block of w o o d on
the j a c k head. Raise the jack until it is
supporting the weight of the engine.
7 Working from below, unscrew the throughbolt (and washers) s e c u r i n g the engine
bracket to the mounting (see illustration).
8 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the engine bracket from the m o u n t i n g , then
remove the bolts securing the mounting to the
body, and remove it.
9 Locate the new mounting on the body, then
insert the mounting-to-body bolts and tighten
by hand.
10 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the mounting. Refit the through-bolt (and
washers) and tighten to the specified torque,
then tighten the mounting-to-body bolts.
11 Remove the trolley jack and lower the car
to the ground.
11.7 Engine r i g h t - h a n d m o u n t i n g (seen
f r o m below) - through-bolt arrowed
11.14a V i e w of r e a c t i o n r o d
Right-hand reaction rod
12 Raise the front of the car and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
13 Place a trolley jack beneath the right-hand
side of the engine, with a block of w o o d on
the jack h e a d . Raise the jack until it is
supporting the weight of the engine.
14 U n s c r e w the t h r o u g h - b o l t and nut from
the engine m o u n t i n g , and r e m o v e the bolt
securing the rod to the suspension strut
mounting plate (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Separate
the rod from the mounting on the engine and
suspension strut mounting, and remove it.
15 If r e q u i r e d , t h e engine m o u n t i n g and/or
strut m o u n t i n g plate can be u n b o l t e d and
removed. Note that the strut mounting plate is
Renewal
N o t e : Left and right
driver's seat.
are as seen from
the
Right-hand mounting
5 Raise the front of the car and support on
2D«12 1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures
11.14b R e a c t i o n r o d t h r o u g h - b o l t
(arrowed)
11.15 R e a c t i o n r o d s t r u t m o u n t i n g plate
b o l t s (arrowed)
27 Unscrew the t w o bolts securing the lefthand mounting to the subframe.
28 Lower the transmission sufficiently to
remove the mounting from the transmission
bracket.
29 Locate the new mounting in position, and
loosely refit the mounting-to-body bolts.
30 Raise the engine/transmission and refit
the through-bolt securing the bracket to the
m o u n t i n g . T i g h t e n t h e bolt t o t h e specified
t o r q u e , then tighten the m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y
bolts.
31 Remove the trolley jack and lower the car
to the ground.
12 Sump removal and refitting
Removal
1 Jack up the front of the car and support on
axle stands. Drain the engine oil as described
in Chapter 1.
11.19 Engine rear m o u n t i n g
11.26 Engine l e f t - h a n d m o u n t i n g
(seen f r o m below)
secured by two of the three suspension strut
mounting bolts (see illustration).
16 Refitting is a reversal of removal. Tighten
all bolts to the specified torque, then remove
the trolley j a c k and lower the car to the
ground.
21 Locate the new m o u n t i n g on the body,
then insert the m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y bolts and
tighten by hand.
22 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the m o u n t i n g . Refit the t h r o u g h - b o l t and
tighten to the specified torque, then tighten
the mounting-to-body bolts.
23 Remove the trolley jack and lower the car
to the ground.
Rear mounting
17 Raise the front of the car and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
18 Place a trolley jack beneath the engine/
transmission flange, with a block of w o o d on
the jack head. Raise the jack until it is supporting the weight of the engine and transmission.
19 W o r k i n g f r o m below, unscrew the
t h r o u g h - b o l t securing the bracket to the
mounting (see illustration).
20 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the bracket from the mounting, then remove the
two bolts securing the mounting to the body,
and remove it.
12.5a R i g h t - h a n d driveshaft s u p p o r t /
s h i e l d - t o - s u m p nut a n d bolt (arrowed)
Left-hand mounting
24 Raise the front of the car and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
25 Place a trolley jack beneath
the
transmission, with a block of w o o d on the jack
head. Raise the jack until it is supporting the
weight of the engine/transmission.
26 U n s c r e w the t h r o u g h - b o l t s e c u r i n g the
transmission bracket to the m o u n t i n g , and
recover the washers (see illustration).
12.5b A c c e s s t o o n e of t h e s u m p b o l t s
(arrowed) is h a m p e r e d by t h e driveshaft
2 Unscrew and remove the various fasteners,
and completely remove the engine undertray.
3 Remove
the
exhaust
downpipe
as
described in Chapter 4C, Section 5.
4 S u p p o r t the w e i g h t of the engine/transmission using a trolley jack w i t h a block of
w o o d under the e n g i n e - t o - t r a n s m i s s i o n
flange. Unbolt and remove the engine rear
mounting from the rear of the sump.
5 Removing the sump will be made easier by
removing the right-hand driveshaft and
s u p p o r t / s h i e l d , using the information in
Chapter 8. However, although access to one
of the s u m p bolts is hampered by the righthand driveshaft, it is sufficient to unbolt the
driveshaft support/shield from the rear of the
sump (see illustrations).
6 Unscrew the Ribe bolts, and pull the sump
downwards to remove it. The joint sealant will
require cutting with a sharp knife to release
the pan.
Refitting
7 Clean away all old gasket material, from the
sump pan and from the base of the block.
8 Apply a bead of RTV silicone instant gasket
3 m m in diameter to the s u m p flange. The
bead of sealant should pass around the inside
of the s u m p bolt holes. Also apply a little
sealant to the joints b e t w e e n the front and
rear oil seal flanges and the engine block.
9 Fit the sump, screw in the fixing bolts, and
tighten securely in a diagonal sequence.
10 Wait one hour for the gasket c o m p o u n d to
harden before filling with oil.
11 Lower the car to the ground and fill the
engine with oil (see Chapter 1). Check the oil
level after running the engine for a few
minutes, as described in Weekly checks.
1.8 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2D»13
^^^^^
13.8 Using an i m p a c t s c r e w d r i v e r t o
r e m o v e t h e oil p u m p rear c o v e r plate
screws
13 Oil pump and pick-up tube - §>>
removal and refitting
Removal
1 Drain the engine oil and remove the s u m p
as described in Section 12.
2 Unbolt and r e m o v e the oil p i c k - u p / f i l t e r
screen assembly. Note the sealing washer.
3 Unscrew and remove the oil filter cartridge
(see Chapter 1).
4 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
5 Remove the crankshaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Section 5.
6 Extract the oil p u m p fixing bolts, noting
their locations (there are nine bolts in all, of
three different lengths). Withdraw the p u m p
and remove the gasket.
Inspection
7 The oil p u m p incorporates a pressure relief
valve, which can be removed for examination
by depressing the spring plunger and pulling
out the keeper plate.
8 If p u m p wear is s u s p e c t e d , c h e c k the
gears in the f o l l o w i n g w a y . Extract the five
fixing s c r e w s and r e m o v e the rear c o v e r
plate. The s c r e w s are very t i g h t , and will
p r o b a b l y require the use of an i m p a c t
screwdriver (see illustration).
9 Check the clearance b e t w e e n the outer
gear and the p u m p housing using feeler
blades. Check the gear endfloat by placing a
s t r a i g h t - e d g e across the p u m p body, and
checking the gap between the straight-edge
13.9a M e a s u r i n g oil p u m p o u t e r g e a r - t o pump housing clearance
and gear face (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If the
clearances
are o u t s i d e
the
specified
tolerance, renew the oil p u m p complete.
10 If the pump is unworn, refit the rear cover
plate and tighten the screws fully.
11 Apply air pressure from a tyre pump to the
011 p u m p oil ducts, to clear any sludge or other
material. If any solvents are used, the p u m p
m u s t be allowed to dry t h o r o u g h l y before
refitting.
12 Prime the p u m p by pouring clean engine
oil into its inlet duct, at the same time turning
the oil p u m p inner gear with your fingers.
13 Lever out the oil seal, and drive a new one
squarely into the oil p u m p casing (see
illustration). Lubricate the oil seal lips.
Refitting
14 Clean all traces of old gasket f r o m the
p u m p and the mating surfaces on the cylinder
block.
15 Bolt the p u m p into position using a new
joint gasket. Insert the bolts into the positions
noted on removal, and tighten all to the
specified torques.
16 Bolt on the oil pick-up assembly using a
new sealing washer.
17 Refit
the
crankshaft
sprocket
as
described in Section 5.
18 Fit and tension the t i m i n g belt as
described in Section 4.
19 Fit the sump as described in Section 12.
20 Screw on a new oil filter cartridge, and fill
the engine with oil (see Chapter 1).
21 Run the engine for a few minutes, then
check and t o p - u p the oil level as described in
Weekly checks.
13.9b M e a s u r i n g oil p u m p gear e n d f l o a t
13.13 U s i n g a s o c k e t t o f i t a n e w oil seal
t o t h e oil p u m p
14 Oil pressure switch removal and refitting
§^
^
Removal
1 The oil pressure s w i t c h is located at the
rear of the cylinder head.
2 Disconnect the switch wiring connector.
3 U n s c r e w the s w i t c h f r o m the block, and
remove it.
4 Clean the switch location in the block as far
as possible. If the s w i t c h is to be refitted,
clean its threads.
5 Examine the switch for signs of cracking or
splits. If the top part of the switch is loose, this
is an early indication of impending failure.
Refitting
6 Apply a smear of sealant to the threads of
the s w i t c h , t h e n s c r e w it into place and
tighten to the specified torque.
7 Reconnect the switch wiring on completion.
201
Chapter 2 PartC:
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Contents
Auxiliary drivebelts - removal and refitting
See Chapter 1
Auxiliary shaft - removal and refitting
8
Auxiliary shaft oil seal - renewal
9
Camshaft housings and camshafts - removal and refitting
6
Camshaft oil seals - renewal
7
Crankshaft oil seals - renewal
10
Cylinder compression test
3
Cylinder head - dismantling and overhaul
See Chapter 2E
Cylinder head - removal and refitting
11
Engine mountings - inspection and renewal
13
Engine oil and filter - renewal
See Chapter 1
Engine oil level - check
See Weekly checks
Flywheel/driveplate - removal, inspection and refitting
12
General information
1
Location of TDC on No 1 cylinder
2
Oil pressure switch - removal and refitting
16
Oil pump and pick-up tube - removal and refitting
15
S u m p - removal and refitting
14
Timing belt and covers - removal and refitting
4
Timing belt sprockets and tensioner - removal and refitting
5
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
Fairly easy, suitable
novice with little
expenence
^
gy^
for beginner with
s o m e experience
§^
^
g^
D i f f i c u l t suitable for
| k
V e r y difficult,
suitable for competent g ^
Fairly d i f f i c u l t
|k
experienced DIY
2*
suitable for expert DIY
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
Specifications
General
Engine code*
Bore
Stroke
Compression ratio
Firing order
No 1 cylinder location
* N o t e : See 'Vehicle identification
numbers'
182A4.000
86.4 m m
67.4 m m
10.15:1
1-3-4-2
Timing (right-hand) end of engine
for the location of code marking on the engine.
Lubrication system
Oil pump type
Gear teeth-to-cover clearance
Gear side-to-cover clearance
Gear side-to-side play
Drive gear to driven gear clearance
Oil pressure (at operating temperature)
Gear type, driven from auxiliary shaft
0.110 to 0.180 m m
0.040 to 0.106 m m
0.015 to 0.048 m m
0.30 m m
15 psi at idle, to 54 psi at 4000 rpm
Camshafts
Drive
No of bearings
Camshaft bearing journal diameters:
No 1 bearing
No 2 bearing
No 3 bearing
No 4 bearing
No 5 bearing
Camshaft bearing journal running clearance
Camshaft endfloat (typical)
Toothed belt
5
29.944 to 29.960 m m
52.400 to 52.415 m m
52.800 to 52.815 m m
53.200 to 53.215 m m
53.600 to 53.615 m m
0.030 to 0.070 m m
0.15 to 0.34 m m
Camshaft housings
Camshaft bearing diameters:
No 1 bearing
N a 2 bearing
No 3 bearing
No 4 bearing
No 5 bearing
Hydraulic tappet diameter
Hydraulic tappet bore diameter
Hydraulic tappet running clearance
29.989 to 30.014 m m
52.445 to 52.470 m m
52.845 to 52.870 m m
53.245 to 53.270 m m
53.645 to 53.670 m m
32.959 to 32.975 m m
33.000 to 33.025 m m
0.025 to 0.066 m m
g^
or professional
2^
g^
202
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Torque wrench settings
Alternator mounting bracket to block
Auxiliary shaft sprocket bolt
Big-end (connecting rod) bearing c a p nuts
Camshaft housing bolts
Camshaft sprocket
Coolant pipe t o block
Crankcase breather pipe:
M8 bolts
M10 bolts
Nm
Ibf ft
50
48
80
51
15
115
25
37
35
59
38
11
85
18
23
48
220
17
35
162
Cylinder head:
Stage 1
20
Stage 2
40
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Stage 3
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Stage 4
Engine/transmission mountings:
Mounting brackets to transmission:
M10 bolts
50
85
M12 bolts
Mounting through-bolts:
M10 bolts
50
80
M12 bolts
32
Mountings t o bodyshell/subframe
Right-hand mounting bracket to block:
M8 bolts
25
48
M10 bolts
80
M12 bolts
30
Exhaust manifold nuts
83
Flywheel/driveplate**
Inlet manifold:
15
M7 bolts
30
M8 bolts
80
Main bearing c a p bolts
Oil pressure switch
32
Oil p u m p mounting bolts
25
Sump bolts
9
Thermostat housing bolts
25
Timing belt covers:
9
M6 bolts
25
M8 bolts
. ..
50
M10 bolts
87
Timing belt guide pulley bolt
Timing belt tensioner mounting plate:
M8 bolts
23
48
M10 bolts
23
Timing belt tensioner nut
'Although not specifically recommended by FIAT, use a new nut and locking fluid.
** Use locking fluid.
1 General information
all ancillaries c o n n e c t e d . If t h e engine has
been r e m o v e d for overhaul, t h e preliminary
dismantling information which precedes each
operation may be ignored.
Engine
Using this
Chapter
Chapter 2 is divided into five Parts; A to E.
Repair operations that can be carried out with
the engine in the vehicle are d e s c r i b e d in
Parts A to D. Part E covers the removal of the
engine/transmission as a unit, and describes
the engine dismantling and overhaul p r o cedures.
In Parts A t o D, t h e a s s u m p t i o n is m a d e
that the engine is installed in the vehicle, with
description
The 1.6 litre engine is a w a t e r - c o o l e d ,
d o u b l e overhead camshaft, in-line fourcylinder unit, with cast-iron cylinder block and
aluminium-alloy cylinder head. The engine is a
16-valve unit, with t w o inlet and t w o exhaust
valves per cylinder. The engine is m o u n t e d
transversely at the front of the vehicle, with
the transmission bolted to the left-hand side
of the engine.
The cylinder head contains t h e valve
15
30
37
63
37
59
24
18
35
59
22
61
11
22
59
24
18
7
18
7
18
37
64
17
35
17
assemblies, while the c a m s h a f t s run in t w o
separate housings bolted o n t o p of t h e
engine. The camshafts are driven by a toothed
t i m i n g belt, and each one runs in five
bearings. The inlet a n d exhaust valves are
c l o s e d by single coil springs, a n d run in
guides pressed into t h e cylinder head. The
c a m s h a f t s actuate t h e valves directly via
hydraulic t a p p e t s m o u n t e d in t h e camshaft
housings.
The crankshaft is s u p p o r t e d by five main
bearings, and endfloat is controlled by thrust
washers fitted around No 5 main bearing.
Engine coolant is circulated by a p u m p ,
driven by an auxiliary drivebelt. For details of
the cooling system, refer to Chapter 3.
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
203
2.3a R e m o v e t h e f r o n t s e c t i o n of t h e
w h e e l a r c h liner . . .
2.3b . . . for a c c e s s t o t h e inner p a n e l ' s
front securing screw
2.3c R e m o v i n g t h e w h e e l a r c h inner panel
. Lubricant is circulated under pressure by a
gear-type p u m p , driven via an auxiliary shaft
which itself is driven by the timing belt. Oil is
drawn from the sump through a strainer, and
then f o r c e d t h r o u g h an externally-mounted,
replaceable s c r e w - o n filter. From there, it is
d i s t r i b u t e d to the cylinder head, where it
lubricates the camshaft journals and tappets,
and also to the crankcase, where it lubricates
the main bearings, c o n n e c t i n g r o d big and
small-ends, gudgeon pins and cylinder bores.
a) Auxiliary drivebelts - removal and refitting
(see Chapter 1).
b) Camshafts - removal and refitting.
c) Camshaft oil seals - renewal.
d) Auxiliary shaft oil seal - renewal.
e) Camshaft sprockets - removal and refitting.
f) Coolant pump - removal and refitting
(refer to Chapter 3).
g) Crankshaft oil seals - renewal.
h) Crankshaft sprocket - removal and
refitting.
i) Cylinder head - removal and refitting.
j) Engine mountings - inspection and renewal,
k) Oil pump and pickup assembly - removal
and refitting.
I) Sump.
m) Timing belt, sprockets and cover removal, inspection and refitting.
Note: It is possible to remove the pistons and
connecting rods (after removing the cylinder
head and sump) without removing the engine.
However, this is not recommended.
Work of
this nature is more easily and
thoroughly
completed with the engine on the bench, as
described in Chapter 2E.
3 Remove the s c r e w s securing the inner
panel under the right-hand wheelarch, to gain
a c c e s s to the crankshaft pulley. R e m o v i n g
this cover entails r e m o v i n g the s c r e w s
securing the wheelarch front liner t o the end
of the bumper, and removing the front liner,
for access to the inner panel's front securing
screw (see illustrations).
Models from 1999 o n w a r d s may be fitted
with the revised 'Step A' engine, w h i c h
features a number of minor modifications. The
engine seen in our 1.6 litre project vehicle was
a Step A engine.
Repair operations
the engine in the
possible
car
with
The following work can be carried out with
the engine in the car:
2 Location of TDC on
No 1 cylinder
J§
2.4 R e m o v e t h e s c r e w s e c u r i n g t h e t i m i n g
belt u p p e r a c c e s s c o v e r
1 With the car parked on a level surface, apply
the handbrake and c h o c k the rear wheels.
Loosen the right-hand front wheel bolts.
2 Raise the front of the vehicle, rest it
securely on axle stands and remove the righthand front roadwheel.
2.6 U s i n g a dial g a u g e a n d p r o b e t o
e s t a b l i s h T D C o n No 1 p i s t o n
2.8a C r a n k s h a f t pulley t i m i n g m a r k s
a l i g n e d at T D C
4 Remove the single screw securing the small
a c c e s s cover in the t i m i n g belt cover (see
illustration), and remove the access cover to
view the camshaft sprockets.
5 To make the engine easier to turn, remove
all four spark plugs, as described in Chapter 1.
If preferred, however, it is sufficient to remove
just No 1 spark plug (nearest the timing belt
end of the engine).
6 Insert a suitable large screwdriver (or, if
available, a dial gauge and probe) d o w n No 1
spark plug hole, taking care to keep it vertical,
so that it d o e s not b i n d as the piston rises
(see illustration). Do not use any tool which
might break off or fall d o w n inside the engine.
7 Have an assistant turn the engine slowly,
using a spanner or socket on the crankshaft
pulley nut.
8 Once the screwdriver (or dial gauge reading)
starts to rise, continue turning the engine until
the crankshaft pulley timing mark is aligned
with the mark on the timing belt lower cover.
Note that there are actually t w o marks - the
other mark aligns w i t h the centre of the
crankshaft timing sensor (see illustrations).
2.8b C r a n k s h a f t pulley a n d f l y w h e e l m a r k s
(arrowed) aligned at T D C
204
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
rough idle, a worn camshaft lobe could be the
cause.
13 On completion of the test, refit the spark
plugs and restore the ignition and fuel
systems.
4 Timing belt and covers removal and refitting
General
2.9 C a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t p a i n t e d m a r k s
aligned w i t h lines o n a c c e s s hole
2.10 R e m o v e t h e c o v e r f r o m t h e
bellhousing to view the timing marks
9 The engine will be at TDC on compression
only when the painted marks on the camshaft
sprockets are visible in the timing belt cover
access hole (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . The painted
marks on the sprockets should align with the
s t e e p l y - a n g l e d lines at either side of the
access hole - j u d g i n g the alignment is not
easy, however.
6 Have the assistant hold the throttle w i d e
o p e n , and crank the engine on the starter
motor; after one or t w o revolutions, the
c o m p r e s s i o n pressure should build up to a
m a x i m u m figure, and then stabilise. Record
the highest reading obtained.
7 Repeat the test on the remaining cylinders,
recording the pressure in each.
8 All cylinders s h o u l d p r o d u c e very similar
pressures; any excessive difference indicates
the existence of a fault. Note that the
c o m p r e s s i o n s h o u l d build up quickly in a
healthy engine; low compression on the first
stroke, f o l l o w e d by gradually increasing
pressure on s u c c e s s i v e strokes, indicates
worn piston rings. A low compression reading
on the first stroke, w h i c h does not build up
during successive strokes, indicates leaking
valves or a b l o w n head gasket (a c r a c k e d
head could also be the cause).
10 A further TDC mark is p r o v i d e d on the
flywheel, and this can be viewed through the
aperture in the transmission bellhousing
(remove the aperture cover first). When the
flywheel mark aligns with the 0 notch on the
bellhousing, the engine is set to T D C . In
practice, however, viewing the marks is
impossible without first removing the ignition
coil assembly and t h e r m o s t a t housing (see
illustration).
11 As a further confirmation, the screwdriver will
stop rising (or the reading on the dial gauge
will stop increasing) when TDC is reached.
12 The engine is now set at TDC on No 1
cylinder.
3 Cylinder compression test
§t*>
1 When engine p e r f o r m a n c e is d o w n , or if
misfiring occurs which cannot be attributed to
the ignition or fuel systems, a c o m p r e s s i o n
test can provide d i a g n o s t i c clues as to the
engine's c o n d i t i o n . If the test is p e r f o r m e d
regularly, it can give warning of trouble before
any other symptoms become apparent.
2 The engine must be fully w a r m e d - u p to
normal operating temperature, the battery must
be fully c h a r g e d , a n d all the s p a r k p l u g s
m u s t be removed (Chapter 1). The aid of an
assistant will also be required.
3 Disable
the
ignition
system
by
d i s c o n n e c t i n g the LT wiring plug t o the
ignition coil assembly (see illustration).
4 To prevent possible damage to the catalytic
converter, depressurise and disable the fuel
injection system by removing the fuel p u m p
fuse or relay (see Chapter 4 B , Section 7).
5 Fit a c o m p r e s s i o n tester to the No 1
cylinder spark plug hole - the type of tester
w h i c h screws into the plug thread is to be
preferred.
9 If the pressure in any cylinder is very low,
carry out the following test to isolate the
c a u s e . Introduce a t e a s p o o n f u l of clean oil
into that cylinder through its spark plug hole
and repeat the test.
10 If the addition of oil temporarily improves
the compression pressure, this indicates that
bore or piston wear is responsible for the
pressure loss. No improvement suggests that
leaking or burnt valves, or a b l o w n head
gasket, may be to blame.
11 A low reading from t w o adjacent cylinders
is almost certainly due to the head gasket
having blown between them; the presence of
coolant in the engine oil will confirm this.
12 If one cylinder is about 20 percent lower
than the others and the engine has a slightly
^
information
1 The function of the timing belt is to drive the
c a m s h a f t s and auxiliary shaft (which drives
the oil pump). Should the belt slip or break in
service, the valve timing will be disturbed and
piston-to-valve contact will occur, resulting in
serious engine damage.
2 For this reason, it is important that a new
timing belt is fitted at or before the specified
mileage (see Chapter 1). If the car has been
p u r c h a s e d s e c o n d - h a n d , and its history is
unknown, renewing the timing belt should be
treated as a priority.
3 FIAT garages use various special tools to
set and keep the camshaft and crankshaft
s p r o c k e t s at the TDC p o s i t i o n , since it is
possible that the sprockets may turn as the
old belt is removed and the new one fitted. If
they turn independently, the valve timing will
be lost, and the engine will not run properly
w h e n restarted - w o r s e , p i s t o n - t o - v a l v e
contact may occur.
4 A special tool is also needed to set the
timing belt tensioner pulley - it is not possible
to set the tension using ordinary w o r k s h o p
tools. A simple alternative tool can be made
easily, however, from a strip of metal plate.
5 In the absence of the special locking tools,
great care must be taken when removing and
refitting the belt that the s p r o c k e t s do not
move. Marks may be found on the sprockets,
w h i c h align w i t h m a r k i n g s on the cylinder
head or block. If none are present, take care
to make your o w n , using t y p i s t s c o r r e c t i o n
fluid or similar, b e f o r e removing the belt.
6 If the special locking tools are not used, the
procedure given below will suffice to change
the belt successfully, but if care is not taken
and the c a m s h a f t t i m i n g is slightly out, the
engine may not run very well on completion. It
is advisable to have a FIAT dealer confirm the
camshaft timing after a new belt is fitted, if the
special tools are not used.
Removal
3.3 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e ignition coil LT
wiring plug
7 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt(s) from the
crankshaft pulley, then remove the s p a r k
plugs (refer to Chapter 1).
8 W o r k i n g beneath the engine, unbolt and
r e m o v e the flywheel lower cover (see
illustration), then hold the flywheel stationary,
preferably using a t o o l w h i c h engages the
flywheel starter ring gear (see Section 12).
Alternatively, have an assistant e n g a g e a
wide-bladed screwdriver with the starter ring
gear.
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
205
4.8 R e m o v i n g t h e f l y w h e e l l o w e r c o v e r
4.12a U n s c r e w t h e c r a n k s h a f t pulley
nut...
4.12b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e pulley
9 Loosen the crankshaft pulley retaining nut this is tightened to a particularly high torque,
so ensure that the car is adequately
s u p p o r t e d . Use only g o o d - q u a l i t y , c l o s e fitting t o o l s , and t a k e precautions against
personal injury, especially w h e n the nut
eventually loosens (wear gloves to protect
your hands). Loosen the nut only at this stage
- do not remove it.
which is secured by a total of eight bolts (one
additional bolt is used to secure the camshaft
sprocket access panel - see Section 2) (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note the location of each bolt
(and any washers) as it is r e m o v e d , as they
are of different sizes. Where applicable, also
recover the rubber gasket fitted between the
outer and inner covers.
18 Release the nut on the t i m i n g belt
tensioner, move the pulley away from the belt,
and retighten the nut to hold the pulley in the
retracted position (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If the
locking tools are not fitted, the tension of the
valve springs will m o v e the c a m s h a f t s very
slightly as the belt tension is released - watch
how the sprockets move, and compensate for
this when fitting the new belt.
19 Slide the drivebelt f r o m the s p r o c k e t s ,
taking great care not to turn t h e m if locking
tools have not been used (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Note that the crankshaft sprocket is a sliding
fit only over the end of the crankshaft - try not
to remove the sprocket with the belt.
10 Use the marks on the crankshaft pulley
and timing belt cover to reset the engine to
TDC, as described in Section 2. Engage t o p
gear; if the handbrake is firmly applied, this
should prevent the crankshaft from moving.
11 To further aid refitting, paint an alignment
mark between the timing sensor (below and in
front of the pulley) and one of the teeth on the
sensor pickup wheel.
12 U n s c r e w the crankshaft pulley nut, and
remove the pulley (see illustrations).
13 Unbolt and remove the timing belt cover,
4.13 R e m o v i n g t h e t i m i n g belt c o v e r
« - ' \
14 If the special holding t o o l s are not
available, make your own sprocket alignment
marks as necessary before removing the belt
(see paragraph 5).
15 In particular, mark the relative positions of
the camshaft sprockets. The best way to do
this is to place a straight edge across the
centres of the t w o sprockets, and to draw a
line (or several short lines) across the
s p r o c k e t s using an indelible marker (see
illustration).
16 The crankshaft s p r o c k e t should also be
m a r k e d for p o s i t i o n , if no t i m i n g marks are
evident. The s p r o c k e t is keyed to the
crankshaft, so can only be fitted in one
position, but a timing mark would be useful as
confirmation.
17 The FIAT tools (1860874000) for holding
the c a m s h a f t s stationary are m o d i f i e d
camshaft housing end covers, with a keyway
set into the inner f a c e , w h i c h w h e n fitted
engage with slots in the end of the camshafts,
preventing rotation and maintaining the
camshaft timing. To gain access to the c a m shaft housing end covers, disconnect the coil
LT w i r i n g , remove the bolts securing the
ignition coil, and lift the coil away f r o m the
engine complete with HT leads.
Refitting
20 When refitting the new belt, first m a k e
sure that the sprocket timing marks are still in
alignment (the camshaft s p r o c k e t marks
should be as close as possible).
21 If the special locking tools are being used,
the camshaft s p r o c k e t bolts should be
loosened to allow the s p r o c k e t s to m o v e
slightly as the t i m i n g belt is refitted and
tensioned. To hold each sprocket stationary
while the retaining bolt is loosened, make up a
tool as described in Section 5.
22 If the special locking tools are not being
used, it is not advisable to loosen the
camshaft s p r o c k e t bolts unless absolutely
necessary. If the t i m i n g belt teeth will not
engage the camshaft sprockets satisfactorily,
it is permissible to loosen the bolts and turn
the sprockets very slightly, both in the same
direction.
' 7 7 '
4.15 M a r k t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t s in
relation t o e a c h o t h e r
4.18 L o o s e n i n g t h e t i m i n g belt t e n s i o n e r
nut
4.19 R e m o v i n g t h e t i m i n g belt
2 0 6 1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
23 Fit the belt so that the arrows on the belt
(where applicable) point in the direction of
engine r o t a t i o n . Also where a p p l i c a b l e , the
lines painted on the belt should coincide with
marks on the sprockets.
4.25b . . . until t h e s p r o c k e t is t u r n e d t o
align t h e m a r k s m a d e o n t h e s p r o c k e t s
4.25a If t h e l o c k i n g t o o l s are n o t u s e d , t h e
belt w i l l n o t e n g a g e t h e e x h a u s t c a m s h a f t
sprocket...
24 Engage the timing belt with the crankshaft
s p r o c k e t first, then place it around the
auxiliary shaft s p r o c k e t , fixed g u i d e pulley,
and inlet (front) camshaft sprocket.
25 If the special locking tools are not used,
turn the exhaust camshaft s p r o c k e t slightly
(against the valve spring tension) to bring the
timing marks made into alignment, and slip
the belt o n t o the s p r o c k e t teeth (see
illustrations).
26 Finally, slip the belt around the tensioner
pulley. Ensure that any slack in the belt is on
the tensioner side of the belt run (see
illustration).
Tensioning
With the special tool
27 To tension the timing belt, a special FIAT
tool (no 1860876000) is used to turn the t e n sioner, and to set the tensioner spring tension,
in one m o v e m e n t . The t o o l is b o l t e d into
position as shown (see illustration).
28 Release the tensioner nut and use the tool
to push the pulley anti-clockwise against the
belt.
29 Initially, the belt should be set to the
maximum tension possible using reasonable
force, indicated by the mark on the tensioner
moving past the pointer. Tighten the tensioner
nut securely.
4.26 T i m i n g belt r u n / s p r o c k e t f i t t i n g o r d e r
1 Crankshaft
sprocket
2 Auxiliary shaft sprocket
3 Fixed guide pulley
(oil pump
drive)
4
5
6
Inlet camshaft sprocket
Exhaust camshaft sprocket
Timing belt tensioner pulley
30 If the camshaft s p r o c k e t bolts were
l o o s e n e d , tighten t h e m to the specified
t o r q u e , holding each s p r o c k e t in the s a m e
way as when they were loosened.
31 Remove any locking tools u s e d , a n d / o r
select neutral. Temporarily fit the crankshaft
pulley nut, and turn the engine through t w o
c o m p l e t e turns in the normal direction of
rotation. Check (as far as possible) that the
s p r o c k e t t i m i n g m a r k s c o m e back into
alignment.
32 Loosen the tensioner nut, and align the
tensioner pointer with the punched marking.
Hold the tensioner in this position, and tighten
the tensioner nut to the specified torque.
1860876000
Without the special tool
H31441
4.27 T e n s i o n e r p o i n t e r (1) s h o u l d align w i t h p u n c h e d m a r k (2)
n o t e use of s p a n n e r a n d FIAT t o o l
33 Make up a thin strip of thick metal (to be
levered against), with two holes drilled 125 m m
apart. Remove t w o of the tensioner backplate
bolts, and bolt the metal strip into position
(see illustrations).
34 Loosen the tensioner nut, but leave it
fitted.
35 Locate the end of a suitable screwdriver
or large pin punch in the slot in the tensioner
backplate, then lever against the metal strip
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Do not lever against the
plastic surface of the tensioner pulley, or it will
be damaged.
36 Initially, take up the slack in the belt, but
then pull on the belt while levering against the
strip so that the mark on the tensioner moves
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2 0 7
4.33a M a k e u p a m e t a l strip w i t h t w o
drilled h o l e s . . .
4.33b . . . a n d bolt it into p o s i t i o n a s
shown
b e y o n d t h e pointer, t o t h e full extent of its
travel (see illustration). Tighten the tensioner
nut to hold the tensioner spring in position.
37 If t h e camshaft s p r o c k e t bolts were
loosened, tighten t h e m t o t h e specified
t o r q u e , holding each s p r o c k e t in t h e s a m e
way as when they were loosened.
38 Remove any locking tools u s e d , and/or
select neutral. Temporarily fit the crankshaft
pulley nut, a n d turn t h e engine t h r o u g h t w o
c o m p l e t e turns in t h e normal direction of
rotation. Check (as far as possible) that the
s p r o c k e t timing marks c o m e back into
alignment (see illustration).
pointer ( s e e i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Tighten t h e t e n sioner nut to the specified torque.
39 Using a screwdriver (or pin punch) again
as d e s c r i b e d in paragraph 35, lever against
the metal strip to take up the spring pressure
in the tensioner.
40 Carefully loosen the tensioner nut, and let
the tensioner spring relax gradually until the
mark o n the tensioner is aligned w i t h the
4.36 Pull o n t h e belt w i t h o n e h a n d , w h i l e
levering t h e t e n s i o n e r , s o t h a t t h e
tensioner marking moves
Final
refitting
41 Refit t h e t i m i n g belt cover and rubber
gasket, a n d secure w i t h t h e eight bolts,
correctly refitted to their original locations.
42 Refit t h e crankshaft pulley, locating t h e
pulley over t h e crankshaft s p r o c k e t a n d
ensuring that t h e marks m a d e b e t w e e n t h e
timing sensor and pickup wheel are aligned.
Holding the flywheel stationary as described
in paragraph 8, fit and tighten t h e (new) nut
securely (see illustrations).
43 If the crankshaft has not t u r n e d , c h e c k
that the mark on the crankshaft pulley aligns
with the mark on the belt cover.
44 Further refitting is a reversal of removal.
Refit a n d tension the auxiliary drivebelt as
described in Chapter 1.
4.38 C h e c k i n g t h a t t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t
m a r k s m a d e are in a l i g n m e n t
4.35 L o c a t e t h e e n d of a suitable t o o l in
t h e n o t c h in t h e b a c k p l a t e , b e l o w t h e slot,
a n d lever a g a i n s t t h e m e t a l strip
5 Timing belt sprockets
and tensioner removal a n d refitting
Timing
belt
tensioner
Removal
1 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt(s) from the
crankshaft pulley, then remove t h e spark
plugs (refer to Chapter 1).
2 Unbolt a n d remove the timing belt cover,
which is secured by a total of eight bolts. Note
the location of each bolt (and any washers) as
it is removed, as they are of different sizes.
Also recover the rubber gasket fitted between
the outer and inner covers.
Caution:
Provided
the timing belt is kept
fully engaged with all the sprockets
during
the following procedure,
it is not necessary
to align the timing TDC marks. However if
any doubt exists, read through
the full
procedure
given in Section 4, noting
the
advice
on the various
TDC
alignment
markings
to ensure that the timing is not
lost. The timing belt does not have to be
removed for this procedure,
but if the belt
slips from the sprockets,
the timing
could
be lost.
3 Loosen the nut on the timing belt tensioner
and m o v e t h e pulley away f r o m the belt. If
necessary, keep t h e belt e n g a g e d with t h e
sprockets using cable-ties, elastic bands or
string.
•A
4.40 Release t h e t e n s i o n e r gradually, s o
t h a t t h e m a r k aligns w i t h t h e p o i n t e r
4.42a Fit t h e c r a n k s h a f t pulley o n t o t h e key
(arrowed) o n t h e c r a n k s h a f t s p r o c k e t . . .
4.42b . . . a n d s e c u r e u s i n g a n e w n u t
2C
208
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
pulley on its hub by hand. Stiff movement or
excessive freeplay is an indication of severe
wear; the tensioner is not a serviceable
c o m p o n e n t , and s h o u l d be renewed if its
condition is suspect, or as a precaution at the
time of a major engine overhaul.
Refitting
5.4 R e m o v i n g t h e t i m i n g belt t e n s i o n e r
pulley
4 Completely unscrew the nut, and slide the tensioner off the mounting stud (see illustration). If
required, the tensioner mounting plate can be
unbolted from the engine, noting the location of
each bolt, as they are of different sizes.
Inspection
5 Wipe the tensioner clean, but d o not use
excessive amounts of solvent, as these may
contaminate the bearings. Spin the tensioner
6 Hold the t i m i n g belt aside, then slide the
tensioner over the mounting stud and secure
loosely with the nut. Ensuring that all slack is
taken out of the belt, engage the timing belt
with tensioner sprocket.
7 Set the belt tension w i t h reference to
Section 4, paragraphs 21 to 24.
8 Refit the t i m i n g belt cover and rubber
gasket, and secure with the eight bolts,
correctly refitted to their original locations.
9 Refit and tension the auxiliary drivebelt as
described in Chapter 1.
Camshaft
sprockets
Removal
10 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4. In addition to the alignment marks
suggested in Section 4, it is useful to have a
mark between each sprocket and the cylinder
head - m a k e your o w n if none are present,
particularly if the camshaft holding tools
described in Section 4 are not available.
11 The camshaft sprocket must now be held
stationary while the retaining bolt is loosened;
if the s p r o c k e t turns very far, there is a risk
that the valves will hit the pistons. Make up a
tool as follows and engage it with the holes in
the sprocket (see Tool Tip).
To make a camshaft
sprocket
holding
tool, obtain two lengths of steel
strip
about 6 mm thick by 30 mm wide or
similar, one 600 mm long, the
other
200 mm long (all dimensions
approximate). Bolt the two strips together
to
form a forked end, leaving the bolt slack
so that the shorter strip can pivot freely.
At the end of each 'prong' of the fork,
secure a bolt with a nut and a locknut,
to act as the fulcmms; these will engage
with the cut-outs
in the sprocket,
and
should protrude by about 30 mm.
5.13a U n s c r e w a n d r e m o v e t h e b o l t a n d
washer, and remove the camshaft
sprocket...
12 Alternatively, pass a rod t h r o u g h one of
the holes in the camshaft sprocket to prevent
it rotating. Position a pad of rag or a piece of
w o o d under the rod t o avoid d a m a g i n g the
cylinder head.
13 U n s c r e w the bolt (recover the washer),
and slide the s p r o c k e t f r o m the end of the
c a m s h a f t . Note the integral location key on
the inner face of the sprocket, and the notch
on the end of the camshaft into which it fits
(see illustrations).
15 Check the sprocket teeth for damage.
16 W i p e clean the s p r o c k e t and camshaft
mating surfaces.
Refitting
17 Locate the s p r o c k e t on the end of the
camshaft, noting that it is (loosely) keyed.
Refit the bolt and washer, and tighten to the
specified torque while holding the camshaft
stationary using the m e t h o d d e s c r i b e d
previously.
18 Align the m a r k s m a d e b e t w e e n the
camshaft sprockets and cylinder head, then
refit the timing belt as described in Section 4.
Crankshaft
sprocket
Removal
19 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
20 Slide the s p r o c k e t off the end of the
crankshaft (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . If it is tight,
remove it using a puller or a pair of suitable
screwdrivers. The s p r o c k e t has a separate
key w h i c h locates in a g r o o v e in the
crankshaft nose - recover the key if it is loose.
Inspection
21 With the sprocket removed, examine the
crankshaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 10 and renew it.
22 Wipe clean the sprocket and crankshaft
mating surfaces. Check the sprocket teeth for
damage.
Refitting
23 Slide the s p r o c k e t fully onto
the
crankshaft, making sure it engages the key.
24 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
Auxiliary
shaft
sprocket
Removal
14 With the sprockets removed, examine the
camshaft oil seals for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 7 and renew them.
25 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4. There is no need t o m a k e any
alignment marks to s h o w the auxiliary shaft
sprocket fitted position.
26 The sprocket must now be held stationary
while the bolt is l o o s e n e d . Locking up the
flywheel will not help in this case, as the
sprocket turns the oil p u m p driveshaft. One
solution would be to hold the sprocket using a
strap w r e n c h , as used for oil filter removal;
5.13b . . . n o t i n g h o w t h e s p r o c k e t l o c a t e s
o n t h e e n d of t h e c a m s h a f t
5.20 Slide t h e c r a n k s h a f t s p r o c k e t off,
n o t i n g t h e l o c a t i o n of t h e l o c a t i n g key
Inspection
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
5.26 U s i n g a s t r a p w r e n c h t o h o l d t h e
auxiliary shaft s p r o c k e t as t h e bolt is
loosened
alternatively, a means must be devised for
jamming the sprocket teeth. If a chain wrench
must be u s e d , w r a p a cloth around the
s p r o c k e t first, t o prevent d a m a g e t o the
sprocket teeth (see illustration).
27 Once the bolt has been loosened, remove
it and its washer, and take off the s p r o c k e t
(see illustration). Recover the locating dowel
fitted between the sprocket and shaft.
Inspection
28 With the sprocket removed, examine the
auxiliary shaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 9 and renew it.
29 Wipe clean the sprocket and shaft mating
surfaces. Check the s p r o c k e t teeth for
damage.
5.27 R e m o v i n g t h e auxiliary shaft s p r o c k e t
31 Refit the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d
Section 4.
Fixed guide
in
pulley
Removal
32 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
33 Loosen and remove the pulley bolt and its
washer, and t a k e off the pulley (see
illustration).
Inspection
34 Check the pulley for any sign of damage,
and check that it spins freely, with no sign of
r o u g h n e s s . W i p e the pulley clean before
fitting.
Refitting
Refitting
30 Fit the locating d o w e l , then slide the
sprocket fully onto the shaft, making sure the
dowel engages correctly.
35 Offer the pulley up to the engine, a n d
secure with the retaining bolt and washer.
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
\
V
6.3a R e m o v e t h e r i g h t - h a n d . . .
6.3b . . . a n d l e f t - h a n d s e c u r i n g b o l t s . . .
6.3c . . . a n d lift o u t t h e air i n t a k e
6.6a U n s c r e w t h e f o u r m o u n t i n g n u t s
(arrowed)...
209
5.33 R e m o v i n g t h e f i x e d g u i d e pulley
36 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d
Section 4.
6 Camshaft housings
and camshafts removal and refitting
in
*K
05
N o t e : The camshaft housings are secured by
Ribe bolts, which are similar in appearance to
Ton types, but require different tools. A set of
Ribe sockets can be obtained from good tool
stockists - larger Ribe bolts are used to secure
the cylinder head.
Removal
1 M a k i n g sure that they are labelled for
p o s i t i o n , d i s c o n n e c t the HT leads f r o m the
spark plugs.
2 Referring to C h a p t e r 5 B , r e m o v e the
ignition coil assembly, and place it to one side
without disconnecting the HT leads from it.
3 To improve working room, remove the t w o
bolts securing the air intake at the front of the
engine compartment, and lift the intake out of
p o s i t i o n , d e t a c h i n g it f r o m the intake d u c t
(see illustrations).
4 Remove both sections of the inlet manifold
as described in Chapter 4B.
5 Set the engine to T D C , as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 2.
6 Remove the four nuts securing the ignition
coil m o u n t i n g bracket; note that these nuts
also serve to secure the camshaft housing
e n d covers themselves. Lift away t h e coil
m o u n t i n g bracket, and remove it f r o m the
engine (see illustrations).
6.6b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l
mounting bracket
2 O 1 0 1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
6.7a W i t h t h e coil b r a c k e t r e m o v e d , t h e
e n d c o v e r s are e a c h s e c u r e d by o n e nut
(arrowed)...
6.7b . . . w h i c h also s e c u r e s a h o s e / w i r i n g
harness bracket
6.8 Carefully prise off t h e c a m s h a f t
housing end covers
7 Noting their respective fitted positions,
remove the hose and wiring harness brackets
from the housing end covers (one nut
remaining per cover) - note the earth lead
w h i c h may be fitted to the rear cover (see
illustrations).
8 Prise off and remove the end covers from
the camshaft housings (see illustration).
9 If the camshaft locking tools described in
Section 4 are available, fit t h e m now. If not,
make accurate alignment marks between the
ends of the camshafts and their housings, for
use when refitting.
10 Remove the camshaft sprockets and the
fixed guide pulley as described in Section 5.
11 On early m o d e l s , remove the t w o bolts
securing the inlet camshaft t i m i n g sensor.
W i t h d r a w the sensor f r o m the engine, and
disconnect the wiring plug.
12 Unbolt and remove the upper half of the
inner t i m i n g belt cover, unclip the fuel line
plastic guide channel, and remove the inner
cover and channel from the top of the engine
(see illustrations).
13 Loosen the ten Ribe bolts securing each
camshaft housing by a quarter-turn at a time,
in a diagonal sequence (see illustration). As
the bolts are l o o s e n e d , s o m e of the valve
springs will be released.
14 When all the bolts are loose, carefully tilt
the housings t o w a r d s the front of the car,
noting that the housings are each located on
t w o small d o w e l s . S o m e of the hydraulic
t a p p e t s may try and fall out; it is important
that the tappets are not interchanged, so turn
the housings u p s i d e - d o w n as soon as they
are r e m o v e d . Recover the gaskets from the
top of the cylinder head (see illustrations).
6.12b . . . u n c l i p t h e fuel line g u i d e
channel...
6.12c . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e t i m i n g belt inner
cover
6.13 T o p v i e w of t h e c a m s h a f t h o u s i n g s ,
showing the ten bolts securing each one
6.14a W h e n r e m o v i n g t h e h o u s i n g s , t i p
t h e m over, t o p r e v e n t t h e t a p p e t s falling
out...
6.14b . . . a n d r e c o v e r t h e g a s k e t f r o m t h e
cylinder h e a d , n o t i n g t h e t w o d o w e l s
6.15 I m m e r s e t h e h y d r a u l i c t a p p e t s in oil,
in a n u m b e r e d c o n t a i n e r
6.12a R e m o v e t h e f o u r b o l t s ( a r r o w e d ) . . .
15 Lift the hydraulic tappets from their bores
and store them with the valve contact surface
f a c i n g d o w n w a r d s , to prevent the oil f r o m
draining out. Alternatively, place the tappets in
a tray full of oil, sufficiently deep to prevent
the tappets draining (see illustration).
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2 0 1 1
6.17 W i t h d r a w i n g o n e of t h e c a m s h a f t s
6.21 Oil t h e c a m s h a f t l o b e s as t h e
c a m s h a f t is inserted
16 Make a note of the position of each tappet,
as they must be fitted to the same valves on
reassembly - accelerated wear leading to early
failure may result if they are interchanged.
17 Carefully w i t h d r a w the c a m s h a f t s f r o m
their respective housings, turning t h e m as
necessary so that the camshaft lobes do not
hang up on the bearings inside the housing
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Keep the
camshaft
horizontal as it is withdrawn; force should not
be used, or required, otherwise the camshaft
and bearings could be damaged.
corresponding lobe on the camshaft for wear,
as it is likely that both will be w o r n . Renew
worn components as necessary.
18 Suitably mark the camshafts (and housings)
to avoid confusion when refitting. The c a m shafts may be found to be marked A and S,
which stands for Aspirazione (Inlet) and Scario
(Exhaust). Note that the inlet camshaft is
nearest to the front facing side of the engine. On
the car seen in the workshop, the inlet camshaft
had a blue paint mark, while the exhaust
camshaft was marked with green paint.
Inspection
19 Examine the camshaft bearing surfaces
and cam lobes for signs of wear ridges and
scoring. Renew the camshafts if any of these
conditions are apparent. As far as possible,
check the condition of the bearing surfaces in
the camshaft housings. If suitable measuring
e q u i p m e n t is available, camshaft bearing
journal wear can be c h e c k e d by direct
measurement.
20 Examine the tappet bearing surfaces which
contact the camshaft lobes for wear ridges and
scoring. Renew any tappet on which these
conditions are apparent. If a tappet bearing
surface is badly s c o r e d , also examine the
6.24 Place a n e w h o u s i n g g a s k e t over t h e
locating dowels
Refitting
21 Liberally lubricate the camshaft lobes, and
as far as possible, the bearing surfaces in
each camshaft housing (see illustration).
22 Carefully insert the camshafts back into
their respective housings, taking the s a m e
precautions described in paragraph 17.
23 At this stage, it is advisable to check the
camshaft endfloat using a dial gauge mounted
on the camshaft h o u s i n g , w i t h its p r o b e in
c o n t a c t w i t h the camshaft being c h e c k e d .
Move the camshaft one way, zero the gauge,
then move the camshaft as far as it will go the
other way. Record the reading on the dial
gauge, and repeat on the other camshaft and
h o u s i n g . FIAT d o not q u o t e a figure for
camshaft endfloat, but the figure given in the
Specifications can be used as a guide. If
either of the readings exceeds the tolerance
given, a pair of new camshaft housings will
probably be required.
24 Clean all traces of gasket from the mating
faces on the housings and cylinder head, then
place new gaskets in position over the
locating dowels (see illustration).
25 Fit the hydraulic t a p p e t s b a c k in their
original positions (see illustration).
26 If the FIAT special t o o l s for holding the
camshafts were not available, turn the c a m shafts (if necessary) so that the marks made
on removal are aligned, and try not to let the
camshafts turn as the housings are refitted.
6.25 Oil a n d refit t h e hydraulic t a p p e t s
27 Check that the engine is still set to TDC as
described in Sections 2 and 4.
28 Offer the housings into position over the
two dowels, ensuring that the tappets engage
correctly with the valves. Take care that none
of the t a p p e t s fall out as the h o u s i n g s are
refitted - offer the housing into place on its
side initially, a n d use a ruler to hold the
tappets in place (see illustrations).
29 Insert the housing bolts. Note that as the
housings are tightened d o w n , s o m e of the
valve springs will be compressed - it is important that tightening is done progressively.
30 W o r k i n g in a diagonal s e q u e n c e and
keeping the h o u s i n g as level as possible,
tighten each housing bolt by a quarter-turn at
a time until the housing just seats on the head.
31 Again w o r k i n g in a diagonal s e q u e n c e ,
tighten all bolts to the specified torque (see
illustration).
32 Refit all components removed for access,
using a reversal of the removal procedure.
•f
6.28a Offer t h e h o u s i n g into p o s i t i o n o n its
side...
>.28b .
. u s i n g a ruler t o k e e p t h e t a p p e t s
f r o m falling o u t
6.31 T i g h t e n t h e h o u s i n g b o l t s t o t h e
specified torque
2 0 1 2 1.6 litre enginein-car repair procedures
7.7 Oil t h e n e w seal before f i t t i n g
12 Referring to the information in Chapter 5B,
remove the ignition coil assembly, and move it
clear without disconnecting the HT leads from
it.
13 Refer to Section 6, paragraphs 6 to 8, and
remove the camshaft end covers.
14 Using a suitable h o o k e d instrument if
necessary, remove the large O-ring seal from
each end cover. Even if only one seal is known
to be leaking, it is advisable to renew both.
15 Clean the seating in the end cover, and
inside the end of the camshaft housing.
16 Dip the new oil seal in oil, then fit it into
the groove in the camshaft end cover (see
illustration).
17 Refit the end covers, and all components
removed for access, using a reversal of the
relevant removal procedure.
8 Auxiliary shaft removal and refitting
7.8 T a p t h e n e w seal into p l a c e u s i n g a
s o c k e t or similar
7 Camshaft oil seals renewal
Front oil
gfe>
seals
1 Remove the camshaft s p r o c k e t s and the
fixed guide pulley as described in Section 5.
2 Unbolt and r e m o v e the upper half of the
inner timing belt cover (four bolts), unclip the
fuel line plastic guide channel, and remove the
inner cover and channel from the t o p of the
engine.
3 If necessary, to improve a c c e s s , r e m o v e
the upper section of the inlet manifold as
described in Chapter 4B.
4 Even if only one seal is found to be leaking,
it is advisable to renew both.
5 Carefully drill a hole in the old seal, taking
care not to drill t o o d e e p . Use a suitable
pointed tool and a b l o c k of w o o d to lever
7.16 Fit t h e O-ring i n t o t h e g r o o v e in t h e
end cover
against, lever the seal out of its housing (see
illustration).
6 Clean the seating in the housing and the
end of the camshaft. To prevent d a m a g e to
the new oil seal as it is being f i t t e d , w r a p
s o m e adhesive t a p e a r o u n d the end of the
camshaft and lightly oil it.
7 Lubricate the new oil seal (see illustration),
then locate it over the camshaft, making sure
that the sealing lips are facing inwards.
8 Using a tubular drift, drive the oil seal
squarely into the housing (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
Remove the adhesive tape from the camshaft.
9 Renew the seal in the other camshaft housing
(as required) using the same procedure.
10 Refit all components removed for access,
using a reversal of the removal procedure.
Rear oil
seals
11 Ensuring that they are labelled for p o s ition, disconnect the HT leads from the spark
plugs.
There appears to be insufficient clearance to
withdraw the auxiliary shaft while the engine is
in the car. For this reason, the procedure is
covered in Chapter 2E.
9 Auxiliary shaft oil seal renewal
1 Remove the auxiliary shaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Section 5.
2 Unscrew the three bolts, and withdraw the
auxiliary shaft flange f r o m the engine (see
illustration). Recover the gasket.
3 Mount the flange in a vice with protected
j a w s . Taking care not to mark the flange
sealing surfaces, drive the seal out from inside
using a suitable punch (see illustration).
4 W i p e clean the oil seal location in t h e
flange, and use a file or emery paper to clean
up any sharp edges w h i c h might cause the
new seal to fail.
5 Dip the new oil seal in oil, then carefully tap
it into the flange, lips facing inwards. Once the
seal has started, use a large socket to drive
the seal squarely
into position
(see
illustrations).
€ 3
9.2 Auxiliary shaft f l a n g e b o l t s (arrowed)
9.3 T a p o u t t h e old seal u s i n g a p u n c h
«
^
9.5a Fit t h e n e w seal w i t h lips f a c i n g
inwards...
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
9.5b . . . a n d t a p in w i t h a suitable s o c k e t
9.6a Fit a n e w auxiliary f l a n g e g a s k e t . . .
6 Fit a new auxiliary flange gasket. Lightly oil
the end of the auxiliary shaft, then carefully
feed the seal and flange over it (see
illustrations).
7 Refit the flange bolts, and tighten securely
(see illustration).
8 Refit the shaft s p r o c k e t , and all other
c o m p o n e n t s removed for a c c e s s , using a
reversal of the relevant removal procedure.
2 There are t w o possible m e t h o d s for
renewing the oil seal. If the engine is in the
car, try the first method first, as this involves
much less dismantling.
10 Crankshaft oil seals renewal
Front
(right-hand
I
side) oil seal
1 The front oil seal is located in a flange on
the front of the crankshaft. Remove the timing
belt as described in Section 4 and the crankshaft sprocket as described in Section 5.
10.6 L u b r i c a t e t h e n e w seal, a n d fit it over
the crankshaft
9.6b . . . t h e n fit t h e f l a n g e over t h e
auxiliary shaft
Method 1
3 Taking care not to damage the crankshaft
timing sensor, use a sharp-pointed tool (such as
a bradawl) to pierce the seal and thus provide a
leverage point. Take care that the tool does not
score the crankshaft, and do not penetrate too
far, as the seal seat may be damaged.
4 Using the hole made, lever the seal out of
position, taking care not to d a m a g e the
crankshaft (see illustration).
5 A s far as possible, clean the oil seal
location, and remove any sharp edges which
might damage the new seal.
6 Dip the new seal in oil, and carefully feed it
over the end of the crankshaft (see
illustration).
7 Tap the new seal into its seat, then drive it
squarely h o m e using a large s o c k e t (see
illustration). This is the most difficult part, as
there is limited r o o m t o use a hammer or
mallet. If care is taken, it may be possible to
press
the
seal
into
place,
working
progressively around the seal so that is does
not distort.
9.7 T i g h t e n i n g t h e auxiliary f l a n g e b o l t s
10 Unscrew and remove the bolts securing
the crankshaft front flange to the block. Take
care not to unscrew the t w o mounting bolts
for the crankshaft timing sensor bracket (one
is a shear-head bolt) - if these must be
removed for any reason, mark around t h e m
very carefully w i t h paint or a sharp t o o l , so
that the sensor position is not lost.
8 R e m o v e t h e s u m p as d e s c r i b e d in S e c tion 14.
9 Trace the wiring back from the crankshaft
timing sensor, and disconnect it at the wiring
plug. Remove the screw securing the sensor
to its mounting bracket, and remove it.
11 Withdraw the flange from the front of the
crankshaft, and mount it in a vice with
p r o t e c t e d j a w s . Recover the flange gasket
from the engine.
12 Taking care not to mark the flange sealing
surfaces, drive the seal out from inside using a
suitable punch (see illustration).
13 W i p e clean the oil seal location in the
flange, and use a file or emery paper to clean
up any sharp edges w h i c h might cause the
new seal to fail.
14 Dip the new oil seal in oil, then carefully
tap it into the flange, lips facing inwards. Once
10.7 T a p t h e n e w seal into p l a c e u s i n g a
large s o c k e t
10.12 T a p o u t t h e o l d seal u s i n g a pin
punch
Method 2
10.4 Levering o u t t h e old seal
2013
2 0 1 4 1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
17 Refit the flange bolts, and tighten evenly
and securely, ensuring that the flange does
not twist out of alignment.
All m e t h o d s
18 Refit the crankshaft s p r o c k e t , and all
other components removed for access, using
a reversal of the relevant removal procedure.
Rear (left-hand
10.14a Oil t h e n e w seal, a n d fit it t o t h e
flange...
10.14b . . . t h e n drive it in w i t h a large
socket
side) oil seal
N o t e : On early models (up to
approximately
1999, before the introduction
of the 'Step A'
engine) the rear oil seal is available separately
from the housing. On later models, the seal is
integral with its housing.
19 Remove
the flywheel/driveplate
as
described in Section 12.
Early m o d e l s
20 Using a suitable h o o k e d instrument,
remove the oil seal f r o m the rear oil seal
housing, taking care not to d a m a g e the
surface of the crankshaft. Alternatively,
carefully drill the seal and screw in t w o selft a p p i n g s c r e w s on either side of the seal;
using pliers on the screws, pull the seal from
its seat.
10.15 Use a little g r e a s e t o s t i c k t h e n e w
f l a n g e g a s k e t in p l a c e
10.16 Fit t h e f l a n g e into place, t h e n fit a n d
tighten the bolts
the seal has s t a r t e d , use a large s o c k e t t o
drive the seal squarely into position (see
illustrations).
15 Fit a new flange gasket, sticking it in place
with a little grease (see illustration).
16 Lightly oil the end of the crankshaft, then
carefully feed the seal and flange over it (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Use a straight edge to ensure
that the flange is aligned with the b o t t o m of
the engine.
21 Clean the seating in the housing and the
surface of the crankshaft. C h e c k the
crankshaft for burrs which may damage the oil
seal lip of the new seal, and if necessary use a
fine file to remove them.
22 Dip the new seal in clean engine oil and
carefully locate it over the crankshaft rear
flange, making sure that it is the correct way
round (lips facing inwards). Take care not to
damage the oil seal lips as it passes over the
crankshaft flange.
23 Progressively t a p the oil seal into the
housing, keeping it square to prevent
distortion. A block of w o o d is useful for this
purpose.
Later models
10.27a Oil t h e n e w s e a l . . .
10.27b . . . fit t h e f l a n g e a n d seal over t h e
e n d of t h e c r a n k s h a f t . . .
10.27c . . . t h e n fit a n d t i g h t e n t h e f l a n g e
bolts
10.28 C h e c k t h a t t h e f l a n g e is s q u a r e t o
t h e base of t h e engine
24 Remove the s u m p as d e s c r i b e d in Section 14.
25 Unbolt the oil seal flange from the engine,
and remove it from the end of the crankshaft.
26 Clean the flange mating surface on the
engine, and the surface of the crankshaft.
Check the crankshaft for burrs w h i c h may
damage the oil seal lip of the new seal, and if
necessary use a fine file to remove them.
27 Oil the new seal, and fit the flange with the
gasket side to the engine (see illustrations).
28 Use a straight edge to align the base of
the flange with the bottom of the engine (see
illustration).
29 Fit the flange securing bolts, and tighten
evenly and securely, ensuring that the flange
does not twist out of alignment.
30 Refit the sump as described in Section 14.
All m o d e l s
31 Refit the flywheel/driveplate w i t h reference to Section 12.
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2 0 1 5
5 :
11.9a R e m o v e t h e t w o n u t s s e c u r i n g t h e
power steering p u m p mounting b r a c k e t . . ,
11 Cylinder headremoval and refitting
N o t e : The cylinder head is secured by Ribe
bolts, which are similar in appearance to Torx
types, but require different tools. A set of Ribe
sockets can be obtained
from good
tool
stockists
- smaller Ribe bolts are used to
secure the camshaft
housings.
Removal
1 Depressurise the fuel system as described
in Chapter 4B, Section 7.
2 Disconnect the battery negative terminal
(refer to Disconnecting the battery).
3 Drain the cooling s y s t e m as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
4 Remove the auxiliary drivebelts as d e scribed in Chapter 1.
11.9b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e b r a c k e t f r o m t h e
manifold
5 Remove the spark plugs as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
6 To improve working room, remove the t w o
bolts securing the air intake at the front of the
engine compartment, and lift the intake out of
position, detaching it from the intake duct.
7 Loosen the hose clips and disconnect the
air duct which runs from the air cleaner to the
inlet manifold, also disconnecting the breather
pipe which runs to the oil filler tube.
8 Remove the camshaft
housings
as
described in Section 6.
9 Loosen/remove t h e power steering p u m p
mounting bolts, and tip the p u m p to the rear,
clear of the mounting bracket attached to the
exhaust manifold. Remove the nuts securing
the p o w e r steering p u m p mounting bracket
to the manifold, and remove the bracket (see
illustrations).
11.12a U n s c r e w t h e m a n i f o l d - t o - c y l i n d e r
head n u t s . . .
10 Unbolt the exhaust manifold heat shield
(three bolts), and remove the shield.
11 To avoid the possibility of straining the
o x y g e n sensor wiring w h e n the exhaust
manifold is detached, trace the wiring back to
the connector plug inside the relay box on the
bulkhead,
and
disconnect
it
(see
illustrations).
12 Unscrew the exhaust manifold-to-cylinder
head nuts, and the bolt f r o m the manifold
s u p p o r t bracket at the d o w n p i p e joint (see
illustrations).
13 Withdraw the manifold from the cylinder
head, recovering the gasket. Tie the manifold
back clear of the head (see illustration).
14 In s o m e cases, the manifold studs will
come out with the nuts - this poses no great
11.12b . . . a n d t h e bolt (arrowed) f r o m t h e
manifold support bracket
11.13 M o v e t h e manifold clear of t h e
cylinder head studs, a n d recover the g a s k e t
•
^
f
11.11a U n s c r e w t h e retainer a n d r e m o v e
t h e relay box c o v e r . . .
11.11b . . . t h e n l o c a t e a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e
wiring plug for the oxygen sensor
problem, and the studs can be refitted if they
are in g o o d c o n d i t i o n . For preference,
however, a c o m p l e t e set of manifold s t u d s
and nuts should be obtained as required, as
the old ones are likely to be in l e s s - t h a n perfect condition.
15 Disconnect the coolant hoses from the
t h e r m o s t a t h o u s i n g , noting their fitted
positions (see illustration).
16 Check around the head that there are no
further wires, hoses or other o b s t r u c t i o n s
which will prevent the head from being lifted
off.
17 Unscrew the cylinder head Ribe bolts half
a turn at a time, in the reverse order to that
shown in illustration 11.33. When the bolts are
free, remove them (see illustrations).
18 Lift the cylinder head from the block. If it is
s t u c k tight, insert pieces of w o o d into the
exhaust or inlet ports, and use them as levers
to rock the head off the block. On no account
11.15 D i s c o n n e c t t h e h o s e s f r o m t h e
thermostat housing
2 0 1 6 1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
11.17a U n s c r e w t h e cylinder h e a d
bolts . . .
11.17b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e m
drive levers into the gasket joint, nor attempt
to tap the head sideways, as it is located on
positioning dowels (see illustrations).
19 Remove and discard the cylinder head
gasket.
20 The cylinder head can be dismantled as
described in Chapter 2E.
21 The mating faces of the cylinder head and
cylinder block must be perfectly clean before
refitting the head. Use a hard plastic or
wooden scraper to remove all traces of gasket
and carbon; also clean the piston crowns.
22 Take particular care w h e n cleaning the
piston crowns, as the soft aluminium alloy is
easily damaged.
23 Make sure that the carbon is not allowed
to enter the oil and water passages - this is
particularly important for the lubrication
system, as carbon could block the oil supply
to the engine's components. Using adhesive
t a p e and paper, seal the water, oil and bolt
holes in the cylinder block.
24 To prevent c a r b o n entering the g a p
between the pistons and bores, smear a little
grease in the gap. After cleaning each piston,
use a small brush to remove all t r a c e s of
grease and c a r b o n from the gap, then wipe
away the remainder with a clean rag. Clean all
the pistons in the same way.
25 Check the mating surfaces of the cylinder
block and the cylinder head for nicks, deep
scratches a n d other d a m a g e . If slight, they
may be r e m o v e d carefully with a file, but if
excessive, machining may be the only
alternative to renewal.
26 If w a r p a g e of the cylinder head gasket
surface is suspected, use a straight-edge to
check it for distortion. Refer to Part E of this
Chapter if necessary.
27 Check the condition of the cylinder head
11.18b T h e h e a d is l o c a t e d o n t w o d o w e l s
- one shown
11.29 Refit t h e cylinder h e a d p o s i t i o n i n g
dowels
11.30a Fit t h e g a s k e t over t h e d o w e l s . .
11.30b . . . s o t h a t t h e w o r d A L T O is visible
Preparation
for
refitting
11.18a Lifting t h e cylinder h e a d f r o m t h e
block
bolts, and particularly their threads,
they are removed. Wash the bolts in
solvent, and wipe them dry. Check
for any sign of visible wear or
renewing them if necessary.
whenever
a suitable
each bolt
damage,
Refitting
28 Before refitting the a s s e m b l e d cylinder
h e a d , m a k e sure that the head and block
mating surfaces are perfectly clean, and that
the bolt holes in the cylinder block have been
mopped out to clear any oil or coolant. If the
bolt holes have any significant a m o u n t of
liquid in them, the block could be cracked by
hydraulic pressure w h e n the head bolts are
tightened.
29 Fit the two dowels to their locations on the
cylinder block (see illustration).
30 The new gasket should not be removed
from its plastic bag until required for use. Fit
the gasket dry - no grease or sealant should
be u s e d . Place the gasket on the cylinder
block so that the w o r d ALTO can be read from
above (see illustrations).
31 Lower the cylinder head onto the block so
that it locates on the positioning dowels (see
illustration).
32 Ensure that the cylinder head bolts are
cleaned of all debris, and check the threads
for signs of damage. Especially if it is known
that the bolts have been removed previously,
it is advisable to renew all ten bolts as a set,
rather than risk the bolts shearing w h e n
tightened.
11.31 L o w e r t h e cylinder head into
position
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
33 Lightly oil the bolt t h r e a d s . S c r e w the
bolts in finger-tight, and tighten t h e m in the
sequence shown to the Stage 1 torque (see
illustration).
34 When all ten bolts have been tightened to
the Stage 1 t o r q u e , go r o u n d again in
sequence and tighten to the Stage 2 torque
(see illustration).
35 Again w o r k i n g in s e q u e n c e , tighten the
bolts t h r o u g h the specified Stage 3 angle.
Note that 90° is equivalent to a quarter-turn or
right-angle, making it easy to judge by noting
the initial position of the s o c k e t handle. If
available, use an angle gauge fitted to the
s o c k e t handle for m a x i m u m accuracy (see
illustration).
EX
8
'o
Removal
1 Remove the transmission as described in
Chapter 7A or 7 B . On manual transmission
models, also remove the clutch as described
in Chapter 6.
2 Mark the position of the flywheel/driveplate
with respect to the crankshaft using a dab of
paint. Note that on s o m e m o d e l s although
there is only one location d o w e l on the
flywheel/driveplate, there are two holes in the
e n d of t h e crankshaft and it is therefore
possible to locate the flywheel 180° out.
3 The flywheel/driveplate must now be held
stationary while the bolts are l o o s e n e d . A
h o m e - m a d e locking tool may be fabricated
from a piece of scrap metal and used to lock
the ring gear. Bolt the t o o l to one of the
transmission bellhousing mounting holes (see
Tool Tip).
\
6
/ /
_i
o
/
1
7
1
i
1°
/
1
°
3
2
\ \
o
/
5
\, A
10
o'
o
2
o
\"
\
1
i
/
o
4
Y""
\
°,
9
HZ2750
IN
11.33 Cylinder h e a d bolt t i g h t e n i n g s e q u e n c e
36 With all ten bolts tightened to Stage 3, go
round o n c e more and tighten all bolts in
sequence to the Stage 4 angle.
37 Refit the exhaust m a n i f o l d , using new
gaskets, s t u d s and nuts, as a p p r o p r i a t e .
Tighten all nuts securely.
38 Further refitting is a reversal of removal.
Ensure that all wiring and hoses are correctly
routed and securely r e c o n n e c t e d . Refer to
Section 4 when refitting the timing belt, and to
Chapter 1 when refitting the spark plugs and
auxiliary drivebelt, and w h e n refilling the
cooling system.
12 Flywheel/driveplate removal, inspection
and refitting
2017
11.34 T i g h t e n i n g t h e cylinder head b o l t s
11.35 Use an angle g a u g e if p o s s i b l e f o r
t h e latter s t a g e s of t i g h t e n i n g
However, it may be possible to have it
s u r f a c e - g r o u n d ; seek the advice of a FIAT
dealer or engine reconditioning specialist.
6 If the ring gear is badly worn or has missing
teeth, the flywheel must be renewed.
of the crankshaft holes, using the correct-size
tap, if available.
Automatic transmission models
7 Check the driveplate for signs of d a m a g e
and renew it if necessary. If the ring gear is
badly w o r n or has missing t e e t h , the
driveplate must be renewed.
Refitting
8 Clean the mating surfaces of the flywheel/
driveplate and crankshaft. Remove any
remaining locking c o m p o u n d from the threads
TOOL
If a suitable
tap is
not
available, cut two slots down
the threads of one of the old
bolts with a hacksaw,
and
use the bolt to remove
the
locking
compound
from the threads.
HAYNES
9 Clean the flywheel bolt threads, then apply
a suitable t h r e a d - l o c k i n g c o m p o u n d to the
threads of each bolt.
10 Offer up the flywheel/driveplate to the
crankshaft (with the s p a c e r b e h i n d , where
applicable). Use the alignment marks m a d e
during removal to ensure correct refitting (see
illustrations).
4 S u p p o r t the flywheel as the bolts are
loosened - the flywheel is very heavy. Unscrew
and remove the mounting bolts, take off the
mounting plate, then lift off the flywheel/driveplate. Where applicable, recover the spacer
fitted between the flywheel and crankshaft.
Inspection
Manual transmission models
5 If the f l y w h e e l ' s c l u t c h mating surface is
deeply
scored, cracked
or
otherwise
d a m a g e d , the flywheel must be r e n e w e d .
7b lock the flywheel, make up a pointed
tool to engage the ring gear teeth, and
bolt it to the engine using one of the
bellhousing
bolts
12.10a Fit t h e f l y w h e e l into p o s i t i o n .
2 0 1 8 1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
12.10b . . . m a k i n g s u r e t h e m a r k s m a d e
o n r e m o v a l are a l i g n e d
12.11a Refit t h e m o u n t i n g plate a n d
flywheel bolts . . .
12.11b . . . a n d t i g h t e n t h e b o l t s t o t h e
specified torque
11 Fit the m o u n t i n g plate and secure the
flywheel/driveplate loosely with the bolts.
Lock the flywheel/driveplate using the method
e m p l o y e d on d i s m a n t l i n g , and tighten the
retaining bolts to the specified t o r q u e (see
illustrations).
12 Refit the c l u t c h on manual transmission
models as described in Chapter 6.
13 Refit the transmission as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 7A or 7B.
excessive free play is f o u n d , check first that
the fasteners are correctly s e c u r e d , then
renew any w o r n c o m p o n e n t s as d e s c r i b e d
below.
13 Place a trolley j a c k beneath the t r a n s mission, w i t h a block of w o o d on the jack
head. Raise the jack until it is supporting the
weight of the engine/transmission.
14 U n s c r e w the t h r o u g h - b o l t securing the
transmission bracket to the m o u n t i n g , and
recover the washer (see illustration).
15 U n s c r e w the t w o bolts securing the
mounting to the subframe.
16 Lower the transmission sufficiently to
remove the mounting from the transmission
bracket.
17 Locate the new mounting in position, and
loosely refit the mounting-to-body bolts.
18 Raise the engine/transmission and refit
the t h r o u g h - b o l t (and washer) securing the
bracket to the mounting. Tighten the bolt to
t h e specified t o r q u e , then tighten t h e
mounting-to-subframe bolts.
19 Remove the trolley jack and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
13 Engine mountings inspection and renewal
Inspection
1 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle
support).
2 Check the mounting rubbers to see if they
are cracked, hardened or separated from the
metal at any point; renew the mounting if any
such damage or deterioration is evident.
3 Check that all the mounting's fasteners are
securely t i g h t e n e d ; use a t o r q u e w r e n c h to
check if possible.
4 Using a large s c r e w d r i v e r or a c r o w b a r ,
check for wear in the mounting by carefully
levering against it to c h e c k for free play.
Where this is not possible enlist the aid of an
assistant to m o v e the engine/transmission
back and forth, or from side to side, while you
watch the mounting. While some free play is
to be expected even from new components,
excessive wear should be o b v i o u s . If
13.7 Engine r i g h t - h a n d m o u n t i n g
(seen f r o m b e l o w ) - t h r o u g h - b o l t a r r o w e d
Renewal
N o t e : Left and right
driver's seat.
are as seen from
the
Right-hand mounting
5 Raise the front of the vehicle and support
on axle s t a n d s (see Jacking and
vehicle
support).
6 Place a trolley jack beneath the right-hand
side of the engine, with a block of w o o d on
the jack h e a d . Raise the jack until it is
supporting the weight of the engine.
7 Working from below, unscrew the throughbolt (and washers) securing the engine
bracket to the mounting (see illustration).
8 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the engine bracket from the m o u n t i n g , then
remove the bolts securing the mounting to the
body, and remove it.
9 Locate the new mounting on the body, then
insert the mounting-to-body bolts and tighten
by hand.
10 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the mounting. Refit the through-bolt (and
washers) and tighten to the specified torque,
then tighten the mounting-to-body bolts.
11 Remove the trolley jack and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
Left-hand mounting
12 Raise the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle
support).
20 Raise the front of the vehicle and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
21 Place a trolley jack beneath the engine/
transmission flange, with a block of w o o d on
the jack head. Raise the jack until it is
s u p p o r t i n g the w e i g h t of the engine and
transmission.
22 W o r k i n g f r o m below, unscrew
the
t h r o u g h - b o l t securing the bracket to the
mounting (see illustration).
23 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the bracket from the mounting, then remove the
bolts securing the mounting to the body, and
remove it.
13.14 R e m o v i n g t h e e n g i n e rear m o u n t i n g
through-bolt
13.22 Engine l e f t - h a n d m o u n t i n g
(seen f r o m below)
Rear mounting
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
2019
14.2a U n s c r e w t h e b o l t s ( a r r o w e d ) . . .
14.2b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e s u p p o r t b r a c k e t
f r o m t h e rear m o u n t i n g
14.2c R e m o v i n g t h e f l y w h e e l l o w e r c o v e r
24 Locate the new m o u n t i n g on the body,
then insert the m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y bolts and
tighten by hand.
25 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the mounting. Refit the through-bolt (and
washers) and tighten to the specified torque,
then tighten the mounting-to-body bolts.
26 Remove the trolley jack and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
bolts, unbolt and remove the support bracket
fitted to the engine rear m o u n t i n g . It is also
helpful t o remove the flywheel lower cover
(see illustrations).
3 U n s c r e w the s u m p securing bolts, and
recover t h e e l o n g a t e d w a s h e r s f i t t e d under
the head of e a c h . We f o u n d that a flexible
extension piece w a s required to reach the
bolts at the transmission end of the s u m p
(see illustrations).
4 A conventional s u m p gasket is not used the sump is sealed using liquid gasket. Use a
sharp knife to cut around the bead of sealant,
then pull the s u m p d o w n w a r d s to remove it
(see illustration).
Also clean any sealant from the sump bolts.
6 Where removed, refit the oil spill tube to the
base of the engine, tightening its retaining bolt
securely (see illustration).
7 Apply a bead of RTV silicone instant gasket
3 m m in diameter t o t h e s u m p flange. The
bead of sealant should pass around the inside
of the s u m p bolt holes. Also apply a little
sealant to the joints b e t w e e n the front and
rear oil seal flanges and the engine block (see
illustrations).
14 Sump removal and refitting
§^>
^
5 Clean away all the old sealant, f r o m the
s u m p pan and f r o m the base of the block.
8 Fit the sump, then screw in the fixing bolts
(and washers) and tighten in a diagonal
sequence to the specified torque.
9 Wait one hour for the gasket c o m p o u n d to
cure before filling with oil.
10 Lower the vehicle to the g r o u n d and fill
the engine with oil (see Chapter 1). Check the
011 level after running the engine for a few
minutes, as described in Weekly checks.
14.3a R e m o v i n g t h e s u m p b o l t s
14.3b U s i n g a flexible e x t e n s i o n t o r e a c h
t h e s u m p b o l t s at t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n e n d
14.4 R e m o v i n g t h e s u m p - n o t e oil spill
t u b e (arrowed)
14.6 T i g h t e n i n g t h e oil spill t u b e bolt
14.7a Run a b e a d of sealant a r o u n d t h e
sump flange . . .
14.7b . . . a n d a c r o s s t h e oil seal f l a n g e
joints
Removal
1 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands. Drain the engine oil.
2 To improve access to s o m e of the s u m p
Refitting
2 O 2 0 1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures
15.2 Oil p i c k - u p / p u m p a s s e m b l y retaining b o l t s (arrowed)
15 Oil pump and pick-up tube removal and refitting
15.7a T a k e c a r e r e m o v i n g t h e oil p u m p c o v e r . . .
3 Removing the oil p u m p idler gear requires
the auxiliary shaft to be removed first. There is
j£
insufficient r o o m to w i t h d r a w the auxiliary
shaft with the engine f i t t e d ; removal of the
auxiliary shaft is covered in Chapter 2E.
4 Once the shaft has been removed, the plug
Removal
1 Drain the engine oil and remove the s u m p
as described in Section 14.
2 U n b o l t and r e m o v e the oil p i c k - u p / p u m p
assembly, which is secured by the three larger
bolts visible (the smaller bolts retain the oil
p u m p cover) (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Remove the
assembly, withdrawing the driveshaft from the
idler gear. Recover the gasket.
15.7b . . . retrieve t h e oil p r e s s u r e relief
valve...
fitted over the idler gear must be r e m o v e d
from the cylinder block. The plug is driven into
position, and
is fitted
using sealant,
so
removal will not be easy.
5 With the plug removed, the idler gear and
its guide can be tapped out from below, using
a long drift of diameter slightly larger than the
oil p u m p driveshaft.
Inspection
6 If p u m p wear is s u s p e c t e d , dismantle the
p u m p as follows.
7 Extract the three fixing bolts and remove the
cover plate. Take care as the cover is removed,
and recover the oil pressure relief valve, spring
and spring seat (see illustrations).
8 Lift off the adaptor plate fitted between the
cover and p u m p body (see illustration).
9 Check the clearance b e t w e e n the outer
gear and the p u m p housing using feeler
blades. Check the gear endfloat by placing a
s t r a i g h t - e d g e across the p u m p body, and
checking the gap between the straight-edge
and gear face (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If the
15.7c . . . valve s p r i n g . . .
15.7d . . . a n d s p r i n g seat
15.9a C h e c k i n g t h e p u m p g e a r - t o - b o d y
clearance . . .
15.9b . . . a n d t h e gear e n d f l o a t
(
15.8 R e m o v e t h e a d a p t o r plate f r o m t h e
oil p u m p b o d y
1.6 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2 0 2 1
15.14a Fit a n e w oil p u m p g a s k e t . . .
15.14b . . . t h e n fit t h e p u m p into
15.14c . . . a n d t i g h t e n t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s
to the specified torque
16.1 Oil p r e s s u r e s w i t c h (arrowed)
16.3 R e m o v i n g t h e oil p r e s s u r e s w i t c h
clearances
are
outside
the
specified
tolerance, renew the oil pump complete.
10 If the p u m p is u n w o r n , refit all removed
components in reverse order to removal, and
tighten the cover bolts fully.
11 Apply air pressure from a tyre pump to the
011 pump oil ducts, to clear any sludge or other
material. If any solvents are used, the p u m p
must be allowed to dry t h o r o u g h l y before
refitting.
12 Where the idler gear has been removed,
check the condition of the gear teeth, and of
those on the auxiliary shaft. Renewal of both
components will be necessary if either is worn.
Use a new plug when refitting the idler gear.
Refitting
13 Clean all traces of old gasket from the
p u m p and the mating surfaces on the
crankcase.
14 Fit a new joint gasket, then offer the pump
into position. Tighten the m o u n t i n g bolts to
the specified torque (see illustrations).
15 Fit the sump as described in Section 14.
16 Fill the engine with oil (see Chapter 1).
17 Run the engine for a few minutes, then
check and top-up the oil level as described in
Weekly checks.
16 Oil pressure switch removal and refitting
Removal
1 The oil pressure s w i t c h is located at the
front of the engine block, next to the oil filler
tube (see illustration).
2 Disconnect the switch wiring connector.
3 U n s c r e w the s w i t c h f r o m the block, and
remove it (see illustration).
4 Clean the switch location in the block as far
as possible. If the s w i t c h is to be refitted,
clean its threads.
5 Examine the switch for signs of cracking or
splits. If the top part of the switch is loose, this
is an early indication of impending failure.
Refitting
6 Apply a smear of sealant to the threads of
the s w i t c h , then screw it into place and
tighten to the specified torque.
7 Reconnect the switch wiring on completion.
2B»1
Chapter 2 Part B:
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Contents
Auxiliary drivebelt - removal and refitting
See Chapter 1
Camshaft - removal and refitting
See Chapter 2E, Section 4
Camshaft cover - removal and refitting
6
Camshaft oil seal - renewal
7
Crankshaft oil seals - renewal
8
Cylinder compression test
3
Cylinder head - dismantling and overhaul
See Chapter 2E
Cylinder head - removal and refitting
9
Engine mountings - inspection and renewal
11
Engine oil and filter - renewal
See Chapter 1
Engine oil level - check
See Weekly checks
Flywheel - removal, inspection and refitting
10
General information
1
Location of TDC on No 1 cylinder
2
Oil pressure switch - removal and refitting
14
Oil pump and pick-up tube - removal and refitting
13
Sump - removal and refitting
12
Timing belt and covers - removal and refitting
4
Timing belt sprockets and tensioner - removal and refitting
5
Degrees of difficulty
Fairty easy, suitable
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
experience
^
g^
§^
for beginner with
^
s o m e experience
g^
Fairly difficult,
|k
Difficult, suitable for
^
V e r y difficult,
suitable for competent g ^
experienced DIY
3^
suitable for expert DIY 3 ^
DIY mechanic
mechanic
g^
or professional
g^
g^
Specifications
General
Engine code*
Bore
Stroke
Compression ratio
Firing order
No 1 cylinder location
* N o t e : See 'Vehicle identification
numbers'
182A3.000
82.0 m m
64.9 m m
9.85:1
1-3-4-2
Timing (right-hand) end of engine
for the location of code marking on the engine.
2B
Lubrication system
Oil pump type
Outer rotor-to-housing clearance
Axial clearance
Oil pressure (at operating temperature)
'.
Bi-rotor driven from front of crankshaft
0.080 to 0.186 mm
0.025 to 0.061 m m
15 psi at idle, to 58 psi at 4000 rpm
Torque wrench settings
Nm
ibfft
Air conditioning compressor mounting bracket-to-block
Alternator mounting bracket to block:
M8 bolts
M10 bolts
Big-end (connecting rod) bearing cap bolts:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Camshaft caps
Camshaft cover
Camshaft sprocket
Coolant pipe to block:
M6 bolts
M8 bolts
Crankshaft pulley-to-sprocket bolts :
Crankshaft sensor
Crarrkshaft sprocket bolt (left-hand thread)
Cylinder head:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
50
37
25
70
18
52
20
Angle-tighten a further 40°
15
9
120
15
11
7
89
9
25
25
9
360
7
18
18
7
266
20
40
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Angle-tighten a further 90°
15
30
2B«2 1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Torque wrench settings (continued)
Engine oil dipstick tube
Engine/transmission mountings:
Front mounting through-bolt
Left-hand mounting bracket to transmission:
M10 bolts
M12 bolts
Mounting nuts
Mountings to bodyshell
Right-hand mounting bracket to block
Exhaust manifold nuts
Flywheel*
Inlet manifold nuts
Knock sensor
Main bearing cap bolts:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Oil pump bolts:
M6bolt
M8bolt
Sump bolts:
M6bolt
M8bolt
Timing belt covers
Thermostat housing bolts
"Although not specifically recommended
Chapter
Chapter 2 is divided into five Parts; A to E.
Repair operations that can be carried out with
the engine in the vehicle are d e s c r i b e d in
Parts A to D. Part E covers the removal of the
engine/transmission as a unit, and describes
the engine dismantling and overhaul p r o cedures.
In Parts A to D, the a s s u m p t i o n is m a d e
that the engine is installed in the vehicle, with
all ancillaries c o n n e c t e d . If the engine has
been removed for overhaul, the preliminary
dismantling information which precedes each
operation may be ignored.
Engine
Ibf ft
7
38
28
45
85
80
32
70
25
160
25
25
33
63
59
20
Angle-tighten a further 100°
32
15
9
25
7
18
24
52
18
118
18
18
9
25
9
25
by FIAT, use new bolts and locking fluid.
1 General information
Using this
Nm
9
description
The 1.4 litre engine is a water-cooled, single
overhead camshaft, in-line four-cylinder unit,
with cast-iron cylinder block and aluminiumalloy cylinder head. The engine is a 12-valve
unit, with t w o inlet valves per cylinder. The
engine is mounted transversely at the front of
the vehicle, w i t h the transmission bolted to
the left-hand side of the engine.
The cylinder head carries the camshaft,
which is driven by a toothed timing belt and
runs in five bearings. It also houses the inlet
and exhaust Valves, which are closed by single
coil springs, and which run in guides pressed
into the cylinder head. The camshaft actuates
the valves directly via cam followers; the valve
clearances are maintained by hydraulic
tappets m o u n t e d in the cylinder head. The
7
18
7
18
cylinder head contains integral oilways which
supply and lubricate the tappets.
The crankshaft is s u p p o r t e d by five main
bearings, and endfloat is controlled by thrust
washers fitted either side of the centre main
bearing.
Engine coolant is circulated by a p u m p ,
driven by the timing belt. For details of the
cooling system, refer to Chapter 3.
Lubricant is circulated under pressure by a
pump, driven from the front of the crankshaft.
Oil is drawn from the sump through a strainer,
and then f o r c e d t h r o u g h an externallym o u n t e d , replaceable s c r e w - o n filter. From
there, it is d i s t r i b u t e d to the cylinder head,
where it lubricates the camshaft journals and
tappets, and also to the crankcase, where it
lubricates the main bearings, connecting rod
big and s m a l l - e n d s , g u d g e o n pins and
cylinder bores.
Repair operations
the engine in the
possible
car
24
with
The following work can be carried out with
the engine in the car:
a) Auxiliary drivebelt - removal and refitting
(see Chapter 1).
b) Camshaft - removal and refitting*.
c) Camshaft oil seals - renewal.
d) Camshaft sprocket - removal and refitting.
e) Coolant pump - removal and refitting
(refer to Chapter 3).
f) Crankshaft oil seals - renewal.
g) Crankshaft sprocket - removal and
refitting.
h) Cylinder head - removal and refitting.
i) Engine mountings - inspection and
renewal.
j) Oil pump and pickup assembly - removal
and refitting.
k) Sump.
I) Timing belt, sprockets and cover removal, inspection and refitting.
"Cylinder head dismantling
procedures
are
detailed in Chapter 2E, Section 4, with details
of camshaft and tappet removal.
Note: It is possible to remove the pistons and
connecting rods (after removing the cylinder
head and sump) without removing the engine.
However, this is not recommended.
Work of
this nature is more easily and
thoroughly
completed with the engine on the bench, as
described in Chapter 2E.
2 Location of TDC on
No 1 cylinder
_3§
1 With the car parked on a level surface,
apply the handbrake and c h o c k the rear
wheels. Loosen the r i g h t - h a n d front wheel
bolts.
2 Raise the front of the vehicle, rest it
securely on axle stands and remove the righthand front roadwheel.
3 Unscrew and release the fasteners, and
remove the wheelarch inner panel, to gain
access to the crankshaft pulley.
4 To make the engine easier to turn, remove
all four spark plugs, as described in Chapter 1.
If preferred, however, it is sufficient to remove
just No 1 spark plug (nearest the timing belt
end of the engine).
5 Have an assistant turn the engine using a
spanner or s o c k e t on the crankshaft pulley
centre bolt. As this is done, place a finger over
No 1 spark plug hole, and feel for pressure
build-up.
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2B»3
6 Once pressure is felt, continue turning the
engine until the crankshaft pulley timing mark
is aligned with the mark on the oil pump cover
or timing belt lower cover (see illustration).
7 For further confirmation that the engine is at
TDC with No 1 cylinder on c o m p r e s s i o n ,
remove the camshaft cover as described in
Section 6. The camshaft lobes for No 1
cylinder will be just above horizontal (valves
closed, cylinder on compression), while those
for No 4 cylinder will be pointing downwards,
opening the exhaust valve (see illustration).
8 The engine is now set at TDC on No 1
cylinder.
3 Cylinder compression test
1 When engine p e r f o r m a n c e is d o w n , or if
misfiring occurs which cannot be attributed to
the ignition or fuel s y s t e m s , a c o m p r e s s i o n
test can provide diagnostic clues as to the
engine's c o n d i t i o n . If the test is p e r f o r m e d
regularly, it can give warning of trouble before
any other symptoms become apparent.
2 The engine must be fully w a r m e d - u p to
normal operating temperature, the battery must
be fully c h a r g e d , and all the spark plugs
m u s t be removed (Chapter 1). The aid of an
assistant will also be required.
3 Disable the ignition s y s t e m by d i s c o n necting the LT wiring plug to the ignition coil.
4 To prevent possible damage to the catalytic
converter, depressurise and disable the fuel
injection system by removing the fuel p u m p
fuse or relay (see Chapter 4A, Section 8).
5 Fit a c o m p r e s s i o n tester to the No 1
cylinder spark plug hole - the t y p e of tester
w h i c h s c r e w s into the plug thread is to be
preferred.
6 Have the assistant hold the throttle w i d e
o p e n , and crank the engine on the starter
motor; after one or t w o revolutions, the
c o m p r e s s i o n pressure should build up to a
m a x i m u m figure, and then stabilise. Record
the highest reading obtained.
7 Repeat the test on the remaining cylinders,
recording the pressure in each.
8 All cylinders should p r o d u c e very similar
pressures; any excessive difference indicates
the existence of a fault. Note that the
c o m p r e s s i o n should build up quickly in a
healthy engine; low compression on the first
stroke, f o l l o w e d by gradually increasing
pressure on successive strokes, indicates
worn piston rings. A low compression reading
on the first stroke, w h i c h does not build up
during successive strokes, indicates leaking
valves or a b l o w n head gasket (a c r a c k e d
head could also be the cause).
9 If the pressure in any cylinder is very low,
carry out the following test to isolate the
cause. Introduce a t e a s p o o n f u l of clean oil
into that cylinder through its spark plug hole
and repeat the test.
10 If the addition of oil temporarily improves
2.6 N o t c h in c r a n k s h a f t pulley aligned w i t h
rib m a r k o n t i m i n g belt l o w e r c o v e r
2.7 C a m s h a f t l o b e s f o r No 1 cylinder
(arrowed) p o i n t i n g u p w a r d s
the compression pressure, this indicates that
bore or piston wear is responsible for the
pressure loss. No improvement suggests that
leaking or burnt valves, or a b l o w n head
gasket, may be to blame.
11 A low reading from t w o adjacent cylinders
is almost certainly due to the head gasket
having blown between them; the presence of
coolant in the engine oil will confirm this.
12 If one cylinder is about 20 percent lower
than the others and the engine has a slightly
rough idle, a worn camshaft lobe could be the
cause.
13 On completion of the test, refit the spark
plugs and restore the ignition and fuel systems.
p u r c h a s e d s e c o n d - h a n d , and its history is
unknown, renewing the timing belt should be
treated as a priority.
3 FIAT garages use a pair of special tools to
keep the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets at
the TDC position, since it is possible that the
sprockets may turn as the old belt is removed
and the new one fitted. If they turn
independently, the valve timing will be lost, and
the engine will not run properly when restarted
- worse, piston-to-valve contact may occur.
4 Timing belt and covers
removal and refitting
4 In the absence of the special tools, great
care must be taken when removing and
refitting the belt that the sprockets d o not
move. Marks may be found on the sprockets,
which align with markings on the cylinder head
or oil pump housing. If none are present, take
care to make your own, using typists correction
fluid or similar, before removing the belt.
Note: If the timing belt is being removed, it is
a wise precaution
to check the condition of
the coolant pump at the same time (check for
signs of coolant leakage). This may avoid the
need to remove the timing belt again at a later
stage, should the coolant pump fail.
5 If the special tools are not u s e d , the
procedure given below will suffice to change
the belt successfully, but if care is not taken
and the camshaft t i m i n g is slightly out, the
engine may not run very well on completion. It
is advisable to have a FIAT dealer confirm the
camshaft timing after a new belt is fitted, if the
special tools are not used.
General
Removal
information
1 The function of the timing belt is to drive the
camshaft and coolant pump. Should the belt
slip or break in service, the valve timing will be
d i s t u r b e d and p i s t o n - t o - v a l v e c o n t a c t will
occur, resulting in serious engine damage.
2 For this reason, it is important that a new
timing belt is fitted at or before the specified
mileage (see Chapter 1). If the car has been
6 To improve access, remove the air cleaner
cover and air ducting as described in Chapter 4A.
7 Remove the spark plugs (refer to Chapter 1).
8 Remove the two bolts securing the coolant
hose m o u n t i n g brackets to the timing belt
cover, then unclip the hose and move it out of
the way (see illustrations).
4.8a U n s c r e w t h e t w o m o u n t i n g b r a c k e t
bolts...
4.8b . . . t h e n unclip t h e h o s e a n d r e m o v e
the mounting bracket
2B»4 1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
4.9 R e m o v i n g t h e t i m i n g belt u p p e r c o v e r
4.13 R e m o v i n g t h e c r a n k s h a f t pulley
4.14a R e m o v e t h e t w o b o l t s ( a r r o w e d ) . . .
4.14b . . . a n d t a k e off t h e t i m i n g belt l o w e r
cover
4.15a A l i g n m e n t m a r k m a d e b e t w e e n t h e
camshaft and the end bearing cap . . .
4.15b . . . a n d b e t w e e n t h e c a m s h a f t a n d
s p r o c k e t - useful if t h e s p r o c k e t is t o be
removed
9 Unbolt and r e m o v e the t i m i n g belt upper
cover, w h i c h is secured by six bolts (see
illustration).
10 Remove the camshaft cover as described
in Section 6. With the cover r e m o v e d , the
camshaft can be marked for position (or the
special FIAT locking tool can be fitted). In
addition, removing the cover enables confirmation that the engine is at TDC on No 1 cylinder, as the camshaft lobes for No 1 cylinder
will be just above horizontal (valves c l o s e d ,
cylinder on compression).
belt lower cover, and remove the cover (see
illustrations).
15 If the special holding tools are not
available, make your own sprocket alignment
marks as necessary before removing the belt
(see paragraph 4). If the camshaft cover is
r e m o v e d , an accurate mark can be made
across the left-hand end of the camshaft and
the left-hand bearing cap (left as seen from the
driver's seat) (see illustrations).
16 The FIAT tool (1860899000) for holding the
camshaft stationary is a modified No 2 c a m shaft bearing cap which locates over one of the
camshaft lobes, preventing rotation and maintaining the camshaft timing (see illustration). It
is fitted after removing the camshaft cover, and
loosening the other bearing cap bolts securing
the camshaft oil feed pipe assembly. When the
tool has been fitted, tighten all the bearing cap
bolts t o 1 0 N m ( 7 l b f f t ) .
11 Set the engine to TDC as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 2, then engage t o p gear; if the
h a n d b r a k e is firmly a p p l i e d , this s h o u l d
prevent the crankshaft from moving.
12 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt f r o m the
crankshaft pulley as described in Chapter 1.
13 Remove the four small bolts and take off
the crankshaft pulley (see illustration).
14 Remove the t w o bolts securing the timing
4.15c Use a ruler t o m a r k t h e inside of t h e
s p r o c k e t relative t o t h e t o p of t h e
cylinder h e a d
1860899000
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2B»5
4.18 Release t h e t i m i n g belt t e n s i o n e r nut
4.17 FIAT s p e c i a l t o o l u s e d t o l o c k t h e c r a n k s h a f t s p r o c k e t a n d l o c a t i n g p e g (1)
17 The tool used to lock and time the crankshaft sprocket (1869901000) is a metal plate
which bolts across the lower half of the
sprocket, secured using the oil p u m p lower
bolt holes (see illustration). The plate has two
holes through which t w o of the crankshaft
pulley bolts can be screwed into the crankshaft
sprocket, and a smaller hole between the bolt
holes, through which a locating peg can be
inserted into a corresponding recess in the
sprocket face, for timing.
18 Release the nut on the t i m i n g belt
tensioner, move the pulley away from the belt
and retighten the nut to hold the pulley in the
retracted position (see illustration).
19 Slide the timing belt from the sprockets,
taking great care not to turn t h e m if locking
tools have not been used (see illustration).
Refitting
20 When refitting the new belt, first m a k e
sure that the sprocket timing marks are still in
alignment.
21 If the special locking tools are being used,
the camshaft s p r o c k e t bolt should be
loosened to allow the s p r o c k e t t o m o v e
slightly as the t i m i n g belt is refitted and
t e n s i o n e d . To hold the s p r o c k e t stationary
while the retaining bolt is loosened, make up a
tool as described in Section 5.
22 If the special locking tools are not being
used, it is not advisable to loosen the
camshaft s p r o c k e t bolt unless absolutely
necessary. If the timing belt teeth will not
engage the camshaft sprocket satisfactorily, it
is permissible to loosen the bolt and turn the
sprocket very slightly.
4.23a T i m i n g belt t e n s i o n e r details v e r t i c a l rib (arrowed), t e n s i o n e r p o i n t e r (1)
a n d a l i g n m e n t hole (2)
4.19 R e m o v i n g t h e t i m i n g belt
the small vertical rib on the tensioner
backplate (see illustrations).
24 Initially, the belt should be set to the
maximum tension possible using reasonable
force, indicated by the tensioner pointer
m o v i n g past the alignment hole in the
tensioner backplate. Tighten the tensioner nut
securely.
25 If the camshaft s p r o c k e t bolt w a s
loosened, tighten it to the specified t o r q u e ,
holding the sprocket in the same way as when
it was loosened.
26 Remove any locking tools u s e d , and/or
select neutral. Using a spanner or socket on
the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the engine
t h r o u g h t w o c o m p l e t e turns in the normal
direction of r o t a t i o n . Check (as far as
possible) that the sprocket timing marks come
back into alignment.
27 Loosen the tensioner nut, and align the
23 Fit the belt so that the arrows on the belt
(where applicable) point in the direction of
engine rotation. Also where applicable, the
lines painted on the belt should coincide with
marks on the sprockets.
22 Engage the timing belt with the crankshaft
s p r o c k e t first, then place it around the
camshaft s p r o c k e t and the coolant p u m p
pulley. Finally, slip the belt around the
tensioner sprocket. Ensure that any slack in
the belt is on the tensioner side of the belt run.
23 Release the tensioner nut and push the
pulley anti-clockwise against the belt, using
4.23b U s i n g a s c r e w d r i v e r t o set t h e belt
2B»6 1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
following procedure,
it is not necessary
to
align the timing TDC marks. However if any
doubt
exists,
read
through
the
full
procedure
given in Section 4, noting
the
advice on setting to TDC, and ensuring
that
the timing is not lost. The timing belt does
not have to be removed for this
procedure,
but if the belt slips from the sprockets,
the
timing could be lost.
4.27 Belt t e n s i o n e r c o r r e c t l y set p o i n t e r aligned w i t h hole
tensioner pointer with the small hole on the tensioner backplate. Hold the tensioner in this
position, and tighten the tensioner nut securely
(see illustration).
28 Refit the t i m i n g belt lower cover, and
secure with the t w o bolts.
29 Refit the crankshaft pulley, locating the
pulley over the peg on the crankshaft
sprocket and tightening the four bolts to the
specified torque.
30 If the crankshaft has not t u r n e d , c h e c k
that the mark on the crankshaft pulley aligns
with the mark on the belt lower cover.
31 Further refitting is a reversal of removal.
Refit and tension the auxiliary drivebelt as
described in Chapter 1.
5 Timing belt sprockets
and tensioner removal arid refitting
Timing
belt
|
tensioner
Removal
1 Remove the air cleaner and air ducting as
described in Chapter 4A.
2 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt as described
in Chapter 1.
3 Remove the two bolts securing the coolant
hose m o u n t i n g bracket to the timing belt
cover, and move the hose out of the way.
4 Unbolt and remove the t i m i n g belt upper
cover, which is secured by six bolts.
Caution:
Provided
the timing belt is kept
fully engaged with the camshaft,
crankshaft
and coolant
pump sprockets
during
the
5.14 Hold t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t as t h e
bolt is l o o s e n e d
5 Loosen the nut on the timing belt tensioner
and m o v e the pulley away f r o m the belt. If
necessary, keep the belt e n g a g e d w i t h the
sprockets using cable-ties, elastic bands or
string.
6 Completely unscrew the nut, and slide the
tensioner off the mounting stud.
Inspection
7 Wipe the tensioner clean, but d o not use
excessive amounts of solvent, as these may
contaminate the bearings. Spin the tensioner
pulley on its hub by hand. Stiff movement or
excessive freeplay is an indication of severe
wear; the tensioner is not a serviceable
c o m p o n e n t , and should be renewed if its
condition is suspect, or as a precaution at the
time of a major engine overhaul.
Refitting
8 Hold the t i m i n g belt aside, then slide the
tensioner over the mounting stud and secure
loosely with the nut. Ensuring that all slack is
taken out of the belt, engage the timing belt
with tensioner sprocket.
9 Set the belt tension w i t h reference to
Section 4, paragraphs 20 to 23.
10 Refit the timing belt cover and tighten the
bolts. Refit the bolts securing the coolant
hose to the timing belt cover.
11 Refit and tension the auxiliary drivebelt as
described in Chapter 1.
12 Refit the air cleaner and air d u c t i n g as
described in Chapter 4A.
Camshaft
sprocket
Removal
13 Remove the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
S e c t i o n 4. It is essential that an alignment
mark is made between the sprocket and the
cylinder head, to preserve the camshaft timing
- m a k e your o w n if none are present,
particularly if the camshaft holding tool
described in Section 4 is not available.
5.16a R e m o v e t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t
bolt...
14 The camshaft sprocket must now be held
stationary while the retaining bolt is loosened;
if the sprocket turns very far, there is a risk
that the valves will hit the pistons. Make up a
tool as follows and engage it with the holes in
the sprocket (see illustration).
rTJTJTB
To make a camshaft
sprocket
holding
tool, obtain
two
lengths of steel strip
about
6 mm thick by 30 mm wide or
similar, one 600 mm long, the
other
200 mm long (all dimensions
approximate). Bolt the two strips together
to
form a forked end, leaving the bolt slack
so that the shorter strip can pivot freely.
At the end of each 'prong' of the fork,
secure a bolt with a nut and a locknut, to
act as the fulcrums;
these will
engage
with the cut-outs
in the sprocket,
and
should protrude by about 30 mm.
12
I I P
15 Alternatively, pass a rod through one of
the holes in the camshaft sprocket to prevent
it rotating. Position a pad of rag or a piece of
w o o d under the rod to avoid d a m a g i n g the
cylinder head.
16 Unscrew the bolt, and slide the sprocket
f r o m the end of the c a m s h a f t . Note the
integral location key on the inner face of the
sprocket (see illustrations).
Inspection
17 With the sprocket removed, examine the
camshaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 7 and renew it.
18 Check the sprocket teeth for damage.
19 W i p e clean the s p r o c k e t and camshaft
mating surfaces.
Refitting
20 Locate the s p r o c k e t on the end of the
c a m s h a f t . Refit the bolt and tighten to the
specified torque while holding the camshaft
stationary using the m e t h o d d e s c r i b e d
previously.
21 Align the marks m a d e b e t w e e n the
camshaft s p r o c k e t and cylinder head, then
refit the timing belt as described in Section 4.
Crankshaft
sprocket
Removal
22 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
5.16b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e s p r o c k e t n o t e k e y w a y (arrowed)
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2B»7
Section 4. It is essential that an alignment
mark is made between the sprocket and the
oil p u m p h o u s i n g , t o preserve the t i m i n g m a k e your o w n if none are present,
particularly if the s p r o c k e t holding tool
described in Section 4 is not available.
23 Working beneath the engine, unbolt and
remove the flywheel lower cover, then hold
the flywheel stationary, preferably using a tool
which engages the flywheel starter ring gear
(see Section 10). Alternatively, have an
assistant engage a w i d e - b l a d e d screwdriver
with the starter ring gear.
24 U n s c r e w
the
crankshaft
sprocket
retaining bolt - this is t i g h t e n e d to a
particularly high torque, so ensure that the car
is adequately s u p p o r t e d . Use only g o o d quality,
close-fitting
tools,
and
take
precautions against personal injury, especially
when the bolt eventually loosens (wear gloves
to protect your hands). The bolt has a lefth a n d t h r e a d - ie it unscrews c l o c k w i s e .
6.1 D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e b r e a t h e r h o s e f r o m
the camshaft cover
Camshaft cover -
removal a n d refitting
1
25 Slide the s p r o c k e t off the end of the
crankshaft. If it is tight, remove it using a
puller or a pair of suitable screwdrivers. The
sprocket may have an integral location key on
its inner face, or a separate key which locates
in a groove in the crankshaft nose.
Note: The camshaft cover is secured by Ribe
bolts, which are similar in appearance to Torx
types, but require different tools. A set of Ribe
sockets can be obtained
from good
tool
stockists - larger Ribe bolts are used to secure
the cylinder head.
Inspection
Removal
26 With the sprocket removed, examine the
crankshaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 8 and renew it.
27 Wipe clean the sprocket and crankshaft
mating surfaces. Check the sprocket teeth for
damage.
Refitting
28 Slide the s p r o c k e t o n t o the crankshaft,
making sure it engages the integral key or
separate key. Fit the washer to a new bolt - do
not lubricate the threads. It is not advisable to
re-use the old bolt, given the extremely high
torque to which it is tightened.
29 Fit the new bolt and washer, tightening the
bolt to the specified torque while holding the
crankshaft stationary using the m e t h o d
described in paragraph 23. Also bear in mind
the advice in paragraph 24.
30 Refit the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
6.5a U n s c r e w t h e c a m s h a f t c o v e r b o l t s . . .
1 Remove the air cleaner top cover and inlet
d u c t as d e s c r i b e d in Chapter 4A (see
illustration).
2 Remove the three bolts securing the engine
t o p cover, and loosen the fourth bolt at the
rear of the engine, behind the t i m i n g belt
cover. Remove the top cover from the engine
compartment.
3 Loosen and remove the t w o bolts securing
the wiring harness brackets to the rear of the
cylinder head, and move the harness back out
of the way (see illustration).
^
If the spark plugs have been
removed
as part of
another
procedure,
place rags over
the spark
plug
holes,
to
prevent the bolts falling
into
the engine.
6.5b . . . a n d lift off t h e c o v e r
6.3 R e m o v e t h e t w o w i r i n g h a r n e s s
b r a c k e t s f r o m t h e rear of t h e head
4 Remove the t w o t o p Allen bolts securing
the timing belt upper cover to the camshaft
cover - there is no need to remove the timing
belt upper cover completely.
5 Progressively unscrew the six Ribe bolts
from the top of the camshaft cover and lift off
the cover - note the location of any supports
on the bolts (see illustrations). If it sticks, do
not attempt to lever it off - instead free it by
working around the cover and tapping it lightly
with a soft-faced mallet.
6 Recover the camshaft cover gasket.
Inspect the gasket carefully, and renew it if
damage or deterioration is evident.
7 Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder
head and camshaft cover
thoroughly,
removing all traces of oil and old gasket - take
care to avoid damaging the surfaces as you
do this.
Refitting
8 Before refitting the cover, pull out the
breather filter f r o m the breather hose
connection stub (see illustration). Clean the
filter using suitable solvent, then refit it.
9 Locate a new gasket on the cylinder head
and make sure it is correctly seated.
10 Lower the cover onto the gasket, making
sure the gasket is not displaced.
11 Insert the m o u n t i n g bolts and tighten
them progressively to the specified torque.
12 Refit the components removed for access
using a reversal of the relevant removal
procedure.
6.8 R e m o v i n g t h e b r e a t h e r filter f r o m t h e
camshaft cover
2B«8 1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
i
V
»
7.4 L u b r i c a t e t h e n e w seal, t h e n f i t over
the camshaft
7 Camshaft oil seal
renewal
I
1 Remove the timing belt and camshaft
sprocket as described in Sections 4 and 5.
2 Using a suitable h o o k e d instrument,
remove the oil seal f r o m the cylinder h e a d ,
taking care not to damage the surface of the
camshaft.
3 Clean the seating in the cylinder head and
the end of the camshaft. To prevent damage
to the new oil seal as it is being fitted, w r a p
s o m e adhesive t a p e around the end of the
camshaft and lightly oil it.
4 Dip the new oil seal in oil then locate it over
the c a m s h a f t , making sure that the sealing
lips are facing inwards (see illustration).
5 Using a suitable tubular drift, drive the oil
seal squarely into the cylinder head (see
illustration). Remove the adhesive tape from
the camshaft.
6 Refit the camshaft sprocket and timing belt
with reference to Sections 5 and 4.
"TV-
7.5 Tap t h e c a m s h a f t seal h o m e u s i n g a
large s o c k e t
2 Using a hooked instrument, remove the oil
seal from the oil p u m p housing, taking care
not to damage the surface of the crankshaft.
3 Clean the seating in the housing and the
surface of the crankshaft. To prevent damage
to the new oil seal as it is being fitted, wrap
s o m e adhesive t a p e a r o u n d t h e end of the
crankshaft and lightly oil it.
4 Dip the new oil seal in oil then offer it up to
the oil p u m p casing making sure that the
sealing lips are facing inwards.
5 Using a suitable tubular drift, drive the oil
seal squarely into the c a s i n g . Remove the
adhesive tape.
6 Refit the crankshaft s p r o c k e t and timing
belt with reference to Sections 5 and 4.
Rear (left-hand
side) oil seal
1 The front oil seal is located in the oil pump
on the front of the crankshaft. Remove the
timing belt as described in Section 4 and the
crankshaft sprocket as described in Section 5.
N o t e : The following
paragraphs
describe
renewal of the rear oil seal leaving the housing
in position. Refer to Chapter 2E for details of
removing the housing.
7 Remove the flywheel as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 10.
8 Using a suitable h o o k e d instrument,
remove the oil seal f r o m the rear oil seal
housing, taking care not to d a m a g e the
surface of the crankshaft.
9 Clean the seating in the housing and the
surface of the crankshaft, C h e c k the
crankshaft for burrs which may damage the oil
seal lip of the new seal, and if necessary use a
fine file to remove them.
10 Dip the new seal in clean engine oil and
carefully locate it over the crankshaft rear
flange, making sure that it is the correct way
round (lips facing inwards). Take care not to
9.8a Release t h e h o s e clips . . .
9.8b . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e fuel s u p p l y . . .
8 Crankshaft oil seals renewal
Front
(right-hand
side) oil seal
damage the oil seal lips as it passes over the
crankshaft flange.
11 Progressively t a p the oil seal into the
housing, keeping it square to prevent
distortion. A block of w o o d is useful for this
purpose.
12 Refit the flywheel with reference to
Section 10.
9 Cylinder head -
removal a n d refitting
N o t e : The cylinder head is secured by
bolts, which are similar in appearance to
types, but require different tools. A set of
sockets can be obtained
from good
stockists - Ribe bolts are also used on
parts of the engine.
JO
Ribe
Torx
Ribe
tool
other
Removal
1 Depressurise the fuel system, and remove
the air cleaner cover, air inlet duct and airbox
as described in Chapter 4A.
2 Disconnect the battery negative terminal
(refer to Disconnecting the battery).
3 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
4 Remove the auxiliary drivebelt as described
in Chapter 1.
5 Remove the spark plugs as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
6 Remove the timing belt from the camshaft
sprocket, using the information in Section 4.
Unless the belt has been changed recently,
remove it c o m p l e t e l y and fit a new one on
reassembly.
7 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the
throttle body as described in Chapter 4A.
8 Taking precautions against fuel spillage,
disconnect the fuel supply and return hoses
from the throttle body (the fuel supply hose is
at the front, and has an arrow indicating
direction of fuel flow) (see illustrations).
9 Disconnect the charcoal canister hose,
either at the throttle b o d y , or at the
c o n n e c t i o n above the inner w i n g (see
illustration).
10 Disconnect the warm-air supply duct from
the heat shield over the exhaust manifold. If the
manifold is to be removed from the head (see
9.8c . . . a n d r e t u r n h o s e s f r o m t h e t h r o t t l e
body
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2B«9
paragraph 17), then remove the heat shield
itself, w h i c h is secured by three nuts (see
illustration).
11 Disconnect the coolant hoses f r o m the
front and rear of the thermostat housing (see
illustrations).
12 Unscrew the hose clip and disconnect the
brake servo vacuum pipe (see illustrations).
9.13a D i s c o n n e c t t h e i g n i t i o n coil LT
w i r i n g plug . . .
9.13b . . . a n d t h e fuel i n j e c t i o n w i r i n g
9.13c D i s c o n n e c t t h e reversing light
switch . . .
9.13d . . . u n c l i p t h e HT leads . . .
13 Disconnect the following wiring:
a) Ignition coil (small wiring plug). Also
disconnect the large fuel injection system
wiring plug just behind the ignition coil
(see
illustrations).
b) Reversing light switch - on the front of the
transmission (see
illustration).
c) Detach the HT leads from the clip behind
the ignition coil (see
illustration).
d) Three wiring plugs on the throttle housing
(see
illustration).
e) Coolant temperature senders - on the lefthand end of the cylinder head (left as
seen from the driver's seat) (see
illustrations).
f) Oxygen sensor wiring plug - clipped to a
bracket at the front of the engine, below
the thermostat housing (see
illustration).
9.13e . . . a n d u n p l u g t h e w i r i n g
c o n n e c t o r s at t h e t h r o t t l e b o d y
2B»10 1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
9.13f U n p l u g t h e f u e l s y s t e m c o o l a n t
temperature sender . . .
9.13g . . . a n d t h e t e m p e r a t u r e g a u g e
sender
9.13h D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e o x y g e n s e n s o r
wiring plug
9.13i D i s c o n n e c t t h e t w o w i r i n g p l u g s
b e h i n d t h e ignition coil - o n e seen
d i s c o n n e c t e d (arrowed)
9.14a U n s c r e w t h e t o p bolt ( w h i c h also
secures the injection wiring c o n n e c t o r ) . . .
9.14b . . . a n d t h e l o w e r bolt s e c u r i n g t h e
i g n i t i o n coil w i r i n g b r a c k e t
g) Two wiring plugs on the bracket at the
rear of the ignition coil (see
illustration).
14 Remove the two bolts securing the wiring
bracket at the rear of the ignition coil (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Move the bracket clear of the
cylinder head, unclipping the connector plug
halves from it as necessary.
15 If not already d o n e , w o r k i n g along the
wiring harness at the rear of the cylinder head,
unscrew the harness clip mounting bolts and
release the harness from the head. A further
bolt secures the engine earth lead, w h i c h
must also be disconnected. When the harness
is free, lift it f r o m the rear of the head, and
m o v e it to the right of the engine c o m p a r t ment (see illustrations).
16 Free the wiring harness which runs along
t h e base of t h e inlet m a n i f o l d by p r i s i n g
open the plastic guide channel (some models
may have a cable-tie holding the channel
together) (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Work along the
harness t o w a r d s the t i m i n g belt e n d of the
engine. The fluid pipe(s) f r o m the power
steering p u m p hamper removal of the
harness, but we found that disconnecting the
pipes was unnecessary.
9.15a U n s c r e w t h e bolt b e l o w t h e w i r i n g
harness mounting bracket ( a r r o w e d ) . . .
9.15b . . . a n d d i s c o n n e c t t h e e a r t h lead
9.15c C h e c k t h a t t h e h a r n e s s is f r e e , a n d
m o v e it clear of t h e head
9.16a C u t t h e c a b l e - t i e (where f i t t e d ) . . .
17 There are various potential options
concerning the. exhaust manifold. It is possible
to remove the head with the exhaust manifold
a t t a c h e d ; alternatively, unbolt the manifold
from the head and leave the manifold attached
9.16b . . . a n d s e p a r a t e t h e plastic guide
c h a n n e l t o release t h e w i r i n g h a r n e s s
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2B«11
to the downpipe. The safest option (although
involving more work) is to remove the exhaust
manifold completely, as described.
18 Working under the car, unscrew the four
exhaust m a n i f o l d - t o - d o w n p i p e nuts, and
separate the joint (see illustration). Recover
the gasket.
19 U n s c r e w the m a n i f o l d - t o - c y l i n d e r head
nuts, and w i t h d r a w the manifold f r o m the
cylinder head, recovering the gasket.
20 In s o m e cases, the manifold s t u d s will
c o m e out with the nuts - this poses no great
problem, and the studs can be refitted if they
are in g o o d c o n d i t i o n . For preference,
however, a c o m p l e t e set of manifold and
downpipe studs and nuts should be obtained
as required, as the old ones are likely to be in
less-than-perfect condition.
21 If the d o w n p i p e is lowered to the floor,
check that the wiring to the oxygen sensor (at
the top of the downpipe) is not placed under
strain. The wiring plug has already been
disconnected, so feed the wiring through.
22 Remove the bolt securing the upper end
of the engine oil dipstick tube to the cylinder
head, then pull the tube upwards to remove it
(see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Removing the t u b e may
displace the seal at the base of the tube - if
so, refit it now or store it with the t u b e for
refitting.
23 Check around the head that there are no
further wires, hoses or other o b s t r u c t i o n s
which will prevent the head from being lifted
off.
24 Unscrew the cylinder head Ribe bolts half
a turn at a time, in the reverse order to that
shown in illustration 9.42. When the bolts are
free, remove them with their washers.
25 Lift the cylinder head f r o m the block,
together with the inlet manifold. If it is stuck
tight, insert pieces of w o o d into the exhaust
ports (if possible), and use them as levers to
rock the head off the block. On no account
drive levers into the gasket joint, nor attempt
to tap the head sideways, as it is located on
positioning dowels.
26 Remove and d i s c a r d the cylinder head
gasket and the manifold gaskets.
27 The cylinder head can be dismantled after
removing the camshaft and cam followers as
described in Chapter 2E. Further dismantling
and d e c a r b o n i s i n g are also d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 2E.
Preparation
for
9.18 Exhaust m a n i f o l d - t o - d o w n p i p e j o i n t
9.22 D i p s t i c k t u b e m o u n t i n g bolt
to the engine's components. Using adhesive
tape and paper, seal the water, oil and bolt
holes in the cylinder block.
31 To prevent c a r b o n entering the g a p
between the pistons and bores, smear a little
grease in the gap. After cleaning each piston,
use a small brush to remove all traces of
grease and c a r b o n from the gap, then wipe
away the remainder with a clean rag. Clean all
the pistons in the same way.
liquid in them, the block could be .cracked by
hydraulic pressure when the head bolts are
tightened.
37 C h e c k that the c a m s h a f t marks m a d e
during dismantling (see Section 4) are aligned.
38 The new gasket should not be removed
from its plastic bag until required for use. Fit
the gasket dry - no grease or sealant should
be used.
39 Place the gasket on the cylinder block so
that the word ALTO can be read from above.
40 Lower the cylinder head onto the block so
that it locates on the positioning dowels.
41 Ensure that the cylinder head bolts are
cleaned of all debris, and check the threads
for signs of damage. Especially if it is known
that the bolts have been removed previously,
it is advisable to renew all ten bolts as a set,
rather than risk the bolts shearing w h e n
tightened.
32 Check the mating surfaces of the cylinder
block and the cylinder head for nicks, deep
scratches and other d a m a g e . If slight, they
may be removed carefully with a file, but if
excessive, machining may be the only
alternative to renewal.
33 If w a r p a g e of the cylinder head gasket
surface is suspected, use a straight-edge to
check it for distortion. Refer to Part E of this
Chapter if necessary.
34 Check the condition of the cylinder head
bolts, and particularly their threads, whenever
they are removed. Wash the bolts in a suitable
solvent, and wipe t h e m dry. Check each bolt
for any sign of visible wear or d a m a g e ,
renewing them if necessary.
Refitting
35 Before refitting the a s s e m b l e d cylinder
head, m a k e sure that the head and b l o c k
mating surfaces are perfectly clean.
36 The bolt holes in the cylinder block must
be m o p p e d out to clear any oil or coolant. If
the bolt holes have any significant amount of
42 Lightly oil the bolt t h r e a d s . S c r e w the
bolts in finger-tight, and tighten t h e m in the
sequence shown to the Stage 1 torque (see
illustration).
43 When all ten bolts have been tightened to
the Stage 1 t o r q u e , go round again in
sequence and tighten to the Stage 2 torque.
4 4 Again w o r k i n g in s e q u e n c e , tighten t h e
bolts t h r o u g h the specified Stage 3 angle.
Note that 90° is equivalent to a quarter-turn or
right-angle, making it easy to judge by noting
t h e initial position of t h e s o c k e t handle. If
available, use an angle g a u g e fitted to the
socket handle for maximum accuracy.
refitting
28 The mating faces of the cylinder head and
cylinder block must be perfectly clean before
refitting the head. Use a hard plastic or
wooden scraper to remove all traces of gasket
and carbon; also clean the piston crowns.
29 Take particular care w h e n cleaning the
piston crowns, as the soft aluminium alloy is
easily damaged.
30 Make sure that the carbon is not allowed
to enter the oil and water passages - this is
particularly i m p o r t a n t for t h e lubrication
system, as carbon could block the oil supply
9.42 Cylinder h e a d b o l t t i g h t e n i n g s e q u e n c e
2B
2B«12 1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures
45 With all ten bolts tightened to Stage 3, go
r o u n d o n c e more and t i g h t e n all bolts in
sequence to the Stage 4 angle.
46 When all the bolts are fully tightened, refit
the camshaft cover as described in Section 6.
47 Refit the exhaust m a n i f o l d , using new
gaskets, s t u d s and nuts, as a p p r o p r i a t e
a c c o r d i n g to how the manifold
was
separated. Tighten all nuts securely.
48 Further refitting is a reversal of removal.
Ensure that all wiring and hoses are correctly
routed and securely r e c o n n e c t e d . Refer to
Section 4 when refitting the timing belt, and to
Chapter 1 when refitting the spark plugs and
auxiliary drivebelt, and w h e n refilling the
cooling system.
11.15 V i e w of t h e rear e n g i n e m o u n t i n g ,
s h o w i n g t h e t h r o u g h - b o l t (centre) a n d t w o
mounting-to-body bolts
remove the three bolts securing the mounting
to the body, and remove it.
9 Locate the new mounting on the body, then
insert the mounting-to-body bolts and tighten
by hand.
10 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the mounting. Refit the nut and tighten to
the specified t o r q u e , then tighten the
mounting-to-body bolts.
10 Flywheel removal, inspection
and refitting
Refer to Part A, Section 1 1 .
11 Engine mountings inspection and renewal
Front mounting
^
11 Remove the trolley jack and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
Left-hand/rear
Inspection
1 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle
support).
2 Check the mounting rubbers to see if they
are cracked, hardened or separated from the
metal at any point; renew the mounting if any
such damage or deterioration is evident.
3 Check that all the mounting's fasteners are
securely t i g h t e n e d ; use a t o r q u e w r e n c h to
check if possible.
4 Using a large screwdriver or a crowbar,
check for wear in the mounting by carefully
levering against it to check for free play. Where
this is not possible enlist the aid of an assistant
t o move the engine/transmission back and
forth, or from side to side, while you watch the
mounting. While s o m e free play is to be
expected even from new components, excessive wear should be obvious. If excessive free
play is found, check first that the fasteners are
correctly secured, then renew any worn c o m ponents as described below.
12 Sump removal and refitting
^
^
mounting
12 Raise the front of the vehicle and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
13 Place a trolley jack beneath the t r a n s mission, with a block of w o o d on the jack
head. Raise the jack until it is supporting the
weight of the engine/transmission.
14 U n s c r e w the t h r o u g h - b o l t securing the
transmission bracket to the m o u n t i n g , and
recover the washers.
15 Unscrew the t w o bolts securing the lefthand mounting to the body (see illustration).
16 Lower the transmission sufficiently to
remove the mounting from the transmission
bracket.
17 Locate the new mounting in position, and
loosely refit the mounting-to-body bolts.
18 Raise the engine/transmission and refit
the through-bolt securing the bracket to the
m o u n t i n g . Tighten the bolt to the specified
t o r q u e , then tighten the m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y
bolts.
19 Remove the trolley jack and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
Renewal
Removal
1 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands. Drain the engine oil.
2 Unscrew the s u m p securing bolts and pull
the s u m p d o w n w a r d s past the exhaust pipe
t o remove it. The joint sealant will require
cutting with a sharp knife to release the pan.
Refitting
3 Clean away all old gasket material, from the
sump pan and from the base of the block.
4 Apply a bead of RTV silicone instant gasket
3 m m in diameter to the s u m p flange. The
bead of sealant should pass around the inside
of the s u m p bolt holes (see illustration).
5 Fit the sump, screw in the fixing bolts and
tighten in a diagonal s e q u e n c e to the
specified torque.
6 Wait one hour for the gasket c o m p o u n d to
harden before filling with oil.
7 Lower the vehicle to the ground and fill the
engine with oil (see Chapter 1). Check the oil
level after running the engine for a few
minutes, as described in Weekly checks.
13 Oil pump and pick-up tube removal and refitting
Right-hand mounting
5 Raise the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands (see Jacking and
vehicle
support).
6 Place a trolley jack beneath the right-hand
side of the engine, with a block of w o o d on
the j a c k h e a d . Raise the jack until it is
supporting the weight of the engine.
7 W o r k i n g f r o m below, unscrew the nut
securing the engine bracket to the mounting.
8 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the engine bracket from the m o u n t i n g , then
20 Raise the front of the vehicle and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
21 Place a trolley j a c k beneath the engine/
transmission flange, with a block of w o o d on
the jack head. Raise the j a c k until it is
s u p p o r t i n g the w e i g h t of the engine and
transmission.
22 W o r k i n g f r o m b e l o w , unscrew the nut
securing the bracket to the mounting.
23 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the bracket from the mounting, then remove the
three bolts securing the mounting to the body,
and remove it.
24 Locate the new m o u n t i n g on the body,
then insert the m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y bolts and
tighten by hand.
25 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the mounting. Refit the nut and tighten to
the specified t o r q u e , then tighten the
mounting-to-body bolts.
26 Remove the trolley jack and lower the
vehicle to the ground.
|g
^
Removal
12.4 A p p l y i n g sealant t o t h e s u m p f l a n g e
1 Drain the engine oil and remove the s u m p
as described in Section 12.
2 Unbolt and remove the oil p i c k - u p / f i l t e r
screen assembly. Note the sealing washer.
3 Unscrew and remove the oil filter cartridge
(see Chapter 1).
1.4 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2B»13
13.8 U s i n g an i m p a c t s c r e w d r i v e r t o
r e m o v e t h e oil p u m p rear c o v e r plate
screws
13.9a M e a s u r i n g oil p u m p o u t e r g e a r - t o pump housing clearance
13.9b M e a s u r i n g oil p u m p gear e n d f l o a t
4 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
5 Remove the crankshaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Section 5.
6 Extract the oil p u m p fixing bolts, noting
their locations (there are four long bolts, and
four short ones). W i t h d r a w the p u m p and
remove the gasket.
11 Apply air pressure from a tyre pump to the
011 pump oil ducts, to clear any sludge or other
material. If any solvents are used, the p u m p
must be allowed to dry t h o r o u g h l y before
refitting.
12 Prime the p u m p by pouring clean engine
oil into its inlet duct, at the same time turning
the oil p u m p inner gear with your fingers.
13 Lever out the oil seal, and drive a new one
squarely into the oil p u m p casing (see
illustration). Lubricate the oil seal lips.
check and top-up the oil level as described in
Inspection
7 The oil pump incorporates a pressure relief
valve, which can be removed for examination
by u n s c r e w i n g the plug and pulling out the
spring and valve.
8 If p u m p wear is suspected, check the gears
in the following way. Extract the five fixing
s c r e w s a n d r e m o v e t h e rear c o v e r p l a t e .
The screws are very tight, and will probably
require the use of an impact screwdriver (see
illustration).
Refitting
10 If the pump is unworn, refit the rear cover
plate and tighten the screws fully.
14 Clean all t r a c e s of old gasket f r o m the
p u m p and the mating surfaces on the cylinder
block.
15 Bolt the p u m p into position using a new
joint gasket. Insert the four longer bolts into
the positions noted on removal, and tighten all
to the specified torques.
16 Bolt on the oil pick-up assembly using a
new sealing washer.
17 Refit
the
crankshaft
sprocket
as
described in Section 5.
18 Fit and tension the t i m i n g belt as
described in Section 4.
19 Fit the sump as described in Section 12.
20 Screw on a new oil filter cartridge, and fill
the engine with oil (see Chapter 1).
21 Run the engine for a few minutes, then
13.13 U s i n g a s o c k e t t o fit a n e w oil seal
t o t h e oil p u m p
14.1 Oil p r e s s u r e s w i t c h (arrowed) seen w i t h inlet m a n i f o l d r e m o v e d
9 Check the clearance b e t w e e n the outer
gear and the p u m p housing using feeler
blades. Check the gear endfloat by placing a
s t r a i g h t - e d g e across the p u m p body, and
checking the gap between the straight-edge
and gear face (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If the
clearances
are
outside
the
specified
tolerance, renew the oil pump complete.
Weekly checks.
14 Oil pressure switch removal and refitting
1
Removal
1 The oil pressure s w i t c h is located at the
rear of the engine block, next to the k n o c k
sensor (see illustration). Access to the switch
is hampered by the inlet manifold.
2 Disconnect the s w i t c h wiring c o n n e c t o r
(see illustration).
3 U n s c r e w the s w i t c h f r o m the block, and
remove it.
4 Clean the switch location in the block as far
as possible. If the s w i t c h is to be refitted,
clean its threads.
5 Examine the switch for signs of cracking or
splits. If the top part of the switch is loose, this
is an early indication of impending failure.
Refitting
6 Apply a smear of sealant to the threads of
the s w i t c h , then screw it into place and
tighten to the specified torque.
7 Reconnect the switch wiring on completion.
14.2 D i s c o n n e c t t h e s w i t c h w i r i n g
connector
2A»1
Chapter 2 Part A:
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Contents
Auxiliary drivebelts - removal and refitting
See Chapter 1
Camshaft oil seal - renewal
6
Camshafts and tappets - removal, inspection and refitting
9
Crankshaft oil seals - renewal
7
Cylinder compression test
3
Cylinder head - dismantling and overhaul
See Chapter 2E
Cylinder head - removal and refitting
-.
10
Cylinder head extension - removal and refitting
8
Engine assembly/valve timing holes - general information and
usage
2
Engine mountings - inspection and renewal
12
Engine oil and filter - renewal
See Chapter 1
Engine oil level - check
See Weekly checks
Flywheel - removal, inspection and refitting
11
General information
1
Oil pressure switch - removal and refitting
15
Oil pump and pick-up tube - removal and refitting
14
Sump - removal and refitting
13
Timing belt and covers - removal and refitting
4
Timing belt tensioner and sprockets - removal and refitting
5
Degrees of difficulty
Easy, suitable for
novice with little
f?
experience
Fairty easy, suitable
Fairty difficult,
for beginner with
suitable for competent
| N,
s o m e experience
DIY mechanic
^
g^
Difficult, suitable for
V e r y difficult,
experienced DIY
suitable for expert DIY
3^
mechanic
or professional
g^
Specifications
General
Engine code*
Bore
Stroke
Capacity
Compression ratio
Firing order
No 1 cylinder location
*Note: See 'Vehicle Identification
numbers'
182.B2.000
70.8 m m
78.86 mm
1242 cc
10.2:1
1-3-4-2
Timing belt end of engine
for the location of code marking on the engine.
Lubrication system
Oil p u m p type
Outer rotor-to-housing clearance
Axial clearance
Bi-rotor driven from front of crankshaft
0.100 to 0.210 m m
0.025 to 0.070 m m
Camshafts
Drive
No of bearings
Camshaft bearing journal diameters:
No 1 bearing
No 2 bearing
No 3 bearing
Camshaft bearing journal running clearance
Camshaft endfloat
Toothed belt to exhaust camshaft, gear drive to inlet camshaft
3
35.000 to 35.015 m m
48.000 to 48.015 m m
49.000 to 49.015 m m
0.030 to 0.070 mm
0.15 to 0.34 mm
Cylinder head extensions
Camshaft bearing diameters:
No 1 bearing
No 2 bearing
No 3 bearing
Hydraulic tappet diameter
Hydraulic tappet bore diameter
Hydraulic tappet running clearance
35.045 to 35.070 m m
48.045 to 48.070 m m
49.045 to 49.070 m m
28.353 to 28.370 m m
28.400 to 28.421 m m
0.046 to 0.051 mm
^
2A«2 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
Torque wrench settings
Air conditioning compressor mounting bracket-to-block
Auxiliary drivebelt pulley bolts
Big-end (connecting rod) bearing cap bolts
Camshaft bearing caps
Camshaft gears
Camshaft sprocket
Crankshaft sprocket centre bolt (left-hand thread):
Stage 1
Stage 2
Cylinder head:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Cylinder head extension to cylinder head
Dipstick tube nut and bolt
Engine/transmission mountings:
Mounting brackets to transmission:
M10 bolts
M12 bolts
Mounting through-bolts
Mountings to bodyshell
Right-hand mounting bracket to block
Right-hand mounting reaction rod
Exhaust manifold nuts
Flywheel*
Inlet manifold nuts
Main bearing cap bolts:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Oil pressure switch
Oil pump bolts
Sump bolts
Timing belt tensioner nut
"Although not specifically recommended by FIAT, use locking fluid.
1 General information
Using this
Chapter
Chapter 2 is divided into five Parts: A to E.
Repair operations that can be carried out with
the engine in the vehicle are d e s c r i b e d in
Parts A to D. Part E covers the removal of the
engine/transmission as a unit, and describes
the engine dismantling and overhaul p r o cedures.
In Parts A to D, the a s s u m p t i o n is m a d e
that the engine is installed in the vehicle, with
all ancillaries c o n n e c t e d . If the engine has
been r e m o v e d for overhaul, the preliminary
dismantling information which precedes each
operation may be ignored.
Engine
description
T h e 1.2 litre engine is a w a t e r - c o o l e d ,
d o u b l e overhead camshaft, in-line fourcylinder unit, with cast-iron cylinder block and
aluminium-alloy cylinder h e a d . The unit is
m o u n t e d transversely at the front of the
vehicle, with the transmission bolted to the
left-hand side of the engine.
The cylinder head houses the eight inlet
Nm
ibf ft
20
Angle-tighten a further 90°
15
20
30
Angle-tighten a further 90°
Angle-tighten a further 90°
15
9
15
22
11
7
50
85
80
32
50
28
27
44
15
37
63
59
24
37
21
20
32
11
40
Angle-tighten a further 90°
32
9
10
25
30
50
22
41
15
120
120
and eight exhaust valves, which are closed by
single coil springs, and w h i c h run in guides
pressed into the cylinder head. The t w o
c a m s h a f t s are housed in a cylinder head
extension w h i c h is bolted t o the t o p of the
cylinder head. The exhaust camshaft is driven
by a toothed timing belt and in turn drives the
inlet camshaft via a pair of gears located at
the left-hand end of the cylinder head
extension. The c a m s h a f t s each have three
bearings, and actuate the valves directly via
self-adjusting hydraulic t a p p e t s m o u n t e d in
the cylinder head extension.
The crankshaft is s u p p o r t e d by five main
bearings, and endfloat is c o n t r o l l e d by the
thrust flanges fitted to the upper half of the
centre main bearing shell.
Engine coolant is circulated by a p u m p ,
driven by the timing belt. For details of the
cooling system, refer to Chapter 3.
Lubricant is circulated under pressure by a
pump, driven from the front of the crankshaft.
Oil is drawn from the sump through a strainer,
and then f o r c e d t h r o u g h an externallym o u n t e d , replaceable s c r e w - o n filter. From
there, it is distributed to the cylinder head and
cylinder head extension, where it lubricates
the camshaft journals and tappets, and also to
the c r a n k c a s e , where it lubricates the main
bearings, connecting rod big and small-ends,
37
16
30
11
89
89
24
7
7
18
gudgeon pins and cylinder bores. Oil jets are
fitted to the base of each cylinder bore - these
spray oil onto the underside of the pistons, to
improve cooling.
Repair operations
the engine in the
possible
car
with
The following work can be carried out with
the engine in the car:
a) Auxiliary drivebelt - removal and refitting
(refer to Chapter 1).
b) Oil pump and pick-up tube assembly removal, inspection and refitting.
c) Timing belt and covers - removal and
refitting.
d) Timing belt tensioner and sprockets removal and refitting.
e) Cylinder head - removal and refitting".
f) Cylinder head extension - removal and
refitting.
g) Camshaft and tappets - removal and
refitting.
h) Camshaft oil seal - renewal.
i) Crankshaft oil seals - renewal.
j) Flywheel - removal, inspection and
refitting.
kj Engine mountings - inspection and
renewal.
I) Sump - removal and refitting.
'Cylinder head dismantling
procedures
are
detailed in Chapter 2E.
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2A«3
N o t e 1: It is possible to remove the pistons
and connecting
rods (after removing
the
cylinder head and sump) without removing the
engine. However, this is not
recommended.
Work of this nature is more easily and
thoroughly completed with the engine on the
bench, as described in Chapter 2E.
N o t e 2: Many of the procedures
in this
Chapter entail the use of numerous
special
tools. Where possible, suitable alternatives are
described
with details of their
fabrication.
Before starting any operations on the engine,
read through the entire procedure
first to
familiarise yourself with the work involved,
tools to be obtained and new parts that may
be necessary.
2 Engine assembly/
valve timing holes general information and usage
N o t e : Do not attempt to rotate the engine
whilst the camshafts are locked in position. If
the engine is to be left in this state for a long
period of time, it is a good idea to place
suitable warning notices inside the vehicle,
and in the engine compartment.
This will
reduce the possibility
of the engine
being
accidentally
cranked on the starter
motor,
which is likely to cause damage with the
locking tools in place.
1 To accurately set the valve t i m i n g for all
operations requiring removal and refitting of
the timing belt, timing holes are drilled in the
camshafts and cylinder head extension. The
holes are used in conjunction with camshaft
locking tools and crankshaft positioning rods
to lock the camshafts when all the pistons are
positioned at the m i d - p o i n t of their stroke.
This arrangement prevents the possibility of
the valves c o n t a c t i n g the p i s t o n s w h e n
refitting the cylinder head or timing belt, and
also ensures that the correct valve timing can
be obtained. The design of the engine is such
that there are no conventional timing marks
on the crankshaft or camshaft s p r o c k e t s to
indicate the normal TDC position. Therefore,
for any work on the timing belt, camshafts or
cylinder head, the locking and positioning
tools must be used.
2 The special FIAT tools for setting the
c a m s h a f t s and pistons consist of t w o rods
which slide in sleeves that are screwed into
No 1 and No 2 cylinder spark plug holes. The
rods are pushed d o w n to contact the pistons,
and the crankshaft is then turned until both
rods protrude from their sleeves by the same
a m o u n t . With the crankshaft correctly set,
t w o camshaft locking pins are used, one for
the inlet camshaft and one for the exhaust
camshaft. The pins are screwed into holes on
each side of the cylinder head extension so
that they engage with slots machined in the
c a m s h a f t s . The arrangement of the FIAT
special tools are s h o w n (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) .
The tool numbers are as follows:
2.2a A r r a n g e m e n t of FIAT special t o o l s for s e t t i n g t h e p i s t o n p o s i t i o n a n d l o c k i n g t h e
camshafts
Camshaft locking tools - 1860985000
Piston positioning tool - 1860992000
3 A l t h o u g h the special FIAT tools are
relatively inexpensive and should be readily
available from FIAT dealers, it is possible to
fabricate suitable alternatives, with the help of
a local machine s h o p , as d e s c r i b e d below.
O n c e the tools have been m a d e up, their
usage is described in the relevant Sections of
this Chapter where the tools are required.
2.2b FIAT special t o o l f o r s e t t i n g p i s t o n
position . . .
Camshaft
fabrication
locking
tool
4 Remove the air cleaner, inlet air duct and
resonator as described in Chapter 4B.
5 U n s c r e w the sealing plug f r o m the front
face of the cylinder head extension.
6 Using the sealing plug as a pattern, obtain a
length of threaded dowel rod or t w o suitable
bolts to screw into the sealing plug hole. With
2.2c . . . a n d l o c k i n g t h e c a m s h a f t s
2A«4 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
bore or piston wear is responsible for t h e
pressure loss. No improvement suggests that
leaking or burnt valves, or a b l o w n head
gasket, may be to blame.
10 A low reading from t w o adjacent cylinders
is almost certainly d u e t o t h e head gasket
having blown between them; the presence of
coolant in the engine oil will confirm this.
11 If one cylinder is about 20 percent lower
than the others and t h e engine has a slightly
rough idle, a worn camshaft lobe could be the
cause.
12 On completion of the test, refit the spark
plugs and reconnect t h e ignition LT wiring
plug.
Suitable roll pin for
2.6a T o m a k e a n alternative c a m s h a f t
locking t o o l . . .
the help of a machine shop or engineering
works, make up the camshaft locking tools by
having the dowel rod or bolts machined to the
dimensions s h o w n (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Note
that two will be needed, one for each camshaft.
Crankshaft
fabrication
setting
tool
7 To make the crankshaft setting tools, four
old spark plugs will be required, together with
four lengths of dowel rod. The length of each
dowel rod is not critical, but it must be long
enough to protrude about 100 m m above the
t o p of t h e cylinder head extension w h e n
resting o n t o p of a piston located half w a y
d o w n its bore. What is critical, however, is
that all four dowel rods must be e x a c t l y the
same length.
8 Break off the ceramic upper section of each
plug, a n d remove t h e centre electrode and
earth t i p . The easiest w a y t o d o this is t o
m o u n t each s p a r k plug in a vice (after
removing the ceramic upper plug section) and
drill a hole d o w n t h r o u g h t h e centre of the
plug. The diameter of t h e drill bit should be
the same as the diameter of the dowel rod t o
be used. When finished, you should have four
spark plug bodies a n d four equal-length
dowel rods which will slide through the centre
of the spark plugs.
3 Cylinder compression test
25
A l l d i m e n s i o n s In m m
H 31234
2.6b . . . have suitable d o w e l r o d s or b o l t s
machined to the dimensions shown
4 Fit a c o m p r e s s i o n tester t o the No 1
cylinder spark plug hole - the type of tester
w h i c h s c r e w s into t h e plug thread is t o be
preferred.
5 Have t h e assistant hold the throttle w i d e
o p e n , a n d crank the engine on the starter
motor; after o n e or t w o revolutions, t h e
c o m p r e s s i o n pressure should build up t o a
m a x i m u m figure, and then stabilise. Record
the highest reading obtained.
6 Repeat the test on the remaining cylinders,
recording the pressure in each.
7 All cylinders should p r o d u c e very similar
pressures; any excessive difference indicates
the existence of a fault. Note that the
c o m p r e s s i o n should build up quickly in a
healthy engine; low compression on the first
stroke, f o l l o w e d by gradually increasing
pressure o n successive strokes, indicates
worn piston rings. A low compression reading
on t h e first stroke, w h i c h does not build up
during successive strokes, indicates leaking
valves or a b l o w n head gasket (a c r a c k e d
head could also be the cause).
8 If the pressure in any cylinder is very low,
carry out the following test t o isolate t h e
cause. I n t r o d u c e a t e a s p o o n f u l of clean oil
into that cylinder through its spark plug hole
and repeat the test.
9 If the addition of oil temporarily improves
the compression pressure, this indicates that
1 W h e n engine p e r f o r m a n c e is d o w n , or if
misfiring occurs which cannot be attributed to
the ignition or fuel s y s t e m s , a c o m p r e s s i o n
test can provide d i a g n o s t i c clues as t o t h e
engine's c o n d i t i o n . If t h e test is p e r f o r m e d
regularly, it can give warning of trouble before
any other symptoms become apparent.
2 The engine must be fully w a r m e d - u p t o
normal operating temperature, the battery must
be fully c h a r g e d , a n d all t h e s p a r k plugs
m u s t be removed (Chapter 1). The aid of an
assistant will also be required.
3 Disable
the
ignition
system
by
d i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e LT wiring plug t o t h e
ignition coil unit.
4.8 U n d o t h e t h r e e b o l t s a n d r e m o v e t h e
c r a n k s h a f t pulley f r o m t h e s p r o c k e t
4
Timing belt and covers removal and refitting
General
g^>
information
1 The function of the timing belt is to drive the
camshafts and coolant pump. Should the belt
slip or break in service, the valve timing will be
d i s t u r b e d a n d p i s t o n - t o - v a l v e c o n t a c t will
occur, resulting in serious engine damage.
2 The timing belt should be renewed at the
specified intervals (see Chapter 1), or earlier if
it is contaminated with oil, or if it is at all noisy
in operation (a scraping noise due to uneven
wear).
3 If the t i m i n g belt is being r e m o v e d , it is a
wise precaution to check the condition of the
coolant p u m p at the same time (check for
signs of coolant leakage). This may avoid the
need t o remove the timing belt again at a later
stage, should the coolant p u m p fail.
4 Before carrying out this procedure, it will be
necessary t o obtain or fabricate suitable
camshaft locking tools and piston positioning
tools as d e s c r i b e d in S e c t i o n 2. The
procedures contained in this Section depict
the use of the h o m e - m a d e alternative tools
described in Section 2, which were fabricated
in the Haynes workshop. If the manufacturers
tools are being used instead, the procedures
are virtually identical. Do not a t t e m p t t o
remove the timing belt unless the special tools
or their alternatives are available.
Removal
5 D i s c o n n e c t the battery negative terminal
(refer to Disconnecting the battery).
6 Remove t h e auxiliary
drivebelts as
described in Chapter 1 .
7 Remove the air cleaner, inlet air d u c t and
resonator as described in Chapter 4B.
8 U n d o the three bolts and remove t h e
crankshaft pulley f r o m the s p r o c k e t (see
illustration).
9 Undo the retaining bolt in the centre of the
lower timing cover (see illustration).
10 Undo t h e upper t i m i n g cover upper
retaining bolt, a n d the rear retaining bolt
located
above
the
alternator
(see
illustration).
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2A«5
4.9 U n d o t h e retaining bolt in t h e c e n t r e of
the lower timing cover
4.10 U n d o t h e u p p e r t i m i n g c o v e r u p p e r
r e t a i n i n g bolt, a n d t h e rear retaining bolt
4.11a Release t h e c r a n k s h a f t T D C s e n s o r
wiring f r o m the clip on the upper timing
cover...
***** r
d
''Jiff
4.11b . . . t h e n slide t h e w i r i n g p l u g a n d
s o c k e t f r o m t h e t i m i n g c o v e r slot
4.12a R e m o v e t h e u p p e r . . .
4.12b . . . a n d l o w e r t i m i n g c o v e r s
11 Release the crankshaft TDC sensor wiring
from the clip on the upper timing cover, then
w i t h d r a w the cover slightly and slide the
wiring plug and socket from the timing cover
slot (see illustrations).
12 Release the TDC sensor wiring from the
periphery of the upper and lower t i m i n g
covers, and remove both covers (see
illustrations).
13 Free the accelerator inner cable from the
throttle c a m , remove the outer cable spring
clip, then pull the outer cable out f r o m its
mounting bracket rubber grommet.
14 From the side of the throttle body,
d i s c o n n e c t the wiring c o n n e c t o r s f r o m the
throttle p o t e n t i o m e t e r and the idle control
stepper motor. D i s c o n n e c t the coolant
temperature sensor wiring connector located
in the inlet manifold below the throttle body,
and disconnect the brake servo vacuum hose.
15 Disconnect the wiring connectors for the
fuel injector harness and the intake air
temperature/pressure
sensor,
then
d i s c o n n e c t the fuel pressure regulator
vacuum hose and the EVAP purge valve hose.
16 U n d o the t w o bolts securing the plastic
inlet manifold upper section to the lower
section. Release the spark plug HT lead from
the location g r o o v e in the manifold upper
section, then lift the upper section, complete
with throttle body, off the engine. Recover the
O-rings from the manifold ports.
17 Unscrew the t w o bolts securing the fuel
rail assembly to the inlet manifold lower
section, then carefully pull the injectors from
the m a n i f o l d . Lift the fuel rail and injector
assembly, with fuel hoses still connected, and
position it to one side.
18 U n d o the bolts securing the engine
management ECU mounting brackets to the
body, and move the ECU to one side without
disconnecting the wiring connector.
19 Remove the spark plugs as described in
Chapter 1.
20 Unscrew the t w o sealing plugs from the
front and rear of the cylinder head extension
to enable the camshaft locking tools to be
inserted.
21 Screw the spark plug bodies of the homemade piston positioning tools into each spark
plug hole, and insert the dowel rods into each
body. To keep the dowel rods vertical, locate
a suitable washer or similar over the rod and
into the recess at the t o p of the spark plug
hole. In the photos shown here, an old valve
stem oil seal housing was used, but anything
similar will suffice (see illustrations).
4.21a S c r e w t h e s p a r k p l u g b o d i e s of t h e
home-made piston positioning tools into
e a c h s p a r k plug hole . . .
4.21b . . . p l a c e a s u i t a b l e w a s h e r or
similar into t h e r e c e s s t o k e e p t h e d o w e l
rod v e r t i c a l . . .
4.21c
. t h e n insert t h e d o w e l r o d s
2A»6 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
4.22 Place a s t r a i g h t e d g e a l o n g t h e t o p of
t h e r o d s a n d t u r n t h e c r a n k s h a f t until t h e
s t r a i g h t e d g e c o n t a c t s all f o u r r o d s
4.24a S c r e w in t h e c a m s h a f t l o c k i n g t o o l s
into t h e t i m i n g holes in t h e cylinder head
extension
4.24b T h e t o o l s e n g a g e in t h e c a m s h a f t
slots w h e n f i t t e d ( s h o w n r e m o v e d for
clarity)
22 Using a socket on the crankshaft sprocket
centre bolt, turn the crankshaft in the normal
direction of rotation until all four dowel rods
are p r o t r u d i n g f r o m the t o p of the cylinder
head extension by the same amount. As the
engine is turned, t w o of the rods will move up,
and t w o will move d o w n until the position is
reached where they are all at the same height.
The best way t o c h e c k this is to place a
straight-edge along the t o p of the rods and
turn the crankshaft very slowly until the
s t r a i g h t - e d g e c o n t a c t s all four rods (see
illustration).
camshafts. To allow the tools to be screwed
fully into engagement, it may be necessary to
m o v e the crankshaft in one direction or
another very slightly until the tools are felt to
engage fully (see illustrations).
25 Release the nut on the t i m i n g belt
tensioner to release the tension on the belt
(see illustration).
26 If the t i m i n g belt is to be r e - u s e d , use
white paint or chalk to mark the direction of
rotation on the belt (if markings do not already
exist), then slip the belt off the sprockets (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Note that the crankshaft must
not be rotated whilst the belt is removed.
27 Check the timing belt carefully for any
signs of uneven wear, splitting, or oil
contamination. Pay particular attention to the
roots of the t e e t h . Renew it if there is the
slightest d o u b t about its c o n d i t i o n . If the
engine is undergoing an overhaul, renew the
belt as a matter of course, regardless of its
apparent condition. The cost of a new belt is
nothing c o m p a r e d with the cost of repairs,
should the belt break in service. If signs of oil
contamination are found, trace the source of
the oil leak and rectify it. Wash d o w n the
engine t i m i n g belt area and all related
components, to remove all traces of oil.
29 The camshaft sprocket retaining bolt must
now be slackened to allow the s p r o c k e t to
m o v e as the timing belt is refitted and
t e n s i o n e d . To hold the s p r o c k e t stationary
while the retaining bolt is loosened, make up a
tool as follows and engage it with the holes in
the sprocket (see T o o l Tip). With the sprocket
held, slacken the retaining bolt.
23 When all four rods are at the same height,
all the pistons will be at the mid-point of their
stroke. Using a screwdriver or similar inserted
into the front timing hole in the cylinder head
e x t e n s i o n , c h e c k that the t i m i n g slot in the
exhaust c a m s h a f t is a p p r o x i m a t e l y aligned
with the t i m i n g hole. If the camshaft slot
c a n n o t be felt, turn the crankshaft t h r o u g h
one complete revolution and realign the dowel
rods using the straight-edge. Check again for
the camshaft slot. Note that, although the
pistons can be at the mid-point of their stroke
t w i c e for each cycle of the engine, the
camshaft slots will only be p o s i t i o n e d
correctly once per cycle.
24 With the pistons correctly set, it should
now be possible to screw in the camshaft
locking tools into the timing holes in the
cylinder head e x t e n s i o n . To provide the
necessary degree of timing accuracy, the
machined ends of the locking tools are a very
close fit in the slots m a c h i n e d in the
4.25 Release t h e n u t o n t h e t i m i n g belt
t e n s i o n e r (arrowed)
30 Check that the pistons are still correctly
positioned at the mid-point of their stroke and
that the camshafts are locked with the locking
tools.
31 Ensuring that the direction markings on
the timing belt point in the normal direction of
engine rotation, engage the timing belt with
the crankshaft s p r o c k e t first, then place it
around the coolant p u m p s p r o c k e t and the
camshaft sprocket (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Finally
slip the belt around the tensioner pulley.
TOOL
Refitting
28 Before refitting, t h o r o u g h l y clean the
timing belt s p r o c k e t s . Check that the
tensioner pulley rotates freely, w i t h o u t any
sign of roughness. If necessary, renew the
tensioner pulley as described in Section 5.
4.26 Slip t h e t i m i n g belt off t h e s p r o c k e t s
To make a camshaft
sprocket
holding
tool, obtain two lengths of steel
strip
about 6 mm thick by 30 mm wide or
similar, one 600 mm long, the
other
200 mm long (all dimensions
approximate). Bolt the two strips together
to
form a forked
end, leaving
the
bolt
slack so that the shorter strip can pivot
freely. At the end of each 'prong' of the
fork, secure a bolt with a nut and a
locknut, to act as the fulcrums;
these
will engage
with the cut-outs
in the
sprocket, and should protrude by about
30 mm
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2A»7
4.31 Fit t h e n e w belt a r o u n d t h e s p r o c k e t s
observing the direction markings
4.32 Using r i g h t - a n g l e d c i r c l i p pliers, t u r n
t h e t e n s i o n e r pulley t o fully t e n s i o n t h e belt
4.33 H o l d i n g t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t w i t h
t h e t o o l d e s c r i b e d previously w h i l e
t i g h t e n i n g t h e s p r o c k e t bolt
32 Insert the j a w s of a pair of right-angled
circlip pliers (or similar) into the t w o holes on
the front face of the tensioner pulley (see
illustration). Rotate the pulley to tension the
belt until the belt is quite taut. Maintain the
effort a p p l i e d to the tensioner pulley, then
tighten the pulley retaining nut.
44 Refit and adjust the accelerator cable as
described in Chapter 4B.
45 Refit the upper and lower timing belt
covers together with the TDC sensor wiring.
46 Refit the crankshaft pulley and tighten the
three retaining bolts securely.
47 Refit the air cleaner, inlet air d u c t and
resonator as described in Chapter 4B.
48 Refit the auxiliary drivebelts as described
in Chapter 1 , then reconnect the battery
negative terminal.
Spin the tensioner pulley on its hub by hand.
Stiff m o v e m e n t or excessive freeplay is an
indication of severe wear; the tensioner is not
a serviceable c o m p o n e n t , and should be
renewed.
33 Tighten the camshaft sprocket retaining
bolt to the specified torque while holding the
c a m s h a f t stationary using the m e t h o d
described previously (see illustration).
34 Remove the piston positioning tools and
camshaft locking tools, and turn the crankshaft t h r o u g h t w o c o m p l e t e turns in the
normal direction of rotation.
35 Slacken the tensioner pulley retaining nut
and reposition the tensioner t o align the
mobile indicator with the fixed reference mark
on the pulley face (see illustration). Hold the
pulley in this position, and tighten the
retaining nut to the specified torque.
36 Turn the crankshaft through a further t w o
c o m p l e t e turns in the normal direction of
rotation. Check that the timing is correct by
refitting the piston positioning tools and c a m shaft locking tools as described previously.
37 When all is c o r r e c t , r e m o v e the setting
and locking tools and refit the sealing plugs to
the cylinder head extension, using new Orings if necessary. Tighten the plugs securely.
38 Refit the spark plugs as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
39 Refit the ECU a n d secure with the
mounting bolts.
40 Renew the injector O-ring seals, smear
t h e m w i t h a little Vaseline, then locate the
injectors and fuel rail onto the inlet manifold
lower section. Secure the fuel rail with the t w o
retaining bolts.
41 Refit the inlet manifold upper section
using new sealing O-rings if necessary, and
secure with the two bolts.
42 Reconnect the wiring connectors for the
fuel injector harness and the intake air t e m p erature/pressure sensor, then connect the fuel
pressure regulator v a c u u m h o s e and the
EVAP purge valve hose.
43 Reconnect the wiring connectors for the
throttle potentiometer, idle control stepper
m o t o r and coolant t e m p e r a t u r e sensor.
Reconnect the brake servo vacuum hose.
Refitting
4 Slide the tensioner pulley over the mounting
stud and fit the securing nut.
5 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in Section 4.
Exhaust
Timing belt tensioner
and sprockets removal and refitting
Timing
belt
tensioner
Removal
1 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
2 Completely unscrew the tensioner nut and
slide the tensioner off the mounting stud.
Inspection
3 W i p e the tensioner clean, but d o not use
solvents that may contaminate the bearings.
camshaft
sprocket
Removal
6 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
7 U n s c r e w the bolt and slide the s p r o c k e t
from the end of the camshaft.
Inspection
8 With the s p r o c k e t r e m o v e d , examine the
camshaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 6 and renew it.
9 Check the sprocket teeth for damage.
10 Wipe clean the s p r o c k e t and camshaft
mating surfaces.
Refitting
11 Locate the s p r o c k e t on the end of the
camshaft, then refit the retaining bolt fingertight only at this stage.
12 Refit the timing belt as described in Section 4.
Crankshaft
sprocket
Removal
4.35 P o s i t i o n t h e t e n s i o n e r s o t h a t t h e
m o b i l e i n d i c a t o r (1) is a l i g n e d w i t h t h e
f i x e d r e f e r e n c e m a r k (2)
13 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
14 Working beneath the engine, unbolt and
remove the flywheel lower cover, then hold
the flywheel stationary preferably using a tool
which engages the flywheel starter ring gear.
Alternatively, have an assistant engage a
wide-bladed screwdriver with the starter ring
gear.
15 U n s c r e w
the
crankshaft
sprocket
retaining bolt, and slide the sprocket off the
end of the crankshaft. The sprocket may have
an integral location key on its inner face, or a
2A»8 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
separate key which locates in a groove in the
crankshaft nose may be fitted.
Inspection
16 With the sprocket removed, examine the
crankshaft oil seal for signs of leaking. If
necessary, refer to Section 7 and renew it.
17 Check the sprocket teeth for damage.
18 Wipe clean the sprocket and crankshaft
mating surfaces.
Refitting
19 Slide the s p r o c k e t o n t o the crankshaft,
making sure it engages the integral key or
separate key. Refit the bolt and washer, and
tighten the bolt to the specified torque while
holding the crankshaft stationary using the
method described in paragraph 14.
20 Refit the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d
Section 4.
6 Camshaft oil seal renewal
in
&
S
1 Remove the t i m i n g belt and camshaft
sprocket as described in Sections 4 and 5.
2 Punch or drill a small hole in the oil seal.
Screw a self-tapping screw into the hole, and
pull on the screws with pliers to extract the
seal.
3 Clean the seal housing, and polish off any
burrs or raised edges, w h i c h may have
caused the seal to fail in the first place.
4 Lubricate the lips of the new seal with clean
engine oil, and drive it into position until it
seats on its locating shoulder. Use a suitable
tubular drift, such as a socket, w h i c h bears
only on the hard outer edge of the seal. Take
care not to damage the seal lips during fitting.
Note that the seal lips should face inwards.
5 Refit the camshaft sprocket and timing belt
as described in Sections 5 and 4.
7
Crankshaft oil seals renewal
Front
(right-hand
g&
side) oil seal
1 The front oil seal is located in the oil pump
on the front of the crankshaft. Remove the
timing belt as described in Section 4 and the
crankshaft sprocket as described in Section 5.
2 Using a hooked instrument, remove the oil
seal from the oil pump casing, taking care not
to damage the surface of the crankshaft.
3 Clean the seating in the housing and the
surface of the crankshaft. To prevent damage
to the new oil seal as it is being fitted, wrap
s o m e adhesive tape around the end of the
crankshaft and lightly oil it.
4 Dip the new oil seal in oil, then offer it up to
the oil p u m p c a s i n g , m a k i n g sure that the
sealing lips are facing inwards.
5 Using a suitable tubular drift, drive the oil
seal squarely into the c a s i n g . Remove the
adhesive tape.
6 Refit the crankshaft s p r o c k e t and timing
belt with reference to Sections 5 and 4.
Rear (left-hand
side) oil seal
N o t e : The following
paragraphs
describe
renewal of the rear oil seal leaving the housing
in position. Refer to Chapter 2E for details of
removing the housing.
7 Remove the flywheel as described in Section 1 1 .
8 Using a suitable h o o k e d instrument,
remove the oil seal f r o m the rear oil seal
housing taking care not to d a m a g e the
surface of the crankshaft.
9 Clean the seating in the housing and the
surface of the crankshaft. Check the crankshaft for burrs which may damage the sealing
lip of the new seal, and if necessary use a fine
file to remove them.
10 Dip the new seal in clean engine oil and
carefully locate it over the crankshaft rear
flange, making sure that it is the correct way
round (lips facing inwards).
11 Progressively tap the oil seal into the
housing, keeping it square to prevent distortion. A block of w o o d j s useful for this purpose.
12 Refit the flywheel (see Section 11).
8 Cylinder head extension removal and refitting
^
^
Removal
1 Remove t h e t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
2 Identify the HT leads for p o s i t i o n , then
disconnect them from the coil HT terminals.
3 Disconnect the LT wiring plug f r o m the
ignition coil unit, then unscrew the mounting
bolts and remove the ignition coil assembly
from the end of the cylinder head extension.
4 U n d o the bolt and remove the resonator
support bracket from the top of the cylinder
head extension.
5 Unscrew the protective caps covering the
cylinder head extension retaining bolts (see
illustration).
6 To retain the tappets in place as the cylinder
head extension is removed, FIAT special tool
No 1860988000 will be required. This tool is
two strips of suitably slotted thin metal angle
bracket which slip between the cylinder head
extension and cylinder head mating faces as
the extension is lifted off. The tool holds the
tappets in place in the extension, allowing the
assembly to be withdrawn without fouling the
inlet and exhaust valves. The tools are relatively
inexpensive and readily available from FIAT
dealers. Suitable alternatives can be fabricated,
if desired, using thin metal angle strip cut to the
dimensions shown (see Tool Tip).
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2A»9
8.8a Lift t h e cylinder head e x t e n s i o n
slightly a n d insert t h e t o o l s ( s h o w n w i t h
cylinder head r e m o v e d f o r c l a r i t y ) . . .
8.8b . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e cylinder head
extension
8.10 L o c a t e a n e w g a s k e t o n t h e cylinder
head
8.12 Refit t h e cylinder head e x t e n s i o n
retaining b o l t s a n d t i g h t e n t h e m t o t h e
specified torque
8.13 R e n e w t h e O-ring seals o n t h e
p r o t e c t i v e c a p s c o v e r i n g t h e cylinder head
e x t e n s i o n retaining b o l t s
Refit the caps and tighten them securely.
14 Refit the resonator support bracket to the
top of the cylinder head extension.
15 Refit the ignition coil assembly a n d
reconnect the wiring.
16 Refit the timing belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
the cylinder head extension, and place them
in an oil-tight compartmented box labelled 1
to 8 (inlet) and 1 to 8 (exhaust) (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Alternatively, place t h e m into
individual storage jars or containers, suitably
m a r k e d . Fill the box or the jars with clean
engine oil until each tappet is just submerged.
7 Progressively slacken and remove the bolts
securing the cylinder head extension to the
cylinder head.
8 Lift the cylinder head extension up very
slightly, keeping it square to the cylinder
head. Slip the tools in place to hold the
tappets, then lift the extension off the cylinder
head (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Recover the gasket
between the two assemblies.
9 Dismantling and inspection procedures for
the cylinder head extension and c a m s h a f t s
are given in Section 9.
Refitting
10 Ensure that the mating faces of the
cylinder head and extension are thoroughly
c l e a n e d , with all traces of old gasket
r e m o v e d , then locate a new gasket on the
cylinder head (see illustration).
11 Locate t h e t a p p e t retaining t o o l s in
position, then lower the extension assembly
onto the cylinder head. When all the tappets
have engaged their respective valves, remove
the tools.
12 Refit the retaining bolts and tighten them
progressively to pull the extension down onto
the cylinder head. Do this slowly and carefully
- the valve springs will be compressed during
this operation, and it is essential to keep the
extension square_and level as the bolts are
tightened. Once all the bolts are initially tightened, progressively tighten them further to the
specified torque (see illustration).
13 If necessary, renew the O-ring seals on
the protective caps covering the cylinder head
extension retaining bolts (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) .
9.3 R e m o v e t h e c a m f o l l o w e r s f r o m their
l o c a t i o n s in t h e cylinder head e x t e n s i o n
9 Camshafts and tappets removal, inspection
and refitting
gj^
gQ
Removal
1 Remove the cylinder head extension as
described in Section 8.
2 Place the assembly u p s i d e - d o w n on a
bench, and lift off the tappet retaining tools.
3 Remove the tappets from their locations in
9.5a R e m o v e t h e c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t . . .
4 Undo the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
while holding the sprocket with a suitable tool
as described in Section 4.
5 Remove the camshaft sprocket, then undo
the bolt and nut and remove the cover plate
over the inlet camshaft (see illustrations).
6 At the other end of the cylinder head
extension, undo the nuts and remove the end
cover (see illustration). Recover the gasket.
7 Undo the t w o bolts securing the camshaft
drive gears to the inlet and exhaust camshafts
(see illustration). The camshaft locking tools
used in the t i m i n g belt removal p r o c e d u r e
9.5b . . . t h e n u n d o t h e bolt a n d n u t a n d
r e m o v e t h e c o v e r plate over t h e inlet
camshaft
2A»10 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
9.6 U n d o t h e n u t s a n d r e m o v e t h e e n d
cover
9.7 U n d o t h e t w o b o l t s s e c u r i n g t h e
c a m s h a f t drive g e a r s t o t h e inlet a n d
exhaust camshafts
(which should still be in place) are sufficient to
prevent the camshafts rotating while the gear
retaining bolts are undone. Remove the bolts
and withdraw the camshaft gears.
8 Remove the camshaft locking tools.
9 Carefully remove the inlet camshaft f r o m
the cylinder head extension (see illustration).
Suitably mark the camshaft IN to avoid
confusion when refitting.
10 Punch or drill a small hole in the exhaust
camshaft oil seal. Screw a self-tapping screw
into the hole, and pull on the screw with pliers
to extract the seal (see illustration).
11 Carefully remove the exhaust camshaft
from the cylinder head extension (see
i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Suitably mark the camshaft EX
to avoid confusion when refitting.
and c a m lobes for signs of wear ridges and
scoring. Renew the camshaft if any of these
c o n d i t i o n s are apparent. Examine the c o n d i t i o n of the bearing surfaces, b o t h on the
camshaft journals and in the cylinder head
e x t e n s i o n . If the head extension bearing
surfaces are worn excessively, the extension
will need to be renewed. If suitable measuring
e q u i p m e n t is available, camshaft bearing
journal wear can be c h e c k e d by direct
measurement.
12 Examine the camshaft bearing surfaces
13 Examine the t a p p e t bearing surfaces
w h i c h c o n t a c t the camshaft lobes for wear
ridges and s c o r i n g . Renew any t a p p e t on
w h i c h these c o n d i t i o n s are apparent. If a
tappet bearing surface is badly scored, also
examine the c o r r e s p o n d i n g lobe on the
camshaft for wear, as it is likely that both will
be w o r n . Renew w o r n c o m p o n e n t s as
necessary.
9.10 Extract t h e e x h a u s t c a m s h a f t oil
seal...
9.11 . . . t h e n r e m o v e t h e e x h a u s t
c a m s h a f t f r o m t h e cylinder head e x t e n s i o n
9.15 Refit t h e c a m s h a f t l o c k i n g t o o l s
9.16 Fit a n e w e x h a u s t c a m s h a f t oil seal
Inspection
9.9 Carefully r e m o v e t h e inlet c a m s h a f t
f r o m t h e cylinder head e x t e n s i o n
Refitting
14 Liberally lubricate the camshaft journals
and cylinder head extension bearings, then
locate both camshafts in position. Note that
the exhaust camshaft is nearest to the front
facing side of the engine.
15 With the c a m s h a f t s in position, rotate
them as necessary until the camshaft locking
tools can be re-inserted (see illustration).
16 Lubricate the lips of a new exhaust
camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil, and
drive it into position until it seats on its
locating shoulder (see i l l u s t r a t i o n ) . Use a
suitable tubular drift, such as a socket, which
bears only on the hard outer edge of the seal.
Take care not to damage the seal lips during
f i t t i n g . Note that the seal lips s h o u l d f a c e
inwards.
17 Refit the inlet camshaft drive gear and
retaining bolt, then tighten the bolt to the
specified torque (see illustration).
18 Refit the exhaust camshaft drive gear to
the exhaust camshaft. As the gear is being
f i t t e d , it will be necessary to align the antibacklash inner gear teeth using a screwdriver
to enable the teeth of both the gears to mesh
(see illustration).
19 At this stage, it is advisable to check the
camshaft endfloat using a dial gauge mounted
on the cylinder head extension, with its probe
in contact with the camshaft being checked.
Move the camshaft one way, zero the gauge,
then move the camshaft as far as it will go the
other way. Record the reading on the dial
gauge, and compare the figure with that given
9.17 T i g h t e n t h e inlet c a m s h a f t drive gear
retaining bolt t o t h e s p e c i f i e d t o r q u e
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2A«11
9.18 Refit t h e e x h a u s t c a m s h a f t drive gear
w h i l e aligning t h e a n t i - b a c k l a s h inner gear
teeth
in the Specifications. Repeat on the other
camshaft. If either of the readings exceeds the
tolerance given, a new cylinder head
extension will probably be required.
20 Locate a new gasket on the cylinder head
extension end cover, then w r a p round the
protruding tangs on the gasket to retain it in
position (see illustrations).
21 Locate the end cover on the cylinder head
extension, and secure with the retaining nuts
securely tightened.
22 Locate a new O-ring on the inlet camshaft
cover plate, then apply RTV gasket sealant to
the
cover
plate
contact
face
(see
i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Fit the cover plate and secure
with the nut and bolt.
23 Refit the camshaft sprocket, and secure
with the retaining bolt tightened finger-tight
only at this stage.
24 Liberally lubricate the tappets and place
t h e m in position in their respective cylinder
head extension bores (see illustration).
25 Locate the t a p p e t retaining tools in
position and refit the cylinder head extension
as described in Section 8.
10 Cylinder head removal and refitting
^
S
Removal
Note: The cylinder head bolts are of special
splined design and a FIAT tool should be
obtained to unscrew them. A Tory, key will not
fit however in practise it was found that a
9.20a L o c a t e a n e w g a s k e t o n t h e cylinder
head e x t e n s i o n e n d c o v e r . . .
close-fitting
alternative.
Allen key could be used as an
1 Drain the cooling system as d e s c r i b e d in
Chapter 1.
2 Remove the cylinder head extension as
described in Section 8.
3 Disconnect t h e radiator hose f r o m the
t h e r m o s t a t housing on t h e left-hand e n d of
the cylinder head.
4 Disconnect the heater hose from the outlet
at the rear of the cylinder head.
5 Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor
and temperature gauge sensor wiring plugs
from the left-hand end of the cylinder head.
6 Undo the engine oil dipstick tube bracket
retaining bolt, and the two bolts securing the
wiring harness s u p p o r t clips to the inlet
manifold lower section.
7 Undo the retaining nuts, and separate the
exhaust system front pipe from the exhaust
manifold flange.
8 Check that nothing remains attached to the
cylinder head likely to impede removal. It is
a s s u m e d that the head will be removed
c o m p l e t e with exhaust manifold and inlet
manifold lower section.
9 Unscrew the cylinder head bolts half a turn
at a time in the reverse order to that shown in
illustration 10.25a. When the bolts are free,
remove them from their locations..
10 Lift the cylinder head from the block. If it is
stuck tight, rock the head to break the joint by
means of the manifolds. On no account drive
levers into the gasket joint, nor attempt to tap
the head sideways, as I t is located on
positioning dowels.
*
i
9.22a L o c a t e a n e w O-ring o n t h e inlet
c a m s h a f t c o v e r plate . . .
9.20b . . . t h e n w r a p r o u n d t h e p r o t r u d i n g
t a n g s t o retain t h e g a s k e t
11 Remove and d i s c a r d the cylinder head
gasket.
12 If necessary, refer to Chapter 2E for
cylinder head dismantling and inspection
procedures.
Preparation
for
refitting
13 The mating faces of the cylinder head and
cylinder block must be perfectly clean before
refitting the head. Use a hard plastic or
wooden scraper to remove all traces of gasket
and carbon; also clean the piston crowns.
14 Take particular care w h e n cleaning the
piston crowns, as the soft aluminium alloy is
easily damaged.
15 Make sure that the carbon is not allowed
to enter the oil and water passages - this is
particularly important for the lubrication
system, as carbon could block the oil supply
to the engine's components. Using adhesive
tape and paper, seal the water, oil and bolt
holes in the cylinder block.
16 To prevent c a r b o n entering the gap
between the pistons and bores, smear a little
grease in the gap. After cleaning each piston,
use a small brush to remove all traces of
grease and c a r b o n from the gap, then wipe
away the remainder with a clean rag. Clean all
the pistons in the same way.
17 Check the mating surfaces of the cylinder
block and the cylinder head for nicks, deep
scratches and other d a m a g e . If slight, they
may be removed carefully with a file, but if
excessive, machining may be the only
alternative to renewal.
\
••
9.22b . . . t h e n a p p l y RTV g a s k e t sealant t o
t h e c o v e r plate c o n t a c t f a c e
9.24 L u b r i c a t e t h e c a m f o l l o w e r s a n d place
t h e m in p o s i t i o n in their respective b o r e s
2A»12 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
10.25a Cylinder h e a d bolt t i g h t e n i n g
sequence
18 If w a r p a g e of the cylinder head gasket
surface, is suspected, use a straight-edge to
check it for distortion. Refer to Part E of this
Chapter if necessary,
19 Check the condition of the cylinder head
bolts, and particularly their threads, whenever
they are removed. Wash the bolts in a suitable
solvent, and wipe them dry. Check each bolt
for any sign of visible wear or d a m a g e ,
renewing them if necessary.
Refitting
20 Before refitting the a s s e m b l e d cylinder
head, make sure that the head and b l o c k
mating surfaces are perfectly clean, and that
the bolt holes in the cylinder block have been
mopped out to clear any oil or coolant. If the
To lock the flywheel, make up a pointed
tool to engage the ring gear teeth, and
bolt it to the engine using one of the
bellhousing
bolts
10.25b T i g h t e n t h e cylinder head b o l t s
the Stage 1 torque setting . . .
bolt holes have any significant a m o u n t of
liquid in them, the block could be cracked by
hydraulic pressure w h e n the head bolts are
tightened.
21 The new gasket should not be removed
from its plastic bag until required for use. Fit
the gasket dry - no grease or sealant should
be used.
22 Place the gasket on the cylinder block so
that the w o r d ALTO (TOP) can be read from
above.
23 Lower the cylinder head onto the block so
that it locates on the positioning dowels.
24 Ensure that the cylinder head bolts are
cleaned of all debris, and check the threads
for signs of damage. Especially if it is known
that the bolts have been removed previously,
it is advisable to renew all ten botts as a set,
rather than risk the bolts shearing w h e n
tightened.
25 Lightly oil the bolt t h r e a d s . S c r e w the
bolts in finger-tight, and tighten t h e m in the
sequence shown to the Stage 1 torque (see
illustrations).
26 When all ten bolts have been tightened to
the Stage 1 t o r q u e , go round again in
sequence and tighten to the Stage 2 torque.
27 Again w o r k i n g in s e q u e n c e , tighten the
bolts t h r o u g h the specified Stage 3 angle.
Note that 90° is equivalent to a quarter-turn or
right-angle, making it easy to judge by noting
the initial position of the s o c k e t handle. If
available, use an angle gauge f i t t e d to the
socket handle for maximum accuracy.
28 With all ten bolts tightened to Stage 3, go
round o n c e more and tighten all bolts in
sequence to the Stage 4 angle.
10.25c . . . t h e n t h r o u g h t h e Stage 2 a n d
Stage 3 angle
29 Further refitting is a reversal of removal.
Ensure that all wiring and hoses are correctly
routed and securely r e c o n n e c t e d . Refer to
Section 4 when refitting the timing belt, and to
Chapter 1 when refitting the spark plugs and
auxiliary drivebelt, and w h e n refilling the
cooling system.
11 Flywheel removal, inspection
and refitting
^
S
Removal
1 R e m o v e t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n as d e s c r i b e d
in Chapter 7A, and the clutch as described in
Chapter 6.
2 Mark the position of the flywheel with
respect to the crankshaft using a dab of paint.
Note that on some models although there is
only one location dowel on the flywheel, there
are two holes in the end of the crankshaft and
it is therefore possible to locate the flywheel
180° out.
3 The flywheel must now be held stationary
while the bolts are loosened. A h o m e - m a d e
locking tool may be fabricated from a piece of
scrap metal and used to lock the ring gear.
Bolt the tool to one of the transmission
bellhousing mounting holes (see T o o l Tip).
4 S u p p o r t the flywheel as the bolts are
loosened - the flywheel is very heavy.
Unscrew and remove the mounting bolts, take
off the spacer plate, then lift off the flywheel
(see illustrations).
Inspection
5 If the f l y w h e e l ' s c l u t c h m a t i n g surface is
deeply
scored, cracked
or
otherwise
d a m a g e d , the flywheel must be r e n e w e d .
However, it may be possible to have it
s u r f a c e - g r o u n d ; seek the advice of a FIAT
dealer or engine reconditioning specialist.
6 If the ring gear is badly worn or has missing
teeth, the flywheel must be renewed.
Refitting
11.4a U n s c r e w t h e f l y w h e e l b o l t s . .
11.4b . . . a n d r e m o v e t h e s p a c e r plate
7 Clean the mating surfaces of the flywheel
and crankshaft. Remove any remaining
locking c o m p o u n d f r o m the t h r e a d s of the
crankshaft holes, using the correct-size tap, if
available.
1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures 2A»13
If a suitable
tap is not
available, cut two slots down
the threads of one of the old
bolts with a hacksaw,
and
use the bolt to remove
the
locking
compound
from the threads.
HAYNES
8 Clean the flywheel bolt threads, then apply
a suitable t h r e a d - l o c k i n g c o m p o u n d t o t h e
threads of each bolt.
9 Offer up t h e flywheel onto t h e crankshaft,
using t h e alignment marks m a d e during
removal; engage t h e d o w e l a n d fit t h e
retaining bolts (together with the spacer plate)
(see illustrations).
10 Lock t h e flywheel using t h e m e t h o d
e m p l o y e d o n d i s m a n t l i n g , a n d tighten t h e
retaining bolts to the specified torque.
11 Refit the clutch as described in Chapter 6,
and the transmission as described in C h a p ter 7A.
12 Engine mountings inspection and renewal
|
Inspection
1 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle
support).
2 Check the mounting rubbers to see if they
are cracked, hardened or separated from the
metal at any point; renew the mounting if any
such damage or deterioration is evident.
3 Check that all the mounting's fasteners are
securely t i g h t e n e d ; use a t o r q u e w r e n c h t o
check if possible.
4 Using a large screwdriver or a crowbar,
check for wear in the mounting by carefully
levering against it to check for free play. Where
this is not possible enlist the aid of an assistant
to move t h e engine/transmission back and
forth, or from side to side, while you watch the
mounting. While s o m e free play is t o be
expected even from new c o m p o n e n t s ,
excessive wear should be obvious. If excessive
free play is found, check first that the fasteners
are correctly secured, then renew any worn
components as described below.
Renewal
Right-hand mounting
5 Raise the front of the vehicle and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
6 Place a trolley jack beneath the right-hand
side of t h e engine, with a block of w o o d on
the jack head. Raise t h e j a c k until it is
supporting the weight of the engine.
7 Unscrew the through-bolt and nut securing
the reaction r o d t o t h e engine m o u n t i n g
bracket.
8 Lower the engine sufficiently t o disengage
the reaction r o d f r o m t h e m o u n t i n g , then
remove the bolts securing the mounting to the
body, and remove it.
11.9a L o c a t i o n d o w e l o n t h e f l y w h e e l
11.9b I n s e r t i n g t h e f l y w h e e l b o l t s
9 Locate the new mounting on the body, then
insert the mounting-to-body bolts and tighten
by hand.
10 Raise the engine and locate the reaction
rod on t h e m o u n t i n g . Refit t h e t h r o u g h - b o l t
and nut, tighten t o the specified torque, then
tighten the mounting-to-body bolts.
11 Remove t h e trolley j a c k and lower t h e
vehicle to the ground.
the specified t o r q u e , then tighten t h e
mounting-to-body bolts.
26 Remove t h e trolley jack and lower t h e
vehicle to the ground.
Left-hand/rear mounting
12 Raise the front of the vehicle and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
13 Place a trolley jack
beneath t h e
transmission, with a block of w o o d on the jack
head. Raise the jack until it is supporting the
weight of the engine/transmission.
14 Unscrew t h e t h r o u g h - b o l t securing t h e
transmission bracket t o t h e m o u n t i n g , and
recover the washers.
15 Unscrew t h e t w o bolts securing the lefthand mounting t o the body.
16 Lower t h e transmission sufficiently t o
remove t h e mounting f r o m t h e transmission
bracket.
17 Locate the new mounting in position, and
loosely refit the mounting-to-body bolts.
18 Raise t h e engine/transmission a n d refit
the through-bolt securing t h e bracket t o t h e
m o u n t i n g . Tighten t h e bolt t o t h e specified
t o r q u e , then tighten t h e m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y
bolts.
19 Remove t h e trolley j a c k a n d lower t h e
vehicle to the ground.
Front mounting
20 Raise the front of the vehicle and support on
axle stands (see Jacking and vehicle support).
21 Place a trolley jack beneath t h e engine/
transmission flange, with a block of w o o d on
the jack head. Raise t h e j a c k until it is
s u p p o r t i n g t h e weight of t h e engine and
transmission.
22 W o r k i n g f r o m below, unscrew t h e nut
securing the bracket to the mounting.
23 Lower the engine sufficiently to disengage
the bracket from the mounting, then remove the
bolts securing the mounting to the body, and
remove it.
24 Locate t h e n e w m o u n t i n g on t h e b o d y ,
then insert t h e m o u n t i n g - t o - b o d y bolts a n d
tighten by hand.
25 Raise the engine and locate the bracket
on the mounting. Refit the nut and tighten to
13 Sump removal and refitting
|
Removal
1 Jack up the front of the vehicle and support
on axle stands. Drain the engine oil.
2 Unscrew the sump securing nuts and bolts,
and pull t h e s u m p d o w n w a r d s t o remove it.
The joint sealant will require cutting w i t h a
sharp knife to release the pan.
3 The s u m p is located on four studs, which
may unscrew f r o m t h e crankcase w h e n t h e
nuts are loosened - this poses no great
problem, and the studs can be refitted if they
are in good condition. To screw a stud back
into position, lock t w o nuts against each other
on the stud threads, then use one of the nuts
to tighten the stud firmly.
Refitting
4 Clean away all old gasket material, from the
s u m p pan and from the base of the block.
5 Apply a bead of RTV silicone instant gasket
3 m m in diameter t o t h e s u m p flange. The
bead of sealant should pass around the inside
of the sump bolt holes.
6 Fit the sump, screw in the fixing bolts and
nuts, and tighten securely in a diagonal
sequence.
7 Wait one hour for the gasket compound to
harden before filling with oil.
8 Lower the vehicle to the ground and fill the
engine with oil (see Chapter 1). Check the oil
level after running t h e engine f o r a f e w
minutes, as described in Weekly checks.
14 Oil pump and pick-up tube
removal and refitting
Removal
1 Drain the engine oil and remove the s u m p
as described in Section 13.
2 Unbolt a n d remove t h e oil p i c k - u p / f i l t e r
screen assembly. Note the sealing O-ring.
2A»14 1.2 litre engine in-car repair procedures
14.8 Using an i m p a c t s c r e w d r i v e r t o
r e m o v e t h e oil p u m p rear c o v e r plate
screws
14.9a M e a s u r i n g oil p u m p o u t e r g e a r - t o pump housing clearance
14.9b M e a s u r i n g oil p u m p gear e n d f l o a t
3 Unscrew and remove the oil filter cartridge
(see Chapter 1).
4 Remove the t i m i n g belt as d e s c r i b e d in
Section 4.
5 Remove the crankshaft s p r o c k e t as
described in Section 5.
6 Extract the oil p u m p fixing bolts, noting
their locations (there is one long bolt, and four
short ones with washers). Withdraw the p u m p
and remove the gasket.
s c r e w s are very tight, and will probably
require the use of an impact screwdriver (see
illustration).
9 C h e c k the clearance b e t w e e n the outer
gear and the p u m p housing using feeler
blades. Check the gear endfloat by placing a
s t r a i g h t - e d g e across the p u m p b o d y , and
checking the gap between the straight-edge
and gear face (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . If the
clearances
are
outside
the
specified
tolerance, renew the oil pump complete.
oil into its inlet duct, at the same time turning
the oil pump inner gear with your fingers.
13 Lever out the oil seal, and drive a new one
squarely into the oil p u m p casing. Lubricate
the oil seal lips (see illustrations).
Inspection
7 The oil pump incorporates a pressure relief
valve, which can be removed for examination
by unscrewing the plug and pulling out the
spring and valve.
8 If pump wear is suspected, check the gears
in the following way. Extract the five fixing
screws and remove the rear cover plate. The
10 If the pump is unworn, refit the rear cover
plate and tighten the screws fully.
11 Apply air pressure from a tyre p u m p to the
011 pump oil ducts, to clear any sludge or other
material. If any solvents are used, the p u m p
must be allowed to dry thoroughly before
refitting.
12 Prime the p u m p by pouring clean engine
Refitting
14 Clean all traces of old gasket f r o m the
pump and the mating surfaces on the cylinder
block.
15 Bolt the pump into position, using a new
joint gasket (see i l l u s t r a t i o n s ) . Insert the
longer bolt into the position noted on removal,
and tighten all to the specified torques.
16 Bolt on the oil pick-up assembly using a
new sealing washer.
17 Refit
the
crankshaft
sprocket
as
described in Section 5.
18 Fit and t e n s i o n the t i m i n g belt as
described in Section 4.
19 Fit the sump as described in Section 13.
20 Screw on a new oil filter cartridge, and fill
the engine with oil (see Chapter 1).
21 Run the engine for a few m i n u t e s , t h e n
check and t o p - u p the oil level as described in
Weekly checks.
15 Oil pressure switch removal a n d refitting
14.13a R e m o v i n g t h e oil p u m p oil seal
(crankshaft f r o n t oil seal)
14.13b U s i n g a s o c k e t t o fit a n e w oil seal
t o t h e oil p u m p
Removal
1 The oil pressure switch is located on the oil
p u m p housing at the front of the engine block,
behind the oil filter.
2 Disconnect the switch wiring connector.
3 Unscrew the switch from the oil p u m p , and
remove it.
4 Clean the switch location as far as possible.
If the switch is to be refitted, clean its threads.
5 Examine the switch for signs of cracking or
splits. If the top part of the switch is loose, this
is an early indication of impending failure.
Refitting
14.15a Using a n e w g a s k e t .
14.15b . . . refit t h e oil p u m p
6 Apply a smear of sealant to the threads of
the s w i t c h , then screw it into place and
tighten to the specified torque.
7 Reconnect the switch wiring on completion.
Reference
REF-I
Dimensions and weights
REF«1
General repair p r o c e d u r e s
Conversion factors
REF»2
Tools a n d w o r k i n g facilities
REF»7
Buying spare parts
REF»3
M O T test checks
Vehicle identification numbers
REF»4
Faultfinding
Jacking and vehicle support
REF»5
G l o s s a r y of t e c h n i c a l t e r m s
REF»24
Disconnecting the battery
REF«6
Index
REF»29
REF»8
REF»10
".
Dimensions and weights
Note: All figures are approximate,
and may vary according
to model. Refer to manufacturer's
data for exact
figures.
Dimensions
Overall length:
Bravo
Brava
Overall width:
Bravo
Brava
Overall height (typical)
Wheelbase
4025 m m
4187 m m
1755
1741
1413
2540
mm
mm
mm
mm
Weights
Kerb weight:
Bravo
Brava
Maximum roof rack load
Maximum trailer weight:
Braked
Unbraked
1010 kg (1.2 litre) to 1100 kg (1.8 litre)
1040 kg (1.2 litre) to 1130 kg (1.8 litre)
80 kg
1000 kg (1.2 litre) to 1200 kg (1.8 litre)
400 kg
REF»14
Conversion factors
REF-2
Length (distance)
Inches (in)
Feet (ft)
Miles
Volume (capacity)
Cubic inches (cu in; in )
Imperial pints (Imp pt)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
US quarts (US qt)
Imperial gallons (Imp gal)
Imperial gallons (Imp gal)
US gallons (US gal)
3
Mass (weight)
Ounces (oz)
Pounds (lb)
Force
Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
Kilopascals (kPa)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= Millimetres (mm)
= Metres (m)
= Kilometres (km)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
16.387
0.568
1.137
1.201
0.946
4.546
1.201
3.785
x 28.35
x 0.454
Ounces-force (ozf; oz)
Pounds-force (Ibf; lb)
Newtons (N)
Pressure
x25.4
x 0.305
x 1.609
square inch
x 0.0394 = Inches (in)
x 3.281 = Feet (ft)
x 0.621 = Miles
Cubic centimetres (cc; cm )
Litres (I)
Litres (I)
US quarts (US qt)
Litres (I)
Litres (I)
US gallons (US gal)
Litres (I)
3
square inch
square inch
3
x 0.278 = Newtons (N)
x 4.448 = Newtons (N)
x 0.1
= Kilograms-force (kgf; kg)
x 3.6
x 0.225
x 9.81
Ounces-force (ozf; oz)
= Pounds-force (Ibf; lb)
= Newtons (N)
x 0.070 = Kilograms-force per square
centimetre (kgf/cm ; kg/cm )
x 0.068 = Atmospheres (atm)
x 0.069
x 6.895
2
= Bars
= Kilopascals (kPa)
2
2
x 14.223 = Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
x 14.696 = Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
x 14.5
= Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
x 0.145 = Pounds-force per
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
x 98.1
= Kilopascals (kPa)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
square inch
square inch
square inch
square inch
2
x 0.01
= Millibar (mbar)
x 68.947 = Millibar (mbar)
2
2
Millimetres of mercury (mmHg)
x 0.535
Inches of water ( i n H 0 )
x 0.036 = Pounds-force per square inch
2
Cubic inches (cu in; in )
Imperial pints (Imp pt)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
US quarts (US qt)
Imperial gallons (Imp gal)
Imperial gallons (Imp gal)
US gallons (US gal)
= Ounces (oz)
= Pounds (lb)
= Kilograms-force per square
centimetre (kgf/cm ; kg/cm )
x 100
= Pascals (Pa)
x 0.0145 = Pounds-force per square inch
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
x 0.75
= Millimetres of mercury (mmHg)
x 0.401 = Inches of water ( i n H 0 )
Millibar (mbar)
Millibar (mbar)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
x 0.035
x 2.205
x 0.01
Millibar (mbar)
Millibar (mbar)
0.061
1.76
0.88
0.833
1.057
0.22
0.833
0.264
= Grams (g)
= Kilograms (kg)
2
square inch
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
= Inches of water ( i n H 0 )
2
x 1.333
x 2.491
= Millibar (mbar)
= Millibar (mbar)
x 1.868
= Millimetres of mercury (mmHg)
x 27.68
= Inches of water (inH 0)
x 0.868
2
(psi; lbf/in ; lb/in )
2
Torque (moment of force)
Pounds-force inches
(Ibf in; lb in)
Pounds-force inches
x
x 0.083 = Pounds-force feet (Ibf ft; lb ft)
x 12
x 0.138
= Kilograms-force metres
(kgf m; kg m)
= Newton metres (Nm)
= Kilograms-force metres
(kgf m; kg m)
x 7.233
= Pounds-force
(Ibf in; lb in)
= Pounds-force
(Ibf in; lb in)
Pounds-force
(Ibf in; lb in)
= Pounds-force
x 0.738
x 9.804
= Pounds-force feet (Ibf ft; lb ft)
= Newton metres (Nm)
x 745.7
= Watts (W)
x 0.0013 = Horsepower (hp)
x
= Kilometres per hour (km/hr; kph) x 0.621
= Miles per hour (miles/hr; mph)
= Kilometres per litre (km/I)
= Kilometres per litre (km/I)
= Miles per gallon, Imperial (mpg)
= Miles per gallon, US (mpg)
x 0.113
(Ibf in; lb in)
Pounds-force inches
(Ibf in; lb in)
Pounds-force feet (Ibf ft; lb ft)
Pounds-force feet (Ibf ft; lb ft)
Newton metres (Nm)
Power
Horsepower (hp)
Velocity (speed)
Miles per hour (miles/hr; mph)
Fuel consumption*
Miles per gallon, Imperial (mpg)
Miles per gallon, US (mpg)
Temperature
x 1.356
x 0.102
1.609
x 0.354
x 0.425
Degrees Fahrenheit = (°C x 1.8) + 32
* It is common practice
1.152
2
= Kilograms-force centimetre
(kgf c m ; kg cm)
= Newton metres (Nm)
x 8.85
x 2.825
x 2.352
inches
inches
inches
feet (Ibf ft; lb ft)
Degrees Celsius (Degrees Centigrade; °C) == (°F - 32) x 0.56
to convert from miles per gallon (mpg) to litres/100 kilometres
(11100km), where mpg x 1/100 km = 282
Buying spare parts
Spare parts are available f r o m many
sources,
including
maker's
appointed
garages, accessory shops, and motor factors.
To be sure of obtaining the correct parts, it
may s o m e t i m e s be necessary t o q u o t e t h e
vehicle identification number. If possible, it
can also be useful to take the old parts along
for positive identification. Items such as
starter m o t o r s and alternators may be
available under a service exchange scheme any parts returned should always be clean.
Our advice regarding spare part sources is
as follows:
Officially-appointed garages
This is the best source of parts which are
peculiar to your car, and are not otherwise
generally available (eg badges, interior trim,
certain b o d y panels, etc). It is also the only
place at w h i c h y o u s h o u l d buy parts if the
vehicle is still under warranty.
Accessory shops
These are very good places to buy materials
and components needed for the maintenance
of your car (oil, air and fuel filters, spark plugs,
light bulbs, drivebelts, oils and greases, brake
pads, touch-up paint, etc). Parts like this sold
by a reputable shop are of the same standard
as those used by the car manufacturer.
Motor factors
G o o d factors will s t o c k all the more
i m p o r t a n t c o m p o n e n t s w h i c h wear out
c o m p a r a t i v e l y quickly and can s o m e t i m e s
supply individual components needed for the
overhaul of a larger assembly. They may also
handle work such as cylinder block reboring,
crankshaft regrinding and balancing, etc.
Tyre and exhaust specialists
These outlets may be independent or
m e m b e r s of a local or national chain. They
frequently offer c o m p e t i t i v e prices w h e n
REF.3
compared with a main dealer or local garage,
but it will pay to obtain several quotes before
making a decision. Also ask what 'extras' may
be added to the quote - for instance, fitting a
new valve and balancing the wheel are both
often charged on top of the price of a new tyre.
Other sources
Beware of parts of materials obtained from
market stalls, car boot sales or similar outlets.
Such items are not invariably s u b - s t a n d a r d ,
but there is little chance of c o m p e n s a t i o n if
they do prove unsatisfactory. In the case of
safety-critical c o m p o n e n t s s u c h as brake
pads there is the risk not only of financial loss
but also of an a c c i d e n t causing injury or
death.
S e c o n d - h a n d c o m p o n e n t s or assemblies
obtained f r o m a car breaker can be a g o o d
buy in s o m e c i r c u m s t a n c e s , but this sort of
purchase is best m a d e by the experienced
DIY mechanic.
REF.4
Vehicle identification numbers
Modifications
are a continuing a n d
unpublicised process in vehicle manufacture,
quite apart from major model changes. Spare
parts manuals and lists are compiled upon a
numerical basis, t h e individual vehicle identification numbers being essential to correct
identification of the component concerned.
When ordering spare parts, always give as
m u c h information as p o s s i b l e . Q u o t e t h e
model number, chassis number, engine
n u m b e r a n d , where applicable, t h e spare
parts number, as appropriate.
The vehicle model number a n d chassis
serial number appear on t h e model plate
attached to the front crossmember. The model
plate also gives vehicle loading details, engine
type, a n d t h e FIAT spare parts number. The
model and chassis numbers are also stamped
in t h e right-hand front suspension strut t o p
mounting (right as seen from the driver's seat).
Some models may also have these numbers
etched into the windscreen (see illustrations).
Engine type designation and serial numbers
are stamped on the upper side of the cylinder
block, at the left front corner o n all except 1.2
litre m o d e l s , w h o s e details appear front
centre (see illustration). These numbers may
also appear on a sticker on the upper timing
belt cover.
The transmission identification numbers are
l o c a t e d o n a plate a t t a c h e d to t h e t r a n s mission casing.
Vehicle paint c o d e s appear on a plate
attached to the inside of the tailgate.
f
A
B
C
•
D
E
Kg.
F
Kg.
1-
G
Kg.
2-
H
|
Kg.
o
MOTORE-ENGINE
VERSIONS-VERSION
L
N° PER RICAMBI-N2 FOR SPARES
M
o
N
M o d e l plate details
M o d e l plate o n f r o n t c r o s s m e m b e r
A
B
C
D
E
F
Manufacturer name
Homologation number
Vehicle model number
Chassis number
Maximum laden weight
Maximum laden weight and
towing weight
G Maximum 1st axle weight
H
I
L
M
N
Maximum 2nd axle weight
Engine type
Bodywork version code
FIAT spare parts number
Smoke coefficient (Diesel
engines)
Vehicle m o d e l n u m b e r a n d c h a s s i s n u m b e r
on suspension strut mounting
S o m e m o d e l s have t h e v e h i c l e / c h a s s i s
n u m b e r s e t c h e d into t h e w i n d s c r e e n
Vehicle i d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r l o c a t i o n s
A Model and chassis numbers
B Model plate
C Engine number
Jacking and vehicle support
The jack supplied with the vehicle tool kit
should o n l y be used for changing the
roadwheels in an e m e r g e n c y - see Wheel
changing
at the front of this b o o k . When
carrying out any other kind of work, raise the
vehicle using a h e a v y - d u t y hydraulic (or
trolley) jack, and always supplement the jack
with axle stands positioned under the vehicle
jacking points. If the roadwheels do not have
to be removed, consider using wheel ramps if w i s h e d , these can be placed under the
wheels once the vehicle has been raised using
a hydraulic jack, and the vehicle lowered onto
the ramps so that it is resting on its wheels.
Only ever jack the vehicle up on a solid,
level surface. If there is even a slight slope,
take great care that the vehicle cannot move
as the wheels are lifted off the g r o u n d .
Jacking up on an uneven or gravelled surface
is not r e c o m m e n d e d , as the w e i g h t of the
vehicle will not be evenly distributed, and the
jack may slip as the vehicle is raised.
As far as possible, do not leave the vehicle
u n a t t e n d e d o n c e it has been raised,
particularly if children are playing nearby.
Before j a c k i n g up the front of the car,
ensure that the handbrake is firmly applied.
When j a c k i n g up the rear of the car, place
w o o d e n c h o c k s in front of the front wheels,
and engage first gear (or P).
The jack supplied with the vehicle locates in
the sill flanges, at the points marked by t w o
indentations in the sill on each side of the car
(see illustration). Ensure that the jack head is
correctly engaged before attempting to raise
the vehicle.
When using a hydraulic jack or axle stands,
the j a c k head or axle stand head may be
placed under one of the j a c k i n g points.
Always use a block of w o o d (with a slot cut in
its t o p surface, to locate in the sill flange)
between the jack head or axle stand, and the
sill. Do n o t jack the vehicle under any other
part of the sill, engine s u m p , floor p a n , or
directly under any of the steering or
suspension components.
To raise the front of the vehicle, the jack
can be positioned under the t r a n s m i s s i o n ,
using a block of w o o d on top of the jack head
to spread the load. The front of the car can
also be supported under the subframe to the
rear of the engine (not under the front
suspension arms, attached to the subframe).
Raising the rear of the vehicle can be
achieved using the rear jacking points on the
sills, or the special bracket on the sill in line
with the rear edge of the front doors. If using a
hydraulic (trolley) jack', place a block of w o o d
(with a slot cut in its top surface to locate in
the sill flange) on t o p of the jack h e a d , to
spread the load. Axle stands (with a block of
w o o d ) can be placed under the reinforced
REF-S
Vehicle j a c k l o c a t e s t h e sill f l a n g e at t h e
p o i n t m a r k e d by t w o i n d e n t a t i o n s
chassis sections immediately inboard of the
rear jacking points. It is not advisable to jack
or support under the rear axle tube.
Providing care is taken (and a b l o c k of
w o o d is used to spread the load), reinforced
areas of the floor pan, particularly those in the
region of suspension mountings, may be used
as support points. Consult a FIAT dealer for
advice before using anything other than the
approved jacking points, however.
Never work under, around, or near a raised
vehicle, unless it is adequately supported on
stands. Do not rely on a jack alone, as even a
hydraulic jack could fail under load. Makeshift
m e t h o d s s h o u l d not be used t o lift and
support the car during servicing work.
REF.6
Disconnecting the battery
Several of the s y s t e m s fitted to the
Bravo/Brava require battery power to be
available at all times (permanent live). This is
either t o ensure their c o n t i n u e d o p e r a t i o n
(such as the clock), or to maintain electronic
memory settings w h i c h w o u l d otherwise be
erased. Whenever the battery is to be
d i s c o n n e c t e d therefore, first note the
following points, to ensure there are no
unforeseen consequences:
a) Firstly, on any vehicle with central door
locking, it is a wise precaution to remove
the key from the ignition, and to keep it
with you. This avoids the possibility of the
key being locked inside the car, should
the central locking engage when the
battery is reconnected.
b) The radio/cassette unit fitted as standard
equipment by FIAT is equipped with a
built-in security code, to deter thieves. If
the power source to the unit is cut, the
anti-theft system will activate. Even if the
power source is immediately
reconnected, the radio/cassette unit will
not function until the correct security
code has been entered. Therefore, if you
do not know the correct security code for
the radio/cassette unit, do not disconnect
either of the battery terminals, or remove
the radio/cassette unit from the vehicle.
The code appears on a code card
supplied with the car when new. Details
for entering the code appear in the
vehicle handbook. Should the code have
been misplaced or forgotten, on
production of proof of ownership, a FIAT
dealer or in-car entertainment
specialist
may be able to help.
c) The engine management system ECU is
of the 'self-learning' type, meaning that,
as it operates, it adapts to changes in
operating conditions, and stores the
optimum settings found (this is especially
true for idle settings). When the battery is
disconnected, these 'learned' settings are
lost, and the ECU reverts to the base
factory settings. When the engine is
restarted, it may idle and run roughly until
the ECU has re-learned the best settings.
To further this learning process, take the
car for a road test of at least 15 minutes'
duration, covering as many engine speeds
and loads as possible, and concentrating
on the 2000 to 4000 rpm range. On
completion, let the engine idle for at least
10 minutes, turning the steering wheel
occasionally and switching on highcurrent-draw equipment such as the
heater fan or heated rear window.
d) The Bravo/Brava is equipped with an
electronic immobiliser system, called FIAT
CODE. .When new, the car is provided with
three keys - a master (burgundy) key, and
two normal (blue) keys. To deactivate the
CODE system and start the engine, the
control unit must recognise a code from the
transponder inside the keys. Each blue key
must be programmed into the control unit,
and if the battery is disconnected, this
information may be lost. The master
(burgundy) key is essential for programming
the blue keys into-the control unit memory if this is not available, use the CODE card
supplied with the car (not the radio code
card) to perform the 'Emergency start-up'
procedure detailed in the vehicle
handbook. For security reasons, details on
reprogramming the blue keys are not given
here - refer to a FIAT dealer for advice.
Devices k n o w n as ' m e m o r y - s a v e r s ' or
'code-savers' can be used to avoid some of
the above p r o b l e m s . Precise details of use
vary according to the device used. Typically, it
is plugged into the cigar lighter socket, and is
c o n n e c t e d by its o w n wiring to a spare
battery;
the
vehicle
battery
is
then
d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m the electrical s y s t e m ,
leaving the memory-saver to pass sufficient
current to maintain audio unit security codes
and other m e m o r y values, and also to run
permanently-live circuits such as the clock.
Warning: Some of these
devices
allow a considerable
amount
of
current to pass, which can mean
that many of the vehicle's systems are still
operational
when
the main
battery
is
disconnected.
If a memory-saver
is used,
ensure that the circuit concerned is actually
'dead' before carrying out any work on it!
General repair procedures
Whenever servicing, repair or overhaul work
is carried out on the car or its c o m p o n e n t s ,
observe the following procedures and
instructions. This will assist in carrying out the
operation efficiently and to a professional
standard of workmanship.
Joint mating
faces and
gaskets
When separating c o m p o n e n t s at their
mating f a c e s , never insert screwdrivers or
similar implements into the joint between the
faces in order to prise t h e m apart. This can
cause severe d a m a g e w h i c h results in oil
leaks, coolant leaks, etc u p o n reassembly.
Separation is usually achieved by t a p p i n g
along the joint with a s o f t - f a c e d hammer in
order to break the seal. However, note that
this m e t h o d may not be suitable where
dowels are used for component location.
Where a gasket is used between the mating
faces of two components, a new one must be
fitted on reassembly; fit it dry unless otherwise
stated in the repair procedure. Make sure that
the mating faces are clean and dry, with all
traces of old gasket removed. When cleaning a
joint face, use a tool which is unlikely to score
or damage the face, and remove any burrs or
nicks with an oilstone or fine file.
Make sure that t a p p e d holes are cleaned
with a pipe cleaner, and keep t h e m free of
jointing c o m p o u n d , if this is being u s e d ,
unless specifically instructed otherwise.
Ensure that all orifices, channels or pipes
are clear, and blow through t h e m , preferably
using compressed air.
Oil seals
Oil seals can be removed by levering them
out with a wide flat-bladed screwdriver or similar
implement. Alternatively, a number of selftapping screws may be screwed into the seal,
and these used as a purchase for pliers or some
similar device in order to pull the seal free.
Whenever an oil seal is removed f r o m its
working location, either individually or as part
of an assembly, it should be renewed.
The very fine sealing lip of the seal is easily
d a m a g e d , and will not seal if the surface it
contacts is not completely clean and free from
scratches, nicks or grooves. If the original
sealing surface of the component cannot be
restored, and the manufacturer has not made
provision for slight relocation of the seal
relative to the sealing surface, the component
should be renewed.
Protect the lips of the seal from any surface
w h i c h may d a m a g e t h e m in the course of
fitting. U s e . t a p e or a conical sleeve where
possible. Lubricate the seal lips with oil before
fitting and, on dual-lipped seals, fill the space
between the lips with grease.
Unless otherwise stated, oil seals must be
fitted w i t h their sealing lips t o w a r d the
lubricant to be sealed.
Use a tubular drift or block of w o o d of the
appropriate size to install the seal and, if the
seal housing is s h o u l d e r e d , drive the seal
d o w n to the shoulder. If the seal housing is
unshouldered, the seal should be fitted with
its face flush with the housing top face (unless
otherwise instructed).
Screw threads
and
fastenings
Seized nuts, bolts and screws are quite a
c o m m o n occurrence where corrosion has set
in, and the use of penetrating oil or releasing
fluid will often o v e r c o m e this problem if the
offending item is soaked for a while before
attempting to release it. The use of an impact
driver may also provide a means of releasing
such stubborn fastening devices, when used
in
conjunction
with
the
appropriate
screwdriver bit or s o c k e t . If none of t h e s e
methods works, it may be necessary to resort
to the careful application of heat, or the use of
a hacksaw or nut splitter device.
Studs are usually removed by locking t w o
nuts together on the threaded part, and then
using a spanner on the lower nut to unscrew
the stud. Studs or bolts which have broken off
below the surface of the component in which
they are mounted can sometimes be removed
using a stud extractor. Always ensure that a
blind tapped hole is completely free from oil,
grease, water or other fluid before installing
the bolt or stud. Failure to do this could cause
the housing to crack due to the hydraulic
action of the bolt or stud as it is screwed in.
When tightening a castellated nut to accept
a split pin, tighten the nut to the specified
t o r q u e , where applicable, and then tighten
further to the next split pin hole. Never slacken
the nut to align the split pin hole, unless stated
in the repair procedure.
When checking or retightening a nut or bolt
to a specified torque setting, slacken the nut
or bolt by a quarter of a turn, and then
retighten to the specified setting. However,
this should not be attempted where angular
tightening has been used.
For s o m e s c r e w fastenings, notably
cylinder head bolts or nuts, t o r q u e w r e n c h
settings are no longer specified for the latter
stages of tightening, "angle-tightening" being
called up instead. Typically, a fairly low torque
w r e n c h setting will be applied to the
bolts/nuts in the correct sequence, followed
by one or more stages of tightening through
specified angles.
Locknuts,
locktabs
and
washers
Any fastening w h i c h will rotate against a
c o m p o n e n t or housing during tightening
should always have a washer between it and
the relevant component or housing.
Spring or split washers should always be
renewed when they are used to lock a critical
c o m p o n e n t such as a b i g - e n d bearing
retaining bolt or nut. L o c k t a b s w h i c h are
f o l d e d over to retain a nut or bolt s h o u l d
always be renewed.
Self-locking nuts can be re-used in n o n critical areas, providing resistance can be felt
when the locking portion passes over the bolt
or stud thread. However, it should be noted
that self-locking stiffnuts tend to lose their
REF.?
effectiveness after long periods of use, and
should then be renewed as a matter of course.
Split pins must always be replaced w i t h
new ones of the correct size for the hole.
When t h r e a d - l o c k i n g c o m p o u n d is f o u n d
on the threads of a fastener which is to be reused, it should be cleaned off with a wire
brush and "solvent, and fresh c o m p o u n d
applied on reassembly.
Special
tools
S o m e repair p r o c e d u r e s in this manual
entail the use of special tools such as a press,
t w o or three-legged pullers, spring c o m pressors, etc. Wherever possible, suitable
readily-available alternatives to the m a n u facturer's special tools are described, and are
s h o w n in use. In s o m e instances, where no
alternative is possible, it has been necessary
to resort to the use of a manufacturer's tool,
and this has been done for reasons of safety
as well as the efficient completion of the repair
operation. Unless you are highly-skilled and
have a t h o r o u g h understanding of the
p r o c e d u r e s d e s c r i b e d , never a t t e m p t to
bypass the use of any special tool when the
p r o c e d u r e d e s c r i b e d specifies its use. Not
only is there a very great risk of personal
injury, but expensive d a m a g e c o u l d be
caused to the components involved.
Environmental
considerations
When disposing of used engine oil, brake
fluid, antifreeze, etc, give due consideration to
any detrimental environmental effects. Do not,
for instance, pour any of the above liquids
down drains into the general sewage system,
or onto the ground to soak away. Many local
council refuse tips provide a facility for waste
oil disposal, as do some garages. If none of
these facilities are available, consult your local
Environmental Health Department, or the
National Rivers Authority, for further advice.
With the universal t i g h t e n i n g - u p of legislation regarding the emission of environmentally-harmful substances from motor vehicles,
most vehicles have tamperproof devices fitted
to the main a d j u s t m e n t points of the fuel
system. These devices are primarily designed
to prevent unqualified persons from adjusting
the fuel/air mixture, w i t h the c h a n c e of a
c o n s e q u e n t increase in toxic emissions. If
such devices are f o u n d during servicing or
overhaul, they should, wherever possible, be
renewed or refitted in a c c o r d a n c e with the
m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s requirements or current
legislation.
O I L
I
A
H
I
L I N E
0800 66 33 66
Note: It is
antisocial
and
illegal to dump
oil down the
drain. To find
the location of
your local oil
recycling
bank,
call this
number free.
REF.8
Tools and working facilities
Introduction
A selection of good tools is a fundamental
requirement f o r anyone c o n t e m p l a t i n g t h e
maintenance a n d repair of a m o t o r vehicle.
For t h e owner w h o d o e s not possess any,
their p u r c h a s e will prove a c o n s i d e r a b l e
expense, offsetting some of the savings made
by doing-it-yourself. However, provided that
the tools purchased meet the relevant national
safety standards and are of good quality, they
will last f o r many years a n d prove an
extremely worthwhile investment.
To help the average owner to decide which
tools are needed to carry out the various tasks
detailed in this manual, w e have c o m p i l e d
three lists of t o o l s under t h e f o l l o w i n g
headings: Maintenance
and minor
repair,
Repair and overhaul, and Special. Newcomers
to practical m e c h a n i c s should start off with
the Maintenance and minor repair tool kit, and
confine themselves to the simpler jobs around
the vehicle. T h e n , as c o n f i d e n c e a n d
experience grow, more difficult tasks can be
undertaken, with extra tools being purchased
as, and when, they are needed. In this way, a
Maintenance and minor repair tool kit can be
built up into a Repair and overhaul tool kit over
a considerable period of t i m e , w i t h o u t any
major cash outlays. The experienced d o - i t yourselfer will have a tool kit good enough for
most repair and overhaul procedures, and will
add tools from the Special category when it is
felt that the expense is justified by the amount
of use t o which these tools will be put.
Maintenance
minor repair
and
tool kit
The tools given in this list should be
c o n s i d e r e d as a m i n i m u m requirement if
routine maintenance, servicing a n d minor
repair operations are t o b e undertaken. W e
r e c o m m e n d t h e purchase of c o m b i n a t i o n
spanners (ring o n e e n d , o p e n - e n d e d t h e
other); although more expensive than o p e n ended ones, they do give the advantages of
both types of spanner.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Combination spanners:
Metric - 8 to 19 mm inclusive
Adjustable spanner - 35 mm jaw (approx.)
Spark plug spanner (with rubber insert) petrol models
Spark plug gap adjustment tool petrol models
Sef of feeler gauges
Brake bleed nipple spanner
Screwdrivers:
Flat blade - 100 mm long x 6 mm dia
Cross blade - 100 mm long x 6 mm dia
Torx - various sizes (not all vehicles)
Combination pliers
Hacksaw (junior)
Tyre pump
Tyre pressure gauge
Oil can
Oil filter removal tool
Fine emery cloth
Wire brush (small)
Funnel (medium size)
Sump drain plug key (not all vehicles)
S o c k e t s a n d reversible r a t c h e t drive
B r a k e bleeding kit
Torx key, s o c k e t a n d b i t
Hose c l a m p
Repair
and overhaul
tool kit
These tools are virtually essential f o r
anyone undertaking any major repairs t o a
motor vehicle, and are additional t o those
given in the Maintenance and minor repair list.
Included in this list is a comprehensive set of
sockets. Although these are expensive, they
will be f o u n d invaluable as they are so
versatile - particularly if various drives are
included in the set. We recommend the halfinch square-drive t y p e , as this can be used
with most proprietary torque wrenches.
The tools in this list will sometimes need to
be supplemented by tools from the Special list:
•
Sockets to cover range in previous list
(including Torx/Ribe sockets)
•
Reversible ratchet drive (for use with
sockets)
•
Extension piece, 250 mm (for use with
sockets)
•
Universal joint (for use with sockets)
•
Flexible handle or sliding T "breaker bar"
(for use with sockets)
LJ Torque wrench (for use with sockets)
•
Self-locking grips
•
Ball pein hammer
•
Soft-faced mallet (plastic or rubber)
•
Screwdrivers:
Flat blade - long & sturdy, short (chubby),
and narrow (electrician's) types
Cross blade - long & sturdy, and short
(chubby) types
•
Pliers:
Long-nosed
Side cutters (electrician's)
Circlip (internal and external)
•
Cold chisel - 25 mm
•
Scriber
•
Scraper
•
Centre-punch
•
Pin punch
•
Hacksaw
H
Brake hose clamp
•
Brake/clutch bleeding kit
•
Selection of twist drills
•
Steel rule/straight-edge
•
Allen keys (inc. splined/Torx/Ribe type)
•
Selection of files
•
Wire brush
•
Axle stands
•
Jack (strong trolley or hydraulic type)
•
Light with extension lead
•
Universal electrical multi-meter
Angular-tightening gauge
Tools and working facilities
Special
tools
Buying
tools
Working
The tools in this list are those which are not
used regularly, are expensive to buy, or which
need t o be used in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h their
manufacturers' instructions. Unless relatively
difficult m e c h a n i c a l j o b s are u n d e r t a k e n
f r e q u e n t l y , it will not be e c o n o m i c to buy
many of these tools. Where this is the case,
you could consider clubbing together with
friends (or joining a motorists' club) to make a
joint purchase, or borrowing the tools against
a d e p o s i t f r o m a local garage or t o o l hire
specialist. It is worth noting that many of the
larger DIY s u p e r s t o r e s n o w carry a large
range of special t o o l s for hire at m o d e s t
rates.
Reputable m o t o r accessory s h o p s and
superstores often offer excellent quality tools
at discount prices, so it pays to shop around.
Remember, you don't have to buy the most
expensive items on the shelf, but it is always
advisable to steer clear of the very cheap
tools. Beware of 'bargains' offered on market
stalls or at car boot sales. There are plenty of
g o o d tools around at reasonable prices, but
always aim to purchase items which meet the
relevant national safety standards. If in doubt,
ask the proprietor or manager of the shop for
advice before making a purchase.
The following list contains only those tools
and instruments freely available to the public,
and not those special tools produced by the
vehicle manufacturer specifically for its dealer
network. You will find occasional references
to these manufacturers' special tools in the
text of this manual. Generally, an alternative
m e t h o d of doing the j o b without the vehicle
manufacturers' special tool is given. However,
s o m e t i m e s there is no alternative t o using
them. Where this is the case and the relevant
tool cannot be bought or borrowed, you will
have to entrust the work to a dealer.
Having purchased a reasonable tool kit, it is
necessary to keep the t o o l s in a clean and
serviceable condition. After use, always wipe
off any dirt, grease and metal particles using a
clean, dry cloth, before putting the tools away.
Never leave them lying around after they have
been used. A simple tool rack on the garage
or w o r k s h o p wall for items s u c h as
screwdrivers and pliers is a g o o d idea. Store
all normal spanners and s o c k e t s in a metal
box. Any measuring instruments, gauges,
meters, etc, must be carefully stored where
they cannot be damaged or become rusty.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
O
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take a little care w h e n tools are u s e d .
H a m m e r heads inevitably b e c o m e m a r k e d ,
and screwdrivers lose the keen edge on their
blades f r o m t i m e to t i m e . A little timely
attention with emery cloth or a file will soon
restore items like this to a good finish.
Angular-tightening
gauge
Valve spring
compressor
Valve grinding tool
Piston ring compressor
Piston ring removal/installation
tool
Cylinder bore hone
Balljoint separator
Coil spring compressors (where applicable)
Two/three-legged
hub and bearing puller
Impact
screwdriver
Micrometer and/or vernier calipers
Dial gauge
Stroboscopic timing light
Dwell angle
meter/tachometer
Fault code reader
Cylinder compression
gauge
Hand-operated vacuum pump and gauge
Clutch plate alignment set
Brake shoe steady spring cup removal tool
Bush and bearing removal/installation
set
Stud extractors
Tap and die set
Lifting tackle
Trolley jack
Strap w r e n c h
Care and maintenance
of
tools
REF.Q
facilities
Not to be forgotten when discussing tools
is the w o r k s h o p itself. If anything more than
routine maintenance is to be carried out, a
suitable working area becomes essential.
It is a p p r e c i a t e d that many an ownermechanic j s f o r c e d by c i r c u m s t a n c e s to
remove an engine or similar item without the
benefit of a garage or workshop. Having done
this, any repairs should always be done under
the cover of a roof.
Wherever possible, any dismantling should
be done on a clean, flat workbench or table at
a suitable working height.
Any w o r k b e n c h needs a vice; one with a
jaw opening of 100 m m is suitable for most
j o b s . As m e n t i o n e d previously, s o m e clean
dry storage space is also required for tools, as
well as for any lubricants, cleaning fluids,
touch-up
paints
etc,
which
become
necessary.
Another item which may be required, and
which has a much more general usage, is an
electric drill with a chuck capacity of at least
8 m m . This, t o g e t h e r with a g o o d range of
t w i s t drills, is virtually essential for fitting
accessories.
Last, but not least, always keep a supply of
old n e w s p a p e r s and clean, lint-free rags
available, and try to.keep any working area as
clean as possible.
Dial t e s t i n d i c a t o r ("dial g a u g e " )
Compression tester
Fault c o d e reader
REF.10
MOT test checks
This is a guide t o g e t t i n g your vehicle t h r o u g h the M O T test.
Obviously it will not be possible t o examine the vehicle t o the same
standard as the professional MOT tester. However, working through
the following c h e c k s will enable y o u t o identify any problem areas
before submitting the vehicle for the test.
Where a testable c o m p o n e n t is in borderline condition, the tester
has discretion in deciding whether to pass or fail it. The basis of such
discretion is whether the tester would be happy for a close relative or
friend t o use the vehicle with the component in that condition. If the
vehicle presented is clean and evidently well cared for, the tester may
be more inclined to pass a borderline component than if the vehicle is
scruffy and apparently neglected.
It has only been possible t o summarise the test requirements here,
based on the regulations in force at the time of printing. Test standards
are becoming increasingly stringent, although there are some exemptions
for older vehicles.
An assistant will be needed t o help carry out some of these checks.
The checks have been sub-divided
1
1
Checks carried out
FROM THE DRIVER'S
SEAT
into four categories,
2
as follows:
Checks carried out
WITH THE VEHICLE
ON THE GROUND
3
Checks carried out
WITH THE VEHICLE
RAISED AND THE
WHEELS FREE TO
TURN
4r"
C h e c k s carried out on
YOUR VEHICLE'S
EXHAUST EMISSION
SYSTEM
C h e c k s carried out
FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT
Handbrake
• Test the operation of t h e handbrake.
Excessive travel (too many clicks) indicates
incorrect brake or cable adjustment.
• Check that t h e handbrake c a n n o t b e
released by tapping the lever sideways. Check
the security of the lever mountings.
• Check that the brake pedal is secure and in
g o o d condition. Check also for signs of fluid
leaks o n t h e p e d a l , floor or c a r p e t s , w h i c h
would indicate failed seals in the brake master
cylinder.
• Check the servo unit (when applicable) by
operating the brake pedal several times, then
keeping the pedal depressed and starting the
engine. As t h e engine starts, the pedal will
move d o w n slightly. If not, the vacuum hose
or the servo itself may be faulty.
Footbrake
• Depress the brake pedal and check that it
does not creep d o w n to the floor, indicating a
master cylinder fault. Release the pedal, wait
a few s e c o n d s , then depress it again. If the
pedal travels nearly t o t h e floor before firm
resistance is felt, brake adjustment or repair is
necessary. If the pedal feels spongy, there is
air in the hydraulic system w h i c h must be
removed by bleeding.
Steering
wheel
and
m o v e m e n t of the steering w h e e l , indicating
wear in t h e c o l u m n s u p p o r t bearings or
couplings.
Windscreen,
mirrors
and
sunvisor
• The windscreen must be free of cracks or
other significant d a m a g e within the driver's
field of view. (Small stone chips are a c c e p t able.) Rear view mirrors must be secure,
intact, and capable of being adjusted.
column
• Examine the steering wheel for fractures or
looseness of the hub, spokes or rim.
• Move the steering wheel from side to side
and then u p a n d d o w n . Check that the
steering wheel is not loose on t h e c o l u m n ,
indicating wear or a loose retaining nut.
Continue moving the steering wheel as before,
but also turn it slightly from left to right.
• Check that the steering wheel is not loose
on the column, and that there is no abnormal
•
The driver's sunvisor must be capable of
being stored in the " u p " position.
MOT test checks
Electrical
equipment
• S w i t c h on t h e ignition a n d c h e c k t h e
operation of the horn.
• Check the windscreen washers and wipers,
examining the wiper blades; renew damaged
or perished blades. Also check the operation
of the stop-lights.
Seat belts
and
• Inspect both front brake flexible hoses for
cracks or deterioration of the rubber. Turn the
steering from lock to lock, and ensure that the
hoses do not contact the wheel, tyre, or any
part of the steering or suspension mechanism.
With the brake pedal firmly depressed, check
the hoses for bulges or leaks under pressure.
seats
N o t e : The following checks are applicable
all seat belts, front and rear.
to
• Examine the w e b b i n g of all t h e belts
(including rear belts if fitted) for cuts, serious
fraying or deterioration. Fasten and unfasten
each belt t o check the buckles. If applicable,
c h e c k the retracting m e c h a n i s m . Check the
security of all seat belt mountings accessible
from inside the vehicle.
• Seat belts w i t h pre-tensioners, o n c e
activated, have a "flag" or similar showing on
the seat belt stalk. This, in itself, is not a
reason for test failure.
• The front seats t h e m s e l v e s must be
securely a t t a c h e d a n d the backrests m u s t
lock in the upright position.
Doors
• Both front doors must be able to be opened
and closed from outside and inside, and must
latch securely when closed.
Mm C h e c k s c a r r i e d o u t
WITH THE VEHICLE ON THE
GROUND
Vehicle
REF»11
identification
• Number plates must be in g o o d condition,
secure and legible, with letters and numbers
correctly spaced - spacing at (A) should be at
least twice that at (B).
47 HY
• The VIN plate and/or h o m o l o g a t i o n plate
must be legible.
• Check the operation of the sidelights and
number plate lights. The lenses and reflectors
must be secure, clean and undamaged.
• Check the operation and alignment of the
headlights. The headlight reflectors must not
be tarnished a n d t h e lenses must be
undamaged.
• S w i t c h on t h e ignition a n d c h e c k t h e
operation of the direction indicators (including
the instrument panel tell-tale) and the hazard
warning lights. Operation of the sidelights and
stop-lights must not affect the indicators - if it
does, the cause is usually a bad earth at the
rear light cluster.
• Check the operation of the rear foglight(s),
including the warning light on the instrument
panel or in the switch.
• The A B S warning light must illuminate in
accordance with the manufacturers' design.
For m o s t vehicles, t h e A B S w a r n i n g light
should illuminate when the ignition is switched
o n , a n d (if the system is operating properly)
extinguish after a few seconds. Refer t o the
owner's handbook.
Footbrake
• Examine the master cylinder, brake pipes
and servo unit for leaks, loose m o u n t i n g s ,
corrosion or other damage.
• The fluid reservoir must be secure and the
fluid level must be between the upper (A) and
lower (B) markings.
Steering
and
suspension
• Have your assistant turn the steering wheel
f r o m side t o side slightly, up t o t h e point
where the steering gear just begins to transmit
this movement to the roadwheels. Check for
excessive free play b e t w e e n t h e steering
wheel and the steering gear, indicating wear
or insecurity of the steering column joints, the
c o l u m n - t o - s t e e r i n g gear c o u p l i n g , or t h e
steering gear itself.
• Have your assistant turn the steering wheel
more vigorously in each direction, so that the
roadwheels just begin to turn. As this is done,
examine all t h e steering joints, linkages,
fittings a n d a t t a c h m e n t s .
Renew any
c o m p o n e n t that s h o w s signs of wear or
d a m a g e . On vehicles w i t h power steering,
c h e c k t h e security a n d c o n d i t i o n of t h e
steering p u m p , drivebelt and hoses.
• Check that t h e vehicle is s t a n d i n g level,
and at approximately the correct ride height.
Shock
absorbers
• Depress each corner of the vehicle in turn,
then release it. The vehicle should rise and
then settle in its normal position. If the vehicle
continues to rise and fall, the shock absorber
is defective. A s h o c k absorber w h i c h has
seized will also cause the vehicle to fail.
REF«12
Exhaust
MOT test checks
system
• Start t h e engine. With your assistant
holding a rag over t h e tailpipe, c h e c k t h e
entire system for leaks. Repair or renew
leaking sections.
Front and rear suspension
wheel
bearings
and
• Starting at the front right-hand side, grasp
the roadwheel at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock
positions and rock gently but firmly. Check for
free play or insecurity at the wheel bearings,
suspension balljoints, or suspension mountings, pivots and attachments.
• Now grasp the wheel at the 12 o'clock and
6 o'clock positions and repeat the previous
i n s p e c t i o n . Spin the w h e e l , and c h e c k for
roughness or tightness of the front wheel
bearing.
• The same general checks apply to vehicles
fitted w i t h other suspension t y p e s , such as
torsion bars, hydraulic displacer units, etc.
Ensure that all mountings and attachments are
secure, that there are no signs of excessive
wear, corrosion or damage, and (on hydraulic
types) that there are po fluid leaks or damaged
pipes.
• Inspect the s h o c k absorbers for signs of
serious fluid leakage. Check for wear of the
mounting bushes or attachments, or damage
to the body of the unit.
Driveshafts
(fwd vehicles
only)
• Rotate each front wheel in turn and inspect
the constant velocity joint gaiters for splits or
d a m a g e . Also c h e c k that each driveshaft is
straight and undamaged.
* J Checks carried out
WITH THE VEHICLE RAISED
AND THE WHEELS FREE TO
TURN
Jack up the front and rear of the vehicle,
and securely
support
it on axle
stands.
Position the stands clear of the
suspension
assemblies.
Ensure that the wheels
are
clear of the ground and that the
steering
can be turned from lock to lock.
Steering
mechanism
• If e x c e s s free play is s u s p e c t e d at a
component pivot point, this can be confirmed
by using a large screwdriver or similar tool
and levering between t h e mounting and the
c o m p o n e n t a t t a c h m e n t . This will confirm
w h e t h e r t h e wear is in the pivot b u s h , its
retaining bolt, or in t h e m o u n t i n g itself (the
bolt holes can often become elongated).
• Have your assistant turn the steering from
lock t o lock. C h e c k that the steering turns
s m o o t h l y , and that no part of the steering
m e c h a n i s m , including a wheel or tyre, fouls
any brake hose or pipe or any part of the body
structure.
• Examine t h e steering rack rubber gaiters
for damage or insecurity of the retaining clips.
If power steering is fitted, check for signs of
damage or leakage of the fluid hoses, pipes or
c o n n e c t i o n s . Also c h e c k for excessive
stiffness or binding of the steering, a missing
split pin or locking device, or severe corrosion
of the b o d y structure within 30 c m of any
steering component attachment point.
Braking
system
• If possible w i t h o u t d i s m a n t l i n g , c h e c k
brake p a d wear and disc c o n d i t i o n . Ensure
that the friction lining material has not worn
excessively, (A) and that the discs are not
fractured, pitted, scored or badly worn (B).
• Carry out all the above checks at the other
front wheel, and then at both rear wheels.
Springs
and shock
absorbers
• Examine t h e suspension struts (when
applicable) for serious fluid leakage, corrosion,
or d a m a g e to the casing. Also c h e c k the
security of the mounting points.
• If coil springs are f i t t e d , c h e c k that t h e
spring ends locate in their seats, and that the
spring is not corroded, cracked or broken.
• If leaf springs are f i t t e d , c h e c k that all
leaves are intact, that t h e axle is securely
attached t o each spring, and that there is no
deterioration of t h e spring eye m o u n t i n g s ,
bushes, and shackles.
• Examine all the rigid brake
pipes
underneath t h e vehicle, and t h e flexible
hose(s) at the rear. Look for corrosion, chafing
or insecurity of the pipes, a n d for signs of
bulging under pressure, c h a f i n g , splits or
deterioration of the flexible hoses.
• Look for signs of fluid leaks at the brake
calipers or on the brake backplates. Repair or
renew leaking components.
• Slowly spin each w h e e l , while your
assistant d e p r e s s e s a n d releases t h e
footbrake. Ensure that each brake is operating
and does not bind when the pedal is released.
MOT test checks
REF-13
used after 1 August 1992 (K registration) must
conform t o the manufacturer's specification.
The MOT tester has access to a DOT database
or emissions handbook, which lists the CO and
HC limits for each make and model of vehicle.
The CO level is measured with the engine at
idle speed,, and at "fast idle". The following
limits are given as a general guide:
s t
• Examine the handbrake m e c h a n i s m ,
c h e c k i n g for frayed or b r o k e n c a b l e s ,
excessive corrosion, or wear or insecurity of
the linkage. Check that the mechanism works
on each relevant w h e e l , a n d releases fully,
without binding.
• It is not possible t o test brake efficiency
without special equipment, but a road test can
be carried out later t o check that the vehicle
pulls up in a straight line.
Fuel and exhaust
systems
• Inspect the fuel t a n k (including the filler
cap), fuel pipes, hoses a n d unions. All
c o m p o n e n t s must be secure and free f r o m
leaks.
• Examine the exhaust system over its entire
length, checking for any damaged, broken or
missing mountings, security of the retaining
clamps and rust or corrosion.
Body
corrosion
• Check the condition of t h e entire vehicle
structure for signs of corrosion in load-bearing
areas. (These include chassis box sections,
side sills, c r o s s - m e m b e r s , pillars, and all
s u s p e n s i o n , steering, braking system a n d
seat belt m o u n t i n g s and anchorages.) Any
corrosion w h i c h has seriously reduced the
thickness of a load-bearing area is likely t o
cause t h e vehicle t o fail. In this case
professional repairs are likely to be needed.
• Damage or corrosion which causes sharp
or otherwise dangerous edges t o be exposed
will also cause the vehicle to fail.
4*
Checks carried out o n
YOUR VEHICLE'S EXHAUST
EMISSION SYSTEM
Petrol
Wheels and
tyres
• Examine the sidewalls a n d tread area of
each tyre in turn. Check for cuts, tears, lumps,
bulges, separation of the tread, and exposure
of the ply or c o r d d u e to wear or d a m a g e .
Check that the tyre bead is correctly seated
on the wheel rim, that the valve is sound and
properly seated, a n d that the wheel is not
distorted or damaged.
• Check that the tyres are of the correct size
for the vehicle, that they are of the same size
and type on each axle, and that the pressures
arevcorrect.
• Check t h e tyre tread d e p t h . The legal
minimum at the time of writing is 1.6 m m over
at least t h r e e - q u a r t e r s of the tread w i d t h .
Abnormal tread wear may indicate incorrect
front wheel alignment.
models
• Have the engine at normal o p e r a t i n g
temperature, and make sure that it is in good
tune (ignition system in g o o d order, air filter
element clean, etc).
• Before any measurements are carried out,
raise the engine speed to around 2500 r p m ,
and hold it at this speed for 20 s e c o n d s .
Allow the engine speed t o return to idle, and
watch for smoke emissions from the exhaust
tailpipe. If the idle speed is obviously m u c h
t o o high, or if dense blue or clearly-visible
black smoke comes from the tailpipe for more
than 5 seconds, the vehicle will fail. As a rule
of thumb, blue smoke signifies oil being burnt
(engine wear) while black s m o k e signifies
unburnt fuel (dirty air cleaner element, or
other carburettor or fuel system fault).
• An exhaust gas analyser c a p a b l e of
measuring c a r b o n m o n o x i d e (CO) a n d
hydrocarbons (HC) is now needed. If such an
instrument c a n n o t be hired or b o r r o w e d , a
local garage may agree t o perform the check
for a small fee.
CO emissions
(mixture)
• At the time of writing, for vehicles first used
between 1 August 1975 and 3 1 July 1986 (P
to C registration), the C O level must not
exceed 4 . 5 % by volume. For vehicles first
used between 1 August 1986 and 3 1 July
1992 (D t o J registration), the CO level must
not exceed 3 . 5 % by volume. Vehicles first
s t
s t
s t
s t
At idle speed CO level no more than 0.5%
At "fast idle" (2500 to 3000 rpm) CO level no more than 0.3%
(Minimum oil temperature 60°C)
• If t h e C O level c a n n o t be r e d u c e d far
e n o u g h t o pass the test (and t h e fuel a n d
ignition s y s t e m s are otherwise in g o o d
condition) then the carburettor is badly worn,
or there is some problem in the fuel injection
system or catalytic converter (as applicable).
HC
emissions
• With the CO within limits, HC emissions for
vehicles first used between 1 August 1975
and 3 1 July 1992 (P to J registration) must
not e x c e e d 1200 p p m . Vehicles first used
after 1 A u g u s t 1992 (K registration) must
conform t o the manufacturer's specification.
The M O T tester has access t o a DOT
database or emissions handbook, which lists
the C O a n d HC limits for each m a k e a n d
model of vehicle. The HC level is measured
with the engine at "fast idle". The following is
given as a general guide:
s t
s t
s t
At "fast idle" (2500 to 3000 rpm) HC level no more than 200 p p m
(Minimum oil temperature 60°C)
• Excessive HC emissions are c a u s e d by
incomplete combustion, the causes of which
can include oil being burnt, mechanical wear
and ignition/fuel system malfunction.
Diesel
models
• The only emission test applicable to Diesel
engines is the measuring of exhaust s m o k e
density. The test involves accelerating t h e
engine several t i m e s t o its m a x i m u m
unloaded speed.
N o t e : It is of the utmost importance that the
engine timing belt is in good condition before
the test is carried out.
• The limits for Diesel engine exhaust
smoke, introduced in September 1995 are:
Vehicles first used before 1 ' August 1979:
Exempt from metered smoke testing, but
must not emit " d e n s e blue or clearly
visible black smoke for a period of more
than 5 seconds at idle" or "dense blue or
clearly visible black smoke during acceleration which would obscure the view of
other road users".
s
Non-turbocharged
vehicles first used after
1 August 1979: 2.5m-i
Turbocharged vehicles first used after
1 August 1979: 3.0nv
• Excessive smoke can be caused by a dirty
air cleaner element. Otherwise, professional
advice may be needed to find the cause.
st
st
1
REF.14
Fault finding
Engine
Automatic
•
•
•
•
•
D
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Engine fails t o rotate when attempting t o start
Engine rotates but witl not star}
Engine difficult to start when cold
Engine difficult to start when hot
Starter motor noisy or excessively-rough in engagement
Engine starts but stops immediately
Engine idles erratically
Engine misfires at idle speed
Engine misfires throughout the driving speed range
Engine hesitates on acceleration
Engine stalls
Engine lacks power
Engine backfires
Oil pressure warning light illuminated with engine running
Engine runs-on after switching off
Engine noises
Engine oil consumption excessive
Cooling
•
•
•
•
•
system
Overheating
Overcooling
External coolant leakage
. Internal coolant leakage
Corrosion
Fuel and exhaust
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
systems
Pedal travels to floor - no pressure or very little resistance
Clutch fails to disengage (unable to select gears)
Clutch slips (engine speed increases with no increase in vehicle
speed)
Judder as clutch is engaged
Noise when depressing or releasing clutch pedal
transmission
Noisy in neutral with engine running
Noisy in one particular gear
Difficulty engaging gears
J u m p s out of gear
Vibration
Lubricant leaks
Introduction
The vehicle owner who does his or her own
maintenance according to the recommended
service schedules should not have to use this
section of the manual very o f t e n . M o d e r n
c o m p o n e n t reliability is such that, provided
those items subject to wear or deterioration
are inspected or renewed at the specified
intervals, sudden failure is comparatively rare.
Faults do not usually just happen as a result of
sudden failure, but develop over a period of
time. Major mechanical failures in particular
are usually p r e c e d e d by characteristic
Driveshafts
•
•
Clicking or knocking noise on turns (at slow speed o n full lock)
Vibration when decelerating or accelerating
Braking
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Excessive fuel consumption
Fuel leakage and/or fuel odour
Excessive noise or fumes from exhaust system
Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
and steering
systems
Vehicle pulls to one side
Wheel wobble and vibration
Excessive pitching and/or rolling around corners, or during
braking
Wandering or general instability
Excessively-stiff steering
Excessive play in steering
Lack of power assistance
Tyre wear excessive
Electrical
•
•
system
Vehicle pulls to one side under braking
Noise (grinding or high-pitched squeal) when brakes applied
Excessive brake pedal travel
Brake pedal feels spongy when depressed
Excessive brake pedal effort required to stop vehicle
Judder felt through brake pedal or steering wheel when braking
Brakes binding
Suspension
Clutch
•
•
•
•
•
transmission
Fluid leakage
Transmission fluid brown, or has burned smell
Transmission will not downshift (kickdown) with accelerator pedal
fully depressed
General gear selection problems
Engine will not start in any gear, or starts in gears other than Park
or Neutral
•
Transmission slips, is noisy, or has no drive in forward or reverse
gears
system
Battery will not hold a charge for more than a few days
Ignition/no-charge warning light remains illuminated with engine
running
Ignition/no-charge warning light fails to c o m e on
Lights inoperative
Instrument readings inaccurate or erratic
Horn inoperative, or unsatisfactory in operation
Windscreen/tailgate wipers inoperative or unsatisfactory in
operation
Windscreen/tailgate washers inoperative, or unsatisfactory in
operation
Electric windows inoperative, or unsatisfactory in operation
Central locking system inoperative, or unsatisfactory in operation
symptoms over hundreds or even thousands
of miles. Those c o m p o n e n t s w h i c h do
occasionally fail w i t h o u t warning are often
small and easily carried in the vehicle.
With any f a u l t - f i n d i n g , the first step is to
d e c i d e where to begin
investigations.
S o m e t i m e s this is o b v i o u s , but on other
o c c a s i o n s , a little detective w o r k will be
necessary. The owner w h o makes half a
dozen
haphazard
adjustments
or
replacements may be successful in curing a
fault (or its symptoms), but will be none the
wiser if the fault recurs, and ultimately may
have spent more time and money than w a s
necessary. A calm and logical approach will
be found to be more satisfactory in the long
run. Always take into a c c o u n t any warning
signs or abnormalities that may have been
noticed in the period p r e c e d i n g the fault p o w e r loss, high or low gauge readings,
unusual smells, etc - and r e m e m b e r that
failure of components such as fuses or spark
plugs may only be pointers to s o m e
underlying fault.
Fault finding
The pages which follow provide an easyreference guide to the more c o m m o n
p r o b l e m s w h i c h may o c c u r during the
operation of the vehicle. These problems and
their possible causes are g r o u p e d under
headings d e n o t i n g various c o m p o n e n t s or
s y s t e m s , such as Engine, Cooling s y s t e m ,
etc. The general Chapter which deals with the
problem is also shown in brackets; refer to the
relevant Part of that Chapter for s y s t e m specific i n f o r m a t i o n . Whatever the fault,
certain basic principles apply. These are as
follows:
Verify the fault. This is simply a matter of
being sure that you know what the symptoms
are before starting w o r k . This is particularly
important if you are investigating a fault for
someone else, who may not have described it
very accurately.
Engine
Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
fails to rotate
Don't overlook the obvious. For example, if
the vehicle w o n ' t start, is there petrol in the
tank? (Don't take anyone else's word on this
particular point, and don't trust the fuel gauge
either!) If an electrical fault is indicated, look
for loose or broken wires before digging out
the test gear.
be defective (especially if it's been rattling
around in the boot for months), and d o n ' t
leave c o m p o n e n t s out of a fault diagnosis
s e q u e n c e just because they are new or
recently fitted. When you do finally diagnose a
difficult fault, you'll probably realise that all the
evidence was there from the start.
Cure the disease,
not the
symptom.
Substituting a flat battery with a fully-charged
one will get you off the hard shoulder, but if
the underlying cause is not attended to, the
new battery will go the same way. Similarly,
changing oil-fouled spark plugs for a new set
will get you moving again, but remember that
the reason for the fouling (if it wasn't simply an
incorrect grade of plug) will have to be
established and corrected.
Consider what work, if any, has recently
been carried out. Many faults arise t h r o u g h
careless or hurried work. For instance, if any
work has been performed under the bonnet,
could some of the wiring have been dislodged
or incorrectly routed, or a hose trapped? Have
all the fasteners been properly t i g h t e n e d ?
Were new, genuine parts and new gaskets
used? There is often a certain a m o u n t of
detective work to be done in this case, as an
apparently-unrelated task can have farreaching consequences.
Don't take anything for granted. Particularly,
don't forget that a 'new' component may itself
when attempting
to
start
Battery terminal connections loose or corroded {Weekly checks).
Battery discharged or faulty, or electrolyte level low (Chapter 1
or 5A).
Broken, loose or disconnected wiring in the starting circuit
(Chapter 5A).
Defective starter solenoid or switch (Chapter 5A).
Defective starter motor (Chapter 5A).
Starter pinion or flywheel ring gear teeth loose or broken (relevant
part of Chapter 2 or 5A).
Engine/transmission earth leads broken or disconnected (Chapter 2E or 5A).
Automatic transmission not in Park/Neutral position, or selector
cable adjustment incorrect (Chapter 7B).
Engine
rotates
but will not
start
•
•
Fuel tank empty.
Fuel pump not working, or fuel lines blocked/damaged (Chapter 4A
or 4B).
•
Fuel filter blocked, where applicable (Chapter 1).
•
Fuel injector wiring disconnected or damaged (Chapter 4A or 4B).
•
Battery discharged, or electrolyte level low (engine rotates slowly)
(Chapter 1 or 5A).
•
Battery terminal connections loose or corroded [Weekly checks).
•
Ignition components damp or damaged (Chapter 1 or 5B).
•
Broken, loose or disconnected wiring in the ignition circuit
(Chapter 1 or 5B).
•
Immobiliser fault (Chapter 12, or Disconnecting the battery).
•
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1).
•
Low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
22 Major mechanical failure (eg timing belt broken) (relevant part of
Chapter 2).
Engine
difficult
to start
when
REF.IS
cold
22 JBattery discharged or faulty, or electrolyte level low (Chapter 1
or 5A).
•
Battery terminal connections loose or corroded {Weekly checks).
•
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1).
ZZ Other ignition system fault (Chapter 1 or 5B).
•
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
G Low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Engine
difficult
to start
when
hot
21 Air cleaner element dirty or clogged (Chapter 1).
Z3 Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
•
Low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Starter motor
engagement
noisy or excessively-rough
in
ZZ Starter pinion or flywheel ring gear teeth loose or broken (Chapter 2 or 5A).
•
Starter motor mounting bolts loose or missing (Chapter 5A).
•
Starter motor internal components worn or damaged (Chapter 5A).
Engine
starts
but stops
immediately
ZZ Loose or faulty electrical connections in the ignition circuit
(Chapter 1 or 5B).
•
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
•
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
idles
erratically
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Fuel injectors partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Air cleaner element dirty or clogged (Chapter 1).
Crankcase breather hoses blocked or damaged (Chapter 1 or 5B).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1).
Uneven or low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Camshaft lobes worn (relevant part of Chapter 2).
misfires
at idle
speed
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1).
Faulty spark plug HT leads, where applicable (Chapter 5B).
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B o r 5B).
Fuel injector(s) partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Uneven or low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Disconnected, leaking or perished crankcase breather hoses
(Chapter 1 or 5B).
Crankshaft sensor dirty or damaged (Chapter 5B).
REF.16
Fault finding
Engine (continued)
Engine
range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
hesitates
on
acceleration
stalls
lacks
Oil pressure
running
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
power
backfires
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Spark plug HT leads incorrectly fitted (Chapter 5B).
Timing belt incorrectly fitted (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1,4A o r 4 B ) .
Emission control system fault (Chapter 4C).
warning
light illuminated
with
engine
Low oil level or incorrect oil grade (Chapter 1).
Faulty oil pressure switch (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Worn engine bearings and/or oil p u m p (relevant part of Chapter 2).
High engine operating temperature (Chapter 3).
Oil pump pressure relief valve defective (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Oil pick-up pipe strainer clogged (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Engine
runs-on
after
switching
off
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Excessive carbon build-up on cylinder head/piston crowns
(relevant part of Chapter 2).
High engine operating temperature (Chapter 3).
Engine
noises
Pre-ignition (pinking) or k n o c k i n g during acceleration or
under load
•
•
•
•
Engine management system fault - possibly in 'limp-home' mode
(Chapter 1, 4A, 4B o r 5 B ) .
Fuel injector(s) partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Timing belt incorrectly fitted (relevant part of Chapter 2)
Fuel filter choked (Chapter 1).
Fuel p u m p faulty (relevant part of Chapter 4).
Knock sensor faulty - ignition retarded (Chapter 5B).
Uneven or low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1),
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Brakes binding (Chapter 1 or 9).
Clutch slipping (Chapter 6).
Automatic transmission fluid level incorrect (Chapter 1).
Engine
•
•
•
•
speed
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Fuel injector(s) partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Fuel filter choked (Chapter 1).
Fuel pump faulty (relevant part of Chapter 4).
Fuel tank vent blocked or fuel pipes restricted (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Crankshaft sensor dirty or damaged (Chapter 5B).
Engine
•
the driving
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1).
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Fuel injector(s) partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Engine
•
•
•
throughout
Fuel filter choked (Chapter 1).
Fuel pump faulty (relevant part of Chapter 4).
Fuel tank vent blocked or fuel pipes restricted (relevant part of
Chapter 4).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Worn, faulty or incorrectly-gapped spark plugs (Chapter 1).
Faulty spark plug HT leads, where applicable (Chapter 5B).
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Fuel injector(s) partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Uneven or low cylinder compressions (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Crankshaft sensor dirty or damaged (Chapter 5B).
Engine
•
•
•
•
misfires
Incorrect grade of fuel (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Knock sensor faulty (Chapter 5B).
Vacuum leak at the inlet manifold or associated hoses (Chapter 1, 4A or 4B).
Excessive carbon build-up on cylinder head/piston crowns
(relevant part of Chapter 2).
Whistling or wheezing noises
•
•
•
•
Leaking inlet manifold gasket (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Leaking exhaust manifold gasket or front pipe-to-manifold joint
(Chapter 4C).
Leaking vacuum hose (Chapter 1, 4, 5B or 9).
Blowing cylinder head gasket (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Tapping or rattling noises
•
•
•
•
Worn valve gear or camshafts (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Worn or faulty hydraulic tappets (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Worn timing belt, tensioner, or idler pulleys (relevant part of
Chapter 2).
Ancillary component fault (coolant pump, alternator, etc) (Chapter 3 or 5A).
Knocking or thumping noises
•
•
•
•
Worn big-end bearings (regular heavy knocking, perhaps less
under load) (Chapter 2E).
Worn main bearings (rumbling and knocking, perhaps worsening
under load) (Chapter 2E).
Piston slap (most noticeable when cold - engine worn) (Chapter 2E).
Ancillary component fault (coolant pump, alternator, etc) (Chapter 3 or 5A).
Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
oil consumption
excessive
Wrong grade of oil, or oil level too high {Weekly checks).
Oil filter or sump drain plug loose (Chapter 1).
Oil seal leaking (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Camshaft cover seal leaking (Chapter 2B or 2D).
Sump seal leaking (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Cylinder head gasket leaking (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Engine burning oil - piston ring or cylinder bore wear (Chapter 2E).
Fault finding
Cooling system
Overheating
External
•
LT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Insufficient coolant in system [Weekly checks).
Thermostat faulty - not opening (Chapter 3).
Radiator core blocked or grille restricted (Chapter 3).
Radiator electric cooling fan(s) or coolant temperature sensor
faulty (Chapter 3).
•
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
C Pressure cap faulty (Chapter 3).
LT Auxiliary drivebelt worn or slipping (Chapter 1).
LT Airlock in cooling system (Chapter 1, Section 31).
Corrosion
•
•
•
•
Fuel and exhaust systems
Excessive
LT
•
•
LT
•
fuel
consumption
Unsympathetic driving style, or adverse conditions.
Air cleaner filter element dirty or clogged (Chapter 1).
Engine management system fault (Chapter 1, 4A, 4B or 5B).
Fuel injector(s) partially blocked (Chapter 4A or 4B).
Tyres under-inflated [Weekly checks).
coolant
Infrequent draining and flushing (Chapter 1).
Incorrect antifreeze mixture, or inappropriate antifreeze type
(Chapter 1 or 3).
Fuel leakage
•
LT
and/or
fuel
odour
Damaged or corroded fuel tank, pipes or connections (Chapter 1).
Excessive
•
•
leakage
Leaking cylinder head gasket (relevant part of Chapter 2).
Cracked cylinder head or cylinder bore (Chapter 2E).
Overcooiing
Thermostat faulty - not closing, or thermostat missing (Chapter 3).
Inaccurate coolant temperature sensor (Chapter 3).
leakage
Deteriorated or damaged hoses or hose clips (Chapter 1).
Radiator core or heater matrix leaking (Chapter 3).
Pressure cap faulty (Chapter 3).
Coolant p u m p seal leaking (Chapter 3).
Boiling due to overheating (Chapter 3).
Internal
•
•
coolant
REF.I?
noise or fumes
from exhaust
system
Leaking exhaust system or manifold joints (Chapter 1 or 4C).
Leaking, corroded or damaged silencers or pipe (Chapter 1
or 4C).
Broken mountings, causing body or suspension contact (Chapter 1 or 4C).
REF.18
Fault finding
Clutch
Note: The clutch is actuated either by a cable, or by hydraulics (using a
master and slave cylinder). Refer to Chapter 6 and establish which type
is fitted.
Pedal travels
resistance
•
•
•
•
•
•
- no pressure
or very
little
Air in clutch hydraulic system (Chapter 6).
Faulty clutch slave cylinder (Chapter 6).
Faulty clutch master cylinder (Chapter 6).
Clutch cable broken (Chapter 6).
Pedal return spring detached or broken (Chapter 6).
Broken diaphragm spring in clutch pressure plate (Chapter 6).
Clutch
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
to floor
fails to disengage
(unable
to select
gears)
Air in clutch hydraulic system (Chapter 6).
Faulty clutch slave cylinder (Chapter 6).
Faulty clutch master cylinder (Chapter 6).
Clutch cable incorrectly adjusted (Chapter 6).
Clutch disc sticking on transmission mainshaft splines (Chapter 6).
Clutch disc sticking to flywheel or pressure plate (Chapter 6).
Faulty pressure plate assembly (Chapter 6).
Clutch release mechanism worn or incorrectly assembled (Chapter 6).
Manual transmission
Noisy in neutral
•
•
with engine
Noisy in one particular
•
•
gear
Worn, damaged or chipped gear teeth (Chapter 7A).*
Worn bearings (Chapter 7A).*
Difficulty
•
•
•
running
Mainshaft bearings worn (noise apparent with clutch pedal
released, but not when depressed) (Chapter 7A).*
Clutch release bearing worn (noise apparent with clutch pedal
depressed, possibly less when released) (Chapter 6).
engaging
gears
Clutch fault (Chapter 6).
Selector cables out of adjustment (Chapter 7A).
Worn synchroniser assemblies (Chapter 7A).*
Clutch slips (engine
increase in vehicle
•
•
•
•
•
as clutch
is
engaged
or releasing
clutch
pedal
Worn clutch release bearing (Chapter 6).
Worn or dry clutch pedal bushes (Chapter 6).
Faulty pressure plate assembly (Chapter 6).
Pressure plate diaphragm spring broken (Chapter 6).
Broken clutch disc cushioning springs (Chapter 6).
Clutch cable sticking or damaged (Chapter 6).
Jumps
•
•
•
no
Clutch disc linings contaminated with oil or grease (Chapter 6).
Clutch disc linings excessively worn (Chapter 6).
Faulty or distorted pressure plate or diaphragm spring (Chapter 6).
Worn or loose engine/transmission mountings (relevant part of
Chapter 2).
Clutch disc hub or transmission input shaft splines worn (Chapter 6).
Noise when depressing
•
•
•
•
•
•
with
Clutch cable incorrectly adjusted (Chapter 6).
Clutch disc linings excessively worn (Chapter 6).
Clutch disc linings contaminated with oil or grease (Chapter 6).
Faulty pressure plate or weak diaphragm spring (Chapter 6).
Judder
•
•
•
•
speed increases
speed)
out of gear
Selector cables out of adjustment (Chapter 7A).
Worn synchroniser assemblies (Chapter 7A).*
Worn selector forks (Chapter 7A).*
Vibration
•
•
Lack of oil (Chapter 1).
Worn bearings (Chapter 7 A).*
Lubricant
•
•
•
leaks
Leaking driveshaft/transmission oil seal (Chapter 7A).
Leaking housing joint (Chapter 7A).*
Leaking input shaft oil seal (Chapter 7A).
* Although the corrective action necessary to remedy the symptoms
described
is beyond the scope of the home mechanic,
the above
information should be helpful in isolating the cause of the condition, so
that the owner can communicate clearly with a professional
mechanic.
Fault finding
Automatic transmission
Note: Due to the complexity of the automatic transmission, it is difficult
for the home mechanic to properly diagnose and sen/ice this unit. For
problems other than the following, the vehicle should be taken to a
dealer service department or automatic transmission
specialist.
Fluid
•
leakage
Automatic transmission fluid is usually dark in colour. Fluid leaks
should not be confused with engine oil, which can easily be blown
onto the transmission by airflow.
To determine the source of a leak, first remove all built-up dirt and
grime from the transmission housing and surrounding areas, using
a degreasing agent, or by steam-cleaning. Drive the vehicle at low
speed, so airflow will not blow the leak far from its source. Raise
and support the vehicle, and determine where the leak is coming
from. The following are c o m m o n areas of leakage:
•
a)
b)
c)
d)
Transmission fluid sump (Chapter 1 or 7B).
Dipstick tube (Chapter 1 or 7B).
Transmission-to-fluid
cooler pipes/unions (Chapter 1 or 7B).
Transmission fluid seals (Chapter 7B).
Transmission
•
fluid brown,
or has burned
smell
Transmission fluid level low, or fluid in need of renewal (Chapter 1).
Transmission
will not downshift
(kickdown)
accelerator
pedal fully
depressed
•
•
•
Clicking or knocking
on full lock)
•
noise on turns
Lack of constant velocity joint lubricant, possibly due to damaged
gaiter (Chapter 8).
Worn outer constant velocity joint (Chapter 8).
problems
Engine will not start in any gear, or starts
other than Park or Neutral
•
•
in
•
in
There are many probable causes for the above problems, but the
home mechanic should be concerned with only one possibility fluid level. Before taking the vehicle to a dealer or transmission
specialist, check the fluid level and condition of the fluid as
described in Chapter 1. Correct the fluid level as necessary, or
change the fluid if needed. If the problem persists, professional
help will be necessary.
Vibration
•
•
gears
Incorrect selector cable adjustment (Chapter 7B).
Automatic transmission ECU or sensor fault (Chapter 7B).
Transmission
slips, is noisy, or has no drive
forward or reverse
gears
with
(at slow speed
gear selection
Checking and adjusting the selector cable is covered in Chapter 1
and 7B. The following are c o m m o n problems which may be
caused by a poorly-adjusted cable:
a) Engine starting in gears other than Park or Neutral.
b) Indicator on gear selector lever pointing to a gear other than the
one actually being used.
c) Vehicle moves when in Park or Neutral.
d) Poor gear shift quality or erratic gear changes.
Refer to Chapter 7B for the selector cable adjustment procedure.
Low transmission fluid level (Chapter 1).
Incorrect selector cable adjustment (Chapter 1 or 7B).
Automatic transmission ECU or sensor fault (Chapter 7B).
Driveshafts
•
General
•
REF.19
when decelerating
or
accelerating
t a n t velocity joint (Chapter 8).
Bent or distorted driveshaft (Chapter 8).
W
o
r
n
i n n e r
c o n s
Fault finding
REF.20
Braking system
Note: Before assuming that a brake problem exists, make sure that the
tyres are in good condition and correctly inflated, that the front wheel
alignment is correct, and that the vehicle is not loaded with weight in an
unequal manner. Apart from checking the condition of all brake
pipes/hoses and electrical connections, any faults occurring on the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) should be referred to a FIAT dealer for
repair.
Vehicle
•
•
•
•
•
pulls
to one side under
Noise (grinding or high-pitched
brakes
applied
•
•
squeal)
when
Brake friction material worn d o w n to metal backing (Chapter 9).
Excessive corrosion of brake disc (may be apparent after the
vehicle has been standing for some time) (Chapter 9).
Excessive
•
•
•
braking
Worn, defective, damaged or contaminated front brake pads (or
rear brake shoes) on one side (Chapter 9).
Seized or partially-seized front brake caliper piston or rear wheel
cylinder (Chapter 9).
A mixture of brake pad/shoe lining materials fitted between sides
(Chapter 9).
Brake caliper mounting bolts loose (Chapter 9).
Worn or damaged steering or suspension components (Chapter 10).
brake pedal
travel
Faulty master cylinder (Chapter 9).
Air in hydraulic system (Chapter 9).
Rear brake shoe adjuster mechanism seized or faulty (Chapter 9).
Brake pedal
•
•
•
•
Excessive
vehicle
•
G
G
Q
•
G
G
•
G
•
depressed
brake pedal
effort
required
to stop
felt through
braking
brake pedal
or steering
wheel
Excessive run-out or distortion of front discs or rear drums
(Chapter 9).
Brake pad/shoe linings worn (Chapter 9).
Brake caliper mounting bolts loose (Chapter 9).
Wear in suspension or steering components or mountings
(Chapter 10).
Brakes
G
Q
G
when
Faulty vacuum servo unit (Chapter 9).
Disconnected, damaged or insecure brake servo vacuum hose
(Chapter 9).
Primary or secondary hydraulic circuit failure (Chapter 9).
Seized brake caliper piston(s) or rear wheel cylinder(s) (Chapter 9).
Brake pads/shoes incorrectly fitted (Chapter 9).
Incorrect grade of brake pads/shoes fitted (Chapter 9).
Brake pad/shoe linings contaminated (Chapter 9).
Judder
when
G
feels spongy
Air in hydraulic system (Chapter 9).
Deteriorated flexible rubber brake hoses (Chapter 9).
Master cylinder mounting nuts loose (Chapter 9).
Faulty master cylinder (Chapter 9).
binding
Seized brake caliper piston(s) or rear wheel cylinder(s) (Chapter 9).
Faulty handbrake mechanism (Chapter 9).
Faulty master cylinder (Chapter 9).
Fault finding
Suspension and steering systems
Note: Before diagnosing suspension or steering faults, be sure that the
trouble is not due to incorrect tyre pressures, mixtures of tyre types, or
binding brakes.
Vehicle
•
•
•
•
pulls
to one side
Defective tyre (Weekly checks).
Excessive wear in suspension or steering components (Chapter 10).
Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment (Chapter 10).
Accident damage to steering or suspension components (Chapter 10).
Wheel wobble
•
Z
Z
Z
•
•
Excessive
or during
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
vibration
pitching
braking
and/or
rolling
around
corners,
Defective shock absorbers (Chapter 10).
Broken or weak coil spring and/or suspension component
(Chapter 10).
Worn or damaged anti-roll bar or mountings (Chapter 10).
Wandering
•
•
and
Front roadwheels out of balance (vibration felt mainly through the
steering wheel) (Weekly checks).
Rear roadwheels out of balance (vibration felt throughout the
vehicle) (Weekly checks).
Roadwheels damaged or distorted (Weekly checks).
Faulty or damaged tyre (Weekly checks).
Worn steering or suspension joints, bushes or components
(Chapter 10).
Roadwheel bolts loose (Chapter 1).
or general
instability
Incorrect wheel alignment (Chapter 10).
Worn steering or suspension joints, bushes or components
(Chapter 10).
Roadwheels out of balance (Weekly checks).
Faulty or damaged tyre (Weekly checks).
Roadwheel bolts loose (Chapter 1).
Defective shock absorbers (Chapter 10).
Excessively-stiff
Z
•
•
•
•
play in
Worn steering
Worn steering
Worn steering
Worn steering
(Chapter 10).
Lack of power
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
steering
Broken or slipping steering pump (auxiliary) drivebelt (Chapter 1).
Steering p u m p faulty (Chapter 10).
Seized track rod end balljoint or suspension balljoint (Chapter 10).
Incorrect front wheel alignment (Chapter 10).
Steering rack or column bent or damaged (Chapter 10).
Excessive
Z
Z
•
Z
REF«21
steering
column universal joint(s) (Chapter 10).
track rod end balljoints (Chapter 10).
gear (Chapter 10).
or suspension joints, bushes or components
assistance
Broken or slipping steering pump (auxiliary) drivebelt (Chapter 1).
Incorrect fluid level (Weekly checks).
Restriction in fluid hoses (Chapter 10).
Faulty steering pump (Chapter 10).
Faulty steering gear (Chapter 10).
Tyre wear
excessive
Tyres w o r n o n inside or outside edges
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Tyres under-inflated (Weekly checks).
Incorrect camber or castor angles (wear on one edge only)
(Chapter 10).
- Worn steering or suspension joints, bushes or components
(Chapter 10).
Excessively-hard cornering.
Accident damage.
Tyre treads exhibit feathered edges
ZJ
Incorrect toe setting (Chapter 10).
Tyres w o r n in centre of tread
•
Tyres over-inflated (Weekly checks).
Tyres w o r n o n inside a n d outside edges
Z
Tyres under-inflated (Weekly checks).
Tyres worn
Z
Z
•
•
unevenly
Tyres out of balance (Weekly checks).
Excessive wheel or tyre run-out (Weekly checks).
Worn shock absorbers (Chapter 10).
Faulty tyre (Weekly checks).
Fault finding
REF.22
Electrical system
Note: For problems associated with the starting system, refer to the Horn
faults listed under Engine earlier in this Section.
Battery
days
•
•
•
3
•
•
•
will not hold a charge
for more than a few
Battery defective internally (Chapter 5A).
Battery electrolyte level low (Chapter 1).
Battery terminal connections loose or corroded (Weekly checks).
Auxiliary drivebelt worn or slipping (Chapter 1).
Alternator not charging at correct output (Chapter 5A).
Alternator or voltage regulator faulty (Chapter 5A).
Short-circuit causing continual battery drain (Chapter 5A or 12).
Ignition/no-charge
warning light
illuminated
with engine
running
remains
•
Auxiliary drivebelt worn or slipping (Chapter 1).
•
Alternator brushes worn, sticking, or dirty (Chapter 5A).
C Alternator brush springs weak or broken (Chapter 5A).
•
Internal fault in alternator or voltage regulator (Chapter 5A).
LT Broken, disconnected, or loose wiring in charging circuit (Chapter 5A).
Ignition/no-charge
Lj
•
•
Lights
[J
[]
[J
•
H
•
warning
light
fails to come on
Warning light bulb blown (Chapter 12).
Broken, disconnected, or loose wiring in warning light circuit
(Chapter 12).
Alternator faulty (Chapter 5A).
inoperative
Bulb blown (Chapter 12).
Corrosion of bulb or bulbholder contacts (Chapter 12).
Blown fuse (Chapter 12).
Faulty relay (Chapter 12).
Broken, loose, or disconnected wiring (Chapter 12).
Faulty switch (Chapter 12).
Instrument
readings
inaccurate
or
erratic
Instrument readings increase with engine speed
•
Faulty instrument panel control components or circuitry (Chapter 12).
•
•
or unsatisfactory
in
operation
Blown fuse (Chapter 12).
Steering wheel wiring connections loose, broken or disconnected
(Chapter 10).
Faulty horn (Chapter 12).
•
Horn emits intermittent or unsatisfactory sound
•
•
•
Steering wheel cable connections loose, broken or disconnected
(Chapter 10).
Horn mountings loose (Chapter 12).
Faulty horn (Chapter 12).
H o r n o p e r a t e s all t h e t i m e
•
•
Horn push either earthed or stuck down (Chapter 10).
Steering wheel cable connections earthed (Chapter 10).
Windscreen/tailgate
unsatisfactory
in
wipers inoperative
operation
or
W i p e r s fail t o o p e r a t e , o r o p e r a t e very s l o w l y
C
•
•
•
•
Wiper blades stuck to screen, or linkage seized or binding
(Chapter 12).
Blown fuse (Chapter 12).
Wiring or connections loose, broken or disconnected (Chapter 12).
Faulty relay (Chapter 12).
Faulty wiper motor (Chapter 12).
Wiper blades s w e e p over t o o large or t o o small a n area of
the glass
•
•
•
Wiper arms incorrectly positioned on spindles (Chapter 12).
Excessive wear of wiper linkage (Chapter 12).
Wiper motor or linkage mountings loose or insecure (Chapter 12).
W i p e r blades fail t o clean t h e glass effectively
•
•
•
Tachometer gives no reading, or gives inaccurate reading
Faulty instrument panel control components or circuitry (Chapter 12).
LL Faulty crankshaft sensor (Chapter 5B).
•
Engine management system fault (Chapter 4A, 4 B or 5B).
G Wiring open-circuit (Chapter 12).
•
Faulty gauge (Chapter 12).
inoperative,
Horn fails t o operate
Wiper blade rubbers worn or perished (Weekly checks).
Wiper arm tension springs broken, or arm pivots seized (Chapter^).
Insufficient windscreen washer additive to adequately remove
road film (Weekly checks).
C
Fuel o r t e m p e r a t u r e g a u g e s give n o reading
•
•
•
•
•
Faulty instrument panel control components or circuitry (Chapter 12).
Engine management system fault (Chapter 4A, 4B or 5B).
Faulty gauge sender unit (Chapter 3, 4A or 4B).
Wiring open-circuit (Chapter 12).
Faulty gauge (Chapter 12).
Fuel o r t e m p e r a t u r e g a u g e s give c o n t i n u o u s m a x i m u m
reading
•
•
•
•
Faulty instrument panel control components or circuitry (Chapter^). „
Faulty gauge sender unit (Chapter 3, 4A or 4B).
Wiring short-circuit (Chapter 12).
Faulty gauge (Chapter 12).
Windscreen/tailgate
unsatisfactory
in
washers
operation
inoperative,
or
One or more washer jets inoperative
•
•
•
Blocked washer jet (Chapter 12).
Disconnected, kinked or restricted fluid hose (Chapter 12).
Insufficient fluid in washer reservoir (Weekly checks).
Washer p u m p fails t o operate
•
•
•
•
Broken or disconnected wiring or connections (Chapter 12).
Blown fuse (Chapter 12).
Faulty washer switch (Chapter 12).
Faulty washer p u m p (Chapter 12).
W a s h e r p u m p runs f o r s o m e t i m e before fluid is e m i t t e d
from jets
•
Faulty one-way valve in fluid supply hose (Chapter 12).
Fault finding
Electrical system (continued)
Electric windows
operation
inoperative,
or unsatisfactory
in
Central locking system inoperative,
unsatisfactory
in
operation
REF-23
or
W i n d o w g l a s s w i l l o n l y m o v e in o n e d i r e c t i o n
C o m p l e t e system failure
•
•
•
Blown fuse (Chapter 12).
Faulty relay (Chapter 12).
•
Broken or disconnected wiring or connections (Chapter 12).
Faulty switch (Chapter 12).
W i n d o w glass slow to move
•
•
•
•
Incorrectly-adjusted door glass guide channels (Chapter 11).
Regulator seized or damaged, or in need of lubrication (Chapter 11).
Door internal components or trim fouling regulator (Chapter 11).
Faulty motor (Chapter 12).
W i n d o w glass fails to m o v e
•
•
•
•
•
Incorrectly-adjusted door glass guide channels (Chapter 11).
Blown fuse (Chapter 12).
Faulty relay (Chapter 12).
Broken or disconnected wiring or connections (Chapter 12).
Faulty motor (Chapter 12).
Latch locks but will not unlock, or unlocks but will not lock
• • Faulty door lock microswitch (Chapter 11).
•
Broken or disconnected latch operating rods or levers (Chapter 11).
•
Faulty relay (Chapter 12).
O n e l o c k m o t o r fails t o operate
•
•
•
•
Broken or disconnected wiring or connections (Chapter 12).
Faulty lock motor (Chapter 11).
Broken, binding or disconnected latch operating rods or levers
(Chapter 11).
Fault in door latch (Chapter 11).
REF.24
Glossary of technical terms
ABS (Anti-lock brake system) A system,
usually electronically controlled, that senses
incipient wheel l o c k u p during braking and
relieves hydraulic pressure at wheels that are
about to skid.
A i r b a g An inflatable bag hidden in the
steering wheel (driver's side) or the dash or
glovebox (passenger side). In a head-on
collision, the bags inflate, preventing the driver
and front passenger from being t h r o w n
forward into the steering wheel or windscreen.
Air cleaner
A metal or plastic h o u s i n g ,
containing a filter element, w h i c h removes
dust and dirt from the air being drawn into the
engine.
A i r f i l t e r e l e m e n t The actual filter in an air
cleaner s y s t e m , usually m a n u f a c t u r e d f r o m
pleated paper and requiring renewal at regular
intervals.
w o u l d tend to clog the radiator and coolant
passages and reduce cooling efficiency.
Anti-seize compound
A c o a t i n g that
reduces the risk of seizing on fasteners that
are subjected to high temperatures, such as
exhaust manifold bolts and nuts.
Anti-seize
compound
A s b e s t o s A natural fibrous mineral with great
heat resistance, c o m m o n l y used in the
c o m p o s i t i o n of brake friction materials.
A s b e s t o s is a health hazard and the d u s t
created by brake s y s t e m s s h o u l d never be
inhaled or ingested.
A x l e A shaft on which a wheel revolves, or
w h i c h revolves w i t h a w h e e l . A l s o , a solid
beam that c o n n e c t s the t w o wheels at one
end of the vehicle. An axle w h i c h also
transmits power to the wheels is known as a
live axle.
Air filter
Allen key A hexagonal wrench which fits into
a recessed hexagonal hole.
Alligator clip A long-nosed spring-loaded
metal clip with meshing teeth. Used to make
temporary electrical connections.
A l t e r n a t o r A c o m p o n e n t in the electrical
system w h i c h c o n v e r t s mechanical energy
f r o m a drivebelt into electrical energy t o
charge the battery and to operate the starting
s y s t e m , ignition s y s t e m a n d electrical
accessories.
Axle
assembly
A x l e s h a f t A single rotating shaft, on either
side of the differential, which delivers power
f r o m the final drive assembly to the drive
wheels. Also called a driveshaft or a halfshaft.
B
Alternator
(exploded
view)
A m p e r e (amp) A unit of measurement for the
f l o w of electric current. One a m p is the
a m o u n t of current p r o d u c e d by one volt
acting through a resistance of one o h m .
Anaerobic sealer
A s u b s t a n c e used to
prevent bolts and s c r e w s f r o m loosening.
A n a e r o b i c means that it d o e s not require
o x y g e n for a c t i v a t i o n . The Loctite brand is
widely used.
A n t i f r e e z e - A s u b s t a n c e (usually ethylene
glycol) m i x e d w i t h water, and a d d e d t o a
vehicle's cooling system, to prevent freezing
of the coolant in winter. Antifreeze also
contains chemicals to inhibit corrosion and
the formation of rust and other deposits that
B e a r i n g The curved surface on a shaft or in a
bore, or the part assembled into either, that
permits relative m o t i o n b e t w e e n t h e m w i t h
minimum wear and friction.
B i g - e n d b e a r i n g The bearing in the end of
the c o n n e c t i n g rod t h a t ' s a t t a c h e d to the
crankshaft.
B l e e d n i p p l e A valve on a brake wheel
cylinder, caliper or other hydraulic component
that is opened to purge the hydraulic system
of air. Also called a bleed screw.
Ball b e a r i n g
An anti-friction bearing
consisting of a hardened inner and outer race
with hardened steel balls between two races.
Bearing
Brake
bleeding
B r a k e b l e e d i n g Procedure for removing air
from lines of a hydraulic brake system.
B r a k e d i s c The component of a disc brake
that rotates with the wheels.
Brake d r u m The component of a drum brake
that rotates with the wheels.
B r a k e l i n i n g s The friction material w h i c h
contacts the brake disc or drum to retard the
vehicle's s p e e d . The linings are b o n d e d or
riveted to the brake pads or shoes.
B r a k e p a d s The replaceable friction p a d s
that pinch the brake disc when the brakes are
a p p l i e d . Brake p a d s consist of a friction
material bonded or riveted to a rigid backing
plate.
B r a k e s h o e The crescent-shaped carrier to
w h i c h the brake linings are m o u n t e d and
w h i c h f o r c e s the lining against the rotating
drum during braking.
B r a k i n g s y s t e m s For more information on
braking s y s t e m s , consult the
Haynes
Automotive Brake Manual.
B r e a k e r b a r A long s o c k e t w r e n c h handle
providing greater leverage.
B u l k h e a d The insulated partition b e t w e e n
the engine and the passenger compartment.
Caliper The non-rotating part of a disc-brake
assembly that straddles the disc and carries
the brake pads. The caliper also contains the
hydraulic components that cause the pads to
pinch the disc when the brakes are applied. A
caliper is also a measuring tool that can be
set to measure inside or outside dimensions
of an object.
Glossary of technical terms
C a m s h a f t A rotating shaft on which a series
of cam lobes operate the valve mechanisms.
The camshaft may be driven by gears, by
s p r o c k e t s and chain or by s p r o c k e t s and a
belt.
Canister
A container in an evaporative
emission control system; contains activated
charcoal granules to trap vapours f r o m the
fuel system.
Catalytic c o n v e r t e r A silencer-like device in
the exhaust s y s t e m w h i c h c o n v e r t s certain
pollutants in the exhaust gases into less
harmful substances.
Catalytic
Canister
C a r b u r e t t o r A device which mixes fuel with
air in the proper p r o p o r t i o n s to provide a
desired p o w e r o u t p u t f r o m a spark ignition
internal combustion engine.
Carburettor
C a s t e l l a t e d Resembling the parapets along
the t o p of a castle wall. For e x a m p l e , a
castellated balljoint stud nut.
Castellated
converter
C i r c l i p A ring-shaped clip used to prevent
e n d w i s e m o v e m e n t of cylindrical parts and
shafts. An internal circlip is installed in a
g r o o v e in a h o u s i n g ; an external circlip fits
into a groove on the outside of a cylindrical
piece such as a shaft.
C l e a r a n c e The a m o u n t of s p a c e b e t w e e n
two parts. For example, between a piston and
a cylinder, between a bearing and a journal,
etc.
Coil s p r i n g A spiral of elastic steel found in
various sizes t h r o u g h o u t a vehicle, for
e x a m p l e as a springing m e d i u m in the
suspension and in the valve train.
Compression
R e d u c t i o n in v o l u m e , and
increase in pressure and t e m p e r a t u r e , of a
gas, c a u s e d by squeezing it into a smaller
space.
C o m p r e s s i o n ratio The relationship between
cylinder v o l u m e w h e n the piston is at t o p
d e a d centre and cylinder v o l u m e w h e n the
piston is at bottom dead centre.
C o n s t a n t v e l o c i t y (CV) j o i n t
A t y p e of
universal joint that cancels out vibrations
c a u s e d by driving p o w e r being t r a n s m i t t e d
through an angle.
C o r e p l u g A disc or c u p - s h a p e d metal
device inserted in a hole in a casting through
w h i c h core w a s r e m o v e d w h e n the casting
was formed. Also known as a freeze plug or
expansion plug.
C r a n k c a s e The lower part of t h e engine
block in which the crankshaft rotates.
C r a n k s h a f t The main rotating m e m b e r , or
shaft, running the length of the c r a n k c a s e ,
with offset "throws" to which the connecting
rods are attached.
C r o c o d i l e c l i p See Alligator clip
D
D i a g n o s t i c c o d e Code numbers obtained by
accessing the diagnostic mode of an engine
m a n a g e m e n t c o m p u t e r . This c o d e can be
used t o d e t e r m i n e the area in the system
where a malfunction may be located.
D i s c b r a k e A brake design incorporating a
rotating disc o n t o w h i c h brake p a d s are
squeezed. The resulting friction converts the
energy of a moving vehicle into heat.
D o u b l e - o v e r h e a d c a m (DOHC) An engine
that uses t w o overhead c a m s h a f t s , usually
one for the intake valves and one for the
exhaust valves.
Drivebelt(s)
The belt(s) used to drive
accessories such as the alternator, water
pump, power steering pump, air conditioning
compressor, etc. off the crankshaft pulley.
Accessory
drivebelts
Driveshaft
A n y shaft used t o transmit
motion. Commonly used when referring to the
axleshafts on a front wheel drive vehicle.
Driveshaft
D r u m b r a k e A type of brake using a d r u m shaped metal cylinder attached to the inner
surface of the wheel. When the brake pedal is
p r e s s e d , c u r v e d brake shoes w i t h friction
linings press against the inside of the drum to
slow or stop the vehicle.
nut
C a s t o r In wheel alignment, the backward or
f o r w a r d tilt of the steering axis. Castor is
positive w h e n the steering axis is inclined
rearward at the top.
Crankshaft
assembly
REF.25
Drum brake
assembly
REF.26
Glossary of technical terms
E
EGR valve A valve used to introduce exhaust
gases into the intake air stream.
Feeler blade A thin strip or blade of hardened
steel, ground to an exact thickness, used to
check or measure clearances between parts.
electrode in a spark plug. Also refers to the
s p a c i n g b e t w e e n t h e points in a c o n t a c t
breaker assembly in a conventional p o i n t s type ignition, or to the distance between the
reluctor or rotor and the p i c k u p coil in an
electronic ignition.
Gasket Any thin, soft material - usually cork,
cardboard, asbestos or soft metal - installed
between two metal surfaces to ensure a good
seal. For instance, the cylinder head gasket
seals t h e joint b e t w e e n t h e b l o c k and t h e
cylinder head.
EGR
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l unit (ECU) A c o m p u t e r
which controls (for instance) ignition and fuel
injection s y s t e m s , or an anti-lock braking
s y s t e m . For more information refer to the
Haynes Automotive Electrical and Electronic
Systems Manual.
E l e c t r o n i c Fuel I n j e c t i o n (EFI) A computer
controlled fuel system that distributes fuel
through an injector located in each intake port
of the engine.
Emergency brake
A braking s y s t e m ,
independent of the main hydraulic s y s t e m ,
that can be used to slow or stop the vehicle if
the primary brakes fail, or to hold the vehicle
stationary even though the brake pedal isn't
depressed. It usually consists of a hand lever
that actuates either front or rear brakes
mechanically through a series of cables and
linkages. Also k n o w n as a h a n d b r a k e or
parking brake.
Endfloat
The a m o u n t of
lengthwise
movement between two parts. As applied to a
crankshaft, the distance that the crankshaft
can m o v e f o r w a r d and back in the cylinder
block.
E n g i n e m a n a g e m e n t s y s t e m (EMS)
A
computer controlled system which manages
the fuel injection and the ignition systems in
an integrated fashion.
Exhaust manifold
A part with several
passages through which exhaust gases leave
the engine c o m b u s t i o n chambers and enter
the exhaust pipe.
Feeler blade
Firing o r d e r The order in which the engine
cylinders fire, or deliver their power strokes,
beginning with the number one cylinder.
F l y w h e e l A heavy spinning wheel in which
energy is absorbed and stored by means of
momentum. On cars, the flywheel is attached
to the crankshaft to s m o o t h out firing
impulses.
Free play The amount of travel before any
action takes place. The " l o o s e n e s s " in a
linkage, or an assembly of parts, between the
initial a p p l i c a t i o n of force and actual
m o v e m e n t . For e x a m p l e , the d i s t a n c e the
brake pedal moves before the pistons in the
master cylinder are actuated.
Fuse An electrical device which protects a
circuit against accidental o v e r l o a d . The
typical fuse contains a soft piece of metal
which is calibrated to melt at a predetermined
current flow (expressed as amps) and break
the circuit.
Fusible link
A circuit p r o t e c t i o n device
consisting of a c o n d u c t o r s u r r o u n d e d by
heat-resistant insulation. The c o n d u c t o r is
smaller than the wire it protects, so it acts as
the weakest link in the circuit. Unlike a blown
fuse, a failed fusible link must frequently be
cut from the wire for replacement.
G
G a p The distance the s p a r k m u s t travel in
jumping from the centre electrode to the side
Gasket
G a u g e An instrument panel display used to
monitor engine c o n d i t i o n s . A g a u g e with a
movable pointer on a dial or a fixed scale is an
analogue gauge. A gauge w i t h a numerical
readout is called a digital gauge.
H
H a l f s h a f t A rotating shaft that t r a n s m i t s
power from the final drive unit to a drive
wheel, usually w h e n referring to a live rear
axle.
H a r m o n i c b a l a n c e r A device d e s i g n e d to
reduce torsion or t w i s t i n g vibration in the
crankshaft. May be i n c o r p o r a t e d in the
crankshaft pulley. Also known as a vibration
damper.
H o n e An abrasive tool for correcting small
irregularities or differences in diameter in an
engine cylinder, brake cylinder, etc.
Hydraulic tappet
A t a p p e t that utilises
hydraulic
pressure from the
engine's
lubrication system to maintain zero clearance
(constant c o n t a c t with both camshaft and
valve stem). Automatically adjusts to variation
in valve stem length. Hydraulic tappets also
reduce valve noise.
I
Exhaust
manifold
F
Fan c l u t c h A viscous (fluid) drive coupling
device w h i c h permits variable engine fan
speeds in relation to engine speeds.
Adjusting
spark plug gap
I g n i t i o n t i m i n g The m o m e n t at w h i c h the
spark plug fires, usually expressed in the
n u m b e r of crankshaft degrees before the
piston reaches the t o p of its stroke.
Inlet m a n i f o l d
A t u b e or housing w i t h
passages t h r o u g h w h i c h flows the air-fuel
mixture (carburettor vehicles and vehicles
w i t h throttle body injection) or air only (port
fuel-injected vehicles) to the port openings in
the cylinder head.
Glossary of technical terms
J
J u m p s t a r t Starting the engine of a vehicle
w i t h a d i s c h a r g e d or w e a k battery by
attaching j u m p leads from the weak battery to
a charged or helper battery.
L
L o a d S e n s i n g P r o p o r t i o n i n g V a l v e (LSPV)
A brake hydraulic system control valve that
w o r k s like a p r o p o r t i o n i n g valve, but also
takes into consideration the amount of weight
carried by the rear axle.
L o c k n u t A nut used to lock an adjustment
nut, or other threaded c o m p o n e n t , in place.
For example, a locknut is employed to keep
the adjusting nut on the rocker arm in
position.
L o c k w a s h e r A form of washer designed to
prevent an attaching nut from working loose.
M
MacPherson strut
A t y p e of front
suspension
system
devised
by
Earle
MacPherson at Ford of England. In its original
form, a simple lateral link with the anti-roll bar
creates the lower control arm. A long strut an integral coil spring and shock absorber - is
mounted between the body and the steering
knuckle. Many modern so-called MacPherson
strut systems use a conventional lower A-arm
and don't rely on the anti-roll bar for location.
M u l t i m e t e r An electrical test instrument with
the capability to measure voltage, current and
resistance.
N
N O x Oxides of Nitrogen. A c o m m o n toxic
pollutant emitted by petrol and diesel engines
at higher temperatures.
o
O v e r h e a d c a m (ohc) engine An engine with
the camshaft(s) located on top of the cylinder
head(s).
O v e r h e a d valve (ohv) e n g i n e An engine with
the valves located in the cylinder head, but
with the camshaft located in the engine block.
O x y g e n s e n s o r A device installed in the
engine exhaust m a n i f o l d , w h i c h senses the
oxygen content in the exhaust and converts
this information into an electric current. Also
called a Lambda sensor.
P
Phillips s c r e w A type of screw head having a
cross instead of a slot for a c o r r e s p o n d i n g
type of screwdriver.
P l a s t i g a g e A thin strip of plastic t h r e a d ,
available in different sizes, used for measuring
clearances. For example, a strip of Plastigage
is laid across a bearing journal. The parts are
assembled and dismantled; the width of the
crushed strip indicates the clearance between
journal and bearing.
Plastigage
REF.2?
R o c k e r a r m A lever arm that rocks on a shaft
or pivots on a s t u d . In an overhead valve
engine, the rocker arm converts the upward
m o v e m e n t of the p u s h r o d into a d o w n w a r d
movement to open a valve.
R o t o r In a distributor, the rotating device
inside the c a p that c o n n e c t s the centre
electrode and the outer terminals as it turns,
distributing the high voltage from the coil
secondary winding to the proper spark plug.
Also, that part of an alternator which rotates
inside the stator. Also, the rotating assembly
of a turbocharger, including the compressor
wheel, shaft and turbine wheel.
R u n o u t The amount of w o b b l e (in-and-out
movement) of a gear or wheel as it's rotated.
The amount a shaft rotates "out-of-true." The
out-of-round condition of a rotating part.
s
S e a l a n t A liquid or paste used to prevent
leakage at a joint. S o m e t i m e s used in
conjunction with a gasket.
Sealed beam lamp
An older headlight
design which integrates the reflector, lens and
filaments into a hermetically-sealed one-piece
unit. When a filament burns out or the lens
cracks, the entire unit is simply replaced.
S e r p e n t i n e d r i v e b e l t A single, long, w i d e
accessory drivebelt t h a t ' s used on s o m e
newer vehicles to drive all the accessories,
instead of a series of smaller, shorter belts.
Serpentine drivebelts are usually tensioned by
an automatic tensioner.
P r o p e l l e r s h a f t The long hollow t u b e w i t h
universal joints at both ends that carries
power from the transmission to the differential
on front-engined rear wheel drive vehicles.
P r o p o r t i o n i n g v a l v e A hydraulic control
valve which limits the amount of pressure to
the rear brakes during panic stops to prevent
wheel lock-up.
R
O h m The unit of electrical resistance. One
volt applied to a resistance of one o h m will
produce a current of one amp.
Ohmmeter
An instrument for measuring
electrical resistance.
O - r i n g A t y p e of sealing ring m a d e of a
special rubber-like material; in use, the O-ring
is c o m p r e s s e d into a groove to provide the
sealing action.
O-ring
Rack-and-pinion steering
A steering
system with a pinion gear on the end of the
steering shaft that mates with a rack (think of
a geared wheel o p e n e d up and laid flat).
When the steering wheel is turned, the pinion
turns, moving the rack to the left or right. This
m o v e m e n t is t r a n s m i t t e d t h r o u g h the t r a c k
rods to the steering arms at the wheels.
R a d i a t o r A liquid-to-air heat transfer device
d e s i g n e d to reduce the t e m p e r a t u r e of the
coolant in an internal c o m b u s t i o n engine
cooling system.
R e f r i g e r a n t Any substance used as a heat
transfer agent in an air-conditioning system.
R-12 has been the principle refrigerant for
many years; recently, however, manufacturers
have begun using R-134a, a n o n - C F C
substance that is considered less harmful to
the ozone in the upper atmosphere.
Serpentine
drivebelt
S h i m Thin spacer, commonly used to adjust
the clearance or relative positions between
t w o parts. For example, shims inserted into or
under
bucket
tappets
control
valve
clearances. Clearance is adjusted
by
changing the thickness of the shim.
S l i d e h a m m e r A special puller that screws
into or hooks o n t o a c o m p o n e n t such as a
shaft or bearing; a heavy sliding handle on the
shaft bottoms against the end of the shaft to
knock the component free.
Sprocket
A t o o t h or projection on the
periphery of a wheel, shaped to engage with a
chain or drivebelt. Commonly used to refer to
the sprocket wheel itself.
REF.28
Glossary of technical terms
Starter inhibitor s w i t c h On vehicles with an
a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n , a s w i t c h that
prevents starting if the vehicle is not in Neutral
or Park.
S t r u t See MacPherson strut.
T
Tappet
A cylindrical c o m p o n e n t w h i c h
transmits motion f r o m the c a m to the valve
s t e m , either directly or via a p u s h r o d and
rocker arm. Also called a cam follower.
T h e r m o s t a t A h e a t - c o n t r o l l e d valve that
regulates the f l o w of coolant b e t w e e n the
cylinder block and the radiator, so maintaining
o p t i m u m engine operating t e m p e r a t u r e . A
thermostat is also used in some air cleaners in
which the temperature is regulated.
T h r u s t b e a r i n g The bearing in the c l u t c h
assembly that is m o v e d in to the release
levers by clutch pedal action to disengage the
clutch. Also referred to as a release bearing.
T i m i n g belt A toothed belt which drives the
camshaft. Serious engine damage may result
if it breaks in service.
Timing chain
A chain w h i c h drives the
camshaft.
T o e - i n The a m o u n t the front wheels are
closer together at the front than at the rear.
On rear wheel drive vehicles, a slight amount
of toe-in is usually specified to keep the front
wheels running parallel on the road by
offsetting other forces that tend to spread the
wheels apart.
T o e - o u t The a m o u n t the front wheels are
closer together at the rear than at the front.
On front wheel drive vehicles, a slight amount
of toe-out is usually specified.
T o o l s For full information on c h o o s i n g and
using tools, refer to the Haynes
Automotive
Tools Manual.
T r a c e r A stripe of a second colour applied to
a wire insulator to distinguish that wire from
another one with the same colour insulator.
T u n e - u p A process of accurate and careful
adjustments and parts replacement to obtain
the best possible engine performance.
T u r b o c h a r g e r A centrifugal device, driven by
exhaust gases, that pressurises the intake air.
Normally used to increase the power output
f r o m a given engine d i s p l a c e m e n t , but can
also be used primarily to reduce exhaust
emissions (as on V W ' s " U m w e l t " Diesel
engine).
u
Universal j o i n t or U-joint A double-pivoted
c o n n e c t i o n for transmitting power f r o m a
driving to a driven shaft through an angle. A
U-joint consists of t w o Y-shaped yokes and a
cross-shaped member called the spider.
V
V a l v e A device t h r o u g h w h i c h the f l o w of
liquid, gas, vacuum, or loose material in bulk
may be s t a r t e d , s t o p p e d , or regulated by a
m o v a b l e part that o p e n s , shuts, or partially
obstructs one or more ports or passageways.
A valve is also the m o v a b l e part of such a
device.
Valve c l e a r a n c e The clearance between the
valve tip (the end of the valve stem) and the
rocker arm or tappet. The valve clearance is
measured when the valve is closed.
Vernier caliper
A precision measuring
instrument that measures inside and outside
d i m e n s i o n s . Not quite as accurate as a
micrometer, but more convenient.
V i s c o s i t y The t h i c k n e s s of a liquid or its
resistance to flow.
Volt
A unit for expressing electrical
" p r e s s u r e " in a circuit. One volt that will
p r o d u c e a current of one ampere through a
resistance of one o h m .
w
W e l d i n g Various processes used to join
metal items by heating the areas to be joined
t o a molten state and fusing t h e m together.
For more information refer to the Haynes
Automotive Welding Manual.
W i r i n g d i a g r a m A d r a w i n g portraying the
components and wires in a vehicle's electrical
s y s t e m , using s t a n d a r d i s e d s y m b o l s . For
more information refer to the
Haynes
Automotive Electrical and Electronic
Systems
Manual.
Index
N o t e : References
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
litre
litre
litre
litre
engine
engine
engine
engine
in-car
in-car
in-car
in-car
through-out
repair
repair
repair
repair
this index
procedures
procedures
procedures
procedures
-
are in the form
2A»1
2B»1
201
2D»1
et
ef
ef
ef
seq
seq
sec;
seq
Accelerator cable
multi-point injection system - 4B»3
single-point injection system - 4A»3
A c c e s s o r y s h o p s - REF«3
Acknowledgements - 0 4
Aerial - 1 2 * 13
Air b a g s - 0 « 5 , 1 2 * 2 0
Air cleaner a n d inlet s y s t e m
multi-point injection system - 4B«2
single-point injection system - 4A»2
Air c o n d i t i o n i n g s y s t e m - 3*10
compressor drivebelt - 1 * 9 , 1*11,1*17
Air c o n t r o l valve
multi-point injection system (1.6 and 1.8 litre models) - 4B»7
Air filter - 1 * 1 6
Air t e m p e r a t u r e r e g u l a t o r
single-point injection system •• 4A»3
Air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r
multi-point injection system • •4B»7
single-point injection system •• 4A«7
Airflow meter
multi-point injection system (1.8 litre models) - 4B»9
A i r l o c k s - 1 «22
A l t e r n a t o r - 5A»4, 5A»5
drivebelt - 1 »9, 1*10, 1*17, 1*18
A n t i f r e e z e - 0»12, 0*17, 1»2, 1*22
A n t i - l o c k b r a k i n g s y s t e m (ABS) - 9«16
A n t i - r o l l bar
front - 1 0 * 6
rear - 1 0 * 8
Anti-theft alarm -12»19
A s b e s t o s - 0*5
ATF - 0 * 1 7 , 1*2, 1»8
Automatic
transmission
- 2E«4, 7B«1 ef seq
fault finding - REF»19
A u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d - 0»17, 1 »2, 1 »8
radiator and fan - 7B«6
Auxiliary shaft (1.6 litre engines) - 2E*18
oil seal - 2 0 1 2
sprocket - 2 0 8
Axle a s s e m b l y - 1 0 * 8
B
Balljoint l o w e r a r m - 1 0 * 6
Battery - 0*5, 0*15, 5A»2, 5A«3
disconnecting - REF«6
electrolyte - 1 »9
B i g - e n d b e a r i n g s - 2E»19
running clearance check - 2E»15
Bleeding
brakes - 9*2
clutch - 6*2
power steering - 1 0 * 1 1
Body electrical systems -12*1 ef seq
Bodywork and fittings -11 «1 ef seq
B o d y c o r r o s i o n - REF»13
B o n n e t - 1 1 «8
B r a k e f l u i d - 0»13, 0«17, 1*19
"Chapter number" • "Page number"
Braking system - 1 »14, 9*1 ef seq,
fault finding - REF»20
pipes and hoses - 1 »12
Bulbs
exterior lights - 1 2 » 4
interior lights - 1 2 * 7
B u l b s a n d f u s e s - 0*15
B u m p e r s - 1 1 »4
B u r n i n g - 0*5
B u y i n g s p a r e p a r t s - REF«3
REF»12
Cables
accelerator
multi-point injection system - 4B»3
single-point injection system - 4A«3
bonnet - 1 1 * 8
clutch - 1 * 1 8 , 6«2
handbrake - 9*14
selector (automatic transmission) - 7B»3
Calipers - 9*10
Camshafts
1.2 litre engine - 2A»9
1.4 and 1.8 litre engine - 2E«11
1.6 litre engine - 2C«9
Camshaft cover
1.4 litre engine - 2B»7
1.8 litre engine - 2D»7
Camshaft locking tool
1.2 litre engine - 2A»3
C a m s h a f t oil seal
1.2 litre engine - 2A«8
1.4 litre engine - 2B»8
1.6 litre engine - 2C»12
1.8 litre engine - 2D»9
Camshaft position sensor
multi-point injection system - 4B»9
Camshaft sprocket
1.4 litre engine - 2B»6
1.6 litre engine - 2C»8
1.8 litre engine - 2D»6
C a r p e t s - 1 1 »2
C a s s e t t e player - 1 2 * 1 4
Catalytic c o n v e r t e r - 4C«2, 4C»4
C e n t r e c o n s o l e - 1 1 »20
C h a r c o a l c a n i s t e r - 4C»2
C h a r g i n g s y s t e m - 5A»2, 5A»4
C i g a r e t t e lighter - 1 2 * 1 6
illumination - 1 2 * 9
Clutch - 6»1 ef seq
cable - 1 » 1 8
fault finding - REF»18
fluid - 0»13, 0 1 7
release mechanism - 6»5
Coil s p r i n g - 1 0 » 8
Coil(s) - 5B»4
Compression test
1.2 litre engine - 2A«4
1.4 litre engine -•2B»3
1.6 litre engine -•2C»4
1.8 litre engine -•2D»3
C o n s o l e - 1 1 »20
C o n v e r s i o n f a c t o r s - REF»2
C o n t e n t s - 0»2
C o o l a n t - 0*12, 0*17, 1*2, 1*21
REF-29
REF<3O
Index
C o o l a n t p u m p - 3»6
drivebelt - 1 * 1 0 , 1*18
Coolant temperature sensor
multi-point injection system - 4B»8
single-point injection system - 4A»7
C o o l i n g fan - 3»5
Cooling, heating and ventilation systems - 3*1 ef seq
fault finding - REF»17
C o u r t e s y light - 1 2 » 7 , 1 2 « 8
switch - 1 2 * 1 5
C r a n k c a s e e m i s s i o n c o n t r o l - 4C»1, 4C»2
C r a n k s h a f t - 2E»17, 2E«20
C r a n k s h a f t oil seals
1.2 litre engine - 2A«8
1.4 litre engine - 2B»8
1.6 litre engine - 2C»13
1.8 litre engine - 2D«9
Crankshaft setting tool
1.-2 litre engine - 2A»4
Crankshaft sprocket
1.2 litre engine - 2A»7
1.4 litre engine - 2B«6
1.6 litre engine - 2C»8
1.8 litre engine - 2D«7
C r a n k s h a f t T D C sensor - 5B»7
C r u s h i n g - 0*5
Cylinder b l o c k / c r a n k c a s e - 2E»18
Cylinder head - 2E«9
1.2 litre engine - 2A»11
1.4 litre engine - 2B»8
.6 litre engine - 2C«15
1.8 litre engine - 2D«9
Cylinder head e x t e n s i o n
1.2 litre engine - 2A«8
D
Dents in b o d y w o r k - 1 1 * 2
Depressurisation
multi-point injection system - 4B»11
single-point injection system - 4A«10
Differential oil seals - 7A»7, 7B»6
D i m e n s i o n s - REF»1
D i r e c t i o n i n d i c a t o r - 1 2 « 5 , 12»9, 12*10
D i s c o n n e c t i n g t h e battery - REF«6
Discs - 9*8
D o o r s - 1 1 «10, REF-11
handle and lock components - 1 1 * 1 1
inner trim panel - 1 1 * 9
window glass and regulator - 1 1 * 1 3
Drivebelts - 1 * 9 , 1*17
Driveplate
1.6 litre engine - 2C«17
Driveshafts
- 8*1 ef seq, REF»12
fault finding - REF»19
gaiter - 1 * 1 2 , 8»3
Drivetrain - 1 * 1 4
D r u m s - 9»9
E
Earth f a u l t ; 12*3
Electric s h o c k - 0*5
Electrical e q u i p m e n t - 1 «14, REF»11
Electrical s y s t e m fault f i n d i n g - 1 2 » 3 , REF»22
Electrolyte - 1 »9
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l unit (ECU)
ABS-9»16
multi-point injection system - 4B»8
single-point injection system - 4A»7
automatic transmission - 7B»5
E m i s s i o n c o n t r o l s y s t e m - 1 * 2 0 , 4C»2, REF»13
Engine a s s e m b l y / v a l v e t i m i n g holes
1.2 litre engine - 2A»3
Engine fault f i n d i n g - REF«15
Engine i m m o b i l i s e r s y s t e m - 1 2 * 1 9
Engine in-car repair
procedures
1.2 litre - 2A«1 ef seq
1.4 litre - 2B«1 ef seq
1.6 litre - 2C«1 ef seq
1.8 litre - 2D»1 ef seq
Engine m a n a g e m e n t s y s t e m
fault code check - 1 * 1 9
multi-point injection system - 4B»4
single-point injection system - 4A»5
Engine oil - 0»12, 0*17, 1»2, 1*7
Engine removal and overhaul procedures
- 2E«1 ef seq
Engine R P M sensor - 5B»7
Evaporative e m i s s i o n c o n t r o l s y s t e m - 1 »20, 4C»1, 4C»2
Exhaust and emission control systems - 4C«1 ef seq
Exhaust c a m s h a f t s p r o c k e t
1.2 litre engine - 2A»7
Exhaust e m i s s i o n s - 1 * 1 9 , 4C«1, 4C«2
Exhaust m a n i f o l d - 4C»3
Exhaust s p e c i a l i s t s - REF»3
Exhaust s y s t e m - 1 » 1 2 , 4C»4, REF»12, REF«13
F
Facia - 1 1 «20
switches - 1 2 * 1 6
Fan - 3»5
Fault c o d e c h e c k - 1 * 1 9
Fault f i n d i n g - REF«14 ef seq
automatic transmission - REF»19
braking system - REF»20
clutch - REF«18
cooling system - REF»17
driveshafts - REF»19
electrical system - 1 2 « 3 , REF»22
engine - REF»15
fuel and exhaust systems - REF»47
ignition system - 5B»3
manual transmission - REF»18
suspension and steering systems - REF«21
F o o t b r a k e - REF»10, REF«11
Fuel s y s t e m - REF»13
fault finding - REF«17
Filling - 11»3
Filter
air - 1 * 1 6
multi-point injection system - 4B»2
single-point injection system - 4A»2
fuel - 1 * 1 6
oil - 1 * 7
pollen - 1 * 1 1
Fire - 0*5
Fixed g u i d e pulley
1.6 litre engine - 2C»9
1.8 litre engine - 2D«7
Flap valve
single-point injection system - 4A»3
Index
Flywheel
1.2 and 1.8 litre engine - 2A*12
1.4 litre engine as 1.2 - 2B*12
1.6 litre e n g i n e - 2 0 1 7
Foglight - 1 2 * 6 , 12*10
Fuel f i l t e r - 1 * 1 6
Fuel g a u g e s e n d e r unit
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 1 0
single-point injection system - 4A*8
Fuel i n j e c t o r s
multi-point injection system - 4B*5
single-point injection system - 4A*5
Fuel p r e s s u r e r e g u l a t o r
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 7
single-point injection system - 4A*5
Fuel p u m p
multi-point injection system - 4B*10
single-point injection system - 4A*8
Fuel rail
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 5
Fuel system - multi-point
injection - 4B*1 et seq
Fuel system - single-point
injection - 4A*1 ef seq
Fuel t a n k - 4A*10
safety valve - 4 0 2
F u m e or gas i n t o x i c a t i o n - 0*5
Fuses - 1 2 * 4
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 9
single-point injection system - 4A*8
G
Gaiters
driveshaft - 1 * 1 2 , 8*3
steering gear - 1 0 * 1 1
Gashes in b o d y w o r k - 1 1 *2
G e a r c h a n g e lever a n d linkage - 7A*3
General repair p r o c e d u r e s - REF*7
Glossary of technical terms - REF*24 ef seq
Glovebox - 1 1 * 2 4
light - 1 2 * 9
Guide pulley
1.6 litre engine - 2 0 9
1.8 litre engine - 2D*7
H
H a n d b r a k e - 1 * 1 8 , 9*14, REF*10
Handle (door) - 1 1 - 1 1
Hazard w a r n i n g s w i t c h - 1 2 * 1 6
Headlight - 1 2 * 4 , 12*9
beam adjustment switch - 1 2 * 1 5
beam alignment - 1 2 * 1 2
washer nozzle - 1 2 * 1 8
washer system - 1 2 * 1 7
Heater - 3*7
blower motor - 3*8
blower motor resistor - 3*9
control illumination - 1 2 * 9
control panel - 3*10
matrix - 3*8
Heatshields - 4 C * 4
High-level s t o p - l i g h t bulb - 1 2 * 7 , 12*11
Hinges - 1 * 1 3
H o r n - 1 * 1 3 , 12*12
Hose a n d fluid leak - 1 * 1 1
Hoses and pipes
braking system - 1 * 1 2 , 9*3
cooling system - 3*2
REF.31
HT coil(s) - 5 B * 4
Hub b e a r i n g s - REF*12
front - 10*3
rear - 10*7
H y d r o f l u o r i c a c i d - 0*5
I
Idle a c t u a t o r
multi-point injection system (1,2 litre models) - 4 B * 7
Idle air c o n t r o l valve
multi-point injection system (1.6 and 1.8 litre models) - 4 B * 7
Idle c o n t r o l s t e p p e r m o t o r
single-point injection system - 4A*7
Ignition system - 5B*1 ef seq
fault finding - 5B*3
HT coil(s) - 5 B * 4
power module (1.8 litre models) - 5 B * 8
switch - 1 0 * 1 0
timing - 5 B * 6
Immobiliser system - 1 2 * 1 9
Indicator - 12*5, 12*9, 12*10
Inertia s w i t c h - 4A*7
Injectors
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 5
single-point injection system - 4A*5
Inlet air t e m p e r a t u r e r e g u l a t o r
single-point injection system - 4A*3
Inlet air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r
single-point injection system - 4A*7
Inlet m a n i f o l d
multi-point injection system - 4B*12
single-point injection system - 4A*10
Instruments - 1 * 1 4
illumination rheostat - 1 2 * 1 6
panel - 12*11
panel illumination - 1 2 * 9
Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 7
I n t e r m e d i a t e shaft - 8*6
J
J a c k i n g a n d v e h i c l e s u p p o r t - REF*5
J u m p s t a r t i n g - 0*7
K
K i c k - d o w n s w i t c h - 7B*4
K n o c k sensor - 5B*7
L
L a m b d a sensor - 4C*5
L e a k s - 0*9, 1*11
L i g h t s - 1*13
L o c a t i o n of TDC o n No 1 cylinder
1.4 litre engine - 2B*2
1.8 litre engine - 2D*3
L o c k s - 1*13
bonnet - 1 1 * 8
door - 1 1 * 1 1
steering column - 1 0 * 1 0
tailgate - 1 1 * 6
Loudspeakers -12*13
Lower arm - 1 0 * 6
L u b r i c a n t s a n d fluids - 0*17
L u g g a g e c o m p a r t m e n t light - 1 2 * 8
REF<32
Index
M
M a i n b e a r i n g s - 2E*19
running clearance check - 2E*20
M a i n shaft s p e e d s e n s o r s - 7 B * 5
M a i n t e n a n c e s c h e d u l e - 1 *3
M a n i f o l d a b s o l u t e p r e s s u r e (MAP) s e n s o r
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 7
Manifolds
exhaust - 4 0 3
inlet
multi-point injection system - 4B*12
single-point injection system - 4A*10
M a n u a l s t e e r i n g gear a s s e m b l y - 1 0 * 1 0
Manual transmission
- 2E*4, 7A*1 ef seq
fault finding - REF*18
oil - 0*17, 1 * 2 , 1 * 1 9
M a s t e r cylinder
brakes - 9*11
clutch - 6*3
M i r r o r - 1 1 * 1 3 , REF*10
switch - 1 2 * 1 5
M o t o r f a c t o r s - REF*3
MOT test checks - REF*10 ef seq
Mountings
1.2 litre engine - 2A*13
1.4 litre engine - 2B*12
1.6 litre engine - 2 0 1 8
1.8 litre engine - 2D*11
N
N u m b e r plate light - 1 2 * 7 , 12*11
o
Oil
engine - 0*12, 0*17, 1*2, 1*7
manual transmission - 0 * 1 7 , 1 * 2 , 1*19
Oil filter - 1 *7
Oil p r e s s u r e s w i t c h
1.2 litre engine - 2A*14
1.4 litre engine - 2 B * 1 3
1.6 litre engine - 2 0 2 1
1.8 litre engine - 2D*13
Oil p u m p a n d p i c k - u p t u b e
1.2 litre engine - 2A*13
1.4 litre engine - 2B*12
1.6 litre engine - 2 O 2 0
1.8 litre engine - 2D*13
Oil seals
auxiliary shaft (1.6 litre engine) - 2 0 1 2
camshaft
1.2 litre engine - 2A*8
1.4 litre engine - 2 B * 8
1.6 litre engine - 2 0 1 2
1.8 litre engine - 2D*9
crankshaft
1.2 litre engine - 2A*8
1.4 litre engine - 2 B * 8
1.6 litre engine - 2 0 1 3
1.8 litre engine - 2D*9
differential - 7A*7, 7 B * 6
Open-circuit - 1 2 * 3
O x y g e n (lambda) s e n s o r - 4 0 5
P
P a d s - 1 * 8 , 9*4
Pedals
brake - 9*12
P i s t o n s a n d c o n n e c t i n g r o d s - 2E*13
Plastic c o m p o n e n t s - 1 1 *3
P o i s o n o u s o r irritant s u b s t a n c e s - 0 5
Pollen filter - 1 »11
P o w e r m o d u l e (1.8 litre models) - 5 B * 8
Power steering - 1 0 * 1 1
fluid - 0 * 1 3 , 0*17
bleeding - 1 0 1 1
pump - 1 0 * 1 1
drivebelt - 1 * 1 0 , 1*17, 1*18
P r o p o r t i o n i n g valve (rear brakes) - 9*15
P u n c t u r e - 0*8
P u r g e valve - 4 0 2
R
R a d i a t o r - 3*3
flushing - 1 * 2 1
Radio - 1 2 - 1 4
aerial - 1 2 * 1 3
Rear light c l u s t e r - 1 2 * 1 0
bulbs - 1 2 * 6
Rear w i n d o w - 1 1 *20
Relays - 1 2 * 4
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 9
single-point injection system - 4 A * 8
Repair p r o c e d u r e s - REF*7
R e s p r a y i n g - 1 1 »3
Reversing light s w i t c h - 7A»7
Road test - 1 * 1 4
Roadside repairs - 0*6 ef seq
Routine maintenance & sen/icing - 1 »1 ef seq
bodywork and underframe - 1 1 »1
upholstery and carpets - 1 1 »2
R P M s e n s o r - 5B»7
Rust holes in b o d y w o r k - 1 1 * 2
s
Safety c o n t r o l unit ( a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n ) - 7B«5
Safety first! - 0*5, 0»13
S c a l d i n g - 0»5
S c r a t c h e s in b o d y w o r k - 1 1 »2
Seat belt c o m p o n e n t s - 1 1 * 1 6
Seats - 1 1 * 1 6
Selector (automatic transmission)
cable - 7 B * 3
lever position sensor - 7 B * 4
Servo unit - 9*13, 9*14
S h o c k a b s o r b e r - 1 * 1 3 , 10*7, REF*11, REF*12
S h o e s - 1 * 2 0 , 9*5
Short-circuit - 1 2 * 3
Sidelight - 1 2 * 5
Slave cylinder (clutch) - 6*3
S p a r e p a r t s - REF*3
Spark plug - 1 * 1 4
S p e e d o m e t e r s e n d e r unit - 1 2 * 1 4
sensor - 4A*8, 7B*5
S p r i n g s - REF*12
Starter m o t o r - 5A*6, 5A*7
Starting and charging systems - 5A*1 ef seq
S t a r t i n g s y s t e m - 5A*6
Index
S t a r t - u p after o v e r h a u l a n d r e a s s e m b l y - 2E*21
Steering - 1 * 1 3 , 1*14, REF*11, REF*12
angles - 1 0 * 1 3
column - 10*9, REF*10
combination switch - 1 2 * 1 4
lock and barrel - 1 0 * 1 0
fault finding - REF*21
rubber gaiters - 1 0 * 1 1
wheel - 1 0 * 8 , REF*10
S t o p light
bulb - 1 2 * 7 , 12*11
switch - 9*15
Striker plate (tailgate) - 1 1 * 7
Strut
suspension - 1 * 1 3 , 10*4
tailgate - 1 1 * 6
Subframe - 1 0 * 7
Sump
1.2 litre engine - 2A*13
1.4 litre engine - 2B*12
1.6 litre engine - 2C*19
1.8 litre engine - 2D*12
Sunroof - 1 1 * 1 9
Suspension and steering systems - 1 * 1 3 , 1*14, 10*1 etseq,
REF*11, REF*12
fault finding - REF*21
Switches -12*14
courtesy light - 1 2 * 1 5
facia - 1 2 * 1 6
hazard warning - 1 2 * 1 6
headlamp beam adjustment - 1 2 * 1 5
ignition - 1 0 * 1 0
inertia (injection systems) - 4A*7
instrument illumination rheostat - 1 2 * 1 6
kick-down - 7B*4
mirror - 1 2 * 1 5
oil pressure
1.2 litre engine - 2A*14
1.4 litre engine - 2B*13
1.6 litre engine - 2 0 2 1
1.8 litre engine - 2D*13
reversing light - 7A*7
steering column - 1 2 * 1 4
stop-light - 9*15
window - 1 2 * 1 6
T
Tailgate - 1 1 *5
washer system - 1 2 * 1 7
Tappets
1.2 litre engine - 2A*9
1.4 and 1.8 l i t r e - 2 E * 1 1
T D C o n N o 1 cylinder
1.4 litre engine - 2 B * 2
1.6 litre engine - 2 C * 3
1.8 litre engine - 2D*3
Technical terms - REF*24 ef seq
T e m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l valve
single-point injection system - 4A*3
T e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r - 3*5
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 7 , 4 B * 8
single-point injection system - 4A*7
T h e r m o s t a t - 3*4
Throttle body assembly
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 4
single-point injection system - 4A*5
Throttle potentiometer
multi-point injection system - 4 B * 7
single-point injection system - 4A*7
Timing - 5B*6
T i m i n g belt - 1 *20
1.2 litre engine - 2 A * 4
1.4 litre engine - 2 B * 3
1.6 litre engine - 2 C * 4
1.8 litre engine - 2D*4
T i m i n g belt s p r o c k e t s a n d t e n s i o n e r
1.2 litre engine - 2A*7
1.6 litre engine - 2 C * 7
1.4 litre engine - 2 B * 6
1.8 litre engine - 2D*6
Toe setting - 1 0 * 1 3
Tools and working facilities - REF*8 ef sec;
T o w i n g - 0*9
Track-rod end -10*13
Trailing a r m - 1 0 * 8
T r i m panel - 1 1 * 9
Tyres - REF*13
condition - 0*14
pressures - 0*14, 0*17
specialists - REF*3
u
Underbody protection - 1 * 1 3
U n d e r b o n n e t c h e c k p o i n t s - 0*10, 0*11
Underframe - 1 1 * 1
U n l e a d e d p e t r o l - 4A* 12
U p h o l s t e r y - 1 1 *2
V
V a c u u m servo unit - 9*13, 9*14
Valve t i m i n g h o l e s
1.2 litre engine - 2A*3
Valves-2E*12
Vehicle i d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r s - REF*4, REF*11
Vehicle s p e e d (speedometer) s e n s o r - 4A*8, 7 B * 5
Vehicle s u p p o r t - REF*5
Ventilation c o m p o n e n t s - 3*7
w
W e i g h t s - REF*1
Working facilities - REF*8 ef seq
Washer fluid - 0*16
Washer system - 1 2 * 1 7
Weekly checks - 0*10 ef seq
W h e e l s - REF* 13
alignment and steering angles - 1 0 * 1 3
bearings - REF*12
changing - 0*8
toe setting - 1 0 * 1 3
W h e e l c y l i n d e r s - 9*11
W h e e l s e n s o r s - 9*16
W i n d o w s - 1 1 * 1 3 , 11*20
switches - 1 2 * 1 6
W i n d s c r e e n - 1 1 * 2 0 , REF*10
washer system - 1 2 * 1 7
wiper motor - 1 2 * 1 8
Wiper arm - 1 2 * 1 9
W i p e r blades - 0*16
W i p e r m o t o r - 1 2 * 1 7 , 12*18
Wiring diagrams -12*23 ef seq
REF-33